Dell Dimension 5100 Manuels
Dell Dimension 5100 620 Manuels
-> Accéder au site Dell
-> Accéder aux Codes Promo et Bons de réduction Dell
-> Voir d'autres manuels Dell
Revenir à l'accueil
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->
Dimension 5100
 |
Ce document est disponible en anglais uniquement |
Autres langues
Autres langues
-> Commander sur Dell.com, Cliquez ici
Autres manuels :
Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1501-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Laser-Printer-5100cn-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-Mini-tour-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1300-B120-B130-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1955-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-6400-E1505-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-Tout-en-un-Dell-A920-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-M1710-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-DL2000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-8600-Guide-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-5160-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Gen-2-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-300m-Guide-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Inspiron-640M-E1405-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-8500-Guide-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-M2010-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Inspiron-3000-Series-Service-Manual
Dell-Inspiron-3500-Portable-Computer-Service-Manual
Dell-Inspiron-5423-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-poweredge-r520-technical-guide
Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sans-Fil-Dell-TP713-Manuel-d-utilisateur
Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Manuel
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Adamo-XPS
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietairexps-13-l321x_owner_manual_fr-fr
Dell-xps-13-l321x_setup_guide_fr-fr.pdf-Manuel
Dell-Storage-Center-5.5-Guide-de-configuration-systeme
Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-ALIENWARE
Dell-Vostro-410-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M14x-MOBILE
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE
Dell-Configuration-de-votre-ecran-de-televiseur-LCD-Dell-W2607C-26-pouces
Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6-E-et-CERC-6-i-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300-Manuel
Dell-2145cn-Imprimante-multifonction-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Systems-Hardware-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook
Dell-Vostro-270-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-Controleurs-RAID-Dell-PowerEdge-PERC-H310-H710-H710P-et-H810-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-3333dn-et-3335dn-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance-Powered-by-Symantec-Backup-Exec-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-XPS-015-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-REFERENCE
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-depannage
Dell-Commutateur-de-consoles-2161DS-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-d-OSCAR-et-du-materiel
Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000XD-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-OptiPlex-755-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3200i-et-MD3220i-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Latitude-E5400-et-E5500-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Set-Up-Your-Computer
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Getting-Started-With-Your-System
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-SUSE-Linux-Enterprise-Server-10-Instructions-d-installation
Dell-Utilitaires-de-gestion-du-Dell-OpenManage-Baseboard-Management-Controller-Version%204.6-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Guide-d-installation-de-la-version-7.1
Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR4000-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge%20Red-Hat-Enterprise-Linux-6-x86_64-x86-Instructions-d-installation-et-informations-importantes
Dell-Integrated-Dell-Remote-Access-Controller-7-iDRAC7-Version-1.20.20-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Management-Plug-In-pour-VMware-vCenter-Version-1.5-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Projecteur-7700FullHD-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1420X-1430X-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerEdge-Express-SSD-PCIe-Flash-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Update-Packages-DUP-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-R320-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R510-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-M4400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-SCSI-Dell-EqualLogic-PS-Series-a-clusters-de-basculement-Microsoft-Windows-Server-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage-du-materie
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Guide-de-mise-en-route-du-systeme
Dell-Moniteur-a-ecran-plat-Dell-U2713HM-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2213
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2213
Dell-Systems-Service-and-Diagnostics-Tools-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation-rapide
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2740L-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION
Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-M915-M910-M820-M710HD-M710-M620-M610x-M610-M520-et-M420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation
Dell-Inspiron-15R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3200-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-S110-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4-1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Vostro-470-Manuel-du-proprietaire
/Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerVault-NX3500-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-Latitude-E6420-XFR-Guide-technique
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-S2240M-S2340M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel
Dell-Vostro-470-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-M110-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Upgrading-to-BackupExec-2012-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance
Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerConnect-5500-Series-CLI-Reference-Guide
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1900-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-and-R720xd-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-14R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Guide-de-l-Utilisateur-de-l-Ecran-Large-Dell-IN1940MW
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2440L-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Alienware-X51-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-MANUAL
Dell-Emplacement-des-cavaliers-de-la-carte-systeme-des-systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R310-Mise-a-jour-des-informations
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-6950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Alienware-M17x-R4-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-PowerEdge-6-Gb-s-et-Internal-Tape-Adapter-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Mise-a-jour-des-informations
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T610-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
/Dell-PowerEdge-R905-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-2350d-et-Dell-2350dn
Dell-XPS-430-Guide-de-reference-rapide
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-H700-et-H800-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Lifecycle-Controller-2-Version-1.00.00-User-s-Guide
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manue
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-V525w
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Adaptateurs-Brocade-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-reference
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-NX3600-NX3610-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-OptiPlex-360-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-PowerEdge-R810-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Guide-d-installation-des-systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Modular-Disk-3000
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-2230d-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6105-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-a-jet-d-encre-Dell-J740-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMANTE-LASER-COULEUR
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-T3400
Dell-1235cn-Imprimante-Multifonction-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-Vostro-1310-1510-1710-et-2510-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-APC-Smart-UPS-750VA-1000VA-1500VA-100-120-230-V-CA-2U-Montage-en-baie-Onduleur
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-Modele-TL24iSCSIxSAS%201Gb-iSCSI-a-SAS
Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-1130-et-Dell-1130n
Dell-Precision-M6400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-M770mm-Color-Monitor-Quick-Set-up
Dell-Carte-de-gestion-reseau-AP9617-AP9618-AP9619-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-demarrage-rapide
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1410X-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Imprimante-couleur-Dell-1350cnw
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050-Manuel
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-620
Dell-3D-VISION-MANUEL-D-UTILISATION
Dell-Inspiron-600m-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R805-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R900-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2970-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6145-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Francais-manuel
Dell-Inspiron-660-manuels
Dell-Serveur-de-sauvegarde-sur-disque-Dell-PowerVault-DL-optimise-par-CommVault-Simpana-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-manuel
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-de-Dell-PowerEdge-M905-M805-M600-et-M605
Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-1100-B110-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Station-de-travail-mobile-Dell-Precision-M4700-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-1230c-Imprimante-laser-couleur-mode-d-emploi-Manuel
Dell-Client-Management-Manuel
Dell-Studio-XPS-Setup-Guide-Manue
Dell-Adaptateur-hote-Dell-PCIe-SCSI-Ultra320-monocanal-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SETUP-GUIDE-Manuel
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION-Manuel
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Inspiron-M4040-14-N4050-Manuel
Dell-Guide-de-l-administrateur-de-Dell-PowerVault-705N-Manuel
Dell-Vostro-420-220-220s-Guide-de-Configuration-et-de-Reference-Rapide-Manuel
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Series-Guide-de-deploiement-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-l-administrateur-Manuel
Dell-Latitude-D430-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel
Dell-Studio-XPS-Guide-de-configuration-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes%20-Dell%20PowerEdge-T110-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower
Dell-Inspiron-531-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-Francais
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Projecteur-Dell-1201MP-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-C521-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T605-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Mobile-Jamz
Dell-Inspiron-530-Series-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuels
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1.1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Storage-Arrays-Manuels
Dell™ Ekran Yöneticisi Kullanıcı Kılavuzu
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Guide-de-mise-en-route
DELL-POWERVAULT-MD1200-et-MD1220-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK
Console-de-gestion-multi-onduleurs-Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration
DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK-INSIDE-THE-OPTIPLEX-580
Dell-Inspiron-1720-manuels
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-E5430-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell™ S2240L/S2340L Monitör Kullanıcı Kılavuzu
Dell PowerEdge Sistemleri İçin Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Önemli Bilgiler Kılavuzu
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-S2240L-S2340L
Dell™ S320/S320wi Projektör Kullanım Kılavuzu
Dell-%20Vostro-270-Manuels
Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Francais
Dell-Inspiron-9200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Vostro-2520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T710-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T5600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Dimension-3000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R210-Technical-Guide
Dell-Inspiron-Manuels
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Vostro-1700
Dell-Clavier-sans-fil-et-souris-Dell-KM713-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur
Dell-Systeme-de-navigation-GPS-Dell-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur
Dell-Logiciel-de-gestion-de-l-onduleur-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration
Dell-Demarrage-rapide-du-moniteur-couleur-M990
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-370
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2800-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-du-systeme-Dell-OptiPlex-SX280
Dell-Vostro-1440-1450-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Photo-Printer-540-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-7-Francais-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Venue-Pro-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Imprimante-laser-personnelle-Dell-P1500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-C5125-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Latitude-D630-Manuels
Dell-Vostro-400-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-compact-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault%20NX3200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1200-et-2200-Manuel-de%20l-utilisateur
Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-8600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-Baie-de-stockage-MD1120-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-E521-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3360-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-One-2710-manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-1150-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-E5530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-660-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Acceder-au-site-Dell
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG-Francais
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-Tout-en-un-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3560-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T110-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-server-poweredge-m710-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-5420-E5420-E5420m-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Latitude-E6320-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Francais
Dell-server-poweredge-r610-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-t710-technical-guide-book_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-m1000e-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre-Manuel-et-Garantie
Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Slim-Tower
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1-1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel
Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire
AlienwareArea-51Area-51ALX
Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/AlienwareAurora-R3
AlienwareAurora-R4
lienwareAuroraAuroraALXAurora-R2
Chassis-RAID-Dell-PowerVault-MD3000i-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Baie-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Boîtier-Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-9200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-E520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-Imprimante-laser-multifonction-Dell-1600n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-13z-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-700m-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-9300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire
http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire.htm
Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Liste-des-manuels-et-de-la-documentation-Dell
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-francais
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-du-Dell-XPS-420
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-XPS-M1330
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Inspiron-1721
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-964-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer%20942-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T7600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Streak-7-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R210-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire%20-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel
Dell-Vostro-3750-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-V131-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel-du-proprietair
Dell-moniteur-D1920-Manuel-du-proprietaire
DellDimension1100Series
Imprimante-Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-922-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-S2500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Imprimante-personnelle-Dell-AIO-A960-Manuel-du-proprietaire
alienwareX51
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110
Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320
Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG
Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif)
Acceder-au-site-Dell..> 24-Oct-2012 06:36 1.0M
Adaptateurs-Brocade-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:05 3.6M
AlienwareArea-51Area..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42 2.7M
AlienwareAurora-R3.htm 18-Oct-2012 16:54 3.2M
AlienwareAurora-R4.htm 18-Oct-2012 16:48 2.9M
AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51 3.1M
Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49 3.0M
Code-Promo-Dell.htm 04-Feb-2013 09:17 1.0M
Console-de-gestion-m..> 26-Oct-2012 14:51 3.3M
DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TEC..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32 2.9M
DELL-POWERVAULT-MD12..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50 3.3M
DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 18-Oct-2012 17:06 12M
Dellâ„¢ Logiciel-de..> 25-Oct-2012 12:03 2.8M
Dell-3D-VISION-MANUE..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39 1.8M
Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15 3.0M
Dell-1230c-Imprimant..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37 2.6M
Dell-1235cn-Impriman..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 3.0M
Dell-1250c-Color-Pri..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12 3.0M
Dell-1815dn-Manuel ..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09 3.5M
Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMAN..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05 3.0M
Dell-2145cn-Impriman..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55 3.6M
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 01-Nov-2012 19:00 2.3M
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28 3.5M
Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51 2.2M
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39 2.7M
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 2.0M
Dell-APC-Smart-UPS-A..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41 2.6M
Dell-Adaptateur-hote..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.3M
Dell-Adaptateurs-Bro..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22 2.8M
Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 07:30 3.9M
Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39 3.1M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44 1.9M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44 1.9M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:45 1.8M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44 1.9M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43 2.2M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43 2.3M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:49 2.3M
Dell-Alienware-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30 3.1M
Dell-Alienware-X51-O..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28 3.4M
Dell-Axim-X3-Guide-d..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38 3.4M
Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08 3.0M
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12 4.7M
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53 3.2M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 27-Nov-2012 07:18 2.5M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42 2.9M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52 3.2M
Dell-B1160-Dell-B116..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11 2.9M
Dell-B1260dn-Mode-d-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11 2.7M
Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41 2.7M
Dell-Bandotheques-De..> 05-Nov-2012 09:03 2.1M
Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42 2.7M
Dell-Boîtier-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07 2.7M
Dell-Boitiers-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14 1.4M
Dell-Carte-de-Gestio..> 06-Nov-2012 18:45 2.0M
Dell-Carte-de-gestio..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05 4.0M
Dell-Cartes-controle..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 2.0M
Dell-Cartes-d-extens..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01 2.6M
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38 2.6M
Dell-Clavier-sans-fi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02 3.0M
Dell-Client-Manageme..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37 2.5M
Dell-Commutateur-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19 2.3M
Dell-Configuration-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53 4.1M
Dell-Console-de-gest..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40 3.9M
Dell-Controleurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14 2.8M
Dell-Controleurs-RAI..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11 3.4M
Dell-DX-Object-Stora..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04 2.8M
Dell-Demarrage-rapid..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04 2.4M
Dell-Deploiement-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15 2.6M
Dell-Dimension-1000-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:57 2.9M
Dell-Dimension-1100-..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08 3.6M
Dell-Dimension-3000-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30 3.5M
Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 906K
Dell-Dimension-3100C..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42 2.7M
Dell-Dimension-9150-..> 27-Nov-2012 07:07 2.3M
Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:54 3.2M
Dell-Dimension-9200C..> 18-Nov-2012 21:03 3.1M
Dell-Dimension-C521-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41 1.9M
Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50 3.0M
Dell-Dimension-E521-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12 2.9M
Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 12-Nov-2012 16:54 3.8M
Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 03-Nov-2012 18:01 5.1M
Dell-Dimension-XPS-G..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03 3.1M
Dell-Dimension-XPS-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39 3.0M
Dell-Dimension-serie..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07 1.9M
Dell-E-Legacy-Extend..> 14-Nov-2012 21:40 2.8M
Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.1M
Dell-Ekran-Yönetici..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49 3.4M
Dell-Emplacement-des..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29 3.1M
Dell-EqualLogic-Stor..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47 2.1M
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10 2.1M
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 08:45 3.0M
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 02-Nov-2012 11:24 1.7M
Dell-Guide-d-install..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58 2.8M
Dell-Guide-d-install..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03 2.9M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 2.4M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 2.5M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12 3.0M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05 3.4M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03 4.1M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05 3.6M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38 4.1M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58 4.1M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 07:29 4.2M
Dell-Guide-de-config..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13 3.0M
Dell-Guide-de-demarr..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-l-Util..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27 3.5M
Dell-Guide-de-l-admi..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39 2.2M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39 2.1M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21 3.2M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 18:31 4.2M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31 3.5M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 09:06 1.9M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07 3.1M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45 2.0M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 3.0M
Dell-Guide-de-soluti..> 05-Nov-2012 17:29 3.8M
Dell-Guide-technique..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00 3.2M
Dell-Guide d-install..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43 2.1M
Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31 2.9M
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GU..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.2M
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SE..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.3M
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09 3.0M
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:16 2.4M
Dell-INSPIRON-Setup-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32 2.3M
Dell-Imprimante-coul..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38 1.9M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41 2.7M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59 2.2M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44 2.9M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32 1.9M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11 3.4M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44 2.8M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36 2.5M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07 2.1M
Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 13-Nov-2012 08:10 3.0M
Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44 2.7M
Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07 2.4M
Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07 2.4M
Dell-Inspiron-13z-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09 3.3M
Dell-Inspiron-14R-M4..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32 2.4M
Dell-Inspiron-14R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 2.2M
Dell-Inspiron-14z-N4..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-15R-Ma..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43 3.5M
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:17 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56 3.3M
Dell-Inspiron-300m-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-530-Se..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41 1.9M
Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01 3.7M
Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:00 3.5M
Dell-Inspiron-531-Ma..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57 2.6M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40 3.3M
Dell-Inspiron-640M-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:13 4.5M
Dell-Inspiron-660-Ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15 2.3M
Dell-Inspiron-660-ma..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42 2.5M
Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1000-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:15 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33 2.2M
Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15 2.6M
Dell-Inspiron-1200-e..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48 2.4M
Dell-Inspiron-1300-B..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-1420-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01 5.4M
Dell-Inspiron-1501-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:06 5.1M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 1.5M
Dell-Inspiron-1720-m..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59 2.3M
Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-3000-S..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-3500-P..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 18-Oct-2012 17:05 4.4M
Dell-Inspiron-5160-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.4M
Dell-Inspiron-5423-O..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-6000-M..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-6400-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:20 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-8500-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:14 4.1M
Dell-Inspiron-8600-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-8600-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:11 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-9100-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:13 2.6M
Dell-Inspiron-9200-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07 3.4M
Dell-Inspiron-9300-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12 3.3M
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-Guide-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:08 1.3M
Dell-Inspiron-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31 3.3M
Dell-Inspiron-One-20..> 02-Nov-2012 17:23 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16 3.3M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08 3.7M
Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Ge..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.2M
Dell-Integrated-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09 3.1M
Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12 3.2M
Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32 1.6M
Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 1.0M
Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02 3.8M
Dell-Laser-Printer-5..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18 1.9M
Dell-Latitude-5420-E..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36 4.4M
Dell-Latitude-D531-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36 4.7M
Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46 2.9M
Dell-Latitude-D830-G..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59 2.2M
Dell-Latitude-E4300-..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46 2.3M
Dell-Latitude-E5400-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02 4.7M
Dell-Latitude-E5430-..> 26-Oct-2012 17:29 1.6M
Dell-Latitude-E5530-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15 2.4M
Dell-Latitude-E6320-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 3.0M
Dell-Latitude-E6500-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02 3.3M
Dell-Latitude-E6520-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 2.0M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Kul..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23 3.8M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38 2.6M
Dell-Latitude-XT2-XF..> 05-Nov-2012 14:54 3.7M
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42 2.7M
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ow..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28 1.7M
Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20 3.5M
Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01 3.5M
Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 27-Nov-2012 07:26 2.9M
Dell-M770mm-Color-Mo..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37 2.1M
Dell-M5200-Carte-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:58 1.6M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51 3.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 27-Nov-2012 07:20 2.6M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51 2.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41 2.4M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33 2.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58 2.4M
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12 3.1M
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:03 4.1M
Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORD..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51 2.3M
Dell-Management-Plug..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09 2.5M
Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33 2.4M
Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32 2.5M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38 1.9M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 17:10 3.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07 2.6M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:04 4.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02 3.9M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04 2.8M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05 2.9M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59 2.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39 1.7M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 14-Nov-2012 12:07 3.8M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35 2.2M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28 1.8M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:37 2.5M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13 2.9M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 01-Nov-2012 19:14 2.6M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 24-Oct-2012 07:36 2.2M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46 2.9M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07 3.1M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31 3.3M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04 4.6M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55 3.3M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44 2.8M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02 2.2M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59 3.7M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02 4.9M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40 3.5M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22 3.0M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55 3.2M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01 3.7M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26 2.6M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01 3.6M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46 2.2M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40 1.9M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33 2.1M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05 3.4M
Dell-Media-Center-Gu..> 14-Nov-2012 22:11 1.6M
Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:46 2.9M
Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 02-Nov-2012 16:35 2.9M
Dell-Mobile-Jamz.htm 29-Oct-2012 07:41 1.6M
Dell-Module-de-venti..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27 2.0M
Dell-Modules-optique..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 1.9M
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07 3.2M
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27 3.6M
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09 3.1M
Dell-Moniteur-a-ecra..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06 3.2M
Dell-Multifunktionsp..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.4M
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 1.9M
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47 2.7M
Dell-Onduleur-en-Bai..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00 2.7M
Dell-OpenManage-Remo..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12 4.9M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 18:07 3.3M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38 3.7M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43 3.4M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10 3.3M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20 3.7M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42 3.7M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12 5.0M
Dell-OptiPlex-360-Gu..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23 3.4M
Dell-OptiPlex-755-Gu..> 03-Nov-2012 21:12 5.7M
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18 1.7M
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48 2.4M
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-T..> 24-Oct-2012 07:54 2.3M
Dell-Ordinateurs-por..> 14-Nov-2012 21:02 4.8M
Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42 2.3M
Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46 2.8M
Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31 2.0M
Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31 3.8M
Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53 4.1M
Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sa..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58 2.6M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:48 2.9M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10 3.6M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35 2.3M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45 2.8M
Dell-Photo-All-in-On..> 14-Nov-2012 12:06 4.0M
Dell-Photo-Printer-5..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06 2.6M
Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46 2.8M
Dell-Point-d-acces-D..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12 2.5M
Dell-Points-d-acces-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26 2.0M
Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22 3.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-2900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-2950-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05 4.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 29-Oct-2012 07:36 3.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-C5125..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46 2.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-C6220..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55 3.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 18:23 2.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29 2.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50 3.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-Expan..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02 3.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-Expre..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11 1.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-M1000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42 3.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-R210-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-R310-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 1.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-R410-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:09 3.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R415-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01 1.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-R420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29 2.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39 3.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11 3.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31 3.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:33 2.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-R810-..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19 2.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 2.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-R905-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32 2.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-R910-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40 2.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44 3.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-Siste..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44 1.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-Syste..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32 2.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-T110-..> 14-Nov-2012 21:04 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-T300-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-T310-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-T320-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19 2.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-T620-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04 2.8M
Dell-PowerQuest-Data..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15 2.6M
Dell-PowerVault-Baie..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12 3.0M
Dell-PowerVault-DL-B..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12 2.6M
Dell-PowerVault-DL20..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.9M
Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47 2.0M
Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41 2.6M
Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 11:00 2.7M
Dell-PowerVault-Encr..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41 2.5M
Dell-PowerVault-MD-S..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01 1.7M
Dell-PowerVault-MD11..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 2.0M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:08 1.7M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.0M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06 1.8M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45 2.8M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07 3.4M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34 2.2M
Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48 2.8M
Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48 2.4M
Dell-PowerVault-NX20..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 2.0M
Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56 3.2M
Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58 2.6M
Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21 1.7M
Dell-PowerVault NX32..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48 2.7M
Dell-Precision-M4400..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05 1.5M
Dell-Precision-M6400..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37 2.1M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46 3.3M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28 2.6M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 2.1M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10 2.0M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09 3.2M
Dell-Projecteur-7700..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09 2.2M
Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38 2.0M
Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10 1.8M
Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 1.8M
Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45 2.9M
Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02 1.7M
Dell-S2240L-S2340L-M..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44 1.5M
Dell-S2440L-Monitor-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31 3.0M
Dell-SAS-RAID-Storag..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59 2.2M
Dell-Sansa-Clip-MP3-..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15 3.0M
Dell-Server-Deployme..> 05-Nov-2012 14:56 3.7M
Dell-Server-PRO-Mana..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 2.0M
Dell-Serveur-de-sauv..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42 1.9M
Dell-Set-Up-Your-Com..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04 4.6M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59 3.2M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 1.9M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 1.9M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15 2.6M
Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21 3.2M
Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29 2.7M
Dell-Station-de-trav..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36 2.3M
Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 11:43 3.7M
Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.7M
Dell-Streak-7-Franca..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06 2.3M
Dell-Streak-7-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13 2.9M
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 18-Oct-2012 16:40 2.7M
Dell-Studio-GUIDE-DE..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01 5.5M
Dell-Studio-One-GUID..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14 1.5M
Dell-Studio-XPS-1640..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40 2.7M
Dell-Studio-XPS-8100..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-Studio-XPS-GUID..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40 2.3M
Dell-Studio-XPS-Guid..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41 2.9M
Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.4M
Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09 1.3M
Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08 3.6M
Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 2.1M
Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07 3.4M
Dell-Systeme-de-navi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40 3.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39 2.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11 3.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33 1.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19 3.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 07:42 3.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 1.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29 3.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05 4.3M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33 3.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13 3.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:00 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37 3.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05 4.3M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 1.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58 3.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40 3.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06 3.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58 4.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47 2.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10 3.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37 2.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02 2.7M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 11:45 2.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41 2.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08 3.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10 2.3M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44 3.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:42 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41 2.7M
Dell-Systemes -Dell ..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37 3.2M
Dell-Systems-Service..> 03-Nov-2012 11:08 3.1M
Dell-TSi-500-TSi-400..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15 1.0M
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 1.2M
Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30 2.0M
Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30 2.0M
Dell-Update-Packages..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 1.9M
Dell-Upgrading-to-Ba..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21 1.4M
Dell-Utilitaires-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06 3.8M
Dell-Venue-Pro-Manue..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06 2.4M
Dell-Vizioncore-vCon..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 2.4M
Dell-Vizioncore-vRan..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01 2.6M
Dell-Vizioncore-vRep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38 2.4M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 2.4M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19 2.6M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02 2.7M
Dell- Vostro-270-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46 2.8M
Dell-Vostro-270-Owne..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56 2.8M
Dell-Vostro-360-Prop..> 19-Oct-2012 07:42 1.7M
Dell-Vostro-400-Manu..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47 2.3M
Dell-Vostro-410-Guid..> 12-Nov-2012 17:26 2.4M
Dell-Vostro-420-220-..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40 2.0M
Dell-Vostro-470-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07 3.5M
Dell-Vostro-470-Owne..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 1.7M
Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14 1.6M
Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 2.6M
Dell-Vostro-1440-145..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05 2.5M
Dell-Vostro-1540-155..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44 2.2M
Dell-Vostro-2520-Man..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09 2.8M
Dell-Vostro-3360-Man..> 27-Nov-2012 09:10 2.6M
Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27 1.9M
Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-3560-Man..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37 1.9M
Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58 3.4M
Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59 3.4M
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34 2.2M
Dell-XPS-13-Arabe-Ma..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08 1.5M
Dell-XPS-13-Chinois-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08 1.6M
Dell-XPS-13-Kullanı..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09 1.4M
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22 2.9M
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59 1.9M
Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30 3.0M
Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 17:36 3.1M
Dell-XPS-410-Anglais..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25 3.4M
Dell-XPS-420-francai..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25 3.8M
Dell-XPS-430-Guide-d..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08 2.4M
Dell-XPS-430-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:24 1.8M
Dell-XPS-600-Manuel-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11 3.3M
Dell-XPS-600-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:29 2.1M
Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49 3.0M
Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Man..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18 2.5M
Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36 2.7M
Dell-XPS-GUIDE-DE-CO..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-XPS-L412z-Manue..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38 2.0M
Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32 2.7M
Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03 4.4M
Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 09:56 3.4M
Dell-XPS-M2010-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16 3.7M
Dell-XPS-One-2710-ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14 2.8M
Dell-XPS-One-GUIDE-D..> 05-Nov-2012 07:37 2.2M
Dell-XPS 15-Manuel-d..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15 2.4M
Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43 2.7M
Dell-poweredge-r210-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41 2.5M
Dell-poweredge-r520-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58 2.7M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56 2.9M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40 2.5M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37 1.9M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40 2.6M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39 2.4M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39 2.3M
Dell-xps-13-l321x_se..> 12-Nov-2012 17:00 1.9M
DellDimension1100Ser..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59 3.4M
IOGEAR-Guide-d-insta..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58 2.3M
Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39 2.6M
Imprimante-laser-de-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53 3.2M
Imprimante-personnel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:57 3.4M
Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 19-Nov-2012 07:12 92K
Planification-du-dep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57 3.1M
Projecteur-Dell-1201..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40 2.3M
Systemes-Dell-PowerE..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29 2.8M
alienwareX51.htm 18-Oct-2012 16:37 2.5M
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1130n_User's%20Guide_en-us.pdf
ftp://ftp.dell.com/Manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_cloud_products/poweredge-c8000_owner's%20manual3_en-us.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-2145cn_User's%20Guide_da-dk.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200i_Setup%20Guide_cs-cz.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200_Setup%20Guide_de-de.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3220i_Setup%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1815dn_User's%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-dp500_owner's%20manual3_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/Manuals/Common/inspiron-5100_setup%20guide_fr-fr.pdf
http://support.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/Vos3360/fr/OM/om_fr.pdf
http://support.euro.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/Alw_dt_Area_51/en/sm/sm_en.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_alienware_laptops/alienware-m11x_Reference%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_alienware_laptops/alienware-m18x_user's%20guide_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_rack_infrastructure/dell-line-interactive-tower-ups-500t_User's%20Guide9_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_poweredge/poweredge-2800_User's%20Guide12_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3220i_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_equallogic/dell-dx6000_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_rack_infrastructure/dell-line-interactive-tower-ups-500t_User's%20Guide10_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_precision_mobile/precision-m4700_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200_Setup%20Guide_es-mx.pdf
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Before You Begin
Removing the Computer Cover
About Your Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Computer
Advanced Troubleshooting
Removing and Installing Parts
Replacing the Computer Cover
Specifications
Technical Overview
System Setup
Notes, Notices, and Cautions
If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dimension are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any
proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Model DCSM
October 2005 Rev. A01
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.Back to Contents Page
About Your Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Computer
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Front View of the Computer
Back View of the Computer
Front View of the Computer
1 cover latch
release
Use this latch to remove the computer cover.
2 location of
Service Tag
Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you access the Dell
Support website or call technical support.
3 CD or DVD
eject button
Press to eject a disk from the CD or DVD drive.
4 CD or DVD
activity light
The drive light is on when the computer reads data from the CD or DVD
drive.
5 FlexBay Can contain an optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader. For more information about the Media Card Reader, see your computer Owner's Manual.
6 microphone
connector
Use the microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone
for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program.
On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the
card.
7 headphone
connector
Use the headphone connector to attach headphones.
8 diagnostic
lights (4)
Use the lights to help you troubleshoot a computer problem based on the
diagnostic code. For more information, see "Diagnostic Lights."
9 hard-drive
activity light
The hard drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device
such as a CD player is operating.
10 power
button,
power light
Press the power button to turn on the computer. The power light in the
center of this button indicates the power state. See "Specifications" for more information.
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off
the computer. Instead, perform an operating system shutdown.
11 USB 2.0
connectors
(2)
Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally,
such as joysticks or cameras. It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as
printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB devices, which may
not function properly if attached to the front connectors.
12 vents For adequate cooling, do not block any of the vents.
NOTICE: Ensure that there is a minimum of two inches of space between
all vents and any object near these vents.Back View of the Computer
NOTICE: Do not lift or carry the computer by the vents to avoid damage
to the computer.
NOTICE: Keep the vent area clean and dust-free to ensure that the
computer is adequately ventilated. Use only a dry cloth to clean the vent
area to avoid water damage to the computer.
1 voltage selection switch (may not be available on all computers) See the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide for more information.
2 power connector Insert the power cable.
3 back panel connectors Plug USB, audio, and other devices into the appropriate connector.
4 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI and PCI Express cards.
1 link integrity light l Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps
network and the computer.
l Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps
network and the computer.
l Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection
to the network.
2 network adapter
connector
To attach your computer to a network or broadband device,
connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack or
your network or broadband device. Connect the other end of the
network cable to the network adapter connector on the back
panel of your computer. A click indicates that the network cable
has been securely attached.
NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network connector.
On computers with a network connector card, use the connector
on the card.
It is recommended that you use Category 5 wiring and connectors
for your network. If you must use Category 3 wiring, force the
network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation.
3 network activity light Flashes a yellow light when the computer is transmitting or
receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic may make
this light appear to be in a steady "on" state.Back to Contents Page
4 surround connector Use the black surround connector to attach multichannel-capable
speakers.
5 line-in connector Use the blue line-in connector to attach a record/playback device
such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR.
On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card.
6 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector (available on computers with
integrated sound) to attach headphones and most speakers with
integrated amplifiers.
On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card.
7 micro-phone/side
surround connector
Use the pink and silver connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony
program.
On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on
the card.
The side-surround output provides enhanced surround audio for
computers with 7.1 speakers.
8 center/subwoofer
connector
Use the yellow connector to attach a speaker to a Low Frequency
Effects (LFE) audio channel.
9 VGA video connector If your monitor has a VGA connector, plug it into the VGA
connector on the computer.
10 USB 2.0 connectors
(5)
Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain
connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB devices which may not function properly if attached to the
front connectors (see "System Setup" for more information on
booting to a USB device)
It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for
devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or
cameras.Back to Contents Page
About Your Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Computer
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Front View of the Computer
Back View of the Computer
Front View of the Computer
1 cover latch
release
Use this latch to remove the computer cover.
2 location of
Service Tag
Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you access the Dell Support website or call technical support.
3 CD or DVD eject
button
Press to eject a disk from the CD or DVD drive.
4 CD or DVD
activity light
The drive light is on when the computer reads data from the CD or DVD drive.
5 FlexBay Can contain an optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader. For more information about the Media Card Reader, see your
computer Owner's Manual.
6 microphone
connector
Use the microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program.
On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card.
7 headphone
connector
Use the headphone connector to attach headphones.
8 diagnostic
lights (4)
Use the lights to help you troubleshoot a computer problem based on the diagnostic code. For more information, see "Diagnostic
Lights."
9 hard-drive
activity light
The hard drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when
a device such as a CD player is operating.
10 power button,
power light
Press the power button to turn on the computer. The power light in the center of this button indicates the power state. See
"Specifications" for more information.
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer. Instead, perform an operating system
shutdown.
11 USB 2.0
connectors (2)
Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. It is recommended that you use
the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB
devices, which may not function properly if attached to the front connectors.
12 vents For adequate cooling, do not block any of the vents.
NOTICE: Ensure that there is a minimum of two inches of space between all vents and any object near these vents.
NOTICE: Do not lift or carry the computer by the vents to avoid damage to the computer.Back View of the Computer
NOTICE: Keep the vent area clean and dust-free to ensure that the computer is adequately ventilated. Use only a dry cloth to
clean the vent area to avoid water damage to the computer.
1 voltage selection switch (may not be available on all computers) See the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide for more information.
2 power connector Insert the power cable.
3 back panel connectors Plug USB, audio, and other devices into the appropriate connector.
4 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI and PCI Express cards.
1 link integrity light l Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer.
l Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer.
l Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network.
2 network adapter
connector
To attach your computer to a network or broadband device, connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack or
your network or broadband device. Connect the other end of the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back
panel of your computer. A click indicates that the network cable has been securely attached.
NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network connector.
On computers with a network connector card, use the connector on the card.
It is recommended that you use Category 5 wiring and connectors for your network. If you must use Category 3 wiring, force
the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation.
3 network activity light Flashes a yellow light when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic may make
this light appear to be in a steady "on" state.
4 surround connector Use the black surround connector to attach multichannel-capable speakers.
5 line-in connector Use the blue line-in connector to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR.
On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card.
6 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach headphones and most speakers with integrated amplifiers.
On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card.
7 micro-phone/side
surround connector
Use the pink and silver connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or
telephony program.
On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card.Back to Contents Page
The side-surround output provides enhanced surround audio for computers with 7.1 speakers.
8 center/subwoofer
connector
Use the yellow connector to attach a speaker to a Low Frequency Effects (LFE) audio channel.
9 VGA video connector If your monitor has a VGA connector, plug it into the VGA connector on the computer.
10 USB 2.0 connectors (5) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for
bootable USB devices which may not function properly if attached to the front connectors (see "System Setup" for more
information on booting to a USB device)
It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or
cameras.Back to Contents Page
Before You Begin
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Getting Started
Recommended Tools
Turning Off Your Computer
Before Working Inside Your Computer
Getting Started
This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the
following conditions exist:
l You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" and "Before Working Inside Your Computer."
l You have read the safety information in your Dell™ Product Information Guide.
l A component can be replaced by performing the removal procedure in reverse order.
Recommended Tools
The procedures in this document may require the following tools:
l Small flat-blade screwdriver
l Phillips screwdriver
l Flash BIOS update program floppy disk or CD
Turning Off Your Computer
1. Shut down the operating system:
a. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer.
b. In the Turn off computer window, click Turn off.
The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process finishes.
2. Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut
down your operating system, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds.
Before Working Inside Your Computer
Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help ensure your own personal safety.
1. Turn off your computer.
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close any open files and exit any open programs before you turn off your computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins.
NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not
covered by your warranty.
NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with
locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep
them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and
aligned.
NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer.
NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device.2. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer.
3. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board.
4. Remove the computer cover.
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover.
NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the
computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components.Back to Contents Page
Before You Begin
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Getting Started
Recommended Tools
Turning Off Your Computer
Before Working Inside Your Computer
Getting Started
This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the
following conditions exist:
l You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" and "Before Working Inside Your Computer."
l You have read the safety information in your Dell™ Product Information Guide.
l A component can be replaced by performing the removal procedure in reverse order.
Recommended Tools
The procedures in this document may require the following tools:
l Small flat-blade screwdriver
l Phillips screwdriver
l Flash BIOS update program floppy disk or CD
Turning Off Your Computer
1. Shut down the operating system:
a. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer.
b. In the Turn off computer window, click Turn off.
The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process finishes.
2. Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut
down your operating system, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds.
Before Working Inside Your Computer
Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help ensure your own personal safety.
1. Turn off your computer.
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close any open files and exit any open programs before you turn off your computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins.
NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not
covered by your warranty.
NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with
locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep
them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and
aligned.
NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer.
NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device.2. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer.
3. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board.
4. Remove the computer cover.
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover.
NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the
computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components.Back to Contents Page
Replacing the Computer Cover
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
1. Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way.
2. Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer.
3. Align the bottom of the cover with the tabs located along the bottom edge of the computer.
4. Using the tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward and press down to close it.
5. Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving it to the upright position.
6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page
Replacing the Computer Cover
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
1. Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way.
2. Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer.
3. Align the bottom of the cover with the tabs located along the bottom edge of the computer.
4. Using the tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward and press down to close it.
5. Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving it to the upright position.
6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page
Removing the Computer Cover
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Lay your computer on its side with the computer cover facing up.
3. Pull back the cover latch release located on the top panel.
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover—at least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space.
NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid scratching either the computer or the surface on which it is resting.Back to Contents Page
Removing the Computer Cover
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Lay your computer on its side with the computer cover facing up.
3. Pull back the cover latch release located on the top panel.
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover—at least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space.
NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid scratching either the computer or the surface on which it is resting.Back to Contents Page
Removing and Installing Parts
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Memory
You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board.
Your computer supports DDR2 memory. For additional information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see your Owner's Manual.
DDR2 Memory Overview
DDR2 memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the DDR2 memory modules are not installed in matched
pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. See the label on the module to determine the module's capacity.
The recommended memory configurations are:
¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2
or
¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 and another matched pair installed in DIMM connectors 3 and 4
l If you install mixed pairs of DDR2 400-MHz (PC2-3200) and DDR2 533-MHz (PC2-4300) memory, the modules function at the slowest speed installed.
l Be sure to install a single memory module in DIMM connector 1, the connector closest to the processor, before you install modules in the other
connectors.
Memory CD/DVD Drive
Cards Heat-Sink Assembly
Drive Panel Processor
Front Panel Fan Assembly
Drives Front I/O Panel
Hard Drive System Board
Floppy Drive Power Supply
Media Card Reader (Optional)
NOTE: Always install DDR2 memory modules in the order indicated on the system board.
NOTICE: Do not install ECC or buffered memory modules. Only unbuffered, non-ECC memory is supported.
NOTE: If you install DDR2 667-MHz memory, the speed is reduced to 533 MHz.
NOTE: Memory purchased from Dell is covered under your computer warranty.Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations
Your computer supports a maximum of 4 GB of memory when you use four 1-GB DIMMs. Current operating systems, such as Microsoft® Windows® XP, can
only use a maximum of 4 GB of address space; however, the amount of memory available to the operating system is less than 4 GB. Certain components within the computer require address space in the 4-GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory.
Removing Memory
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector.
4. Grasp the module and pull up.
If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from the connector.
Installing Memory
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector.
4. Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector.
NOTICE: If you remove your original memory modules from the computer during a memory upgrade, keep them separate from any new modules that
you may have, even if you purchased the new modules from Dell. If possible, do not pair an original memory module with a new memory module. Otherwise, your computer may not start properly. You should install your original memory modules in pairs either in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 or DIMM
connectors 3 and 4.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
1 memory connector closest to processor
2 securing clips (2)
3 memory connector5. Insert the module into the connector until the module snaps into position.
If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module.
6. Replace the computer cover.
7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
8. When a message appears, stating that memory size has changed, press to continue.
9. Log on to your computer.
10. Right-click the My Computer icon on your Microsoft® Windows® desktop and click Properties.
11. Click the General tab.
12. To verify that the memory is installed correctly, check the amount of memory (RAM) listed.
Cards
Your Dell™ computer provides the following slots for PCI and PCI Express cards:
l Two PCI card slots
l One PCI Express x16 card slot
l One PCI Express x1 card slot
PCI Cards
Your computer supports two PCI cards.
1 notch
2 memory module
3 cutouts (2)
4 crossbar
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the memory module, press the module straight down into the connector while you apply equal force to each end of the module.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.If you are installing or replacing a card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a PCI card, see "Removing a PCI Card."
If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system.
If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, see "Installing a PCI Express Card."
Installing a PCI Card
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open
position.
4. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6.
5. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card.
If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector.
6. Prepare the card for installation.
See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your
computer.
7. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot.
1 release tab
2 card retention door
CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be
sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards.8. Before you close the card retention door, ensure that:
l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar.
l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide.
9. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s).
10. Connect any cables that should be attached to the card.
See the documentation for the card for information about the card's cable connections.
11. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on.
12. If you installed a sound card:
a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off.
b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone,
or line-in connectors on the back panel.
13. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter:
1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide
2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card
3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card
1 alignment guide 3 release tab
2 alignment bar 4 card retention door
NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or
cause damage to the equipment.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off.
b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the
back panel.
14. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation.
Removing a PCI Card
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open
position.
4. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening.
If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
5. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s).
6. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on.
7. Remove the card's driver from the operating system.
8. If you removed a sound card:
a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On.
b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer.
9. If you removed an add-in network connector:
a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On.
b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer.
PCI Express Cards
Your computer supports one PCI Express x16 card and one PCI Express x1 card.
If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a card, see "Removing a
PCI Express Card."
If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system.
If you are installing or replacing a PCI card, see "Installing a PCI Card."
Installing a PCI Express Card
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust
and dirt out of your computer.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open
position.
4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top:
a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place.
b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location.
5. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6.
6. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card.
If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, remove the top of the retention mechanism by pressing the tab and pulling up on the top. Gently pull the securing tab, grasp the card by its top corners, and then ease it out of its
connector.
7. Prepare the card for installation.
See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your
computer.
8. If you are installing the card into the x16 card connector, position the card so the securing slot is aligned with the securing tab, and gently pull the
securing tab.
9. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot.
1 card retention door
2 card retention mechanism
3 release tabs (2)
1 securing tab 4 PCI Express x16 card slot
2 PCI Express x1 card 5 PCI Express x16 card
3 PCI Express x1 card slot
CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be
sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards.
NOTICE: Ensure that you release the securing tab to unseat the card. If the card is not removed correctly, the system board may be damaged.10. If you replaced a card that was already installed in the computer and you removed the retention mechanism, you may reinstall the retention mechanism.
11. Before replacing the card retention mechanism, ensure that:
l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar.
l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide.
12. Snap the card retention mechanism into place, securing the x16 PCI card.
13. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on.
14. If you installed a sound card:
a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off.
b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone,
or line-in connectors on the back panel.
15. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter:
a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off.
b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the
back panel.
16. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation.
1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide
2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card
3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card
1 card retention door
2 card retention mechanism
3 release tabs (2)
NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or
cause damage to the equipment.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Removing a PCI Express Card
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open
position.
4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top:
a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place.
b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location.
5. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening.
If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
6. Reseat the card retention mechanism in the tabs and pivot downward to snap it into place.
7. Close the card retention door to snap it into place, securing the card(s).
8. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on.
9. Remove the card's driver from the operating system.
10. If you removed a sound card:
a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On.
b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer.
11. If you removed an add-in network connector:
a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On.
b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer.
12. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation.
Drive Panel
Removing the Drive Panel
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust
and dirt out of your computer.
NOTE: When you install a filler bracket, ensure that the bracket is seated correctly.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.3. Grasping the sliding plate lever, slide and hold the sliding plate until the drive panel snaps open.
4. Pivot the drive panel outward and lift away from the computer.
5. Set the drive panel aside in a secure location.
Removing the Drive-Panel Insert
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
1. Turn the drive panel sideways and find the tip of the drive-panel insert tab that latches over a tab on the right side of the drive panel.
2. Pull the inner tip of the drive-panel insert tab away from the drive panel.
1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel
2 sliding plate 4 front panel
NOTE: The sliding plate secures and releases the drive panel and helps to secure the drives.
1 drive-panel insert tab
2 drive-panel insert
3 drive panel3. Pivot the drive-panel insert out and away from the drive panel.
4. Set the drive-panel insert aside in a secure location.
Replacing the Drive-Panel Insert
1. Slide the tab on the left side of the drive-panel insert under the center-drive panel tab.
2. Rotate the drive-panel insert into place and snap the drive-panel insert tab over the corresponding tab on the drive panel.
Replacing the Drive Panel
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover if you have not already done so.
3. If you are installing a replacement drive panel, remove the old drive panel.
4. Align the drive panel tabs with the side-door hinges.
5. Rotate the drive panel toward the computer until it snaps into place on the front panel.
1 drive-panel insert tab 3 center drive-panel tab
2 drive panel insert 4 drive panel
1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel
2 sliding plate 4 front panelFront Panel
Removing the Front Panel
1. Remove the computer cover.
2. Remove the drive panel.
3. Remove the hard drive and second hard drive, if applicable.
4. Remove the two front-panel screws.
5. Using a small, flat-blade screwdriver, press the four top front-panel release tabs upwards and press down on the four bottom release tabs to loosen
the front panel.
6. Starting from the bottom of the front panel, pivot the panel toward the top of the computer and remove the panel.
Drives
Your computer supports a combination of these devices:
l Up to two serial ATA hard drives
l One FlexBay drive (may contain an optional floppy drive or an optional Media Card Reader)
l Up to two CD or DVD drives
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: Use care when handling the front-panel release tabs to avoid damaging them.
1 top front-panel release tabs (4)
2 front-panel screws (2)
3 front panel
4 bottom front-panel release tabs (4)Connect CD/DVD drives to the connector labeled "IDE1" on the system board. Serial ATA hard drives should be connected to the connectors labeled "SATA0" or
"SATA2" on the system board.
IDE Drive Addressing
When you connect two IDE devices to a single IDE interface cable and configure them for the cable select setting, the device attached to the last connector on
the interface cable is the master or boot device (drive 0), and the device attached to the middle connector on the interface cable is the slave device (drive 1).
See the drive documentation in your upgrade kit for information on configuring devices for the cable select setting.
Connecting and Disconnecting Drive Interface Cables
When you install a drive, you connect two cables—a DC power cable and a data cable—to the back of the drive and to the system board.
When removing an IDE drive data cable, grasp the colored pull-tab and pull until the connector detaches.
Most interface connectors are keyed for correct insertion; that is, a notch or a missing pin on one connector matches a tab or a filled-in hole on the other
connector. Keyed connectors ensure that the pin-1 wire in the cable (indicated by the colored stripe along one edge of the IDE cable—serial ATA cables do not
use a colored stripe) goes to the pin-1 end of the connector. The pin-1 end of a connector on a board or a card is usually indicated by a silk-screened "1"
printed directly on the board or card.
Power Cable Connector
To connect a drive using the power cable, locate the power connector on the power supply.
1 CD/DVD drive(s)
2 FlexBay for optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader
3 hard drive(s)
NOTICE: When you connect an IDE interface cable, do not place the colored stripe away from pin 1 of the connector. Reversing the cable prevents the
drive from operating and could damage the controller, the drive, or both.
1 interface cable
2 interface connectorHard Drive
Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer.
Removing a Hard Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Disconnect the power and data cables from the drive.
4. Press the blue tabs on either side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer.
1 SATA power cable connector 3 power cable connector
2 power connector 4 power connector
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently
cushion it.
NOTICE: If you are replacing a hard drive that contains data you want to keep, back up your files before you begin this procedure.
NOTICE: Use the pull-tab to remove the data cable from your hard drive or from the system board.
1 serial ATA data cable
2 power cableInstalling a Hard Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. If you are installing a replacement hard drive, remove the old hard drive.
4. Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation.
5. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer.
6. Gently slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed.
7. Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive.
1 hard drive
2 tabs (2)
NOTE: If your replacement hard drive does not have the hard drive bracket attached, remove the bracket from the old drive by unsnapping it from the
drive. Snap the bracket onto the new drive.
1 drive
2 hard drive bracket
1 serial ATA data cable8. Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated.
9. Replace the computer cover.
10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation.
Adding a Second Hard Drive
1. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer.
2. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
3. Remove the computer cover.
4. Press the blue release tabs on each side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer.
5. Snap the bracket onto the hard drive.
6. Gently slide the new drive (the second hard drive) into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed.
7. Connect a power cable to the drive.
8. Connect the data cable to the drive and to the system board.
Floppy Drive
2 power cable
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently
cushion it.
1 release tabs (2) 3 hard drive bay
2 second hard drive in lower bay 4 primary hard drive in upper bay
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer.Removing a Floppy Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the floppy drive.
5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the floppy drive out through the front
of the computer.
NOTE: If you are adding a floppy drive, see "Installing a Floppy Drive."
1 power cable
2 data cable
NOTE: If you are installing a PCI Express x16 card, the card may cover the floppy-drive connectors. Remove the card before connecting the floppy-drive
cables.
1 sliding plate lever
2 sliding plate
3 floppy driveInstalling a Floppy Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed.
5. Attach the power and data cables to the floppy drive.
6. Connect the other end of the data cable to the connector labeled "DSKT2" on the system board and route the cable through the clip on the shroud.
7. Check all cable connections and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents.
8. Replace the drive panel.
9. Replace the computer cover.
10. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on.
See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation.
NOTE: If the new floppy drive does not include shoulder screws, use the screws within the drive panel insert.
1 drive
2 screws (4)
NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert.
1 power cable
2 data cable
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer.11. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Diskette Drive option.
12. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics.
Media Card Reader (Optional)
For information about using a Media Card Reader, see your Owner's Manual.
Removing a Media Card Reader
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Disconnect the FlexBay USB cable on the back of the Media Card Reader from the Media Card Reader connector on the system board and route the cable
through the cable routing clip.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
1 cable
2 Media Card Reader5. Slide the sliding plate toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate, slide the Media Card Reader out through the front of
the computer.
6. Replace the drive panel.
7. Replace the computer cover.
Installing a Media Card Reader
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Remove the Media Card Reader and bracket from its packaging and ensure that all of the screws are included.
1 sliding plate lever
2 sliding plate
3 Media Card Reader
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
1 Media Card Reader
2 screws (4)5. Slide the Media Card Reader into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed.
6. Connect the FlexBay USB cable to the back of the Media Card Reader and to the Media Card Reader connector on the system board.
7. Route the FlexBay USB cable through the cable routing clip.
8. Replace the drive panel.
9. Replace the computer cover.
CD/DVD Drive
Removing a CD/DVD Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the drive.
NOTE: Ensure that the Media Card Reader is installed before the FlexBay cable is connected.
1 Media Card Reader
2 FlexBay USB cable
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the CD/DVD drive out through the
front of the computer.
Installing a CD/DVD Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed.
NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert.5. Connect the power and data cables to the drive.
6. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents.
7. Replace the drive panel.
8. Replace the computer cover.
9. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on.
See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation.
10. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Drive option.
11. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics.
Heat-Sink Assembly
Removing the Heat-Sink Assembly
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Loosen the two captive screws that attach the heat-sink assembly to the system board on either side of the assembly.
4. Pivot the assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly.
5. Lay the assembly aside on its side.
Processor
Removing the Processor
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the heat-sink assembly.
4. Open the processor cover:
a. Push down on the release lever and slide the lever out from under the side latch on the processor socket.
CAUTION: Despite having a plastic shield, the heat-sink assembly may be very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the assembly has had
sufficient time to cool before you touch it.
NOTE: To loosen the two captive screws on each side of the heat-sink assembly, you need a long Phillips screwdriver.
NOTICE: After you remove the heat-sink assembly, lay the assembly on its side. Do not set the heat-sink assembly upright or touch the thermal
interface, as this may result in damage to the thermal interface material.
1 heat-sink assembly
2 captive screws (2)
NOTICE: When you install the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage to the thermal
interface material.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
NOTICE: If you are installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, discard the original heat-sink assembly. If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit
from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you install your new processor.b. Pull the lever back to release the processor cover.
1 processor cover 4 release lever
2 processor 5 side latch
5. Grasp the processor by the edges to remove it from the processor socket.
Leave the release lever extended in the release position so that the socket is ready for the new processor.
Installing the Processor
1. Unpack the new processor, being careful not to touch the underside of the processor.
2. If the release lever on the processor socket is not fully extended, move it to that position.
3. Orient the front and rear alignment notches on the processor with the front and rear alignment notches on the socket.
4. Align the pin-1 corners of the processor and socket.
3 processor socket
NOTICE: When removing or replacing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the processor socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins
in the socket.
NOTICE: Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer.
NOTICE: When installing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins in the socket.
NOTICE: You must position the processor correctly in the socket to avoid permanent damage to the processor and the computer when you turn on the
computer.
1 processor cover 6 release lever5. Set the processor lightly in the socket and ensure that the processor is positioned correctly.
6. When the processor is fully seated in the socket, close the processor cover.
Ensure that the tab on the processor cover is positioned underneath the release lever at the front of the socket.
7. Pivot the release lever back toward the socket and snap it into place under the side latch to secure the processor.
If you installed a processor replacement kit from Dell, return the original heat-sink assembly and processor to Dell in the same package in which your
replacement kit was sent.
8. Install the heat-sink assembly.
9. Replace the computer cover.
10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
Fan Assembly
Removing the Fan Assembly
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the heat-sink assembly.
4. Press the release tab on the fan-cable connector on the system board to remove the connector.
2 tab 7 front alignment notch
3 processor 8 socket and processor pin-1 indicators
4 processor socket 9 rear alignment notch
5 cover latch
NOTICE: To avoid damage, ensure that the processor aligns properly with the socket, and do not use excessive force when you install the processor.
NOTICE: If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you replace the processor.
NOTICE: When installing the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Simultaneously press the fan-release tab on one side of the fan assembly and pull the fan- release tab located on the bottom of the opposite side of
the assembly upwards.
6. Slide the fan assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly.
Front I/O Panel
Removing the Front I/O Panel
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the heat-sink assembly.
4. Remove the fan assembly.
1 fan release tabs (2)
2 fan assembly
3 fan cable connector
4 release tab on fan cable connector
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O panel to the front of the computer.
6. Pull the I/O panel toward the back of the computer and lift the panel to remove from the computer.
7. Disconnect any cables from the I/O panel.
System Board
Jumper Settings
The jumper locations are shown below.
1 screw
2 front I/O panelRemoving the System Board
1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu.
2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut
down your computer, turn them off now.
3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer.
4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board.
5. Remove the computer cover.
6. Remove any components that restrict access to the system board (CD/DVD drive(s), floppy drive, hard drive, front I/O panel).
7. Remove the heat-sink assembly and processor.
8. Disconnect all cables from the system board.
9. Remove the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws.
10. Slide the system board assembly toward the front of the computer, and then lift the board away.
Jumper Setting Description
PSWD
(default)
Password features are enabled.
Password features are disabled.
RTCRST
(default)
Real-time clock reset in normal operation.
Clear CMOS settings.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover.
NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the
computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components.
NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device.
NOTE: The mounting-bracket screws also hold the system board and need to be removed for the removal of the system board.11. Place the system board assembly that you just removed next to the replacement system board to ensure that it is identical.
Replacing the System Board
1. Gently align the system board in the chassis and slide the board toward the back of the computer.
2. Replace the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws.
3. Replace any components and cables that you removed from the system board.
4. Reconnect all cables to their connectors at the back of the computer.
5. Replace the computer cover.
6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
Power Supply
Removing the Power Supply
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Disconnect the DC power cables from the system board and the drives.
1 mounting-bracket screws (2)
2 system-board screws (8)
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device, and then plug the cable into the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.4. Remove the four screws that attach the power supply to the back of the computer frame.
5. Press the release button located on the floor of the computer frame.
6. Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer approximately 1 inch.
7. Lift the power supply out of the computer.
Replacing the Power Supply
1. Slide the power supply into place.
2. Replace the screws that secure the power supply to the back of the computer frame.
3. Reconnect the DC power cables.
4. Route the cables through the routing clips, and press the clips to close them over the cables.
5. Replace the computer cover.
6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
Back to Contents Page
1 release button
2 power supply
3 screws (4)
4 AC power connector
NOTICE: Note the routing of the DC power cables underneath the routing clips in the computer frame as you remove them from the system board and
drives. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent them from being pinched or crimped.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: You must route the DC power cables properly through the routing clips when you replace the cables to prevent them from being pinched or
crimped.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer.Back to Contents Page
Removing and Installing Parts
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Memory
You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board.
Your computer supports DDR2 memory. For additional information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see your Owner's Manual.
DDR2 Memory Overview
DDR2 memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the DDR2 memory modules are not installed in matched
pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. See the label on the module to determine the module's capacity.
The recommended memory configurations are:
¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2
or
¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 and another matched pair installed in DIMM connectors 3 and 4
l If you install mixed pairs of DDR2 400-MHz (PC2-3200) and DDR2 533-MHz (PC2-4300) memory, the modules function at the slowest speed installed.
l Be sure to install a single memory module in DIMM connector 1, the connector closest to the processor, before you install modules in the other
connectors.
Memory
Cards
Drive Panel
Front Panel
Drives
Hard Drive
Floppy Drive
Media Card Reader (Optional)
CD/DVD Drive
Heat-Sink Assembly
Processor
Fan Assembly
Front I/O Panel
System Board
Power Supply
NOTE: Always install DDR2 memory modules in the order indicated on the system board.
NOTICE: Do not install ECC or buffered memory modules. Only unbuffered, non-ECC memory is supported.
NOTE: If you install DDR2 667-MHz memory, the speed is reduced to 533 MHz.Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations
Your computer supports a maximum of 4 GB of memory when you use four 1-GB DIMMs. Current operating systems, such as Microsoft® Windows® XP, can
only use a maximum of 4 GB of address space; however, the amount of memory available to the operating system is less than 4 GB. Certain components within the computer require address space in the 4-GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory.
Removing Memory
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector.
4. Grasp the module and pull up.
If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from the connector.
Installing Memory
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector.
4. Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector.
NOTE: Memory purchased from Dell is covered under your computer warranty.
NOTICE: If you remove your original memory modules from the computer during a memory upgrade, keep them separate from any new modules that
you may have, even if you purchased the new modules from Dell. If possible, do not pair an original memory module with a new memory module. Otherwise, your computer may not start properly. You should install your original memory modules in pairs either in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 or DIMM
connectors 3 and 4.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
1 memory connector closest to processor
2 securing clips (2)
3 memory connector5. Insert the module into the connector until the module snaps into position.
If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module.
6. Replace the computer cover.
7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
8. When a message appears, stating that memory size has changed, press to continue.
9. Log on to your computer.
10. Right-click the My Computer icon on your Microsoft® Windows® desktop and click Properties.
11. Click the General tab.
12. To verify that the memory is installed correctly, check the amount of memory (RAM) listed.
Cards
Your Dell™ computer provides the following slots for PCI and PCI Express cards:
l Two PCI card slots
l One PCI Express x16 card slot
l One PCI Express x1 card slot
PCI Cards
Your computer supports two PCI cards.
1 notch
2 memory module
3 cutouts (2)
4 crossbar
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the memory module, press the module straight down into the connector while you apply equal force to each end of the module.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.If you are installing or replacing a card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a PCI card, see "Removing a PCI Card."
If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system.
If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, see "Installing a PCI Express Card."
Installing a PCI Card
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open
position.
4. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6.
5. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card.
If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector.
6. Prepare the card for installation.
See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your
computer.
7. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot.
1 release tab
2 card retention door
CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be
sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards.8. Before you close the card retention door, ensure that:
l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar.
l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide.
9. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s).
10. Connect any cables that should be attached to the card.
See the documentation for the card for information about the card's cable connections.
11. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on.
12. If you installed a sound card:
a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off.
b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone,
or line-in connectors on the back panel.
13. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter:
1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide
2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card
3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card
1 alignment guide 3 release tab
2 alignment bar 4 card retention door
NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or
cause damage to the equipment.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off.
b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the
back panel.
14. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation.
Removing a PCI Card
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open
position.
4. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening.
If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
5. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s).
6. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on.
7. Remove the card's driver from the operating system.
8. If you removed a sound card:
a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On.
b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer.
9. If you removed an add-in network connector:
a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On.
b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer.
PCI Express Cards
Your computer supports one PCI Express x16 card and one PCI Express x1 card.
If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a card, see "Removing a
PCI Express Card."
If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system.
If you are installing or replacing a PCI card, see "Installing a PCI Card."
Installing a PCI Express Card
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust
and dirt out of your computer.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open
position.
4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top:
a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place.
b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location.
5. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6.
6. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card.
If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, remove the top of the retention mechanism by pressing the tab and pulling up on the top. Gently pull the securing tab, grasp the card by its top corners, and then ease it out of its
connector.
7. Prepare the card for installation.
See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your
computer.
8. If you are installing the card into the x16 card connector, position the card so the securing slot is aligned with the securing tab, and gently pull the
securing tab.
9. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot.
1 card retention door
2 card retention mechanism
3 release tabs (2)
1 securing tab 4 PCI Express x16 card slot
2 PCI Express x1 card 5 PCI Express x16 card
3 PCI Express x1 card slot
CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be
sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards.
NOTICE: Ensure that you release the securing tab to unseat the card. If the card is not removed correctly, the system board may be damaged.10. If you replaced a card that was already installed in the computer and you removed the retention mechanism, you may reinstall the retention mechanism.
11. Before replacing the card retention mechanism, ensure that:
l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar.
l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide.
12. Snap the card retention mechanism into place, securing the x16 PCI card.
13. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on.
14. If you installed a sound card:
a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off.
b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone,
or line-in connectors on the back panel.
15. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter:
a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off.
b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the
back panel.
16. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation.
1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide
2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card
3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card
1 card retention door
2 card retention mechanism
3 release tabs (2)
NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or
cause damage to the equipment.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Removing a PCI Express Card
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open
position.
4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top:
a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place.
b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location.
5. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening.
If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
6. Reseat the card retention mechanism in the tabs and pivot downward to snap it into place.
7. Close the card retention door to snap it into place, securing the card(s).
8. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on.
9. Remove the card's driver from the operating system.
10. If you removed a sound card:
a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On.
b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer.
11. If you removed an add-in network connector:
a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On.
b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer.
12. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation.
Drive Panel
Removing the Drive Panel
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust
and dirt out of your computer.
NOTE: When you install a filler bracket, ensure that the bracket is seated correctly.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.3. Grasping the sliding plate lever, slide and hold the sliding plate until the drive panel snaps open.
4. Pivot the drive panel outward and lift away from the computer.
5. Set the drive panel aside in a secure location.
Removing the Drive-Panel Insert
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
1. Turn the drive panel sideways and find the tip of the drive-panel insert tab that latches over a tab on the right side of the drive panel.
2. Pull the inner tip of the drive-panel insert tab away from the drive panel.
1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel
2 sliding plate 4 front panel
NOTE: The sliding plate secures and releases the drive panel and helps to secure the drives.
1 drive-panel insert tab
2 drive-panel insert
3 drive panel3. Pivot the drive-panel insert out and away from the drive panel.
4. Set the drive-panel insert aside in a secure location.
Replacing the Drive-Panel Insert
1. Slide the tab on the left side of the drive-panel insert under the center-drive panel tab.
2. Rotate the drive-panel insert into place and snap the drive-panel insert tab over the corresponding tab on the drive panel.
Replacing the Drive Panel
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover if you have not already done so.
3. If you are installing a replacement drive panel, remove the old drive panel.
4. Align the drive panel tabs with the side-door hinges.
5. Rotate the drive panel toward the computer until it snaps into place on the front panel.
1 drive-panel insert tab 3 center drive-panel tab
2 drive panel insert 4 drive panel
1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel
2 sliding plate 4 front panelFront Panel
Removing the Front Panel
1. Remove the computer cover.
2. Remove the drive panel.
3. Remove the hard drive and second hard drive, if applicable.
4. Remove the two front-panel screws.
5. Using a small, flat-blade screwdriver, press the four top front-panel release tabs upwards and press down on the four bottom release tabs to loosen
the front panel.
6. Starting from the bottom of the front panel, pivot the panel toward the top of the computer and remove the panel.
Drives
Your computer supports a combination of these devices:
l Up to two serial ATA hard drives
l One FlexBay drive (may contain an optional floppy drive or an optional Media Card Reader)
l Up to two CD or DVD drives
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: Use care when handling the front-panel release tabs to avoid damaging them.
1 top front-panel release tabs (4)
2 front-panel screws (2)
3 front panel
4 bottom front-panel release tabs (4)Connect CD/DVD drives to the connector labeled "IDE1" on the system board. Serial ATA hard drives should be connected to the connectors labeled "SATA0" or
"SATA2" on the system board.
IDE Drive Addressing
When you connect two IDE devices to a single IDE interface cable and configure them for the cable select setting, the device attached to the last connector on
the interface cable is the master or boot device (drive 0), and the device attached to the middle connector on the interface cable is the slave device (drive 1).
See the drive documentation in your upgrade kit for information on configuring devices for the cable select setting.
Connecting and Disconnecting Drive Interface Cables
When you install a drive, you connect two cables—a DC power cable and a data cable—to the back of the drive and to the system board.
When removing an IDE drive data cable, grasp the colored pull-tab and pull until the connector detaches.
Most interface connectors are keyed for correct insertion; that is, a notch or a missing pin on one connector matches a tab or a filled-in hole on the other
connector. Keyed connectors ensure that the pin-1 wire in the cable (indicated by the colored stripe along one edge of the IDE cable—serial ATA cables do not
use a colored stripe) goes to the pin-1 end of the connector. The pin-1 end of a connector on a board or a card is usually indicated by a silk-screened "1"
printed directly on the board or card.
Power Cable Connector
To connect a drive using the power cable, locate the power connector on the power supply.
1 CD/DVD drive(s)
2 FlexBay for optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader
3 hard drive(s)
NOTICE: When you connect an IDE interface cable, do not place the colored stripe away from pin 1 of the connector. Reversing the cable prevents the
drive from operating and could damage the controller, the drive, or both.
1 interface cable
2 interface connectorHard Drive
Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer.
Removing a Hard Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Disconnect the power and data cables from the drive.
4. Press the blue tabs on either side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer.
1 SATA power cable connector 3 power cable connector
2 power connector 4 power connector
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently
cushion it.
NOTICE: If you are replacing a hard drive that contains data you want to keep, back up your files before you begin this procedure.
NOTICE: Use the pull-tab to remove the data cable from your hard drive or from the system board.
1 serial ATA data cable
2 power cableInstalling a Hard Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. If you are installing a replacement hard drive, remove the old hard drive.
4. Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation.
5. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer.
6. Gently slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed.
7. Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive.
1 hard drive
2 tabs (2)
NOTE: If your replacement hard drive does not have the hard drive bracket attached, remove the bracket from the old drive by unsnapping it from the
drive. Snap the bracket onto the new drive.
1 drive
2 hard drive bracket
1 serial ATA data cable8. Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated.
9. Replace the computer cover.
10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation.
Adding a Second Hard Drive
1. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer.
2. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
3. Remove the computer cover.
4. Press the blue release tabs on each side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer.
5. Snap the bracket onto the hard drive.
6. Gently slide the new drive (the second hard drive) into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed.
7. Connect a power cable to the drive.
8. Connect the data cable to the drive and to the system board.
Floppy Drive
2 power cable
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently
cushion it.
1 release tabs (2) 3 hard drive bay
2 second hard drive in lower bay 4 primary hard drive in upper bay
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.Removing a Floppy Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the floppy drive.
5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the floppy drive out through the front
of the computer.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer.
NOTE: If you are adding a floppy drive, see "Installing a Floppy Drive."
1 power cable
2 data cable
NOTE: If you are installing a PCI Express x16 card, the card may cover the floppy-drive connectors. Remove the card before connecting the floppy-drive
cables.
1 sliding plate lever
2 sliding plate
3 floppy driveInstalling a Floppy Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed.
5. Attach the power and data cables to the floppy drive.
6. Connect the other end of the data cable to the connector labeled "DSKT2" on the system board and route the cable through the clip on the shroud.
7. Check all cable connections and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents.
8. Replace the drive panel.
9. Replace the computer cover.
10. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on.
NOTE: If the new floppy drive does not include shoulder screws, use the screws within the drive panel insert.
1 drive
2 screws (4)
NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert.
1 power cable
2 data cable
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer.See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation.
11. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Diskette Drive option.
12. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics.
Media Card Reader (Optional)
For information about using a Media Card Reader, see your Owner's Manual.
Removing a Media Card Reader
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Disconnect the FlexBay USB cable on the back of the Media Card Reader from the Media Card Reader connector on the system board and route the cable
through the cable routing clip.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
1 cable
2 Media Card Reader5. Slide the sliding plate toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate, slide the Media Card Reader out through the front of
the computer.
6. Replace the drive panel.
7. Replace the computer cover.
Installing a Media Card Reader
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Remove the Media Card Reader and bracket from its packaging and ensure that all of the screws are included.
1 sliding plate lever
2 sliding plate
3 Media Card Reader
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
1 Media Card Reader
2 screws (4)5. Slide the Media Card Reader into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed.
6. Connect the FlexBay USB cable to the back of the Media Card Reader and to the Media Card Reader connector on the system board.
7. Route the FlexBay USB cable through the cable routing clip.
8. Replace the drive panel.
9. Replace the computer cover.
CD/DVD Drive
Removing a CD/DVD Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the drive.
NOTE: Ensure that the Media Card Reader is installed before the FlexBay cable is connected.
1 Media Card Reader
2 FlexBay USB cable
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the CD/DVD drive out through the
front of the computer.
Installing a CD/DVD Drive
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the drive panel.
4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed.
NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert.5. Connect the power and data cables to the drive.
6. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents.
7. Replace the drive panel.
8. Replace the computer cover.
9. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on.
See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation.
10. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Drive option.
11. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics.
Heat-Sink Assembly
Removing the Heat-Sink Assembly
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Loosen the two captive screws that attach the heat-sink assembly to the system board on either side of the assembly.
4. Pivot the assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly.
5. Lay the assembly aside on its side.
Processor
Removing the Processor
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the heat-sink assembly.
4. Open the processor cover:
CAUTION: Despite having a plastic shield, the heat-sink assembly may be very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the assembly has had
sufficient time to cool before you touch it.
NOTE: To loosen the two captive screws on each side of the heat-sink assembly, you need a long Phillips screwdriver.
NOTICE: After you remove the heat-sink assembly, lay the assembly on its side. Do not set the heat-sink assembly upright or touch the thermal
interface, as this may result in damage to the thermal interface material.
1 heat-sink assembly
2 captive screws (2)
NOTICE: When you install the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage to the thermal
interface material.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
NOTICE: If you are installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, discard the original heat-sink assembly. If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit
from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you install your new processor.a. Push down on the release lever and slide the lever out from under the side latch on the processor socket.
b. Pull the lever back to release the processor cover.
5. Grasp the processor by the edges to remove it from the processor socket.
Leave the release lever extended in the release position so that the socket is ready for the new processor.
Installing the Processor
1. Unpack the new processor, being careful not to touch the underside of the processor.
2. If the release lever on the processor socket is not fully extended, move it to that position.
3. Orient the front and rear alignment notches on the processor with the front and rear alignment notches on the socket.
4. Align the pin-1 corners of the processor and socket.
1 processor cover 4 release lever
2 processor 5 side latch
3 processor socket
NOTICE: When removing or replacing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the processor socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins
in the socket.
NOTICE: Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer.
NOTICE: When installing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins in the socket.
NOTICE: You must position the processor correctly in the socket to avoid permanent damage to the processor and the computer when you turn on the
computer.5. Set the processor lightly in the socket and ensure that the processor is positioned correctly.
6. When the processor is fully seated in the socket, close the processor cover.
Ensure that the tab on the processor cover is positioned underneath the release lever at the front of the socket.
7. Pivot the release lever back toward the socket and snap it into place under the side latch to secure the processor.
If you installed a processor replacement kit from Dell, return the original heat-sink assembly and processor to Dell in the same package in which your
replacement kit was sent.
8. Install the heat-sink assembly.
9. Replace the computer cover.
10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
Fan Assembly
Removing the Fan Assembly
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the heat-sink assembly.
4. Press the release tab on the fan-cable connector on the system board to remove the connector.
1 processor cover 6 release lever
2 tab 7 front alignment notch
3 processor 8 socket and processor pin-1 indicators
4 processor socket 9 rear alignment notch
5 cover latch
NOTICE: To avoid damage, ensure that the processor aligns properly with the socket, and do not use excessive force when you install the processor.
NOTICE: If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you replace the processor.
NOTICE: When installing the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Simultaneously press the fan-release tab on one side of the fan assembly and pull the fan- release tab located on the bottom of the opposite side of
the assembly upwards.
6. Slide the fan assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly.
Front I/O Panel
Removing the Front I/O Panel
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the heat-sink assembly.
4. Remove the fan assembly.
1 fan release tabs (2)
2 fan assembly
3 fan cable connector
4 release tab on fan cable connector
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O panel to the front of the computer.
6. Pull the I/O panel toward the back of the computer and lift the panel to remove from the computer.
7. Disconnect any cables from the I/O panel.
System Board
Jumper Settings
The jumper locations are shown below.
1 screw
2 front I/O panelRemoving the System Board
1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu.
2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut
down your computer, turn them off now.
3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer.
4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board.
5. Remove the computer cover.
6. Remove any components that restrict access to the system board (CD/DVD drive(s), floppy drive, hard drive, front I/O panel).
7. Remove the heat-sink assembly and processor.
8. Disconnect all cables from the system board.
9. Remove the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws.
10. Slide the system board assembly toward the front of the computer, and then lift the board away.
Jumper Setting Description
PSWD
(default)
Password features are enabled.
Password features are disabled.
RTCRST
(default)
Real-time clock reset in normal operation.
Clear CMOS settings.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover.
NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the
computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components.
NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device.
NOTE: The mounting-bracket screws also hold the system board and need to be removed for the removal of the system board.11. Place the system board assembly that you just removed next to the replacement system board to ensure that it is identical.
Replacing the System Board
1. Gently align the system board in the chassis and slide the board toward the back of the computer.
2. Replace the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws.
3. Replace any components and cables that you removed from the system board.
4. Reconnect all cables to their connectors at the back of the computer.
5. Replace the computer cover.
6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
Power Supply
Removing the Power Supply
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Disconnect the DC power cables from the system board and the drives.
1 mounting-bracket screws (2)
2 system-board screws (8)
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device, and then plug the cable into the computer.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.4. Remove the four screws that attach the power supply to the back of the computer frame.
5. Press the release button located on the floor of the computer frame.
6. Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer approximately 1 inch.
7. Lift the power supply out of the computer.
Replacing the Power Supply
1. Slide the power supply into place.
2. Replace the screws that secure the power supply to the back of the computer frame.
3. Reconnect the DC power cables.
4. Route the cables through the routing clips, and press the clips to close them over the cables.
5. Replace the computer cover.
6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
1 release button
2 power supply
3 screws (4)
4 AC power connector
NOTICE: Note the routing of the DC power cables underneath the routing clips in the computer frame as you remove them from the system board and
drives. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent them from being pinched or crimped.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: You must route the DC power cables properly through the routing clips when you replace the cables to prevent them from being pinched or
crimped.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer.Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page
System Setup
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Overview
Entering System Setup
System Setup Options
Boot Sequence
Clearing Forgotten Passwords
Clearing CMOS Settings
Overview
Use system setup as follows:
l To change the system configuration information after you add, change, or remove any hardware in your computer
l To set or change a user-selectable option such as the user password
l To read the current amount of memory or set the type of hard drive installed
Before you use system setup, it is recommended that you write down the system setup screen information for future reference.
Entering System Setup
1. Turn on (or restart) your computer.
2. When the blue DELL™ logo is displayed, you must watch for the F2 prompt to appear.
3. Once this F2 prompt appears, press immediately.
4. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then, shut down your
computer and try again.
System Setup Screens
The system setup screen displays current or changeable configuration information for your computer. Information on the screen is divided into three areas: the
options list, active options field, and key functions.
NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes can make your computer work
incorrectly.
NOTE: The F2 prompt indicates that the keyboard has initialized. This prompt can appear very quickly, so you must watch for it to display, and then
press . If you press before you are prompted, this keystroke will be lost.
Options List — This field appears on the left side of
the system setup window. The field is a scrollable list
containing features that define the configuration of
your computer, including installed hardware, power
conservation, and security features.
Scroll up and down the list with the up- and downarrow keys. As an option is highlighted, the Option
Field displays more information about that option
and the option's current and available settings. By
pressing or the left and right arrow keys,
you can toggle between a primary topic (collapsed)
and subtopics (expanded).
Option Field — This field contains information about
each option. In this field you can view your current
settings and make changes to your settings.
Use the right and left arrow keys to highlight an
option. Press to make that selection active.
Key Functions — This field appears below the Option System Setup Options
Field and lists keys and their functions within the
active system setup field.
NOTE: Depending on your computer and installed devices, the items listed in this section may not appear, or may not appear exactly as listed.
System
Processor
Info
Displays the following information for the processor installed in the system: Processor Type, Processor Clock Speed, Processor Bus Speed, Processor Cache Size, Processor ID
number, whether the processor is Hyperthreading Capable or multiple-core capable, and if
the processor has 64-bit Technology.
Memory Info Displays the amount of Installed Memory, Memory Speed, Memory Channel Mode, and a
description of the Memory Technology. This option also displays a table that describes the memory size, whether the memory module is ECC capable, single or dual rank, type, and
organization.
PCI Info Displays the contents of each PCI slot.
Date/Time Controls the system's internal calendar and clock.
Boot
Sequence
(Diskette
drive
default)
Determines the order in which the system searches for boot devices during system startup.
NOTE: If you insert a boot device and restart the computer, this option appears in the system
setup menu. To boot from a USB memory device, select the USB device and move it so it
becomes the first device in the list.
Drives
Diskette
Drive
(Internal
default)
Enables and disables the floppy drives and sets read permission for the internal floppy drive. Off disables all floppy drives. USB enables the USB floppy drive. Internal enables the internal
floppy drive. Read Only enables the internal drive controller and allows the internal floppy
drive read-only permission.
NOTE: Operating systems with USB support will recognize USB floppy drives regardless of this
setting.
Drives 0
through 3
(On
default)
Enables or disables an ATA or SATA device (such as hard-drive, CD drive, or DVD drive). On
enables the interface so that the device can be used.
Displays the Controller type (ATA or SATA), Port number the drive is using, Drive ID number,
Capacity, and whether the drive is controlled by the BIOS.
SATA
Operation
(Normal
default)
Determines the integrated SATA controller's operating mode:
Normal – native mode, which provides the highest drive performance and optimal flexibility.
Combination – combination mode, which offers compatibility with versions of the operating
system that do not support SATA drives.
Onboard Devices
Integrated NIC
(On default)
Enables or disables the integrated NIC controller. Settings are On, Off, or On w/ PXE. When the On w/ PXE setting is active (available only for setting up a future boot
process), the computer prompts you to press .
Pressing this key combination causes a menu to display that allows you to select a method
for booting from a network server. If a boot routine is not available from the network
server, the computer attempts to boot from the next device in the boot sequence list.
Integrated
Audio
Controller
Enables or disables the onboard audio controller.
Front USB Ports
(On default)
Enables or disables the front USB ports.
USB for Flexbay
(On default)
On enables internal USB for FlexBay.
NOTE: This USB option appears only if a FlexBay device is installed.
Video
Primary
Video
(Auto
default)
Specifies which video controller is primary when two video controllers are present on the
computer. Auto enables the add-in video controller. Onboard enables the integrated video
controller.
Video Configures the system memory allocation reserved for the integrated video controller. Settings Memory Size
(8 MB
default)
are 1MB and 8MB.
Performance
HyperThreading
(On default)
Determines whether the physical processor appears as one or two logical processors.
The performance of some applications improve with additional logical processors installed. On enables hyperthreading.
SpeedStep
(On default)
Enables SpeedStep for all supported processors in the computer.
Hard Drive
Acoustics
(Bypass default)
l Bypass (default) — Your computer does not test or change the current acoustics mode setting.
l Quiet — The hard drive operates at its most quiet setting.
l Suggested — The hard drive operates at the level suggested by the drive manufacturer.
l Performance — The hard drive operates at its maximum speed.
NOTE: Switching to performance mode will cause the drive heads to move faster, causing
the hard drive to be noisier. However, some drives may not see an increase in data
transfer rates.
NOTE: Changing the acoustics setting does not alter your hard drive image.
Security
Admin
Password
(Not Set
default)
Displays the current status of your System Setup program's password security feature and
allows you to verify and assign a new admin password.
System
Password
(Not Set
default)
Displays the current status of the system's password security feature and allows a new system
password to be assigned and verified.
Password
Changes
Determines the interaction between the System password and the Admin password. Locked
prevents a user without a valid Admin password from being able to modify the System
password. Unlocked allows a user with a valid Admin password to modify the system
password.
Execute
Disable
(On
default)
Enables or disables Execute Disable memory protection technology.
Power Management
AC
Recovery
(Off
default)
Determines how the system responds when AC power is re-applied after a power loss. Off
commands the system to stay off when the power is re-applied. You must press the front-panel
power button before the system turns on. On commands the system to turn on when the power
is re-applied. Last commands the system to return to the last power state the system was in
just before it was turned off.
Auto
Power On
(Off
default)
Sets the computer to automatically turn on. Off disables this feature. Everyday turns the
computer on every day at the time set in Auto Power Time. Weekdays turns the computer on
every day from Monday through Friday at the time set in Auto Power Time.
NOTE: This feature does not work if you turn off your computer using a power strip or surge
protector.
Auto
Power
Time
Sets time to automatically turn on the computer.
Time is kept in the standard 12-hour format (hours:minutes). Change the startup time by
pressing the right- or left-arrow key to increase or decrease the numbers, or type numbers in
both the date and time fields.
Suspend
Mode
Sets the computer's suspend mode. The options are S1, a suspend state where the computer is
running in a low-power mode, and S3, a standby state where the power is reduced or turned off
for most components, however, system memory remains active.
Maintenance
Load
Defaults
Restores System Setup options to their factory defaults.
Event Log Allows you to view the Event Log. Entries are marked R for Read and U for Unread. Mark All Boot Sequence
This feature allows you to change the boot sequence for devices.
Option Settings
l Diskette Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy drive. If the floppy disk in the drive is not bootable, if no floppy disk is in the drive, or if
there is no floppy drive installed in the computer, the computer generates an error message.
l Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message.
l CD Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the CD drive. If no CD is in the drive, or if the CD has no operating system, the computer generates an
error message.
l USB Flash Device — Insert the memory device into a USB port and restart the computer. When F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of
the screen, press . The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu.
Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot
You can use this feature, for example, to restart your computer to a USB device such as a floppy drive, memory key, or CD-RW drive.
1. If you are booting to a USB device, connect the USB device to a USB connector (see "Front View of the Computer" and "Back View of the Computer").
2. Turn on (or restart) your computer.
3. When F2 = Setup, F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press .
If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then shut down your
computer and try again.
The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices. Each device has a number next to it.
4. At the bottom of the menu, enter the number of the device that is to be used for the current boot only.
For example, if you are booting to a USB memory key, highlight USB Flash Device and press .
Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots
1. Enter system setup.
Entries Read puts an R to the left of all the entries. Clear Log clears the Event Log.
POST Behavior
Fastboot
(On
default)
When enabled, this feature reduces computer startup time by bypassing some compatibility
steps. Off does not skip any steps during computer startup. On starts the system more quickly.
Numlock Key
(On
default)
Determines the functionality of the numeric keys on the right side of your keyboard. Off
commands the right keypad keys to function as arrows. On commands the right keypad keys to
function as numbers.
POST
Hotkeys
Determines whether the sign-on screen displays a message stating the keystroke sequence
that is required to enter the Setup program or the Quickboot feature. Setup & Boot Menu
displays both messages
(F2=Setup and F12=Boot Menu). Setup displays the setup message only (F2=Setup). Boot Menu displays the Quickboot message only (F12=Boot Menu). None displays no message.
Keyboard
Errors
When set to Report (enabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will display the
error message and prompt you to press to continue or press to enter System
Setup.
When set to Do Not Report (disabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will
display the error message and continue booting the system.
NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure that your device is bootable, check the device documentation.
NOTE: If you are booting to a USB floppy drive, you must first set the floppy drive to OFF in system setup.
NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure your device is bootable, check the device documentation.2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot Sequence menu option and press to access the menu.
3. Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices.
4. Press the spacebar to enable or disable a device (enabled devices have a checkmark).
5. Press plus (+) or minus (–) to move a selected device up or down the list.
Clearing Forgotten Passwords
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board, and attach the jumper plug to pins 2 and 3 to clear the password.
3. Close the computer cover.
4. Connect your computer and monitor to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
5. After the Microsoft® Windows® desktop appears on your computer, shut down your computer. Turn off the monitor and disconnect it from the electrical
outlet.
6. Disconnect the computer power cable from the electrical outlet, and press the power button to ground the system board.
7. Open the computer cover.
8. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board and attach the jumper to pins 1 and 2 to re-enable the password feature.
9. Close the computer cover.
10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: When you receive your computer, the jumper plug is attached to pins 1 and 2.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Clearing CMOS Settings
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Reset the current CMOS settings:
a. Locate the 3-pin CMOS jumper (RTCRST) on the system board.
b. Remove the jumper plug from pins 2 and 3.
c. Place the jumper plug on pins 1 and 2 and wait for approximately 5 seconds.
d. Replace the jumper plug on pins 2 and 3.
3. Close the computer cover.
4. Connect your computer and devices
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page
System Setup
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Overview
Entering System Setup
System Setup Options
Boot Sequence
Clearing Forgotten Passwords
Clearing CMOS Settings
Overview
Use system setup as follows:
l To change the system configuration information after you add, change, or remove any hardware in your computer
l To set or change a user-selectable option such as the user password
l To read the current amount of memory or set the type of hard drive installed
Before you use system setup, it is recommended that you write down the system setup screen information for future reference.
Entering System Setup
1. Turn on (or restart) your computer.
2. When the blue DELL™ logo is displayed, you must watch for the F2 prompt to appear.
3. Once this F2 prompt appears, press immediately.
4. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then, shut down your
computer and try again.
System Setup Screens
The system setup screen displays current or changeable configuration information for your computer. Information on the screen is divided into three areas: the
options list, active options field, and key functions.
NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes can make your computer work
incorrectly.
NOTE: The F2 prompt indicates that the keyboard has initialized. This prompt can appear very quickly, so you must watch for it to display, and then
press . If you press before you are prompted, this keystroke will be lost.
Options List — This field appears on the left side of
the system setup window. The field is a scrollable list
containing features that define the configuration of
your computer, including installed hardware, power
conservation, and security features.
Scroll up and down the list with the up- and downarrow keys. As an option is highlighted, the Option
Field displays more information about that option
and the option's current and available settings. By
pressing or the left and right arrow keys,
you can toggle between a primary topic (collapsed)
and subtopics (expanded).
Option Field — This field contains information about
each option. In this field you can view your current
settings and make changes to your settings.
Use the right and left arrow keys to highlight an
option. Press to make that selection active.System Setup Options
Key Functions — This field appears below the Option
Field and lists keys and their functions within the
active system setup field.
NOTE: Depending on your computer and installed devices, the items listed in this section may not appear, or may not appear exactly as listed.
System
Processor
Info
Displays the following information for the processor installed in the system: Processor Type, Processor Clock Speed, Processor Bus Speed, Processor Cache Size, Processor ID
number, whether the processor is Hyperthreading Capable or multiple-core capable, and if
the processor has 64-bit Technology.
Memory Info
Displays the amount of Installed Memory, Memory Speed, Memory Channel Mode, and a
description of the Memory Technology. This option also displays a table that describes the memory size, whether the memory module is ECC capable, single or dual rank, type, and
organization.
PCI Info Displays the contents of each PCI slot.
Date/Time Controls the system's internal calendar and clock.
Boot
Sequence
(Diskette
drive
default)
Determines the order in which the system searches for boot devices during system startup.
NOTE: If you insert a boot device and restart the computer, this option appears in the system
setup menu. To boot from a USB memory device, select the USB device and move it so it
becomes the first device in the list.
Drives
Diskette
Drive
(Internal
default)
Enables and disables the floppy drives and sets read permission for the internal floppy drive. Off disables all floppy drives. USB enables the USB floppy drive. Internal enables the internal
floppy drive. Read Only enables the internal drive controller and allows the internal floppy
drive read-only permission.
NOTE: Operating systems with USB support will recognize USB floppy drives regardless of this
setting.
Drives 0
through 3
(On
default)
Enables or disables an ATA or SATA device (such as hard-drive, CD drive, or DVD drive). On
enables the interface so that the device can be used.
Displays the Controller type (ATA or SATA), Port number the drive is using, Drive ID number,
Capacity, and whether the drive is controlled by the BIOS.
SATA
Operation
(Normal
default)
Determines the integrated SATA controller's operating mode:
Normal – native mode, which provides the highest drive performance and optimal flexibility.
Combination – combination mode, which offers compatibility with versions of the operating
system that do not support SATA drives.
Onboard Devices
Integrated NIC
(On default)
Enables or disables the integrated NIC controller. Settings are On, Off, or On w/ PXE. When the On w/ PXE setting is active (available only for setting up a future boot
process), the computer prompts you to press .
Pressing this key combination causes a menu to display that allows you to select a method
for booting from a network server. If a boot routine is not available from the network
server, the computer attempts to boot from the next device in the boot sequence list.
Integrated
Audio
Controller
Enables or disables the onboard audio controller.
Front USB Ports
(On default)
Enables or disables the front USB ports.
USB for Flexbay
(On default)
On enables internal USB for FlexBay.
NOTE: This USB option appears only if a FlexBay device is installed.
Video
Primary
Video
(Auto
Specifies which video controller is primary when two video controllers are present on the
computer. Auto enables the add-in video controller. Onboard enables the integrated video
controller.default)
Video
Memory Size
(8 MB
default)
Configures the system memory allocation reserved for the integrated video controller. Settings
are 1MB and 8MB.
Performance
HyperThreading
(On default)
Determines whether the physical processor appears as one or two logical processors.
The performance of some applications improve with additional logical processors installed. On enables hyperthreading.
SpeedStep
(On default)
Enables SpeedStep for all supported processors in the computer.
Hard Drive
Acoustics
(Bypass default)
l Bypass (default) — Your computer does not test or change the current acoustics mode setting.
l Quiet — The hard drive operates at its most quiet setting.
l Suggested — The hard drive operates at the level suggested by the drive manufacturer.
l Performance — The hard drive operates at its maximum speed.
NOTE: Switching to performance mode will cause the drive heads to move faster, causing
the hard drive to be noisier. However, some drives may not see an increase in data
transfer rates.
NOTE: Changing the acoustics setting does not alter your hard drive image.
Security
Admin
Password
(Not Set
default)
Displays the current status of your System Setup program's password security feature and
allows you to verify and assign a new admin password.
System
Password
(Not Set
default)
Displays the current status of the system's password security feature and allows a new system
password to be assigned and verified.
Password
Changes
Determines the interaction between the System password and the Admin password. Locked
prevents a user without a valid Admin password from being able to modify the System
password. Unlocked allows a user with a valid Admin password to modify the system
password.
Execute
Disable
(On
default)
Enables or disables Execute Disable memory protection technology.
Power Management
AC
Recovery
(Off
default)
Determines how the system responds when AC power is re-applied after a power loss. Off
commands the system to stay off when the power is re-applied. You must press the front-panel
power button before the system turns on. On commands the system to turn on when the power
is re-applied. Last commands the system to return to the last power state the system was in
just before it was turned off.
Auto
Power On
(Off
default)
Sets the computer to automatically turn on. Off disables this feature. Everyday turns the
computer on every day at the time set in Auto Power Time. Weekdays turns the computer on
every day from Monday through Friday at the time set in Auto Power Time.
NOTE: This feature does not work if you turn off your computer using a power strip or surge
protector.
Auto
Power
Time
Sets time to automatically turn on the computer.
Time is kept in the standard 12-hour format (hours:minutes). Change the startup time by
pressing the right- or left-arrow key to increase or decrease the numbers, or type numbers in
both the date and time fields.
Suspend
Mode
Sets the computer's suspend mode. The options are S1, a suspend state where the computer is
running in a low-power mode, and S3, a standby state where the power is reduced or turned off
for most components, however, system memory remains active.
Maintenance
Load
Defaults Restores System Setup options to their factory defaults.Boot Sequence
This feature allows you to change the boot sequence for devices.
Option Settings
l Diskette Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy drive. If the floppy disk in the drive is not bootable, if no floppy disk is in the drive, or if
there is no floppy drive installed in the computer, the computer generates an error message.
l Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message.
l CD Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the CD drive. If no CD is in the drive, or if the CD has no operating system, the computer generates an
error message.
l USB Flash Device — Insert the memory device into a USB port and restart the computer. When F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of
the screen, press . The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu.
Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot
You can use this feature, for example, to restart your computer to a USB device such as a floppy drive, memory key, or CD-RW drive.
1. If you are booting to a USB device, connect the USB device to a USB connector (see "Front View of the Computer" and "Back View of the Computer").
2. Turn on (or restart) your computer.
3. When F2 = Setup, F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press .
If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then shut down your
computer and try again.
The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices. Each device has a number next to it.
4. At the bottom of the menu, enter the number of the device that is to be used for the current boot only.
For example, if you are booting to a USB memory key, highlight USB Flash Device and press .
Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots
Event Log Allows you to view the Event Log. Entries are marked R for Read and U for Unread. Mark All
Entries Read puts an R to the left of all the entries. Clear Log clears the Event Log.
POST Behavior
Fastboot
(On
default)
When enabled, this feature reduces computer startup time by bypassing some compatibility
steps. Off does not skip any steps during computer startup. On starts the system more quickly.
Numlock Key
(On
default)
Determines the functionality of the numeric keys on the right side of your keyboard. Off
commands the right keypad keys to function as arrows. On commands the right keypad keys to
function as numbers.
POST
Hotkeys
Determines whether the sign-on screen displays a message stating the keystroke sequence
that is required to enter the Setup program or the Quickboot feature. Setup & Boot Menu
displays both messages
(F2=Setup and F12=Boot Menu). Setup displays the setup message only (F2=Setup). Boot Menu displays the Quickboot message only (F12=Boot Menu). None displays no message.
Keyboard
Errors
When set to Report (enabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will display the
error message and prompt you to press to continue or press to enter System
Setup.
When set to Do Not Report (disabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will
display the error message and continue booting the system.
NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure that your device is bootable, check the device documentation.
NOTE: If you are booting to a USB floppy drive, you must first set the floppy drive to OFF in system setup.
NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure your device is bootable, check the device documentation.1. Enter system setup.
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot Sequence menu option and press to access the menu.
3. Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices.
4. Press the spacebar to enable or disable a device (enabled devices have a checkmark).
5. Press plus (+) or minus (–) to move a selected device up or down the list.
Clearing Forgotten Passwords
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board, and attach the jumper plug to pins 2 and 3 to clear the password.
3. Close the computer cover.
4. Connect your computer and monitor to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
5. After the Microsoft® Windows® desktop appears on your computer, shut down your computer. Turn off the monitor and disconnect it from the electrical
outlet.
6. Disconnect the computer power cable from the electrical outlet, and press the power button to ground the system board.
7. Open the computer cover.
8. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board and attach the jumper to pins 1 and 2 to re-enable the password feature.
9. Close the computer cover.
NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: When you receive your computer, the jumper plug is attached to pins 1 and 2.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
Clearing CMOS Settings
1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
2. Reset the current CMOS settings:
a. Locate the 3-pin CMOS jumper (RTCRST) on the system board.
b. Remove the jumper plug from pins 2 and 3.
c. Place the jumper plug on pins 1 and 2 and wait for approximately 5 seconds.
d. Replace the jumper plug on pins 2 and 3.
3. Close the computer cover.
4. Connect your computer and devices
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page
Specifications
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Processor Expansion Bus
Memory Connectors
Computer Information Controls and Lights
Video Power
Audio Physical
Drives Environmental
Processor
Processor type Intel® Pentium® 4 5XXX and 6XXX processors with Hyper-Threading technology
NOTE: Not all Pentium 4 processors support HyperThreading technology.
Level 1 (L1) cache 16 KB
Level 2 (L2) cache 1 MB for Pentium 5XXX processors
2 MB for Pentium 6XXX processors
(depending on your computer configuration)
pipelined-burst, eight-way set associative, write-back
SRAM
Memory
Type 400-MHz and 533-MHz DDR2 unbuffered SDRAM
Memory connectors four
Memory capacities 256 MB, 512 MB, or 1 GB non-ECC
Maximum memory 4 GB
NOTE: See "Addressing Memory With 4-GB
Configurations" to verify the amount of memory
available to the operating system.
BIOS address F0000h
Computer Information
Chipset Intel 945G Express
DMA channels eight
Interrupt levels 24
BIOS chip (NVRAM) 4 Mb
NIC Integrated network interface capable of 10/100
communication
System clock 800- or 1066-MHz data rate
Video
Type Integrated Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 950
(GMA950)
Audio
Type Sigmatel STAC9220
Expansion Bus
Bus type PCI 2.3
PCI Express x1 and x16
Bus speed PCI: 33 MHz
PCI Express:
x1 slot bidirectional speed - 500 MB/s
x16 slot bidirectional speed - 8 GB/s
PCI
connectors twoconnector size 120 pins
connector data width (maximum) 32 bits
PCI Express
connector one x1
connector size 36 pins
connector data width (maximum) 1 PCI Express lane
PCI Express
connector one x16
connector size 164 pins
connector data width (maximum) 16 PCI Express lanes
Drives
Externally accessible:
one 3.5-inch FlexBay (may contain an optional floppy
drive or an optional Media Card Reader)
two 5.25-inch drive bays
Available devices Serial ATA drives (2), floppy drive, USB memory
devices, CD drive, CD-RW drive, DVD drive, DVD-RW
drive, DVD and CD-RW combo drive, and Media Card
Reader
Internally accessible: two bays for 1-inch high serial ATA hard drives
Connectors
External connectors:
Video 15-hole connector
Network adapter RJ-45 connector
USB two front-panel and five back-panel USB 2.0-
compliant connectors
Audio five connectors for line-in, line-out, microphone/ sidesurround, surround, and center/subwoofer connector
(LFE channel); two front-panel connectors for
headphones and microphone
System board connectors:
Primary IDE drive one 40-pin connector
Serial ATA two 7-pin connectors
FlexBay Drive one USB 10-pin header for optional Media Card
Reader (3.5-inch bay device)
Floppy drive one 33-pin connector
Fan one 5-pin connectors
PCI 2.3 two 120-pin connectors
PCI Express x1 one 36-pin connector
PCI Express x16 one 164-pin connector
Controls and Lights
Power button push button
Power light green light — Blinking green in sleep state; solid
green for power-on state.
amber light — Blinking amber indicates a problem with the power supply inside the computer. If the
system cannot boot and there is a solid amber light,
this indicates a problem with the system board (see
"Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual).
Hard-drive access light green
Link integrity light (on integrated network adapter) green light — A good connection exists between a
10-Mbps network and the computer.
orange light — A good connection exists between a
100-Mbps network and the computer.
off (no light) — The computer is not detecting a
physical connection to the network.
Activity light (on integrated network adapter) yellow blinking light
Diagnostic lights four lights on the front panel (see "Diagnostic
Lights")
Standby power light AUX_PWR on the system board
Power
DC power supply:Back to Contents Page
Wattage 305 W
Heat dissipation 1039 BTU/hr
Voltage (see the safety instructions in the
Product Information Guide for important voltage
setting information)
90 to 135 V and 180 to 265 V at 50/60 Hz
Backup battery 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell
Physical
Height 41.4 cm (16.3 inches)
Width 18.8 cm (7.4 inches)
Depth 45.7 cm (18.0 inches)
Weight 12.7 kg (28 lb)
Environmental
Temperature:
Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F)
Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F)
Relative humidity 20% to 80% (noncondensing)
Maximum vibration:
Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min
Storage 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min
Maximum shock:
Operating bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 20
inches/sec (50.8 cm/sec)
Storage 27-G faired square wave with a velocity change of
200 inches/sec (508 cm/sec)
Altitude:
Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)
Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)Back to Contents Page
Specifications
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Processor
Memory
Computer Information
Video
Audio
Drives
Expansion Bus
Connectors
Controls and Lights
Power
Physical
Environmental
Processor
Processor type Intel® Pentium® 4 5XXX and 6XXX processors with Hyper-Threading technology
NOTE: Not all Pentium 4 processors support HyperThreading technology.
Level 1 (L1) cache 16 KB
Level 2 (L2) cache 1 MB for Pentium 5XXX processors
2 MB for Pentium 6XXX processors
(depending on your computer configuration)
pipelined-burst, eight-way set associative, write-back
SRAM
Memory
Type 400-MHz and 533-MHz DDR2 unbuffered SDRAM
Memory connectors four
Memory capacities 256 MB, 512 MB, or 1 GB non-ECC
Maximum memory 4 GB
NOTE: See "Addressing Memory With 4-GB
Configurations" to verify the amount of memory
available to the operating system.
BIOS address F0000h
Computer Information
Chipset Intel 945G Express
DMA channels eight
Interrupt levels 24
BIOS chip (NVRAM) 4 Mb
NIC Integrated network interface capable of 10/100
communication
System clock 800- or 1066-MHz data rate
Video
Type Integrated Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 950
(GMA950)
Audio
Type Sigmatel STAC9220
Expansion Bus
Bus type PCI 2.3
PCI Express x1 and x16
Bus speed PCI: 33 MHz
PCI Express:
x1 slot bidirectional speed - 500 MB/s
x16 slot bidirectional speed - 8 GB/s
PCIconnectors two
connector size 120 pins
connector data width (maximum) 32 bits
PCI Express
connector one x1
connector size 36 pins
connector data width (maximum) 1 PCI Express lane
PCI Express
connector one x16
connector size 164 pins
connector data width (maximum) 16 PCI Express lanes
Drives
Externally accessible:
one 3.5-inch FlexBay (may contain an optional floppy
drive or an optional Media Card Reader)
two 5.25-inch drive bays
Available devices Serial ATA drives (2), floppy drive, USB memory
devices, CD drive, CD-RW drive, DVD drive, DVD-RW
drive, DVD and CD-RW combo drive, and Media Card
Reader
Internally accessible: two bays for 1-inch high serial ATA hard drives
Connectors
External connectors:
Video 15-hole connector
Network adapter RJ-45 connector
USB two front-panel and five back-panel USB 2.0-
compliant connectors
Audio five connectors for line-in, line-out, microphone/ sidesurround, surround, and center/subwoofer connector
(LFE channel); two front-panel connectors for
headphones and microphone
System board connectors:
Primary IDE drive one 40-pin connector
Serial ATA two 7-pin connectors
FlexBay Drive one USB 10-pin header for optional Media Card
Reader (3.5-inch bay device)
Floppy drive one 33-pin connector
Fan one 5-pin connector
PCI 2.3 two 120-pin connectors
PCI Express x1 one 36-pin connector
PCI Express x16 one 164-pin connector
Controls and Lights
Power button push button
Power light green light — Blinking green in sleep state; solid
green for power-on state.
amber light — Blinking amber indicates a problem with the power supply inside the computer. If the
system cannot boot and there is a solid amber light,
this indicates a problem with the system board (see
"Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual).
Hard-drive access light green
Link integrity light (on integrated network adapter) green light — A good connection exists between a
10-Mbps network and the computer.
orange light — A good connection exists between a
100-Mbps network and the computer.
off (no light) — The computer is not detecting a
physical connection to the network.
Activity light (on integrated network adapter) yellow blinking light
Diagnostic lights four lights on the front panel (see "Diagnostic
Lights")
Standby power light AUX_PWR on the system boardBack to Contents Page
Power
DC power supply:
Wattage 305 W
Heat dissipation 1039 BTU/hr
Voltage (see the safety instructions in the
Product Information Guide for important voltage
setting information)
90 to 135 V and 180 to 265 V at 50/60 Hz
Backup battery 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell
Physical
Height 41.3 cm (16.3 inches)
Width 18.7 cm (7.4 inches)
Depth 45.9 cm (18.0 inches)
Weight 14.2 kg (32 lb)
Environmental
Temperature:
Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F)
Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F)
Relative humidity 20% to 80% (noncondensing)
Maximum vibration:
Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min
Storage 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min
Maximum shock:
Operating bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 20
inches/sec (50.8 cm/sec)
Storage 27-G faired square wave with a velocity change of
200 inches/sec (508 cm/sec)
Altitude:
Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)
Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)Back to Contents Page
Technical Overview
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Inside View of Your Computer
System Board Components
Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments
Inside View of Your Computer
Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin."
System Board Components
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments
DC Main Power Connector P1 DC Processor Power Connector P2
DC Peripheral Connectors P3 and P5
DC FDD Connector P7
Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire
1 +3.3 VDC* Orange
2 +3.3 VDC* Orange
3 COM Black
4 +5VDC Red
5 COM Black
6 +5 VDC Red
7 COM Black
8 POK Gray
9 +5 VFP Purple
10 +12 VBDC White
11 +12 VBDC White
12 +3.3 VDC* Orange
13 +3.3 VDC*/SE* Orange
14 –12 VDC Blue
15 COM Black
16 PS-ON Green
17 COM Black
18 COM Black
19 COM Black
20 NA NA
21 +5 VDC Red
22 +5 VDC Red
23 +5 VDC Red
24 COM Black
*The orange +3.3 VDC output wires must be 16 AWG. The +3.3 VDC terminals are high current type (9 A current rating/Molex-HCS type).
*The +3.3VDC/SE is a brown sense wire for +3.3VDC and is optional.
Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire
1 COM Black
2 COM Black
3 +12 VADC Yellow
4 +12 VADC Yellow
Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire
1 +3.3 VDC Orange
2 COM Black
3 +5 VADC Red
4 COM Black
5 +12 VBDC White
Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire
1 +5 VDC Red
2 COM Black
3 COM Black
4 +12 VADC YellowDC Peripheral Connectors P8 and P9
Back to Contents Page
Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire
1 +12 VBDC White
2 COM Black
3 COM Black
4 +5 VDC RedBack to Contents Page
Technical Overview
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Inside View of Your Computer
System Board Components
Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments
Inside View of Your Computer
System Board Components
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments
DC Main Power Connector P1 DC Processor Power Connector P2
DC Peripheral Connectors P3 and P5
DC FDD Connector P7
Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire
1 +3.3 VDC* Orange
2 +3.3 VDC* Orange
3 COM Black
4 +5VDC Red
5 COM Black
6 +5 VDC Red
7 COM Black
8 POK Gray
9 +5 VFP Purple
10 +12 VBDC White
11 +12 VBDC White
12 +3.3 VDC* Orange
13 +3.3 VDC*/SE* Orange
14 –12 VDC Blue
15 COM Black
16 PS-ON Green
17 COM Black
18 COM Black
19 COM Black
20 NA NA
21 +5 VDC Red
22 +5 VDC Red
23 +5 VDC Red
24 COM Black
*The orange +3.3 VDC output wires must be 16 AWG. The +3.3 VDC terminals are high current type (9 A current rating/Molex-HCS type).
*The +3.3VDC/SE is a brown sense wire for +3.3VDC and is optional.
Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire
1 COM Black
2 COM Black
3 +12 VADC Yellow
4 +12 VADC Yellow
Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire
1 +3.3 VDC Orange
2 COM Black
3 +5 VADC Red
4 COM Black
5 +12 VBDC White
Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire
1 +5 VDC Red
2 COM Black
3 COM Black
4 +12 VADC YellowDC Peripheral Connectors P8 and P9
Back to Contents Page
Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire
1 +12 VBDC White
2 COM Black
3 COM Black
4 +5 VDC RedBack to Contents Page
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dimension are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any
proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Model DCSM
September 2005 Rev. A01
Back to Contents Page
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.Back to Contents Page
Advanced Troubleshooting
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Dell Diagnostics
System Lights
Diagnostic Lights
Beep Codes
Dell Diagnostics
When to Use the Dell Diagnostics
If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in this section and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical
assistance.
It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin.
Enter system setup to review your computer's configuration information, and ensure that the device you want to test displays in system setup and is active.
Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive or from the optional Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD).
Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive
1. Turn on (or restart) your computer.
2. When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately.
If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your
computer and try again.
3. When the boot device list appears, highlight Boot to Utility Partition and press .
4. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run.
Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Optional Drivers and Utilities CD
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD.
2. Shut down and restart the computer.
When the DELL logo appears, press immediately.
If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again.
3. When the boot device list appears, highlight IDE CD-ROM Device and press .
4. Select the IDE CD-ROM Device option from the CD boot menu.
5. Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD) is optional, and as such, may not ship with all computers.
NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers.
NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your (optional) Drivers and Utilities
CD.
NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in
system setup.6. Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu.
7. Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics.
8. Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer.
9. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run.
Dell Diagnostics Main Menu
1. After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want.
2. If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and
problem description and follow the instructions on the screen.
If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
3. If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information.
4. When the tests are completed, if you are running the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities CD, remove the CD.
5. Close the test screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen.
System Lights
Your power button light and hard-drive activity light may indicate a computer problem.
Option Function
Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to
increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly.
Extended
Test
Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically.
Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run.
Symptom
Tree
Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having.
NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag.
Your computer's Service Tag is listed in the system information option in system setup.
Tab Function
Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered.
Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description.
Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test.
Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device.
The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays
the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on
your computer or all devices attached to your computer.
Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings.
Power Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution
Solid green Power is on, and the computer is operating
normally.
No corrective action is required.
Blinking green The computer is in the suspended state
(Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows
XP).
Press the power button, move the mouse, or press a key on the keyboard to wake the computer.
Blinks green several times and
then turns off
A configuration error exists. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified.
Solid amber The Dell Diagnostics is running a test, or a
device on the system board may be faulty
or incorrectly installed.
If the Dell Diagnostics is running, allow the testing to complete.
Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Diagnostic Lights
To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four diagnostic lights labeled "1," "2," "3," and "4" on the front panel. When the computer starts
normally, the lights flash. After the computer starts, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights
identify the problem.the patterns or codes on the lights change as the boot process completes. If the POST portion of system boot completes successfully, all
four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions during the POST process, the pattern displayed on the lights may help identify where in the
process the computer halted.
If the computer does not boot, contact Dell for technical assistance (see your
computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
Blinking amber A power supply or system board failure has
occurred.
Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Also,
see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual.
Solid green and a beep code
during POST
A problem was detected while the BIOS was executing.
See "Beep Codes" for instructions on diagnosing the beep code. Also, check
the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified.
Solid green power light and no
beep code and no video during
POST
The monitor or the graphics card may be
faulty or incorrectly installed.
Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. See
"Video and Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual.
Solid green power light and no
beep code but the computer
locks up during POST
An integrated system board device may be
faulty.
Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. If the
problem is not identified, contact Dell for technical assistance. See your
computer Owner's Manual for information on how to contact Dell.
Hard-Drive Activity Light
Problem Description Suggested Resolution
Solid green The hard-drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is operating.
No corrective action is
required.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution
The computer is in a normal "off" condition,
has successfully booted to the operating
system, or a possible pre-BIOS failure has
occurred.
Plug the computer into a working electrical outlet and press the power button. Also see
"Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual.
A possible processor failure has occurred. Contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
Memory modules are detected, but a memory
failure has occurred.
l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall
one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall
an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or
reinstalled all modules without error.
l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer.
l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for
information about how to contact Dell).
A possible graphics card failure has occurred. l If the computer has a graphics card, remove the card, and then restart the
computer.
l If the problem still exists, install a graphics card that you know works and restart
the computer.
l If the problem persists or the computer has integrated graphics, contact Dell (see
your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
A possible floppy or hard drive failure has
occurred.
Reseat all power and data cables and restart the computer.
A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer.
No memory modules are detected. l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall
one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall
an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or
reinstalled all modules without error.
l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer.
l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for
information about how to contact Dell).
Memory modules are detected, but a memory
configuration or compatibility error exists.
l Ensure that no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements
exist (see "Memory").
l Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your
computer (see "Memory").
l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for
information about how to contact Dell).Beep Codes
Your computer might emit a series of beeps during start-up if the monitor cannot display errors or problems. This series of beeps, called a beep code, identifies
a problem. One possible beep code (code 1-3-1) consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This beep code tells you that the computer
encountered a memory problem.
If your computer beeps during start-up:
1. Write down the beep code.
2. Run the Dell Diagnostics to identify a more serious cause.
3. Contact Dell for technical assistance (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
A possible expansion card failure has
occurred.
1. Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not a graphics card) (see "Cards")
and restarting the computer.
2. If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card,
and then restart the computer.
3. Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the
last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (see "Resolving Software
and Hardware Compatibilities" in your computer Owner's Manual).
4. If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for
information about how to contact Dell).
Another failure has occurred. l Ensure that the cables are properly connected to the system board from the hard
drive, CD drive, and DVD drive (see "System Board Components").
l If there is an error message on your screen identifying a problem with a device
(such as the floppy drive or hard drive), check the device to ensure that it is
functioning properly.
l The operating system is attempting to boot from a device (such as the floppy drive
or hard drive); check system setup to ensure that the boot sequence is correct for
the devices installed on your computer.
l Check the computer message that appears on your monitor screen.
l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for
information about how to contact Dell).
The computer is in a normal operating
condition after POST.
NOTE: The diagnostic lights are not lit after
the system successfully boots to the
operating system.
None.
Code Cause
1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure
1-1-3 NVRAM read/write failure
1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure
1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure
1-2-2 DMA initialization failure
1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure
1-3 Video Memory Test failure
1-3-1 through 2-4-4 Memory not being properly identified or used
3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure
3-1-2 Master DMA register failure
3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure
3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure
3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure
3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure
3-3-1 NVRAM power loss
3-3-2 Invalid NVRAM configuration
3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure
3-4-1 Screen initialization failure
3-4-2 Screen retrace failure
3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure
4-2-1 No timer tick
4-2-2 Shutdown failure
4-2-3 Gate A20 failureBack to Contents Page
4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode
4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh
4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure
4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stopped
4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure
4-4-2 Failure to decompress code to shadowed memory
4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure
4-4-4 Cache test failureBack to Contents Page
Advanced Troubleshooting
Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual
Dell Diagnostics
System Lights
Diagnostic Lights
Beep Codes
Dell Diagnostics
When to Use the Dell Diagnostics
If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in this section and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical
assistance.
Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive or from the optional Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD).
Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive
1. Turn on (or restart) your computer.
2. When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately.
If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your
computer and try again.
3. When the boot device list appears, highlight Boot to Utility Partition and press .
4. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run.
Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Optional Drivers and Utilities CD
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD.
2. Shut down and restart the computer.
When the DELL logo appears, press immediately.
If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again.
3. When the boot device list appears, highlight IDE CD-ROM Device and press .
4. Select the IDE CD-ROM Device option from the CD boot menu.
5. Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears.
6. Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD) is optional, and as such, may not ship with all computers.
NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers.
.
NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your (optional) Drivers and Utilities
CD.
NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in
system setup.7. Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics.
8. Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer.
9. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run.
Dell Diagnostics Main Menu
1. After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want.
2. If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and
problem description and follow the instructions on the screen.
If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
3. If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information.
4. When the tests are completed, if you are running the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities CD, remove the CD.
5. Close the test screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen.
System Lights
Your power button light and hard-drive activity light may indicate a computer problem.
Option Function
Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to
increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly.
Extended
Test
Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically.
Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run.
Symptom
Tree
Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having.
NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag.
Your computer's Service Tag is listed in the system information option in system setup.
Tab Function
Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered.
Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description.
Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test.
Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device.
The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays
the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on
your computer or all devices attached to your computer.
Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings.
Power Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution
Solid green Power is on, and the computer is operating
normally.
No corrective action is required.
Blinking green The computer is in the suspended state
(Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows
XP).
Press the power button, move the mouse, or press a key on the keyboard to wake the computer.
Blinks green several times and
then turns off
A configuration error exists. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified.
Solid amber The Dell Diagnostics is running a test, or a
device on the system board may be faulty
or incorrectly installed.
If the Dell Diagnostics is running, allow the testing to complete.
Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified.
If the computer does not boot, contact Dell for technical assistance (see your
computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).Diagnostic Lights
To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four diagnostic lights labeled "1," "2," "3," and "4" on the front panel. When the computer starts
normally, the lights flash. After the computer starts, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights
identify the problem.
Blinking amber A power supply or system board failure has
occurred.
Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Also,
see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual.
Solid green and a beep code
during POST
A problem was detected while the BIOS was executing.
See "Beep Codes" for instructions on diagnosing the beep code. Also, check
the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified.
Solid green power light and no
beep code and no video during
POST
The monitor or the graphics card may be
faulty or incorrectly installed.
Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. See
"Video and Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual.
Solid green power light and no
beep code but the computer
locks up during POST
An integrated system board device may be
faulty.
Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. If the
problem is not identified, contact Dell for technical assistance. See your
computer Owner's Manual for information on how to contact Dell.
Hard-Drive Activity Light
Problem Description Suggested Resolution
Solid green The hard-drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is operating.
No corrective action is
required.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution
The computer is in a normal "off" condition,
has successfully booted to the operating
system, or a possible pre-BIOS failure has
occurred.
Plug the computer into a working electrical outlet and press the power button. Also see
"Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual.
A possible processor failure has occurred. Contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
Memory modules are detected, but a memory
failure has occurred.
l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall
one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall
an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or
reinstalled all modules without error.
l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer.
l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for
information about how to contact Dell).
A possible graphics card failure has occurred. l If the computer has a graphics card, remove the card, and then restart the
computer.
l If the problem still exists, install a graphics card that you know works and restart
the computer.
l If the problem persists or the computer has integrated graphics, contact Dell (see
your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
A possible floppy or hard drive failure has
occurred.
Reseat all power and data cables and restart the computer.
A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer.
No memory modules are detected. l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall
one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall
an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or
reinstalled all modules without error.
l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer.
l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for
information about how to contact Dell).
Memory modules are detected, but a memory
configuration or compatibility error exists.
l Ensure that no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements
exist (see "Memory").
l Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your
computer (see "Memory").
l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for
information about how to contact Dell).
A possible expansion card failure has
occurred.
1. Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not a graphics card) (see "Cards")
and restarting the computer.
2. If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card,
and then restart the computer.
3. Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the
last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (see "Resolving Software Beep Codes
Your computer might emit a series of beeps during start-up if the monitor cannot display errors or problems. This series of beeps, called a beep code, identifies
a problem. One possible beep code (code 1-3-1) consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This beep code tells you that the computer
encountered a memory problem.
If your computer beeps during start-up:
1. Write down the beep code.
2. Run the Dell Diagnostics to identify a more serious cause.
3. Contact Dell for technical assistance (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).
and Hardware Compatibilities" in your computer Owner's Manual).
4. If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for
information about how to contact Dell).
Another failure has occurred. l Ensure that the cables are properly connected to the system board from the hard
drive, CD drive, and DVD drive (see "System Board Components").
l If there is an error message on your screen identifying a problem with a device
(such as the floppy drive or hard drive), check the device to ensure that it is
functioning properly.
l The operating system is attempting to boot from a device (such as the floppy drive
or hard drive); check system setup to ensure that the boot sequence is correct for
the devices installed on your computer.
l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for
information about how to contact Dell).
The computer is in a normal operating
condition after POST.
NOTE: The diagnostic lights are not lit after
the system successfully boots to the
operating system.
None.
Code Cause
1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure
1-1-3 NVRAM read/write failure
1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure
1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure
1-2-2 DMA initialization failure
1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure
1-3 Video Memory Test failure
1-3-1 through 2-4-4 Memory not being properly identified or used
3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure
3-1-2 Master DMA register failure
3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure
3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure
3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure
3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure
3-3-1 NVRAM power loss
3-3-2 Invalid NVRAM configuration
3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure
3-4-1 Screen initialization failure
3-4-2 Screen retrace failure
3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure
4-2-1 No timer tick
4-2-2 Shutdown failure
4-2-3 Gate A20 failure
4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode
4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh
4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure
4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stoppedBack to Contents Page
4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure
4-4-2 Failure to decompress code to shadowed memory
4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure
4-4-4 Cache test failure
Quick Start
Guida rapida | Démarrage rapide
البدء السريع | Schnellstart
Uniquely Dell
support.dell.com/manuals | www.dell.com
Information in this document is subject to change
without notice.
© 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo,
and Inspiron™ are trademarks of Dell Inc.
2011 - 02
Regulatory model: D11M
Regulatory type: D03M004
Computer model: Dell Inspiron 620
Le informazioni contenute nel presente documento
sono soggette a modifica senza preavviso.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Tutti i diritti riservati.
Marchi commerciali utilizzati nel presente documento:
Dell™, il logo DELL e Inspiron™ sono marchi
commerciali di Dell Inc.
2011 - 02
Modello normativo: D11M
Tipo normativo: D03M004
Modello di computer: Dell Inspiron 620
Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à
modification sans préavis.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell™, le
logo DELL et Inspiron™ sont des marques de Dell Inc.
2011 - 02
Modèle réglementaire : D11M
Type réglementaire : D03M004
Modèle de l’ordinateur : Dell Inspiron 620
Die in diesem Dokument enthaltenen Informationen
können ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert
werden.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
In diesem Text verwendete Marken: Dell™, das DELL
Logo und Inspiron™ sind Marken von Dell Inc.
2011 - 02
Modellnummer: D11M
Modelltyp: D03M004
Computermodell: Dell Inspiron 620
المعلومات الواردة بهذا المستند عرضة للتغيير دون إشعار.
حقوق النشر © لعام 2011 لشركة .Dell Inc كافة الحقوق محفوظة.
العالمات التجارية المستخدمة في هذا النص: ™Dell وشعار DELL
و™Inspiron هي عالمات تجارية لشركة .Dell Inc
2011 - 02
الطراز التنظيمي: D11M
النوع التنظيمي: D03M004
طراز الكمبيوتر: الطراز Inspiron 620 من Dell
Connect the power
cable
Collegare il cavo di alimentazione
Branchez le câble d’alimentation
Schließen Sie das Netzkabel an
توصيل كابل الطاقة
Connect the
network cable
(optional)
Collegare il cavo di rete (opzionale)
Branchez le câble réseau (facultatif)
Schließen Sie das Netzwerkkabel an (optional)
توصيل كابل الشبكة )اختياري(
Press the power
button
Premere il pulsante di accensione
Appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation
Drücken Sie den Betriebsschalter
اضغط على زر الطاقة
Connect the
keyboard and
mouse
Collegare la tastiera e il mouse
Branchez le clavier et la souris
Schließen Sie Tastatur und Maus an
توصيل لوحة المفاتيح والماوس
Connection Type
Tipo di collegamento
Type de connexion
Verbindungstyp
نوع التوصيل
Computer
Computer
Ordinateur
Computer
الكمبيوت
Cable and Adapter
Cavo e adattatore
Câble et adaptateur
Kabelund Adapter
الكابل والمهايئ
Display
Schermo
Écran
Display
الشاشة
VGA VGA
DVI DVI
DVI VGA
HDMI HDMI
HDMI DVI
Connect the display
Collegare lo schermo
Branchez l’écran
Schließen Sie den Bildschirm an
توصيل الشاشة
Printed in PolandFeatures
1. Media Card Reader
2. Optical drive bays (2)
3. USB 2.0 connectors (2)
4. Microphone or line-in connector
5. Headphone connector
6. Power button and light
7. Hard drive activity light
8. Power supply light
9. Voltage selector switch
10. Power connector
11. Network connector and light
12. USB 2.0 connectors (6)
13. HDMI connector
14. VGA connector
15. Microphone connector
16. Expansion card slots (4)
17. Security cable slot
18. Padlock slot
19. Service tag and express service code
20. Front L/R line-out connector
21. Line-in connector
الميزات
1. قارئ بطاقات وسائط
2. فتحات إضافة محركات أقراص ضوئية )فتحتان(
)موصالن( USB 2.0 موصالت .3
4. ميكروفون أو موصل دخل خط
5. موصل سماعة رأس
6. زر ومصباح الطاقة
7. مصباح نشاط محرك األقراص الثابتة
8. مصباح مصدر الطاقة
9. مفتاح تحديد الجهد الكهربائي
10. موصل التيار
11. موصل ومصباح الشبكة
)موصالت ستة( USB 2.0 موصالت .12
HDMI موصل .13
VGA موصل .14
15. موصل ميكروفون
16. فتحات بطاقات التوسعة )4 فتحات(
17. فتحة كابل األمان
18. فتحة قفل
19. رقم الصيانة ورمز الخدمة السريعة
20. موصل خرج خط أمامي أيمن/أيسر
21. موصل دخل خط
Fonctionnalités
1. Lecteur de carte multimédia
2. Baies de lecteur optique (2)
3. Connecteurs USB 2.0 (2)
4. Microphone ou connecteur d’entrée
5. Prise casque
6. Bouton et voyant d’alimentation
7. Voyant d’activité du disque dur
8. Voyant d’alimentation
9. Sélecteur de tension
10. Connecteur d’alimentation
11. Connecteur et voyant réseau
12. Connecteurs USB 2.0 (6)
13. Connecteur HDMI
14. Connecteur VGA
15. Connecteur de microphone
16. Logements de carte d’extension (4)
17. Logement pour câble de sécurité
18. Logement pour cadenas
19. Numéro de service et code de service
express
20. Connecteur de sortie droite/gauche
avant
21. Connecteur d’entrée
Caratteristiche
1. Lettore di schede multimediali
2. Alloggiamenti delle unità ottiche (2)
3. Connettori USB 2.0 (2)
4. Microfono o connettore linea di ingresso
5. Connettore della cuffia
6. indicatore e pulsante di accensione
7. Indicatore di attività del disco rigido
8. indicatore dell’alimentatore
9. Selettore di tensione
10. Connettore di alimentazione
11. Connettore e indicatore di rete
12. Connettori USB 2.0 (6)
13. Connettore HDMI
14. Connettore VGA
15. Connettore del microfono
16. Alloggiamento per schede di
espansione (4)
17. Alloggiamento cavo di sicurezza
18. Alloggiamento per lucchetto
19. Numero di servizio e codice del servizio
espresso
20. Connettore della linea in uscita L/R
anteriore
21. Connettore linea di ingresso
Merkmale
1. Medienkartenlesegerät
2. Schächte für optisches Laufwerk (2)
3. USB 2.0-Anschlüsse (2)
4. Mikrofonanschluss/Line-In-Anschluss
5. Kopfhöreranschluss
6. Betriebsschalter und -anzeige
7. Aktivitätsanzeige für die Festplatte
8. Anzeige des Netzteils
9. Spannungswahlschalter
10. Netzanschluss
11. Netzwerkanschluss und -anzeige
12. USB 2.0-Anschlüsse (6)
13. HDMI-Anschluss
14. VGA-Anschluss
15. Mikrofonanschluss
16. Erweiterungskartensteckplätze (4)
17. Sicherheitskabelsteckplatz
18. Einschub für Vorhängeschloss
19. Service-Tag-Nummer und ExpressServicecode
20. L/R Line-Out-Anschluss (vorn)
21. Line-In-Anschluss
More Information
• To learn about the features and advanced
options available on your desktop, click
Start→ All Programs→ Dell Help
Documentation or go to
support.dell.com/manuals.
• To contact Dell for sales, tech support,
or customer service issues, go to
dell.com/ContactDell. Customers in the
United States, can call 800-WWW-DELL
(800-999-3355).
Ulteriori informazioni
• Per informazioni sulle funzionalità e le opzioni
avanzate disponibili sul computer desktop,
fare clic su Start→ Tutti i programmi→ Dell
Help Documentation oppure visitare il sito
support.dell.com/manuals.
• Per rivolgersi a Dell per problematiche relative
alla vendita, al supporto tecnico o all’assistenza
clienti, visitare il sito dell.com/ContactDell. Per
i clienti negli Stati Uniti, chiamare il numero
800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355).
En savoir plus
• Pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalités
et les options avancées de votre poste de
travail, cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les
programmes→ Documentation de l’aide Dell
ou visitez la page support.dell.com/manuals.
• Pour contacter Dell en cas de problèmes
concernant les ventes, le support technique
ou le service client, consultez la page
dell.com/ContactDell. Aux États-Unis,
appelez le 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355).
Weitere Informationen
• Weitere Informationen zu den Merkmalen
und erweiterten Optionen Ihres Desktops
finden Sie unter Start→ Programme→ Dell
Hilfedokumentation oder unter
http://support.euro.dell.com.
• Antworten auf alle Fragen zum Verkauf sowie
unseren technischen Support und unseren
Kundenservice finden Sie ebenfalls unter
http://support.euro.dell.com. Kunden in
den USA erreichen uns unter der Nummer
800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355).
مزيد من المعلومات
• للتعرف على الميزات والخيارات المتقدمة المتوفرة في
الكمبيوتر المكتبي الذي بحوزتك، انقر فوق Start )ابدأ(←
Dell Help ←)البرامج كافة( All Programs
Documentation )وثائق تعليمات Dell( أو انتقل إلى
.support.dell.com/manuals
• لالتصال بشركة Dell لالستفسار عن مسائل تتعلق بالمبيعات أو
الدعم الفني أو خدمة العمالء، انتقل إلى
dell.com/ContactDell. بالنسبة للعمالء في الواليات
المتحدة، يُرجى االتصال على 800-WWW-DELL
.)800-999-3355(
Información para NOM o Norma Oficial Mexicana
(sólo para México)
La información que se proporciona a
continuación aparecerá en el dispositivo
que se describe en este documento, en
conformidad con los requisitos de la Norma
Oficial Mexicana (NOM):
Importador:
Dell México S.A. de C.V.
Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - Piso 11°
Col. Lomas Altas
11950 México, D.F.
Número de modelo reglamentario: D11M
Voltaje de entrada: 115/230 V CA
Frecuencia de entrada: 50/60 Hz
Corriente nominal de salida: 6 A/7 A
Para obtener información detallada,
lea la información sobre seguridad incluida
con su equipo. Para obtener información
adicional sobre prácticas recomendadas de
seguridad, visite
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
8
9
10
14
15
13
12
11
16
19
17
18
20
21
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
Views
Viste | Vues | Ansichten | المناظر
GUIDE DE RÉFÉRENCE
INSPIRON™GUIDE DE RÉFÉRENCE
Modèle réglementaire : D11M Type réglementaire : D11M001
INSPIRON™Remarques, précautions et avertissements
REMARQUE : une REMARQUE fournit des informations importantes qui vous aident à
mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION vous avertit d'un risque d'endommagement du
matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème.
AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT signale un risque d'endommagement du matériel,
de blessure corporelle ou de mort.
__________________
Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement
interdite.
Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL, Inspiron™, Solution Station™, et DellConnect™ sont des
marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel® ,Celeron® et Pentium® sont des marques déposées et Core™ est une marque d'Intel Corporation
aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft®, Windows® et le logo du bouton Démarrer Windows sont soit des marques
commerciales soit des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays ; Blu-ray Disc™
est une marque de Blu-ray Disc Association ; Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. utilisée par Dell sous
licence.
Les autres marques et appellations commerciales utilisées dans ce document font référence aux entités propriétaires des
marques ou des noms de produit. Dell Inc. ne revendique aucun droit de propriété sur les marques et les appellations
commerciales ne lui appartenant pas.
2011 - 03 Rév. A003
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau
Inspiron......................... 5
Considérations préalables
à l'installation .......................5
Branchement de l'écran...............6
Branchement du clavier et de la souris...8
Branchement du câble réseau
(en option) .........................9
Branchement du câble d'alimentation ...10
Appui sur le bouton d'alimentation.....10
Installation du système d'exploitation... 11
Création d'un support de récupération
système (recommandé) ..............12
Installation du tuner TV (facultatif) .....13
Connexion à Internet (facultatif).......13
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau
Inspiron........................ 16
Fonctionnalités du panneau avant . . . . .16
Fonctionnalités du panneau arrière . . . 20
Connecteurs du panneau arrière ......22
Fonctionnalités logicielles ............24
Dell DataSafe Online Backup..........25
Dell Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Résolution des problèmes ........ 28
Codes sonores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Problèmes liés au réseau.............29
Problèmes d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Problèmes de mémoire .............32
Blocages et problèmes logiciels ......33
Table des matières4
Table des matières
Utilisation des outils de support
technique ...................... 35
Centre de support Dell ..............35
Mes Téléchargements Dell............36
Messages système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes
matériels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Dell Diagnostics ................... 40
Restauration du système
d'exploitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Restauration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Dell DataSafe Local Backup.......... 44
Support de récupération système......47
Dell Factory Image Restore .......... 48
Accès à l'aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Support technique et service clientèle...51
DellConnect .......................52
Services en ligne....................52
Service d'état des commandes
automatisé ........................53
Informations sur les produits..........54
Retour d'articles pour réparation dans le
cadre de la garantie ou pour avoir . . . . .54
Avant d'appeler.....................56
Contacter Dell .....................57
Recherche d'informations et de
ressources supplémentaires . . . . . . 58
Caractéristiques ................ 60
Annexe ........................ 65
Informations sur la norme NOM ou
Norme Officielle Mexicaine (pour le
Mexique uniquement) ...............65
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Cette section indique comment installer
l'ordinateur de bureau Dell Inspiron 620.
AVERTISSEMENT : avant de commencer
toute procédure de cette section,
lisez les informations de sécurité
fournies avec votre ordinateur.
Pour plus d'informations sur les
meilleures pratiques en matière de
sécurité, consultez la page d'accueil
Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à
la réglementation) à l'adresse suivante :
www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Considérations
préalables à l'installation
Lorsque vous installez votre ordinateur,
assurez-vous que la source d'alimentation
électrique est facilement accessible, que la
ventilation est adaptée et que la surface est
plane.
Une mauvaise ventilation peut provoquer
une surchauffe de l'ordinateur. Pour éviter
cela, assurez-vous de laisser au moins
10,2 cm (4 pouces) à l'arrière de l'ordinateur
et au moins 5,1 cm (2 pouces) sur chacun
des autres côtés. Ne placez jamais votre
ordinateur dans un espace clos, tel qu'un
placard ou un tiroir, lorsque l'appareil est sous
tension.
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau
Inspiron INSPIRON6
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Branchement de l'écran
Si vous avez acheté la carte graphique séparée disponible en option, connectez l'écran à l'aide
du connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte. Sinon, connectez-le au connecteur VGA ou HDMI
intégré.
REMARQUE : les connecteurs VGA et HDMI intégrés seront désactivés et protégés par un
couvercle si votre ordinateur possède une carte graphique séparée.
Utilisez le câble approprié en fonction des connecteurs disponibles sur l'ordinateur et l'écran.
Il se peut que vous deviez utiliser un adaptateur approprié (DVI à VGA ou HDMI à DVI) pour
connecter votre écran à la carte graphique séparée, si le connecteur de votre écran et celui de
la carte graphique diffèrent.
Vous pouvez acheter les adaptateurs DVI à VGA, HDMI à DVI ainsi que des câbles HDMI ou DVI
supplémentaires à l'adresse www.dell.com.
REMARQUE : lors du branchement d'un seul écran, reliez l'écran à UN SEUL connecteur de
l'ordinateur.
REMARQUE : votre ordinateur prend en charge la fonction d'écrans multiples Intel
(désactivée par défaut). Cette fonction vous permet de connecter votre ordinateur à
plusieurs écrans simultanément. Pour activer cette fonction, accédez à l'utilitaire de
configuration du système (BIOS) et définissez le paramètre Intel Multiple Monitor
Feature (Fonction d'écrans multiples Intel) sur Auto (Automatique) dans la section
Advanced Graphic Configuration (Configuration graphique avancée).7
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Consultez le tableau suivant afin d'identifier les connecteurs disponibles sur l'ordinateur et l'écran.
Type de
connexion
Ordinateur Câble Écran
VGA à VGA
(câble VGA)
DVI à DVI
(câble DVI)
DVI à VGA
(adaptateur DVI à
VGA + câble VGA)
HDMI à HDMI
(câble HDMI)
HDMI à DVI
(adaptateur HDMI à
DVI + câble DVI)8
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Branchement du clavier
et de la souris
Branchez le clavier et la souris USB aux
connecteurs USB du panneau arrière de
l'ordinateur.9
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Branchement du câble
réseau (en option)
Une connexion réseau n'est pas requise
pour terminer l'installation de l'ordinateur.
Cependant, si vous avez une connexion
réseau ou Internet utilisant une connexion
câblée (p. ex. un périphérique haut débit ou
une prise Ethernet), vous pouvez effectuer
son branchement maintenant.
REMARQUE : utilisez uniquement un
câble Ethernet (connecteur RJ45) pour
brancher votre connecteur réseau. Ne
branchez pas de câble téléphonique
(connecteur RJ11) au connecteur réseau.
Pour relier l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau
ou haut débit, branchez l'une des extrémités
du câble réseau sur un port réseau ou sur
un périphérique haut débit. Branchez l'autre
extrémité du câble réseau au connecteur réseau
(connecteur RJ45) situé sur le panneau arrière
de votre ordinateur. Un déclic indique que le
câble réseau est correctement inséré.10
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Branchement du câble
d'alimentation
Appui sur le bouton
d'alimentation11
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Installation du système
d'exploitation
Votre ordinateur Dell est préconfiguré avec
le système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows.
Pour procéder à la première installation
de Windows, suivez les instructions qui
s'affichent à l'écran. Ces étapes sont
obligatoires et peuvent prendre un certain
temps. Les écrans d'installation de Windows
vous guident à travers plusieurs procédures
qui vous permettent notamment d'accepter
des contrats de licence, de définir des
préférences et de configurer une connexion
Internet.
PRÉCAUTION : veillez à ne pas
interrompre le processus d'installation
du système d'exploitation. Vous
risqueriez de rendre votre ordinateur
inutilisable et de devoir réinstaller le
système d'exploitation.
REMARQUE : pour optimiser le
fonctionnement de l'ordinateur, nous
vous recommandons de télécharger et
d'installer les derniers BIOS et pilotes
pour votre ordinateur, disponibles à
l'adresse support.dell.com.
REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations
sur le système d'exploitation et ses
fonctionnalités, reportez-vous à l'adresse
support.dell.com/MyNewDell.12
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Création d'un support
de récupération système
(recommandé)
REMARQUE : nous vous recommandons
de créer un support de récupération
système, immédiatement après
l'installation de Microsoft Windows.
Le support de récupération système vous
permet de restaurer votre ordinateur à
son état d'exploitation lorsque vous l'avez
acheté, tout en préservant les fichiers de
données (sans recourir au disque du système
d'exploitation). Vous pouvez utiliser le support
de récupération système si les modifications
apportées au matériel, aux logiciels, aux
pilotes et aux autres paramètres du système
empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner
correctement.
La création d'un support de restauration du
système requiert les éléments suivants :
• Dell DataSafe Local Backup
• Une clé USB avec une capacité minimum
de 8 Go ou un DVD-R/DVD+R/Blu-ray Disc
REMARQUE : Dell DataSafe Local Backup
ne prend pas en charge les disques
réinscriptibles.
Pour créer un support de récupération système :
1. Insérez le disque ou la clé USB dans
l'ordinateur.
2. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les
programmes→ Dell DataSafe Local Backup.
3. Cliquez sur Créer un support de récupération.
4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.
REMARQUE : pour en savoir plus
sur la restauration de votre système
d'exploitation à l'aide du support de
récupération système, reportez-vous à
la rubrique « Support de récupération
système », page 47.13
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Installation du tuner TV
(facultatif)
REMARQUE : la disponibilité du tuner TV
peut varier d'une région à l'autre.
Pour installer le tuner TV :
1. Branchez le câble d'antenne numérique/
TV ou le câble de l'adaptateur au
connecteur d'entrée d'antenne de votre
ordinateur.
2. Allumez l'ordinateur.
3. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous
les programmes→ Windows Media
Center→ Tâches→ Paramètres→ TV.
4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.
Connexion à Internet
(facultatif)
Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez
disposer d'un modem externe ou d'une
connexion réseau et d'un fournisseur d'accès
Internet (FAI).
Si vous n'avez pas commandé de modem USB
externe ou d'adaptateur réseau sans fil à
l'achat, vous pouvez vous en procurer à
l'adresse www.dell.com.
Configuration d'une connexion
filaire
• Si vous utilisez une ligne téléphonique
commutée, branchez le cordon
téléphonique sur le modem USB externe en
option et sur la prise téléphonique murale
avant de configurer la connexion Internet. 14
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
• Si vous utilisez une connexion ADSL ou
modem câble/satellite, contactez votre
fournisseur d'accès Internet ou votre
prestataire de services mobiles pour
obtenir les instructions relatives à la
configuration.
Pour terminer la configuration de votre
connexion Internet filaire, suivez les
instructions fournies dans la section
« Configuration d'une connexion Internet » à
la page 15.
Configuration d'une connexion
sans fil
REMARQUE : pour configurer votre
routeur sans fil, reportez-vous à la
documentation fournie avec le routeur.
Vous devez vous connecter à votre routeur
sans fil pour pouvoir utiliser une connexion
Internet sans fil.
Pour configurer une connexion à un routeur
sans fil :
1. Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, puis
quittez tous les programmes.
2. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de
configuration.
3. Dans la zone de recherche, saisissez
réseau, puis cliquez sur Centre Réseau et
partage→ Connexion à un réseau.
4. Pour procéder à la configuration, suivez les
instructions qui s'affichent. 15
Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Configuration d'une connexion
Internet
Les fournisseurs d'accès Internet (FAI) et leurs
offres varient selon les pays. Contactez votre
fournisseur d'accès Internet pour prendre
connaissance des offres disponibles dans
votre pays.
Si vous n'arrivez plus à vous connecter à
Internet, il est possible que le fournisseur
d'accès Internet subisse une interruption
de service. Contactez-le pour vérifier l'état
du service ou essayez de vous connecter
ultérieurement.
Munissez-vous des informations
communiquées par votre fournisseur
d'accès Internet. Si vous ne disposez d'aucun
fournisseur, l'Assistant Connexion à Internet
peut vous aider à en trouver un.
Pour configurer la connexion Internet :
1. Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, puis
quittez tous les programmes.
2. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de
configuration.
3. Dans la zone de recherche, saisissez
réseau, puis cliquez sur Centre Réseau et
partage→ Configurer une nouvelle
connexion ou un nouveau réseau→ Se
connecter à Internet.
La fenêtre Se connecter à Internet apparaît.
REMARQUE : si vous ne savez pas quel
type de connexion choisir, cliquez sur
Comment choisir ou contactez votre
fournisseur d'accès Internet.
4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent et
terminez la configuration à l'aide des
informations de configuration remises par
votre fournisseur.16
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Cette section fournit des informations sur les fonctionnalités disponibles sur votre ordinateur
de bureau Inspiron.
Fonctionnalités du panneau avant
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INSPIRON17
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
1 Lecteur optique (2) : permet de lire ou
de graver des CD, DVD et disques Bluray (en option).
2 Connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) : permettent
de connecter un périphérique USB,
comme une souris, un clavier, une
imprimante, un lecteur externe ou un
lecteur MP3.
3
Microphone ou connecteur
d'entrée audio : permet de connecter
un microphone ou recevoir un signal
audio à traiter avec des logiciels audio.
4 Connecteur pour casque : permet
de connecter un casque.
REMARQUE : pour le branchement à un
haut-parleur ou à un périphérique audio
sous tension, utilisez le connecteur
de sortie ligne situé à l'arrière de votre
ordinateur.
5 Bouton et voyant d'alimentation :
pour allumer ou éteindre l'ordinateur.
Le voyant central indique l'état de
l'alimentation :
• Eteint: l'ordinateur est éteint, en mode
veille prolongée ou n'est pas connecté
à une source d'alimentation.
• Blanc fixe : l'ordinateur est allumé.
• Orange fixe : l'ordinateur est en mode
Veille/Sommeil ou un problème s'est
produit au niveau de la carte système
ou de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir de
l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section
« Contacter Dell », page 57).
• Orange clignotant: signale un
problème au niveau de la carte
système ou de l'alimentation. Pour
obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la
section « Contacter Dell », page 57).
• REMARQUE: pour en savoir plus
sur les problèmes d'alimentation,
reportez-vous à la rubrique
« Problèmes d'alimentation », page 30.18
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
6 Voyant d'activité du disque dur:
s'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit
des données. Il clignote lorsqu'une
activité est en cours d'exécution sur le
disque dur.
PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter toute
perte de données, n'éteignez
jamais l'ordinateur lorsque le
voyant d'activité du disque dur
clignote.
7 Lecteur de carte multimédia : permet
de consulter et de partager rapidement
et facilement des photos numériques,
de la musique et des vidéos enregistrées
sur une carte multimédia.
8 Bouton d'éjection du lecteur optique
(2) : permet d'ouvrir le lecteur optique.19
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 20
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Fonctionnalités du panneau arrière
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
821
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
1 Voyant du bloc d'alimentation :
indique l'énergie disponible pour le bloc
d'alimentation.
REMARQUE : le voyant du bloc
d'alimentation n'est pas disponible sur
tous les ordinateurs.
2 Sélecteur de tension : permet de
sélectionner la tension correspondant à
votre région
3 Connecteur d'alimentation : permet
de brancher le câble d'alimentation.
L'aspect de ce connecteur peut varier.
4 Connecteurs du panneau arrière :
permettent de brancher des
périphériques USB, audio, vidéo et autres
à leur emplacement réservé.
5 Logements pour cartes d'extension :
permettent d'accéder aux connecteurs
des cartes PCI Express installées.
6 Numéro de série et code de service
express : permettent d'identifier votre
ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site
Web, ou que vous appelez, le support
technique de Dell.
7 Emplacement du cadenas : permet
d’attacher un cadenas standard pour
éviter tout accès non autorisé à
l’intérieur de votre ordinateur.
8 Emplacement pour câble de sécurité :
permet de rattacher à l'ordinateur
un câble de sécurité vendu dans le
commerce.
REMARQUE : avant d'acheter un câble
de sécurité, vérifiez qu'il est adapté à
l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de
votre ordinateur.22
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Connecteurs du panneau arrière
1
2
3
4
5
6
723
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
1 Connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) :
permettent de connecter des
périphériques USB, comme les souris,
les claviers, les imprimantes, les lecteurs
externes ou les lecteurs MP3.
2
Connecteur HDMI : se connecte
au connecteur HDMI de votre écran ou
téléviseur.
3 Connecteur VGA : permet
de connecter un moniteur ou un
projecteur.
4 Connecteur de microphone :
pour brancher un microphone ou un
câble pour entrer des données audio.
5 Connecteur de sortie gauche/
droite avant: permet de brancher des
haut-parleurs gauche/droite avant.
6 Connecteur d'entrée : permet de
connecter des périphériques
d'enregistrement ou de lecture
(microphone, magnétophones, lecteurs
de CD ou magnétoscopes).
7 Connecteur réseau et voyant:
permet de connecter votre ordinateur
à un périphérique réseau ou large
bande si vous utilisez un réseau filaire.
Les deux voyants près du connecteur
signalent l'état et l'activité sur une
connexion réseau filaire.24
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Fonctionnalités
logicielles
Productivité et communication
Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur pour
créer des présentations, des brochures, des
cartes de vœux, des prospectus et des feuilles
de calcul. Vous pouvez également retoucher
et visualiser des photographies et des images
numériques. Reportez-vous à votre bon
de commande pour connaître les logiciels
installés sur votre ordinateur.
Une fois connecté à Internet, vous pouvez
consulter des sites Web, configurer un
compte de messagerie et envoyer et
télécharger des fichiers.
Divertissement et multimédia
Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur pour
regarder des vidéos, jouer, créer vos propres
CD, DVD, disques Blu-Ray (en option), écouter
de la musique et des stations de radio. Votre
lecteur optique peut prendre en charge
plusieurs formats de disque comme les CD,
les DVD et les disques Blu-ray (en option).
Vous pouvez télécharger ou copier des
images et des vidéos à partir de périphériques
portables, comme un appareil photo
numérique ou un téléphone portable.
D'autres logiciels en option vous permettent
d'organiser et de créer des fichiers de
musique et de vidéo, qui peuvent être gravés
sur un disque, copiés sur des appareils
portables (lecteur MP3 ou lecteur multimédia
portable, par exemple) ou lus et affichés
directement sur un téléviseur, un projecteur et
une installation home cinema.25
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Dell DataSafe Online
Backup
REMARQUE : il se peut que Dell DataSafe
Online Backup ne soit pas disponible
dans votre région.
REMARQUE : une connexion haut débit
est recommandée pour des vitesses de
chargement/téléchargement rapides.
Dell DataSafe Online est un service de
sauvegarde et de récupération automatisé
qui vous aide à protéger vos données et vos
fichiers importants des accidents comme un
vol, un incendie ou une catastrophe naturelle.
Vous pouvez accéder au service sur votre
ordinateur à l'aide d'un compte -protégé par
un mot de passe. Pour plus d'informations,
consultez le site DellDataSafe.com.
Pour planifier des sauvegardes :
1. Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Dell DataSafe
Online dans la zone de notification de
votre bureau.
2. Suivez les instructions à l'écran.
Dell Stage
Le logiciel Dell Stage fournit un accès à vos
contenus multimédias et applications MultiTouch préférés.
Pour lancer Dell Stage, cliquez sur Démarrer
→ Tous les programmes→ Dell Stage→
Dell Stage.
REMARQUE: vous pouvez également lancer
directement certaines applications de Dell
Stage via le menu Tous les programmes.
Vous pouvez personnaliser Dell Stage de la
façon suivante :
• Réorganiser un raccourci d'application :
cliquez sur le raccourci de l'application et
maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé
jusqu'à ce qu'il clignote, puis faites-le glisser
vers l'emplacement souhaité sur Dell Stage.
• Réduire : faites glisser la fenêtre Dell Stage
vers le bas de l'écran.
• Personnaliser : sélectionnez l'icône des
paramètres, puis choisissez l'option souhaitée.26
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron
Les applications disponibles sur Dell Stage
sont les suivantes :
REMARQUE : il se peut que certaines
applications ne soient pas disponibles en
fonction des sélections effectuées lors de
l'achat de votre ordinateur.
•MUSIC: écoutez de la musique ou parcourez
vos fichiers musicaux par album, artiste ou
titre de chanson. Vous pouvez également
écouter des stations de radio Internet du
monde entier. L'application Napster en option
vous permet de télécharger des chansons
lorsque vous êtes connecté à Internet.
•DOCUMENTS : accédez rapidement au
dossier Documents de votre ordinateur.
•PHOTO : affichez, organisez ou retouchez
vos photos. Vous pouvez également créer
des diaporamas et des ensembles de
photos, puis les télécharger sur Facebook
ou Flickr une fois connecté à Internet.
•DELL WEB : obtenez un aperçu d'un
maximum de quatre pages Web de votre
choix. Cliquez ou appuyez sur l'aperçu
de la page Web pour l'ouvrir dans le
navigateur.
•VIDEO : visionnez des vidéos. L'application
CinemaNow disponible en option vous
permet d'acheter ou de louer des films et
des émissions télévisées une fois connecté
à Internet.
•SHORTCUTS : accédez rapidement aux
programmes fréquemment utilisés.
• Web Tile : obtenez un aperçu d'un
maximum de quatre pages Web de votre
choix. Cette application vous permet
d'ajouter, de modifier ou de supprimer un
aperçu de page Web. Cliquez sur l'aperçu
de la page Web pour l'ouvrir dans le
navigateur. Vous pouvez également créer
plusieurs icônes Web via la galerie des
applications.27
Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 28
Cette section contient des informations
de dépannage de votre ordinateur. Si vous
n'arrivez pas à résoudre un problème en
suivant les consignes ci-dessous, consultez
la section « Utilisation des outils de support
technique » à la page 35 ou « Contacter Dell »
à la page 57.
AVERTISSEMENT : seul un technicien
qualifié est autorisé à retirer le capot
de l'ordinateur. Consultez le Manuel de
maintenance à l'adresse
support.dell.com/manuals pour des
instructions techniques plus poussées.
Codes sonores
Votre ordinateur peut émettre une série de
signaux sonores au démarrage s'il rencontre
une erreur ou un problème. Cette série de
signaux, appelée « code sonore », permet
d'identifier les problèmes de fonctionnement
de l'ordinateur. Si cela se produit, notez le
code sonore et contactez Dell (reportez-vous
à la section « Contacter Dell », page 57) pour
obtenir de l'aide.
REMARQUE : pour remplacer des
pièces, veuillez vous reporter au Manuel
de maintenance disponible à l'adresse
support.dell.com/manuals.
Résolution des problèmes INSPIRON29
Résolution des problèmes
Code
sonore Problème éventuel
Un seul Défaillance possible de la carte
système : échec de la somme de
contrôle du BIOS en mémoire
ROM.
Deux Aucune RAM détectée
REMARQUE : si vous avez installé
ou remplacé vous-même le
module de mémoire, assurezvous qu'il est correctement inséré.
Trois Défaillance possible de la carte
système : erreur liée aux puces
Quatre Défaillance de lecture/écriture en
mémoire vive
Cinq Défaillance de l'horloge temps
réel
Six Défaillance de la carte ou de la
puce vidéo
Sept Défaillance du processeur
Problèmes liés au réseau
Connexions sans fil
Si vous avez perdu la connexion réseau : le
routeur sans fil est hors ligne ou la fonction
sans fil a été désactivée sur l'ordinateur.
• Vérifiez votre routeur sans fil pour vous
assurer qu'il est sous tension et connecté
à votre source de données (modem câble
ou concentrateur réseau).
• Rétablissez la connexion à votre
routeur sans fil (consultez la section
« Configuration d'une connexion sans fil »,
page 14).
• Il se peut que des interférences perturbent
ou interrompent la connexion sans fil.
Essayez de rapprocher l'ordinateur du
routeur sans fil.30
Résolution des problèmes
Connexions filaires
Si la connexion réseau est coupée — Le câble
réseau est mal branché ou est endommagé.
• Vérifiez le câble réseau pour vous assurer
qu'il est correctement branché et ne
présente aucun dommage.
• Le voyant d'intégrité de liaison figurant sur
le connecteur réseau intégré vous permet
de vérifier que votre connexion fonctionne
et vous renseigne sur son état :
– Vert (gauche) : une bonne connexion
est établie entre un réseau
10/100 Mbits/s et l'ordinateur.
– Orange (gauche) : une connexion
de bonne qualité est établie entre un
réseau à 1000 Mb/s et l'ordinateur.
– Éteint : l'ordinateur ne détecte aucune
connexion physique au réseau.
REMARQUE : le voyant d'intégrité de
liaison du connecteur réseau ne sert que
pour les connexions filaires. Le voyant
d'intégrité de liaison n'indique pas l'état
des connexions sans fil.
Problèmes d'alimentation
Si le voyant d'alimentation est éteint:
l'ordinateur est en veille prolongée, hors
tension ou n'est pas alimenté.
• Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation.
L'ordinateur redémarre normalement s'il
est éteint ou en état de veille prolongée.
• Rebranchez le câble d'alimentation sur le
connecteur d'alimentation situé à l'arrière
de l'ordinateur et sur la prise électrique.
• Si l'ordinateur est branché sur une barrette
d'alimentation, vérifiez que celle-ci est
branchée sur une prise électrique et qu'elle
est allumée.
• Contournez également les périphériques de
protection contre les surtensions électriques,
les barrettes d'alimentation et les rallonges
d'alimentation pour vérifier que l'ordinateur
est correctement sous tension.
• Vérifiez que la prise électrique fonctionne
en la testant avec un autre appareil,
comme une lampe.31
Résolution des problèmes
• Vérifiez que le voyant du bloc
d'alimentation à l'arrière de l'ordinateur
est allumé. S'il est éteint, il s'agit peut-être
d'une défaillance de l'alimentation ou du
câble d'alimentation.
• Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir
la section « Contacter Dell », page 57).
Voyant d'alimentation blanc fixe et aucune
réponse de l'ordinateur: l'écran n'est peut-
être pas branché ou alimenté en énergie.
• Vérifiez que l'écran est branché correctement,
puis éteignez-le et rallumez-le.
• Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir
la section « Contacter Dell », page 57).
Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange fixe :
L'ordinateur est en mode Veille/Sommeil ou
un problème s'est produit au niveau de la
carte système ou de l'alimentation.
• Appuyez sur une touche du clavier,
déplacez la souris ou appuyez sur le
bouton d'alimentation pour revenir au
fonctionnement normal.
• Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir
la section « Contacter Dell », page 57).
Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange
clignotant: l'ordinateur a détecté une
erreur lors de l'autotest de la mise sous
tension (POST). Il se peut qu'un problème
soit survenu au niveau de la carte système
ou de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir de l'aide,
contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter
Dell », page 57).
Si vous rencontrez des interférences qui
gênent la réception sur votre ordinateur:
un signal parasite crée des interférences
qui interrompent ou perturbent les autres
signaux. Les interférences peuvent être dues à
divers facteurs :
• Rallonges utilisées pour le clavier, la souris
et l'alimentation.
• Trop de périphériques raccordés à une
même multiprise.
• Plusieurs multiprises raccordées à la même
prise électrique.32
Résolution des problèmes
Problèmes de mémoire
Si un message indiquant une mémoire
insuffisante s'affiche :
• Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers
ouverts, puis quittez tous les programmes
que vous n'utilisez pas pour vérifier si cela
permet de résoudre le problème.
• Reportez-vous à la documentation
du logiciel pour connaître la mémoire
minimale requise pour son exécution.
Le cas échéant, installez davantage de
mémoire (reportez-vous au Guide de
maintenance disponible sur
support.dell.com/manuals).
• Réinstallez les modules de mémoire
(reportez-vous au Guide de maintenance
sur le site support.dell.com/manuals) pour
vérifier que votre ordinateur communique
bien avec la mémoire.
• Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir
la section « Contacter Dell », page 57).
Si d'autres problèmes de mémoire se
produisent:
• Veillez à suivre les consignes d'installation
de la mémoire (reportez-vous au Guide
maintenance sur le site
support.dell.com/manuals).
• Vérifiez si la barrette de mémoire est
compatible avec votre ordinateur. Votre
ordinateur prend en charge la mémoire de
type DDR3. Pour plus d'informations sur le
type de mémoire pris en charge par votre
ordinateur, voir « Spécifications de base »,
page 60.
• Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à
la section « Dell Diagnostics », page 40).
• Réinstallez les modules de mémoire
(reportez-vous au Guide de maintenance
sur le site support.dell.com/manuals) pour
vérifier que votre ordinateur communique
bien avec la mémoire.
• Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir
la section « Contacter Dell », page 57).33
Résolution des problèmes
Blocages et problèmes
logiciels
Si l'ordinateur ne démarre pas : vérifiez que
le câble d'alimentation est bien branché sur
l'ordinateur et sur la prise secteur.
Si un programme ne répond plus : terminez
le programme :
1. Appuyez simultanément sur
<Échap>.
2. Cliquez sur Applications.
3. Cliquez sur le programme qui ne répond plus.
4. Cliquez sur End Task (Fin de tâche).
Si un programme se bloque fréquemment:
consultez la documentation du logiciel. Le
cas échéant, désinstallez puis réinstallez le
programme.
REMARQUE : les logiciels sont
généralement fournis avec une
documentation ou un CD comprenant
les instructions d'installation.
Si l'ordinateur ne répond plus ou si un écran
bleu uni s'affiche :
PRÉCAUTION : vous risquez de perdre
des données si vous ne parvenez pas à
arrêter le système d'exploitation.
Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque
vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou
lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur
le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le
enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes
(jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne), puis
redémarrez votre ordinateur.
Si le programme est conçu pour un système
d'exploitation Microsoft Windows antérieur,
exécutez l'Assistant Compatibilité des
programmes. L'Assistant Compatibilité des
programmes configure un programme afin
qu'il fonctionne dans un environnement
similaire au système d'exploitation Microsoft
Windows antérieur.34
Résolution des problèmes
Pour exécuter l'Assistant Compatibilité des
programmes :
1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de
configuration→ Programmes→ Exécuter
des programmes plus anciens avec cette
version de Windows.
2. Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant.
3. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.
Si d'autres problèmes logiciels surviennent:
• Sauvegardez vos fichiers immédiatement.
• Utilisez un logiciel antivirus pour analyser
le disque dur ou les CD.
• Enregistrez et fermez les fichiers ouverts et
quittez tous les programmes, puis arrêtez
l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer .
• Consultez la documentation fournie avec
le logiciel ou contactez son éditeur pour
obtenir des informations détaillées sur le
dépannage :
– Vérifiez que le programme est
compatible avec le système
d'exploitation installé sur l'ordinateur.
– Vérifiez que le matériel du système
répond à la configuration matérielle
minimale requise pour l'exécution du
logiciel. Consultez la documentation
du logiciel pour de plus amples
informations.
– Vérifiez que le programme est
correctement installé et configuré.
– Vérifiez que les pilotes de périphériques
n'entrent pas en conflit avec le
programme.
– Le cas échéant, désinstallez puis
réinstallez le programme.
– Notez le message d'erreur affiché pour
le communiquer au support technique
Dell et obtenir de l'aide.35
Centre de support Dell
Toute l'assistance dont vous avez besoin –
un seul emplacement.
Le Centre d'assistance Dell Support
Center fournit des notifications à propos
des systèmes, des solutions pour améliorer
les performances, des informations sur les
systèmes et des liens vers d'autres outils et
services de diagnostic Dell.
Pour démarrer l'application, cliquez sur
Démarrer → Tous les programmes→
Dell→ Dell Support Center (Centre
d'assistance Dell)→ Launch Dell Support
Center (Démarrer le Centre d'assistance Dell).
La page d'accueil du Centre d'assistance
Dell affiche le numéro de modèle de votre
ordinateur, le numéro de service, le code de
service express, le statut de la garantie et des
notifications indiquant comment améliorer les
performances de votre ordinateur.
La page d'accueil fournit également des liens
vers :
Vérification de l'ordinateur: exécutez
des diagnostics matériels, découvrez quel
programme occupe le plus de mémoire sur
votre disque dur et suivez les modifications
apportées chaque jour à votre ordinateur.
Utilitaires de vérification de l'ordinateur
• Gestionnaire d'espace disque : gérez votre
disque dur grâce à une représentation
visuelle de l'espace occupé par chaque
type de fichier.
• Historique des performances et de la
configuration : surveillez les événements
système et les modifications au fil du
temps. Cet utilitaire affiche toutes
les analyses, tous les tests, toutes les
modifications du système, tous les
événements critiques et tous les points de
restauration avec l'indication du jour.
Utilisation des outils de support technique INSPIRON36
Utilisation des outils de support technique
Informations détaillées sur le système :
affichez des informations détaillées sur les
configurations du matériel et du système
d'exploitation ; accédez à des copies de vos
contrats de service, informations de garantie
et options de renouvellement de garantie.
Obtenir de l'aide : affichez les options du
Support technique Dell, Support client, Visites
guidées et formations, Outils en ligne, Modes
d'emploi, Informations de garantie, FAQ, etc.
Sauvegarde et restauration : créez un
support de récupération, lancez l'outil de
récupération et sauvegardez les fichiers en
ligne.
Solutions pour améliorer les performances
du système : procurez-vous des solutions
logicielles et matérielles qui vous aideront à
améliorer les performances de votre système.
Pour plus d'informations sur le Centre
d'assistance Dell Support Center et le
téléchargement et l'installation des outils
de support disponibles, accédez à la page
DellSupportCenter.com.
Mes Téléchargements
Dell
REMARQUE : il se peut que Mes
Téléchargements Dell ne soit pas
disponible dans votre région.
Certains logiciels préinstallés sur votre
nouvel ordinateur Dell ne disposent pas de
CD ou DVD de récupération. Ces logiciels
sont disponibles en ligne sur la page Mes
Téléchargements Dell. Vous pouvez à partir
de ce site Web télécharger tous les logiciels
disponibles pour les réinstaller ou créer votre
propre support de sauvegarde.
Pour vous enregistrer et utiliser Mes
Téléchargements Dell :
1. Rendez-vous sur
DownloadStore.dell.com/media.
2. Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour vous
enregistrer et télécharger le logiciel.
3. Réinstallez le logiciel ou créez un support
de sauvegarde à utiliser ultérieurement.37
Utilisation des outils de support technique
Messages système
Si votre ordinateur rencontre un problème
ou une erreur, il peut afficher un message
système qui vous permettra d'en identifier la
cause et vous renseignera sur les mesures à
prendre pour résoudre le problème.
REMARQUE : si le message affiché
par l'ordinateur ne figure pas parmi les
exemples suivants, reportez-vous à la
documentation du système d'exploitation
ou du programme qui était en cours
d'exécution au moment où le message
est apparu contactez Dell (consultez la
section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57)
pour obtenir de l'aide.
Alert! Previous attempts at booting this
system have failed at checkpoint [nnnn]
(Alerte ! Les précédentes tentatives
d'amorçage de ce système ont échoué
au point de reprise [nnnn]). For help in
resolving this problem, please note this
checkpoint and contact Dell Technical
Support (Pour obtenir de l'aide afin de
résoudre ce problème, veuillez noter le point
de reprise et contacter le Support technique
Dell) : l'ordinateur n'a pas réussi à exécuter la
procédure d'amorçage après trois tentatives
consécutives à cause de la même erreur.
Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la
section « Contacter Dell », page 57).
CMOS checksum error or RTC is reset,
BIOS Setup default has been loaded (Erreur
somme de contrôle CMOS ou réinitialisation
RTC, la configuration par défaut du BIOS a
été chargée) : défaillance possible de la carte
système ou pile de l'horloge en temps réel
déchargée. Remplacez la pile (reportez-vous
à la Notice d'entretien à l'adresse
support.dell.com/manuals) ou contactez Dell
(consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la
page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide.
CPU fan failure : Défaillance du ventilateur
du processeur. Le ventilateur du processeur
doit être remplacé. Consultez le Guide de
maintenance à l'adresse
support.dell.com/manuals38
Utilisation des outils de support technique
Hard-disk drive failure (défaillance du
lecteur de disque dur) : défaillance possible
du lecteur de disque dur lors de l'auto-test
de démarrage (POST). Pour obtenir de l'aide,
contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter
Dell », page 57).
Hard-disk drive read failure (défaillance de
lecture du lecteur de disque dur) : défaillance
possible du lecteur de disque dur lors du test
de démarrage du disque dur. Pour obtenir
de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section
« Contacter Dell », page 57).
Keyboard failure (défaillance du clavier) :
remplacez le clavier ou vérifiez s'il est branché
correctement.
No boot device available (aucun
périphérique d'amorçage disponible) :
absence de partition d'amorçage sur le disque
dur, le câble du disque dur est mal branché ou
aucun périphérique d'amorçage n'existe.
• Si le disque dur est le périphérique
d'amorçage, assurez-vous que les câbles
sont connectés et que le disque est
correctement installé et partitionné en tant
que périphérique d'amorçage.
• Accédez au programme de configuration
du système et vérifiez que les informations
de séquence d'amorçage sont correctes
(voir le Guide de maintenance sur le site
support.dell.com/manuals).
No timer tick interrupt (absence
d'interruption de cadence de l'horloge) :
puce sur la carte système peut-être
défectueuse ou défaillance de la carte
système (voir le Guide de maintenance sur le
site support.dell.com/manuals) ou contactez
Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell » page
57) pour obtenir de l'aide.39
Utilisation des outils de support technique
USB over current error (erreur de surintensité
USB) : déconnectez le périphérique USB. Votre
périphériqueUSB a besoin d'une alimentation
en électricité plus importante pour fonctionner
correctement. Utilisez une source d'alimentation
externe pour connecter le périphériqueUSB ou,
si votre périphérique possède deux câblesUSB,
connectez-les tous les deux.
CAUTION - Hard Drive SELF MONITORING
SYSTEM has reported that a parameter
has exceeded its normal operating range.
Dell recommends that you back up your
data regularly. A parameter out of range
may or may not indicate a potential hard
drive problem (PRECAUTION : le système
d'autosurveillance de disque dur indique
qu'un paramètre se situe en dehors de la
plage de fonctionnement normal. Dell vous
recommande de sauvegarder régulièrement
vos données. Un paramètre en dehors de
la plage de fonctionnement normal peut
indiquer un éventuel problème de disque
dur): erreur SMART, défaillance possible du
disque dur. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez
Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57).
Utilitaire de résolution de
problèmes matériels
Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté pendant
la configuration du système d'exploitation
ou s'il est détecté mais n'est pas configuré
correctement, servez-vous de l'Utilitaire de
résolution des problèmes matériels pour
résoudre ce problème d'incompatibilité.
Pour lancer l'utilitaire de résolution des
problèmes matériels :
1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Aide et
support.
2. Saisissez utilitaire de résolution
des problèmes matériels dans le
champ de recherche, puis appuyez sur
pour lancer la recherche.
3. Dans les résultats de la recherche,
sélectionnez l'option décrivant le mieux le
problème et effectuez les étapes suivantes
de dépannage.40
Utilisation des outils de support technique
Dell Diagnostics
Si vous rencontrez un problème avec votre
ordinateur, procédez aux vérifications
décrites dans la section « Blocages et
problèmes logiciels », page 33 et exécutez
Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour
obtenir une assistance technique.
REMARQUE : le programme Dell
Diagnostics fonctionne uniquement sur
les ordinateurs Dell.
Vérifiez que le périphérique que vous
souhaitez tester s'affiche dans l'utilitaire de
configuration du système et qu'il est activé.
Pour accéder à l'utilitaire de configuration
système (BIOS), mettez l'ordinateur sous
tension (ou redémarrez-le) et appuyez sur
lorsque le logo DELL apparaît.
Démarrage de Dell ePSA
Diagnostics
ePSA (Enhanced Pre-boot System
Assessment) teste des périphriques tels que la
carte système, le clavier, l'écran, la mémoire,
le disque dur, etc.
1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension (ou
redémarrez-le).
2. Lorsque le logo Dell apparaît, appuyez
immédiatement sur .
REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le
logo du système d'exploitation apparaît,
patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau
de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis
éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez.
3. Sélectionnez Diagnostics dans le menu
d'amorçage et appuyez sur .
4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.41
Utilisation des outils de support technique
Si un périphérique ne passe pas le test,
celui-ci s'arrête et l'ordinateur émet un
signal sonore. Notez le(s) code(s) d'erreur
qui s'affichent à l'écran, puis contactez Dell
(reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell »
à la page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide.
• Pour arrêter ePSA et redémarrer votre
ordinateur, appuyez sur .
• Pour passer au test suivant, appuyez sur .
• Pour réexécuter un test ayant échoué,
appuyez sur .
Si ePSA réussit, le message suivant s'affiche
« Do you want to run the remaining
memory tests ? This will take about
30 minutes or more. Do you want to
continue ? (Recommended) » (Voulezvous exécuter les tests de mémoire restants ?
Cette opération dure au moins 30 minutes.
Voulez-vous continuer ? (recommandé).)
Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec
la mémoire, appuyez sur , sinon
appuyez sur . Le message suivant
apparaît : « Enhanced Pre-boot System
Assessment Complete. (Évaluation du
système de préamorçage terminée.) »
5. Cliquez sur Quitter pour redémarrer
l'ordinateur.
Démarrage de Dell PC Checkup
Dell PC Checkup analyse et teste le matériel
de votre ordinateur. Il propose des solutions
automatisées pour les problèmes de
configuration les plus courants.
1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les
programmes→ Dell→ Centre de support
Dell→ Lancer PC Checkup.
2. Sélectionnez le test à exécuter et suivez les
instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.
REMARQUE : si une erreur est signalée à
la fin des tests, notez le(s) périphérique(s)
et le(s) (s) ayant échoué. Pour obtenir
de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section
« Contacter Dell », page 57).
3. Fermez la fenêtre pour quitter PC Checkup.42
Vous pouvez restaurer le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur à l'aide des options suivantes :
PRÉCAUTION : si vous utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore ou le disque du système
d'exploitation, vous perdrez tous les fichiers de données de votre ordinateur. Si possible,
sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer ces options.
Option Utilisation
Restauration du système en tant que première solution
Dell DataSafe Local Backup si la restauration du système ne permet pas de résoudre votre
problème.
Support de récupération
système
si une défaillance du système d'exploitation vous empêche
d'utiliser la Restauration du système ou DataSafe Local Backup.
lors de l'installation des logiciels installés en usine par Dell sur
un disque dur nouvellement installé.
Dell Factory Image Restore pour restaurer votre ordinateur à son état d'exploitation initial,
lorsqu'il vous a été livré.
Disque Operating System
(Système d'exploitation)
pour installer uniquement le système d'exploitation sur votre
ordinateur.
REMARQUE : le disque Operating System (Système d'exploitation) est en option et n'est pas
fourni avec tous les ordinateurs.
Restauration du système d'exploitation INSPIRON43
Restauration du système d'exploitation
Restauration du système
Les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft
Windows proposent une option de
restauration du système qui vous permet
de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur
(sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les
modifications apportées au matériel, aux
logiciels ou à d'autres paramètres du système
empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner
correctement. Toute modification apportée
à votre ordinateur par la restauration du
système est totalement réversible.
PRÉCAUTION : Effectuez des
sauvegardes régulières de vos fichiers
de données. La fonction Restauration
du système n'assure ni la surveillance
ni la restauration de vos données
personnelles.
Démarrage de la restauration du
système
1. Cliquez sur Démarrer .
2. Dans la zone Rechercher, saisissez
Restauration du système, puis
appuyez sur .
REMARQUE : la fenêtre Contrôle de
compte d'utilisateur peut apparaître. Si
vous êtes administrateur de l'ordinateur,
cliquez sur Continuer. Sinon, prenez
contact avec votre administrateur pour
pouvoir poursuivre.
3. Cliquez sur Suivant et suivez les
instructions qui s'affichent.
Si la fonction Restauration du système n'a pas
résolu le problème, vous pouvez annuler la
dernière restauration du système.44
Restauration du système d'exploitation
Annulation de la dernière
restauration du système
REMARQUE : avant de procéder à
l'annulation de la dernière restauration
du système, sauvegardez et fermez tous
les fichiers ouverts, et quittez tous les
programmes. Vous ne devez en aucun
cas modifier, ouvrir ni supprimer des
fichiers ou des programmes tant que
la restauration du système n'est pas
terminée.
1. Cliquez sur Démarrer .
2. Dans la zone Rechercher, saisissez
Restauration du système, puis
appuyez sur .
3. Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière
restauration, puis sur Suivant.
DellDataSafe Local Backup
PRÉCAUTION : l'utilisation de Dell
DataSafe Local Backup pour restaurer
votre système d'exploitation supprime
définitivement tous les programmes ou
les pilotes installés sur votre ordinateur
après l'avoir reçu. Créez une sauvegarde
des applications que vous devez installer
sur votre ordinateur avant d'utiliser Dell
DataSafe Local Backup. N'utilisez Dell
DataSafe Local Backup que si la fonction
Restauration du système n'a pas résolu
votre problème de système d'exploitation.
PRÉCAUTION : Bien que la fonction
Dell DataSafe Local Backup soit
conçue pour préserver les fichiers de
données de votre ordinateur, nous vous
recommandons de sauvegarder ces
fichiers avant de l'utiliser.
REMARQUE : il se peut que Dell DataSafe
Local Backup ne soit pas disponible dans
votre pays.45
Restauration du système d'exploitation
REMARQUE : si Dell DataSafe Local
Backup n'est pas disponible sur votre
ordinateur, utilisez Dell Factory Image
Restore (Restauration de l'image d'usine
Dell), (reportez vous à « Dell Factory
Image Restore », page 48) pour restaurer
votre système d'exploitation.
Vous pouvez utiliser Dell DataSafe Local
Backup pour restaurer le disque dur à l'état
dans lequel il se trouvait lorsque vous avez
acheté l'ordinateur tout en préservant les
fichiers de données.
Dell DataSafe Local Backup vous permet de :
• Sauvegarder et restaurer votre ordinateur à
son état d'exploitation antérieur
• Créer un support de récupération
système (voir « Création d'un support de
récupération système (recommandé) »
page 12)
Dell DataSafe Local Backup Basic
Pour restaurer le système d'exploitation et
les logiciels installés en usine par Dell tout en
conservant les fichiers de données :
1. Éteignez l'ordinateur.
2. Déconnectez tous les périphériques
(lecteur USB, imprimante, etc.) reliés à
votre ordinateur et retirez tout matériel
interne que vous avez ajouté récemment.
3. Allumez l'ordinateur.
4. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez
plusieurs fois sur afin d'accéder à la
fenêtre Options de démarrage avancées.
REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le
logo du système d'exploitation apparaît,
patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau
de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis
éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez.
5. Sélectionnez Repair Your Computer
(Réparer l'ordinateur).46
Restauration du système d'exploitation
6. Sélectionnez Dell DataSafe Restore
and Emergency Backup dans le menu
System Recovery Options (Options
de récupération système) et suivez les
instructions qui apparaissent.
REMARQUE : le processus de
restauration peut prendre une heure
voire plus selon le volume des données à
restaurer.
REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations,
reportez-vous à la base de
connaissances, article nº 353560,
disponible sur le site support.dell.com.
Mise à niveau vers Dell DataSafe
Local Backup Professional
REMARQUE : il est possible que Dell
DataSafe Local Backup Professional soit
installé sur votre ordinateur, si vous l'avez
commandé lors de votre achat.
Dell DataSafe Local Backup Professional
fournit des fonctionnalités supplémentaires
vous permettant de :
• Sauvegarder et restaurer votre ordinateur
sur la base des types de fichiers.
• Sauvegarder les fichiers sur un
périphérique de stockage local
• Planifier des sauvegardes automatiques
Pour effectuer une mise à niveau vers Dell
DataSafe Local Backup Professional :
1. Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Dell DataSafe
Local Backup Online dans la zone de
notification de votre Bureau.
2. Cliquez sur UPGRADE NOW ! (METTRE à
NIVEAU MAINTENANT !)
3. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.47
Restauration du système d'exploitation
Support de récupération
système
PRÉCAUTION : bien que le support
de récupération système soit conçu
pour préserver les fichiers de données
de votre ordinateur, nous vous
recommandons de sauvegarder ces
fichiers avant de l'utiliser.
Vous pouvez utiliser le support de
récupération système, créé à l'aide de Dell
DataSafe Local Backup, pour restaurer le
disque dur à l'état dans lequel il se trouvait
lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur tout en
préservant les fichiers de données.
Utilisez le support de récupération système
dans les cas où :
• Une défaillance du système d'exploitation
vous empêche d'utiliser les options de
récupération installées sur votre ordinateur.
• Une défaillance du disque dur empêche la
récupération des données.
Pour restaurer le système d'exploitation et les
logiciels installés en usine par Dell sur votre
ordinateur à l'aide du support de récupération
système :
1. Insérez le disque ou la clé USB de
récupération système et redémarrez votre
ordinateur.
2. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez
immédiatement sur .
REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le
logo du système d'exploitation apparaît,
patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau
de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis
éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez.
3. Sélectionnez le périphérique d'amorçage
approprié dans la liste et appuyez sur
.
4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.48
Restauration du système d'exploitation
Dell Factory Image Restore
PRÉCAUTION: l'utilisation de Dell
Factory Image Restore pour restaurer
votre système d'exploitation supprime
définitivement toutes les données qui
figurent sur le disque dur ainsi que
tous les programmes et tous les pilotes
installés après que vous avez reçu votre
ordinateur. Dans la mesure du possible,
sauvegardez toutes vos données avant
d'utiliser cette option. Utilisez Dell Factory
Image Restore uniquement si la fonction
Restauration du système n'a pas résolu
votre problème de système d'exploitation.
REMARQUE : Dell Factory Image Restore
peut ne pas être disponible dans certains
pays ou sur certains ordinateurs.
REMARQUE : si Dell Factory Image
Restore n'est pas disponible sur votre
ordinateur, utilisez Dell DataSafe Local
Backup (reportez vous à « Dell DataSafe
Local Backup », page 44) pour restaurer
votre système d'exploitation.
Utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore
pour restaurer le système d'exploitation
uniqiuement en dernier recours. Cette
option restaure le disque dur à l'état de
fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait
lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Tous les
programmes ou fichiers ajoutés depuis que
vous avez reçu votre ordinateur, notamment
les fichiers de données, sont définitivement
supprimés du disque dur. Les fichiers de
données incluent les documents, feuilles
de calcul, messages électroniques, photos
numériques, fichiers audio, etc. Si possible,
sauvegardez toutes les données avant de
lancer Dell Factory Image Restore.
Démarrage de Dell Factory Image
Restore
1. Allumez l'ordinateur.
2. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez
plusieurs fois sur afin d'accéder à la
fenêtre Options de démarrage avancées.49
Restauration du système d'exploitation
REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le
logo du système d'exploitation apparaît,
patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau
de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis
éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez.
3. Sélectionnez Repair Your Computer
(Réparer votre ordinateur).
La fenêtre System Recovery Options
(Options de récupération système)
apparaît.
4. Sélectionnez une disposition de clavier,
puis cliquez sur Next (Suivant).
5. Pour accéder aux options de réparation,
ouvrez une session en tant qu'utilisateur
local. Pour accéder à l'invite de
commande, saisissez administrateur
dans le champ Nom d'utilisateur puis
cliquez sur OK.
6. Cliquez sur Dell Factory Image Restore.
L'écran de bienvenue Dell Factory Image
Restore apparaît.
REMARQUE: selon la configuration de
votre ordinateur, vous devrez peut-être
sélectionner Dell Factory Tools (Outils
d'usine Dell), puis Dell Factory Image
Restore (Restauration d'image d'usine Dell).
7. Cliquez sur Next (Suivant).
L'écran Confirm Data Deletion (Confirmer
la suppression des données) apparaît.
REMARQUE : si vous ne souhaitez pas
effectuer la restauration d'image d'usine,
cliquez sur Cancel (Annuler).
8. Cochez la case pour confirmer le
reformatage du disque dur et la restauration
des logiciels du système à l'état d'origine,
puis cliquez sur Next (Suivant).
Le processus de restauration commence ;
il peut prendre au moins cinq minutes.
Un message apparaît lorsque le système
d'exploitation et les applications pré-
installées en usine ont été restaurés à leur
état de sortie d'usine.
9. Cliquez sur Finish (Terminer) pour
redémarrer votre ordinateur.50
Si vous rencontrez un problème lié à
l'ordinateur, effectuez les étapes suivantes
pour diagnostiquer et résoudre ce problème :
1. Reportez-vous à la section « Résolution
des problèmes » à la page 28 pour
obtenir des informations et connaître
les procédures de résolution relatives au
problème rencontré par votre ordinateur.
2. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell
Diagnostics » à la page 40 pour connaître
les procédures d'exécution de Dell
Diagnostics.
3. Remplissez la « Liste de vérification de
diagnostics », page 56.
4. Utilisez la gamme complète de services
en ligne de Dell disponibles sur le site Web
de support technique (support.dell.com)
pour obtenir de l'aide concernant les
procédures d'installation et de dépannage.
Reportez-vous à la section « Services
en ligne » à la page 52 pour obtenir la
liste exhaustive des services de support
technique Dell en ligne.
5. Si les étapes précédentes ne vous ont pas
permis de résoudre le problème, reportezvous à la section « Avant d'appeler »,
page 56.
REMARQUE : appelez le support
technique de Dell depuis un téléphone
proche de l'ordinateur afin qu'un
technicien puisse vous guider dans la
procédure de dépannage.
REMARQUE : il se peut que le système de
code du service express de Dell ne soit
pas disponible dans votre pays.
Accès à l'aide INSPIRON51
Accès à l'aide
Lorsque le système téléphonique automatisé
de Dell vous y invite, saisissez votre code
de service express pour acheminer votre
appel vers l'équipe de support technique
appropriée. Si vous ne disposez pas d'un
code de service express, ouvrez le dossier
Dell Accessories (Accessoires Dell), doublecliquez sur l'icône Express Service Code
(Code de service express) et suivez les
instructions qui s'affichent.
REMARQUE : certains services ne sont
pas toujours disponibles en dehors des
États-Unis. Contactez votre représentant
Dell local pour en savoir plus.
Support technique et
service clientèle
Le service de support technique de Dell est
à votre disposition pour répondre à toutes
les questions relatives au matériel Dell. Notre
équipe de support technique utilise des tests
de diagnostic informatisés pour répondre
plus rapidement et plus efficacement à vos
questions.
Pour contacter le service de support
technique Dell, reportez-vous à la section
« Avant d'appeler » à la page 56, puis
recherchez les informations de contact qui
s'appliquent à votre pays ou rendez-vous sur
le site support.dell.com.52
Accès à l'aide
DellConnect
DellConnect, outil d'accès en ligne simple,
permet à un technicien de support technique
de Dell d'accéder à votre ordinateur, par une
connexion haut débit, afin de diagnostiquer
les problèmes et de les résoudre sous votre
supervision. Pour plus d'informations, rendezvous sur le site www.dell.com/DellConnect.
Services en ligne
Pour en savoir plus sur les produits et services
Dell, consultez les sites suivants :
• www.dell.com
• www.dell.com/ap (pays d'Asie et du
Pacifique uniquement)
• www.dell.com/jp (Japon uniquement)
• www.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement)
• www.dell.com/la (pays d'Amérique latine
et des Caraïbes)
• www.dell.ca (Canada uniquement)
Vous pouvez accéder au support technique
de Dell par l'intermédiaire des sites et adresses
e-mail suivants :
Sites Web de support technique Dell
• support.dell.com
• support.jp.dell.com (Japon uniquement)
• support.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement)
• supportapj.dell.com (Asie/Pacifique
uniquement)53
Accès à l'aide
Adresses e-mail du support
technique Dell :
• mobile_support@us.dell.com
• support@us.dell.com
• la-techsupport@dell.com (pays d'Amérique
latine et des Caraïbes uniquement)
• apsupport@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du
Pacifique uniquement)
Adresses e-mail des services
Marketing et Ventes de Dell
• apmarketing@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du
Pacifique uniquement)
• sales_canada@dell.com (Canada
uniquement)
FTP (File Transfert Protocol [protocole
de transfert de fichiers]) anonyme
• ftp.dell.com
Connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur :
anonyme et utilisez votre adresse e-mail
comme mot de passe.
Service d'état des
commandes automatisé
Pour vérifier l'état de vos commandes de
produits Dell, rendez-vous sur le site Web
support.dell.com ou appelez le service
automatisé d'état des commandes.
Un enregistrement vous demande les
informations nécessaires pour repérer votre
commande et en faire un rapport.
Si vous avez rencontré un problème lié à votre
commande, tel que des pièces manquantes
ou non adaptées, ou une facturation erronée,
contactez le Service clientèle de Dell. Gardez
votre facture ou votre bordereau d'expédition
à portée de main lorsque vous appelez.
Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone à
appeler depuis votre pays, consultez la
section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57.54
Accès à l'aide
Informations sur les
produits
Pour obtenir des informations sur les autres
produits disponibles auprès de Dell ou si vous
souhaitez passer commande, rendez-vous
sur le site Web www.dell.com. Pour obtenir
le numéro de téléphone à appeler à partir de
votre pays ou pour parler à un représentant
du service des ventes, consultez la section
« Contacter Dell » à la page 57.
Retour d'articles pour
réparation dans le cadre
de la garantie ou pour
avoir
Préparez tous les articles à retourner, pour
réparation ou avoir, comme indiqué ci-après :
REMARQUE : avant de retourner le
produit à Dell, assurez-vous d'avoir
sauvegardé toutes les données du ou des
disques dur ou de tout autre périphérique
de stockage du produit. Supprimez
toutes les informations personnelles,
privées et confidentielles, et retirez
tous les supports amovibles, tels que
CD et cartes PC. Nous déclinons toute
responsabilité en ce qui concerne vos
informations confidentielles, propriétaires
ou personnelles, et en cas de perte ou
d'endommagement des données ou des
supports amovibles qui seraient renvoyés
avec le produit.55
Accès à l'aide
1. Appelez Dell pour obtenir un numéro
d'autorisation de retour du matériel et
inscrivez-le lisiblement et bien en vue sur
l'emballage. Pour obtenir le numéro de
téléphone à appeler depuis votre pays,
consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la
page 57.
2. Joignez une copie de la facture et une
lettre décrivant le motif du retour.
3. Joignez une copie de la liste de vérification
des diagnostics (voir « Liste de vérification
des diagnostics », page 56), indiquant
les tests effectués et tous les messages
d'erreur mentionnés par Dell Diagnostics
(voir « Dell Diagnostics », page 40).
4. Joignez tous les accessoires qui
accompagnent le/les article(s) renvoyé(s)
(câble de l'adaptateur secteur, logiciels,
guides, etc.) s'il s'agit d'un retour pour
avoir.
5. Empaquetez l'équipement à renvoyer dans
son emballage d'origine (ou équivalent).
REMARQUE : les frais d'expédition sont
à votre charge. Vous devez également
assurer les produits retournés et
assumer les risques de perte en cours
d'expédition. Les envois en contre
remboursement ne sont pas acceptés.
REMARQUE : en cas de manquement
à l'une des conditions précitées, Dell
refusera le retour à la réception et vous
renverra les éléments.56
Accès à l'aide
Avant d'appeler
REMARQUE : munissez-vous de votre
code de service express lorsque vous
appelez. Ce code permet au système
d'assistance téléphonique automatisé
de Dell de diriger votre appel plus
efficacement. Le système peut également
demander le numéro de série (situé à
l'arrière de votre ordinateur).
Localisation de votre numéro de
série et du code de service express
Le numéro de série et le code de service
express de votre ordinateur se trouvent
sur une étiquette située à l'arrière de
l'ordinateur(voir « Fonctionnalités du panneau
arrière » page 20).
N'oubliez pas de remplir la liste de vérification
des diagnostics ci-dessous. Si possible,
allumez votre ordinateur avant de contacter
Dell pour obtenir de l'aide et appelez d'un
téléphone qui se trouve à proximité de votre
ordinateur. Vous serez peut-être invité à
saisir certaines commandes au clavier, à
fournir des informations détaillées sur le
fonctionnement de l'ordinateur ou à essayer
d'autres méthodes de dépannage uniquement
possibles sur ce dernier. Assurez-vous que la
documentation de l'ordinateur est disponible.
Liste de vérification des diagnostics
• Nom :
• Date :
• Adresse :
• Numéro de téléphone :
• Numéro de série et code de service
express (situés sur une étiquette placée à
l'arrière de l'ordinateur) :57
Accès à l'aide
• Numéro d'autorisation de retour du
matériel (s'il vous a été fourni par le
support technique Dell) :
• Système d'exploitation et version :
• Périphériques :
• Cartes d'extension :
• Êtes-vous connecté à un réseau ? Oui/Non
• Réseau, version et carte réseau :
• Programmes et versions :
Consultez la documentation de votre système
d'exploitation pour déterminer le contenu
des fichiers de démarrage de l'ordinateur. Si
l'ordinateur est connecté à une imprimante,
imprimez chaque fichier. Le cas échéant,
notez le contenu de chaque fichier avant
d'appeler Dell.
• Message d'erreur, code sonore ou code de
diagnostic :
• Description du problème et procédures de
dépannage effectuées :
Contacter Dell
Depuis les États-Unis, appelez le
800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355).
REMARQUE : si vous n'avez pas de
connexion Internet, vous trouverez nos
coordonnées sur votre confirmation de
commande, bordereau d'expédition, facture
ou dans le catalogue de produits Dell.
Dell fournit plusieurs options de service et de
support technique en ligne et par téléphone.
Leur disponibilité variant d'un pays à l'autre,
il est possible que certains services ne soient
pas proposés dans votre pays.
Pour prendre contact avec Dell pour
des questions commerciales, de support
technique ou de service clientèle :
1. Visitez le site www.dell.com/ContactDell.
2. Sélectionnez votre pays ou région.
3. Sélectionnez le lien correspondant au service
ou au support technique dont vous avez besoin.
4. Choisissez la méthode de contact qui vous
convient.58
Recherche d'informations et de
ressources supplémentaires
Si vous voulez : Consultez :
réinstaller le système d'exploitation « Support de récupération système »,
page 47
exécuter un programme de diagnostics pour votre
ordinateur
« Dell Diagnostics », page 40
réinstaller le logiciel système « Mes Téléchargements Dell », page 36
trouver plus d'informations à propos du système
d'exploitation Microsoft Windows et de ses
fonctionnalités
support.dell.com
mettre à niveau votre ordinateur en remplaçant ou
en ajoutant des composants, comme par exemple
un nouveau disque dur
Réinstaller ou remplacer une pièce usée ou défectueuse
le Manuel de maintenance sur le site
support.dell.com/manuals
REMARQUE: dans certains pays,
l'ouverture de l'ordinateur et le
remplacement de pièces peuvent
annuler la garantie. Consultez votre
garantie et les politiques de retour
avant toute intervention à l'intérieur
de votre ordinateur.
INSPIRON59
Recherche d'informations et de ressources supplémentaires
Si vous voulez : Consultez :
trouver des informations sur les meilleures pratiques en
matière de sécurité pour votre ordinateur
consulter les informations sur la garantie, les conditions
d'utilisation (États-Unis uniquement), les consignes
de sécurité, les informations sur les réglementations,
l'ergonomie et le contrat de licence utilisateur final.
les documents de sécurité et de
garantie fournis avec votre ordinateur ;
reportez-vous également à la page
Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à
la réglementation), à l'adresse
www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance
accéder au numéro de série/code de service express
de votre ordinateur: vous devez fournir un numéro de
série pour identifier votre ordinateur sur le site
support.dell.com ou pour contacter le support technique.
l'arrière de votre ordinateur.
« Centre d'assistance Dell Support
Center », page 35
accéder aux pilotes et aux téléchargements ;
fichiers lisez-moi.
bénéficier du support technique et d'une aide
relative aux produits
vérifier l'état de vos commandes
trouver des solutions et des réponses à des
questions courantes
trouver des informations sur des mises à jour de
dernière minute concernant des modifications
techniques apportées à votre ordinateur ou des
documents de référence destinés aux techniciens
ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés
support.dell.com60
Cette section fournit des informations qui peuvent vous être utiles lors de la configuration de
votre ordinateur, de sa mise à niveau ou de la mise à jour de ses pilotes.
REMARQUE : les offres peuvent varier d'un pays à l'autre. Pour plus d'informations sur
la configuration de votre ordinateur, consultez la section Informations détaillées sur le
système dans le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center.
Pour démarrer le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center, cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous
les programmes→ Dell→ Dell Support Center (Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center)→
Launch Dell Support Center (Démarrer le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center).
Caractéristiques
Modèle de l'ordinateur
Dell Inspiron 620
Processeur
Type Intel Core i3
Intel Core i5
Intel Celeron
Intel Pentium double
cœur
Jeu de puces du système
Type Intel H61
Lecteurs et disques
Accessibles de
l'intérieur
deux baies de lecteur
de 3,5 pouces pour les
disques durs SATA
INSPIRON61
Caractéristiques
Lecteurs et disques
Accessibles de
l'extérieur
deux baies de lecteur
de 5,25 pouces pour un
lecteur combiné SATA
DVD+/-RW/
Blu-ray Disc (en option)/
Blu-ray Disc
réinscriptible (en option)
Mémoire
Connecteurs
pour module de
mémoire
deux connecteurs
accessibles à
l'utilisateur
Capacité des
barrettes de
mémoire
1 Go, 2 Go et 4 Go
Type de mémoire mémoire non ECC
uniquement DDR3
1333 MHz
Mémoire
minimale
1 Go
Mémoire
Mémoire
maximale
8 Go
Configurations
possibles de la
mémoire
2 Go, 3 Go, 4 Go, 6 Go
et 8 Go
REMARQUE : pour obtenir des
instructions sur la mise à niveau de
la mémoire, consultez le Manuel de
maintenance à l'adresse
support.dell.com/manuals.
Audio
Contrôleur audio Son haute définition,
canal 5.1 intégré62
Caractéristiques
Vidéo
UMA
Contrôleur
vidéo
Intel HD Graphics
Séparée
Contrôleur
vidéo
AMD Radeon HD 6450
AMD Radeon HD 6670
NVIDIA Geforce G420
Connecteurs internes
PCI Express x1 trois connecteurs à
36 broches
PCI Express x16 un connecteur à
164 broches
SATA quatre connecteurs à 7
broches
Connecteurs externes
Audio :
Panneau
avant :
un connecteur de
casque/de hautparleurs stéréo et
un connecteur de
microphone (entrée)
Panneau
arrière
trois connecteurs pour
la prise en charge 5.1
Carte réseau un connecteur RJ45
USB deux connecteurs
frontaux et six
connecteurs arrière
USB 2.0
VGA un connecteur
15 broches femelle
HDMI un connecteur à
19 broches
Lecteur de carte
multimédia
lecteur de carte 8 en 163
Caractéristiques
Batterie
Type 3 V CR-2032
pile bouton au lithium
Alimentation
Bloc d'alimentation secteur
Consommation
en watts
300 W
Tension d'entrée 100-127 VCA/
200-240 VCA
Fréquence
d'entrée
50/60 Hz
Courant d'entrée 9 A (8 A)/4,5 A
Communication
Carte réseau LAN Ethernet
10/100/1000 sur la carte
système
Sans fil (en option) Wi-Fi
Caractéristiques physiques
Hauteur 368,20 mm (14,5 po)
Largeur 182,80 mm (7,20 po)
Profondeur 448,80 mm (17,67 po)
Poids 8,94 kg (19,71 livres)64
Caractéristiques
Environnement informatique
Plage de températures :
Fonctionnement 10°C à 35°C
(50°F à 95°F)
Stockage –40°C à 65°C
(–40°F à 149°F)
Humidité relative
(maximale)
20 à 80 % (sans
condensation)
Choc maximal (en fonctionnement,
mesuré avec Dell Diagnostics exécuté sur
une impulsion demi-sinusoïdale de 2 ms ;
également mesuré en position de repos des
têtes du disque dur et impulsion demisinusoïdale de 2 ms pour le stockage) :
Fonctionnement 40 G pour 2 ms avec
un changement de
vitesse de 51 cm/s
(20 pouces/s)
Environnement informatique
à l'arrêt 50 G pour 26 ms avec
un changement de
vitesse de 813 cm/s
(320 pouces/s)
Vibration maximale (avec un spectre de
vibration aléatoire simulant l'environnement
utilisateur) :
Fonctionnement 0,25 GRMS
à l'arrêt 2,20 GRMS
Altitude (maximale) :
Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3 048 m
(–50 à 10 000 pieds)
Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m
(–50 à 35 000 pieds)
Niveau de
contaminants
atmosphériques
G2 ou inférieur,
tel que défini par
la norme
ISA-S71.04-198565
Annexe
Informations sur la norme NOM ou Norme Officielle
Mexicaine (pour le Mexique uniquement)
Les informations suivantes sont fournies sur le(s) appareil(s) décrit(s) dans ce document
conformément aux dispositions de la Norme Officielle Mexicaine (NOM) :
Importateur:
Dell Mexico S.A. de C.V.
Paseo de la Reforma 2620 – Piso 11°
Col. Lomas Altas
11950 Mexico, D.F.
Numéro
de modèle
réglementaire
Type
règlementaire
Tension
d'entrée
Fréquence
d'entrée
Courant d'entrée
nominal
D11M D11M001 115 V/230 VCA 50/60 Hz 7 A/4 A ou 6 A/2,1 A
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur.
Pour plus d'informations sur les meilleures pratiques en matière de sécurité, reportez-vous au
site www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
INSPIRON66
A
adresses électroniques
support technique 53
adresses électroniques de support
technique 53
aide
obtention d’aide et d’assistance 50
appeler Dell 56
C
caractéristiques 60
CD, lecture et création 24
connecteur HDMI 23
connecteur réseau
emplacement 23
connecteurs à l’avant 16
connexion
câble réseau en option 9
écran 6
Internet 13
connexion à Internet 13
connexion FTP, anonyme 53
connexion réseau
dépannage 30
connexion réseau sans fil 29
contacter Dell en ligne 57
D
DataSafe Local Backup 44
DellConnect 52
Dell Diagnostics 40
Dell Factory Image Restore 48
Index INSPIRON67
Index
Dell Stage 25
DVD, lecture et création 24
E
emplacement pour câble de sécurité 21
expédition de produits
retour ou réparation 55
F
FAI
fournisseur d’accès Internet 13
fonctionnalités logicielles 24
fonctions de l’ordinateur 24
L
liste de vérification des diagnostics 56
M
Messages système 37
N
numéro de série 56
O
options de réinstallation du système 42
P
pilotes et téléchargements 59
problèmes de mémoire
résolution 32
problèmes logiciels 33
problèmes matériels
diagnostic 39
problèmes, résolution 28
produits
informations et achat 5468
Index
R
recherche d’informations supplémentaires 58
résolution des problèmes 28
ressources, recherche supplémentaire 58
restauration d’une image d’usine 48
Restauration du système 43
retours dans le cadre de la garantie 54
S
service clientèle 51
sites d’assistance
dans le monde entier 52
support de restauration du système 47
T
tuner TV 13
U
USB 2.0
connecteurs à l’arrière 23
Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes
matériels 39
V
voyant d’activité du disque dur 18
W
Windows
Assistant Compatibilité des programmes 33
Safety information
About this user’s guide
Features of your new product
Introduction
Getting started
Network setup (Dell 1130n only)
Basic setup
Media and tray
Printing
Management tools
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Supplies
Specifications
Appendix
Glossary
www.dell.com | www.support.dell.com
Dell 1130
Dell 1130nadjusting
tray size
booklet printing
booklets
change percentage of your document
cleaning
inside
outside
cleaning a machine
control panel
convention
duplex printing (manual)
printer driver
Embedded Web Service
general information
favorites settings, for printing
features
features
machine features
power saving feature
print media feature
printer driver
supplied software
font setting
front view
glossary
jam
clearing paper
tips for avoiding paper jams
Linux
common Linux problems
driver installation for network connected
driver installation for USB cable connected
printer properties
printing
supplied softwares
system requirements
unifled driver configurator
loading
paper in manual tray
paper in the tray1
special media
Macintosh
common Macintosh problems
driver installation for network connected
adjusting
tray size
booklet printing
booklets
change percentage of your document
cleaning
inside
outside
cleaning a machine
control panel
convention
duplex printing (manual)
printer driver
Embedded Web Service
general information
favorites settings, for printing
features
features
machine features
power saving feature
print media feature
printer driver
supplied software
font setting
front view
glossary
jam
clearing paper
tips for avoiding paper jams
Linux
common Linux problems
driver installation for network connected
driver installation for USB cable connected
printer properties
printing
supplied softwares
system requirements
unifled driver configurator
loading
paper in manual tray
paper in the tray1
special mediaCopyright
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
©2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly
forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dell Toner Management System are trademarks of Dell Inc.;
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries. Adobe and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to the entities claiming the marks and names
of their products.
Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.
REV. 1.00Safety information
These warnings and precautions are included in order to prevent injury to you and others, as well as preventing any
potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine.
Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings
and instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe
place for future reference.
Important safety symbols
This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order,
according to the degree of danger.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide:
Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
Do not disassemble.
Do not touch.
Unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock.
Call the service center for help.
Follow directions explicitly.
Operating environment
Warning
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the
electrical outlet is not grounded.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy
objects on the power cord.
Stepping on or allowing the
power cord to be crushed by a
heavy object could result in electric shock
or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small
metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by
pulling on the cord; do not
handle the plug with wet
hands.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes
strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately
turn off the power switch and unplug the machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period
of non-operation, remove the power plug
from the electrical outlet.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do
not attempt to force it in.
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this
could result in electric shock.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
Burns could occur.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or
PC interface cords.This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to
your pet.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet
appears damaged, unplug the machine from all
interface connections and request assistance from
qualified service personnel.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine does not operate properly after these
instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from
all interface connections and request assistance from
qualified service personnel.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct
change in performance, unplug the machine from all
interface connections and request assistance from
qualified service personnel.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Operating method
Caution
Do not forcefully pull the paper
out during printing.
It can cause damage to the
machine.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the
paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to
touch.
Children may be burned.
Be careful not to put your hand
between the machine and paper
tray.
You may get injured.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or
sharp metal objects.
It can cause damage to the machine.
Do not block or push objects into the
ventilation opening.
This could result in elevated component
temperatures which can cause damage or
fire.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output
tray.
It could cause damage to the machine.
Use care to avoid paper cuts when
replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
You may get hurt.
This machine's power interception device is the power cord.
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the
electrical outlet.
Installation / Moving
Warning
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity or water leaks.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Caution
When moving the machine, turn
the power off and disconnect all
cords; then lift the machine with
at least two people.
The machine could fall, causing human injury
or machine damage.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not place the machine on an unstable
surface.
The machine could fall, causing human injury
or machine damage.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
The machine should be connected to the
power level which is specified on the label.
If you are unsure and want to check the
power level you are using, contact the
electrical utility company.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock or
fire.
Use only No.26 AWG
[a]
or larger,
telephone line cord, if necessary.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation.
If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (79”) with a
140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger.Otherwise, it can cause damage to the
machine. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result in
electric shock or fire.
[a]
AWG: American Wire Gauge
Maintenance / Checking
Caution
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the
machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Keep cleaning supplies
away from children.
Children may get hurt.
When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or
cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.
You may get injured.
Do not disassemble,
repair or rebuild the
machine by yourself.
It can cause damage to
the machine. Call a certified
technician when the machine needs
repair.
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust
or water.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
To clean and operate the
machine, strictly follow the user's
guide provided with the machine.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to
the machine.
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws.
The machine should only be repaired by Dell service technician.
Supply usage
Caution
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.
When storing supplies such as toner
cartridges, keep them away from
children.
Toner dust can be dangerous to
humans.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner
cartridge or fuser unit.
It can cause an explosion or fire.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can
cause damage to the machine.
In case of damage due to the use of recycled
supplies, a service fee will be charged.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.About this user’s guide
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each
step during actual usage.
Read the safety information before using the machine.
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter. (See Troubleshooting.)
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter. (See Glossary.)
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models.
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP.
Convention
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
Document is synonymous with original.
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
Machine refers to printer or MFP.
The following table offers the conventions of this guide:
Convention Description Example
Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Cancel
Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the
machine function and feature.
The date format may differ from
country to country.
Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible
mechanical damage or malfunction.
Do not touch the green underside
of the toner cartridge.
Footnote Provides additional more detailed information on certain words
or a phrase.
a. pages per minute
(“Crossreference”)
Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed
information.
(See Finding more information.)
Finding more information
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or
on screen.
Material
name
Description
Quick
Install
Guide
This guide provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the
instructions in the guide to prepare the machine.
User’s
Guide
This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and
contains information for maintaining your machine, troubleshooting and replacing supplies.
Printer
Driver
Help
This help provides you with help information on printer driver and instructions for setting up the options
for printing. (See Using help.)
Dell
website
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information
from the Dell websites www.dell.com or support.dell.com.Features of your new product
Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print.
Special Features
Print with excellent quality and speed
You can print with a resolution of up to 1,200 x 600 dpi (Dell 1130) and up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi
(Dell 1130n) effective output.
Dell 1130 prints up to 18 ppm, A4-sized paper or up to 19 ppm, letter sized paper. Dell 1130n
prints up to 24 ppm, A4-sized paper and letter-sized paper.
Handle many different types of printable material
Manual tray supports plain paper in various sizes, letterhead, envelopes, labels, custom-sized
media, postcards, and heavy paper.
The 250-sheet tray supports plain paper.
Create professional documents
Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with words, such as “Confidential”. (See
Using watermarks.)
Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed
across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. (See Printing posters.)
You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper. (See Using overlay.)
Save time and money
To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper. (See Printing multiple
pages on one sheet of paper.)
This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when
not in use.
To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (Manual). (See Printing on both sides of
paper (Manual).)
Print in various environments
You can print with Windows as well as Linux and Macintosh systems.
Your machine is equipped with a USB interface.
The Dell 1130n comes with a built-in Network interface, 10/100 BaseTX.
IPv6
This machine supports IPv6 (Dell 1130n only).Features by Models
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing to more advanced networking solutions
for your business.
Features by models include:
FEATURES Dell 1130 Dell 1130n
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
●
[a] ●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX wired LAN ●
Duplex (2-sided) printing (Manual) ● ●
[a]
USB 1.1
( ●: Included, Blank: Not available)Introduction
This chapter gives you an overview of your machine:
This chapter includes:
Machine overview
Control panel overview
Understanding the control panel
Machine overview
Front view
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1 Document output tray 6 Manual feeder
2 Control panel 7 Manual feeder guide
3 Front cover handle 8 Output support
4 Front cover 9 Toner cartridge
5 Tray 1
Rear viewThis illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1 Rear cover 3 USB port
2 Network Port
[a]
4 Power receptacle
[a]
Dell 1130n only.
Control panel overview
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1 Jam Shows the status of jam occurrence of your machine. (See LEDs.)
2 Online/Error Shows the status of your machine. (See LEDs.)
3 Cancel Stops an operation at any time. Also there are more functions. (See Understanding the
control panel.)
4 Power Turns power on or off. (See Understanding the control panel.)
Understanding the control panel
LEDs
The color of the LEDs indicates the machine's current status.
LED Status Description
Jam ( ) Orange On A paper jam has occurred. (See Clearing paper jams.)
Online/Error
( )
Off The machine is off-line.Green On The machine is in power saver mode.
The machine is on-line and can receive data from the computer.
Blinking When the LED blinks slowly, the machine is receiving data from the computer.
When the LED blinks rapidly , the machine is printing data.
Red On The cover is open. Close the cover.
There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
The machine has stopped due to a major error.
Your system has some problems. If this problem occurs, contact your service
representative.
The toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life
[a]
. It is
recommended to replace the toner cartridge. (See Replacing the toner
cartridge.)
Blinking A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be
cleared. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes.
Toner is low. Replace the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life
[a]
of toner is
close. Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase
the printing quality by redistributing the toner. (See Redistributing toner.)
[a]
Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average
capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by
operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the
cartridge even when red LED turned on and the printer stops printing.
Dell does not recommend using non-genuine Dell toner cartridge such as refilled or re-manufactured. Dell
cannot guarantee non-genuine Dell toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using nongenuine Dell toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.
All printing errors will be appear in the Printer Status Monitor program window. If the problem persists, call for
service.
Buttons
(Cancel button)
By pressing the (cancel button), you can:
Function Description
Printing
demo
page
[a]
In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 2 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly,
and release. (See Printing a demo page.)
Printing
configuration
sheet
[b]
In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 5 seconds until the status LED blinks fast, and
release. (See Printing a machine report.)
Printing a
cleaning
sheet
[b]
In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 10 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly,
and release. (See Cleaning the inside.)
Cancel print
job
Press (cancel button) during printing. The red LED blinks while the print job is cleared from both
the machine and the computer and then the machine returns to ready mode. This may take some
time depending on the size of the print job.
Manual print Press (cancel button) each time you load a sheet of paper in the
manual tray when you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application.
[a]
When you print the demo page for Dell 1130, configuration sheet is printed as well.
[b]
Dell 1130n only
(Power button)
This button must be used to turn the machine on/off.
Turning on the machine
1. Plug in the power cord.
2. Press (power) on the control panel.If you want to turn the power off, press and hold this button for 1 second.Getting started
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
Setting up the hardware
Printing a demo page
Supplied software
System requirements
Installing USB connected machine’s driver
Sharing your machine locally
Setting up the hardware
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read the
Quick Install Guide first and follow the steps below:
Location
1. Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to open covers and trays.
The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not
set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table.
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing.
(See Altitude adjustment.)
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise,
printing quality may be affected.
2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.3. Remove tape holding the machine.
4. Install the toner cartridge.
5. Load paper. (See Loading paper in the tray.)
6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine.
7. Turn the machine on. (See Turning on the machine.)
This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.
Printing a demo page
Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly.
To print a demo page:
In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 2 seconds.
Supplied software
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you must install the printer software using the
supplied CD. The software CD provides you with the following software.
OS Contents
Windows Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features.
Printer Status Monitor: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you
when an error occurs during printing.
Printer Settings Utility (Dell 1130n only): This program allows you to set up printer’s other options
from your computer desktop.
Dell Toner Management System™: Displays the status of the printer and the name of the job when
send a job to print. The Dell Toner Management System™window also displays the level of toner
remaining and allows you to order replacement toner cartridge.
Firmware Update Utility: This program helps you to update printer’s firmware.
SetIP (Dell 1130n only): Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses.
Macintosh Printer Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features.
Linux Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features.
System requirements
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following requirements:
Microsoft® Windows®
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.
OPERATING
SYSTEM
Requirement (recommended)
CPU RAM
free HDD
space
Windows 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128
MB)
600 MB
Windows XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256
MB)
1.5 GB
Windows Server®
2003
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512
MB)
1.25 GB to 2
GB
Windows Server
2008
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2048
MB)
10 GB
Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1024
MB)
15 GB
Windows 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB
Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors 512 MB (2048 10 GB2008 R2 (2 GHz or faster) MB)
Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.
Administrator rights are required to install the software.
Windows Terminal Services is compatible with this machine.
Macintosh
OPERATING
SYSTEM
Requirements (recommended)
CPU RAM
free HDD
space
Mac OS X 10.3 ~
10.4
Intel Processors
PowerPC G4/ G5
128 MB for a PowerPC based Mac
(512 MB)
512 MB for a Intel-based Mac (1 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.5 Intel Processors
867 MHz or faster Power PC
G4/ G5
512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X 10.6 Intel Processors 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB
Linux
Item Requirement (recommended)
Operating system RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
Fedora Core 2~10 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux 9.1 (32 bit)
OpenSuSE 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1 (32/64 bit)
Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/64 bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit)
Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)
CPU Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM 512 MB (1024 MB)
Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB)
Installing USB connected machine’s driver
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the USB cable. If your machine is
attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing network connected machine’s driver. (See
Installing network connected machine’s driver.)
Only use an USB cable shorter than 3 m (118 in. ).
Windows
You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method.
The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a machine directly connected to your computer.
All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer and powered on.
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the installation procedure, click Cancel in
close the window.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window should appear.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X”
with the letter which represents your CD/DVD drive. Click OK.
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD/DVD drive and click OK.If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control
windows.
3. Click Next.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4. Select Typical installation for a local printer. Then, click Next.
The Custom allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. Follow
the on-screen instructions.
If your machine is not connected to the computer, the following window will appear.After connecting the machine, click Next.
If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click Next, and No on the following screen. The
installation starts and a test page will not print at the end of the installation.
The installation window in this user guide may differ depending on the machine and interface in use.
5. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test
page, select the checkbox and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.
6. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
7. Click Finish.
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on.
2. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer
driver name > Maintenance.
3. Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window.
Macintosh
The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver
or Apple LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a machine which supports the PostScript driver) for printing
on a Macintosh computer.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary
for machine operations will be installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install.
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue.
10. After the installation is finished, click Quit.
11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.
12. Click Add on the Printer List.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up.
13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab.
For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB connection.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB connection.14. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model and your machine name
in Model Name.
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and your machine
name in Model.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your
machine name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine.
15. Click Add.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click
Continue.
10. When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
Follow the steps below to install the driver for Linux. While installing the driver, the Unified Linux Driver package will
automatically be installed as well.
The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a
Linux computer easily in UI based management tool. (See Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator.)
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your
system administrator.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD will run automatically.
If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in the following:
If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is /mnt/cdrom,
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh
If you still failed to run the software CD type the followings in sequence:
[root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and
configured.
4. When the welcome screen appears, click Next.5. When the installation is complete, click Finish.
The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the
system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that is available through
your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver
Configurator or Image Manager.
Installing the driver in the text mode:
If you do not use the graphical interface or have been unable to install the driver, you have to use the driver
in the text mode.
Follow the steps 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./install.sh. Follow the instructions on the
terminal screen. The installation is completed.
When you want to uninstall the driver, follow the installation instructions above, but type [root@localhost
Linux]# ./uninstall.sh on the terminal screen.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Follow the steps below steps to uninstall the driver for Linux.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the Login field and enter the system
password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask
your system administrator.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD will run automatically.
If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the
Terminal screen appears, type in:
If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is /mnt/cdrom,
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost Linux]#./uninstall.sh
The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and
configured.
4. Click Uninstall.
5. Click Next.
6. Click Finish.
Sharing your machine locally
Follow the steps below to set up the computers to share your machine locally.
If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with USB cable and is also connected to the local network
environment, the client computer connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the host
computer to print.1 Host computer A computer which is directly connected to the machine by USB cable.
2 Client computers Computers which use the machine shared through the host computer.
Windows
Setting up a host computer
1. Install your printer driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected
machine’s driver.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
4. Right click your printer icon.
5. For Windows XP/Server 2003/ Server 2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected
printer.
6. Select the Sharing tab.
7. Check the Change Sharing Options.
8. Check the Share this printer.
9. Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK.
Setting up a client computer
1. Install your printer driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected
machine’s driver.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer.
4. Enter the IP address of the host computer in the address bar and press Enter in your keyboard.
In case host computer requires User name and Password, fill in User ID and password of the host
computer account.
5. Right click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect.
6. If a set up complete message appears, click OK.
7. Open the file you want to print and start printing.
Macintosh
The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help for other OS versions.
Setting up a host computer
1. Install your printer driver. (See Macintosh.)
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.
3. Select the printer to share in the Printers list.
4. Select Share this printer.
Setting up a client computer1. Install your printer driver. (See Macintosh.)
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.
3. Click the “+” icon.
A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears.
4. Select your machine and click Add.Network setup (Dell 1130n only)
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
Network environment
Introducing useful network programs
Using a wired network
Installing network connected machine’s driver
IPv6 Configuration
Network environment
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine.
The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine:
Item Requirements
Network interface Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
Network operating system Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/7/2008 Server R2
Various Linux OS
Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6
Network protocols TCP/IPv4
DHCP, BOOTP
DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
(See IPv6 Configuration.)
Introducing useful network programs
There are several programs available to setup the network settings in network environment.
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
Embedded Web Service
Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to:
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments.
Customize machine settings.
(See Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only).)
SetIP
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with
the TCP/IP protocol. (See IP setting using SetIP Program)
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
Using a wired network
You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network. This chapter will show you how this
is accomplished.
You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine.Printing network configuration report
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current
machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems.
To print the report:
In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address
and IP address.
For example:
MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78
IP Address : 192.0.0.192
Setting IP address
Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address
will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.
In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate
Intranets for security reasons.
DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to
assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the
report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in
the report.
Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer.
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you.
IP setting using SetIP Program
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to
communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can
be found in the Network Configuration Report.
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following:
1. Open Start > All programs > Control Panel.
2. Double click Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1. Insert the supplied software CD provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close
that window.
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD/DVD drive.)
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5. Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Dell Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you
may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.MAC Address : Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1
and 254 other than the computer’s address.)
Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report.
Confirm that all the settings are correct.
7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
Network parameter setting
You can also set up the various network settings through the network administration programs such as Embedded
Web Service.
Restoring factory default settings
You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when machine that you are using is connected to
new network environment.
Restoring factory default settings using Embedded Web Service
1. Start a web browser and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
2. When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Network Settings.
3. Click Reset. Then, click Clear for network.
4. Turn off and restart machine to apply settings.
Installing network connected machine’s driver
Windows
You can set up the machine driver, follow the steps below.
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X”
with the letter which represents your drive. Click OK.
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control
windows.
3. Click Next.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4. Select Typical installation for a network printer. Then, click Next.
The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to
install. Follow the guide on the window.
5. The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the printer you want to install from the list and then
click Next.If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add
your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for
the printer.
To verify your printer’s IP address, print a Network Configuration page. (By pressing the (cancel button)
for about 5 seconds, then release. (Example IP Address is 13.121.52.104)
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button.
If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the firewall and click Update.
For Windows operating system, Start > Control Panel and start windows firewall, and deactivate this
option. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.
6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test
page, select the checkbox and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8.
7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
8. Click Finish.
After the driver setup, you may enable firewall.
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on.
2. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer
driver name > Maintenance.
3. Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window.
Macintosh
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address
should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary
for machine operations will be installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install.
9. The message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears. Click Continue.
10. After the installation is finished, click Quit.
11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.12. Click Add on the Printer List.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up.
13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.
For Mac OS X10.4, click IP Printer.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP.
14. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type.
When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance may be enhanced by choosing
Socket for Printer Type option.
15. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field.
16. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine
server, try using the default queue first.
17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model and your machine name
in Model Name.
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and your machine
name in Model.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your
machine name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine.
18. Click Add.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click
Continue.
10. When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
Install Linux Driver
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address
should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Linux desktop.
4. Double-click the Linux folder.
5. Double-click the install.sh icon.
6. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue.
7. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
8. Select Network printer and click Search button.
9. The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
10. Select your machine and click Next.
Add network Printer
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.
2. Click Add Printer…
3. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
4. Select Network printer and click the Search button.
5. The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
6. Select your machine and click Next.
Input the printer description and Next7.
8. When the add printer is done, click Finish.
IPv6 Configuration
TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
If the IPv6 network seems not working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again. (See
Restoring factory default settings.)
To use the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address:
The machine is provided with IPv6 feature on.
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses.
4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers > Add Printer.
5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows.
6. Follow the instruction on the window.
If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by.
Printing network configuration report
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current
machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems.
To print the report:
In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address
and IP address.
For example:
MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78
IP Address : 192.0.0.192
Setting IPv6 addresses
Machine supports following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements.
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address. (Address starts with FE80.)
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router.
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
Manual address configuration
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL. (See Using Embedded
Web Service (Dell 1130n only).)
For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or
click Go.
2. When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Network Settings.
3. Click TCP/IP.
4. Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section.
5. Select the Router Prefix and click the Add button, then the router prefix will automatically be entered into the
address field.
Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.)
6. Click the Apply button.
Installing printer driver
Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same as TCP/IPv4. (See Installing network
connected machine’s driver.)
Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines is displayed, simply select your machine's IPv6 address.
Using Embedded Web Service
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL .
2. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual
Address) from Network Configuration Report.3. Enter the IPv6 addresses. (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701])
Address must be enclosed in '[]' brackets.Basic setup
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would
like to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.
This chapter includes:
Altitude adjustment
Setting the default tray and paper
Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only)
Altitude adjustment
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea
level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of
print.Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the machine.
1. High 1
2. High 2
3. High 3
4. Normal
For Dell 1130
1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s
driver.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties.
4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options.
5. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
For Dell 1130n
You can altitude adjustment in Printer Settings Utility.
1. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your
printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility.
2. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list.
3. Click the Apply button.
This can also be adjusted via Embedded Web Service.
Setting the default tray and paper
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job.In the computer
Windows
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. Right-click your machine.
4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing Preferences.
If Printing Preferences item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected
printer.
5. Click Paper tab.
6. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type.
7. Press OK.
Macintosh
Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually each time
they want to print using other settings.
1. Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.
2. Open the File menu and click Print.
3. Go to Paper Feed pane.
4. Open the File menu and click Print.
5. Go to Paper Feed.
6. Set appropriate tray from which you want to print.
7. Go to Paper pane.
8. Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print.
9. Click Print to print.
Using power saving feature
When you are not using the machine for a while, use this feature to save power.
For Dell 1130
1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s
driver.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties.
4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options.
5. Select the time you want, in the Power Save drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
For Dell 1130n
You change power save in Printer Settings Utility.
1. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your
printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility.
2. Click Power Save. Select the appropriate value from the dropdown list, and then click Apply.
Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only)Your machine has preset font setting depending on your region or country.
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as the DOS environment, you can change the
font setting as follows:
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided software CD.
2. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell >
Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility.
3. Click Emulation Type.
4. Select your preferred font.
5. Click Apply.
Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages.
Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic
Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)
Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek
Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic
OCR: OCR-A, OCR-BMedia and tray
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your machine.
This chapter includes:
Selecting print media
Changing the tray size
Loading paper in the tray
Printing on special media
Using the output support
Selecting print media
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies. Always use print
media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine.
Guidelines to select the print media
Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:
Poor print quality
Increased paper jams
Premature wear on the machine.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are important factors that affect the machine’s
performance and the output quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:
The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are described in print media specifications. (See
Print media specifications.)
Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project.
Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper, more vibrant images.
Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper.
Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results. This
may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables
over which cannot be controlled.
Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this
user’s guide.
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs
are not covered by the warranty or service agreements.
The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used. (See Print media
specifications.)
Media sizes supported in each mode
Mode Size Type Source
Simplex printing For details about paper size, see Print
media specifications.
For details about paper type, see Print
media specifications.
tray 1
manual
tray
Duplex printing
(Manual)
[a]
Letter, A4, Legal, US Folio, Oficio Plain, Color, Preprinted, Recycled, Bond,
Archive
tray 1
[a]
75 to 90 g/m2
(20~24 lb bond) only
Changing the tray size
The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To change the size, you need to adjust the paper
guides.1. Support guide
2. Paper length guide
3. Guide lock
4. Paper width guide
1. With one hand press and hold the guide lock, and with the other hand, hold the paper length guide and support
guide together. Slide the paper length guide and support guide to locate them in the correct paper size slot.
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. Insert the paper into the tray.
3. After inserting paper into the tray, adjust the support guide so that it lightly touches the paper stack.
4. Squeeze the paper width guides and slide them to the desired paper size marked at the bottom of the tray.
Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp.
If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm curl.
Loading paper in the tray
Tray 1
1. Pull out the paper tray . And adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading. (See Changing the tray size.)
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers.
3. And place paper with the side you want to print facing down.
4. Set the paper type and size for the tray 1. (See Setting the default tray and paper.)
If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper meets the media specification. (See
Print media specifications.)
Manual tray
The manual tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It
is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper.
Tips on using the manual tray
If you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application, you need to press (cancel button)
each time you print a page and load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the manual
tray.
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing. This also applies to other types of print media.
Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the manual tray first and be placed in the
center of the tray.
Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems. (See Print media
specifications.)
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the manual tray.
1. Load the paper in the manual tray.Do not force the paper beyond the surface with mark when loading.
When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline. (See Printing on special
media.)
When papers overlap when printing using manual tray, open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers
then try printing again.
When paper does not feed well while printing, push the paper in manually until it starts feeding
automatically.
2. Squeeze the manual tray paper guides and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too
much, or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew.
3. To print in application, open an application and start the print menu.
4. Open Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.)
5. Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate paper type.
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label.
6. Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK.
7. Start printing in application.
If you are printing multiple pages, load the next sheet after the first page prints out, and press the
(cancel button). Repeat this step for every page to be printed.
Printing on special media
The table below shows the available special media for each tray.
When using special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a time. Check the maximum input number of
media for each tray. (See Print media specifications.)
Types Tray 1 Manual tray
Plain ● ●
Thick ● ●
Thin ● ●
Bond ●
Color ●
CardStock ●
Labels ●
Transparency ●
Envelope ●
Preprinted ●
Cotton ●
Recycled ● ●
Archive ● ●
( ●: supported, Blank: Not supported)
The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to
be loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it. This will let you get the best quality
printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved.
2Plain: 60 to 120 g/m (16 to 32 lb) Normal plain paper.
Thick: 90 (24 lb) thick paper.
Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2
(16 to 19 lb) thin paper.
Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2
(28 to 32 lb) bond.
Color: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper.
CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2
(24 to 43 lb) cardstock.
Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2
(32 to 40 lb) labels.
Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2
(37 to 39 lb) transparency paper.
Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lb) envelope.
Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lb) preprinted/letterhead paper.
Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lb) cotton paper.
Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lb) recycled paper.
When you use recycled paper, printouts might be wrinkled.
Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2
(19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the print-out for a long period time, such as archives,
select this option.
Envelope
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.
To print an envelope, the stamp area is on the left side and the end of the envelope with the stamp area enters the
printer first and center of the manual tray.
If envelopes are printed out with wrinkles, crease or black bold lines, open the rear cover and pull down the pressure
lever and try printing again. Keep the rear cover opened during printing.
1. Pressure lever
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2
otherwise, jam may occur.
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not contain air.
Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.
Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during
operation.
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds.
Do not use stamped envelopes.
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic
materials.Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.
1. Acceptable
2. Unacceptable
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives
compatible with the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps and
strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
Transparency
To avoid damaging the machine, only use transparencies designed for use in laser printers.
Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand machine’s fusing temperature.
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on
them, resulting in spotty printing.
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight.
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges.
Do not use transparencies that separates from the backing sheet.
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are begin
printed out.
Labels
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser machines.
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338
°F).
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have
spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off
during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components.
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a
single pass through the machine.Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Card stock/Custom-sized paper
Postcards, cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with this machine.
Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm (3.00 inches) wide or 127 mm (5.00 inches) long.
In the software application, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material.
If media weight is over 160 g/m2
(43 lb), try printing in the rear cover (face up).
Letterhead/Preprinted paper
Single-sided Double-sided
Tray1 Face down Face up
Manual tray Face up Face down
Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release
hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second.
Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers.
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage.
Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process,
wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality.
Photo
Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could cause damage to the machine.
Glossy
Load one paper to the manual tray at a time, glossy side facing up.
Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A) only.
Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product:
Q6616A).
Using the output support
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once. Make sure that you
do not touch the surface, and do not allow children near it.
The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help the printed pages to align. The printer
sends output to the output tray by default. To use the output tray, make sure that the rear cover is closed.If you are using A5 paper, fold the output tray. Otherwise, printed pages might be mis-aligned or jammed.Printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
This chapter includes:
Printer driver features
Basic printing
Opening printing preferences
Using help
Using special print features
Changing the default print settings
Setting your machine as a default machine
Printing to a file (PRN)
Macintosh printing
Linux printing
The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP.
Printer driver features
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:
Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection
Number of copies
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following table shows a general overview of features
supported by your printer drivers:
Some models or operating system may not support the certain feature(s) in the following table.
Printer driver
Feature Windows
Machine quality option ●
Poster printing ●
Multiple pages per sheet ●
Booklet printing (manual) ●
Fit to page printing ●
Reduce and enlarge printing ●
Different source for first page ●
Watermark ●
Overlay ●
Double-sided printing (manual) ●
( ●: supported, Blank: Not supported)
Basic printing
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a
document may vary depending on the application you use.
Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in
use. However, the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check the operating system(s)
that are compatible with your machine. Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications. (See
System requirements.)
When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning mark, , or . An exclamationmark ( ) means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( ) mark means you
cannot select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications.
Macintosh basic printing. (See Macintosh printing.)
Linux basic printing. (See Linux printing.)
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP. Your Printing Preferences window may
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using.
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in
the application’s Print window to change the print setting. (See Opening printing preferences.)
4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows:
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. For Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003 and Vista, double-click your machine.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer icon > context menus > See what’s
printing.
If See what’s printing item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected
printer.
4. From the Document menu, select Cancel.
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing on the control panel.
Opening printing preferencesYou can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing Preferences.
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer.
4. Click Properties or Preferences.
Using a favorite setting
The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for Dell tab, allows you to save the current
preferences settings for future use.
To save a Presets item:
1. Change the settings as needed on each tab.
2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.
3. Click Add. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are saved.
If you click Add, the Add button changes to Update button. Select more options and click Update, settings will be
added to the Presets you made.
To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list. The machine is now set to print according to the
setting you selected.
To delete saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list and click Delete.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down
list.Using help
Click the question mark from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about.
Then a pop up window appears with information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver.
If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Dell tab in the Printing Preferences window, and enter a
keyword in the input line of the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver update or registration and so
on, click appropriate buttons.
Using special print features
Special print features include:
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
Printing posters.
Printing booklets (Manual).
Printing on both sides of paper (Manual).
Change percentage of your document.
Fitting your document to a selected paper size.
Using watermarks.
Using overlay.
Advanced Options.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the
pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type drop-down list.
3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list.
4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary.
5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet.
6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Printing posters
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting
the sheets together to form one poster-size document.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.
3. Select the page layout you want.
Specification of the page layout:
Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages.
Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages.
Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages.
4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button
on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together.5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together.
Printing booklets (Manual)
This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded
in half after printing to produce a booklet.
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the Printing Preferences. (See Opening
printing preferences.)
2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down list.
3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size
for this feature, select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab.
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available
paper. (paper without or mark).
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
5. After printing, fold and staple the pages.
Printing on both sides of paper (Manual)
You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You
can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper. (See Print media specifications.)
We recommend not to print on both sides of the special media, such as labels, envelopes, or thick paper to
print on both sides of paper. It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine.
The Double-Sided Printing (Manual) feature is available only for the tray 1.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. From the Double-Sided Printing (Manual) section, select the binding option you want.
None
Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding.
Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.
4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine
prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job.
Change percentage of your document
You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage
you want.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Paper tab.
3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate.
4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Fitting your document to a selected paper size
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size.
This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Paper tab.
3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page.
4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Using watermarks
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to
have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a
document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They can be modified, or you can add new
ones to the list.
Using an existing watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening
printing preferences.)
2. Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see
the selected watermark in the preview image.
3. Click OK or Print until you exit the print window.
Creating a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening
printing preferences.)
2. From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window
appears.
3. Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up to 256 characters. The message
displays in the preview window.When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the first page only.
4. Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font Attributes section, as well as set the
angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section.
5. Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list.
6. When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark drop-down list.
Editing a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening
printing preferences.)
2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window
appears.
3. Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark
message and options.
4. Click Update to save the changes.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Deleting a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening
printing preferences.)
2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window
appears.
3. Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Using overlay
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be
printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your
letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in
the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document.
Creating a new page overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
1. Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay. Position the items
exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.
2. To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.)
3. Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears.
4. In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
5. In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover.)
6. Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
8. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.
The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an
overlay with a watermark.
Using a page overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an overlay with a
document:
1. Create or open the document you want to print.
2. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Openingprinting preferences.)
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.
5. If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit from the list and click
Load. Select the overlay file you want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you
access the Open window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing.
Select the overlay from the Overlay List box.
6. If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window
appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on
your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your
document.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The selected overlay prints on your document.
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the
overlay.
Deleting a page overlay
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
1. In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
2. Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list.
3. Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
4. Click Delete.
5. When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Advanced Options
Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Graphics tab.
This options you can select may vary depending on your printer model.
Refer to the online help for each option’s information provided from the Printing Preferences.
Font/ Text: Select Darken Text to print texts darker than on a normal document. Use All Text Black to
prints solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.
Advanced (Dell 1130n only): You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button.
True Type Options: This option determines what the driver tells the printer about how to image the
text in your document. Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your document.
Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the driver will download any TrueType fonts
that are used in your document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If, after printing a
document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly, choose Download as bit image and
resubmit your print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful when printing Adobe®.
Download as Bit Image: When this option is selected, the driver will download the font data as
bitmap images. Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, or various other
fonts, will print faster in this setting.
Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver will download any fonts as graphics.
When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing
performance (speed) may be enhanced in this setting.
Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the printer uses the fonts that are stored in
its memory (resident fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the fonts used in your
document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time.
When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored
in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident
in the printer, your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.
Graphic Controller: Fine Edge allows user to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving
readability.
Toner Save: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per pagewithout a significant reduction in print quality.
Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from
the machine.
On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page.
Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option.
Darkness: The option adjusts the toner density on print outputs. The values are Normal, Light, and Dark.
For Dell 1130n, you change darknesss in the Printer Settings Utility.
3. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Changing the default print settings
Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings
available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver.
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. Right-click your machine.
4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing preferences.
If Printing preferences item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer.
5. Change the settings on each tab.
6. Click OK.
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing Preferences.
Setting your machine as a default machine
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. Select your machine.
4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2
If Set as default printer item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected
printer.
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.
To create a file:
1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window.2. Click Print.
3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.
For example c:\Temp\file name.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My Documents. The saved folder may
differ, depending on your operating system.
Macintosh printing
This chapter explains how to print using Macintosh. You need to set the print environment before printing.
USB connected (See Macintosh.)
Network connected (See Macintosh.)
Printing a document
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use. Follow the
steps below to print from a Macintosh:
1. Open an application and select the file you want to print.
2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications).
3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click
OK.4. Open the File menu and click Print.
5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print.
6. Click Print.
Changing printer settings
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name, which appears in the printer
properties window may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer
properties window is similar to the following.
The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version.
Layout
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You can print multiple
pages on one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following
features.
Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page. (See Printing multiple
pages on one sheet of paper.)
Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on
UI.
Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet.
Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees.
Graphics
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution. Select Graphics from the drop-down list under
Orientation to access the graphic features.
Resolution (Quality): This option allows you to select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, thesharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes
to print a document.
Darkness: This option allows you to enhance printouts. The available options are Normal, Light, and Dark.
Paper
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get
the best quality printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type.
Printer Settings
Printer Settings tab provides Toner Save Mode, Reprint When Jammed, and Power Save options. Select
Printer Settings from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features:
Toner Save Mode: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per
page without a significant reduction in print quality.
Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the
machine.
On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page.
Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option.
Reprint When Jammed: When this option is checked, the machine retains the image of a printed page until
the machine signals that the page has successfully exited the machine. If a paper jam occurs, the printer will
reprint the last page sent from the computer after you have cleared the jam. (Dell 1130 only)
Power Save: When this option is checked, the machine turns to the power save mode after the selected
time.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print
draft pages.
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the
number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper.3. Select the other options you want to use.
4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper.
Linux printing
Printing from applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can
print on your machine from any such application.
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
2. Select Print directly using lpr.
3. In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties.
4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window.General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the
documents. It enables the duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages
per sheet.
Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options, such as spacing or
columns.
Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files, such as
color options, image size, or image position.
Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper source and special print features.
If an option is grayed out, it means that the grayed out option is not supported.
5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.
6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job.
To abort the current job, click Cancel.
Printing files
You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way, directly from the
command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr
tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.
To print any document file:
1. Type lpr from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files
you want to print and click Open.
2. In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change the print job properties.
3. Click OK to start printing.
Configuring printer properties
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various
properties for your machine as a printer.
1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
2. Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties.
3. The Printer Properties window opens.The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
General: This option allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab
displays on the printer list in Printers configuration.
Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If you change the machine port from USB
to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab.
Driver: Allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default
device options.
Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the
Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.
Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class to add your machine to a
specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class.
4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.Management tools
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
This chapter includes:
Introducing useful management tools
Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only)
Using the Printer Status Monitor
Introducing useful management tools
Using the printer settings utility
Firmware update utility
Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator
Introducing useful management tools
The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently.
Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only).
Using the Printer Status Monitor.
Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator.
Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only)
Your Embedded Web Service window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use.
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters correctly, you can manage
the machine via Embedded Web Service, an embedded web server. Use Embedded Web Service to:
View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
Change printer preference.
Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status.
Get support for using the machine.
To access Embedded Web Service:
1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
Embedded Web Service overview
Information tab: This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as the
machine’s IP address, remaining amount of toner, ethernet information, firmware version, and so on. You can
also print reports such as an error report and so on.
Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by your machine.
Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the network environment. You can set things,
such as TCP/IP, enabling EtherTalk and so on.
Maintenance tab: This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting security
information.
Support tab: This tab allows you to set contact information for sending email. You can also connect to Dell
website or download drivers by selecting Link.
E-mail notification setup
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By setting information such as IP
address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or
machine error) will be sent to the specified e-mail address automatically. This option may be used more frequently
by a machine administrator.1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
3. From the Machine Settings, select E-mail Notification Setup.
4. Set required settings.
Set SMTP server information and other settings to use E-mail notification function. After setting the network
environment, select the recipient list. And just by clicking a radio button, you can select in what case you want to
receive an alert.
5. Click Apply.
Setting the contact information
Set the machine administrator information and this setting is necessary to use E-mail notification option.
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
3. Select Support.
4. Enter the name of machine administrator, phone number, location or E-mail address.
5. Click Apply.
If the firewall is activated, the E-mail may not be sent successfully. In that case, contact the a network
administrator.
Using the Printer Status Monitor
The Printer Status Monitor program can only be used in the Windows system.
Printer Status Monitor is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status. Printer Status Monitor is
installed automatically when you install the machine software.
To use this program, you need the following system requirements:
Windows. Check for windows operating system(s) compatible with your machine. (See System requirements.)
Understanding Printer Status Monitor
If an error occurs while printing, you can check the error from the Printer Status Monitor.
You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer
driver name > Printer Status Monitor.
The Printer Status Monitor program displays the current status of the machine, the estimated level of toner
remaining in the toner cartridge(s), and various other types of information.
1
Printing
Status
The Printer Status Monitor displays the current status of the printer.
2 Toner Level View the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s).
3
Order
Supplies
Order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.
4
Help me When error occurs, Help me button appears. You can directly open troubleshooting section in
the user’s guide.
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide
Find solutions for problems by using the Troubleshooting Guide.Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon and select Troubleshooting Guide.
Changing the Printer Status Monitor Program Settings
Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options
window.
Using the Dell Toner Management System™
The printer status monitor displays the status of the printer (printer ready, printer offline, and error-check printer) and
the toner level (100%, 50%, Toner Low) for your printer. .
Using the printer settings utility
When you install the Dell software, the Printer Settings Utility is automatically installed.
To open the Printer Settings Utility.
If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell
Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility.
The Printer Settings Utility window provides several features.
For more information, click the help icon button.
Firmware update utility
Firmware Update Utility allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware.
If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell
Printers > your printer driver name > Firmware Update Utility.
Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator
The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux
computer.
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Linux Driver Configurator icon will automatically be
created on your desktop.
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Dell Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.
2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window.
1. Printers Configuration
2. Ports ConfigurationTo use the on screen help, click Help.
3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator.
Printers configuration
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.
Printer tab
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the
Unified Driver Configurator window.1 Switches to Printers configuration.
2 Shows all of the installed machine.
3 Shows the status, model name and URI of your machine.
The printer control buttons are, as follows:
Refresh: Renews the available machines list.
Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.
Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.
Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine.
Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.
Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly.
Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties.
Classes tab
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.1 Shows all of the machine classes.
2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class.
Refresh: Renews the classes list.
Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.
Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.
Port configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port and release a port that is
stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason.1 Switches to Ports configuration.
2 Shows all of the available ports.
3 Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status.
Refresh: Renews the available ports list.
Release port: Releases the selected port.Maintenance
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.
This chapter includes:
Printing a machine report
Using toner low alert (Dell 1130n only)
Cleaning a machine
Storing the toner cartridge
Tips for moving & storing your machine
Printing a machine report
You can print a configuration page to view current printer settings, or to help troubleshoot printer problems.
In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds.
A configuration page prints out.
For Dell 1130 this information is provided on the demo page.
Using toner low alert (Dell 1130n only)
If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, the LED blinks red. You can set the option for this LED to
blink or not.
1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.)
2. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer
driver name > Printer Settings Utility.
3. Click Toner Low Alert. Select the appropriate setting and then click Apply.
Cleaning a machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine
regularly to keep the best printing condition and use your machine longer.
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or
other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.
If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use cloth or tissue
dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to
you.
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let
any water drip onto or into the machine.
Printing a cleaning sheet (Dell 1130n only)
If you are experiencing blurred or smeared printouts, you can clear the problem by printing a cleaning sheet,
provided by your machine.
To print the cleaning sheet:
In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 10 seconds.
OPC cleaning sheet: Cleans the OPC drum of the toner cartridge.
This process will produce a page with toner debris, which should be discarded.
Your machine automatically picks up a sheet of paper from the tray and prints out a cleaning sheet with dust or
toner particles on it.
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can
cause print quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and
reduces these problems.1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down.
2. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out. Set it on a clean flat surface
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover
it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green surface underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to
avoid touching this area.
3. With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridge area.
While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside
parts. Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can occur and
cause damage to the machine.
4. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the machine and gently swab the glass to see if dirt turns the white
cotton black.
5. Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the front cover.
6. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.
Storing the toner cartridge
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature, and humidity. Dell suggests users follow
the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Dell toner
cartridge.Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in; this should be in controlled office
temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until
installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark
cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the
floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:
Inside the protective bag from the original package.
Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if they were installed in the machine.
Do not store consumables in;
Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
Humidity range less than 20% nor not greater than 80%.
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
Direct sunlight or room light.
Dusty places.
A car for a long period of time.
An environment where corrosive gases are present.
An environment with salty air.
Handling instructions
Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner
spillage.
Use of non-Dell and refilled toner cartridge
Dell does not recommend or approve the use of non-Dell brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic,
store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.
Dell’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured,
or non-Dell brand toner cartridge.
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require.
The actual print-out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the
consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often.
Tips for moving & storing your machine
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be
contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality.
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter includes:
Redistributing toner
Tips for avoiding paper curls
Tips for avoiding paper jams
Clearing paper jams
Solving other problems
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
White streaks or light printing occurs.
The LED blinks red.
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In
some cases, white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull the toner cartridge out.
3. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner
into fabric.
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this
area.
4. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine.
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the
correct position until it locks into place completely.5. Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.
Tips for avoiding paper curls
1. Open the rear cover.
2. Pull down the pressure lever on each side.
1. Pressure lever
Keep the rear cover opened during printing.
Only use when the printout has more than 20 mm curl.
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a paper jam occurs, refer to the next
guidelines.
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (See Loading paper in the tray.)
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
Do not mix paper types in a tray.
Use only recommended print media.
Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in the tray, or facing up in the manual tray.
Clearing paper jams
If a paper jam occurs, the LED on the control panel lights orange. Find and remove the jammed paper.
To resume printing after clearing paper jams, you must open and close the front cover.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently. Follow the instructions in the following
sections to clear the jam.In tray
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine.
If the paper does not exit, go to the next step.
2. Pull out tray.
3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, check the fuser area
around the toner cartridge. (See Inside the machine.)
4. Insert tray back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing automatically resumes.
In the manual tray
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.
2. Open and close the front cover to resume printing.Inside the machine
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
1. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out, lightly pushing it down.
2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3. Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover. Printing automatically resumes.
In exit area
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine.
If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step.
2. Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.
If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull, stop and go to the next step.
3. Open the rear cover.
4. Pull the pressure levers down and remove the paper.
Return the pressure levers to their original position.1. Pressure lever
If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step.
5. Pull the fuser cover levers down and remove the paper.
Return the fuser cover levers to their original position.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
6. Close the rear cover.
7. Open and close front cover, printing automatically resumes.
Solving other problems
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested
solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, call for service.
Power problems
Click this link to open an animation about power problems.
Condition Suggested solutions
The machine is not receiving power,
or the connection cable between the computer and the
machine is not connected properly.
Plug in the power cord and press (power) on the
control panel.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it.
For Local PrintingFor Network Printing (Dell 1130n only)
Paper feeding problems
Condition Suggested solutions
Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam. (See Clearing paper jams.)
Paper sticks together. Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray. (See Print media specifications.)
Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper. (See Print media
specifications.)
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.
Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.
Multiple sheets of paper do
not feed.
Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size,
and weight.
Paper does not feed into
the machine.
Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it
correctly.
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the
machine. (See Print media specifications.)
The paper keeps jamming. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you
are printing on special materials, use the manual tray.
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the
specifications required by the machine. (See Print media specifications.)
There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any
debris.
Transparencies stick
together in the paper exit.
Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each
transparency as it exits from the machine.
Envelopes skew or fail to
feed correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.
Printing problems
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
The machine does not
print.
The machine is not
receiving power.
Check the power cord connections.
The machine is not
selected as the default
machine.
Select your machine as your default machine in your
Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
The front cover is not closed. Close the front cover.Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See Clearing paper jams.)
No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See Loading paper in the tray.)
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge.
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.
The connection cable
between the computer
and the machine is not
connected properly.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it.
The connection cable
between the computer
and the machine is
defective.
If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is
working properly and print a job. You can also try using a
different machine cable.
The port setting is
incorrect.
Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the
print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has
more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached
to the correct one.
The machine may be
configured incorrectly.
Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the
print settings are correct. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
The printer driver may be
incorrectly installed.
Repair the machine software. (See Installing USB connected
machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s
driver.)
The machine is
malfunctioning.
Check the LEDs on the control panel to see if the machine
is indicating a system error. Contact a service
representative.
Checking an error message is also possible from the
Printer Status Monitor on your computer.
The machine does not
print.
The document size is so
big that the hard disk
space of the computer is
insufficient to access the
print job.
Get more hard disk space and print the document again.
The output tray is full. It can hold up to 80 sheets of plain paper. Once the paper is
removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing.
The machine selects
print materials from the
wrong paper source.
The paper option that
was selected in the
Printing Preferences
may be incorrect.
For many software applications, the paper source selection is
found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences.
Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help
screen. (See Opening printing preferences.)
A print job is extremely
slow.
The job may be very
complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print
quality settings.
Half the page is blank. The page orientation
setting may be incorrect.
Change the page orientation in your application. See the
printer driver help screen.
The paper size and the
paper size settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings
matches the paper in the tray.Or, ensure that the paper size
in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in
the software application settings you use.
The machine prints, but
the text is wrong,
garbled, or incomplete.
The machine cable is
loose or defective.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job
that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach
the cable and the machine to another computer that you
know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine
cable.
The wrong printer driver
was selected.
Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that
your machine is selected.
The software application
is malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from another application.
The operating system is
malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off
and back on again.
If you are in a DOS
environment, the font
setting for your machine
may be set incorrectly.
See Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only).Pages print, but they are
blank.
The toner cartridge is
defective or out of toner.
Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the
toner cartridge.
The file may have blank
pages.
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.
Some parts, such as the
controller or the board,
may be defective.
Contact a service representative.
The machine does not
print PDF file correctly.
Some parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility between
the PDF file and the
Acrobat products.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print.
Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an
image.
The print quality of
photos is not good.
Images are not clear.
The resolution of the
photo is very low.
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the
software application, the resolution will be reduced.
Before printing, the
machine emits vapor
near the output tray.
Using damp paper can
cause vapor during
printing.
This is not a problem. Just keep printing.
The machine does not
print special- sized
paper, such as billing
paper.
Paper size and paper size
setting do not match.
Set the correct paper size in the Edit... in the Paper tab in
the Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality.
See the table below to clear the problem.
Condition Suggested Solutions
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner
supply is low. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge
life. (See Redistributing toner.) If this does not improve the print quality,
install a new toner cart
The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may
be too moist or rough. (See Print media specifications.)
If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner
save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode
off. See the help screen of the printer driver.
A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner
cartridge needs cleaning. (See Cleaning the inside.)
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. (See Cleaning
the inside.)
Toner specks The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too
moist or rough. (See Print media specifications.)
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact
a service representative.
The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative.
Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.
The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots
on its surface. Try a different brand of paper. (See Print media
specifications.)
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to
reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click
Paper tab, and set type to Thick. (See Opening printing preferences.)
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
White Spots If white spots appear on the page:
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner
devices within the machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty. Clean theinside of your machine. (See Cleaning the inside.)
The paper path may need cleaning. (See Cleaning the inside.)
Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has
probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one.
(See Replacing the toner cartridge.)
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. (See Cleaning
the inside.)
Black background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
Change to a lighter weight paper. (See Print media specifications.)
Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of
humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount of background
shading.
Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a new one. (See Replacing the
toner cartridge.)
Toner smear If toner smears on the page:
Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.)
Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.)
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one. (See Replacing the
toner cartridge.)
Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem,
remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner
cartridge.)
Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the
back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more
pages.
The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the
printed page.
The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do
not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not
absorb too much moisture.
If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to
avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side.
Printing on seams can cause problems.
If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page,
adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing
Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.)
Misformed characters If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper
stock may be too slick. Try different paper. (See Print media specifications.)
Page skew Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.)
Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper
stack.
Curl or wave Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can
cause paper curl. (See Print media specifications.)
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in
the tray.
Wrinkles or creases Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.)
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in
the tray.
Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the
inside.)
Solid Color or Black pages The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and
reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install
a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.)
The machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
Loose toner Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.)
Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.)
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one. (See Replacing the
toner cartridge.)
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid
black:
If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because
of the composition of transparencies, some character voids are normal.
You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper
and turn it around.
The paper may not meet paper specifications. (See Print media
specifications.)
Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and
reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install
a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.)
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in
the tray.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click
Paper tab, and set type to Thin. (See Opening printing preferences.)
An unknown image repetitively
appears on a few sheets or loose
toner, light print, or
contamination occurs.
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or
above.The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light
imaging. Change the correct altitude setting to your machine. (See Altitude
adjustment.)
Common Windows problemsCondition Suggested solutions
“File in Use” message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then
restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection Fault”,
“Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or
“Illegal Operation” messages
appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer
timeout error occurred”
messages appear.
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine
finishes printing. If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has
been completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows
error messages.
Common Linux problems
condition Suggested solutions
The machine
does not print.
Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and
switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available
machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, open Add new printer
wizard to set up your device.
Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the
printers list. Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains
Stopped string, press the Start button. After that normal operation of the machine should be
restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred.
Check if your application has special print option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the
command line parameter, then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” -
> “Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in the command item.
The machine
does not print
whole pages,
and output is
printed on half
the page.
It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug
688252. The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest version
of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this
problem.
I encounter
error “Cannot
open port
device file”
when printing
a document.
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress.
Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then
try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing,
the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print
jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in Port
configuration window.
Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.
Common Macintosh problems
condition Suggested solutions
The machine does not print PDF files correctly.
Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are
missing.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print.
Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an
image.
The document has printed, but the print job has
not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X
10.3.2.
Update your Mac OS to OS Mac OS X 10.3.3. or higher.
Some letters are not displayed normally during
the Cover page printing.
Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing.
The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the
Cover page.
When printing a document in Macintosh with
Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print
incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver
matches the one in Acrobat® Reader®.
Refer to Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error
messages.Supplies
This chapter provides information on purchasing supplies and maintenance parts available for your machine.
This chapter includes:
How to purchase
Available supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of
available accessories.
How to purchase
To order Dell-authorized supplies and accessories visit www.dell.com/supplies, or contact your local Dell dealer or
the retailer where you purchased your machine. You can also visit www.dell.com or support.dell.com, select your
country/region, and obtain information on calling for service.
Available supplies
When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of supplies for your machine:
Type Average yield
[a] Part name
Standard capacity toner cartridge Approx. 1,500 pages 3J11D
High capacity toner cartridge Approx. 2,500 pages 2MMJP
[a]
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
To replace a toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge.
Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.
You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same country where you purchased your machine.
Otherwise, supplies will be incompatible with your machine since the system configuration of these vary from
country to country.
Dell does not recommend using non-genuine Dell toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Dell cannot
guarantee non-genuine Dell toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine
Dell toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.
Replacing the toner cartridge
Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge.
When the toner cartridge reaches its estimated cartridge life:
The Printer Status Monitor program window appears on the computer telling you the toner cartridge needs to be
replaced.
The machine stops printing.
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine. (See
Available supplies.)
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull the toner cartridge out.3. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package.
4. Remove the paper protecting the toner cartridge by pulling the packing tape.
5. Locate the sealing tape at the end of the toner cartridge. Carefully pull the tape completely out of the cartridge and
discard it.
The sealing tape should be longer than 60 cm when correctly removed.
Holding the toner cartridge, pull the sealing tape straight to remove it from the cartridge. Be careful not
to cut the tape. If this happens, you cannot use the toner cartridge.
Refer to the helpful pictures on the cartridge wrapping paper.
6. Slowly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. It will assure
maximum copies per cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner
into fabric.
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this
area.
7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine.
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the
correct position until it locks into place completely.8. Close the front cover. Make sure that the cover is securely closed.Specifications
This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications.
This chapter includes:
Hardware specifications
Environmental specifications
Electrical specifications
Print media specifications
The specification values here are based on preliminary data. See www.dell.com or support.dell.com for current
information.
Hardware specifications
Item Description
Dimension Height 197 mm (7.76 inches)
Depth 389 mm (15.31 inches)
Width 360 mm (14.17 inches)
Weight Machine with consumables Dell 1130: 7.25 Kg (15.98 lbs)
Dell 1130n: 7.30 Kg (16.09 lbs)
Package weight Paper 1.23 Kg (2.70 lbs)
Plastic 0.19 Kg (0.42 lbs)
Environmental specifications
Item Description
Noise Level
[a] Ready mode 26 dB(A)
Printing mode Dell 1130: 49 dB(A)
Dell 1130n: 50 dB(A)
Temperature Operation 10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F)
Storage (unpacked) 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH
Storage (unpacked) 10 to 80% RH
[a]
Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
Electrical specifications
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages.
Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty.
Item Description
Power rating
[a]
110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V
Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 360 W
Ready mode Dell 1130: Less than 45 W
Dell 1130n: Less than 60 W
Power save mode Dell 1130: Less than 4.5 WDell 1130n: Less than 6.5 W
Power off mode Less than 0.8 W
[a]
See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your
machine.
Print media specifications
Type Size Dimensions
Print media weight
[a]
/Capacity
[b]
Tray1 Manual tray
Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.50 x 11.00
inches)
60 to 120 g/m2
(16 to 32 lb bond)
250 sheets of
80 g/m2
(20 lb
bond)
60 to 220 g/m2
(16
to 43 lb bond)
1 sheet stacking
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.50 x 14.00
inches)
US Folio 216 x 330 mm
(8.50 x 13.00
inches)
A4 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.69
inches)
Oficio 216 x 343 mm
(8.50 x 13.50
inches)
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.12
inches)
60 to 90 g/m2
(16
to 24 lb bond)
150 sheets of
80 g/m2
(20 lb
bond)
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84
inches)
Executive 184 x 267 mm
(7.25 x 0 inches)
A5 148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27
inches)
A6 105 x 148 mm
(4.13 x 5.83
inches)
Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm
(3.87 x 7.50
inches)
Not available in
tray1.
75 to 90 g/m2
(20
to 24 lb bond)
1 sheet stacking
Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm
(4.12 x 9.50
inches)
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66
inches)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.02
inches)
Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm
(4.49 x 6.38
inches)
Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain
paper section
90 g/m2
(24 lb
bond)
90 g/m2
(24 lb
bond)
1 sheet stacking
Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain
paper section
60 to 70 g/m2
(16 60 to 70 g/m2
(16to 19 lb bond) to 19 lb bond)
1 sheet stacking
Transparency Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain
paper section
Not available in
tray1.
138 to 146 g/m2
(36.81 to 38.91 lb
bond)
1 sheet stacking
Labels
[c] Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO
B5, Executive, A5, Statement
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Not available in
tray1.
120 to 150 g/m2
(32 to 40 lb bond)
1 sheet stacking
Card stock Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO
B5, Executive, A5, Statement, PostCard
4x6
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Not available in
tray1.
105 to 163 g/m2
(
28 to 43 lb bond)
1 sheet stacking
Minimum size (custom) 76 x 127 mm
(3.00 x 5.00
inches)
60 to 163 g/m2
(16 to 43 lb bond)
Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm
(8.50 x 14.02
inches)
[a]
If media weight is over 120 g/m2
(32 lb), load a paper into the tray one by one.
[b]
Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness and environmental conditions.
[c]
Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield).Appendix
Dell technical support policy
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting
process and provides for restoration of the Operating System, application software, and hardware drivers to the
original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer
and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is
available at Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Additional technical support options may be available for
purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for thirdparty software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed
through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
Contacting Dell
For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355).
If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice,
packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog.
Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Availability varies by country and
product, and some services may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer
service issues:
1. Visit support.dell.com, and verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down menu at the
bottom of the page.
2. Click Contact Us on the left side of the page, and select the appropriate service or support link based on your
need.
Warranty and return policy
Dell Inc. (“Dell”) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in
accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, refer to the
Product Information Guide.Glossary
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used
with printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide.
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE
LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
802.11b/g
802.11b/g can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps;
802.11g up to 54 Mbps. 802.11b/g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless
telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices
together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio
signals.
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so
that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in
the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a
bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the
number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as
monochrome or black and white.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used
commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is
usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers
assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to
obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to
hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine.
Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire
set before printing additional copies.
Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are
typically found in front of the machine.Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an
A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of
text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate
applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
DADF
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original
sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides
configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client
host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client
hosts.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the
machine like printing data, received fax data.
DNS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a
distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page
and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI
results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a
single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.
Duplex
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both
sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has
the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually
within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days,
a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It
automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephoneline noise.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves
like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to
simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and
signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link
layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN
technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
EtherTalk
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original
Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin
operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the
TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It consists of a hot roller and a back-up
roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner
stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very
popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network.
Grayscale
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to
grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray.
Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large
number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
HDD
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which
stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization
for the advancement of technology related to electricity.
IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The
term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral
(for example, a printer).
IntranetA private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication
system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with
each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of
single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media
size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also
supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing
solution than older ones.
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the
Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX
protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area
networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP
on a LAN).
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of
representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and
regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio
spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality,
which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other
images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for
photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory
services running over TCP/IP.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a
unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-
4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as anaid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
MFP
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body,
so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
MH
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted
between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
MMR
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal
to decode transmitted information.
MR
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using
MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and
transmitted.
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various
services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted
from a laser printer, and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.
An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer, and it should be replaced
appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or
translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization
(ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required
set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom,
Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private
enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol
and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in
varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two
dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and
desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a
copier.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the
number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.
PRN file
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output
system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two
computing endpoints.
PS
See PostScript.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone
networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting.
RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and
miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process
communication mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a
relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the
message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the
server.
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN
use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum
length of 32 characters.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is thenetwork address and which part is the host address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that
implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission
result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that
typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image
that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been
made by various image processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and
photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant
program, a scan can be initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Macintosh operating systems.
UNC Path
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft
products. The format of a UNC path is: \\\\
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part
of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where
the resource is located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect
computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer
USB port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light.
Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their
product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting.
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of
security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is
transmitted from one end point to another.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and
Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was
created to improve upon the security features of WEP.WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or
password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK
generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced
security.
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1150
Manual del propietario
Modelo PP08LNotas, Avisos y Precauciones
NOTA: Una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayuda a utilizar su equipo de la mejor manera posible.
AVISO: Un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o pérdida de datos, y le explica cómo evitar el
problema.
PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica un posible daño material, lesión corporal o muerte.
Abreviaturas y siglas
Para obtener una lista completa de las abreviaturas y siglas, consulte el archivo Dell™ Inspiron™ Help (Ayuda de
Dell™ Inspiron™). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
Si ha adquirido un equipo Dell™ Serie n, todas las referencias que aparecen en este documento relativas a los
sistemas operativos de Microsoft®
Windows®
no son aplicables.
____________________
La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin aviso previo.
© 2004 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados.
Queda estrictamente prohibido realizar cualquier tipo de reproducción sin el consentimiento por escrito de Dell Inc.
Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, AccessDirect, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude,
PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, Axim, TrueMobile y DellNet son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, y Celeron
son marcas comerciales registradas de Intel Corporation; Microsoft y Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation;
EMC es una marca comercial registrada de EMC Corporation; Bluetooth es una marca comercial propiedad de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. que Dell
Inc. utiliza bajo licencia.
Este documento puede incluir otras marcas y nombres comerciales para referirse a las entidades que son propietarias de los mismos o a sus
productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos.
Modelo PP08L
Noviembre de 2004 N/P F7577 Rev. A01Contenido 3
Contenido
Localización de información . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1 Descripción del equipo
Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Vista lateral izquierda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Vista lateral derecha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Vista posterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Vista inferior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2 Configuración de su equipo
Conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Configuración de la conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Problemas con el correo electrónico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Instalación de una impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Cable de la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Conexión de una impresora USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Problemas con la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Dispositivos para protección de la alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Supresores de sobrevoltaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Acondicionadores de línea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cómo apagar el equipo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3 Uso de la batería
Rendimiento de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Comprobación de la carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Contenido
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Medidor de energía . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Extracción de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Instalación de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Almacenamiento de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Problemas de alimentación eléctrica y de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Si la batería no se carga. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Si la batería dura poco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil
Botón Dell™ AccessDirect™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reprogramación del botón. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Teclado numérico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Métodos abreviados del teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Funciones del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Bandeja de CD o de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Funciones de la pantalla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Administración de energía. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft
®
Windows
®
. . . . . 35
Superficie táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Personalización de la superficie táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Problemas con el teclado externo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Caracteres inesperados . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia
Cómo utilizar los CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Problemas con los CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Si no puede reproducir un CD, CD-RW o DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Si no puede expulsar la bandeja de la unidad de CD, CD-RW o DVD . . . 39Contenido 5
Si oye un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Si la unidad de CD-RW deja de grabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Si tiene problemas con los altavoces integrados . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Si tiene problemas con los altavoces externos . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Cómo copiar CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cómo copiar un CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cómo utilizar CD-R y CD-RW vacíos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Consejos prácticos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina
Conexión de un adaptador de red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Asistente para configuración de redes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Problemas con la red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Conexión a una red de área local inalámbrica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Establecimiento del tipo de red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Conexión a una red inalámbrica en Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP . . . . . 45
7 Solución de problemas
Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Mensajes de error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Si la pantalla aparece en blanco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Problemas con el escáner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Problemas con las unidades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Si no puede guardar un archivo en una unidad de disco flexible . . . . . 55
Si tiene problemas con una unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Problemas con la tarjeta PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Problemas generales del programa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 Contenido
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Un programa se bloquea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Un programa no responde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Aparecen mensajes de error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Solución de otros problemas técnicos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Si el equipo se moja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Si el equipo se cae o se daña . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
¿Qué es un controlador?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Identificación de controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Volver a instalar los controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Reinstalación manual de controladores para Windows XP . . . . . . . 60
Cómo resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware . . . . . . . . . 61
Restauración de su sistema operativo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema de MicrosoftWindows XP . . 61
Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec . . . . . . . 62
8 Adición y sustitución de piezas
Antes de empezar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Herramientas recomendadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Apagar el equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Memoria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Módem y minitarjeta PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cómo cambiar el módem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cómo agregar una minitarjeta PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Unidad de CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
9 Apéndice
Especificaciones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Contenido 7
Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Visión general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Visualización de las pantallas de configuración del sistema . . . . . . . 87
Pantallas de configuración del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Opciones más utilizadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Optimización del rendimiento de la batería y el sistema . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Información general sobre el rendimiento del sistema . . . . . . . . . 88
Optimización del consumo de energía y del tiempo de carga
de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Velocidad variable del ventilador. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “instalados por Dell” . . 90
Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “de terceros” . . . . . 90
Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098 Contenido
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mLocalización de información 9
Localización de información
NOTA: Es posible que algunas funciones no estén disponibles para su equipo o en determinados países.
NOTA: Su equipo puede incluir información adicional.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará
• Información sobre la garantía
• Términos y condiciones (sólo en EE.UU.)
• Instrucciones de seguridad
• Información reglamentaria
• Información ergonómica
• End User License Agreement (Contrato de licencia de
usuario final)
Guía de información del producto Dell™
• Cómo instalar mi equipo Diagrama de instalación10 Localización de información
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
• Consejos sobre la utilización de Microsoft®
Windows®
• Cómo reproducir CD y DVD
• Cómo utilizar el modo de espera y el modo de
hibernación
• Cómo cambiar la resolución de la pantalla
• Cómo limpiar el equipo
Archivo de ayuda
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte
técnico.
2 Haga clic en Guías del usuario y del sistema y en Guías
del usuario.
3 Haga clic en Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell
Inspiron).
• Etiqueta de servicio y código de servicio rápido
• Etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft Windows
Etiqueta de servicio y licencia de Microsoft Windows
Estas etiquetas están situadas en el panel inferior de su
equipo.
• Utilice la etiqueta de
servicio para
identificar el equipo
cuando utilice
support.dell.com o
póngase en contacto
con el servicio de asistencia técnica.
• Escriba el código de servicio urgente para dirigir su
llamada cuando se ponga en contacto con el servicio de
asistencia técnica.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráLocalización de información 11
• Soluciones — Consejos y sugerencias para la solución de
problemas, artículos de técnicos, cursos en línea y
preguntas más frecuentes
• Comunidad — debates en línea con otros clientes de
Dell
• Actualizaciones — Información de actualización para
componentes como, por ejemplo, la memoria, la unidad
de disco duro y el sistema operativo
• Atención al cliente — Información de contacto, llamada
de servicio y estado de los pedidos, garantía e
información de reparación
• Servicio y asistencia — Historial de asistencia y estado
de las llamadas de servicio, contrato de servicio, debates
en línea con el personal de asistencia técnica
• Referencia — Documentación del equipo, detalles en la
configuración de mi equipo, especificaciones del
producto y documentación técnica
• Descargas — Controladores certificados, revisiones y
actualizaciones de software
• —Si vuelve a instalar el sistema operativo del equipo,
también debe volver a instalar la utilidad NSS.
NSS proporciona actualizaciones importantes del
sistema operativo y asistencia para las unidades de
disquete de 3,5 pulgadas de Dell™, procesadores Intel®
Pentium®
M, unidades ópticas y dispositivos USB. La
utilidad NSS es necesaria para el correcto
funcionamiento de su equipo Dell. El software detecta
automáticamente su equipo y sistema operativo e instala
las actualizaciones apropiadas a su configuración.
Sitio web Dell Support — support.dell.com
NOTA: Seleccione su región para ver el sitio web de
asistencia adecuado.
NOTA: Los clientes de empresas, instituciones
gubernamentales y educativas también pueden utilizar el
sitio web personalizado Dell Premier Support de
premier.support.dell.com. Es posible que este sitio web no
esté disponible en todas las regiones.
• Cómo utilizar Windows XP
• Documentación de mi equipo
• Documentación para los dispositivos (como, por
ejemplo, un módem)
Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte
técnico.
2 Escriba una palabra o frase que describa el problema y, a
continuación, haga clic en el icono de flecha.
3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el problema.
4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará12 Localización de información
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mDescripción del equipo 13
Descripción del equipo
Vista anterior
SE G U R O D E L A P A N T A L L A — Mantiene la pantalla cerrada.
PA N T A L L A — Para obtener más información sobre la pantalla, consulte la sección relativa al uso de la
pantalla en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
Seguro de la pantalla
Pantalla
Altavoces (2)
Indicadores de
estado del teclado
Teclado
Indicadores de
estado del
dispositivo
Superficie táctil
Botones de la
superficie táctil
Botón de
alimentación
Botón Dell
AccessDirect14 Descripción del equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
INDICADORES DE ESTADO DEL TECLADO
Los indicadores luminosos verdes situados sobre el teclado indican lo siguiente:
TE C L A D O — El teclado incluye tanto un teclado numérico como la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft®
Windows®
. Para obtener información sobre los métodos abreviados de teclado, consulte la página 34.
AL T A V O C E S — Para ajustar el volumen de los altavoces integrados, pulse los métodos abreviados de
teclado de control del volumen. Para obtener más información, consulte la página 34.
Se ilumina cuando el teclado numérico está activado.
Se enciende cuando Bloq Mayús está activado.
Se ilumina cuando el bloqueo de desplazamiento está
activado.
9
ADescripción del equipo 15
INDICADORES DE ESTADO DEL DISPOSITIVO
Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica, el indicador funciona de la
siguiente manera:
– Luz verde continua: la batería se está cargando.
Si el equipo utiliza alimentación de la batería, el indicador funciona de la siguiente manera:
– Apagado: la batería está cargada de forma correcta (o el equipo está apagado).
– Luz naranja parpadeante: la carga de la batería está baja.
– Luz naranja continua: la carga de la batería está demasiado baja.
BO T O N E S D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — Los botones de la superficie táctil ofrecen las mismas funciones
que un mouse. Consulte la página 36 para obtener más información.
SU P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — La superficie táctil y sus botones ofrecen las mismas funciones que un ratón.
Consulte la página 36 para obtener más información.
Se enciende al encender el equipo. Parpadea o se apaga en modo de
administración de energía.
Se ilumina cuando el equipo lee o escribe datos.
AVISO: Para evitar que se produzcan pérdidas de datos, no apague
nunca el equipo si el indicador parpadea.
Parpadea para indicar el estado de carga de la batería.16 Descripción del equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
BO T Ó N D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para activar o
desactivar un modo de administración de energía. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección
relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de
ayuda, consulte la página 9.
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los
programas abiertos antes de cerrar el equipo (consulte la página 28).
Si el equipo deja de responder, mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación hasta que el equipo se apague
totalmente (esto puede tardar unos segundos).
BO T Ó N DE L L™ AC C E S SDI R E C T™ — Pulse este botón para iniciar un programa que se utiliza con
frecuencia, como herramientas educativas y de soporte. Si lo desea, puede reprogramar el botón para que
inicie el programa que prefiera. Para obtener más información, consulte la página 33).
Vista lateral izquierda
RA N U R A P A R A T A R J E T A PC — Admite una PC Card, como un módem o un adaptador de red. Para
obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa al uso de tarjetas PC en el archivo de ayuda de Dell
Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
Ranura
para la PC Card
Conectores de audio (2)
Unidad CD o DVDDescripción del equipo 17
CONECTORES DE AUDIO
UN I D A D D E CD O DVD — Admite una unidad de CD, una unidad de DVD, una unidad de CD-RW o
una unidad combinada CD-RW/DVD.
Vista lateral derecha
BA T E R Í A/C O M P A R T I M E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin
conectarlo a una toma de corriente. Consulte la página 29.
Conecte los auriculares o los altavoces al conector
Conecte un micrófono al conector
Batería/
compartimento
de la batería Conector para módem
Rejillas de ventilación
Ranura para cable
de seguridad18 Descripción del equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
CONECTOR DEL MÓDEM
RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir
que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento.
NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar
según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún
problema del equipo o de los ventiladores.
PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las
rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con
poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La
circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio.
RA N U R A P A R A C A B L E D E S E G U R I D A D — Sirve para conectar al equipo un
dispositivo antirrobo disponible en el mercado. Para obtener más información,
consulte las instrucciones incluidas con el dispositivo.
AVISO: Antes de comprar un dispositivo antirrobo, asegúrese de que encajará
en la ranura del cable de seguridad del equipo.
Conecte la línea telefónica al conector de módem.
Para obtener más información sobre el uso del módem,
consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con
el equipo.Descripción del equipo 19
Vista posterior
RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a
través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento.
NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El
ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores.
PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación
ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado,
mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar
un incendio.
CO N E C T O R P A R A E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Conecte un adaptador de CA al equipo.
NOTA: Utilice sólo el adaptador de CA proporcionado con el equipo.
El adaptador de CA convierte la corriente alterna en la corriente continua que necesita el equipo. Puede
conectar el adaptador de CA al equipo independientemente de que esté encendido o apagado.
Conectores USB (2) Conector de red
Conector de vídeo
Conector del
adaptador de CA
Rejillas de
ventilación
Conector del adaptador de CA
Adaptador de CA20 Descripción del equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
PRECAUCIÓN: El adaptador de CA funciona con tomas de alimentación eléctrica de todo el mundo.
No obstante, los conectores de alimentación y los enchufes múltiples varían de un país a otro. El uso de
un cable incompatible o la conexión incorrecta del cable al enchufe múltiple o a la toma eléctrica
puede dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio.
PRECAUCIÓN: Cuando utilice el adaptador de CA para suministrar alimentación al equipo o para
cargar la batería, sitúelo en un área ventilada, como un escritorio o en el suelo. No cubra el adaptador
de CA con papeles u otros objetos que reduzcan la ventilación; no utilice el adaptador de CA dentro de
un maletín.
AVISO: Cuando desconecte el cable del adaptador de CA del equipo, sujete el conector (no el cable) y
tire de él firmemente pero con cuidado, procurando no dañar el cable.
CONECTORES USB
CONECTOR DE VÍDEO
CONECTOR DE RED
AVISO: El conector de red es ligeramente más grande que el conector de módem. Para evitar dañar el
equipo, no conecte una línea telefónica al conector de red.
Conecta dispositivos USB, como un ratón, un teclado o una
impresora.
Conecta un monitor externo. Para obtener más información,
consulte la sección relativa al uso de la pantalla en el archivo
de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda,
consulte la página 9.
Conecta el equipo a una red. Los indicadores luminosos del
conector indican la actividad de las comunicaciones de red
con cable e inalámbricas.
Para obtener información sobre el uso del adaptador de red,
consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con
el equipo.Descripción del equipo 21
Vista inferior
CU B I E R T A D E L A M I N I T A R J E T A PCI/M Ó D E M — Cubre el compartimento que contiene el módem y la
minitarjeta PCI. Consulte la página 71.
BA T E R Í A/C O M P A R T I M E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin
conectarlo a una toma de corriente. Consulte la página 29.
RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a
través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento.
NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El
ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores.
PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación
ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado,
mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar
un incendio.
SE G U R O D E L I B E R A C I Ó N D E L A B A T E R Í A — Libera la batería. Consulte la página 31 para obtener
instrucciones.
CU B I E R T A D E L M Ó D U L O D E M E M O R I A — Cubre el compartimiento que contiene los módulos de
memoria y el pasador de liberación de la unidad de CD o DVD. Consulte la página 68.
UN I D A D D E D I S C O D U R O — Almacena software y datos.
Cubierta del
módulo de memoria
Seguro de liberación
de la batería
Cubierta del
módem/minitarjeta
PCI
Batería/
compartimento
de la batería
Unidad de
disco duro
Rejilla de
ventilación22 Descripción del equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mConfiguración de su equipo 23
Configuración de su equipo
Conexión a Internet
NOTA: Los ISP y sus ofertas varían según el país.
Para conectarse a Internet, se necesita un módem o una conexión de red y un proveedor de servicios
de Internet (ISP), como por ejemplo, AOL o MSN. El ISP ofrecerá una o varias de las siguientes
opciones de conexión a Internet:
• Conexiones telefónicas que proporcionan acceso a Internet a través de una línea telefónica.
Las conexiones telefónicas son considerablemente más lentas que las conexiones ADSL y de
módem por cable.
• Conexiones ADSL que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea
telefónica existente. Con una conexión ADSL, se puede acceder a Internet y utilizar el
teléfono en una sola línea simultáneamente.
• Conexiones de módem por cable que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a
través de la línea de TV por cable local.
Si utiliza una conexión telefónica, enchufe una línea telefónica al conector de módem del equipo y
a la toma de teléfono de la pared antes de configurar la conexión a Internet. Si utiliza una conexión
ADSL o de módem por cable, póngase en contacto con su ISP para obtener instrucciones de
configuración.
Configuración de la conexión a Internet
Para configurar una conexión para AOL o MSN:
1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas.
2 Haga doble clic en el icono MSN Explorer o AOL del escritorio de Microsoft®
Windows®
.
3 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración.
Si el escritorio no contiene ningún icono MSN Explorer o AOL, o si desea configurar una conexión
a Internet con un ISP diferente:
1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas.
2 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Internet Explorer.
Aparece la ventana Asistente para conexión nueva
3 Haga clic en Conectarse a Internet.24 Configuración de su equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
4 En la siguiente ventana, haga clic en la opción correspondiente:
• Si no dispone de un ISP y desea seleccionar uno, haga clic en Elegir de una lista de
proveedores de servicios Internet [ISP].
• Si el ISP ya le ha proporcionado la información de configuración, pero no ha recibido el
CD de instalación, haga clic en Establecer mi conexión manualmente.
• Si dispone de un CD, haga clic en Usar el CD que tengo de un proveedor de servicios
Internet [ISP].
5 Haga clic en Siguiente.
Si ha seleccionado Establecer mi conexión manualmente, siga con el step 6. De lo contrario,
siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración.
NOTA: Si no sabe qué tipo de conexión seleccionar, póngase en contacto con su ISP.
6 Haga clic en la opción adecuada dentro de ¿Cómo desea conectar a Internet? y, a
continuación, haga clic en Siguiente.
7 Utilice la información de configuración proporcionada por el ISP para realizar la
configuración.
Si conectarse a la internet le está dando problemas, consulte el apartado “Problemas con el módem
y con la conexión a Internet”. Si no puede conectarse a internet pero lo ha podido hacer
anteriormente, puede ser que el ISP esté sufriendo una interrupción de servicio. Póngase en
contacto con su ISP para comprobar el estado de servicio o intente conectarse más tarde.
Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet
AVISO: Conecte el módem únicamente a una toma de teléfono de pared analógica. Si conecta el módem
a una red de telefonía digital, se dañará.
AVISO: Los conectores de módem y de red tienen un aspecto similar. No conecte una línea telefónica al
conector de red.
NOTA: Si se puede conectar con el proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP), esto quiere decir que el
módem funciona correctamente. Si está seguro de que el módem funciona correctamente y, aun así,
tiene problemas, póngase en contacto con su ISP.
CO M P R U E B E L A T O M A D E T E L É F O N O D E L A P A R E D — Desconecte la línea telefónica del módem y
conéctela a un teléfono. Espere el tono de marcado. Asegúrese de que tiene un servicio telefónico por
tonos. Intente conectar el módem a otra clavija de teléfono.
Las velocidades de conexión lentas pueden deberse a ruido telefónico, así como a las condiciones de la línea
telefónica o de la red. Póngase en contacto con su compañía telefónica o su administrador de red para
obtener más información.Configuración de su equipo 25
CO N E C T E E L M Ó D E M D I R E C T A M E N T E A L A T O M A D E T E L É F O N O D E L A P A R E D — Si dispone de otros
dispositivos telefónicos que comparten la línea, por ejemplo, un contestador automático, una máquina de
fax, un supresor de sobrevoltaje o un divisor de línea, omítalos y utilice la línea telefónica para conectar el
módem directamente a la toma de teléfono de la pared.
CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N — Verifique que la línea telefónica está conectada al módem.
CO M P R U E B E L A L Í N E A T E L E F Ó N I C A — Pruebe a utilizar otra línea telefónica. Si utiliza una línea con una
longitud de 3 metros (10 pies) o más, pruebe con una más corta.
TO N O D E M A R C A D O I R R E G U L A R — Si tiene servicio de buzón de voz, es posible que oiga un tono de
marcado irregular cuando tenga mensajes. Póngase en contacto con la compañía telefónica para obtener
instrucciones sobre la restauración del tono de marcado.
DE S A C T I V E L A L L A M A D A E N E S P E R A (T E L É F O N O D E R E T E N C I Ó N D E L L A M A D A) — Consulte en la
documentación de la compañía telefónica las instrucciones sobre cómo desactivar esta función. A
continuación, ajuste las propiedades de la conexión de acceso telefónico a redes.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control.
2 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware, en Opciones de teléfono y módem, seleccione la ficha Reglas de
marcado y, a continuación, haga clic en Editar....
3 En la ventana Editar ubicación, asegúrese de que la opción Deshabilitar llamada en espera al marcar: está
activada y, a continuación, seleccione el código adecuado según aparece en la guía telefónica.
4 Haga clic en Aplicar y en Aceptar.
5 Cierre la ventana Opciones de teléfono y módem.
6 Cierre la ventana Panel de control.
CO M P R U E B E Q U E E L M Ó D E M S E C O M U N I C A C O N WI N D O W S —
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control.
2 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware y, a continuación, en Opciones de teléfono y módem.
3 Haga clic en la pestaña Módems.
4 Haga clic en el puerto COM para el módem.
5 Haga clic en Propiedades, en la pestaña Diagnósticos y en Consultar módem para comprobar que el
módem se comunica con Windows.
Si todos los comandos reciben respuestas, significa que el módem funciona correctamente.
Problemas con el correo electrónico
CO M P R U E B E Q U E E S T Á C O N E C T A D O A IN T E R N E T — Con el programa de correo electrónico Outlook
Express abierto, haga clic en Archivo. Si la opción Trabajar sin conexión está activada, desactívela y
conéctese a Internet.
Instalación de una impresora
AVISO: Complete la configuración del sistema operativo antes de conectar una impresora al equipo.
Consulte la información de configuración en la documentación proporcionada con la impresora, en
la que se describe cómo realizar las siguientes operaciones:
• Obtener e instalar controladores actualizados
• Conectar la impresora al equipo26 Configuración de su equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
• Cargar el papel e instalar el cartucho de tóner o de tinta
• Ponerse en contacto con el fabricante para obtener asistencia técnica
Cable de la impresora
Es posible que la impresora se entregue sin ningún cable, por lo que si adquiere uno por separado,
asegúrese de que sea compatible con la impresora. Si ha adquirido un cable de la impresora al
mismo tiempo que el equipo, es posible que el cable se incluya en la caja del equipo.
Conexión de una impresora USB
NOTA: Puede conectar dispositivos USB con el equipo encendido.
1 Finalice la configuración del sistema operativo, en el caso de que todavía no lo haya hecho.
2 Instale el controlador de la impresora, si es necesario. Consulte la documentación incluida
con la impresora.
3 Conecte el cable de la impresora USB a los conectores USB del equipo y de la impresora. Los
conectores USB admiten sólo una posición de encaje.
Problemas con la impresora
CO M P R U E B E L A S C O N E X I O N E S D E L O S C A B L E S D E L A I M P R E S O R A — Asegúrese de que el cable de la
impresora está conectado correctamente al equipo (consulte la página 26).
PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona;
para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara.
Cable de la
impresora
USB
Conector USB del
equipo
Conector USB
de la impresoraConfiguración de su equipo 27
CO M P R U E B E Q U E L A I M P R E S O R A E S T Á E N C E N D I D A — Consulte la documentación que se proporciona
con la impresora.
CO M P R U E B E Q U E WI N D O W S
®
R E C O N O C E L A I M P R E S O R A —
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio.
2 Haga clic en Panel de control.
3 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware.
4 Haga clic en Ver impresoras o impresoras de fax instaladas. Si aparece el modelo de la impresora, haga clic
con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono de la impresora.
5 Pulse Propiedades y, a continuación, pulse la ficha Puertos. Asegúrese de que la opción Imprimir en los
siguientes puertos es USB 001 (Puerto de la impresora).
VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L A I M P R E S O R A — Consulte la página 59.
Dispositivos para protección de la alimentación
Existen varios dispositivos que protegen contra las interrupciones y las fluctuaciones de la
alimentación eléctrica:
• Supresores de sobrevoltaje
• Acondicionadores de línea
• Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI)
Supresores de sobrevoltaje
Los supresores de sobrevoltaje y los enchufes múltiples equipados con protección contra
sobrevoltajes ayudan a evitar los daños derivados de los picos de voltaje, que pueden producirse
durante las tormentas con aparato eléctrico o inmediatamente después de las interrupciones en la
alimentación eléctrica. El nivel de protección suele ser proporcional al precio del supresor de
sobrevoltaje. Algunos fabricantes de supresores de sobrevoltaje proporcionan cobertura de garantía
para cierto tipo de daños. Lea con atención la garantía del dispositivo al elegir un supresor de
sobrevoltaje. Un dispositivo con una clasificación en julios más alta ofrece más protección.
Compare las clasificaciones en julios para determinar la efectividad relativa de los diferentes
dispositivos.
AVISO: La mayoría de los supresores de sobrevoltaje no protegen contra las fluctuaciones e
interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica causadas por rayos. Cuando se produzca una tormenta con
aparato eléctrico, desconecte la línea telefónica de la toma de teléfono de pared y desenchufe el equipo
de la toma de corriente.
Muchos supresores de sobrevoltaje disponen de una toma de teléfono para proteger el módem.
Consulte la documentación del supresor de sobrevoltaje para obtener instrucciones sobre la
conexión del módem.
AVISO: No todos los supresores de sobrevoltaje ofrecen protección para el adaptador de red.
Desconecte el cable de red de la toma de red de pared durante una tormenta con aparato eléctrico.28 Configuración de su equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Acondicionadores de línea
AVISO: Los acondicionadores de línea no protegen contra las interrupciones de la alimentación
eléctrica.
Los acondicionadores de línea están diseñados para mantener el voltaje de CA a un nivel bastante
constante.
Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida
AVISO: La interrupción de la alimentación eléctrica mientras se están guardando datos en la unidad de
disco duro puede provocar que se pierdan datos o que el archivo resulte dañado.
NOTA: Para prolongar al máximo el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería, conecte únicamente el
equipo al SAI. Los demás dispositivos, como la impresora, puede conectarlos a un enchufe múltiple
independiente que proporcione protección contra sobrevoltajes.
Un SAI protege contra las fluctuaciones y las interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica. Los
dispositivos SAI contienen una batería que proporciona alimentación eléctrica temporal a los
dispositivos conectados cuando se interrumpe la alimentación eléctrica. La batería se carga siempre
que haya alimentación de CA disponible. Consulte la documentación del fabricante del SAI para
obtener información sobre el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería y asegurarse de que el
dispositivo está aprobado por Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Cómo apagar el equipo
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los
programas abiertos antes de cerrar el equipo.
NOTA: Si lo prefiere, en vez de apagar el equipo, puede configurarlo para que entre en el modo de
suspensión o de hibernación. Para obtener más información, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help
(Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
1 Guarde y cierre los archivos abiertos, salga de todos los programas, haga clic en el botón Inicio
y luego en Apagar equipo.
2 En la ventana Apagar equipo, haga clic en Apagar.
El equipo se apaga cuando concluye el proceso de cierre del sistema.Uso de la batería 29
Uso de la batería
Rendimiento de la batería
NOTA: Las baterías de los equipos portátiles sólo están cubiertas durante el primer año de validez de la
garantía limitada del equipo. Para obtener más información sobre la garantía de Dell de su equipo,
consulte la Guía de información del producto.
Utilice una batería para suministrar energía al equipo cuando no esté conectado a una toma de
alimentación eléctrica. Se proporciona una batería en su compartimento correspondiente como
equipamiento estándar.
NOTA: El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería (el tiempo que la batería puede mantener una carga)
disminuye con el tiempo. En función de la frecuencia y las condiciones de uso de la batería, es posible
que deba comprar una nueva batería durante la vida útil del equipo.
El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería varía en función de las condiciones de funcionamiento.
La autonomía de la batería puede reducirse significativamente cuando se realizan, entre otras, las
siguientes operaciones:
NOTA: Se recomienda conectar el equipo a una toma de corriente eléctrica mientras se graba en un CD.
• Uso de unidades ópticas, especialmente unidades de DVD y CD-RW.
• Uso de dispositivos de comunicaciones inalámbricas, tarjeta PC o dispositivos USB.
• Uso de configuraciones de pantalla de mucho brillo.
• Uso de protectores de pantalla 3D u otros programas que utilizan mucha energía, como
juegos 3D y programas de ingeniería.
• Ejecución del equipo en modo de rendimiento máximo. Para obtener más información,
consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell
Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10.
Puede establecer las opciones de administración de energía para que se le avise cuando la carga de
la batería esté baja.
PRECAUCIÓN: El uso de baterías incompatibles puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o explosión.
Sustituya la batería únicamente por baterías de Dell. La batería de iones de litio está diseñada para
funcionar con equipos Dell™. No utilice la batería de otros equipos en su equipo.
PRECAUCIÓN: No deseche las baterías en la basura doméstica. Cuando la batería ya no pueda
cargarse, solicite información a una empresa local de gestión de residuos o al departamento
responsable en materia de medio ambiente sobre el modo de desechar las baterías de iones de litio.
Consulte las instrucciones para desechar las baterías en la Guía de información del producto.
PRECAUCIÓN: El uso incorrecto de la batería puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o quemadura
química. No perfore, incinere, desmonte o exponga la batería a temperaturas superiores a 65°C (149 °F).
Mantenga la batería fuera del alcance de los niños. Tenga mucho cuidado con las baterías dañadas o
que goteen. Las baterías dañadas pueden gotear y causar lesiones personales o daños en el equipo. 30 Uso de la batería
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Comprobación de la carga de la batería
La ventana y el icono del medidor de energía de Microsoft® Windows®
, y la advertencia de
batería baja proporcionan información sobre la carga de la batería.
Medidor de energía
El medidor de energía de Windows indica la carga que le queda a la batería. Para consultar el
medidor de energía, pulse dos veces en el icono de la barra de tareas. Para obtener más
información sobre la ficha Medidor de energía, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de
energía en el archivo de Ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la
página 10.
Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, aparece un icono .
Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos o que éstos resulten dañados, tras una advertencia de batería
baja guarde inmediatamente el trabajo. A continuación, conecte el equipo a una toma de corriente
eléctrica. Si la carga de la batería se agota por completo, el modo de hibernación se activa
automáticamente.
Cuando se ha agotado aproximadamente un 90 % de la carga, una ventana emergente se lo
advierte. Para obtener más información sobre alarmas de bajo nivel de carga de batería, consulte la
sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder
al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10.
Carga de la batería
NOTA: el adaptador de CA tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargar una batería totalmente
descargada con el equipo apagado. El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está
encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si
se utiliza el equipo con niveles elevados de actividad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, puede
ser que la batería no se cargue.
Cuando se conecta el equipo a un enchufe de alimentación eléctrica o se instala una batería
mientras el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, éste comprueba la carga y la
temperatura de la batería. Si es necesario, el adaptador de CA cargará la batería y mantendrá la
carga.
Si la batería está caliente porque se ha estado usando en el equipo o porque ha permanecido en un
ambiente donde la temperatura es elevada, puede ser que no se cargue cuando se conecte el equipo
a una toma de alimentación eléctrica.
Si el indicador parpadea alternando entre el verde y el naranja, la batería está demasiado
caliente para iniciar la carga. Desconecte el equipo de la toma de corriente y espere a que tanto éste
como la batería se enfríen hasta alcanzar la temperatura ambiente. A continuación, conecte el
equipo a una toma de corriente y continúe cargando la batería.
NOTA: Puede dejar la batería en el equipo todo el tiempo que desee. Los circuitos internos de la batería
impiden que se sobrecargue.Uso de la batería 31
Para obtener más información sobre la resolución de problemas de la batería, consulte la sección
relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al
archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10.
Extracción de una batería
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de realizar estos procedimientos, desconecte el módem del enchufe telefónico
de pared.
1 Compruebe que el equipo está apagado o conectado a una toma de corriente eléctrica.
2 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de la batería.
3 Extraiga la batería.
Instalación de una batería
Inserte la batería en el compartimento de la batería hasta que el pasador haga un “clic”.
Almacenamiento de una batería
Extraiga la batería cuando vaya a guardar el equipo durante un período largo. Las baterías se
descargan durante los almacenamientos prolongados. Tras un periodo prolongado de
almacenamiento, deberá cargar la batería completamente antes de utilizarla.
Problemas de alimentación eléctrica y de la batería
NOTA: Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener información sobre el
modo de espera. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10.
Seguro de la
batería
Batería32 Uso de la batería
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Si el indicador de alimentación está encendido o
parpadea, significa que el equipo recibe alimentación. Si el indicador de alimentación parpadea, el equipo
está en modo de espera; pulse el botón de alimentación para salir del modo de espera. Si el indicador está
apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para activar o desactivar un modo de
administración de energía. Si el equipo no se enciende, pulse y mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación
durante unos segundos.
CA R G U E L A B A T E R Í A — Puede que la carga de batería se haya agotado.
1 Vuelva a instalar la batería.
2 Utilice el adaptador de CA para conectar el equipo a una toma de corriente.
3 Encienda el equipo.
CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R D E E S T A D O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si el indicador parpadea en color naranja o
muestra un color naranja continuo, significa que la carga de la batería está baja o agotada. Conecte el
equipo a un enchufe eléctrico.
Si el indicador parpadea en colores verde y naranja, significa que la batería está demasiado caliente para
cargarla. Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), desconéctelo de la toma de corriente y, a continuación,
espere a que tanto éste como la batería se enfríen hasta alcanzar la temperatura ambiente.
Si el indicador de estado de la batería parpadea rápidamente en color naranja, puede que la batería esté
defectuosa. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90).
PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona;
para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara.
CO M P R U E B E E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el
adaptador de CA tiene una luz, asegúrese de que esté encendida.
CO N E C T E E L E Q U I P O D I R E C T A M E N T E A U N A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Omita los dispositivos
protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y alargadores para comprobar que el equipo se
enciende.
EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas
halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos.
AJ U S T E L A S P R O P I E D A D E S D E L A A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de
Dell Inspiron) o busque la palabra clave en espera en el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico. Para acceder a la
ayuda, consulte la página 10.
VU E L V A A C O L O C A R L O S M Ó D U L O S D E M E M O R I A — Si el indicador de alimentación del equipo se
enciende pero en la pantalla no se ve nada, vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria (consulte la
página 68).
Si la batería no se carga
AP A G U E E L E Q U I P O — El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y
funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si se utiliza el
equipo con niveles elevados de actividad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, puede ser que la
batería no se cargue.
Si la batería dura poco
CO N S U L T E E L A P A R T A D O “RE N D I M I E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A” E N L A P Á G I N A 29 — El tiempo de
funcionamiento puede reducirse significativamente bajo determinadas condiciones.
OP T I M I Z A C I Ó N D E L R E N D I M I E N T O D E L P R O C E S A D O R Y C O N S U M O D E E N E R G Í A — Consulte la
página 88.Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 33
Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil
Botón Dell™ AccessDirect™
Presione este botón para iniciar un programa que se utiliza con frecuencia, como las herramientas
de soporte técnico y de formación o el explorador de Internet predeterminado.
Reprogramación del botón
Para cambiar la configuración del botón reprogramable o buscar información sobre el uso del
botón:
1 Pulse el botón Inicio → Panel de control → Impresoras y otro hardware → Teclado.
2 Pulse la ficha AccessDirect.
3 Pulse el botón Ayuda y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla.
Teclado numérico
El teclado numérico funciona como el teclado numérico de un teclado externo. Cada tecla del
teclado numérico tiene varias funciones. Los números y símbolos del teclado numérico están
marcados en azul en la parte derecha de las teclas.
Teclado numérico34 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Para activar el teclado, pulse . El indicador indica que el teclado numérico está
activo.
Para utilizar la función numérica cuando el teclado numérico esté activado, pulse y la tecla
que desee.
Para desactivar el teclado numérico, pulse de nuevo.
Métodos abreviados del teclado
Funciones del sistema
Bandeja de CD o de DVD
Funciones de la pantalla
Administración de energía
Abre la ventana Administrador de tareas de
Windows
Activa y desactiva el teclado numérico
Activa y desactiva el bloqueo de desplazamiento
Expulsa la bandeja fuera de la unidad.
Cambia la imagen de vídeo a la siguiente opción de
pantalla. Entre las opciones están la pantalla integrada,
un monitor externo y las dos pantallas a la vez.
Si está reproduciendo un DVD o viendo un vídeo,
está desactivado.
y tecla de flecha
hacia arriba
Aumenta el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada
(no en un monitor externo)
y tecla de fecha
hacia abajo
Reduce el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no
en un monitor externo)
Activa un modo de administración de energía. Puede
reprogramar este método abreviado de teclado para
activar otro modo de administración de energía
utilizando la ficha Opciones avanzadas de la ventana
Propiedades de Opciones de energía. Para obtener más
información, consulte la sección relativa a la
administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell
Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la
página 9.
9Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 35
Funciones de los altavoces
Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft®
Windows®
Para ajustar el funcionamiento del teclado, como la velocidad de repetición de los caracteres, pulse
el botón Inicio → Panel de control → Impresoras y otro hardware → Teclado. Siga las
instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla.
Aumenta el volumen de los altavoces integrados y de los
altavoces externos (si los hay)
Disminuye el volumen de los altavoces integrados y de
los altavoces externos (si los hay)
Activa y desactiva los altavoces integrados y los altavoces
externos (si los hay)
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Minimiza todas las ventanas abiertas
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Maximiza todas las ventanas
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Ejecuta el Explorador de Windows
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Abre el cuadro de diálogo Ejecutar
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de la búsqueda
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de búsquedaPC si el equipo está conectado a una red
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Abre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema36 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Superficie táctil
La superficie táctil detecta la presión y el movimiento del dedo para permitir desplazar el cursor por
la pantalla. Utilice la superficie táctil y sus botones del mismo modo que un mouse.
• Para mover el cursor, deslice ligeramente el dedo por la superficie táctil.
• Para seleccionar un objeto, toque suavemente la superficie táctil o utilice el pulgar para
presionar el botón izquierdo de la misma.
• Para seleccionar y mover (o arrastrar) un objeto, sitúe el cursor sobre él y toque abajo-arribaabajo en la superficie táctil. En el segundo toque abajo, deje el dedo sobre la superficie táctil y
deslícelo por la superficie para mover el objeto seleccionado.
• Para hacer doble clic en un objeto, sitúe el cursor en él y, a continuación, toque dos veces la
superficie táctil o pulse el botón izquierdo de la misma dos veces.
Personalización de la superficie táctil
Puede desactivar la superficie táctil o ajustar su configuración utilizando la ventana Propiedades
del ratón.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Panel de control y en Impresoras y otro hardware.
2 Haga clic en Ratón
3 En la ventana Propiedades del ratón, pulse la ficha Configuración de dispositivo.
Para desactivar la superficie táctil o el mouse, resalte el dispositivo y pulse Deshabilitar.
Superficie
táctil
Botones de la
superficie táctilUso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 37
Para cambiar la configuración de la superficie táctil o el mouse, resalte el dispositivo, pulse
Configuración, seleccione la configuración que desee y, a continuación, pulse Aplicar.
4 Pulse Aceptar para guardar la configuración y cerrar la ventana y, a continuación, pulse de
nuevo Aceptar para salir de la ventana Propiedades del ratón.
Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón
CO M P R U E B E L A C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L —
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Panel de control y en Impresoras y otro hardware.
2 Haga clic en Ratón
3 Ajuste la configuración.
CO M P R U E B E E L C A B L E D E L M O U S E — Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). Desconecte el cable del
ratón y examínelo para ver si está dañado. Vuelva a conectar el cable firmemente.
Si utiliza un cable alargador para el mouse, desconéctelo y conéctelo directamente al equipo.
PA R A C O M P R O B A R Q U E S E T R A T A D E U N P R O B L E M A C O N E L M O U S E , E X A M I N E L A S U P E R F I C I E
T Á C T I L —
1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28).
2 Desconecte el mouse.
3 Encienda el equipo.
4 En el escritorio de Windows, use la superficie táctil para mover el cursor, seleccione un icono y ábralo.
Si la superficie táctil funciona correctamente, esto quiere decir que el mouse debe estar defectuoso.
RE I N S T A L E E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — Consulte la página 59.
Problemas con el teclado externo
NOTA: Cuando conecta un teclado externo, el teclado integrado sigue conservando toda su
funcionalidad.
CO M P R U E B E E L C A B L E D E L T E C L A D O — Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). Desconecte el cable
del teclado y examínelo para ver si está dañado. Vuelva a conectar correctamente el cable.
Si utiliza un cable alargador para el teclado, desconéctelo y conecte el teclado directamente al equipo.
CO M P R U E B E E L T E C L A D O E X T E R N O —
1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), espere 1 minuto y vuelva a encenderlo.
2 Compruebe que los indicadores de números, mayúsculas y bloqueo de desplazamiento del teclado
parpadean durante la rutina de arranque.
3 En el escritorio de Windows®
, pulse el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas, seleccione Accesorios
y pulse Bloc de notas.
4 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla.
Si no puede seguir estos pasos, puede que tenga un teclado externo defectuoso. 38 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
PA R A C O M P R O B A R Q U E S E T R A T A D E U N P R O B L E M A C O N E L T E C L A D O E X T E R N O, E X A M I N E E L T E C L A D O
I N T E G R A D O —
1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28).
2 Desconecte el teclado externo.
3 Encienda el equipo.
4 En el escritorio de Windows, pulse el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas , Accesorios y Bloc de
notas.
5 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla.
Si los caracteres aparecen ahora, pero no con el teclado externo, puede que tenga un teclado externo
defectuoso. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90).
Caracteres inesperados
DE S A C T I V E E L T E C L A D O N U M É R I C O — Pulse para desactivar el teclado numérico si se
muestran números en lugar de letras. Compruebe que el indicador luminoso del bloqueo numérico no esté
encendido.Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia 39
Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos
multimedia
Cómo utilizar los CD y DVD
Para obtener información sobre cómo utilizar CD y DVD en el equipo, consulte el archivo Dell
Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
Problemas con los CD o DVD
Si no puede reproducir un CD, CD-RW o DVD
NOTA: Debido a los diferentes tipos de archivo que se utilizan en todo el mundo, no todos los DVD
funcionan en todas las unidades de DVD.
La vibración de las unidades de CD de alta velocidad es normal y puede ocasionar ruido. Dicho
ruido no indica ningún defecto en la unidad o el CD.
AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S
®
R E C O N O Z C A L A U N I D A D — Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a
continuación, en Mi PC. Si no aparece la unidad, haga una búsqueda completa con el software antivirus
para comprobar si hay virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la
unidad. Inserte un disco de inicio y reinicie el equipo. Compruebe si el indicador de la unidad
parpadea, lo cual indica que el funcionamiento es correcto.
UT I L I C E O T R O D I S C O — Inserte otro disco para descartar la posibilidad de que el disco original sea
defectuoso.
ASEGÚRESE DE QUE EL CD ESTÉ BIEN ENCAJADO EN EL EJE DE LA BANDEJA DE LA UNIDAD DE CD
AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se
encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha
silenciado el sonido.
LI M P I E L A U N I D A D O E L D I S C O — Consulte la sección relativa a la limpieza del equipo en el archivo Dell
Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda,
consulte la página 9.
Si no puede expulsar la bandeja de la unidad de CD, CD-RW o DVD
1 Compruebe que el equipo está apagado (consulte la página 28).
2 Enderece un clip sujetapapeles e introduzca un extremo en el orificio de expulsión situado en la parte
frontal de la unidad; empuje firmemente hasta que se expulse parcialmente la bandeja.
3 Tire de la bandeja hacia afuera suavemente hasta que se detenga.40 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Si oye un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual
• Asegúrese de que el sonido no se debe al programa que se está ejecutando.
• Asegúrese de que el disco esté insertado correctamente.
Si la unidad de CD-RW deja de grabar
DE S A C T I V E E L M O D O D E S U S P E N S I Ó N E N WI N D O W S A N T E S D E G R A B A R E N U N CD-RW — Busque la
palabra clave en espera en el centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Para acceder a la ayuda,
consulte la página 9.
CA M B I E L A V E L O C I D A D D E G R A B A C I Ó N A U N A V E L O C I D A D I N F E R I O R — Consulte los archivos de ayuda
relativos al software de creación de CD.
SA L G A D E L R E S T O D E P R O G R A M A S A B I E R T O S — Para mitigar el problema, salga del resto de programas
abiertos antes de grabar en el CD-RW.
Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces
Si tiene problemas con los altavoces integrados
AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E L V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S
®
— Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se
encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha
silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen para eliminar la distorsión.
AJ U S T E E L V O L U M E N U T I L I Z A N D O M É T O D O S A B R E V I A D O S D E T E C L A D O — Pulse para
desactivar (quitar el sonido) o volver a activar los altavoces integrados.
VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E S O N I D O (A U D I O) — Consulte la página 59.
Si tiene problemas con los altavoces externos
NOTA: El control de volumen de algunos reproductores de MP3 anula la configuración de volumen de
Windows. Si ha estado escuchando canciones MP3, asegúrese de que el control de volumen no está
puesto al mínimo ni se ha desactivado.
CO M P R U E B E L A S C O N E X I O N E S D E L O S C A B L E S D E L O S A L T A V O C E S — Consulte el diagrama de
instalación proporcionado con los altavoces.
PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona;
para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara.
CO M P R U E B E Q U E L O S A L T A V O C E S E S T Á N E N C E N D I D O S — Consulte el diagrama de instalación
proporcionado con los altavoces.
AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se
encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha
silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen para eliminar la distorsión.
PR U E B E L O S A L T A V O C E S — Conecte el cable de audio del altavoz al conector de salida de línea del
equipo. Asegúrese de que el control de volumen de los auriculares esté activado. Reproduzca un CD de
música.
EJ E C U T E L A A U T O P R U E B A D E L O S A L T A V O C E S — En algunos sistemas de altavoces, el altavoz para bajas Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia 41
frecuencias incluye un botón de autoprueba. Consulte la documentación incluida con los altavoces con el
fin de obtener las instrucciones para realizar autoprueba.
EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague las luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas o
ventiladores cercanos para comprobar si se producen interferencias.
VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E S O N I D O (A U D I O) — Consulte la página 59.
Cómo copiar CD y DVD
NOTA: Asegúrese de no incumplir la legislación sobre copyright al crear un CD.
Esta sección se aplica sólo a equipos que disponen de una unidad de CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+RW,
DVD+R o una unidad combinada de DVD/CD-RW.
Las siguientes instrucciones indican cómo realizar una copia exacta de un CD o DVD. También
puede utilizar Sonic RecordNow con otros fines, como la creación de CD de archivos de audio en el
equipo y la creación de CD de archivos MP3. Si desea obtener instrucciones, consulte la
documentación de Sonic RecordNow incluida en su equipo. Abra Sonic RecordNow, haga clic en el
icono de signo de interrogación de la parte superior derecha de la ventana y, a continuación, haga
clic en RecordNow Help (Ayuda de RecordNow) o RecordNow Tutorial (Guía de aprendizaje de
RecordNow).
Cómo copiar un CD o DVD
NOTA: Si dispone de una unidad combinada de DVD/CD-RW y tiene problemas de grabación,
compruebe si hay revisiones de software disponibles en el sitio web de soporte de Sonic:
support.sonic.com.
NOTA: La mayoría de los DVD comerciales están protegidos por las leyes de copyright y no se pueden
copiar con Sonic RecordNow.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Sonic→ RecordNow!→
RecordNow!
2 Haga clic en la ficha de datos o de audio, según el tipo de CD que desee copiar.
3 Haga clic en Exact Copy (Copia exacta).
4 Para copiar el CD o DVD:
• Si tiene una unidad de CD o DVD, asegúrese de que la configuración sea correcta y haga
clic en Copy (Copiar). El equipo lee el CD o DVD de origen y lo copia en una carpeta
temporal de la unidad de disco duro del equipo.
Cuando se le solicite, inserte un CD o DVD vacío en la unidad de CD o DVD y haga clic
en OK (Aceptar).
• Si dispone de dos unidades de CD o DVD, seleccione la unidad en la que ha insertado el
CD o DVD de origen y haga clic en Copy (Copiar). El equipo copia los datos del CD o
DVD en el CD o DVD vacío.42 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Después de finalizar la copia del CD o DVD de origen, se expulsa automáticamente el CD o
DVD que ha creado.
Cómo utilizar CD-R y CD-RW vacíos
La unidad de CD-RW puede grabar dos tipos distintos de medios de grabación: discos CD-R y
CD-RW. Utilice CD-R vacíos para grabar música o almacenar permanentemente archivos de datos.
Después de crear un CD-R, no puede grabar en ese CD-R de nuevo sin cambiar el método de
grabación (consulte la documentación de Sonic para obtener más información). Utilice discos CDRW vacíos para grabar en CD, borrar, regrabar o actualizar datos en los CD.
Consejos prácticos
• Utilice el Explorador de Microsoft®
Windows®
para arrastrar y soltar archivos en un CD-R o
CD-RW sólo después de haber iniciado Sonic RecordNow y haber abierto un proyecto de
RecordNow.
• Utilice discos CD-R para grabar los CD de música que desee reproducir en equipos estéreo
normales.
Los discos CD-RW no se reproducen en la mayoría de los equipos estéreo domésticos o para
automóvil.
• No se pueden crear DVD de audio con Sonic RecordNow.
• Los archivos MP3 de música sólo se pueden reproducir en reproductores de MP3 o en equipos
en que se haya instalado software de BMP3.
• No ocupe toda la capacidad de un CD-R o CD-RW vacío al grabar; por ejemplo, no copie un
archivo de 650 MB en un CD vacío de 650 MB. La unidad de CD-RW necesita 1 ó 2 MB del
CD vacío para finalizar la grabación.
• Utilice un CD-RW vacío para practicar la grabación en CD hasta que se familiarice con las
técnicas de grabación en CD. Si comete un error, puede borrar los datos del CD-RW e
intentarlo de nuevo. También puede utilizar discos CD-RW vacíos para probar un proyecto
de archivos de música antes de grabarlos de forma permanente en un CD-R vacío.
• Consulte el sitio web de asistencia técnica de Sonic en support.sonic.com para obtener más
información.Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 43
Configuración de una red particular y una
red de oficina
Conexión de un adaptador de red
Antes de conectar el equipo a una red, es preciso instalar un adaptador de red y conectar un cable
de red.
Para conectar el cable de red:
1 Conecte el cable de red al conector del adaptador de red del equipo.
NOTA: Inserte el cable hasta que encaje en su posición y, a continuación, tire de él suavemente para
asegurarse de que está bien encajado.
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red a un dispositivo de conexión de red, como una toma
de red de pared.
NOTA: No utilice un cable de red en una toma telefónica de la pared.
Asistente para configuración de redes
El sistema operativo Microsoft®
Windows®
XP proporciona un asistente para la configuración de
la red que le guiará en el proceso de compartición de archivos, impresoras o una conexión de
Internet entre equipos en un entorno doméstico o de pequeña oficina.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→
Comunicaciones y, a continuación, haga clic en Asistente para configuración de redes.
2 En la pantalla de bienvenida, haga clic en Siguiente.
3 Haga clic en Lista de comprobación para crear una red.44 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
NOTA: Al seleccionar el método de conexión Este equipo está conectado directamente a Internet, se
activará el servidor de seguridad integrado que incluye Windows XP.
4 Complete la lista de comprobación y los preparativos necesarios, y vuelva a la pantalla del
Asistente para configuración de red.
5 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla.
Problemas con la red
NOTA: Un indicador de conexión verde o parpadeante también podría indicar la presencia de un enlace
de red inalámbrica en el área.
CO M P R U E B E E L C O N E C T O R D E L C A B L E D E R E D — Asegúrese de que el conector del cable de red está bien
conectado al conector del equipo y al enchufe de red de la pared.
CO M P R U E B E L O S I N D I C A D O R E S D E R E D D E L C O N E C T O R D E R E D — El color verde indica que la conexión
de red está activa. Si el indicador de estado no está en verde, pruebe a reemplazar el cable de red. El color
ámbar indica que el controlador del adaptador de red está cargado y que el adaptador detecta actividad.
CA M B I E E L C A B L E D E R E D — Pruebe a utilizar otro cable. Si hay más de un conector de red disponible,
intente enchufar el cable en un conector diferente.
RE I N I C I E E L E Q U I P O — Vuelva a intentar conectarse a la red.
PÓ N G A S E E N C O N T A C T O C O N E L A D M I N I S T R A D O R D E L A R E D — Compruebe que la configuración de la
red es correcta y que la red está en funcionamiento.
Conexión a una red de área local inalámbrica
NOTA: Estas instrucciones sobre la red no se aplican a los productos Bluetooth™ ni celulares.
Establecimiento del tipo de red
NOTA: La mayoría de las redes inalámbricas son redes de infraestructura. Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 45
Las redes inalámbricas se clasifican en dos categorías: redes de infraestructura y redes ad-hoc. Las
redes de infraestructura usan enrutadores o puntos de acceso para conectar varios equipos. Las
redes ad-hoc no usan enrutadores o puntos de acceso y se componen de equipos que difunden de
uno a otro.
Conexión a una red inalámbrica en Microsoft ®
Windows®
XP
La tarjeta inalámbrica requiere el software y los controladores adecuados para conectarse a una red.
El software ya está instalado. Si el software se extrae o se daña, siga las instrucciones que se incluyen
en la guía del usuario de su tarjeta de red inalámbrica. La guía del usuario también está disponible
en el sitio web Dell Support en support.dell.com.
Cuando encienda el equipo, aparecerá un mensaje emergente del icono de red en el área de
notificación siempre que se detecte una red en la zona para la que su equipo no esté configurado.
1 Haga clic en el mensaje emergente o en el icono de la red con el fin de configurar el equipo
para una de las redes inalámbricas disponibles.
La ventana Conexiones de red inalámbricas muestra las redes inalámbricas disponibles en la
zona.
Red de infraestructura Red ad-hoc46 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
2 Haga clic en la red que desee configurar y, a continuación, haga clic en Conectar o haga doble
clic en el nombre de red de la lista. Si selecciona una red segura (identificada por un icono
), debe especificar una clave WEP o WPA cuando se le pida.
NOTA: La configuración de seguridad de la red es exclusiva de su red. Dell no puede proporcionar esta
información.
La red se configura automáticamente.
NOTA: Es posible que el equipo tarde hasta un minuto en conectarse a la red.
Después de configurar el equipo para la red inalámbrica que ha seleccionado, otro mensaje
emergente le notificará que el equipo está conectado a la red seleccionada. Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 47
Por lo tanto, cada vez que se conecte al equipo en el área de la red inalámbrica, el mismo
mensaje emergente le notificará la conexión a la red inalámbrica. 48 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mSolución de problemas 49
Solución de problemas
Dell Diagnostics
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las
instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto.
Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics
Si tiene problemas con el equipo, realice las comprobaciones de la sección “Solución de problemas”
y ejecute los Dell Diagnostics antes de ponerse en contacto con Dell para solicitar asistencia
técnica.
AVISO: Los Dell Diagnostics sólo funcionan en los equipos Dell™.
Los Dell Diagnostics están situados en una partición oculta para la utilidad de diagnóstico
(Diagnostic) de la unidad de disco duro.
NOTA: Si el equipo no muestra ninguna imagen en la pantalla, póngase en contacto con Dell.
1 Apague el equipo.
2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si
desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento.
3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico.
4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente.
NOTA: Si no aparece nada en la pantalla, mantenga pulsado y pulse el botón de encendido del
equipo para iniciar Dell Diagnostics. El equipo ejecutará automáticamente la evaluación del sistema
previa al inicio.
Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Microsoft®
Windows®
, siga esperando hasta que
aparezca el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo mediante el menú
Inicio y vuelva a intentarlo.
5 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte Diagnostics (Diagnósticos)y pulse
.
El equipo ejecutará la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, una serie de pruebas iniciales de
la tarjeta del sistema, el teclado, la unidad de disco duro y la pantalla.
• Durante la evaluación, responda a las preguntas que puedan formularse.
• Si se detecta un fallo, el equipo se detiene y emite pitidos. Para detener la evaluación y
reiniciar el equipo, pulse ; para continuar con la siguiente prueba, pulse ; para
volver a probar el componente que falló, pulse . 50 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
• Si se detectaron fallos durante la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, anote el código o
códigos de error y póngase en contacto con Dell antes de continuar con los Dell
Diagnostics.
Si la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio se realiza correctamente, recibirá el mensaje
Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue
(Iniciando la partición de la utilidad Dell Diagnostic. Pulse cualquier tecla para continuar).
6 Presione cualquier tecla para iniciar los Dell Diagnostics desde la partición para la utilidad de
diagnóstico del disco duro.
7 Cuando aparezca el Main Menu (Menú principal) de Dell Diagnostics, seleccione la prueba
que desea ejecutar.
Menú principal de los Dell Diagnostics
1 Una vez se hayan cargado los Dell Diagnostics y aparezca la pantalla Main Menu (Menú
principal), haga clic en el botón de la opción que desea.
2 Si se produce un problema durante una prueba, aparecerá un mensaje con un código de error
y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema, y siga
las instrucciones de la pantalla.
Si no puede resolver la condición del error, póngase en contacto con Dell.
NOTA: La etiqueta de servicio para su equipo está situada en la parte superior de cada pantalla de
prueba. Si se pone en contacto con Dell, el servicio de asistencia técnica le pedirá su etiqueta de
servicio.
Opción Función
Express Test (Prueba
rápida)
Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos. Esta
prueba suele tardar de 10 a 20 minutos y no requiere
ninguna acción por parte del usuario. Ejecute primero
Express Test (Prueba rápida) para incrementar la
posibilidad de rastrear el problema rápidamente.
Extended Test (Prueba
extendida)
Realiza una prueba completa de los dispositivos. Esta
prueba suele tardar una o varias horas y requiere que
usted responda de manera periódica a una serie de
preguntas.
Custom Test (Prueba
personalizada)
Prueba un dispositivo específico. Puede personalizar las
pruebas que desee ejecutar.
Symptom Tree (Árbol de
síntomas)
Hace una lista de los síntomas más habituales que se
pueden encontrar y le permite seleccionar una prueba
basándose en el síntoma del problema que usted tiene.Solución de problemas 51
3 Si ejecuta una prueba desde la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) o Symptom Tree
(Árbol de síntomas), haga clic en la pestaña correspondiente que se describe en la tabla
siguiente para obtener más información.
4 Cuando las pruebas hayan finalizado, cierre la pantalla de prueba para volver a la pantalla
Main Menu (Menú principal). Para salir de los Dell Diagnostics y reiniciar el equipo, cierre la
pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal).
Mensajes de error
Si el mensaje no aparece en la lista, consulte la documentación del sistema operativo o el programa
que se estaba ejecutando en el momento en que apareció el mensaje.
Ficha Función
Results (Resultado) Muestra el resultado de la prueba y las condiciones de
error encontradas.
Errors (Errores) Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos
de error y la descripción del problema.
Help (Ayuda) Describe la prueba y puede indicar los requisitos para
ejecutarla.
Configuration
(Configuración)
Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo
seleccionado.
Dell Diagnostics obtiene la información de configuración
de todos los dispositivos a partir de la configuración del
sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y la
muestra en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de
la pantalla. La lista de dispositivos puede que no muestre
los nombres de todos los componentes instalados en el
equipo o de todos los dispositivos conectados al equipo.
Parameters (Parámetros) Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su
configuración.
TH E F I L E B E I N G C O P I E D I S T O O L A R G E F O R T H E D E S T I N A T I O N D R I V E (EL A R C H I V O Q U E S E E S T Á
C O P I A N D O E S D E M A S I A D O G R A N D E P A R A L A U N I D A D D E D E S T I N O) — El archivo que está
intentando copiar es demasiado grande y no cabe en el disco, o el disco está lleno. Pruebe a copiar el
archivo en otro disco o en un disco con mayor capacidad.
A F I L E N A M E C A N N O T C O N T A I N A N Y O F T H E F O L L O W I N G C H A R A C T E R S: \ / : * ? “ < > | (UN N O M B R E
D E A R C H I V O N O P U E D E C O N T E N E R N I N G U N O D E L O S C A R A C T E R E S S I G U I E N T E S: \ / : * ? “ < > |) —
No utilice estos caracteres en los nombres de archivo.52 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla
Si la pantalla aparece en blanco
NOTA: Si utiliza un programa que requiere una resolución superior a la que admite el equipo, se
recomienda conectar un monitor externo.
IN S E R T B O O T A B L E M E D I A (IN S E R T E U N M E D I O D E A R R A N Q U E) — El sistema operativo está
intentando arrancar desde un disquete o CD que no es de arranque. Inserte un disco o un CD de inicio.
IN V A L I D C O N F I G U R A T I O N I N F O R M A T I O N-P L E A S E R U N SYS T E M SE T U P PR O G R A M (IN F O R M A C I Ó N D E
C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N N O V Á L I D A; E J E C U T E E L P R O G R A M A D E C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E L S I S T E M A) — La
información de configuración del sistema no coincide con la configuración de hardware. Este mensaje
es más probable tras instalar un módulo de memoria. Corrija las opciones apropiadas del programa de
configuración del sistema. Consulte el apartado “Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema”
en la página 86.
KE Y B O A R D C L O C K L I N E F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L A L Í N E A D E R E L O J D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados
externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller (Controladora de
teclado) tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).
KE Y B O A R D C O N T R O L L E R F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados
externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el equipo y evite tocar el teclado o el mouse
durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller tal como se describe en “Dell
Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).
KE Y B O A R D D A T A L I N E F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L A L Í N E A D E D A T O S D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados
externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller tal como se describe
en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).
KE Y B O A R D S T U C K K E Y F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E T E C L A B L O Q U E A D A D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados
externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el equipo y evite tocar el teclado o las teclas
durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute la prueba Stuck Key (Tecla bloqueada ) tal como se describe en
“Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).Solución de problemas 53
Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla
CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R — Si el indicador parpadea significa que el equipo recibe
alimentación.
• Si el indicador parpadea, el equipo está en modo de espera. Pulse el botón de alimentación para
salir del modo de espera.
• Si el indicador está apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación.
• Si el indicador está encendido, puede que la configuración de administración de energía haya
hecho que se apague la pantalla. Pulse cualquier tecla o mueva el cursor para salir del modo de
suspensión.
CO M P R U E B E L A B A T E R Í A — Si utiliza una batería para la alimentación del equipo, puede que se haya
agotado. Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico con el adaptador de CA y enciéndalo.
PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica
funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara.
CO M P R U E B E E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el
adaptador de CA tiene un indicador, asegúrese de que está encendido.
CO N E C T E E L E Q U I P O D I R E C T A M E N T E A U N A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Omita los
dispositivos protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y alargadores para comprobar que el
equipo se enciende. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
AJ U S T E L A S P R O P I E D A D E S D E L A A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Busque la palabra clave en esperaen el Centro de
ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
CA M B I E L A I M A G E N D E V Í D E O — Si su equipo está conectado a un monitor externo, oprima
para cambiar la imagen de vídeo a la pantalla.
NOTE: Si está reproduciendo un DVD o viendo un vídeo, está desactivado.
AJ U S T E E L B R I L L O — Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener
instrucciones sobre el ajuste del brillo. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
AL E J E D E L M O N I T O R O D E L E Q U I P O E L A L T A V O Z D E B A J A S F R E C U E N C I A S — Si el sistema de
altavoces externos incluye un altavoz para bajas frecuencias, asegúrese de que dicho altavoz se
encuentra como mínimo a 60 cm del monitor.54 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla
Problemas con el escáner
EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas
halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos.
OR I E N T E E L E Q U I P O H A C I A O T R A D I R E C C I Ó N — Evite los reflejos de la luz solar, que pueden causar
una calidad baja de la imagen.
AJ U S T E L A C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E P A N T A L L A D E WI N D O W S —
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Panel de control.
2 Haga clic en Apariencia y temas.
3 Haga clic sobre la zona que desea cambiar o en el icono Pantalla.
4 Pruebe valores diferentes en Calidad del color y Resolución de pantalla.
CO N S U L T E “ME N S A J E S D E E R R O R” — Si aparece un mensaje de error, consulte la página 51.
CO N E C T E U N M O N I T O R E X T E R N O —
1 Apague el equipo y conéctele un monitor externo.
2 Encienda el equipo y el monitor, y ajuste los controles de brillo y contraste del monitor.
Si el monitor externo funciona, es posible que el controlador de vídeo o la pantalla del equipo estén
defectuosos. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90).
CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N D E L C A B L E D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Asegúrese de que el cable de
alimentación del escáner está debidamente conectado a una fuente de alimentación eléctrica en
funcionamiento y que el escáner está encendido.
CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N D E L C A B L E D E L E S C Á N E R — Asegúrese de que el cable del escáner está
debidamente conectado al equipo y al escáner.
DE S B L O Q U E E E L E S C Á N E R — Asegúrese de que el escáner no está bloqueado si éste dispone de una
lengüeta o un botón de bloqueo.
VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L E S C Á N E R — Consulte la documentación incluida con el
escáner para obtener instrucciones.Solución de problemas 55
Problemas con las unidades
NOTA: Para obtener información sobre cómo guardar archivos en un disquete, consulte el archivo Dell
Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
Si no puede guardar un archivo en una unidad de disco flexible
AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S
®
R E C O N O C E L A U N I D A D — Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Mi PC.
Si no aparece la unidad, haga una búsqueda completa con el software antivirus para comprobar si hay
virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la unidad. Inserte un
disco de inicio y reinicie el equipo. Compruebe si el indicador de la unidad parpadea, lo cual indica
que el funcionamiento es correcto.
AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E E L D I S C O N O E S T Á P R O T E G I D O C O N T R A E S C R I T U R A — No se pueden guardar
datos en un disco protegido contra escritura. Consulte la siguiente figura.
UT I L I C E O T R O D I S Q U E T E — Inserte otro disco para descartar la posibilidad de que el disco original sea
defectuoso.
VU E L V A A C O N E C T A R L A U N I D A D —
1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que estén abiertos, salga de todas las aplicaciones y apague el equipo.
2 Desconecte y vuelva a conectar la unidad.
3 Encienda el equipo.
LI M P I E L A U N I D A D — Consulte la sección relativa a la limpieza del equipo en el archivo Dell Inspiron
Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la
página 9.
Protegido contra
escritura
No protegido
contra escritura
Dorso del disquete56 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Si tiene problemas con una unidad de disco duro
Problemas con la tarjeta PC
Problemas generales del programa
NOTA: Normalmente el software incluye instrucciones de instalación en su documentación o en un
disquete o CD.
Un programa se bloquea
DE J E Q U E E L E Q U I P O S E E N F R Í E A N T E S D E E N C E N D E R L O — Una unidad de disco duro recalentada
puede impedir que se inicie el sistema operativo. Deje que el equipo vuelva a adoptar la temperatura
ambiente antes de encenderlo.
CO M P R U E B E L A U N I D A D P A R A V E R S I T I E N E E R R O R E S —
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Mi PC.
2 Haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en la letra de la unidad (disco local) que desea examinar para
comprobar que no tiene errores y, a continuación, haga clic en Propiedades.
3 Haga clic en la ficha Herramientas.
4 En el grupo de opciones de Comprobación de errores, haga clic en Comprobar ahora.
5 Haga clic en Inicio.
CO M P R U E B E L A T A R J E T A PC — Asegúrese de que la tarjeta PC está insertada correctamente en el
conector.
AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S
®
R E C O N O C E L A T A R J E T A — Haga doble clic en el icono Safely
Remove Hardware (Quitar hardware con seguridad) de la barra de tareas de Windows. Asegúrese de que
aparece la tarjeta.
SI T I E N E P R O B L E M A S C O N U N A T A R J E T A PC P R O P O R C I O N A D A P O R DE L L — Póngase en contacto
con Dell (consulte la página 90).
SI T I E N E P R O B L E M A S C O N U N A T A R J E T A PC N O P R O P O R C I O N A D A P O R DE L L — Póngase en
contacto con el fabricante de la tarjeta PC.
CO N S U L T E L A D O C U M E N T A C I Ó N D E L S O F T W A R E — Muchos fabricantes de software ofrecen sitios
Web con información que puede ayudarle a solucionar el problema. Asegúrese de que ha instalado y
configurado correctamente el programa. Vuelva a instalar el programa si fuera necesario.Solución de problemas 57
Un programa no responde
Aparecen mensajes de error
Solución de otros problemas técnicos
Si el equipo se moja
PRECAUCIÓN: Sólo debe realizar este procedimiento si tiene la certeza de que es seguro hacerlo. Si
el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, se recomienda apagar la alimentación de CA del
interruptor automático antes de desconectar los cables de la toma de corriente. Proceda con la
máxima precaución cuando retire cables mojados de una toma de corriente.
1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), desconecte el adaptador de corriente alterna del
equipo y, a continuación, desconecte el adaptador de corriente alterna de la toma de
corriente.
FI N A L I C E E L P R O G R A M A —
1 Pulse simultáneamente .
2 Haga clic en la ficha Aplicaciones y seleccione el programa que no responde.
3 Haga clic en Finalizar tarea.
RE V I S E “ME N S A J E S D E E R R O R” E N L A P Á G I N A 51 — Localice el mensaje y lleve a cabo la acción
adecuada. Consulte la documentación del software.
VA Y A A L S I T I O W E B DE L L SU P P O R T — Vaya a support.dell.com para obtener ayuda sobre cuestiones
generales de uso, instalación y solución de problemas. Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico
de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y
el software proporcionada por Dell.
EN V Í E U N M E N S A J E D E C O R R E O E L E C T R Ó N I C O A DE L L — Vaya a support.dell.com y haga clic en Dell
E-Mail en la lista Comunicar. Envíe un mensaje de correo electrónico a Dell sobre el problema; en unas
horas recibirá una respuesta de Dell a través del correo electrónico. Consulte el apartado “Política de
soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia
para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell.
PÓ N G A S E E N C O N T A C T O C O N DE L L — Si no puede solucionar el problema con la ayuda del sitio web
Dell™ Support ni con el servicio por correo electrónico, llame a Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica
(consulte la página 90). Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la
página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por
Dell.58 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
2 Apague los dispositivos externos que estén conectados y desconéctelos de sus fuentes de
alimentación y del equipo.
3 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque uno de los conectores
metálicos de la parte posterior del equipo.
4 Extraiga las tarjetas PC que estén instaladas y colóquelas en un lugar seguro para que se sequen.
5 Extraiga la batería.
6 Pase un paño por la batería y colóquela en un lugar seguro para que se seque.
7 Pase un paño por el monitor.
8 Extraiga la unidad de disco duro (consulte la página 66).
9 Extraiga el módulo o módulos de memoria (consulte la página 68).
10 Abra la pantalla y coloque el equipo con su lado derecho hacia arriba sobre dos libros u objetos
similares para permitir que el aire circule a su alrededor. Déjelo secar como mínimo durante
24 horas en un lugar seco a temperatura ambiente.
AVISO: No utilice medios artificiales, como un secador de pelo o un ventilador, para acelerar el secado.
PRECAUCIÓN: Para evitar recibir una descarga eléctrica, compruebe si el equipo está totalmente
seco antes de continuar con el procedimiento.
11 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque uno de los conectores
metálicos de la parte posterior del equipo.
12 Vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria, la cubierta y los tornillos.
13 Vuelva a colocar la unidad de disco duro.
14 Reemplace las tarjetas PC que ha extraído.
15 Vuelva a colocar la batería.
16 Encienda el equipo y compruebe que funciona correctamente.
NOTA: Para obtener información sobre la cobertura de la garantía, consulte la Guía de información del
producto o el documento de la garantia por separado que se envío con su equipo.
Si el equipo no se enciende o no identifica los componentes dañados, póngase en contacto con
Dell (consulte la página 90).
Si el equipo se cae o se daña
1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que estén abiertos, salga de todas las aplicaciones y apague el
equipo (consulte la página 28).
2 Desconecte el adaptador de CA de la toma de corriente y del equipo.
3 Apague los dispositivos externos que estén conectados y desconéctelos de sus fuentes de
alimentación y del equipo.
4 Extraiga la batería y vuelva a colocarla.
5 Encienda el equipo.Solución de problemas 59
NOTA: Consulte la Guía de información del producto o el documento de la garantía que incluía su equipo
para obtener información sobre la garantía.
Si el equipo no se enciende o no puede identificar los componentes dañados, póngase en
contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90).
Controladores
¿Qué es un controlador?
Un controlador es un programa que controla un dispositivo, como por ejemplo una impresora, un
mouse o un teclado. Todos los dispositivos necesitan un controlador.
Un controlador funciona como traductor entre el dispositivo y los programas que lo utilizan. Cada
dispositivo posee un conjunto propio de comandos especializados que sólo su controlador puede
reconocer.
Muchos controladores como, por ejemplo, el controlador de la impresora, se suministran con el
sistema operativo Microsoft®
Windows®
. Deberá instalar los controladores si:
• Actualiza el sistema operativo.
• Reinstala el sistema operativo.
• Conecta o instala un nuevo dispositivo.
Si experimenta problemas con algún dispositivo, realice los pasos descritos en las secciones
siguientes para determinar si el origen del problema es el controlador y, en caso necesario,
actualizarlo.
Identificación de controladores
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control.
2 En la ventana Panel de control, pulse Rendimiento y mantenimiento en Elija una categoría.
3 En la ventana Rendimiento y mantenimiento, pulse Sistema.
4 En la pantalla Propiedades del sistema, haga clic en la ficha Hardware.
5 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos.
6 En la ventana Administrador de dispositivos, desplácese hacia el final de la lista para ver si
algún dispositivo tiene un signo de exclamación (un círculo amarillo con un [!]) en el icono
del dispositivo.
Si aparece un signo de exclamación junto al nombre del dispositivo, deberá volver a instalar el
controlador o instalar uno nuevo.
Volver a instalar los controladores
AVISO: El sitio web Dell Support proporciona los controladores adecuados para los equipos Dell™. Si
instala controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el equipo no funcione correctamente.60 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Cómo usar la desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows XP
Si se produce un problema en el equipo después de instalar o actualizar un controlador, utilice la
función Desintalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows XP para restaurar la versión
previamente instalada del controlador.
Para usar la función Volver al controlador anterior de dispositivos:
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control.
2 En la ventana Panel de control, pulse Rendimiento y mantenimiento en Elija una categoría.
3 En la ventana Rendimiento y mantenimiento, pulse Sistema.
4 En la pantalla Propiedades del sistema, haga clic en la ficha Hardware.
5 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos.
6 En la ventana Administrador de dispositivos, haga clic con el botón derecho en el dispositivo
para el que se instaló el nuevo controlador y, a continuación, haga clic en Propiedades.
7 Haga clic en la ficha Controladores.
8 Haga clic en Desinstalar controlador.
Si con esto no se soluciona el problema, utilice la función Restaurar sistema (consulte la página 61)
para que el sistema operativo vuelva al estado anterior a la instalación del nuevo controlador.
Reinstalación manual de controladores para Windows XP
El sitio web Dell Support proporciona los controladores adecuados para los equipos Dell™. Si instala
controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el equipo no funcione correctamente.
1 Después de copiar los archivos de controlador en su unidad de disco duro, haga clic en el
botón Inicio y haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en Mi PC.
2 Haga clic en Propiedades.
3 Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y en Administrador de dispositivos.
4 Haga doble clic en el tipo de dispositivo para el que va a instalar el controlador (por ejemplo,
Módems o Dispositivos de infrarrojos).
5 Haga doble clic en el nombre del dispositivo para el que está instalando el controlador.
6 Haga clic en la ficha Controlador y, a continuación, haga clic en Actualizar controlador.
7 Haga clic en Instalar desde una lista o ubicación específica (avanzado) y, a continuación,
haga clic en Siguiente.
8 Haga clic en Examinar y examine la ubicación en la que extrajo anteriormente los archivos del
controlador.
9 Cuando aparezca el nombre del controlador adecuado, haga clic en Siguiente.
10 Haga clic en Finalizar y reinicie el equipo.Solución de problemas 61
Cómo resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware
Cómo usar el Solucionador de problemas de hardware de Windows XP:
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, haga clic en Ayuda y soporte técnico.
2 Escriba solucionador de problemas de hardware en el campo Buscar y haga clic en la
flecha para iniciar la búsqueda.
3 Haga clic en Solucionador de problemas de hardware en la lista Resultados de la búsqueda.
4 En la lista Solucionador de problemas de hardware, haga clic en Necesito resolver un
conflicto de hardware de mi equipo y haga clic en Siguiente.
Restauración de su sistema operativo
Puede restaurar su sistema operativo de la siguiente manera:
• La función Restaurar sistema de Microsoft Windows XP devuelve su equipo a un estado
operativo anterior sin que esto afecte a archivos de datos.
• La función Dell PC Restore by Symantec (Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec) restaura su
unidad de disco duro al estado operativo que estaba cuando compró el equipo. La función PC
Restore (Restaurar PC) de Dell borra permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de disco
duro y quita cualquier aplicación que se instaló después de haber recibido el equipo.
Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema de MicrosoftWindows XP
El sistema operativo Microsoft WindowsXP dispone de la función Restaurar sistema que permite
regresar a un estado operativo anterior del equipo (sin que esto afecte a los archivos de datos) si los
cambios efectuados en el hardware, software u otros parámetros del sistema han dejado el equipo
en un estado operativo no deseado. Consulte el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows
para obtener información sobre el uso de la función Restaurar sistema. Para acceder a la ayuda,
consulte la página 9.
AVISO: Realice copias de seguridad periódicas de los archivos de datos. La función Restaurar sistema
no supervisa ni recupera los archivos de datos.
NOTA: Los procedimientos de este documento se han escrito para la vista predeterminada de Windows,
por lo que podrían no funcionar si cambia el equipo Dell™ a la vista clásica de Windows.
Creación de un punto de restauración
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico.
2 Haga clic en Restaurar sistema.
3 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla.
Restauración del equipo a un estado operativo anterior
Si se producen problemas después de instalar el controlador de un dispositivo, utilice la
Desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo (consulte la página 60) para resolver el problema. Si
esto no funciona, utilice Restaurar sistema.62 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
AVISO: Antes de restaurar el equipo a un estado operativo anterior, guarde y cierre los archivos
abiertos y salga de los programas activos. No cambie, abra ni elimine ningún archivo o programa hasta
que haya restaurado totalmente el sistema.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas
del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema.
2 Asegúrese de que ha seleccionado Restaurar mi equipo a un estado anterior y haga clic en
Siguiente.
3 En el calendario, haga clic en la fecha a la que desea restaurar el equipo.
La pantalla Selección de un punto de restauración proporciona un calendario que permite
ver y seleccionar puntos de restauración. Todas las fechas con puntos de restauración
disponibles aparecen en negrita.
4 Seleccione un punto de restauración y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente.
Si una fecha del calendario sólo tiene un punto de restauración, se seleccionará
automáticamente dicho punto. Si hay dos o más puntos de restauración disponibles, haga clic
en el punto de restauración que prefiera.
5 Haga clic en Siguiente.
La pantalla de Restauración finalizada aparece cuando la función Restaurar sistema ha
finalizado de recoger los datos y a continuación se reinicia el equipo.
6 Cuando el equipo se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar.
Para cambiar el punto de restauración, puede repetir estos pasos usando un punto de restauración
distinto o bien puede deshacer la restauración.
Cómo deshacer la última operación de Restaurar sistema
AVISO: Antes de deshacer la última restauración del sistema, guarde y cierre todos los archivos
abiertos y cierre todos los programas. No cambie, abra ni elimine ningún archivo o programa hasta que
haya restaurado totalmente el sistema.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas
del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema.
2 Seleccione Deshacer la última restauración y haga clic en Siguiente.
Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec
Utilice la función Dell PC Restore by Symantec (Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec) solamente
como último recurso para restaurar su sistema operativo. La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC)
restaura su unidad de disco duro al estado operativo que estaba cuando compró el equipo.
Cualquier programa o archivo que se haya agregado desde que recibió su equipo— incluidos los
archivos de datos—se borrarán permanentemente de la unidad de disco duro. Los archivos de datos Solución de problemas 63
incluyen: documentos, hojas de cálculo, mensajes de correo electrónico, fotos digitales, archivos de
música, etc. Si es posible, cree una copia de seguridad de todos los datos antes de utilizar la función
Restaurar PC.
AVISO: Al utilizar la función Restaurar PC se borrarán permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de
disco duro y se quitarán las aplicaciones que se instalaron después de haber recibido el equipo. Si es
posible, cree una copia de seguridad de los datos antes de utilizar la función Restaurar PC.
Para utilizar la función Restaurar PC:
1 Encienda el equipo.
Durante el proceso de inicio, aparecerá una barra azul con www.dell.com en la parte superior
de la pantalla.
2 Pulse en el momento exacto que vea la barra azul.
Si no pulsa a tiempo, deje que el equipo termine el reinicio y vuelva a
reiniciarlo de nuevo.
AVISO: Si no desea continuar con la función Restaurar PC, haga clic en Reiniciar en el siguiente paso.
3 En la pantalla siguiente que aparezca, haga clic en Restaurar.
4 En la pantalla siguiente, haga clic en Confirmar.
El proceso de restauración tardará de 6 a 10 minutos aproximadamente para finalizar.
5 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Terminar para reiniciar el equipo.
NOTA: No apague el equipo manualmente. Haga clic en Terminar y deje que el equipo se reinicie
completamente.
6 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Sí.
El equipo se reinicia. Puesto que el equipo se restaura a su estado operativo original, las
pantallas que aparecen, como, por ejemplo, la pantalla Contrato de licencia del usuario final,
son las mismas que aparecen cuando se enciede el equipo por primera vez.
7 Haga clic en Siguiente.
Aparece la pantalla Restaurar sistema y, a continuación, el equipo se reinicia.
8 Cuando el equipo se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar.
Activación de la función Restaurar sistema
Si vuelve a instalar Windows XP con menos de 200 MB de espacio libre disponible en el disco duro,
se desactivará automáticamente la función Restaurar sistema. Para ver si la función Restaurar
sistema está activada:
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control .
2 Haga clic en Rendimiento y administración.
3 Haga clic en Sistema.64 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
4 Haga clic en la ficha Restaurar sistema.
5 Compruebe que no está activada la opción Desactivar Restaurar sistema.
Eliminación de la función PC Restore
AVISO: La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) le permite restaurar el sistema operativo de su equipo al
estado que estaba cuando compró el equipo. Se recomienda que no elimine la función PC Restore de su
equipo, incluso si es para obtener espacio adicional en el disco duro. Si elimina la función PC Restore de
la unidad de disco duro, nunca podrá volver a recuperarla ni tampoco utilizarla para volver el sistema
operativo de su equipo al estado original.
1 Inicie el equipo como administrador local.
2 En el Explorador de Windows, vaya a c:\dell\utilities\DSR.
3 Haga doble clic en el nombre de archivo DSRIRRemv2.exe.
NOTA: Si no inicia el equipo como administrador local, aparecerá un mensaje indicándole que
debe hacerlo. Haga clic en Salir e inicie el equipo como administrador local.
Si no existe la partición para la función PC Restore, aparecerá un mensaje indicando que no
se ha encontrado la partición. Haga clic en Salir; no hay partición que borrar.
4 Haga clic en Aceptar para eliminar la partición.
5 Haga clic en Sí cuando aparezca un mensaje de confirmación.
Se borra la partición y la partición c:\ se expande para incluir el nuevo espacio de disco
disponible. Para comprobar el espacio disponible, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en
la unidad c:\ en el Explorador de Windows y seleccione Propiedades.
6 Haga clic en Terminar para cerrar la ventana PC Restore Removal (Eliminación de la función
PC Restore).
7 Reinicie el equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 65
Adición y sustitución de piezas
Antes de empezar
Este apartado proporciona procedimientos para quitar e instalar los componentes de su equipo. A
menos que se señale lo contrario, cada procedimiento asume que existen las siguientes condiciones:
• Ha realizado los pasos de la sección “Apagar el equipo.”
• Ha leído la información de seguridad de la Guía de información del producto.
Herramientas recomendadas
Los procedimientos de este documento podrían requerir el uso de las siguientes herramientas:
• Un destornillador pequeño de paletas planas
• Un destornillador Phillips
• Una punta trazadora de plástico pequeña
• CD o disquete de actualización del programa BIOS flash
Apagar el equipo
Utilice las siguientes directrices de seguridad para proteger su equipo de posibles daños y para
garantizar su propia seguridad personal.
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las
instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto.
AVISO: Sólo un técnico certificado debe realizar reparaciones en el equipo. La garantía no cubre los
daños por reparaciones no autorizadas por Dell.
PRECAUCIÓN: Manipule los componentes y las tarjetas con precaución. No toque los componentes o
contactos ubicados en una tarjeta. Sostenga las tarjetas por sus bordes o por su soporte metálico de
montaje. Sujete un componente, como un procesador, por sus bordes y no por sus patas.
AVISO: Cuando desconecte un cable, tire de su conector o de su lazo liberador de tensión, y no del
cable mismo. Algunos cables cuentan con un conector que tiene lengüetas de sujeción; si está
desconectando un cable de este tipo, pulse las lengüetas de sujeción antes de desconectar el cable.
Cuando separe conectores, manténgalos alineados para evitar doblar las patas del conector. Además,
antes de conectar un cable, asegúrese de que los dos conectores estén orientados y alineados
correctamente. 66 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
AVISO: Para evitar daños en el equipo, realice los pasos siguientes antes de empezar a trabajar dentro
del mismo.
1 Asegúrese de que la superficie de trabajo sea llana y esté limpia para evitar que la cubierta del
equipo se raye.
2 Apague el equipo.
3 Asegúrese de que el equipo y los dispositivos conectados estén apagados. Si el equipo o los
dispositivos conectados no se apagaron automáticamente cuando desactivó el equipo, pulse y
mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación durante 4 segundos.
4 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si
desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento.
AVISO: Para desconectar un cable de red, desconecte primero el cable del equipo y, a continuación, del
enchufe de red de la pared.
5 Desconecte del equipo todas las líneas telefónicas o de telecomunicaciones.
6 Desconecte el equipo y todos los dispositivos conectados de sus salidas eléctricas y, a
continuación, pulse el botón de alimentación para conectar a tierra la placa base.
AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, primero conecte el cable a la toma de red de la pared y,
después, al equipo.
7 Retire las PC Card instaladas de la ranura para PC Card.
8 Cierre la pantalla y coloque el equipo hacia abajo en una superficie plana.
AVISO: Para evitar que se dañe la placa base, debe retirar la batería principal cuando abra el equipo.
9 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de liberación del compartimento de la batería y, a continuación,
extraiga la batería del compartimento.
10 Extraiga los módulos instalados.
11 Extraiga la unidad de disco duro.
Unidad de disco duro
PRECAUCIÓN: Si extrae la unidad de disco duro del equipo cuando la unidad está caliente, no toque
la caja metálica de dicha unidad.
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, apague el equipo (consulte la página 28) antes de extraer la
unidad de disco duro. No extraiga la unidad de disco duro mientras el equipo se encuentre encendido,
en modo de suspensión o en modo de hibernación.
AVISO: Las unidades de disco duro son muy frágiles; basta un ligero golpe para dañarlas.
NOTA: Dell no garantiza la compatibilidad para las unidades de disco duro de otros fabricantes ni
proporciona asistencia técnica si sufren algún problema.Adición y sustitución de piezas 67
Para sustituir la unidad de disco duro en el compartimento correspondiente:
1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65.
2 Dé la vuelta al equipo y retire los tornillos de la unidad de disco duro.
AVISO: Cuando la unidad de disco duro no esté en el equipo, guárdela en un embalaje protector
antiestático. Consulte las instrucciones para desechar las baterías en la Guía de información del
producto.
3 Tire de la unidad de disco duro para extraerla del equipo.
4 Extraiga la nueva unidad de su embalaje.
Conserve el embalaje original para almacenar o transportar la unidad de disco duro.
AVISO: Ejerza una presión firme y constante para deslizar la unidad hasta que encaje en su sitio. Si
ejerce una fuerza excesiva, puede dañar el conector.
5 Inserte la unidad en el compartimento y empújela hasta que encaje totalmente en el
compartimento.
6 Vuelva a colocar los tornillos y apriételos.
7 Instale el sistema operativo para su equipo.
8 Instale los controladores y utilidades para su equipo.
Tornillos (2)
Unidad de
disco duro68 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell
Cuando devuelva la unidad de disco duro a Dell, utilice el embalaje de espuma original o un
embalaje similar. De lo contrario, la unidad de disco duro puede resultar dañada durante el
transporte.
Memoria
Puede aumentar la memoria del sistema mediante la instalación de módulos de memoria en la
placa base. Consulte la página 80 para obtener información sobre la memoria admitida por el
equipo. Instale únicamente módulos de memoria adecuados para su equipo.
1 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la sección “Antes de comenzar” de la página 65.
2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria y
levante la cubierta.
Unidad de
disco duro
Embalaje
de espumaAdición y sustitución de piezas 69
NOTA: Los módulos de memoria adquiridos a Dell están incluidos en la garantía del equipo.
3 Si va a cambiar un módulo de memoria, debe retirar el módulo existente.
a Separe cuidadosamente con las puntas de los dedos los ganchos de fijación que se
encuentran en los extremos del conector del módulo de memoria hasta que el módulo
salga de su sitio.
b Extraiga el módulo del conector.
Tornillo
cautivo
Cubierta del
módulo de
memoria
Ganchos de
fijación
Módulo de
memoria70 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
4 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo e instale el nuevo módulo de memoria:
NOTA: Si el módulo de memoria no está instalado correctamente, es posible que el equipo no arranque.
Este fallo no se indicará mediante un mensaje de error.
a Alinee la muesca del conector del extremo del módulo con la lengüeta de la ranura del
conector.
b Deslice el módulo firmemente en la ranura formando un ángulo de 45 grados y gírelo
hasta que encaje en su sitio con un chasquido. Si no lo nota, retire el módulo y vuelva a
instalarlo.
5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta.
AVISO: Si resulta difícil cerrar la cubierta del módulo de memoria, extraiga el módulo y vuelva a
instalarlo. Si fuerza la cubierta para cerrarla, puede dañar el equipo.
6 Inserte la batería en el compartimento correspondiente o conecte el adaptador de CA al
equipo y a una toma de corriente.
7 Encienda el equipo.
Al reiniciarse el equipo, éste detecta la memoria adicional y actualiza automáticamente la
información de configuración del sistema.
Para confirmar la cantidad de memoria que hay instalada en el equipo, haga clic en el botón Inicio,
seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico y, a continuación, haga clic en Información del equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 71
Módem y minitarjeta PCI
1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65.
2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI y
levante la cubierta.
3 Continúe con las instrucciones que correspondan de las secciones:
• Para agregar un módem, consulte la siguiente sección: “Cómo agregar un módem”.
• Para agregar una minitarjeta PCI, consulte la página 72.
Cómo cambiar el módem
1 Retire el módem actual:
a Extraiga los tornillos que fijan el módem en la placa base y guárdelos aparte.
b Tire de la lengüeta para sacar el módem de su conector de la placa base y desconecte el
cable del módem.
Tornillo cautivo
Cubierta del
módem/minitarjeta
PCI72 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
2 Conecte el cable del módem al módem.
AVISO: Los conectores de cable tienen la forma adecuada para una correcta inserción; no fuerce las
conexiones.
3 Alinee el módem con los orificios para los tornillos e insértelo en el conector de la placa
base.
4 Coloque los tornillos para fijar el módem a la placa base.
5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta.
Cómo agregar una minitarjeta PCI
PRECAUCIÓN: La normativa FCC prohibe terminantemente a los usuarios instalar minitarjetas PCI
LAN inalámbricas de 5 GHz (802.11a, 802.11a/b, 802.11a/b/g). Bajo ninguna circunstancia debe el
usuario instalar ningún dispositivo de dicho tipo. Sólo el personal de servicio técnico formado por Dell
tiene autorización para instalar una minitarjeta PCI LAN inalámbrica de 5 GHz.
Si extrae o instala una minitarjeta PCI de 2,4 GHz (802.11b, 802.11b/g), siga las instrucciones que se
indican a continuación. Sólo se pueden instalar los productos aprobados para su utilización en el
equipo portátil. Las minitarjetas PCI aprobadas sólo se pueden comprar a Dell.
NOTA: El usuario puede extraer e instalar las tarjetas PC LAN inalámbricas de 2,4 GHz.
Conector del cable del
módem
Cable del
módem
Lengüeta
de tiro
Tornillos (2)Adición y sustitución de piezas 73
Si pidió una minitarjeta PCI con el equipo, ya estará instalada.
1 Si no hay ninguna minitarjeta PCI instalada, vaya al paso 2. Si está sustituyendo una
minitarjeta PCI, retire la tarjeta existente.
a Desconecte la minitarjeta PCI de los cables conectados.
b Libere la minitarjeta PCI; para ello, separe las lengüetas metálicas de fijación hasta que
la tarjeta se levante ligeramente.
c Extraiga la minitarjeta PCI de su conector.
AVISO: Para evitar dañar la minitarjeta PCI, no coloque nunca cables encima o debajo de la tarjeta.
AVISO: Los conectores tienen la forma adecuada para garantizar que la inserción es correcta. Si
nota resistencia, compruebe los conectores y vuelva a alinear la tarjeta.
Minitarjeta PCI
Conector de minitarjeta
PCI
Cables de antena (2)
Lengüetas metálicas de
fijación (2)74 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
2 Alinee la minitarjeta PCI con el conector hasta formar un ángulo de 45 grados y, a
continuación, presiónela para insertarla en el conector.
3 Conecte los cables de antena a la minitarjeta PCI.
4 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta.
Unidad de CD o DVD
1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65.
2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria y
levante la cubierta.
Minitarjeta PCI
Conector de
minitarjeta PCI
Cables de antena
(2)Adición y sustitución de piezas 75
3 Extraiga el tornillo “O” que se encuentra junto a la cubierta del módulo de memoria.
4 Apriete la palanca que se encuentra junto a los conectores del módulo de memoria en la
dirección a la flecha indicada en la palanca (es decir, hacia la unidad) para liberar la unidad.
5 Extraiga la unidad del compartimento.
Tornillo
cautivo
Cubierta del
módulo de
memoria
Tornillo
Palanca
Unidad CD o DVD76 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
6 Inserte la nueva unidad en el compartimento hasta que quede totalmente encajada.
7 Vuelva a colocar el tornillo extraído en el paso 3.
8 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del módulo de memoria y el tornillo.
Teclado
1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65.
2 Use un destornillador plano pequeño o una punta de plástico para levantar el extremo
derecho con muesca de la cubierta embellecedora y haga palanca en ella para extraerla.
3 Levante la cubierta y extráigala de las bisagras y del estuche inferior.
4 Extraiga los cuatro tornillos del teclado.
AVISO: Las teclas del teclado son frágiles, se desencajan fácilmente y resulta muy entretenido volver a
colocarlas. Tenga cuidado cuando extraiga y manipule el teclado.
5 Levante el teclado y apóyelo en las bisagras de la pantalla de modo que el conector del teclado
quede visible.
6 Tire del conector del teclado para desconectarlo del conector de interfaz de la placa base.
Cubierta con bisagrasAdición y sustitución de piezas 77
7 Extraiga el teclado.
AVISO: para evitar dañar las patas de los conectores, inserte firmemente el conector del teclado en el
conector de interfaz de la placa base y no invierta el conector del teclado.
8 Conecte el conector de teclado del otro teclado en el conector de interfaz de la placa base.
Conector de interfaz
Conector para teclado
Tornillos para
teclado (4)
Teclado78 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
9 Inserte las cuatro pestañas de fijación del teclado en las ranuras correspondientes del
apoyamanos y vuelva a colocar el teclado.
Antes de intentar encajar completamente el teclado, asegúrese de que las cuatro pestañas de
fijación están encajadas.
10 Vuelva a colocar los cuatro tornillos del teclado.
11 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta.
Conector de interfaz
Conector para teclado
Tornillos para
teclado (4)
Teclado
Pestañas de
fijación (4)Apéndice 79
Apéndice
Especificaciones
NOTA: Las funciones de administración de energía limitan la velocidad del procesador cuando el equipo
funciona con batería, para mantener los requisitos de ventilación del sistema o para mantener los
requisitos de alimentación del sistema.
Microprocesador
Microprocesador Procesador Mobile Intel®
Pentium®
4 o
Intel Celeron®
Caché L1 8 KB (interna)
Caché L2 512 KB (Intel Pentium 4); 128 KB (Intel
Celeron)
Frecuencia de bus externa 400/533 MHz
Información del sistema
Conjunto de chips del sistema Intel 852GMV
Amplitud del bus de datos 64 bits
Amplitud del bus de DRAM 64 bits
Amplitud del bus de direcciones del
microprocesador
32 bits
Tarjeta PC
Controlador CardBus TI PCI1510
Conector de tarjetas PC admite una tarjeta del Tipo I o Tipo II
Tarjetas admitidas de 3,3 V y 5 V
Tamaño del conector de tarjetas PC de 68 patas
Amplitud de datos (máxima) PCMCIA de 16 bits
CardBus de 32 bits80 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Memoria
Conector del módulo de memoria 2 zócalos SODIMM a los que puede acceder
el usuario
Capacidades del módulo de memoria 64, 128, 256 y 512 MB
Tipo de memoria SODIMM de 2,5 V
Memoria estándar 128 MB
Memoria máxima 1 GB
Tiempo de acceso a memoria:
velocidad del reloj
266 MHz
Puertos y conectores
Vídeo conector de 15 orificios
Audio Conector de micrófono, conector de
auriculares o altavoces estéreo
USB (2) Conector de 4 patas compatible con USB 2.0
Módem Conector RJ-11
LAN Ethernet Conector RJ-45 (opcional en algunos países)
Comunicaciones
Módem:
Tipo v.92 56K MDC
Controlador softmodem
Interfaz Bus interno AC ’97
Adaptador de red tarjeta de sistema LAN Ethernet 10/100Apéndice 81
Vídeo
Tipo de vídeo Gráficos directos integrados AGP
Interfaz host AGP directo integrado
Controlador de vídeo Intel UMA integrada
Memoria de vídeo 1 MB con Intel DVMT hasta 32 MB (con
128 MB de memoria del sistema) o 64 MB
(con 256 MB o más de memoria del sistema)
Interfaz LCD SPWG-B
Audio
Tipo de audio AC’97 (soft audio)
Controlador de audio Sigmatel 9750
Conversión estereofónica 18 bits (de analógica a digital) y 20 bits (de
digital a analógica)
Interfaces:
Interna Bus PCI /AC’97
Externa Conector de entrada de micrófono, conector
de auriculares o altavoces estéreo
Altavoz Dos altavocesde 8 ohmios
Amplificador de altavoz interno Canal de 1,0 W en 8 ohmios
Controles de volumen Métodos abreviados de teclado, menús de
programa82 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Pantalla
Tipo (TFT matriz activa) XGA
Dimensiones: 14,1 ó 15 pulgadas
Altura:
14.1 pulgada
15 pulgada
214,3 mm (8,4 pulgadas)
228,1 mm (8,99 pulgadas)
Anchura:
14.1 pulgada
15 pulgada
285,7 mm (11,2 pulgadas)
304,1 mm (11,97 pulgadas)
Diagonal:
14.1 pulgada
15 pulgada
359.16 mm (14.1 pulgadas)
382.4 mm (15.1 pulgadas)
Resoluciones máximas 1024 x 768 a 16,8 millones de colores
Tiempo de respuesta (típico) 20 ms de subida (máximo)
30 ms de bajada (máximo)
Frecuencia de actualización 60 Hz
Ángulo de funcionamiento 0° (cerrado) a 180°
Ángulos de vista:
Horizontal ±40°
Vertical +10°/–30°
Separación entre píxeles 0,28 x 0,28 mm
Consumo eléctrico:
Panel con luz de fondo (normal) 5.2 W
Controles el brillo puede controlarse mediante
métodos abreviados del tecladoApéndice 83
Teclado
Número de teclas 85 (EE.UU. y Canadá); 86 (Europa);
90 (Japón)
Recorrido de tecla 2,7 mm ± 0,3 mm (0,11 pulgadas ± 0,016
pulgadas)
Espacio entre teclas 19,05 mm ± 0,3 mm (0,75 pulgadas ± 0,012
pulgadas)
Diseño QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji
Superficie táctil
Resolución de posición X/Y (modo de
tabla de gráficos) 240 cpp
Tamaño:
Anchura 64,88 mm (2,55 pulgadas) área activa
mediante sensor
Altura Rectángulo de 48,88 mm (1,92 pulgadas)
Batería (8 celdas)
Tipo Ión de litio "inteligente" de 8 celdas (65
WHr)
Dimensiones:
Profundidad 122,5 mm (4,8 pulgadas)
Altura 19,2 mm (0,76 pulgadas)
Anchura 147,5 mm (5,8 pulgadas)
Peso 0,470 kg (1,03 lb)
Voltaje 14,8 VDC
Capacidad 4300 mAH
Vida útil Puede reducirse significativamente bajo
condiciones de mucho consumo.
Consulte la página 29 para obtener más
información acerca de la duración de la
batería.
Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga/descarga
0
Intervalo de temperatura:
Carga/Descarga 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F)
En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)84 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Batería (12 celdas)
Tipo Ión de litio "inteligente" de 12 celdas (96
Whr)
Dimensiones:
Profundidad 122,5 mm (4,8 pulgadas)
Altura 19,2 mm (0,76 pulgadas)
Anchura 147,5 mm (5,8 pulgadas)
Peso 0,615 kg (1,35 lb)
Voltaje 14,8 VDC
Capacidad 6450 mAH
Vida útil Puede reducirse significativamente bajo
condiciones de mucho consumo.
Consulte la página 29 para obtener más
información acerca de la duración de la
batería.
Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga/descarga
0
Intervalo de temperatura:
Carga/Descarga 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F)
En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)
Adaptador de CA
Voltaje de entrada De 100 a 240 V CA
Intensidad de entrada (máxima) 1,5 A
Frecuencia de entrada De 50 a 60 Hz
Intensidad de salida 5,62 A (máximo en pulso de 4 segundos);
4,62 A (continuo)
Potencia de salida 90 W estándar
Voltaje nominal de salida 19.5 V de CC
Dimensiones:
Altura 34,2 mm (1,35 pulgadas)
Anchura 60,9 mm (2,4 pulgadas)
Profundidad 153,4 mm (6,04 pulgadas)
Peso (con cables) 0,46 kg (1,0 lb)Apéndice 85
Intervalo de temperatura:
En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F)
En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)
Aspectos físicos
Altura
Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 44,5–47,95 mm (1,75 pulgadas–1,89
pulgadas)
Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 46,5–48,3 mm (1,83 pulgadas–1,90
pulgadas)
Anchura
Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 329 mm (12,9 pulgadas)
Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 335 mm (13,1 pulgadas)
Profundidad
Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 275 mm (10,8 pulgadas)
Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 275 mm (10,8 pulgadas)
Peso:
Con unidad de CD, batería de 8
celdas y pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas
3,3 kg (7,17 lb)
Con unidad de CD, batería de 12
celdas y pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas
3,4 kg (7,57 lb)
Con unidad de CD, batería de 8
celdas y pantalla de 15 pulgadas
3,5 kg (7,66 lb)
Con unidad de CD, batería de 12
celdas y pantalla de 15 pulgadas
3,7 kg (8,07 lb)
Aspectos ambientales
Intervalo de temperatura:
En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F)
En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)
Humedad relativa (máxima):
En funcionamiento del 10% al 90% (sin condensación)
En almacenamiento del 5% al 95% (sin condensación)
Adaptador de CA (continuación)86 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema
Visión general
NOTA: El sistema operativo puede configurar automáticamente la mayoría de las opciones disponibles en el
programa de configuración del sistema, anulando así las opciones establecidas por el usuario a través del
programa de configuración del sistema. Para obtener más información acerca de la configuración de funciones
del sistema operativo, consulte el centro de ayuda y soporte técnico. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la
página 9.
Las pantallas de configuración del sistema muestran la información y las selecciones de la
configuración actual del equipo, como:
• Configuración del sistema
• Secuencia de arranque
• Configuración de arranque (inicialización) y ajustes de configuración del dispositivo de
acoplamiento
• Selecciones de configuración básica de dispositivos
• Ajustes de seguridad del sistema y de la contraseña de la unidad de disco duro
AVISO: A menos que sea un usuario experto en informática o que el servicio de asistencia técnica de
Dell le pida que lo haga, no cambie la configuración de este programa. Determinados cambios pueden
hacer que el equipo no funcione correctamente.
Vibración máxima:
En funcionamiento 0,6 GRMS
En almacenamiento 1.3 GRMS
Impacto máximo (medido con la
unidad de disco duro en posición de
reposo y pulso de media onda de 2
ms):
En funcionamiento 122 G
En almacenamiento 163 G
Altitud (máxima):
En funcionamiento De –15.2 a 3048 m (de –50 a 10,000 pies)
En almacenamiento De –15.2 a 10,668 m (de –50 a 35,000 pies)
Aspectos ambientales (continuación)Apéndice 87
Visualización de las pantallas de configuración del sistema
1 Encienda (o reinicie) el equipo.
2 Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. Si tarda demasiado y
aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio de Windows. A
continuación, apague el equipo (consulte la página 28) y vuelva a intentarlo.
Pantallas de configuración del sistema
NOTA: Para obtener información sobre un elemento específico de la pantalla de configuración del
sistema, resalte el elemento y consulte el área de Ayuda de la pantalla.
Se lista, en cada pantalla, a la izquierda las opciones de configuración del sistema. A la derecha de
cada opción se encuentra la selección o el valor de dicha opción. Puede cambiar las selecciones que
aparecen en blanco en la pantalla. Las opciones o valores que no se pueden cambiar (porque los
determina o calcula el equipo) aparecen con menos brillo.
En el cuadro que aparece en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla se muestra información de
ayuda sobre la opción resaltada actualmente; en el que aparece en la esquina inferior derecha se
muestra información acerca del equipo. Las funciones clave del programa de configuración del
sistema aparecen en la parte inferior de la pantalla.
Opciones más utilizadas
Ciertas opciones requieren que reinicie el equipo para que la nueva configuración sea efectiva.
Cambio de la secuencia de arranque
La secuencia de arranque indica al equipo dónde debe buscar para localizar el software necesario
para iniciar el sistema operativo. Puede controlar la secuencia de inicio y activar o desactivar los
dispositivos mediante la página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) del programa de configuración del
sistema.
NOTA: Para cambiar la secuencia de arranque para una sola vez, consulte página 88.
La página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) muestra una lista general de los dispositivos de inicio que
se pueden instalar en el equipo, que incluyen, entre otros, los siguientes:
• Unidad de discos flexibles
• Unidad de disco duro de compartimento para módulos
• Unidad de disco duro interna
• Unidad de CD/DVD/CD-RW
Durante la rutina de inicio, el equipo comienza por la parte superior de la lista y examina los
archivos de inicio del sistema operativo. Cuando el equipo encuentra los archivos, deja de buscar e
inicia el sistema operativo.
Para controlar los dispositivos de inicio, seleccione (resalte) un dispositivo presionando la tecla de
flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo y, a continuación, active o desactive el dispositivo o cambie su
orden en la lista.88 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
• Para activar o desactivar un dispositivo, resalte el elemento Los elementos activados aparecen
de color blanco y con un signo de exclamación a la izquierda; los elementos desactivados
aparecen de color azul o atenuados y sin triángulo.
• Pulse la tecla de flecha hacia la izquierda o hacia la derecha para cambiar la opción.
• Para cambiar la posición de un dispositivo en la lista, resáltelo y, a continuación, pulse o
(no se distingue entre mayúsculas y minúsculas) para desplazar hacia arriba o hacia
abajo el dispositivo resaltado.
Los cambios de la secuencia de inicio tendrán efecto tan pronto como los guarde y salga del
programa de configuración del sistema.
Arranque para una sola vez
Puede configurar una secuencia de inicio para una sola vez sin tener que entrar en el programa de
configuración del sistema. (También puede utilizar este procedimiento para iniciar desde los
Diagnósticos de Dell en la partición de la utilidad de diagnóstico de la unidad de disco duro).
1 Apague el equipo.
2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si
desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento.
3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico.
4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo DELL, oprima inmediatamente . Si
tarda demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio
de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo y vuelva a intentarlo.
5 Cuando aparezca el dispositivo de arranque, resalte el dispositivo desde el que desea arrancar
y pulse .
El equipo se iniciará desde el dispositivo seleccionado.
La próxima vez que reinicie el equipo, se restaurará el orden de inicio normal.
Optimización del rendimiento de la batería y el sistema
Información general sobre el rendimiento del sistema
El rendimiento del sistema puede verse reducido en determinadas condiciones para evitar que se
realice un apagado automático y se pierdan datos. Entre las condiciones en las que se reduce el
rendimiento se encuentran las siguientes:
CA L EN T AMI EN T O D E L P R O C E S A D O R — El rendimiento se reduce cuando la temperatura del sistema
sobrepasa los parámetros establecidos. Esta reducción del rendimiento ayuda a regular las temperaturas del
sistema y de la superficie, lo cual evita que el equipo se apague debido a la temperatura excesiva del
procesador.
REN DIMI EN T O D E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — El rendimiento se reduce cuando el equipo funciona con
alimentación de CA y el consumo de energía sobrepasa los parámetros establecidos del adaptador de CA.
Esta reducción del rendimiento garantiza que el sistema no intenta consumir más de lo que el adaptador Apéndice 89
de CA puede suministrar.
CA P A CI D A D D E LA B A T E RÍ A — El rendimiento se reduce cuando el equipo funciona con batería y el
consumo de energía sobrepasa la capacidad nominal de la batería, sobrepasa los niveles de descarga segura
permitidos o cuando la temperatura de la superficie de la batería sobrepasa los 60 °C.
Optimización del consumo de energía y del tiempo de carga de la batería
El adaptador de CA tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargar una batería totalmente descargada
con el equipo apagado. El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está
encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del
sistema. Si el equipo funciona a elevados niveles de actividad del sistema durante periodos
prolongados de tiempo y la batería no se carga, intente operar con el equipo en modo de
administración de energía mínima. Este modo puede mejorar el tiempo de carga y la duración de la
batería. Según los niveles de actividad del sistema, el rendimiento del sistema puede verse
reducido. Para establecer el modo de administración de energía mínima:
NOTA: También puede pulsar el icono de medidor de energía de la barra de tareas.
1 Pulse el botón Inicio→ Panel de control→ Rendimiento y mantenimiento→ Opciones de
energía.
2 Seleccione la ficha Combinaciones de energía.
3 En el menú desplegable Combinaciones de energía, pulse Modo de bajo consumo.
Para obtener más información sobre la administración de energía, consulte el archivo de Ayuda de
Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la .página 9
Velocidad variable del ventilador
El equipo utiliza una velocidad variable del ventilador a fin de evitar que el equipo se sobrecaliente.
El ventilador funciona continuamente y la velocidad de éste puede variar según el uso. El ruido de
los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores.
Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)
El soporte técnico asistido por personal técnico requiere la cooperación y la participación del
cliente en el proceso de solución de problemas y permite restaurar el sistema operativo, los
programas de software y los controladores de hardware a la configuración predeterminada original
de Dell, así como verificar el funcionamiento correcto del equipo y del hardware instalado por Dell.
Además de este soporte con intervención de un técnico, puede encontrar el mismo en línea en
support.dell.com. Puede que haya opciones de soporte técnico adicionales con cargo.
Dell proporciona asistencia técnica limitada para el equipo y el software y los periféricos instalados
por Dell
1
. La asistencia para software y periféricos de terceros corresponde al fabricante original e
incluye aquellos artículos comprados o instalados a través de Dell Software and Peripherals,
Readyware y Custom Factory Integration
2
.
1
Se ofrecen servicios de reparación conforme a los términos y condiciones de la garantía limitada y el servicio 90 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
de asistencia opcional contratado al comprar el equipo.
2
Todos los componentes estándar de Dell incluidos en un proyecto Custom Factory Integration (CFI) están
cubiertos por la garantía limitada estándar de Dell de su equipo. No obstante, Dell también amplía el programa de sustitución de piezas para incluir todos los componentes de hardware no estándar de terceros integrados a través de CFI durante todo el período de vigencia del contrato de asistencia para el equipo.
Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “instalados por Dell”
El software instalado por Dell incluye el sistema operativo y parte de los programas de software
instalados en el equipo durante el proceso de fabricación (Microsoft®
Office, Norton Antivirus,
etc.)
Los dispositivos periféricos instalados por Dell incluyen las tarjetas internas de expansión, los
compartimentos para módulos Dell y los accesorios de la tarjeta PC. Además, se incluyen todos los
monitores, teclados, ratones, altavoces, micrófonos para módems telefónicos, estaciones de
acoplamiento/replicadores de puerto, productos de red y todos los cables correspondientes de la
marca Dell.
Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “de terceros”
El software y los periféricos de terceros incluyen los periféricos, accesorios y programas de software
vendidos por Dell pero que no son de la marca Dell (impresoras, escáneres, cámaras, juegos, etc.).
El soporte para el software y los dispositivos periféricos de terceros lo proporciona el fabricante
original del producto.
Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell
Para ponerse en contacto con Dell de forma electrónica, puede acceder a los siguientes sitios web:
• www.dell.com
• support.dell.com (soporte técnico)
• premiersupport.dell.com (soporte técnico para clientes de instituciones educativas,
gubernamentales, sanitarias y de grandes y medianas empresas, incluidos los clientes Premier,
Platinum y Gold)
Para obtener las direcciones web de su país, busque la sección correspondiente en la siguiente tabla.
NOTA: Los números de teléfono gratuitos son para uso dentro del país para el que aparecen.
Cuando necesite ponerse en contacto con Dell, utilice las direcciones electrónicas, los números de
teléfono y los códigos que se incluyen en la siguiente tabla. Si necesita ayuda para averiguar los
códigos que debe utilizar, póngase en contacto con un operador de telefonía local o internacional.Apéndice 91
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos
Alemania (Langen)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 49
Código de ciudad: 6103
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
tech_support_central_europe@dell.com
Asistencia técnica 06103 766-7200
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
0180-5-224400
Atención al cliente para cuentas globales 06103 766-9570
Atención al cliente para cuentas preferentes 06103 766-9420
Atención al cliente para grandes cuentas 06103 766-9560
Atención al cliente para cuentas públicas 06103 766-9555
Centralita 06103 766-7000
Anguilla Asistencia general gratuito: 800-335-0031
Antigua y Barbuda Asistencia general 1-800-805-5924
Antillas Neerlandesas Asistencia general 001-800-882-1519
Argentina (Buenos Aires)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 54
Código de ciudad: 11
Sitio web: www.dell.com.ar
Correo electrónico: us_latin_services@dell.com
Correo electrónico para equipos portátiles y de
sobremesa:
la-techsupport@dell.com
Correco electrónico para servidores y productos de
almacenamiento EMC®
:
la_enterprise@dell.com
Atención al cliente gratuito: 0-800-444-0730
Asistencia técnica gratuito: 0-800-444-0733
Servicios de asistencia técnica gratuito: 0-800-444-0724
Ventas 0-810-444-3355
Aruba Asistencia general gratuito: 800-157892 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Australia (Sydney)
Código de acceso internacional:
0011
Código de país: 61
Código de ciudad: 2
Correo electrónico (Australia):
au_tech_support@dell.com
Correo electrónico (Nueva Zelanda):
nz_tech_support@dell.com
Particulares y pequeñas empresas 1-300-655-533
Gobierno y empresas gratuito: 1-800-633-559
División de cuentas preferentes (PAD) gratuito: 1-800-060-889
Atención al cliente gratuito: 1-800-819-339
Asistencia técnica (para equipos portátiles y de
escritorio)
gratuito: 1-300-655-533
Asistencia técnica (servidores y estaciones de
trabajo)
gratuito: 1-800-733-314
Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1-800-808-385
Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1-800-808-312
Fax gratuito: 1-800-818-341
Austria (Viena)
Código de acceso internacional:
900
Código de país: 43
Código de ciudad: 1
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
tech_support_central_europe@dell.com
Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 00
Fax para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 49
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
0820 240 530 14
Atención al cliente para cuentas preferentes y
corporaciones
0820 240 530 16
Asistencia técnica a particulares y pequeñas
empresas
0820 240 530 14
Asistencia técnica a cuentas preferentes y
corporaciones
0660 8779
Centralita 0820 240 530 00
Bahamas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6818
Barbados Asistencia general 1-800-534-3066
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 93
Bélgica (Bruselas)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 32
Código de ciudad: 2
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico para clientes francófonos:
support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 02 481 92 88
Fax de asistencia técnica 02 481 92 95
Atención al cliente 02 713 15 .65
Ventas corporativas 02 481 91 00
Fax 02 481 92 99
Centralita 02 481 91 00
Bermuda Asistencia general 1-800-342-0671
Bolivia Asistencia general gratuito: 800-10-0238
Brasil
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 55
Código de ciudad: 51
Sitio web: www.dell.com/br
Atención al cliente, asistencia técnica 0800 90 3355
Fax de asistencia técnica 51 481 5470
Fax de atención al cliente 51 481 5480
Ventas 0800 90 3390
Brunei
Código de país: 673
Asistencia técnica al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4966
Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949
Ventas de transacciones (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4955
Canadá (North York, Ontario)
Código de acceso internacional:
011
Estado de pedidos en línea: www.dell.ca/ostatus
AutoTech (asistencia técnica automatizada) gratuito: 1-800-247-9362
Atención al cliente (ventas a particulares y pequeñas
empresas)
gratuito: 1-800-847-4096
Atención al cliente para empresas medianas y
grandes, y del gobierno
gratuito: 1-800-326-9463
Asistencia técnica (ventas a particulares y pequeñas
empresas)
gratuito: 1-800-847-4096
Asistencia técnica para empresas medianas y
grandes, y del gobierno
gratuito: 1-800-387-5757
Ventas (particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-387-5752
Ventas (pequeñas y medianas empresas,
instituciones gubernamentales)
gratuito: 1-800-387-5755
Ventas de repuestos y por extensión de servicio 1866 440 3355
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos94 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Chile (Santiago)
Código de país: 56
Código de ciudad: 2
Atención al cliente, asistencia técnica y ventas gratuito: 1230-020-4823
China (Xiamén)
Código de país: 86
Código de ciudad: 592
Sitio web de asistencia técnica: support.dell.com.cn
Correo electrónico de asistencia técnica:
cn_support@dell.com
Correo electrónico de atención al cliente:
customer_cn@dell.com
Fax de asistencia técnica 592 818 1350
Asistencia técnica (Dell™ Dimension™ e
Inspiron™)
gratuito: 800 858 2969
Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ y Dell
Precision™)
gratuito: 800858 0950
Asistencia técnica (servidores y almacenamiento) gratuito: 800858 0960
Asistencia técnica (proyectores, PDA,
conmutadores, enrutadores y otros)
gratuito: 800 858 2920
Soporte técnico (impresoras) gratuito: 800 858 2311
Atención al cliente gratuito: 800 858 2060
Fax de atención al cliente 592 818 1308
Particulares y pequeñas empresas gratuito: 800 858 2222
División de cuentas preferentes gratuito: 800 858 2557
Grandes cuentas corporativas GPC gratuito: 800 858 2055
Grandes cuentas corporativas y cuentas principales gratuito: 800 858 2628
Grandes cuentas corporativas del norte gratuito: 800 858 2999
Grandes cuentas corporativas del norte y del ámbito
educativo
gratuito: 800 858 2955
Grandes cuentas corporativas del este gratuito: 800 858 2020
Grandes cuentas corporativas del este y del ámbito
educativo
gratuito: 800 858 2669
Grandes cuentas corporativas del grupo de cola gratuito: 800 858 2572
Grandes cuentas corporativas del sur gratuito: 800 858 2355
Grandes cuentas corporativas del oeste gratuito: 800 858 2811
Grandes cuentas corporativas de diferentes partes gratuito: 800 858 2621
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 95
Colombia Asistencia general 980-9-15-3978
Corea (Seúl)
Código de acceso internacional:
001
Código de país: 82
Código de ciudad: 2
Asistencia técnica gratuito: 080-200-3800
Ventas gratuito: 080-200-3600
Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949
Fax 2194-6202
Centralita 2194-6000
Asistencia técnica (electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 080-200-3801
Costa Rica Asistencia general 0800-012-0435
Dinamarca (Copenhague)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 45
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/dk/da/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 7023 0182
Atención al cliente (relacional) 7023 0184
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
3287 5505
Centralita (relacional) 3287 1200
Fax de la centralita (relacional) 3287 1201
Centralita (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 3287 5000
Fax de la centralita (particulares y pequeñas
empresas)
3287 5001
Dominica Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6821
Ecuador Asistencia general gratuito: 999-119
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos96 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
EE.UU. (Austin, Texas)
Código de acceso internacional:
011
Código de país: 1
Servicio automatizado para averiguar el estado de
un pedido
gratuito: 1-800-433-9014
AutoTech (para equipos portátiles y de escritorio) gratuito: 1-800-247-9362
Consumidor (Particular y oficina doméstica)
Asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-624-9896
Atención al cliente gratuito: 1-800-624-9897
Servicio y asistencia DellNet™ gratuito: 1-877-Dellnet
(1-877-335-5638)
Clientes del programa de compra para empleados
(EPP [Employee Purchase Program])
gratuito: 1-800-695-8133
Sitio web de servicios financieros: www.dellfinancialservices.com
Servicios financieros (alquiler y préstamos) gratuito: 1-877-577-3355
Servicios financieros (cuentas preferentes de Dell
[DPA, Dell Preferred Accounts])
gratuito: 1-800-283-2210
Empresa
Atención al cliente y asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-822-8965
Clientes del programa de compra para empleados
(EPP [Employee Purchase Program])
gratuito: 1-800-695-8133
Asistencia técnica para impresoras y proyectores gratuito: 1-877-459-7298
Público (gobierno, educación y sanidad)
Atención al cliente y asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-456-3355
Clientes del programa de compra para empleados
(EPP [Employee Purchase Program])
gratuito: 1-800-234-1490
Ventas de Dell gratuito: 1-800-289-3355
o gratuito: 1-800-879-3355
Dell Outlet Store (equipos Dell restaurados) gratuito: 1-888-798-7561
Venta de software y periféricos gratuito: 1-800-671-3355
Venta de piezas de repuesto gratuito: 1-800-357-3355
Venta de servicios y garantías ampliados gratuito: 1-800-247-4618
Fax gratuito: 1-800-727-8320
Servicios de Dell para personas sordas, con
discapacidades auditivas o del habla
gratuito: 1-877-DELLTTY
(1-877-335-5889)
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 97
El Salvador Asistencia general 01-899-753-0777
Eslovaquia (Praga)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 421
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: czech_dell@dell.com
Asistencia técnica 02 5441 5727
Atención al cliente 420 22537 2707
Fax 02 5441 8328
Fax de asistencia técnica 02 5441 8328
Centralita (ventas) 02 5441 7585
España (Madrid)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 34
Código de ciudad: 91
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/
Residencias y empresas pequeñas
Asistencia técnica 902 100 130
Atención al cliente 902 118 540
Ventas 902 118 541
Centralita 902 118 541
Fax 902 118 539
Corporativa
Asistencia técnica 902 100 130
Atención al cliente 902 115 236
Centralita 91 722 92 00
Fax 91 722 95 83
Finlandia (Helsinki)
Código de acceso internacional:
990
Código de país: 358
Código de ciudad: 9
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/fi/fi/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 09 253 313 60
Atención al cliente 09 253 313 38
Fax 09 253 313 99
Centralita 09 253 313 00
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos98 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Francia (París) (Montpellier)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 33
Códigos de ciudad: (1) (4)
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/
Residencias y empresas pequeñas
Asistencia técnica 0825 387 270
Atención al cliente 0825 823 833
Centralita 0825 004 700
Centralita (llamadas desde fuera de Francia) 04 99 75 40 00
Ventas 0825 004 700
Fax 0825 004 701
Fax (llamadas desde fuera de Francia) 0499754001
Corporativa
Asistencia técnica 0825 004 719
Atención al cliente 0825 338 339
Centralita 01 55 94 71 00
Ventas 01 55 94 71 00
Fax 01 55 94 71 01
Grecia
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 30
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 00800-44 14 95 18
Asistencia técnica Gold Service 00800-44 14 00 83
Centralita 2108129810
Centralita para Gold Service 2108129811
Ventas 2108129800
Fax 2108129812
Granada Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-540-3355
Guatemala Asistencia general 1-800-999-0136
Guayana Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-270-4609
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 99
Hong Kong
Código de acceso internacional:
001
Código de país: 852
Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com
Correo electrónico de asistencia técnica:
apsupport@dell.com
Asistencia técnica (Dimension e Inspiron) 2969 3188
Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell
Precision)
2969 3191
Asistencia técnica (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™,
PowerConnect™ y PowerVault™)
2969 3196
Atención al cliente 3416 0910
Cuentas corporativas grandes 3416 0907
Programas globales para clientes 3416 0908
División de la mediana empresa 3416 0912
División de la pequeña empresa y la particular 2969 3105
India Asistencia técnica 1600 33 8045
Ventas (grandes cuentas corporativas) 1600 33 8044
Ventas (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 1600 33 8046
Irlanda (Cherrywood)
Código de acceso internacional:
16
Código de país: 353
Código de ciudad: 1
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: dell_direct_support@dell.com
Asistencia técnica 1850 543 543
Asistencia técnica en el Reino Unido (sólo para
llamadas dentro del Reino Unido)
0870 908 0800
Atención al cliente (particulares) 01 204 4014
Atención al cliente para pequeñas empresas 01 204 4014
Atención al cliente en el Reino Unido (sólo para
llamadas dentro del Reino Unido)
0870 906 0010
Atención al cliente para corporaciones 1850 200 982
Atención al cliente en el Reino Unido (sólo para
llamadas dentro del Reino Unido)
0870 907 4499
Ventas para Irlanda 01 204 4444
Ventas en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro
del Reino Unido)
0870 907 4000
Fax/Fax de ventas 01 204 0103
Centralita 01 204 4444
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos100 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Islas Caimán Asistencia general 1-800-805-7541
Islas Turks y Caicos Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-540-3355
Islas Vírgenes Americanas Asistencia general 1-877-673-3355
Islas Vírgenes Británicas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6820
Italia (Milán)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 39
Código de ciudad: 02
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/
Residencias y empresas pequeñas
Asistencia técnica 02 577 826 90
Atención al cliente 02 696 821 14
Fax 02 696 821 13
Centralita 02 696 821 12
Corporativa
Asistencia técnica 02 577 826 90
Atención al cliente 02 577 825 55
Fax 02 575 035 30
Centralita 02 577 821
Jamaica Asistencia general (sólo para dentro de Jamaica) 1-800-682-3639
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 101
Japón (Kawasaki)
Código de acceso internacional:
001
Código de país: 81
Código de ciudad: 44
Sitio web: support.jp.dell.com
Asistencia técnica (servidores) gratuito: 0120-198-498
Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (servidores) 81-44-556-4162
Asistencia técnica (Dimension e Inspiron) gratuito: 0120-198-226
Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (Dimension e
Inspiron)
81-44-520-1435
Asistencia técnica (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y
Latitude)
gratuito: 0120-198-433
Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (Dell Precision,
OptiPlex y Latitude)
81-44-556-3894
Asistencia técnica (PDA, proyectores, impresoras,
enrutadores)
gratuito: 0120-981-690
Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (PDA,
proyectores, impresoras, enrutadores)
81-44-556-3468
Servicio Faxbox 044-556-3490
Servicio de pedidos automatizado las 24 horas del
día
044-556-3801
Atención al cliente 044-556-4240
División de ventas corporativas (hasta 400
empleados)
044-556-1465
Ventas de la división de cuentas preferentes (más de
400 empleados)
044-556-3433
Ventas de grandes cuentas corporativas (más de
3.500 empleados)
044-556-3430
Ventas al sector público (agencias del Estado,
instituciones educativas y médicas)
044-556-1469
Cuentas globales de Japón 044-556-3469
Usuario individual 044-556-1760
Centralita 044-556-4300
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos102 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Latinoamérica Asistencia técnica al cliente (Austin, Texas,
EE.UU.)
512 728-4093
Atención al cliente (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-3619
Fax (Asistencia técnica y Servicio al cliente)
(Austin, Texas, EE.UU.)
512 728-3883
Ventas (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4397
Fax de ventas (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4600
ó 512 728-3772
Luxemburgo
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 352
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: tech_be@dell.com
Asistencia técnica (Bruselas, Bélgica) 3420808075
Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas (Bruselas,
Bélgica)
gratuito: 080016884
Ventas a corporaciones (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 00
Atención al cliente (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 19
Fax (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 92 99
Centralita (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 00
Macao
Código de país: 853
Asistencia técnica gratuito: 0800 105
Servicio al cliente (Xiamen, China) 34 160 910
Ventas de transacción (Xiamen, China) 29115693
Malasia (Penang)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 60
Código de ciudad: 4
Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com
Asistencia técnica (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y
Latitude)
gratuito: 1 800 88 0193
Asistencia técnica (Dimension, Inspiron, y
electrónica y accesorios)
gratuito: 1 800 88 1306
Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect y PowerVault)
gratuito: 1 800 88 1386
Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 04 633 4949
Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1 800 888 202
Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1 800 888 213
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 103
México
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 52
Asistencia técnica al cliente 001-877-384-8979
ó 001-877-269-3383
Ventas 50-81-8800
ó 01-800-888-3355
Atención al cliente 001-877-384-8979
ó 001-877-269-3383
Principal 50-81-8800
ó 01-800-888-3355
Montserrat Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6822
Nicaragua Asistencia general 001-800-220-1006
Noruega (Lysaker)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 47
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/no/no/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 671 16882
Atención relacional al cliente 671 17575
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
23162298
Centralita 671 16800
Centralita de fax 671 16865
Nueva Zelanda
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 64
Correo electrónico (Nueva Zelanda):
nz_tech_support@dell.com
Correo electrónico (Australia):
au_tech_support@dell.com
Asistencia técnica (para equipos portátiles y de
sobremesa)
gratuito: 0800 446 255
Asistencia técnica (para servidores y estaciones de
trabajo)
gratuito:0800 443 563
Particulares y pequeñas empresas 0800 446 255
Gobierno y empresas 0800 444 617
Ventas 0800 441 567
Fax 0800 441 566
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos104 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Países bajos (Amsterdam)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 31
Código de ciudad: 20
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Asistencia técnica 020 674 45 00
Fax de asistencia técnica 020 674 47 66
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
020 674 42 00
Atención relacional al cliente 020 674 4325
Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 55 00
Ventas relacionales 020 674 50 00
Ventas por fax a particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 47 75
Fax para ventas relacionales 020 674 47 50
Centralita 020 674 50 00
Fax de la centralita 020 674 47 50
Países del sureste asiático y del
Pacífico
Asistencia técnica, atención al cliente y ventas
(Penang, Malasia)
604 633 4810
Panamá Asistencia general 001-800-507-0962
Perú Asistencia general 0800-50-669
Polonia (Varsovia)
Código de acceso internacional:
011
Código de país: 48
Código de ciudad: 22
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: pl_support_tech@dell.com
Teléfono de atención al cliente 57 95 700
Atención al cliente 57 95 999
Ventas 57 95 999
Fax de atención al cliente 57 95 806
Fax de la recepción 57 95 998
Centralita 57 95 999
Portugal
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 351
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 707200149
Atención al cliente 800 300413
Ventas 800 300 410, 800 300 411,
800 300 412 o 21 422 07 10
Fax 21 424 01 12
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 105
Puerto Rico Asistencia general 1-800-805-7545
Reino Unido (Bracknell)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 44
Código de ciudad: 1344
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Sitio web de atención al cliente: support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp
Correo electrónico: dell_direct_support@dell.com
Asistencia técnica (cuentas preferentes, corporativas
o PAD, para más de 1000 empleados)
0870 908 0500
Asistencia técnica (directa y general) 0870 908 0800
Atención al cliente para cuentas globales 01344 373 186
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
0870 906 0010
Atención al cliente para corporaciones 01344 373 185
Atención a clientes con cuentas preferentes
(500–5.000 empleados)
0870 906 0010
Atención al cliente para el gobierno central 01344 373 193
Atención al cliente para el gobierno local y la
educación
01344 373 199
Atención al cliente para temas de salud 01344 373 194
Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 907 4000
Ventas corporativas y al sector público 01344 860 456
Fax para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 907 4006
República checa (Praga)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 420
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: czech_dell@dell.com
Asistencia técnica 22537 2727
Atención al cliente 22537 2707
Fax 22537 2714
Fax de asistencia técnica 22537 2728
Centralita 22537 2711
República Dominicana Asistencia general 1-800-148-0530
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos106 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Singapur (Singapur)
Código de acceso internacional:
005
Código de país: 65
Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com
Asistencia técnica (Dimension, Inspiron, y
electrónica y accesorios)
gratuito: 1800 394 7430
Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell
Precision)
gratuito: 1800 394 7488
Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect y PowerVault)
gratuito: 1800 394 7478
Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949
Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1 800 394 7412
Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1 800 394 7419
St. Kitts y Nevis Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-441-4731
St. Lucia Asistencia general 1-800-882-1521
St. Vicente y las Granadinas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-270-4609
Sudáfrica (Johannesburgo)
Código de acceso internacional:
09/091
Código de país: 27
Código de ciudad: 11
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: dell_za_support@dell.com
Gold Queue 011 709 7713
Asistencia técnica 011 709 7710
Atención al cliente 011 709 7707
Ventas 011 709 7700
Fax 011 706 0495
Centralita 011 709 7700
Suecia (Upplands Vasby)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 46
Código de ciudad: 8
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/se/sv/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 08 590 05 199
Atención relacional al cliente 08 590 05 642
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
08 587 70 527
Soporte para el programa de compra para
empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program])
20 140 14 44
Fax de asistencia técnica 08 590 05 594
Ventas 08 590 05 185
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 107
Suiza (Ginebra)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 41
Código de ciudad: 22
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com
Correo electrónico para clientes HSB y corporativos
francófonos: support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica (particulares y pequeñas
empresas)
0844 811 411
Asistencia técnica (corporaciones) 0844 822 844
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
0848 802 202
Atención al cliente para corporaciones 0848 821 721
Fax 022 799 01 90
Centralita 022 799 01 01
Tailandia
Código de acceso internacional:
001
Código de país: 66
Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com
Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell
Precision)
gratuito: 1800 0060 07
Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect y PowerVault)
gratuito: 1800 0600 09
Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949
Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1800 006 009
Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1800 006 006
Taiwán
Código de acceso internacional:
002
Código de país: 886
Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com
Correo electrónico: ap_support@dell.com
Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude, Inspiron,
Dimension, y electrónica y accesorios)
gratuito: 00801 86 1011
Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect y PowerVault)
gratuito: 00801 60 1256
Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 00801 65 1228
Ventas corporativas gratuito: 00801 651 227
Trinidad y Tobago Asistencia general 1-800-805-8035
Uruguay Asistencia general gratuito: 000-413-598-2521
Venezuela Asistencia general 8001-3605
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos108 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mÍndice 109
Índice
A
acondicionadores de línea, 28
alimentación
apagar el equipo, 28
dispositivos de protección, 27
solucionar problemas, 31
altavoces
descripción, 14
vista del sistema, 14
apagar el equipo, 28
archivo de ayuda, 10
asistencia
cómo ponerse en contacto con
Dell, 90
B
batería
advertencia de bajo nivel de
carga de la batería, 30
almacenar, 31
cargar, 30
comprobar la carga, 30
descripción, 17, 21
extraer, 31
instalar, 31
medidor de energía, 30
rendimiento, 29
vista del sistema, 17, 21
bloqueos, 56
botón AccessDirect
descripción, 16
vista del sistema, 16
botón de alimentación
descripción, 16
vista del sistema, 16
botones de la superficie táctil
descripción, 15
vista del sistema, 15
C
caracteres
inesperados, 38
CD
copiar, 41
Centro de ayuda y soporte
técnico, 11
cerrar el equipo, 28
conector de red
descripción, 20
vista del sistema, 20
conector de vídeo
descripción, 20
vista del sistema, 20
conector del módem
descripción, 18
vista del sistema, 18
conector USB
descripción, 20
vista del sistema, 20
conectores de audio
descripción, 17
vista del sistema, 17
conexión a Internet
acerca de, 23
configurar, 23
opciones, 23
conflictos
resolver incompatibilidades de
software y hardware, 61
controladores
volver a instalar, 59
copiar CD y DVD
cómo, 41
consejos prácticos, 42
información general, 41
correo electrónico
solucionar problemas, 25
cubierta de la minitarjeta
PCI/módem
descripción, 21
vista del sistema, 21
cubierta del módulo de
memoria
descripción, 21
vista del sistema, 21110 Índice
110 Índice
D
Dell
ponerse en contacto, 90
sitio de asistencia, 11
Dell Diagnostics, 49
diagnósticos
Dell, 49
Diagrama de instalación, 9
documentación
archivo de ayuda, 10
Diagrama de instalación, 9
en línea, 11
Guía de información del
sistema, 9
DVD
copiar, 41
E
equipo
bloqueos, 56
especificaciones, 79
restaurar a estado anterior, 61
equipo dañado
probar, 58
equipo mojado, 57
escáner
solución de problemas, 54
especificaciones, 79
etiqueta de Microsoft
Windows, 10
etiqueta de servicio, 10
etiquetas
etiqueta de servicio, 10
Microsoft Windows, 10
G
garantía, 9
H
hardware
Dell Diagnostics, 49
I
impresora
cable, 26
conexión, 25
instalación, 25
USB, 26
indicadores de estado del
dispositivo
descripción, 15
indicadores de estado del
teclado
descripción, 14
vista del sistema, 14
instalar piezas
antes de empezar, 65
apagar el equipo, 65
herramientas
recomendadas, 65
instrucciones de seguridad, 9
M
memoria
extraer, 69
módem
agregar, 71
P
pantalla
descripción, 13
vista del sistema, 13
problemas
Dell Diagnostics, 49
restaurar a estado anterior, 61
programa Configuración del
sistema
opciones más utilizadas, 87
pantallas, 87
propósito, 86
visualizar, 87
programa de configuración
del sistema
pantallas, 87
programas
bloqueos, 56
no responde, 57
R
ranura para cable de seguridad
descripción, 18
vista del sistema, 18
ranura para tarjeta PC
descripción, 16
vista del sistema, 16Índice 111
red
solucionar problemas, 44
red inalámbrica
tipo, 44
rejillas de ventilación
descripción, 18-19, 21
vista del sistema, 18-19, 21
Restaurar sistema, 61
S
SAI, 28
seguro de la pantalla
descripción, 13
vista del sistema, 13
seguro de liberación de la
batería
descripción, 21
vista del sistema, 21
sistema operativo
volver a instalar, 61
volver a instalar Windows
XP, 61
sistemas de alimentación
ininterrumpida
Consulte SAI
sitio web Dell Premier
Support, 9, 11
software
solucionar problemas, 56
volver a instalar software, 59
solución de problemas
bloqueo de programas, 56
caracteres inesperados, 38
Centro de ayuda y soporte
técnico, 11
conflictos, 61
Dell Diagnostics, 49
equipo mojado, 57
equipo que se ha caído o
dañado, 58
escáner, 54
no puede guardar en un disco
flexible, 55
no se puede guardar en el
disquete, 55
problemas con el correo
electrónico, 25
problemas con la red, 44
problemas con la tarjeta
PC, 56
problemas de alimentación
eléctrica, 31
restaurar a estado anterior, 61
Solucionador de problemas de
hardware, 61
un programa no responde, 57
Solucionador de problemas de
hardware, 61
superficie táctil
descripción, 15
personalizar, 36
vista del sistema, 15
supresores de sobrevoltaje, 27
T
Tarjeta PC
solucionar problemas, 56
teclado
caracteres inesperados, 38
descripción, 14
métodos abreviados, 34
numérico, 33
solucionar problemas, 38
sustituir, 76
vista del sistema, 14
U
unidad de CD o DVD
descripción, 17
sustituir, 74
vista del sistema, 17
unidad de disco duro
descripción, 21
devolución a Dell, 68
sustituir, 66
vista del sistema, 21
unidad de disco flexible
solución de problemas, 55
solucionar problemas, 55
unidad de DVD
Consulte unidad de CD o DVD
unidades
Consulte unidad de disco duro
solucionar problemas, 55
V
vistas del sistema
anterior, 13
inferior, 19, 21
lateral derecha, 17
lateral izquierda, 16
posterior, 19
volver a inst, 61112 Índice
112 Índice
volver a instalar
controladores, 59
Windows XP, 61
W
Windows XP
Centro de ayuda y soporte
técnico, 11
Desinstalación del controlador
de dispositivo, 60
impresora, 27
Restaurar sistema, 61
Solucionador de problemas de
hardware, 61
volver a instalar, 61
Dell PowerEdge C8220
Hardware Owner’s
Manual
Regulatory Model: B05B
Regulatory Type: B05B001Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of
your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if
instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal
injury, or death.
____________________
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
© 2012 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc.
is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerEdge™ are trademarks of Dell Inc.
Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming
the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and
trade names other than its own.
Regulatory Model B05B
Regulatory Type: B05B001
2012 - 08 P/N XXXXX Rev. A00Contents 3
Contents
1 About Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Accessing System Features During Startup. . . . . . . 11
Front-Panel Features and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 12
NIC Indicator Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Power and System Board Indicator Codes . . . . . . . 16
BMC Heartbeat Indicator Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service Tag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
POST Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Collecting System Event Log for
Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
System Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Processor Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Memory Ecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
PCIe Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
IOH Core Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SB Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
POST Start Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
POST End Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
POST Error Code Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
BIOS Recovery Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
ME Fail Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
SEL Generator ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Contents
BMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Other Information You May Need . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2 Using the System Setup Program . . . . . 45
System Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
System Setup Options at Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using the System Setup Program Navigation
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
General Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Console Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enabling and Configuring Console
Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Serial Port Connection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
CPU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Memory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
SATA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
PCI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
USB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
View System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Contents 5
Boot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Exit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Command Line Interfaces for System Setup
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
IPMI Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Power Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3 Installing System Components . . . . . . . 125
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Recommended Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Inside the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Sled Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Sled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Removing a Sled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Installing a Sled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Removing a Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Installing a Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Removing a SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Installing a SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Sled Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Removing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Installing the Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Removing the Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Installing the Back Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 Contents
Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Removing the Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . 135
Installing the Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Removing a Heat Sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Installing a Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Removing a Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Installing a Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Memory Module Installation
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Supported DIMM Configuration . . . . . . . . . 144
Removing Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Installing Memory Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Expansion Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Removing the Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . 148
Installing the Expansion Card. . . . . . . . . . . 149
Expansion Card Riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Removing the Expansion Card Riser . . . . . . . 150
Installing the Expansion Card Riser. . . . . . . . 151
Mezzanine Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card . . . . . . 155
Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card . . . . . . 157Contents 7
SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Removing the SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Installing the SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removing the SD Card Reader Support
Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Installing the SD Card Reader Support
Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Internal Hard-Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier. . . . . . . . . . . 162
Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Removing a Hard-Drive From
the Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Installing a Hard-Drive Into
a Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Removing the Hard-Drive Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Installing the Hard-Drive Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Removing the Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . 167
Installing the Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . 168
Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Removing the Node Power Distribution
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Installing the Node Power Distribution
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Removing the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Installing the System Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . 172
System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Removing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Installing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758 Contents
4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Safety First—For You and Your System . . . . . . . . 177
Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Troubleshooting System Startup Failure. . . . . . . . 178
Troubleshooting External Connections . . . . . . . . 178
Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem. . . . . . . . . 178
Troubleshooting a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device. . . . . . . . . . 179
Troubleshooting a NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Troubleshooting a Wet Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Troubleshooting a Damaged Enclosure . . . . . . . . 182
Troubleshooting the Enclosure Fan Modules . . . . . 183
Troubleshooting the Power Sled . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Troubleshooting System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Troubleshooting a Hard-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Troubleshooting a Storage Controller . . . . . . . . . 188
Troubleshooting Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Troubleshooting Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Troubleshooting the System Board . . . . . . . . . . 191
Troubleshooting the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . 192
IRQ Assignment Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Contents 9
5 Jumpers and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 195
System Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
System Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Interposer Extender Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
SD Card Reader Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Node Power Distribution Board Connectors . . . . . . 201
6 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20510 ContentsAbout Your System 11
1
About Your System
Accessing System Features During Startup
The following keystrokes provide access to system features during startup.
The SAS/SATA card or PXE hotkey support are available only in the BIOS
boot mode. Hotkey function is not available in the Unified Extensible
Firmware Interface (UEFI) boot mode.
Keystroke Description
Enters the System Setup program. See "System Setup Menu" on
page 45.
Enters the BIOS Boot Manager or the Unified Extensible
Firmware Interface (UEFI) Boot Manager, depending on the
system's boot configuration. See "System Setup Options at Boot"
on page 46.
Starts Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) boot.
Enters the LSI 2008 SAS Mezzanine Card Configuration Utility.
For more information, see the SAS adapter documentation.
Enters the LSI 2008 SAS Mezzanine Card Configuration Utility.
For more information, see the documentation for your SAS RAID
card.
Enters the utility to configure onboard NIC settings for PXE boot.
For more information, see the documentation for your integrated
NIC.
Enters the onboard SAS and SATA controller’s configuration
utility. 12 About Your System
Front-Panel Features and Indicators
Figure 1-1. Front-Panel Features and Indicators
Item Indicator, Button, or
Connector
Icon Description
1 USB connectors Connects USB devices to the system. The
ports are USB 2.0 compliant.
2 Mezzanine card
expansion slot
Installs an I/O module mezzanine card.
3 Low profile PCIe
expansion slot
Installs a low profile PCI Express x16 card.
4 Release latch Press to release the sled from the
enclosure.
1
2
3
5 4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12About Your System 13
5 Power-on indicator/
power button
The power-on indicator lights when the
sled power is on.
The power-on indicator lights amber
when the system critical event occurs.
The power button turns the compute
sled on.
NOTE: When powering on the sled, the
video monitor can take from several
seconds to over 2 minutes to display an
image, depending on the amount of memory
installed in the system.
NOTE: On ACPI-compliant operating
systems, turning off the sled using the
power button causes the sled to perform a
graceful shutdown before power to the sled
is turned off.
NOTE: To force an ungraceful shutdown,
press and hold the power button for five
seconds.
6 VGA connector Connects a VGA display to the system.
7 Serial connector Connects a serial device to the system.
8 BMC management
port
Dedicated management port.
9 Ethernet connector 2 Embedded 10/100/1000 Mbit NIC
connector.
10 Ethernet connector 1 Embedded 10/100/1000 Mbit NIC
connector.
11 Sled identification
indicator
Lights blue to identify a particular system
and system board.
12 Handle Hold to pull the sled from the enclosure.
Item Indicator, Button, or
Connector
Icon Description
2
114 About Your System
NIC Indicator Codes
Figure 1-2. NIC Indicators
1 link indicator 2 activity indicator
Indicator Status Indicator Code
Link indicator Solid amber Linking at 100 Mbps port speed
Solid green Linking at 1 Gbps port speed (maximum)
Blinking green Linking at 1 Gbps port speed
Network activity is present
• Pre OS POST
• OS without driver
• OS with driver
Blinks at speed relative to packet density
Off Linking at 10 Mbps port speed
Activity
indicator
Solid green No activity
Blinking green Transmit or receive activity
Off IdleAbout Your System 15
Figure 1-3. NIC Indicators (BMC management port)
1 link indicator 2 activity indicator
Indicator Status Indicator Code
Link indicator Blinking amber Linking at 10 Mbps port speed
Blinking green Linking at 100 Mbps port speed (maximum)
Activity
indicator
Solid green No activity
Blinking green Transmit or receive activity
Off Idle16 About Your System
Power and System Board Indicator Codes
The indicators on the front of the sled display status codes during system
startup. For location of the indicators on the front panel, see Figure 1-1.
Table 1-1. Power and System Board Indicator Codes
Indicator Color Status Indicator Code
Power-on
indicator
Green Solid
Sled power is on (S0)
Amber Off
Green Solid BMC critical condition event in power off
mode (S4/S5)
Amber Blinking
Green Blinking BMC critical condition event in power on
mode (S0)
Amber Blinking
System
identification
indicator
Blue Solid The IPMI via Chassis Identify Command On
or ID Button Press ID On is generated.
Blue Blinking Only the IPMI via Chassis Identify Command
Blink On is generated.
Off The IPMI via Chassis Identify Command Off
or ID Button Press ID Off is generated.About Your System 17
BMC Heartbeat Indicator Codes
The system board includes a BMC heartbeat indicator (LED17) for
debugging the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC). The BMC
heartbeat indicator lights green when power is supplied to the sled and blinks
green when the BMC firmware is ready.
Figure 1-4. BMC Heartbeat Indicator
1 system board 2 BMC heartbeat indicator18 About Your System
Service Tag
The following illustration provides location of the Service Tag number on the
C8220 single-wide compute sled.
Figure 1-5. Service Tag Location for C8220 Single-Wide Compute SledAbout Your System 19
POST Error Code
Collecting System Event Log for Investigation
Whenever possible, the system BIOS will output the current boot progress
codes on the video screen. Progress codes are 32-bit quantities plus optional
data. The 32-bit numbers include class, subclass, and operation information.
The class and subclass fields point to the type of hardware that is being
initialized. The operation field represents the specific initialization activity.
Based on the data bit availability to display progress codes, a progress code
can be customized to fit the data width. The higher the data bit, the higher
the granularity of information that can be sent on the progress port. The
progress codes may be reported by the system BIOS or option ROMs.
The Response section in the following table may be divided into 3 types:
• Warning or Not an error – The message is displayed on the screen. An error
record is logged to the SEL. The system will continue booting with a
degraded state. The user may want to replace the erroneous unit.
• Pause – The message is displayed on the screen, an error is logged to the
SEL, and user input is required to continue. The user can take immediate
corrective action or choose to continue booting.
• Halt – The message is displayed on the screen, an error is logged to the
SEL, and the system cannot boot unless the error is resolved. The user
needs to replace the faulty part and restart the system.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions
0010h Local Console
Resource
Conflict
Pause Video device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting the
Video Subsystem" on
page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0011h Local Console
Controller Error
Pause Video device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting the
Video Subsystem" on
page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.20 About Your System
0012h Local Console
Output Error
Pause Video device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting the
Video Subsystem" on
page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0013h ISA IO
Controller Error
Pause ISA device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0014h ISA IO Resource
Conflict
Pause ISA device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0015h ISA IO
Controller Error
Pause ISA device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0016h ISA Floppy
Controller Error
Pause Floppy device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0017h ISA Floppy
Input Error
Pause Floppy device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0018h ISA Floppy
Output Error
Pause Floppy device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 21
0019h USB Read Error Pause USB port
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
001Ah USB Write Error Pause USB port
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
001Bh USB Interface
Error
Pause USB port
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
001Ch Mouse Interface
Error
Pause Mouse device
initialization
failed
To enable USB device, see
"USB Configuration" on
page 77.
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
001Eh Keyboard Not
Detected
Pause No keyboard
detected
To enable USB device, see
"USB Configuration" on
page 77.
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
001Fh Keyboard
Controller Error
Pause Keyboard
controller
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions22 About Your System
0020h Keyboard Stuck
Key Error
Pause Keyboard key
stuck
Disconnect and reconnect the
the keyboard to the compute
sled.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0021h Keyboard
Locked Error
Pause Keyboard
locked
Disconnect and reconnect the
the keyboard to the compute
sled.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0023h Memory
Correctable
Error
Pause Memory
correctable
error detected
Remove AC power to the
system for 10 seconds and
restart the system.
See "Troubleshooting System
Memory" on page 185.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0024h Memory
Uncorrectable
Error
Pause Memory
uncorrectable
error detected
See "Troubleshooting System
Memory" on page 185.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0025h Memory NonSpecific Error
Pause Memory nonspecific error
detected
See "Troubleshooting System
Memory" on page 185.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0026h MP Service Self
Test Error
Pause MP service self
test error
detected
See "Troubleshooting
Processors" on page 190.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 23
0027h PCI IO
Controller Error
Pause PCI device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0028h PCI IO Read
Error
Pause PCI device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0029h PCI IO Write
Error
Pause PCI device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
002Ah Serial Port Not
Detected
Pause Serial device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a Serial
I/O Device" on page 179.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
002Bh Serial Port
Controller Error
Pause Serial device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a Serial
I/O Device" on page 179.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
002Ch Serial Port Input
Error
Pause Serial device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a Serial
I/O Device" on page 179.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
002Dh Serial Port
Output Error
Pause Serial device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a Serial
I/O Device" on page 179.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions24 About Your System
002Eh Microcode
Update Error
Pause Processor
microcode
update error
Check microcode. A BIOS
update is required.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
002Fh No Microcode
Be Updated
Pause Processor
microcode load
failed
Ensure that your processors
match and conform to the
type described in the
processor technical
specifications outlined in
your system’s Getting Started
Guide.
8012h SATA 0 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 0 device
not found
Check if the SATA port 0 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 0.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8013h SATA 1 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 1 device
not found
Check if the SATA port1 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 1.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8014h SATA 2 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 2 device
not found
Check if the SATA port 2 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 2.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 25
8015h SATA 3 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 3 device
not found
Check if the SATA port 3 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 3.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8016h SATA 4 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 4 device
not found
Check if the SATA port 4 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 4.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8017h SATA 5 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 5 device
not found
Check if the SATA port 5 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 5.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8018h Sparing Mode is
not be
Configured!!,
Please check
Memory
Configuration!!
Pause Memory
Sparing Mode
Failed
Check if the memory
configuration is set to Sparing
mode. See "Memory
Configuration" on page 65.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8019h Mirror Mode is
not be
Configured!!,
Please check
Memory
Configuration!!
Pause Memory Mirror
Mode Failed
Check if the memory
configuration is set to Sparing
mode. See "Memory
Configuration" on page 65.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions26 About Your System
8020h Supervisor and
User Passwords
have been
cleared
Pause Supervisor and
User Passwords
have been
cleared
Reset password. See "System
Board Jumper Settings" on
page 195.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8020h CMOS Battery
Error
Pause No CMOS
battery
See "Troubleshooting the
System Battery" on page 192.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 27
System Event Log
Processor Error
Message: “Processor Sensor, IERR error, Processor 1”
Table 1-2. Processor Error
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 07h Processor
6 Sensor Number 04h Processor Sensor Number
(depends on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 =
Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 00h: IERR 01h: Thermal Trip
02h: FRB1/BIST Failure
03h: FRB2/Hang in POST Failure
04h: FBR3/Processer
Startup/Initialization Failure
0Ah: Processor Automatically
Throttled
9 Event Data2 XXh 00h: Processor1
01h: Processor2
02h: Processor3
04h: Processor4
10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not Present28 About Your System
Memory Ecc
Message: “Memory Sensor, Correctable ECC error, SBE warning threshold,
CPU1 DIMM_A1”
Table 1-3. Memory ECC
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 0Ch Memory
6 Sensor Number 60h Memory Sensor Number (depend
on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 00h: Correctable ECC Error
01h: Uncorrectable ECC Error
03h: Memory Scrub Failed
04h: Memory Device Disabled
08h: SpareAbout Your System 29
9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:4
0x00: SBE warning threshold
0x01: SBE critical threshold
0x0F: Unspecified
Bit 3:0
0x00: CPU1 DIMM A1-8 slots
(1~8)
0x01: CPU2 DIMM B1-8 slots
(9~16)
0x02: CPU3 DIMM C1-8 slots
(17~24)
0x03: CPU4 DIMM D1-8 slots
(25~32) And so on…
10 Event Data3 XXh DIMM bit-map locatation of bits
Bit 0=1: DIMM1 error event
Bit 1=1: DIMM2 error event …
Bit7=1: DIMM8 error event
Table 1-3. Memory ECC
Byte Field Value Description30 About Your System
PCIe Error
Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, PCI PERR, Device#, Function#,
Bus# ”
Table 1-4. PCIe Error
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 13h Critical Interrupt
6 Sensor Number 73h PCI Sensor ID (depend on
platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 04h: PCI PERR
05h: PCI SERR
07h: Bus Correctable Error
08h: Bus Uncorrectable Error
0Ah: Bus Fatal Error
9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:3Device Number
Bit 2:0Function Number
10 Event Data3 XXh Bit 7:0 Bus NumberAbout Your System 31
IOH Core Error
Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, Fatal Error, xxxx bit, QPI[0] Error ”
Table 1-5. IOH Core Error
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type C0h OEM Defined Interrupt
6 Sensor Number XXh 71h: QPI Sensor ID (depend on
platform)
72h: INT Sensor ID (depend on
platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 =
Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 07h: Core
08h: Non-Fatal
0Ah: Fatal
9 Event Data2 XXh Local Error Bit
10 Event Data3 XXh 00h: QPI[0] Error
01h: QPI[1] Error
02h: QPI[2] Error
03h: QPI[3] Error
04h: QPI[0] Protocol Error
05h: QPI[1] Protocol Error
06h: QPI[2] Protocol Error
07h: QPI[3] Protocol Error
23h: Miscellaneous Error
24h: IOH Core Error32 About Your System
SB Error
Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, Correctable, MCU Parity Error ”
Table 1-6. SB Error
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 13h Critical Interrupt
6 Sensor Number 77h SB Sensor ID (depend on
platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 07h: Correctable
08h: Uncorrectable
9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:5Reserved Local error bit
number (4 ~ 0)
00000b: HT Periodic CRC Error
00001b: HT Protocol Error
00010b: HT Flow-Control Buffer
Overflow
00011b: HT Response Error
00100b: HT Per-Packet CRC Error
00101b: HT Retry Counter Error
00111b: MCU Parity Error
10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 33
POST Start Event
Message: “System Event, POST starts with BIOS xx.xx.xx”
Table 1-7. POST Start Event
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 12h System Event
6 Sensor Number 81h POST Start (depend on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM System Boot Event
9 Event Data2 XXh 7~4: BIOS 1st Field Version
(0~15)
3~0: BIOS 2nd Field Version
higher 4bits (0~63)
10 Event Data3 XXh 7~6: BIOS 2nd Field Version lower
2bits (0~63)
5~0: BIOS 3rd Field Version
(0~63)34 About Your System
POST End Event
Table 1-8. POST End Event
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 12h System Event
6 Sensor Number 85h POST End (depend on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM System Boot Event
9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7 = Boot Type
0b: PC Compatible Boot
(Legacy) 1b: uEFI Boot
Bit 3:0 = Boot Device
0001b: Force PXE Boot
0010b: NIC PXE Boot
0011b: Hard Disk Boot
0100b: RAID HDD Boot
0101b: USB Storage Boot
0111b: CD/DVD ROM Boot
1000b: iSCSI Boot
1001b: uEFI Shell
1010b: ePSA Diagnostic Boot
10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 35
POST Error Code Event
Message: “System Firmware Progress, POST error code: UBLBh.”
Table 1-9. POST Error Code Event
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 0Fh System Firmware Progress
6 Sensor Number 86h POST Error (depend on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 00: System Firmware Error (POST
Error)
9 Event Data2 XXh Upper Byte
10 Event Data3 XXh Lower Byte36 About Your System
BIOS Recovery Event
Table 1-10. BIOS Recovery Event
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 12h System Event
6 Sensor Number 89h BIOS Recovery fail (depend on
platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 =
Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM BIOS recovery Event
9 Event Data2 XXh 01h:Start Recovery
02h:Recovery Success
03h:Load Image Fail
04h:Signed Fail
10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 37
ME Fail Event
SEL Generator ID
Table 1-11. BIOS Recovery Event
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 12h System Event
6 Sensor Number 8Ah ME fail (depend on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM ME fail Event
9 Event Data2 XXh 01h:ME fail
10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not Present
Table 1-12. SEL Generator ID
Generator ID
BIOS 0x0001
BMC 0x0020
ME 0x002C
Windows 2008 0x013738 About Your System
BMC
The following table includes an overview of the system sensors.
In the Offset column:
• SI = Sensor Initialization
• SC = Sensor Capabilities
• AM = Assertion Mask
• DM = Deassertion Mask
• RM = Reading Mask
• TM = Settable/Readable Threshold Mask
Table 1-13. Sensor Summary
Sensor
Number
Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset
01h SEL Fullness Event Logging
Disabled (10h)
Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 67h
SC: 40h
AM: 0035h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0035h
02h P1 Thermal Trip Processor (07h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0002h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0002h
03h P2 Thermal Trip Processor (07h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0002h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0002hAbout Your System 39
Table 1-14. Sensor Summary (continued)
Sensor
Number
Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset
04h CPU ERR2 Processor (07h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0001h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0001h
05h 12V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 59h
AM: 7A95h
DM: 7A95h
TM: 3F3Fh
06h 5V Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 59h
AM: 7A95h
DM: 7A95h
TM: 3F3Fh
07h 5V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 59h
AM: 7A95h
DM: 7A95h
TM: 3F3Fh
08h 3.3V Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 59h
AM: 7A95h
DM: 7A95h
TM: 3F3Fh40 About Your System
Table 1-15. Sensor Summary (continued)
Sensor
Number
Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset
09h 3.3V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 59h
AM: 7A95h
DM: 7A95h
TM: 3F3Fh
0Ah Battery low Battery (29h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 67h
SC: 40h
AM: 0001h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0001h
41h MEZZ1 TEMP Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838h
41h CPU1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838h
42h CPU2 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838hAbout Your System 41
Table 1-16. Sensor Summary (continued)
Sensor
Number
Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset
43h DIMM ZONE 1
Temp
Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838h
44h DIMM ZONE 1
Temp
Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838h
45h PCH Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838h
60h Memory Memory (0Ch) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0023h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0023h
A0h Watchdog Watchdog 2 (23h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 67h
SC: 40h
AM: 000Fh
DM: 0000h
RM: 000Fh42 About Your System
Table 1-17. Sensor Summary (continued)
Sensor
Number
Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset
A1h Soft Reset System Boot/
Restart Initiated
(1Dh)
Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0004h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0004h
A2h AC lost Power Unit (09h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0010h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0010h
A3h Power off Power Unit (09h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0002h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0002hAbout Your System 43
Other Information You May Need
WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with your
system. Warranty information may be included within this document or as a
separate document.
• The Getting Started Guide provides an overview of rack installation,
system features, setting up your system, and technical specifications.
• The PowerEdge C8000 Hardware Owner’s Manual for information about
the server enclosure features, troubleshooting, and component
replacement.. This document is available at support.dell.com/manuals.
• The Baseboard Management Controller Guide provides information about
installing and using the systems management utility. See Using the
Baseboard Management Controller Guide at support.dell.com/manuals.
NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the
updates first because they often supersede information in other documents. 44 About Your SystemUsing the System Setup Program 45
2
Using the System Setup Program
The System Setup program is the BIOS program that enables you to manage
your system hardware and specify BIOS-level options. From the System Setup
program, you can:
• Change the NVRAM settings after you add or remove hardware
• View the system hardware configuration
• Enable or disable integrated devices
• Set performance and power management thresholds
• Manage system security
System Setup Menu
The system employs the latest Insyde® BIOS, which is stored in Flash
memory. The Flash memory supports the Plug and Play specification, and
contains a System Setup program, the Power On Self Test (POST) routine,
and the PCI auto-configuration utility.
This system supports system BIOS shadowing which enables the BIOS to
execute from 64-bit onboard write-protected DRAM.
You can configure items such as:
• Hard-drives, diskette drives, and peripherals
• Password protection
• Power management features
The Setup utility should be executed under the following conditions:
• When changing the system configuration
• When a configuration error is detected by the system and you are
prompted to make changes to the Setup utility
• When redefining the communication ports to prevent any conflicts46 Using the System Setup Program
• When changing the password or making other changes to the security
setup
NOTE: Only items in brackets [ ] can be modified, Items that are not in brackets are
display only.
System Setup Options at Boot
You can initiate Setup by pressing the respective key during the POST:
Using the System Setup Program Navigation Keys
The following table lists the keys found in the legend bar with their
corresponding alternates and functions:
Keystroke Description
Enter the System Setup
Load customized defaults
Load optimal defaults in Setup menu
Save and exit Setup
Keys Function
F1 General Help
or Select Screen
or Select Item
Change Option/Field
Tab Select Field
Esc Exit
Enter Go to Sub Screen
Home Go to Top of Screen
End Go to Bottom of ScreenUsing the System Setup Program 47
General Help
In addition to the Item Specific Help window, the Setup Utility also provides
a General Help screen. This screen can be called up from any menu by
pressing . The General Help screen lists the legend keys with their
corresponding alternates and functions. To exit the help window, press
or .
Console Redirection
The console redirection allows a remote user to diagnose and fix problems on
a server, which has not successfully booted the operating system (OS). The
centerpiece of the console redirection is the BIOS Console. The BIOS
Console is a Flash ROM-resident utility that redirects input and output over
a serial or modem connection.
The BIOS supports console redirection to a serial port. If serial port based
headless server support is provided by the system, the system must provide
support for redirection of all BIOS driven console I/O to the serial port. The
driver for the serial console must be capable of supporting the functionality
documented in the ANSI Terminal Definition.
The console redirection behavior shows a change of string displays that
reduce the data transfer rate in the serial port and cause the absence or an
incomplete POST screen. If you see an abnormal POST screen after you
connect to the console, it is recommended to press to reflash
the screen.
Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection
Console redirection is configured through the System Setup program. There
are three options available to establish console redirection on the system.
• External serial port
• Internal serial connector as Serial Over LAN (SOL)
• BMC SOL48 Using the System Setup Program
Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via COM1
To activate console redirection via COM1, you must configure the following
settings:
1 Connect the serial cable to the serial port and host system. See Figure 1-1
for the location of the serial port on the sled.
2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System
Setup.
3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press .
4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press
.
5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• Remote Access: Enabled
• Serial port number: COM1
• Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1
• Flow Control: None
• Redirection After BIOS POST: Always
• Terminal Type: ANSI
See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the
last four options syncs with the host and client.
6 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again,
and a message prompts you to save the changes.
Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via COM2 SOL
To activate console redirection via COM2 SOL, you must configure the
following settings:
1 Connect the serial cable to the serial port and host system. See Figure 1-1
for the location of the serial port on the sled.
2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System
Setup.
3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press .
4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press
.Using the System Setup Program 49
5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• Remote Access: Enabled
• Serial port number: COM2 as SOL
• Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1
• Flow Control: None
• Redirection After BIOS POST: Always
• Terminal Type: ANSI
See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the
host and client are on the same network.
6 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again,
and a message prompts you to save the changes.
Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via BMC SOL
When using the BMC management port, you have two options for
connecting and managing servers: Dedicated-NIC mode and Shared-NIC
mode. The following procedures show the setup option of the BMC
management port through a Dedicated-NIC or Shared-NIC.
To activate console redirection via a dedicated BMC management port, you
must configure the following settings:
1 Connect the network cable to the BMC management port. See Figure 1-1
for the location of the BMC management port on the sled.
2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System
Setup.
3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press .
4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press
.
5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• Remote Access: Enabled
• Serial port number: COM2 as SOL
• Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1
• Flow Control: None
• Redirection After BIOS POST: Always50 Using the System Setup Program
• Terminal Type: ANSI
See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the
last four options syncs with the host and client.
6 In the Server screen, select BMC LAN Configuration and press .
7 In the BMC LAN Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• BMC LAN Port Configuration: Dedicated-NIC
• BMC NIC IP Source: DHCP or Static (Use DHCP if your network
servers are using automatic assignment of IP addresses)
• IP Address: 192.168.001.003
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000
• Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000
See "Set BMC LAN Configuration" on page 82 for details. Make sure the
host and client are on the same network
8 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again,
and a message prompts you to save the changes.
To activate console redirection via a shared BMC management port, you must
configure the following settings:
1 Connect the network cable to the Ethernet connector 1. See Figure 1-1 for
the location of the Ethernet connector 1 on the sled.
2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System
Setup.
3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press .
4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press
.
5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• Remote Access: Enabled
• Serial port number: COM2
• Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1
• Flow Control: None
• Redirection After BIOS POST: Always
• Terminal Type: ANSIUsing the System Setup Program 51
See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the
last four options syncs with the host and client.
6 In the Server screen, select BMC LAN Configuration and press .
7 In the BMC LAN Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• BMC LAN Port Configuration: Shared-NIC
• BMC NIC IP Source: DHCP or Static (Use DHCP if your network
servers are using automatic assignment of IP addresses)
• IP Address: 192.168.001.003
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000
• Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000
See "Set BMC LAN Configuration" on page 82 for details. Make sure the
host and client are on the same network
8 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again,
and a message prompts you to save the changes.
Serial Port Connection List
Signal Type Setup Option OS
Setting
Output
Remote
Access
Serial Port
Number
Serial Port
Address
Serial Console
Redirection
Enabled COM1 3F8h/2F8h ttyS0 Serial Port
Enabled COM1 2F8h/3F8h ttyS1
BMC Serial
Over LAN
Enabled COM2 as SOL 3F8h/2F8h ttyS1 Management
Port
Enabled COM2 as SOL 2F8h/3F8h ttyS052 Using the System Setup Program
Main Menu
The main menu displays information about your system boards and BIOS.
Main Screen
NOTE: Press to enter the BIOS debug mode and reset the BIOS to default
settings.
NOTE: The options for the System Setup program change based on the system
configuration.
NOTE: The System Setup program defaults are listed under their respective
options in the following sections, where applicable. Using the System Setup Program 53
System Settings
Option Description
System Date Scroll to this item to adjust the date. Use ,
or to select a field. Use [+] or
[-] to configure system date.
System Time Scroll to this item to adjust the time. Use ,
or to select a field. Use [+] or
[-] to configure system time.
Product Name Displays the system product name.
BIOS Version Displays the BIOS version.
NOTE: Check this version number when updating BIOS from
the manufacturer.
BIOS Build Date Displays the date the BIOS was created.
Service Tag Displays the system service tag number. The service tag
field should match what is physically on the service tag of
the system.
Asset Tag Displays the system asset tag number.
MRC Version Displays the Memory Reference Code (MRC) firmware
version.
ME Version Displays the Manageability Engine (ME) firmware version.
BMC Version Displays the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC)
firmware version.
ePPID Displays the information from Electronic Piece Part
Identification (ePPID) label.
NIC1 MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the
NIC1 connector.
NIC2 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC2 connector.
BMC NIC MAC
Address
Displays the MAC address of the BMC management port.
Processor Type Displays the processor type.
Processor Speed Displays the maximum speed of the processor.
Processor Core Displays the processor core.
System Memory Size Displays total memory size installed on the system board.54 Using the System Setup Program
System Memory Speed Displays the maximum speed of your system memory.
System Memory Voltage Displays the maximum voltage of your system memory.
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 55
Advanced Menu
The advanced menu displays a table of items that defines advanced
information about your system. Scroll to this item and press to view
the following screen.
CAUTION: Making incorrect settings to items on these pages may cause the
system to malfunction. Unless you have experience adjusting these items, it is
recommended that you leave these settings at the default values. If making
settings to items on these pages causes your system to malfunction or prevents the
system from booting, open BIOS and choose "Load Optimal Defaults" in the Exit
menu to boot up normally.56 Using the System Setup Program
Power Management
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Power Management
Option Description
Power Management
(OS Control default)
Select a system power management mode.
• Maximum Performance: Sets the system power
management to maximum performance.
• OS Control: Allows the operating system to control the
power management.
• Node Manager: Enables Node Manager to moderate
power consumption and performance of the processors in
the compute sled. Node manager delivers power reporting
and power capping functionality for individual compute
sleds. Using the System Setup Program 57
CPU Power Capping
(P-State 0 default)
Select a processor performance state (P-state). Options are
[P-State 0], [P-State 1], [P-State 2], [P-State 3] and
[P-state 4].
NOTE: This option is enabled when Power Management is
set to OS Control mode.
Chassis Power
Management
Press to set the different power management
options that must be provided to support throttling and
capping.
Energy Efficient Policy
(Max Performance
default)
Select a power policy option.
• Max Performance: Sets the processors at the highest
performance state at all times.
• Balanced: Offers full performance and saves power by
reducing system power consumption during periods of
inactivity.
• Low Power: Use different processor power saving modes
(C-states) to reduce system power consumption.
NOTE: This option works when the OS does not support
power management control of processor.
Option Description58 Using the System Setup Program
Chassis Power Management
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Chassis Power Management
Option Description
Chassis PSU
Configuration
Press to configure the chassis power supply.
This option provides management and monitoring of the
PSUs and allows you to set the minimum PSU
requirements for the server.
Power Capping Press to set PSU power and server loading
limited in selected watts.
Emergency Throttling Press to set sled level policy when emergency
throttling event is triggered. Using the System Setup Program 59
Chassis PSU Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Chassis PSU Configuration
Option Description
Required Power Supplies
(1 default)
Select the number of power supplies to provide load-shared
power to run the sleds in the enclosure. Options are [1],
[2], [3], and [4].
Redundant Power
Supplies (1 default)
Select the number of power supplies to provide power
redundancy to the enclosure. Options are [0], [1], and [2].60 Using the System Setup Program
Power Capping
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Power Capping
Option Description
Chassis Level Capping
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables chassis level capping.
Sled Power Capping
(0 default)
Specify the maximum amount of power to be consumed by
the sled. Settings range from 0 or 100 to 1000 W. Using the System Setup Program 61
Emergency Throttling
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Emergency Throttling
Option Description
Sled Level Policy
(Chassis Level default)
Select a sled level policy when an emergency throttle event
is triggered.
• Chassis Level: Overrides the chassis level policy for a
specific server.
• Throttling: Allows compute sled throttling when an
emergency throttle event is triggered.
• Power Off: Turns off the compute sled when an
emergency throttle event is triggered.
• Do Nothing: The compute sled will do nothing when an
emergency throttle event is triggered. 62 Using the System Setup Program
CPU Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
CPU Configuration
Chassis Level Policy
(Throttling default)
Select a chassis level policy when an emergency throttle
event is triggered. This option can be configured when the
Sled Level Policy is set as Chassis Level.
• Throttling: Allows chassis sled throttling when an
emergency throttle event is triggered.
• Power Off: The server power turns off when an emergency
throttle event is triggered.
Option Description
Active Processor Cores
(All Cores default)
Allows you to control the number of enabled core in each
processor. Options are [1], [2], [4], and [All Cores].
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 63
Frequency Ratio
(Auto default)
Sets the frequency multipliers as maximum level.
Max CPUID Value
Limit
(Disabled default)
Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in
EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with
EAX=0.
When enabled, this setting limits CPUID function to 3.
When disabled, this setting disables the 3 or less.
Virtualization
Technology
(Disabled default)
Allows you to set the Virtualization Technology in
applicable CPUs.
Enabled (applicable CPUs)/Disabled (unusable in any
OS).
QPI Frequency
(Auto default)
Select the link speed. Options are [6.4GTs], [7.2GTs], and
[8.0GTs].
Turbo Mode
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables processor Turbo mode (Requires
enabling the EMTTM.).
C-States
(Enabled default)
When enabled, the processor(s) can operate in all available
power C states.
When disabled, the user power C states are not available
for the processor.
C1E State
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the Enhanced Halt (C1E) state.
NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable
this option, pop up message appears on the screen and
warning appears in the System Setup Help.
C6 State
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the processor C6 state.
NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable
this option, pop up message appears on the screen and
warning appears in the System Setup Help.
C7 State
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the processor C7 state.
NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable
this option, pop up message appears on the screen and
warning appears in the System Setup Help.
XD Bit Capability
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the processor’s Execute Disable (XD)
Memory Protection Technology feature.
Option Description64 Using the System Setup Program
Prefetch Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Prefetch Configuration
Direct Cache Access
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the direct cache access.
Hyper-Threading
Technology
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the Hyper-Threading technology.
Prefetch Configuration Press to configure the prefetch settings.
Option Description
Adjacent Cache Line
Prefetch
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables system optimization for sequential
memory access.
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 65
Memory Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Memory Configuration
Hardware Prefetcher
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the speculative unit within the
processor(s).
DCU Streamer
Prefetcher
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables Data Cache Unit (DCU) streamer
prefetcher.
DCU IP Prefetcher
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables DCU IP Prefetcher.
Option Description
Memory Frequency
(Auto default)
Select an operating memory frequency. Options are
[Auto], [800], [1066], [1333], and [1600].
Option Description66 Using the System Setup Program
Memory Turbo Mode
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the memory turbo mode.
Memory Throttling Mode
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the memory to run in closed-loop
thermal throttling mode.
Memory Operating Mode
(Optimizer Mode default)
Select the type of memory operation if a valid memory
configuration is installed.
• Optimizer Mode: The two memory controllers run in
parallel 64-bit mode for improved memory
performance.
• Spare Mode: Enables memory sparing
• Mirror Mode: Enables memory mirroring
• Advanced ECC Mode: Controllers are joined in
128-bit mode running multi-bit advanced ECC.
Demand Scrubbing
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables DRAM scrubbing.
DRAM scrubbing is the ability to write corrected data
back to the memory once a correctable error is detected
on read transaction.
Patrol Scrubbing
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables patrol scrubbing.
Patrol scrubbing proactively searches the system
memory, repairing correctable errors.
Memory Operating Voltage
(Auto default)
If set to Auto, the system sets the voltage to an optimal
value based on the capacity of the installed memory
modules. You can also set the voltage of the memory
module to a higher value (1.5 V) provided that the
modules support multiple voltages. Options are [Auto],
[1.5 volts], and [1.35 volts].
NOTE: BIOS will auto restrict selection if DIMM is not
supporting low voltage.
NUMA Support
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables Non-Uniform Memory Access
(NUMA) support to improve processor performance.
NOTE: This option is available for NUMA systems that
allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes.
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 67
SATA Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.68 Using the System Setup Program
SATA Configuration
Option Description
Embedded SATA
Controller
(AHCI default)
Select an operation mode for the onboard SATA controller.
• Off: Disables the SATA controller. This token applies to
the first onboard SATA controller.
• IDE: Enables the SATA controller to run in IDE mode.
Sets the device class code as IDE and uses PCI IRQ
(referred as Native mode). This token applies to the first
onboard SATA controller.
• AHCI: Enables the SATA controller to run in AHCI
mode. Sets the device class code as SATA and sets up the
AHCI BARs and registers. This token applies to the first
onboard SATA controller.
• RAID: Enables the SATA controller to run in RAID mode.
Sets the device class code as RAID and executes the RAID
Option ROM. This token applies to the first onboard
SATA controller. This provides access to the RAID setup
utility during system bootup.
Embedded SATA Link
Rate (Auto default)
Select a SATA link speed.
• Auto: Sets the SATA link speed at maximum 6.0 Gbps.
• 1.5 Gbps: Sets the SATA link speed to 1.5 Gbps. For
power consumption.
• 3.0 Gbps: Sets the SATA link speed to 3.0 Gbps.
SATA Port 0
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 1st Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 1st Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).
SATA Port 1
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 2nd Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 2nd Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).Using the System Setup Program 69
SATA Port 2
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 3rd Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 3rd Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).
SATA Port 3
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 4th Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 4th Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).
SATA Port 4
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 5th Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).
SATA Port 5
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 6th Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).
Power Saving Features
(Auto default)
Enables or disables the feature that allows SATA harddrives to initiate link power management transitions.
HDD Security Erase
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the hard-drive security freeze lock
feature.
Option Description70 Using the System Setup Program
PCI Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
PCI Configuration
Option Description
Embedded Network Devices Press to configure available network drives.
NIC Enumeration
(Onboard default)
Select a LAN boot ROM option.
• Onboard: Uses the PXE boot on NICs to boot the
system.
• Add-in: Use the PXE boot on add-in network adapters
to boot the system.
Active State Power
Management Configuration
Press to configure power management for
PCI Express devices. Using the System Setup Program 71
PCI Slot Configuration Press to configure PCI Express devices.
NOTE: When you install a MIC GPGPU card in the C8220X
sled, BIOS automatically enables the PCI memory 64-bit
decode option.
PCIe Generation
(Gen3 default)
Select a PCI signaling rate.
• Gen1: 2.5 GT/s
• Gen2: 5 GT/s
• Gen3: 8 GT/s
VT for Direct I/O
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables Intel hardware virtualization
support.
SR-IOV Global Enable
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables BIOS configuration of Single Root
I/O Virtualization (SR-IOV) devices.
I/OAT DMA Engine
(Disabled default)
If set to Enabled, the I/O Acceleration Technology
(I/OAT) feature is enabled for network controllers that
support this technology.
Maximum Payload Size
(Auto default)
Sets the maximum payload size of the PCI Express
controller. Options are Auto, 128 bytes, and 256 bytes.
Embedded Video Controller
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the onboard video controller.
NOTE: This option should always be set to Enabled. The
remote KVM function cannot function if set to disabled.
Video Enumeration
(Onboard default)
Select video controller enumeration type.
• Onboard - The onboard video controller is used for
boot-time messages.
• Add-in - The first add-in video controller is used for
boot-time messages. Depending on the BIOS search
order and system slot layout.
WHEA Support
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the Windows Hardware Error
Architecture (WHEA) feature.
Reboot on WOL (ROW)
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables reboot on wake-on-LAN feature.
Reboot On WOL targets network controllers when the
network controller receives a magic packet. This option
displays when the network chip supports Reboot on
WOL feature.
Option Description72 Using the System Setup Program
Embedded Network Devices
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.Using the System Setup Program 73
Embedded Network Devices
iSCSI Remote Boot
Option Description
Embedded NIC1
(Enabled with PXE
default)
Enables or disables the onboard NIC1 controller.
• Enabled with PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s
primary embedded NIC (full function), including its PXE
boot-ROM.
• Enabled without PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s
primary embedded NIC only. The NIC associated PXE or
RPL boot-ROM are disabled in this option.
• iSCSI Remote Boot: Allows you to configure the iSCSI
target and initiator variables to support iSCSI Remote
Boot. Changes take effect after the system reboots.
• Disabled: Allows you to disable the system’s primary
embedded NIC.
Embedded NIC2
(Enabled without PXE
default)
Enables or disables the onboard NIC2 controller.
• Enabled with PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s
secondary embedded NIC (full function), including its
PXE boot-ROM.
• Enabled without PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s
secondary embedded NIC only. The NIC associated PXE
or RPL boot-ROM are disabled in this option.
• iSCSI Remote Boot: Allows you to configure the iSCSI
target and initiator variables to support iSCSI Remote
Boot. Changes take effect after the system reboots.
• Disabled: Allows you to disable the system’s primary
embedded NIC.
Option Description
iSCSI Initiator Name Displays the worldwide unique name of the initiator. Only
iqn format is accepted.
Enable DHCP
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the DHCP network settings.
Initiator IP Address Sets the initiator’s static IP address.
Initiator Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the static IP address.74 Using the System Setup Program
Gateway Sets the IP gateway for the static IP address.
Target IP Sets the name for the target IP.
Target IP Address Sets the target’s IP address.
Target Port Sets the target port.
Boot LUN Sets the hexadecimal representation of LU number.
CHAP Type
(None default)
Select CHAP type. Options are [None], [One Way
CHAP], and [Mutual CHAP].
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 75
Active State Power Management Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Active State Power Management Configuration
Option Description
PCIe Slot ASPM
(Disabled default)
Select an active state power management (ASPM)
protocol for the PCI Express slot. Options are
[Disabled], [L0], [L1], [L0 & L1], [L0s Downstream],
and [L0s Downstream + L1].
Onboard LAN ASPM
(Disabled default)
Select an ASPM protocol for the onboard network
controller. Options are [Disabled], [L0], [L1], [L0 &
L1], [L0s Downstream], and [L0s Downstream + L1].
Mezzanine Slot ASPM
(Disabled default)
Select an ASPM protocol for the mezzanine slot.
NB-SB Link ASPM
(Disabled default)
Select an ASPM protocol for the northbridge and
southbridge chipsets. 76 Using the System Setup Program
PCI Slot Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
PCI Slot Configuration
Option Description
PCIe Slot1
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the PCIe slot1. Options are
[Disabled], [Enabled], [Enabled without OPROM].
NOTE: When you install a MIC GPGPU card in the C8220X
sled, BIOS automatically enables the PCI memory 64-bit
decode option. You can set the GPGPU information using
IPMI commands. See Table 2-18 for more information.Using the System Setup Program 77
USB Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
USB Configuration
Option Description
Embedded USB
Controller
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the onboard USB controller at system
startup.
USB Port with BMC
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables internal USB port with BMC support.
External USB Port1
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the external USB port1.
External USB Port2
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the external USB port2.
Internal USB Connector
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the internal USB port. 78 Using the System Setup Program
Security Menu
The security menu enables you to set the security parameters. Scroll to this
item and press to view the following screen.
Security Settings
Option Description
Supervisor Password Indicates whether a supervisor password has been set. If
the password has been installed, Installed displays. If not,
Not Installed displays.
User Password Indicates whether a supervisor password has been set. If
the password has been installed, Installed displays. If not,
Not Installed displays.Using the System Setup Program 79
Change Supervisor You can install a Supervisor password, and if you install a
supervisor password, you can then install a user password.
A user password does not provide access to many of the
features in the Setup utility. Note, the Change User
Password option only appears after a Supervisor password
has been set.
Select this option and press to access the sub
menu, a dialog box appears which lets you enter a
password. You can enter no more than six letters or
numbers. Press after you have typed in the
password. A second dialog box asks you to retype the
password for confirmation. Press after you have
retyped it correctly. If the password confirmation is
incorrect, an error message appears. The password is stored
in NVRAM after ezPORT completes. The password is
required at boot time, or when the user enters the Setup
utility.
Change User Password Installs or changes the User password.
Option Description80 Using the System Setup Program
Server Menu
The server menu enables you to configure compute sled parameters. Scroll to
this item and press to view the following screen.
Server Settings
Option Description
Status of BMC Displays BMC status.
IPMI Specification Version Displays the Intelligent Platform Management
Interface (IPMI) firmware version number.
BMC Firmware Version Displays the BMC firmware version number.
NIC1 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC1 connector.
NIC2 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC2 connector.Using the System Setup Program 81
ACPI SPMI Table
(Enabled default)
When enabled, BIOS enables Advanced Configuration
and Power Interface (ACPI) Service Processor
Management Interface (SPMI) table for IPMI driver
installation.
When disabled, BIOS disables the ACPI SPMI table
for BMC ROM update.
Set BMC LAN
Configuration
Press to set the BMC network.
Remote Access
Configuration
Press to configure serial port settings related
to console redirection.
Restore on AC Power Loss
(Power On default)
Select the power state when the AC power is back.
• Power Off: System remains off until the power button
is pressed.
• Last State: System reverts to the last power state
before power loss.
• Power On: System switches back on after the AC
power loss.
Power Staggering AC
Recovery
(Immediate default)
Set the time period for the system to turn back on from
an AC power loss once power is resumed.
• Immediate: Power On (No Delay)
• Random: Auto
• User Defined: User defined delay time.
Power Button
(Enabled default)
When enabled, the power button can turn the system's
power off.
When disabled, the power button can only turn on
system power.
View System Event Log Press to view the BMC system event log.
Event Logging
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables BIOS to log system events.
NMI on Error
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables BIOS to generate an Non-masked
Interrupt (NMI) when an uncorrectable PCI Express
error occurs.
Option Description82 Using the System Setup Program
Set BMC LAN Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Set BMC LAN Configuration
Option Description
Channel Number Displays the channel number used for BMC LAN.
Channel Number Status Displays the BMC channel number status.
BMC LAN Port
Configuration
(Shared-NIC default)
Set the BMC management port to dedicated or shared
NIC port. Options are [Dedicated NIC] and [Shared NIC].
BMC NIC IP Source
(DHCP default)
Set BMC to obtain its IP address using DHCP or establish
a static IP address.
IP Address Sets the static IP address.
Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the static IP address. Using the System Setup Program 83
Remote Access Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Remote Access Configuration
Gateway Address Sets the IP gateway for the static IP address.
IPv6 Mode
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the IPv6 internet protocol support.
If set to enabled, configure the IPv6 prefix, IP and gateway
addresses.
Option Description
Remote Access
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables serial console redirection.
Option Description84 Using the System Setup Program
Serial port number
(COM1 default)
Select a serial port for console redirection.
• COM1: Enables console redirection via COM1. See
token D7h.
• COM2 as SOL: Enables console redirection via
COM2.
Serial Port Address
(3F8h/2F8h default)
Specifies the base I/O port address of the serial port.
• 3F8h/2F8h: Sets the front serial port address as 0x3F8
and internal serial port address as 0x2F8.
• COM2 as SOL: Sets the front serial port address as
0x2F8 and internal serial port address as 0x3F8.
Serial Port Mode
(115200 8,n,1 as default)
Select a baud rate for the serial port. Options are
[115200 8,n,1], [57600 8,n,1], [38400 8,n,1],
[192008,n,1], and [9600 8,n,1].
Flow Control
(None default)
Select a flow control for console redirection. Options
are [None] and [Software].
Redirection After BIOS
POST (Always default)
If set to Always, the console redirection is always active.
When Disabled, console redirection is turned off after
POST.
Terminal Type
(ANSI default)
Select a target terminal type for console redirection.
Options are [ANSI], [VT100], and [VT-UTF8].
VT-UTF8 Combo Key
Support (Enabled default)
Enables or disables the VT-UTF8 Combination Key
support for ANSI/VT100 terminals.
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 85
View System Log
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
View System Log
Option Description
View BMC SEL Event
Log
View all events in the BMC system event log.
Clear BMC SEL Event
Log
Deletes all records in the BMC system event log. 86 Using the System Setup Program
Boot Menu
The boot menu enables you to set POST boot parameters. Scroll to this item
and press to view the following screen.
Boot Settings
Option Description
Quiet Boot
(Enabled default)
Enable this item to display the splash or summary
screen, rather than the detail of the POST flow. When
disabled, normal POST messages appear.
Pause on Errors
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables BIOS to prompt you to press
or keys on errors during POST.
Force PXE Boot only
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables PXE to be the only boot device.Using the System Setup Program 87
Boot Mode (BIOS default) Select a system boot mode.
• BIOS: The standard BIOS-level boot interface
• UEFI: An enhanced 64-bit boot interface based on
Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
specifications that overlays the system BIOS.
Boot Type Order Press to set the preferred boot sequence from
the available devices.
Legacy Boot Device Press to set the preferred boot sequence from
the available legacy USB devices.
Option Description88 Using the System Setup Program
Exit Menu
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Exit Options
Option Description
Save Changes and Exit Highlight this item and press to save any
changes that you have made in the Setup utility and
exit the Setup utility. When the Save Changes and Exit
dialog box appears, press to save the changes and
exit, or press to return to the setup main menu.
Discard Changes and Exit Highlight this item and press to discard any
changes that you have made in the Setup utility and
exit the Setup utility. When the Discard Changes and
Exit dialog box appears, press to discard changes
and exit, or press to return to the setup main
menu.Using the System Setup Program 89
Save Changes Select this item and press to save changes
you have made without leaving the setup utility.
Discard Changes Select this item and press to discard any
changes you have made without leaving the setup
utility.
Load Optimal Defaults If you highlight this item and press , a dialog
box asks if you want to install optimal settings for all
the items in the Setup utility. Press the key to
indicate Yes, and then press to install the
optimal settings.
The optimal settings default values are quite
demanding and your system might not function
properly if you are using slower memory chips or other
kinds of low-performance components.
Load Customized Defaults Load 2nd default values from NVRAM for all the setup
parameters.
Save Customized Defaults Save all the setup parameters to NVRAM as 2nd
default values.
Option Description90 Using the System Setup Program
Command Line Interfaces for System Setup
Options
The options in the System Setup menu allows you to control the System
Configuration Utility (syscfg). This utility is included in the Dell
OpenManage Deployment Toolkit (DTK).
See the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 User's Guide for additional
information about installing and using the DTK utilities, and the
Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 Command Line Interface Reference Guide
for a complete list of all valid options, suboptions, and arguments for using
the BMCCFG.EXE to configure and manage your BMC.
You can use the system configuration utility for the following conditions:
• To change the System Setup option by D4 token:
./syscfg –t=D4_token_id
(Example: ./syscfg -t=0x002D to enable NIC1 Option ROM)
• To check token activity status:
./syscfg --istokenactive=D4_token_id
(Example: ./syscfg --istokenactive=0x002D to check the token active
status of NIC1 Option ROM)
• To directly change the System Setup option through BMC memory:
./ipmitool raw
(Example: ./ipmitool raw 0xc 1 1 3 10 106 42 120 to set IP address of BMC
management port as 10.106.42.120)
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table
Token Setup Option Description
002D Embedded NIC1 Enables the onboard NIC1 controller (full-function),
including its PXE boot-ROM.
002E Embedded NIC1 Disables the onboard NIC1 controller.
0051 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: USB
storage, hard disk, CD/DVD-ROM, RAID, Network (if
the devices are available).Using the System Setup Program 91
0052 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: hard
disk then option ROMs (if the devices are available).
0053 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to:
Network, hard disk, RAID,USB storage, CD/DVDROM (if the devices are available).
0054 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to:
CD/DVD-ROM, USB Storage, hard disk, RAID,
Network (if the devices are available).
005C N/A Enables BIOS remote update on the next reboot, to
search for an operating-system initiated BIOS update
image.
005D N/A Disables BIOS remote update on the next reboot, to
search for an operating-system initiated BIOS update
image.
006E Embedded NIC1 Enables the onboard NIC1 controller, but disables the
NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM.
0087 Video
Enumeration
Allows BIOS to use the onboard video controller for
boot-time messages.
0088 Video
Enumeration
Allows BIOS to use the first add-in video controller for
boot-time messages. Depending on the BIOS search
order and system slot layout.
008C Embedded USB
Controller
Allows BIOS to enable the built-in USB controller at
system startup.
008D Embedded USB
Controller
Allows BIOS to enable the built-in USB controller at
system startup.
00A1 Restore on AC
Power Loss
System remains off until the power button is pressed.
00A2 Restore on AC
Power Loss
System reverts to the last power state before power
loss.
00A3 Restore on AC
Power Loss
System switches back on after the AC power loss.
00BA Embedded NIC2 Disables the onboard NIC2 controller.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description92 Using the System Setup Program
00BB Embedded NIC2 Enables the onboard NIC2 controller, but disables the
NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM.
00BC Embedded NIC2 Enables the onboard NIC2 controller (full-function),
including its PXE boot-ROM.
00BF Remote Access Disables serial console redirection.
00C0 Serial port
number
Enables console redirection via COM1. See token
D7h.
00C1 Power Button Enables the power button to turn off the system
power. (default)
00C2 Power Button Disables the power button to turn off the system
power.
00D1 Hyper-Threading
Technology
Enables Hyper-Threading Technology.
00D2 Hyper-Threading
Technology
Disables Hyper-Threading Technology.
00D7 Serial port
number
Enables console redirection via COM2.
00D8 Load Optimal
Defaults
Install optimal default settings for all the items in the
Setup utility on the next boot.
00FE Legacy USB
Support
Disables the system to provide legacy USB support for
the operating system.
00FF Legacy USB
Support
Enables the system to provide legacy USB support for
the operating system.
0117 SATA Port0 Turns off the 1st Serial ATA drive controller.
0118 SATA Port0 Enables BIOS support for the 1st Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
0119 SATA Port1 Turns off the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller.
011A SATA Port1 Enables BIOS support for the 2nd Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 93
011B SATA Port2 Turns off the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller.
011C SATA Port2 Enables BIOS support for the 3rd Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
011D SATA Port3 Turns off the 4th Serial ATA drive controller.
011E SATA Port3 Enables BIOS support for the 4th Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
011F SATA Port4 Turns off the 5th Serial ATA drive controller.
0120 SATA Port4 Enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
0121 SATA Port5 Turns off the 6th Serial ATA drive controller.
0122 SATA Port5 Enables BIOS support for the 6th Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
0135 Embedded SATA
Controller
Disables the SATA controller. This token applies to
the first onboard SATA controller.
0137 Embedded SATA
Controller
Enables the SATA controller to run in IDE mode. Sets
the device class code as IDE and uses PCI IRQ
(referred as Native mode). This token applies to the
first onboard SATA controller.
0138 Embedded SATA
Controller
Enables the SATA controller. Sets the device class
code as SATA and sets up the AHCI BARs and
registers. This token applies to the first onboard SATA
controller.
0139 Embedded SATA
Controller
Enables the SATA controller. Sets the device class
code as RAID and executes the RAID Option ROM.
This token applies to the first onboard SATA
controller.
013E Memory
Remapping
(3GB~4GB)
When disabled, memory remapping relocates memory
space behind PCI hole to the space above 4 GB.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description94 Using the System Setup Program
013F Memory
Remapping
(3GB~4GB)
When enabled, memory remapping relocates memory
space (3GB - 4 GB) to the space above 4 GB.
0140 Execute-Disable
(XD) Bit
Capability
When disabled, the Intel processors supporting the
XD feature reports the support to the operating
system.
0141 Execute-Disable
(XD) Bit
Capability
When enabled, the Intel processors supporting the
XD feature reports the support to the operating
system. If the operating system supports this extended
paging mechanism, it will provide some protection
against software viruses that exploit buffer overflows.
014A Virtualization
Technology
Allows you to disable the VT technology in applicable
processors. If disabled, the VT feature is unusable in
any OS.
014B Virtualization
Technology
Allows you to enable the VT technology in applicable
processors.
014E External USB
PORT1
Allows you to electrically disable the external USB
connector 1.
014F External USB
PORT1
Allow you to electrically enable the external USB
connector 1.
0168 Max CPUID
Value Limit
Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned
in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed
with EAX=0. This setting disables the 3 or less.
0169 Max CPUID
Value Limit
Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned
in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed
with EAX=0. This setting limits CPUID function
to 3.
0171 Adjacent Cache
Line Prefetch
Disables system optimization for sequential memory
access. The processor fetches the cache line that
contains the data it currently requires.
0172 Adjacent Cache
Line Prefetch
Enables system optimization for sequential memory
access. The processor fetches the adjacent cache line
in the other half of the sector.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 95
0173 Hardware
Prefetcher
Disables the processor’s HW prefetcher..
0174 Hardware
Prefetcher
Enables the processor’s HW prefetcher..
0178 Remote Access Enables serial console redirection.
0189 External USB
PORT2
Allows you to electrically disable the external USB
connector 2.
018A External USB
PORT2
Allow you to electrically enable the external USB
connector 2.
0199 Power Saving
Features
Disables the feature that allows SATA hard-drives to
initiate link power management transitions.
019A Power Saving
Features
Enables the feature that allows SATA hard-drives to
initiate link power management transitions.
01C4 NUMA Support Disables the NUMA support to improve processor
performance. This option is available for NUMA
systems that allow memory interleaving across all
processor nodes.
01C5 NUMA Support Enables the NUMA support to improve processor
performance. This option is available for NUMA
systems that allow memory interleaving across all
processor nodes.
01C4 Node Interleave Disables the node interleave option. This option is
available for NUMA systems that allow memory
interleaving across all processor nodes.
01C5 Node Interleave Enable the node interleave option. This option is
available for NUMA systems that allow memory
interleaving across all processor nodes.
01CF I/OAT DMA
Engine
Enables the I/O Acceleration Technology (I/OAT)
DMA Engine feature. Set to enabled only if the
hardware and software support I/OAT.
01D0 I/OAT DMA
Engine
Disables the I/OAT DMA Engine feature. This option
should be disabled only if the hardware and software
support I/OAT.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description96 Using the System Setup Program
01DA Embedded NIC1 Enables NIC1 with iSCSI Remote Boot.
01DB Embedded NIC2 Enables NIC2 with iSCSI Remote Boot.
01EA Turbo Mode Disables memory turbo mode. It disables the
processor core to increase its frequency.
01EB Turbo Mode Enables memory turbo mode. It allows the processor
core to increase its frequency.
01F0 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller.
01F1 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller, but disables the
NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM.
01F2 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller (full-function),
including its PXE boot-ROM.
01F3 Embedded NIC3 Enables NIC3 with iSCSI Remote Boot.
0204 VT for Direct I/O Disables Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct
I/O (VT-d) that enhances I/O support (DMA) when
running a Virtual Machine Monitor.
0205 VT for Direct I/O Enables Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O
(VT-d) that enhances I/O support (DMA) when
running a Virtual Machine Monitor.
0211 Internal USB
PORT
Disables the internal USB connector.
0212 Internal USB
PORT
Enables the internal USB connector.
021F Maximum
Performance
Sets the system power management to maximum
performance.
0221 OS Control Allows the OS to change the P-state.
0224 Embedded Video
Controller
Enables the onboard video controller as the primary
video device.
0225 Embedded Video
Controller
Disables the onboard video controller.
022D Boot Mode Enables booting to Unified Extensible Firmware
Interface (UEFI) capable operating systems.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 97
022E Boot Mode Enables booting to legacy mode, ensures compatibility
with operating systems that do not support UEFI.
0231 Active Processor
Cores
Four cores of the processor are enabled This applies to
Quad-core processors only.
0232 Active Processor
Cores
Two cores of the processor are enabled. This applies to
Quad-core and Dual-core processors.
0233 Active Processor
Cores
Single core of the processor is enabled. This applies to
Quad-core and Dual-Core processors.
024B C States When enabled, the processor can operate in all
available Power C States. (default)
024C C States When disabled, there are no C states available for the
processor.
024D Pause on Errors Enables the BIOS from prompting for F1/F2 on error.
BIOS pauses at F1/F2 prompt.
024E Pause on Errors Disables the BIOS from prompting for F1/F2 on error.
BIOS pauses at F1/F2 prompt.
024F Quiet Boot Enables the display of the splash or summary screen,
rather than the detail of the POST flow.
0250 Quiet Boot Disables the display of the splash or summary screen.
The user is able to see the detail of the POST
messages.
0251 N/A The NIC1 is used for PXE boot, followed by NIC2.
0252 N/A The NIC2 is used for PXE boot, followed by NIC1.
0254 3F8h/2F8h Sets the back serial port address to 0x3F8 and internal
serial port address to 0x2F8
0257 2F8h/3F8h Set back serial port address to 0x2F8 and internal
serial port address to 0x3F8.
025D Optimizer Mode Selects optimizer mode as the memory operating
mode.
025E Spare Mode Selects spare mode as the memory operating mode.
025F Mirror Mode Selects mirror mode as the memory operating mode.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description98 Using the System Setup Program
0260 Advanced ECC
Mode
Selects Advanced ECC (i.e. Lockstep, Chipkill) as the
memory operating mode.
026A Coherent HT
Link Speed
Sets to support HyperTransport 1 specification.
026B Coherent HT
Link Speed
Sets to support HyperTransport 3 specification.
026E Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled all of cores
in each processor. By default, the maximum number
of cores per processor will be enabled.
026F Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled 6 cores in
each processor. By default, the maximum number of
cores per processor will be enabled.
0270 Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled 8 cores in
each processor. By default, the maximum number of
cores per processor will be enabled.
0271 Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled 10 cores in
each processor. By default, the maximum number of
cores per processor will be enabled.
0272 Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled 12 cores in
each processor. By default, the maximum number of
cores per processor will be enabled.
027B HT Assist Disables the Probe Filter chipset option in the System
setup. There are some applications that may lower
chipset performance when this is enabled.
027C HT Assist Enables the Probe Filter chipset option in the System
setup. There are some applications that may lower
chipset performance when this is disabled.
02A1 C1E State Enables the processor Enhanced Halt (C1E) state.
(default)
02A2 C1E State Disables the processor C1-E state. Do at your own
risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears
in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message
appears when this option is changing.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 99
02A9 DRAM Prefetcher Disables DRAM references from triggering DRAM
prefetch requests.
02AA DRAM Prefetcher Turns on the DRAM prefetch unit in the Northbridge.
02AB HW Prefetch
Training on SW
Disables hardware prefetcher from considering
software prefetches when detecting strides for
prefetch requests.
02AC HW Prefetch
Training on SW
Enables Hardware prefetcher considers software
prefetches when detecting strides for prefetch
requests. (default)
02AD SR-IOV Global
Enable
Enables BIOS support for SRIOV devices.
02AE SR-IOV Global
Enable
Disables BIOS support for SRIOV devices.
02B6 Memory
Operating Voltage
Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.5
volts.
02B7 Memory
Operating Voltage
Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at
1.35 volts.
02B8 Memory
Operating Voltage
This setting indicates the memory operating voltage
will be set automatically by the Memory initialization
code and depending upon the installed DIMM's
capability and the memory configuration of the
system. This is the default setting and will set the
Memory Operating voltage to the POR voltage.
02C5 DCU Streamer
Prefetcher
Enables the DCU Streamer Prefetcher. (default)
02C6 DCU Streamer
Prefetcher
Disables the DCU Streamer Prefetcher.
02C7 Data Reuse
Optimization
Sets to enable for HPC applications. (default)
02C8 Data Reuse
Optimization
Sets to disable for energy efficiency.
02C9 QPI Bandwidth
Priority
Sets to compute for computation-intensive
applications. (default)
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description100 Using the System Setup Program
02CA QPI Bandwidth
Priority
Sets to I/O for I/O-intensive applications.
02CE DCU IP
Prefetcher
Enables the DCU IP Prefetcher. (default)
02CF DCU IP
Prefetcher
Disables the DCU IP Prefetcher.
401A Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in
VT100 emulation model. See tokens BFh, C0h, and
D7h.
401B Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in
ANSI emulation model. See also tokens BFh, C0h,
and D7h.
401C Redirection After
BIOS POST
The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, continues to
operate after the OS boot hand-off.
401D Redirection After
BIOS POST
The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates
during the BIOS boot only and is disabled prior to OS
boot hand-off. See also tokens BFh, C0h, D7h, 401Ah
and 401Bh.
4022 1st Boot Device Whenever the BIOS boots the system, the first PXEcapable device is inserted as the first device in the
boot sequence. Enabling this feature causes the BIOS
operation to occur on the next and all subsequent
boots and causes a change in the system's defined
boot sequence. The BIOS chooses the first PXEcapable device as the system's onboard network
controller, if present and enabled, or the first bootable
network device found in the system's standard PCI
search order.
4026 Manufacturing
Mode
Enables the manufacturing mode to bypass POST
tasks/memory tests and F1/F2 prompts on specific
error messages. Used by manufacturers only and is not
for general use.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 101
4027 Manufacturing
Mode
Disables the manufacturing mode to bypass POST
tasks/memory tests and F1/F2 prompts on specific
error messages. Used by manufacturers only and is not
for general use.
4033 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 115,200 bits
per second.
4034 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 57,600 bits per
second
4035 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 19,200 bits per
second.
4036 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 9,600 bits per
second.
403F Clear SMBIOS
System Event Log
Deletes all records in the BMC system event log on
the next boot.
4800 Node Manager Enables the Node Manager mode for Intel processors.
4801 APML Enable the Advanced Platform Management Link
mode for AMD processors.
4802 CPU Power
Capping
To decide the highest processor performance state in
the OS. (P0-state).
4803 CPU Power
Capping
To decide the highest processor performance state in
the OS. (P1-state).
4804 CPU Power
Capping
To decide the highest processor performance state in
the OS. (P2-state).
4805 CPU Power
Capping
To decide the highest processor performance state in
the OS. (P3-state).
4806 CPU Power
Capping
To decide the highest processor performance state in
the OS. (P4-state).
480A C6 State Disables the processor C6 state. Do at your own risk.
When you disable this option, a warning appears in
the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message
appears when this option is changing.
480B C6 State Enables the processor C6 state. (default)
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description102 Using the System Setup Program
480C L3 Cache Power
Control
Disable the clock stop for an idle subcache.
480D L3 Cache Power
Control
Enable the clock stop for an idle subcache.
480E C7 State Disables the processor C7 state. Do at your own risk.
When you disable this option, a warning appears in
the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message
appears when this option is changing.
480F C7 State Enables the processor C7 state. (default)
4810 Non Coherent
HT Link Width
Sets the HT link to 8 bit width.
4811 Non Coherent
HT Link Width
Sets the HT link to 16 bit width.
4812 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 800MHz.
4813 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 1000MHz.
4814 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 1200MHz.
4815 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 1600MHz.
4816 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 2000MHz.
4817 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 2600MHz.
4820 Memory Turbo
Mode
Disables memory turbo mode.
4821 Memory Turbo
Mode
Enables memory turbo mode.
4822 NUMA Support Enables the node interleave option for SLES11. This
applies to NUMA systems that allow memory
interleaving across all processor nodes.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 103
4823 Memory
Frequency
Detects the memory running speed from H/W
designed (SPD, memory population).
4824 Memory
Frequency
Sets memory running speed up to 800MHz.
4825 Memory
Frequency
Sets memory running speed up to 1066MHz.
4826 Memory
Frequency
Sets memory running speed up to 1333MHz.
4827 Memory
Frequency
Sets memory running speed up to 1600MHz.
4828 Memory
Throttling Mode
Sets memory running as Open Loop Throughput
Throttling (OLTT). (default)
4829 Memory
Throttling Mode
Sets memory running as Closed Loop Thermal
Throttling (CLTT).
482A DRAM Scrubbing Disables DRAM scrubbing to write corrected data
back to the memory once a correctable error is
detected on a read transaction.
482B DRAM Scrubbing Enables Dram scrubbing to write corrected data back
to the memory once a correctable error is detected on
a read transaction.
482C Demand
Scrubbing
Disables Demand scrubbing to write corrected data
back to the memory once a correctable error is
detected on a read transaction.
482D Demand
Scrubbing
Enables Demand scrubbing to write corrected data
back to the memory once a correctable error is
detected on a read transaction.
482E Patrol Scrubbing Disables Patrol scrubbing to proactively search the
system memory, repairing correctable errors.
482F Patrol Scrubbing Enables Patrol scrubbing to proactively search the
system memory, repairing correctable errors.
4830 HDD Security
Erase
Sets security freeze lock to all hard-drives.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description104 Using the System Setup Program
4831 HDD Security
Erase
Unlocks the security freeze lock on all hard-drives.
4832 AHCI-AMD Supports AMD inbox AHCI driver.
4833 AHCI-MS Supports Microsoft inbox AHCI driver.
4834 Embedded SATA
Link Rate
Sets the SATA link rate at maximum rate speed of
6.0 Gbps.
4835 Embedded SATA
Link Rate
Sets the SATA link rate at minimum rate speed of
1.5 Gbps. For power consumption.
4836 Embedded SATA
Link Rate
Sets the SATA link rate at minimum rate speed of
3.0 Gbps.
4840 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the PCI
Express Link of port. All entry disabled.
4841 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given
PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry enabled.
4842 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given
PCI Express Link of port. L1 entry enabled.
4843 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given
PCI Express Link of port. L0s and L1 entry enabled.
4844 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given
PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry downstream
enabled.
4845 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given
PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry downstream and
L1 enabled
4846 Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. All entry disabled.
4847 Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. L0s entry enabled.
4848 Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. L1 entry enabled.
4849 Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. L0s and L1 entry enabled.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 105
484A Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. L0s entry downstream enabled.
484B Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled.
484C Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. All entry disabled.
484D Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. L0s entry enabled.
484E Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. L1 entry enabled.
484F Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. L0s and L1 entry enabled.
4850 Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. L0s entry downstream enabled.
4851 Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled.
4852 NB-SB Link
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on the NB-SB.
All entry disabled.
4853 NB-SB Link
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on the NB-SB.
L1 entry enabled.
4854 Maximum
Payload Size
Auto detects the PCIe maximum payload size.
4855 Maximum
Payload Size
Sets the PCIe maximum payload size to 128 Bytes.
4856 Maximum
Payload Size
Sets the PCIe maximum payload size to 256 Bytes.
4857 WHEA Support Disables Windows Hardware Error Architecture.
4858 WHEA Support Enables Windows Hardware Error Architecture.
4859 NIC
Enumeration
Sets PXE boot from onboard NIC to Add-on NIC
adapter. (default)
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description106 Using the System Setup Program
485A NIC
Enumeration
Sets PXE boot from Add-on NIC adapter to onboard
NIC.
485B PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen3 8.0 Gigabits
bandwidth.
485C PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen2 5.0 Gigabits
bandwidth.
485D PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen1 2.5 Gigabits
bandwidth.
485E Reboot on WOL
(ROW)
Disables ROW. (default)
The ROW repurposes the Wake on LAN (WOL)
signal to reboot the system board when the system is
in S0/S3 state.
485F Reboot on WOL
(ROW)
Enables ROW.
ROW repurposes the WOL signal to reboot the
system board when the system is in S0/S3 state. When
a WOL packet is received by the NIC, the wake up
signal generated by the NIC shall cause a hardware
reboot of the system board.
4860 USB PORT with
BMC
Allows you to electrically disable the internal USB port
which contacts to BMC.
4861 USB PORT with
BMC
Allow the users to electrically enable the internal USB
port which contacts to BMC.
4870 Force PXE Boot
only
Disables PXE to be the boot device only.
4871 Force PXE Boot
only
Enables PXE to be the boot device only. The system
retrying to boot from PXE device.
4873 Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled 16 cores in
each processor. By default, the maximum number of
cores per processor will be enabled.
4877 PCIe Slot1 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot1.
4878 PCIe Slot1 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot1.
4879 PCIe Slot2 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot2.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 107
487A PCIe Slot2 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot2.
487B PCIe Slot3 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot3.
487C PCIe Slot3 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot3.
487D PCIe Slot4 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot4.
487E PCIe Slot4 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot4.
487F Mezzanine Slot Allows you to electrically disable Mezzanine Slot.
4880 Mezzanine Slot Allows you to electrically enable Mezzanine Slot.
4881 1st Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the first boot device.
4882 1st Boot Device Sets RAID as the first boot device.
4883 1st Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the first boot device.
4884 1st Boot Device Sets a CD/DVD ROM as the first boot device.
4885 2nd Boot Device Sets a network device as the 2nd boot device.
4886 2nd Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 2nd boot device.
4887 2nd Boot Device Sets RAID as the 2nd boot device.
4888 2nd Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 2nd boot device.
4889 2nd Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 2nd boot device.
488A 3rd Boot Device Sets the network device as the 3rd boot device.
488B 3rd Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 3rd boot device.
488C 3rd Boot Device Sets RAID as the 3rd boot device.
488D 3rd Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 3rd boot device.
488E 3rd Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 3rd boot device.
488F 4th Boot Device Sets the network device as the 4th boot device.
4890 4th Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 4th boot device.
4891 4th Boot Device Sets RAID as the 4th boot device.
4892 4th Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 4th boot device.
4893 4th Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 4th boot device.
4894 5th Boot Device Sets the network device as the 5th boot device.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description108 Using the System Setup Program
4895 5th Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 5th boot device.
4896 5th Boot Device Sets RAID as the 5th boot device.
4897 5th Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 5th boot device.
4898 5th Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as thes 5th boot device.
48A0 ACPI SPMI Table Disables the ACPI SPMI Table for BMC ROM
update.
48A1 ACPI SPMI Table Enables the ACPI SPMI Table for IPMI driver
installation.
48A2 BMC LAN Port
Configuration
Sets BMC LAN Port to Dedicated-NIC.
48A3 BMC LAN Port
Configuration
Sets BMC LAN Port to Shared-NIC.
48A4 BMC NIC IP
Source
Sets BMC LAN to get LAN IP from Static mode.
48A5 BMC NIC IP
Source
Sets BMC LAN to get LAN IP from DHCP mode.
48A6 IPv6 Mode Disables IPv6 internet protocol support.
48A7 IPv6 Mode Enables IPv6 internet protocol support.
48A8 IPv6 AutoConfig Disables IPv6 auto configuration.
48A9 IPv6 AutoConfig Enables IPv6 auto configuration.
48AA Serial Port Mode Sets the console redirection baud rate to 3,8400 bits
per second.
48AB Flow Control Selects none as the flow control for console
redirection.
48AC Flow Control Selects hardware as the flow control for console
redirection.
48AD Flow Control Selects software as the flow control for console
redirection.
48AE Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in
VTUTF8 emulation model. See also tokens BFh, C0h,
and D7h.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 109
48AF VT-UTF8 Combo
Key Support
Disables VT-UTF8 Combination Key Support for
ANSI/VT100 terminals.
48B0 VT-UTF8 Combo
Key Support
Enables VT-UTF8 Combination Key Support for
ANSI/VT100 terminals.
48B1 Event logging Disables BIOS to log system events to BMC, errors
include ECC/PCI/PCIe/HT…etc.
48B2 Event logging Enables BIOS to log system events to BMC, errors
include ECC/PCI/PCIe/HT…etc.
48B3 NMI on Error Disables BIOS to generate NMI when PCIe
uncorrectable errors occur.
48B4 NMI on Error Enables BIOS to generate NMI when PCIe
uncorrectable errors occur.
48B5 Memory
Operating Voltage
Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at
1.25 volts.
48C0 Frequency Ratio Sets frequency multiplier as maximum level.
48C1 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier one level.
48C2 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier two levels.
48C3 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier three levels.
48C8 QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at maximum speed.
48C9 QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 4.800GT.
48CA QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 5.866GT.
48CB QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 6.400GT.
48CC QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 7.200GT.
48CD QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 8.000GT.
48D0 Energy Efficient
Policy
Controls the energy efficient policy as performance
profile to configure all necessary settings.
48D1 Energy Efficient
Policy
Controls the energy efficient policy as balance profile
to configure all necessary settings. (default)
48D2 Energy Efficient
Policy
Controls the energy efficient policy as low power
profile to configure all necessary settings.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description110 Using the System Setup Program
48D3 Direct Cache
Access
Disables the Direct Cache Access.
48D4 Direct Cache
Access
Enables the Direct Cache Access.
48D8 Load Customized
Defaults
Requests a customized default of SETUP values on
the next boot.
48DA Save Customized
Defaults
Saves current settings to customized defaults of
SETUP on next boot.
48DB N/A Requests maximum performance settings of SETUP
values on the next boot.
48DC N/A Requests a energy efficiency settings of SETUP values
on the next boot.
48DD N/A Requests HPCC efficiency settings of SETUP values
on the next boot. Dell will provide the settings before
A-can BIOS.
48DE Shell Requests the uEFI Shell as first boot device on the
next boot.
48E0 N/A Use NIC3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E1 N/A Use NIC4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E2 N/A Use NIC5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E3 N/A Use NIC6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E4 N/A Use NIC7 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E5 N/A Use NIC8 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E6 N/A Use HDD1 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 111
48E7 N/A Use HDD2 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
48E8 N/A Use HDD3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
48E9 N/A Use HDD4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
48EA N/A Use HDD5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
48EB N/A Use HDD6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
48EC N/A Use RAID HDD1as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48ED N/A Use RAID HDD2 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48EE N/A Use RAID HDD3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48EF N/A Use RAID HDD4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F0 N/A Use RAID HDD5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F1 N/A Use RAID HDD6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F2 N/A Use RAID HDD7 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F3 N/A Use RAID HDD8 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F4 N/A Use RAID HDD9 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F5 N/A Use RAID HDD10 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F6 N/A Use RAID HDD11 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description112 Using the System Setup Program
48F7 N/A Use RAID HDD12 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F8 N/A Use RAID HDD13 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F9 N/A Use RAID HDD14 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48FA N/A Use RAID HDD15 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48FB N/A Use RAID HDD16 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 113
IPMI Command List
The following tables include all commands defined in the IPMI v2.0
specifications. All mandatory commands and some optional functions are
supported. Special functions beyond the scope of IPMI v2.0 are implemented
as original equipment manufacturer (OEM) commands.
In the O/M column:
• M = Mandatory in the IPMI spec and is implemented.
• O = Optional command supported in this implementation.
• N = Not supported in this implementation.
See the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 User's Guide for additional
information about installing and using the DTK utilities, and the
Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 Command Line Interface Reference Guide
for a complete list of all valid options, suboptions, and arguments for using
the BMCCFG.EXE to configure and manage your BMC.
NOTE: For more information about the standard IPMI tool commands, see
ipmitool.sourceforge.net/manpage.html.
Table 2-2. IPMI Device Global Commands (NetFn: 0x06H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC
Get Device ID App 0x01h M Yes
Broadcast Get Device ID App 0x02h M Yes
Cold Reset App 0x03h O Yes
Warm Reset App 0x04h O No
Get Self Test Results App 0x05h M Yes
Manufacture Test On App 0x06h O Yes
Get ACPI Power State App 0x07h O Yes
Get Device GUID App 0x08h O Yes
Get NetFn Support App 0x09h O Yes
Get Command Support App 0x0Ah O Yes
Get Command Sub-function Support App 0x0Bh O Yes114 Using the System Setup Program
Table 2-2. IPMI Device Global Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) (continued)
Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC
Get Configurable Commands App 0x0C O Yes
Get Configurable Command Sub-functions App 0x0Dh O Yes
Set Command Enables App 0x60h O Yes
Get Command Enables App 0x61h O Yes
Set Command Sub-function Enables App 0x62h O Yes
Get Command Sub-function Enables App 0x63h O Yes
Get OEM NetFn IANA Support App 0x64h O Yes
Table 2-3. BMC Watchdog Timer Commands (NetFn: 0x06H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Reset Watchdog Timer App 0x22h M Yes
Set Watchdog Timer App 0x24h M Yes
Get Watchdog Timer App 0x25h M Yes
Table 2-4. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x06H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC
Set BMC Global Enables App 0x2Eh M Yes
Get BMC Global Enables App 0x2Fh M Yes
Clear Message Buffer Flags App 0x30h M Yes
Get Message Buffer Flags App 0x31h M Yes
Enable Message Channel Receive App 0x32h O Yes
Get Message App 0x33h M Yes
Send Message App 0x34h M Yes
Read Event Message Buffer App 0x35h O YesUsing the System Setup Program 115
Table 2-5. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x 06H) (continued)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get BT Interface Capabilities App 0x36h M No
Get System GUID App 0x37h M Yes
Set System Info Parameters App 0x58h O Yes
Get System Info Parameters App 0x59h O Yes
Get Channel Authentication Capabilities App 0x38h O Yes
Get Session Challenge App 0x39h O Yes
Activate Session Command App 0x3Ah O Yes
Set Session Privilege Level Command App 0x3Bh O Yes
Close Session App 0x3Ch O Yes
Get Session Information App 0x3Dh O Yes
Get Authentication Code Command App 0x3Fh O Yes
Set Channel Access Commands App 0x40h O Yes
Get Channel Access Commands App 0x41h O Yes
Get Channel Info Command App 0x42h O Yes
Set User Access Commands App 0x43h O Yes
Get User Access Commands App 0x44h O Yes
Set User Name Commands App 0x45h O Yes
Get User Name Commands App 0x46h O Yes
Set User Password Commands App 0x47h O Yes
Active Payload Command App 0x48h O Yes
Deactivate Payload Command App 0x49h O Yes
Get Payload Activation Status App 0x4Ah O Yes
Get Payload Instance Info Command App 0x4Bh O Yes
Set User Payload Access App 0x4Ch O Yes
Get User Payload Access App 0x4Dh O Yes
Get Channel Payload Support App 0x4Eh O Yes116 Using the System Setup Program
Table 2-5. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x 06H) (continued)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get Channel Payload Version App 0x4Fh O Yes
Get Channel OEM Payload Info App 0x50h O Yes
Master Write-Read I2C App 0x52h M Yes
Get Channel Cipher Suites App 0x54h O Yes
Suspend/Resume Payload Encryption App 0x55h O Yes
Set Channel Security Keys App 0x56h O Yes
Get System Interface Capabilities App 0x57h O No
Table 2-6. Chassis Device Commands (NetFn: 0x00H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get Chassis Capabilities Chassis 0x00h M Yes
Get Chassis Status Chassis 0x01h M Yes
Chassis Control Chassis 0x02h M Yes
Chassis Reset Chassis 0x03h O No
Chassis Identify Chassis 0x04h O Yes
Set Chassis Capabilities Chassis 0x05h O Yes
Set Power Restore Policy Chassis 0x06h O Yes
Get System Restart Cause Chassis 0x07h O Yes
Set System Boot Options Chassis 0x08h O Yes
Get System Boot Options Chassis 0x09h O Yes
Set Front Panel Button Enable Chassis 0x0Ah O No
Set Power Cycle Interval Chassis 0x0Bh O Yes
Get POH Counter Chassis 0x0Fh O NoUsing the System Setup Program 117
Table 2-7. Event Commands (NetFn: 0x04H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Set Event Receiver S/E 0x00h M Yes
Get Event Receiver S/E 0x01h M Yes
Platform Event S/E 0x02h M Yes
Table 2-8. PEF/PET Alerting Commands (NetFn: 0x04H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get PEF Capabilities S/E 0x10h M Yes
Arm PEF Postpone Timer S/E 0x11h M Yes
Set PEF Configuration Parameters S/E 0x12h M Yes
Get PEF Configuration Parameters S/E 0x13h M Yes
Set Last Processed Event ID S/E 0x14h M Yes
Get Last Processed Event ID S/E 0x15h M Yes
Alert Immediate S/E 0x16h O Yes
PET Acknowledge S/E 0x17h O Yes
Table 2-9. Sensory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x04H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get Device SDR Info S/E 0x20h O No
Get Device SDR S/E 0x21h O No
Reserve Device SDR Repository S/E 0x22h O No
Get Sensor Reading Factors S/E 0x23h O Yes
Set Sensor Hysteresis S/E 0x24h O Yes
Get Sensor Hysteresis S/E 0x25h O Yes
Set Sensor Threshold S/E 0x26h O Yes
Get Sensor Threshold S/E 0x27h O Yes
Set Sensor Event Enable S/E 0x28h O Yes118 Using the System Setup Program
Table 2-10. Sensory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) (continued)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get Sensor Event Enable S/E 0x29h O Yes
Set Sensor Reading and Event Status S/E 0x30h O Yes
Re-arm Sensor Events S/E 0x2Ah O Yes
Get Sensor Event Status S/E 0x2Bh O Yes
Get Sensor Reading S/E 0x2Dh M Yes
Set Sensor Type S/E 0x2Eh O No
Get Sensor Type S/E 0x2Fh O No
Table 2-11. FRU Inventory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get FRU Inventory Area Info Storage 0x10h M Yes
Read FRU Inventory Data Storage 0x11h M Yes
Write FRU Inventory Data Storage 0x12h M Yes
Table 2-12. SDR Repository Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get SDR Repository Info Storage 0x20h M Yes
Get SDR Repository Allocation Info Storage 0x21h O No
Reserve SDR Repository Storage 0x22h M Yes
Get SDR Storage 0x23h M Yes
Add SDR Storage 0x24h M No
Partial ADD SDR Storage 0x25h O Yes
Delete SDR Storage 0x26h O No
Clear SDR Repository Storage 0x27h M Yes
Get SDR Repository Time Storage 0x28h O YesUsing the System Setup Program 119
* Support for Partial Add SEL is not required when Add SEL is supported.
Table 2-12. SDR Repository Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) (continued)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Set SDR Repository Time Storage 0x29h O Yes
Enter SDR Repository Update Mode Storage 0x2Ah O No
Exit SDR Repository Update Mode Storage 0x2Bh O No
Run Initialization Agent Storage 0x2Ch O Yes
Table 2-13. SEL Commands (NetFn: 0x40H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get SEL Info Storage 0x40h M Yes
Get SEL Allocation Info Storage 0x41h O No
Reserve SEL Storage 0x42h O Yes
Get SEL Entry Storage 0x43h M Yes
Add SEL Entry Storage 0x44h M Yes
Partial Add SEL Entry Storage 0x45h M No
*
Delete SEL Entry Storage 0x46h O No
Clear SEL Storage 0x47h M Yes
Get SEL Time Storage 0x48h M Yes
Set SEL Time Storage 0x49h M Yes
Get Auxiliary Log Status Storage 0x5Ah O No
Set Auxiliary Log Status Storage 0x5Bh O No
Get SEL Time UTC Offset Storage 0x5Ch O No
Set SEL Time UTC Offset Storage 0x5D O No120 Using the System Setup Program
Table 2-14. LAN Device Commands (NetFn: 0x0CH)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Set LAN Configuration Parameters
(Note: Parameter 9 and 25 are not
supported.)
Transport 0x01h M Yes
Get LAN Configuration Parameters
(Note: Parameter 9 and 25 are not
supported.)
Transport 0x02h M Yes
Suspend BMC ARP Transport 0x03h O No
Get IP/UDP/RMCP Statistics Transport 0x04h O No
Table 2-15. Serial/Modem Device Commands (NetFn: 0x 0CH)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Set Serial/Modem Configuration Transport 0x10h M Yes
Get Serial/Modem Configuration Transport 0x11h M Yes
Set Serial/Modem Mux Transport 0x12h O Yes
Get TAP Response Codes Transport 0x13h O No
Set PPP UDP Proxy Transmit Data Transport 0x14h O No
Get PPP UDP Proxy Transmit Data Transport 0x15h O No
Send PPP UDP Proxy Packet Transport 0x16h O No
Get PPP UDP Proxy Receive Data Transport 0x17h O No
Serial/Modem Connection Active Transport 0x18h M Yes
Callback Transport 0x20h O No
SOL Activating Transport 0x19h O No
Set SOL Configuration Transport 0x20h O No
Get SOL Configuration Transport 0x21h O No
Set User Callback Options Transport 0x1Ah O No
Get User Callback Options Transport 0x1Bh O No
Set Serial Routing Mux Transport 0x1Ch O YesUsing the System Setup Program 121
Table 2-16. Command Forwarding Commands (NetFn: 0x0CH)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Forwarded Command Transport 0x30h O Yes
Set Forwarded Commands Transport 0x31h O Yes
Get Forwarded Commands Transport 0x32h O Yes
Enable Forwarded Commands Transport 0x33h O Yes
Table 2-17. Firmware Update Commands (NetFn: 0x08H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Firmware Update Phase 1 Firmware 0x10h O Yes
Firmware Update Phase 2 Firmware 0x11h O Yes
Get Firmware Update Status Firmware 0x12h O Yes
Get Firmware Version Firmware 0x13h O Yes
Set Firmware Update Status Firmware 0x16h O Yes
Firmware Update Phase 3 Firmware 0x21h O Yes
Table 2-18. GPGPU Setting Commands (NetFn: 0x30H)
Command NetFn LUN CMD Privelege
Set GPGPU ID 0x30h 0h 32h Admin
Get GPGPU ID 0x30h 0h 33h Admin122 Using the System Setup Program
Power Management Settings
The system BIOS provides various options for power settings to help you save energy,
maximize system performance. The following table provides a guide for power
management settings.
Table 2-19. Power Management Settings
System Setup Maximum
Performance (48DB)
Energy Efficiency
(48DC)
Setup Page Setting Option D4
Token
Option D4
Token
Power
Management
Power Management Max.
Performance
021F Node
Manager
4800
Energy Efficiency Policy Performance 48D0 Low
Power
48D2
CPU
Configuration
Active Processor Cores All 026E 1/2 0233/
0232
Frequency Ratio Auto 48C0 3 48C3
QPI Frequency Auto 48C8 4.80GT/s 48C9
Turbo Mode Enabled 01E8 Disabled 01EA
C State Disabled 024C Enabled 024B
C1E State Disabled 02A2 Enabled 02A1
C6 State Disabled 480A Enabled 480B
C7 State Disabled 480E Enabled 480F
Direct Cache Access Enabled 48D4 Disabled 48D3
Hyper-Threading
Technology
Enabled 00D1 Disabled 00D2
Adjacent Cache Line
Prefetch
Enabled 0172 Disabled 0171
Hardware Prefetcher Enabled 0174 Disabled 0173
DCU Streamer
Prefetcher
Enabled 02C5 Disabled 02C6
DCU IP Prefetcher Enabled 02CE Disabled 02CFUsing the System Setup Program 123
Memory
Configuration
Memory Frequency Auto 4823 800 MHz 4824
Memory Turbo Mode Enabled 4821 Disabled 4820
Memory Throttling
Mode
Disabled 4828 Enabled 4829
Memory Operating
Voltage
1.5 V 02B6 1.35V/
1.25V
02B7/
48B5
SATA Configuration Embedded
SATA Link
State
Auto 4834 1.5
Gbps
Power Saving Features Disabled 0199 Enabled 019A
PCI
Configuration
PCIe Slot ASPM Disabled 4840 L0s & L1 4843
Onboard LAN ASPM Disabled 4846 L0s & L1 4849
Mezzing Slot ASPM Disabled 484C L0s & L1 484F
Table 2-19. Power Management Settings (continued)
System Setup Maximum
Performance (48DB)
Energy Efficiency
(48DC)
Setup Page Setting Option D4
Token
Option D4
Token124 Using the System Setup ProgramInstalling System Components 125
3
Installing System Components
Safety Instructions
WARNING: Working on systems that are still connected to a power supply can be
extremely dangerous.
CAUTION: System components and electronic circuit boards can be damaged by
discharge of static electricity.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
To avoid injury to yourself or damage to your system, follow these guidelines:
• Always disconnect the system from the power outlet whenever you are
working inside the system.
• If possible, wear a grounded wrist strap when you are working inside the
system. Alternatively, discharge any static electricity by touching the bare
metal chassis of the system case, or the bare metal body of any other
grounded appliance.
• Hold electronic circuit boards by the edges only. Do not touch the
components on the board unless it is necessary to do so. Do not flex or
stress the circuit board.
• Leave all components inside the static-proof packaging until you are ready
to use the component for the installation.126 Installing System Components
• Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting
this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the
cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid
bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that
both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned.
Recommended Tools
• #1 Phillips screwdriver
• #2 Phillips screwdriver
• Torx drivers
• Set of jeweler screwdriversInstalling System Components 127
Inside the System
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: This system must be operated with the sled or a sled blank installed to
make sure of proper cooling.
Figure 3-1. Inside the Sled
1 system board 2 heat sinks/processors (2)
3 memory (16) 4 cooling shroud
5 interposer extender 6 internal 2.5-inch hard-drives (2)128 Installing System Components
Sled Configuration
The following illustrations show a 10-Sled and 8-Sled configuration. A
mixture of differing sled types is also supported in the PowerEdge C8000
server enclosure. For more information, refer to the PowerEdge C8000
Hardware Owner’s Manual.
Figure 3-2. PowerEdge C8220 10-Sled SKU
Figure 3-3. PowerEdge C8220 8-Sled SKU with 2 Power SledsInstalling System Components 129
Sled
Removing a Sled
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: To ensure proper airflow in the system, if a module is removed it
should be immediately replaced with another sled or sled blank.
CAUTION: Operating the system for extended periods of time without a sled blank
installed can cause the PowerEdge C8000 server enclosure to overheat. See
"Installing a Sled Blank" on page 131.
1 Power down the sled using OS commands or the Baseboard Management
Controller, and ensure that the sled's power is off.
When a sled is powered off, its front-panel power indicator is off.
2 Press the release latch and using the handle, slide the sled out of the
enclosure. See Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4. Removing and Installing a Sled
1 handle 2 release latch130 Installing System Components
Installing a Sled
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Orient the sled so that the release latch is in the bottom of the sled. See
Figure 3-4.
2 Slide the new sled into the enclosure until the sled is fully seated and the
release latch snaps into place. See Figure 3-4.
Sled Blank
CAUTION: To ensure proper airflow in the system, if a module is removed it
should be immediately replaced with another sled or sled blank.
Removing a Sled Blank
Press the release latches and slide the blank out of the enclosure. See
Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5. Removing and Installing a Sled Blank
1 release latches (2) 2 sled blankInstalling System Components 131
Installing a Sled Blank
Hold the blank with the guide rail facing forward. Slide the blank into the
enclosure until it is fully seated and the release latches snap into place. See
Figure 3-5.
SD Card
Removing a SD Card
1 Power down the sled using OS commands or the Baseboard Management
Controller, and ensure that the sled's power is off.
When a sled is powered off, its front-panel power-on indicator is off. See
Figure 1-1.
2 Press the release latch and using the handle, slide the sled out slightly until
you have access to the SD card slot.
3 Press the SD card in to release it from the slot and remove the card. See
Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-6. Removing and Installing a SD Card
1 SD card 2 SD card slot132 Installing System Components
Installing a SD Card
Media memory cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or
an arrow) or a label to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are
keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the
documentation that came with the card.
NOTE: To use an SD card with your sled, ensure that the SD card slot is enabled in
the System Setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45.
1 Hold the SD card with the label side facing to the right. See Figure 3-6.
2 Press the card into the slot to lock into place. See Figure 3-6.
If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the
card orientation and try again.
3 Slide the sled into the chassis until the sled is fully seated and the release
lever snaps into place.
Sled Covers
Removing the Front Cover
CAUTION: The sled must be operated with the sled covers installed to ensure
proper cooling.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while
working on components in the interior of the system.
1 Remove the four screws securing the front cover. See Figure 3-7.
2 Lift the front cover from the sled tray. See Figure 3-7.
3 If installed, disconnect all cables from the expansion card. Installing System Components 133
Figure 3-7. Removing and Installing the Front Cover
Installing the Front Cover
NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while
working on components in the interior of the system.
1 Check that all cable connections are secure.
2 Place the front cover on top of the sled tray, aligning the notches in the
front cover with the corresponding tabs in the sled tray. See Figure 3-7.
3 If an expansion card is installed, make sure the expansion card riser is
firmly seated.
4 Replace the four screws securing the front cover to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-7.
1 screws (4) 2 front cover
1
2134 Installing System Components
Removing the Back Cover
CAUTION: The sled must be operated with the sled covers installed to ensure
proper cooling.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while
working on components in the interior of the system.
1 Remove the two screws securing the back cover. See Figure 3-8.
2 Slide the cover forward to free it from the metal guides on the sled tray.
3 Lift the cover from the sled tray. See Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-8. Removing and Installing the Back Cover
1 back cover 2 screws (2)Installing System Components 135
Installing the Back Cover
NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while
working on components in the interior of the system.
1 Place the cover on the sled tray and slide it towards the front of the sled
tray so that the screw holes on the back cover align with the sled tray. See
Figure 3-8.
2 Replace the two screws securing the back cover to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-8.
Cooling Shroud
Removing the Cooling Shroud
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: Never operate your system with the cooling shroud removed. The
system may get overheated quickly, resulting in shutdown of the system and loss of
data.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the two screws securing the cooling shroud to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-9.
3 Press the shroud release lever toward the right of the sled.
4 Lift the shroud up to disengage the anchor tab from the heat sink. See
Figure 3-9.136 Installing System Components
Figure 3-9. Removing and Installing the Cooling Shroud
Installing the Cooling Shroud
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: Never operate your system with the cooling shroud removed. The
system may get overheated quickly, resulting in shutdown of the system and loss of
data.
1 Align and gently press the cooling shroud down on the system board until
the anchor tabs snap securely into place. See Figure 3-9.
2 Replace the two screws securing the cooling shroud to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-9.
3 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
1 screws (2) 2 cooling shroudInstalling System Components 137
Heat Sink
Removing a Heat Sink
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
WARNING: The heat sink may be hot to touch for some time after the system has
been powered down. Allow the heat sink to cool before removing it.
CAUTION: Never remove the heat sink from a processor unless you intend to
remove the processor. The heat sink is necessary to maintain proper thermal
conditions.
3 Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen one pair of diagonal retention screws
that secure the heat sink to the system board. See screw sequence
indicated on Figure 3-10.
4 Loosen the other pair of retention screws. See Figure 3-10.138 Installing System Components
Figure 3-10. Heat Sink Screw Loosening Sequence
5 Gently lift the heat sink off the processor and set the heat sink aside with
thermal grease side facing up. See Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11. Removing and Installing the Heat SinkInstalling System Components 139
Installing a Heat Sink
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
NOTE: When installing the heat sink, be sure to orient the heat sink so that the KEY
icon on the heat sink label is facing the neighboring heat sink.
1 Using a clean lint-free cloth, remove the thermal grease from the heat sink.
2 Apply new thermal grease evenly to the center of the top of the new
processor.
3 Orient the heat sink so that the KEY icon on the heat sink is facing the
neighboring heat sink’s KEY icon. See Figure 3-11.
4 Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the four heat sink retention screws in a
diagonal sequence. See Figure 3-10.
5 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
1 screws (4) 2 heat sink
3 heat sink KEY icon 4 heat sink
5 heat sink KEY icon140 Installing System Components
Processors
Your sled supports the following processors:
Use the following procedure when:
• Installing an additional processor
• Replacing a processor
Removing a Processor
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
Table 3-1. Processors
Model Number Cores/Threads Frequency TDP
E5-2690 8/16 2.9 GHz 135 W
E5-2680 8/16 2.7 GHz 130 W
E5-2670 8/16 2.6 GHz 115 W
E5-2660 8/16 2.2 GHz 95 W
E5-2665 8/16 2.4 GHz 115 W
E5-2650 8/16 2.0 GHz 95 W
E5-2640 6/12 2.5 GHz 95 W
E5-2630 6/12 2.3 GHz 95 W
E5-2620 6/12 2.0 GHz 95 W
E5-2650L 8/16 1.8 GHz 70 W
E5-2630L 6/12 2.0 GHz 60 WInstalling System Components 141
3 Remove the heat sink. See "Removing a Heat Sink" on page 137.
CAUTION: The processor is held in its socket under strong pressure. Be aware
that the release lever can spring up suddenly if not firmly grasped.
4 Position your thumb firmly over the processor hook-shaped socket-release
lever and release the lever from the locked position. Do not force the lever
up to the fully open position. See Figure 3-12.
5 Position your thumb firmly over the bent load lever and release the lever
from the locked position. Rotate the lever 90 degrees upward to lift the
processor shield. See Figure 3-12.
6 Rotate the processor shield upward and out of the way. See Figure 3-12.
7 Lift the processor out of the socket and leave the socket-release lever and
load lever up so that the socket is ready for the new processor. See
Figure 3-12.
CAUTION: The processor is held in its socket under strong pressure. Be aware
that the release and load levers can spring up suddenly if not firmly grasped.
Figure 3-12. Removing and Installing a Processor142 Installing System Components
Installing a Processor
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
NOTE: When installing only one processor, the processor must be installed in the
processor 1 socket. See "System Board Connectors" on page 197 for the location of
the processor 1 socket.
NOTE: If you are upgrading your processors, prior to upgrading your system,
download and install the latest system BIOS version from support.dell.com. Follow
the instructions included in the file download to install the update on your system.
1 Unpack the processor if it has not been used previously.
2 If the processor has already been used, remove any thermal grease from the
top of the processor using a lint-free cloth.
3 Align the processor with the socket keys on the processor socket. See
Figure 3-12.
CAUTION: Positioning the processor incorrectly can permanently damage the
system board or the processor. Be careful not to bend the pins in the processor
socket.
4 With the hook-shaped release and bent load levers on the processor socket
in the open position, match the processor with the alignment mark
indicator and the socket keys and set the processor lightly in the socket.
See Figure 3-12.
CAUTION: Do not use force to seat the processor. When the processor is
positioned correctly, it engages easily into the socket.
5 Close the processor shield.
1 processor alignment mark (triangle) 2 processor
3 processor shield 4 hook-shaped socket-release lever
5 processor socket 6 socket key (4)
7 bent load lever 8 alignment notchInstalling System Components 143
6 Rotate the bent load lever down until it snaps into place.
7 Rotate the hook-shaped socket-release lever down until it snaps into place.
See Figure 3-12.
8 Replace the heat sink. See "Installing a Heat Sink" on page 139.
9 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
10 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
11 Press to enter the System Setup and check that the processor
information matches the new system configuration.
System Memory
Each system board has 16 memory module sockets for the installation of
DDR3 unbuffered ECC DIMMs (ECC UDIMMs), registered DIMMs
(RDIMMs), and load reduced DIMMs (LRDIMMs) to support processor 1
and processor 2. See "System Board Connectors" on page 197 for the location
of the memory modules.
Memory Module Installation Guidelines
Follow these guidelines when installing memory modules on the sled system
board.
• Use only Dell approved R/LR/UDIMM DDR3 memory modules in 2 GB,
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, and 32 GB capacities. DIMM types (R/LR/UDIMM)
cannot be mixed.
• DIMM slots are numbered 1 to 8 and designated by two channels. The
number of channels used and the allowable configuration depend on the
memory mode selected in the System Setup program.
• DIMMs must be installed in each channel starting with the DIMM socket
farthest from the processor, per Table 3-2.
• Memory optimized mode is supported on the sled system board.144 Installing System Components
• Memory sparing and memory mirroring are supported on the sled system
board. Memory sparing requires that all the DIMMs are identically
populated in all 4 channels. One channel will be the spare and not
accessible as system memory until brought online to replace a failing
channel. For memory mirroring, two channels operate as mirrors for each
other, identical DIMMs must be installed in the same slots across both
channels.
Supported DIMM Configuration
For the sequence of the 16 DIMM sockets, see Figure 3-13. When you insert
the DIMM(s), always start with DIMM_A1. For single processor
configurations, the optimized memory module installation sequence is
A1/A2/A3/A4/A5/A6/A7/A8. See Table 3-2 for dual processor configurations.
Figure 3-13. Memory Slot Locations
1 DIMM_A3 2 DIMM_A7
3 DIMM_A4 4 DIMM_A8
5 DIMM_B1 6 DIMM_B5
7 DIMM_B2 8 DIMM_B6
9 DIMM_B8 10 DIMM_B4
11 DIMM_B7 12 DIMM_B3
13 DIMM_A6 14 DIMM_ A2
15 DIMM_A5 16 DIMM_A1Installing System Components 145
NOTE: An empty DIMM socket is marked as " ". For best performance, all the
memory modules installed must be of the same speed, capacity, and from the same
manufacturer.
Table 3-2. Memory Module Configuration—Single Processor
DIMM
QTY
Processor 1
Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D
DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM
A1 A5 A2 A6 A3 A7 A4 A8
1
2
3
4
6
8
Table 3-3. Memory Module Configuration—Dual Processors
DIMM
QTY
Processor 1 Processor 2
Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D
DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM
A1 A5 A2 A6 A3 A7 A4 A8 B1 B5 B2 B6 B3 B7 B4 B8
2
6
8
12
16 146 Installing System Components
Removing Memory Modules
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
WARNING: The memory modules are hot to the touch for some time after the
system has been powered down. Allow time for the memory modules to cool
before handling them. Handle the memory modules by the card edges and avoid
touching the components on the memory module.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
3 Locate the memory module sockets. See Figure 3-14.
CAUTION: Handle each memory module only on either card edge, making sure
not to touch the middle of the memory module. To avoid damaging components on
the memory module, remove only one memory module at a time.
4 Simultaneously press down and out on the ejectors at both ends of the
memory module socket until the module is released from the socket.
See Figure 3-14.
5 Lift the module out of the socket. See Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14. Removing a Memory Module
1 memory module 2 memory module socket ejectors (2)Installing System Components 147
Installing Memory Modules
1 Press down and out on the ejectors on each end of the memory module
socket. See Figure 3-15.
2 Align the memory module correctly with the alignment key of the memory
module socket. See Figure 3-15.
3 Press down firmly on the memory module with your thumbs until the
module snaps into place. See Figure 3-15.
CAUTION: Even pressure during insertion must be applied at both ends of the
module simultaneously to prevent damage to the socket. No pressure should be
applied to the center of the module.
Complete the latching of the module into the socket by applying inward
pressure to the socket ejectors to assure that the ejectors are in a locked
position. When the memory module is properly seated in the socket, the
ejectors on the memory module socket align with the ejectors on other
identical sockets that have memory modules installed.
Figure 3-15. Installing a Memory Module
1 memory module 2 memory module socket ejectors (2)
3 alignment key148 Installing System Components
4 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Expansion Card
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
The sled supports a low-profile PCIe x16 expansion card installed in the
expansion card riser. To locate the expansion card riser, see Figure 3-17.
Removing the Expansion Card
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Once the front cover is detached, turn it over to expose the expansion card
side. See Figure 3-16.
4 Remove the screw securing the expansion card. See Figure 3-16.
5 Grasp the expansion card by its edges and carefully remove it from the
expansion card riser. See Figure 3-16.
6 If you are removing the card permanently, install a metal filler bracket over
the empty expansion slot opening, and secure with the screw.
NOTE: You must install a filler bracket over an empty expansion slot to maintain
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) certification of the system. The
brackets also keep dust and dirt out of the system and aid in proper cooling and
airflow inside the sled.Installing System Components 149
Figure 3-16. Removing and Installing the Expansion Card
Installing the Expansion Card
CAUTION: Expansion cards can only be installed in the slots on the expansion
card riser. Do not attempt to install expansion cards directly into the riser
connector on the system board.
1 Unpack the expansion card and prepare it for installation. For instructions,
see the documentation accompanying the card.
2 Hold the card by its edges, position the card so that the card edge
connector aligns with the expansion card riser connector on the front
cover. See Figure 3-16.
3 Insert the card edge connector firmly into the riser connector until the
card is fully seated.
4 Replace the screw securing the expansion card. See Figure 3-16.
5 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
1 expansion card 2 screw150 Installing System Components
Expansion Card Riser
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
Removing the Expansion Card Riser
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the expansion card. See "Removing the Expansion Card" on
page 148.
4 Remove the two screws securing the expansion card riser to the front cover.
See Figure 3-17.
5 Pull the expansion card riser away from the front cover. See Figure 3-17.
Figure 3-17. Removing and Installing the Expansion Card Riser
1 screws (2) 2 expansion card riserInstalling System Components 151
Installing the Expansion Card Riser
1 Place the expansion card riser into the front cover. See Figure 3-17.
2 Replace the two screws securing the expansion card riser. See Figure 3-17.
3 Replace the expansion card. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on
page 149.
4 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Mezzanine Cards
The sled supports a variety of optional mezzanine cards.
• Mellanox QDR ConnectX-2 Infiniband mezzanine card
• Mellanox FDR ConnectX-3 Infiniband mezzanine card
• Intel 82599 dual-port 10 GbE mezzanine card
Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
The installation and removal procedures of the dual-port and single port
Infiniband mezzanine cards are similar. Following is an example showing the
replacement procedure of a dual-port Infiniband mezzanine card.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the two screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly
to the sled tray. See Figure 3-18.
4 Lift the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly out of the sled tray. See
Figure 3-18.152 Installing System Components
Figure 3-18. Removing and Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card Assembly
5 Remove the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the
bracket. See Figure 3-19.
6 Pull the mezzanine card bridge board away from the mezzanine slot. See
Figure 3-19.
1 screws (2) 2 Infiniband mezzanine card assemblyInstalling System Components 153
Figure 3-19. Removing and Installing the Mezzanine Card Bridge Board
7 Remove the three screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card to the
bracket. See Figure 3-20.
8 Remove the Infiniband mezzanine card from the bracket. See Figure 3-20.
1 screw 2 mezzanine card bridge board
3 bracket
1
2
3154 Installing System Components
Figure 3-20. Removing and Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card
Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Align the Infiniband mezzanine card with the screw holes on the bracket.
See Figure 3-20.
2 Replace the three screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card to the
bracket. See Figure 3-20.
3 Install the mezzanine card bridge board into the mezzanine slot on the
Infiniband mezzanine card. See Figure 3-19.
4 Replace the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the
bracket. See Figure 3-19.
5 Lower the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray.
1 Infiniband mezzanine card 2 screws (3)
2
1Installing System Components 155
6 Replace the two screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly
to the sled tray. See Figure 3-18.
7 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the two screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to
the sled tray. See Figure 3-21.
4 Lift the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly out of the sled tray. See
Figure 3-21.
Figure 3-21. Removing and Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card Assembly 156 Installing System Components
5 Remove the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the
bracket. See Figure 3-22.
6 Pull the mezzanine card bridge board away from the mezzanine slot. See
Figure 3-22.
Figure 3-22. Removing and Installing the Mezzanine Card Bridge Board
7 Remove the three screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card to the
bracket. See Figure 3-23.
8 Remove the 10 GbE mezzanine card from the bracket. See Figure 3-23.
1 screws (2) 2 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly
1 screw 2 mezzanine card bridge board
3 10 GbE mezzanine card
1
2
3Installing System Components 157
Figure 3-23. Removing and Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card
Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Align the 10 GbE mezzanine card with the screw holes on the bracket. See
Figure 3-23.
2 Replace the three screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card to the
bracket. See Figure 3-23.
3 Install the mezzanine card bridge board into the mezzanine slot on the
10 GbE mezzanine card. See Figure 3-22.
1 10 GbE mezzanine card 2 screw (3)
3 mezzanine card bridge board
connector
4 SFP + port 1
5 SFP + port 0
2
1
4 3
5158 Installing System Components
4 Replace the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the
bracket. See Figure 3-22.
5 Lower the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-21.
6 Replace the two screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to
the sled tray. See Figure 3-21.
7 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
SD Card Reader
Removing the SD Card Reader
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the mezzanine card. See "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card" on page 151 or "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on
page 155.
4 If installed, remove the SD card. Locate the SD card slot in the SD card
reader and press inward on the card to release it from the slot and remove
the card. See Figure 3-24.Installing System Components 159
Figure 3-24. Removing and Installing the SD Card
5 Disconnect the SD card reader cable from the SD card reader. See
Figure 3-25.
6 Remove the two screws securing the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25.
7 Lift the SD card reader from the SD card reader support bracket. See
Figure 3-25.
1 SD card 2 SD card slot
1 2160 Installing System Components
Figure 3-25. Removing and Installing the SD Card Reader
Installing the SD Card Reader
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Place the SD card reader on the SD card reader support bracket. See
Figure 3-25.
2 Replace the two screws securing the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25.
3 Connect the SD card reader cable to the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25.
4 If applicable, install the SD card. Hold the SD card with the label side
facing to the right and press the card into the slot to lock into place. See
Figure 3-24.
1 SD card reader cable 2 screws (2)
3 SD card slot 4 SD card reader
5 SD card reader connectorInstalling System Components 161
5 Replace the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on
page 157.
6 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
7 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Removing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the mezzanine card. See "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card"
on page 155 or "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 151.
4 Remove the SD card reader. See "Removing the SD Card Reader" on
page 158.
5 Remove the two screws securing the SD card reader support bracket. See
Figure 3-26.
6 Lift the support bracket out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-26.
Figure 3-26. Removing and Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket
1 screws (2) 2 SD card reader support bracket162 Installing System Components
Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket
1 Align the SD card reader support bracket with the screw holes on the sled
tray. See Figure 3-26.
2 Replace the two screws securing the SD card reader support bracket. See
Figure 3-26.
3 Replace the SD card reader. See "Installing the SD Card Reader" on
page 160.
4 Replace the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on
page 157.
5 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Internal Hard-Drives
The sled supports up to two 2.5-inch hard-drives attached internally to the
sled tray.
Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: Combining SATA and SAS hard-drives in the same sled configuration
is not supported.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134.
3 Loosen the thumbscrew securing the hard-drive carrier to the hard-drive
bracket. See Figure 3-27.
4 Slide and lift the hard-drive carrier out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-27.Installing System Components 163
Figure 3-27. Removing and Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier
Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: Combining SATA and SAS hard-drives in the same sled configuration
is not supported.
1 Place the hard-drive carrier into the sled tray and slide into place. See
Figure 3-27.
2 Tighten the thumbscrew to secure the hard-drive carrier in place. See
Figure 3-27.
3 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135.
4 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
1 thumbscrew 2 hard-drive carrier164 Installing System Components
Removing a Hard-Drive From the Hard-Drive Carrier
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the four screws securing the hard-drive. See Figure 3-28.
2 Lift the hard-drive out of the hard-drive carrier. See Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-28. Removing and Installing a Hard-Drive from the Hard-Drive Carrier
1 hard-drive 2 hard-drive carrier
3 screws (4)Installing System Components 165
Installing a Hard-Drive Into a Hard-Drive Carrier
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Align the hard-drive carrier with the new hard-drive screw holes. See
Figure 3-28.
2 Replace the four screws securing the hard-drive. See Figure 3-28.
Removing the Hard-Drive Tray
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134.
3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 162.
4 Remove the three screws securing the hard-drive tray. See Figure 3-29.
5 Lift the hard-drive tray at an angle and slide the standoff holes on the
hard-drive tray out of the sled tray standoffs. See Figure 3-29.166 Installing System Components
Figure 3-29. Removing and Installing the Hard-Drive Tray
Installing the Hard-Drive Tray
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Insert the sled tray’s standoff holes into the sled tray standoffs. See
Figure 3-29.
2 Replace the two screws securing the hard-drive tray. See Figure 3-29.
3 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 163.
4 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135.
5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
1 screws (3) 2 hard-drive tray
3 hard-drive tray standoff holes (2)Installing System Components 167
Interposer Extender
Removing the Interposer Extender
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134.
3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 162.
4 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 165.
5 Press down the cable-locking tab and disconnect the power cable from the
interposer extender. See Figure 3-30.
6 Remove the two screws securing the interposer extender to the sled tray.
See Figure 3-30.
7 Grasp the interposer extender by its edges and carefully remove it from the
system board connector.
8 Lift the interposer extender out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-30.168 Installing System Components
Figure 3-30. Removing and Installing the Interposer Extender
Installing the Interposer Extender
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Hold the card by its edges, position the interposer extender so that the
edge connector aligns with the system board connector. See Figure 3-30.
2 Insert the card edge connector firmly into the system board connector
until the card is fully seated.
3 Replace the two screws securing the interposer extender to the sled tray.
See Figure 3-30.
4 Connect the power cable to the interposer extender. Press down on the
locking tab to secure the power cable. See Figure 3-30.
1 screws (2) 2 interposer extender
3 power cableInstalling System Components 169
5 Replace the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 166.
6 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 163.
7 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135.
8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Node Power Distribution Board
Removing the Node Power Distribution Board
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134.
3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 162.
4 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 165.
5 Remove the interposer extender. See "Removing the Interposer Extender"
on page 167.
6 Disconnect all cables from the node power distribution board (NPDB).
See Figure 3-31. When you disconnect the power cable, press down the
cable-locking tab and disconnect the power cable from the NPDB.
Note the routing of the cable on the sled as you remove them from the sled
tray. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to
prevent the cables from being pinched or crimped.
7 Remove the four screws securing the NPDB to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-31.
8 Lift the NPDB out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-31.170 Installing System Components
Figure 3-31. Removing and Installing the Node Power Distribution Board
Installing the Node Power Distribution Board
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Insert the new power distribution board into the right retaining clip at a
45-degree angle, and then press the other end of the board down into the
left retaining clip to secure the board in place. Make sure to align the new
power distribution board with the screw holes on the bracket. See
Figure 3-31.
2 Replace the four screws securing the NPDB. See Figure 3-31.
3 Connect all cables to the NPDB. See Figure 3-31.
1 power cable 2 front panel cable
3 screws (4) 4 management cable
5 node power distribution boardInstalling System Components 171
4 You must route the cables properly on the sled tray to prevent them from
being pinched or crimped.
5 Replace the interposer extender. See "Installing the Interposer Extender"
on page 168.
6 Replace the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 166.
7 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 163.
8 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135.
9 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
System Battery
Removing the System Battery
WARNING: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly
installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended
by the manufacturer. See your safety information for additional information.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Locate the battery socket on the system board. See "System Board
Connectors" on page 197.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the battery connector, you must firmly support the
connector while installing or removing a battery.
4 Press the "-" side of the battery outward to allow the battery to pop out
from the socket.
5 Lift the battery out of the connector. See Figure 3-32.172 Installing System Components
Figure 3-32. Removing and Installing the System Battery
Installing the System Battery
WARNING: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly
installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended
by the manufacturer. See your safety information for additional information.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Hold the new battery with the "+" facing the retention clip on the battery
connector. See Figure 3-32.
2 Insert the "-" side of the battery then push the positive side
3 Gently pull the retention clip towards the positive side of the connector
and slide the battery into the connector until the retention clip snaps into
place. See Figure 3-32.
4 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
6 Reconnect the system to the electrical outlet and turn the system on,
including any attached peripherals.
1 system battery 2 connectorInstalling System Components 173
7 Enter the System Setup program to confirm that the battery is operating
properly. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45.
8 Enter the correct time and date in the System Setup program's Time and
Date fields.
9 Exit the System Setup program.
System Board
Removing the System Board
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134.
4 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
5 Remove the heat sink. See "Removing a Heat Sink" on page 137.
6 Remove the processor. See "Removing a Processor" on page 140.
7 Remove the memory modules. See "Removing Memory Modules" on
page 146.
8 If installed, remove the SAS mezzanine card, Infiniband mezzanine card,
or 10 GbE mezzanine card. See "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card" on page 151 or "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on
page 155.
9 Remove the SD card reader. See "Removing the SD Card Reader" on
page 158.
10 Remove the SD card reader support bracket. See "Removing the SD Card
Reader Support Bracket" on page 161.
11 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 162.174 Installing System Components
12 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 165.
13 Remove the interposer extender. See "Removing the Interposer Extender"
on page 167.
14 Remove the node power distribution board. See "Removing the Node
Power Distribution Board" on page 169.
15 Disconnect all cables from the system board. See Figure 3-33.
When you disconnect the power cable, press down the cable-locking tab
and disconnect the power cable from the NPDB. See Figure 3-33.
Note the routing of the cables as you remove it from the sled tray. You
must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent the
cables from being pinched or crimped.
Figure 3-33. Removing and Installing the Cables
16 Remove the six screws securing the system board. See Figure 3-34.
1 management cable 2 power cable
3 front panel cableInstalling System Components 175
17 Grasp the system board by the edges and lift the system board out of the
sled tray. See Figure 3-34.
Figure 3-34. Removing the System Board
Installing the System Board
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Unpack the new system board.
2 Holding the system board by the edges, slide the system board into the
sled tray. See Figure 3-34.
3 Replace the six screws securing the system board to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-34.
4 Connect all cables to the system board. See Figure 3-33.
1 screws (6) 2 system board
1
2176 Installing System Components
5 You must route the cables properly on the sled tray to prevent them from
being pinched or crimped.
6 Install the node power distribution board. See "Installing the Node Power
Distribution Board" on page 170.
7 Install the interposer extender to the new board. See "Installing the
Interposer Extender" on page 168.
8 Install the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 166.
9 Install the hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 163.
10 Install the SD card reader support bracket. See "Installing the SD Card
Reader Support Bracket" on page 162.
11 Install the SD card reader. See "Installing the SD Card Reader" on
page 160.
12 Transfer the processors to the new system board. See "Removing a
Processor" on page 140 and "Installing a Processor" on page 142.
13 Remove the memory modules and transfer them to the same locations on
the new board. See "Removing Memory Modules" on page 146 and
"Installing Memory Modules" on page 147.
14 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
15 If applicable, install the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband
Mezzanine Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card"
on page 157.
16 Install the expansion card. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on
page 149.
17 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
18 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135.
19 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.Troubleshooting 177
4
Troubleshooting
Safety First—For You and Your System
WARNING: Whenever you need to lift the system, get others to assist you. To
avoid injury, do not attempt to lift the system by yourself.
WARNING: Before removing the system cover, disconnect all power, then unplug
the AC power cord, and then disconnect all peripherals, and all LAN lines.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
Installation Problems
Perform the following checks if you are troubleshooting an installation
problem:
• Check all cable and power connections (including all rack cable
connections).
• Unplug the power cord and wait for one minute. Then reconnect the
power cord and try again.
• If the network is reporting an error, verify that the system has enough
memory and disk space.
• Remove all added peripherals, one at a time, and try to turn on the system.
If after removing a peripheral the system works, it may be a problem with
the peripheral or a configuration problem between the peripheral and the
system. Contact the peripheral vendor for assistance.178 Troubleshooting
• If the system does not power on, check the LED display. If the power LED
is not on, you may not be receiving AC power. Check the AC power cord to
make sure that it is securely connected.
Troubleshooting System Startup Failure
If your system halts during startup, especially after installing an operating
system or reconfiguring your system’s hardware, check for invalid memory
configurations. These could cause the system to halt at startup without any
video output.
For all other startup issues, note any system messages that appear onscreen.
See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45 for more information.
Troubleshooting External Connections
Ensure that all external cables are securely attached to the external
connectors on your sled before troubleshooting any external devices.
See Figure 1-1 for the front-panel connectors on the sled.
Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem
1 Check the sled and power connections to the monitor.
2 Check the video interface cabling from the sled to the monitor.
Troubleshooting a USB Device
Use the following steps to troubleshoot a USB keyboard and/or mouse. For
other USB devices, go to step 5.
1 Ensure that the sled is turned on.
2 Disconnect the keyboard and mouse cables from the sled briefly and
reconnect them.
3 If the problem is resolved, restart the sled, enter the System Setup
program, and check if the nonfunctioning USB ports are enabled.
4 Swap the keyboard/mouse with a known-working keyboard/mouse.
5 If another sled is installed, connect the USB device to the sled. If the USB
device works with a different sled, the first sled may be faulty. Troubleshooting 179
If the problem is resolved, replace the faulty keyboard/mouse.
If the problem is not resolved, proceed to the next step to begin
troubleshooting the other USB devices attached to the system.
a Power down all attached USB devices and disconnect them from the
sled.
b Restart the sled and, if your keyboard is functioning, enter the System
Setup program. Verify that all USB ports are enabled. See "USB
Configuration" on page 77.
c If your keyboard is not functioning, you can also use remote access. If
the system is not accessible, see "System Board Jumper Settings" on
page 195 for instructions on setting the NVRAM Clear jumper inside
your system and restoring the BIOS to the default settings.
d Reconnect and turn on each USB device one at a time.
6 If a device causes the same problem, power down the device, replace the
USB cable, and power up the device.
If the problem persists, replace the device.
If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device
1 Turn off the sled and any peripheral devices connected to the serial port.
2 Swap the serial interface cable with another working cable, and turn on the
sled and the serial device.
If the problem is resolved, replace the interface cable.
3 Turn off the sled and the serial device, and swap the device with a
comparable device.
4 Turn on the sled and the serial device.
If the problem is resolved, replace the serial device.
If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.180 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a NIC
1 Restart the sled and check for any system messages pertaining to the NIC
controller.
2 Check the appropriate indicator on the NIC connector. See "NIC Indicator
Codes" on page 14.
• If the link indicator does not light, check all cable connections.
• If the activity indicator does not light, the network driver files might
be damaged or missing.
• Remove and reinstall the drivers if applicable. See the NIC's
documentation.
• Change the auto-negotiation setting, if possible.
• Use another connector on the switch or hub.
If you are using a NIC card instead of an integrated NIC, see the
documentation for the NIC card.
3 Ensure that the appropriate drivers are installed and the protocols are
bound. See the NIC's documentation.
4 Enter the System Setup program and confirm that the NIC ports are
enabled. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45.
5 Ensure that the NICs, hubs, and switches on the network are all set to the
same data transmission speed. See the documentation for each network
device.
6 Ensure that all network cables are of the proper type and do not exceed the
maximum length.
If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203.Troubleshooting 181
Troubleshooting a Wet Enclosure
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
1 Turn off the sleds and attached peripherals
2 Disconnect the enclosure from the electrical outlet or the PDU.
CAUTION: Wait until all of the indicators on the power supplies turn off before
proceeding.
3 Remove all sleds from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
4 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
5 Disassemble components from the sled. See "Installing System
Components" on page 125.
• Hard-drives
• Cooling shroud
• Processors and heat sinks
• Memory modules
• Expansion card
• Mezzanine card
• Interposer extender
• Node power distribution board
• SD card reader
6 Remove all server enclosure components. See the PowerEdge C8000
Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information.
7 Let the sled dry thoroughly for at least 24 hours.
8 Reinstall all server enclosure components. See the PowerEdge C8000
Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information.
9 Reinstall all sled components you removed in step 5.
10 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.182 Troubleshooting
11 Reinstall the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
12 Reconnect the server enclosure to the electrical outlet or the PDU.
13 Turn on the sleds and attached peripherals.
14 If the system fails to start, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting a Damaged Enclosure
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
1 Turn off the sleds and attached peripherals.
2 Disconnect the enclosure from the electrical outlet or the PDU.
3 Ensure that the following components are properly installed in the
enclosure:
• Power sleds
• Fan modules
• Sleds
4 Ensure that the following components are properly installed in the sled:
• SD card reader
• Node power distribution board
• Interposer extender
• Mezzanine card
• Expansion card
• Memory modules
• Processors and heat sinks
• Cooling shroud
• Hard-drives
5 Ensure that all cables are properly connected.
6 Ensure that all components are properly installed and free of damage. Troubleshooting 183
7 If the system fails to start, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting the Enclosure Fan Modules
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
NOTE: The fan modules are hot-swappable. Remove and replace only one fan
module at a time in the server enclosure that is turned on. Operating the system
without all three fan modules for extended periods of time can cause the system to
overheat. Review the following table before you begin to replace the fan modules.
Table 4-1. Fan Module Thermal Behavior Per Sled
Fan Module
Status
BMC (Processor/Memory)/Server Enclosure Temperature Status
OK/OK OK/Fail Fail/OK Fail/Fail
Fan module
normal/OK
PID,
Chassis ambient
curve A,
Exhaust
temperature
control curve A
PID,
80% PWM
Chassis ambient
curve B,
Exhaust
temperature
control curve A
100% PWM
One fan
module fails
PID,
Chassis ambient
curve C,
Exhaust
temperature
control curve B
100% PWM 100% PWM
Exhaust
temperature
control curve B
100% PWM
System
throttling184 Troubleshooting
1 Locate the faulty fan in the back of the enclosure.
Each fan module has indicators that identify a faulty fan.
2 Remove the enclosure fan module. See the PowerEdge C8000 Systems
Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information.
3 Examine the blades for debris. If debris is present, carefully remove it.
4 Reseat the faulty fan. See the PowerEdge C8000 Hardware’s Owner
Manual for more information.
5 If none of the fan indicators show a fault LED and the blades do not power
on, log into the BMC web interface and check for status messages.
6 If the problem is not resolved, install a new fan.
7 If the new fan does not operate, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Two fan
modules fail
After 10
minutes of
system
throttling
system will be
forced to shut
down
After 10
minutes of
system
throttling
system will be
forced to shut
down
After 10
minutes of
system
throttling
system will be
forced to shut
down
After 10
minutes of
system
throttling
system will be
forced to shut
down
Three fan
modules fail
System force
shutdown
System force
shutdown
System force
shutdown
System force
shutdown
Table 4-1. Fan Module Thermal Behavior Per Sled
Fan Module
Status
BMC (Processor/Memory)/Server Enclosure Temperature Status
OK/OK OK/Fail Fail/OK Fail/FailTroubleshooting 185
Troubleshooting the Power Sled
CAUTION: Remove and replace one PSU module at a time. Leave a failed PSU
module installed in the power sled until you are ready to replace it. Operating the
system with a power sled removed for extended periods of time can cause the
system to overheat.
NOTE: The 1400 W power supply module in the power sled require a 200-240 V
power source to operate.
1 Locate the power sled to be removed or the power sled that contains the
failed PSU module. The PSU module’s status indicator will either light up
green or amber. If the PSU module is faulty the status indicator lights up
amber.
2 Replace the faulty PSU module in the power sled. See the PowerEdge
C8000 Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information.
NOTE: After installing a power sled with a new PSU module, allow several seconds
for the system to recognize the power supply and to determine if it is working
properly. The status indicator turns green to signify that the module is functioning
properly.
If none of the PSU modules show a fault LED and the sleds do not power
on, log into the BMC web interface and check for status messages. See
Using the Baseboard Management Controller Guide for more information.
If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting System Memory
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
NOTE: Invalid memory configurations can cause your system to halt at startup
without video output. See "System Memory" on page 143 and verify that your
memory configuration complies with all applicable guidelines.
1 If the system is not operational, turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 186 Troubleshooting
2 After 10 seconds, turn on the sled and attached peripherals and note the
messages on the screen.
Go to step 13 if an error message appears indicating a fault with a specific
memory module.
3 Enter the System Setup program and check the system memory settings.
See "Main Menu" on page 52. Make any changes to the memory settings, if
needed.
If the memory settings match the installed memory but a problem is still
indicated, go to step 13.
4 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
5 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
6 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
7 Check the memory channels and ensure that they are populated correctly.
See "Supported DIMM Configuration" on page 144.
8 Reseat the memory modules in their sockets. See "Removing Memory
Modules" on page 146 and "Installing Memory Modules" on page 147.
9 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
10 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
11 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
12 Enter the System Setup program and check the system memory settings.
See "Main Menu" on page 52.
If the problem is not resolved, proceed with the next step.
13 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
14 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
15 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
16 If a diagnostic test or error message indicates a specific memory module as
faulty, swap or replace the module.Troubleshooting 187
17 To troubleshoot an unspecified faulty memory module, replace the
memory module in the first DIMM socket with a module of the same type
and capacity. See "Installing Memory Modules" on page 147.
18 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
19 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
20 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
21 As the system boots, observe any error message that appears and the
diagnostic indicators on the front of the system.
22 If the memory problem is still indicated, repeat step 13 through step 21 for
each memory module installed.
23 If the problem persists after all memory modules have been checked, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting a Hard-Drive
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
CAUTION: This troubleshooting procedure can destroy data stored on the
hard-drive. Before you proceed, back up all files on the hard-drive.
1 If your sled has a RAID controller and your hard-drives are configured in a
RAID array, perform the following steps:
a Restart the sled and enter the host adapter configuration utility
program by pressing for a RAID controller or
for a SAS mezzanine card.
See the documentation supplied with the host adapter for information
about the configuration utility.
b Ensure that the hard-drive(s) have been configured correctly for the
RAID array.
c Take the hard-drive offline and reseat the drive. See "Removing a
Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162.188 Troubleshooting
d Exit the configuration utility and allow the system to boot to the
operating system.
2 Ensure that the required device drivers for your controller card are installed
and are configured correctly. See the operating system documentation for
more information.
3 Restart the sled, enter the System Setup program, and verify that the
controller is enabled and the drives appear in the System Setup program.
See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45.
If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting a Storage Controller
NOTE: When troubleshooting a SAS RAID controller, also see the documentation
for your operating system and the controller.
1 Enter the System Setup program and ensure that the SAS controller is
enabled. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45.
2 Restart the sled and press the applicable key sequence to enter the
configuration utility program.
• for a LSI SAS 2008 mezzanine card
• for a LSI 9265-8i SAS RAID Card
See the controller’s documentation for information about configuration
settings.
3 Check the configuration settings, make any necessary corrections, and
restart the system.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
4 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
5 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
6 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.Troubleshooting 189
7 Ensure that the controller card is firmly seated into the system board
connector. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149.
8 If you have a battery-cached SAS RAID controller, ensure that the RAID
battery is properly connected and, if applicable, the memory module on
the RAID card is properly seated.
9 Ensure that the cables are firmly connected to the storage controller.
10 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
11 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
12 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
13 If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting Expansion Cards
NOTE: When troubleshooting an expansion card, see the documentation for your
operating system and the expansion card.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
1 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
2 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
3 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
4 Ensure that each expansion card is firmly seated in its connector. See
"Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149.
5 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
6 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
7 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
8 If the problem is not resolved, see "Getting Help" on page 203.190 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Processors
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
1 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
2 Remove the sled from the server enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on
page 129.
3 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
4 Ensure that each heat sink is properly installed. See "Installing a Heat
Sink" on page 139.
5 Ensure that each processor is properly installed. See "Installing a Processor"
on page 142.
6 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
7 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
8 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
9 If the problem persists, turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
10 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
11 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
12 Remove processor 2. See "Removing a Processor" on page 140.
13 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
14 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
15 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
If the problem persists, the processor is faulty. See "Getting Help" on
page 203.
16 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.Troubleshooting 191
17 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
18 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
19 Replace processor 1 with processor 2. See "Installing a Processor" on
page 142.
20 Repeat step 13 through step 16.
If you have tested both the processors and the problem persists, the system
board is faulty. See "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting the System Board
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
3 Locate the NVRAM clear jumper on the system board.
4 Clear the NVRAM.
5 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
6 If there is still a problem with the compute sled, remove and reinstall the
sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.192 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the System Battery
NOTE: If the system is turned off for long periods of time (for weeks or months), the
NVRAM may lose its system configuration information. This situation is caused by a
defective battery.
1 Re-enter the time and date through the System Setup program. See
"System Setup Options at Boot" on page 46.
2 Turn off the sled and remove it from the enclosure for at least one hour.
3 Reconnect the sled to the server enclosure and turn on the sled.
4 Enter the System Setup program.
If the date and time are not correct in the System Setup program, replace
the battery. See "Removing the System Battery" on page 171.
CAUTION: You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as
authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or
telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not
authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety
instructions that came with the product.
If the problem is not resolved by replacing the battery, see "Getting Help"
on page 203.
NOTE: Some software may cause the system time to speed up or slow down. If the
system seems to operate normally except for the time kept in the System Setup
program, the problem may be caused by software rather than by a defective
battery.Troubleshooting 193
IRQ Assignment Conflicts
Most PCI devices can share an IRQ with another device, but they cannot use
an IRQ simultaneously. To avoid this type of conflict, see the documentation
for each PCI device for specific IRQ requirements.
PCI IRQ pool definition is the BIOS code assigned at run time.
IRQ Line Assignment IRQ Line Assignment
IRQ0 8254 timer IRQ8 Real-time clock
IRQ1 Keyboard controller IRQ9 PCI IRQ pool definition
IRQ2 Cascade for IRQ9 IRQ10 PCI IRQ pool definition
IRQ3 Default for COM2 IRQ11 PCI IRQ pool definition
IRQ4 Default for COM1 IRQ12 Mouse controller
IRQ5 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ13 Processor
IRQ6 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ14 Primary IDE controller
IRQ7 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ15 Secondary IDE controller194 TroubleshootingJumpers and Connectors 195
5
Jumpers and Connectors
This section provides specific information about the system jumpers. It also
provides some basic information on jumpers and switches and describes the
connectors on the various boards in the system.
System Board Jumper Settings
Figure 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings
Table 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings
Item Jumper Setting Description
1 Service mode (default) The flash security setting is enabled.
The flash security and NVRAM clear
signal is disabled.196 Jumpers and Connectors
2 NVRAM clear (default) The configuration settings are retained at
system boot.
The configuration settings are cleared at
the next system boot.
3 ME firmware
recovery
(default) The ME firmware recovery jumper is
disabled.
The ME firmware recovery jumper
enables ME firmware recovery mode.
4 BIOS recovery (default) The BIOS recovery jumper is disabled.
The BIOS recovery jumper enables the
BIOS flash memory special recovery
mode.
5 Password enable (default) The password feature is enabled.
The password feature is disabled.
6 Power button
pass
(default) The BMC triggers a power button signal.
The power button passthrough signal is
triggered.
Table 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings
Item Jumper Setting DescriptionJumpers and Connectors 197
System Board Connectors
Figure 5-2. System Board Connectors
1 USB connectors (2) 2 PCIe x8 mezzanine slot
3 SD card reader (internal USB)
connector
4 internal SAS mezzanine slot
5 mini-SAS connector 0 6 onboard SATA connector 4
7 onboard SATA connector 5 8 system battery
9 DIMM sockets for processor 1
DIMMA3 socket
DIMMA4 socket
DIMMA7 socket
DIMMA8 socket
10 processor 1
11 DIMM sockets for processor 2
DIMMB1 socket
DIMMB2 socket
DIMMB5 socket
DIMMB6 socket
12 main power connector
13 internal hard-drive interposer 14 SGPIO connector 2
15 internal serial connector 16 front panel connector 1
17 PCIe x16 back GPGPU 18 processor 2198 Jumpers and Connectors
19 DIMM sockets for processor 2
DIMMB3 socket
DIMMB4 socket
DIMMB7 socket
DIMMB3 socket
20 DIMM sockets for processor 1
DIMMA1 socket
DIMMA2 socket
DIMMA5 socket
DIMMA6 socket
21 LAN LED connector 22 PCIe x16 slot 1
23 PCIe x16 slot 2 24 SGPIO connector 1
25 power button/power-on indicator 26 VGA connector
27 serial connector 28 internal BMC serial console
connector
29 BMC management port 30 consolidated BMC cable
connector
31 NIC2 connector (RJ45) 32 NIC1 connector (RJ45)
33 system identification indicatorJumpers and Connectors 199
Interposer Extender Connectors
Figure 5-3. Interposer Extender Connectors
1 SATA connector 4 2 2-pin power connector
3 SATA connector 5 4 IPMB connector
5 SGPIO connector 6 SATA connector 0
7 SATA connector 1 8 SATA connector 2
9 SATA connector 3200 Jumpers and Connectors
SD Card Reader Connectors
Figure 5-4. SD Card Reader Connectors
1 SD card reader cable connector 2 SD card connectorJumpers and Connectors 201
Node Power Distribution Board Connectors
Figure 5-5. Node Power Distribution Board Connectors
1 power/throttle connector 2 I2C connector
3 12V S2 power connector 4 HDD1 power connector
5 power connector 6 HDD3 power connector
7 HDD2 power connector 8 system board power connector
9 12 V S1 power connector 10 remote sensor connector
11 hard-drive LED indicator
connector
12 system board control connector
13 LAN pass-through connector 202 Jumpers and ConnectorsGetting Help 203
6
Getting Help
Contacting Dell
For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355).
NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact
information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog.
Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options.
Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be
available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or
customer service issues:
1 Visit support.dell.com.
2 Click your country/region at the bottom of the page. For a full listing of
country/region, click All.
3 Click All Support from Support menu.
4 Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.
5 Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.204 Getting HelpFILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for
Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm
Index 205
Index
A
about your system, 11
B
back cover
installing, 135
removing, 134
C
command line interfaces, 90
connectors
system board, 197
console redirection
configuring, 47
cooling shroud
installing, 136
removing, 135
D
Dell
contacting, 203
E
Ethernet mezzanine card
installing, 157
removing, 155-157
expansion card
installing, 149
removing, 148
expansion card riser
installing, 151
removing, 150
F
features
front panel, 12
front cover
installing, 133
removing, 132
H
hard-drive
installing, 165
removing, 164
hard-drive carrier
installing, 163
removing, 162FILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for
Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm
206 Index
hard-drive tray
installing, 166
removing, 165
heat sink
installing, 139
removing, 137
I
indicator
front panel, 12
NIC, 14
power, 13
system identity, 13
indicator codes
power and system board, 16
Infiniband mezzanine card
installing, 154
removing, 151-154
installing
back cover, 135
cooling shroud, 136
Ethernet mezzanine card, 157
expansion card, 149
expansion card riser, 151
front cover, 133
hard-drive, 165
hard-drive carrier, 163
hard-drive tray, 166
heat sink, 139
Infiniband mezzanine card, 154
interposer extender, 168
memory modules, 147
NPDB, 170
processor, 142-143
SD card, 132
SD card reader, 160-161
SD card reader bracket, 162
sled, 130
sled blank, 131
system battery, 172
system board, 175
interposer extender
installing, 168
removing, 167
IPMI command list, 113
M
memory modules (DIMMs)
configuration, 144-145
installation guidelines, 143
installing, 147
removing, 146
N
NPDB
installing, 170
removing, 169FILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for
Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm
Index 207
P
POST error codes, 19
power management settings, 122
processor
installing, 142-143
removing, 140-141
R
removing
back cover, 134
cooling shroud, 135
Ethernet mezzanine
card, 155-157
expansion card, 148
expansion card riser, 150
front cover, 132
hard- drive carrier, 162
hard-drive, 164
hard-drive tray, 165
heat sink, 137
Infiniband mezzanine
card, 151-154
interposer extender, 167
memory modules, 146
NPDB, 169
processor, 140-141
SD card, 131
SD card reader, 158-160
SD card reader bracket, 161
sled, 129
sled blank, 130
system battery, 171
system board, 173
S
safety, 177
SD card
installing, 132
removing, 131
SD card reader
installing, 160-161
removing, 158, 160
SD card reader bracket
installing, 162
removing, 161
service tag, 18
sled
front features, 12
installing, 130
removing, 129
sled blank
installing, 131
removing, 130
sled front features, 12
system battery
installing, 172
removing, 171
system board
connectors, 197
installing, 175
jumper settings, 195
removing, 173
system features
accessing, 11
System log
See system setup screenFILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for
Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm
Index 208
system sensor overview, 38
system setup
active state power management
configuration, 75
BMC LAN configuration, 82
chassis power management, 58
chassis PSU configuration, 59
CPU configuration, 62
embedded network devices, 72
emergency throttling, 61
memory configuration, 65
PCI configuration, 70
PCI slot configuration, 76
power capping, 60
power management, 56
prefetch configuration, 64
remote access configuration, 83
SATA configuration, 67
security settings, 78
USB configuration, 77
system setup program
entering, 46
general help, 47
system setup menu, 45
system setup screen
advanced, 55
boot, 86
exit, 88
main, 52
security, 78
server, 80
T
troubleshooting
damaged enclosure, 182
enclosure fan modules, 183
expansion cards, 189
external connections, 178
hard-drive, 187
power sled, 185
processors, 190
RTC battery, 192
serial device, 179
storage controller, 188
system board, 191
system memory, 185
USB device, 178
video, 178
wet enclosure, 181
Dell 2145cn
Multifunktionsprinter
Brugerhåndbog
www.dell.com | support.dell.com2 | Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt
funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt
Din nye maskine er udstyret med et antal specielle funktioner, der forbedrer kvaliteten af de dokumenter, du udskriver.
Med denne maskine kan du:
Udskrive i enestående kvalitet og med høj hastighed
• Du kan udskrive i et fuldt farveområde med cyan, magenta,
gul og sort.
• Du kan skrive ud med en opløsning på op til 2.400 x 600 dpi.
Se Softwareafsnit.
• Maskinen kan udskrive på papir i A4-format med en
hastighed på op til 20 sider pr. minut og på papir i Letterformat med en hastighed på op til 21 sider pr. minut.
Håndtere mange forskellige typer printbart materiale
• Universalbakken understøtter brevhoved, konvolutter, etiketter,
medier i brugerdefinerede størrelser, postkort og kraftigt papir.
Universalbakken kan rumme op til 100 ark almindeligt papir.
• Bakke 1 til 250 ark og den ekstra bakke til 500 ark
understøtter almindeligt papir i forskellige størrelser.
Udarbejde professionelle dokumenter
• Udskriv vandmærker. Du kan tilpasse dine dokumenter
med ord, som f.eks. ”Fortroligt”. Se Softwareafsnit.
• Udskrive plakater. Teksten og billederne på hver side
i dokumentet forstørres og udskrives på tværs af arkene,
som derefter kan limes sammen til en plakat. Se Softwareafsnit.
• Du kan udskrive fortrykte formularer og brevpapir på almindeligt
papir. Se Softwareafsnit.
Spare tid og penge
• Du kan udskrive flere sider på et enkelt ark og derved spare
papir.
• Maskinen sparer strøm, fordi strømforbruget nedsættes
automatisk, når den ikke er i brug.
• Du kan spare papir ved at udskrive på begge sider af
papiret (dobbeltsidet udskrivning). Se Softwareafsnit.
Udvide maskinens kapacitet
• Maskinen har et ekstra hukommelsesstik til udvidelse af
hukommelsen (se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85).
• Zoran IPS Emulation* kompatibel med PostScript 3 (PS)
aktiverer PS-udskrivning.
.
Udskrive i forskellige miljøer
• Du kan udskrive fra Windows 2000 og Windows XP/2003/
2008/Vista samt fra Linux- og Macintosh-systemer.
• Maskinen er udstyret med et USB-interface og et netværks
interface.
Kopiere originaler i flere formater
• Maskinen kan udskrive flere kopier af et billede fra en original
på en enkelt side.
• Der er specielle funktioner til at slette katalog- og avisbaggrund.
• Udskriftskvaliteten og billedstørrelsen kan justeres
og forbedres samtidigt.
Scanne originalerne og sende dem med det samme
• Scanne i farver og bruge den præcise komprimering i form
af JPEG-, TIFF- og PDF-formaterne.
• Scanne og hurtigt sende filer til flere destinationer ved brug
af netværksscanning.
Angive et bestemt tidspunkt for overførsel af en fax
(ekstraudstyr)
• Du kan angive et bestemt tidspunkt at sende en fax og du kan
også sende faxen til flere gemte destinationer.
• Efter overførslen kan maskinen udskrive faxrapporter i henhold
til indstillingen.
* Zoran IPS Emulation kompatibel med PostScript 3
© Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. Alle rettigheder
forbeholdes. Zoran, Zoran-logoet, IPS/PS3 og OneImage er
varemærker, der tilhører Zoran Corporation.
* 136 PS3-skrifttyper
Omfatter UFST og MicroType fra Monotype Imaging Inc.
SPECIALFUNKTIONERFunktioner i dit nye laserprodukt | 3
FUNKTIONER PR. MODEL
Maskinen er udviklet til at understøtte alle dine dokumentbehov – fra udskrivning og kopiering til mere avancerede netværksløsninger til din virksomhed.
Basisfunktionerne i denne maskine omfatter følgende:
( : inkluderet, O: ekstraudstyr)
OM DENNE BRUGERVEJLEDNING
Denne brugervejledning indeholder oplysninger om maskinens grundlæggende funktionalitet samt en detaljeret forklaring på hvert trin under anvendelsen.
Både nye og øvede brugere kan bruge denne vejledning til installation og brug af maskinen.
Nogle udtryk i denne vejledning bruges som synonymer, som beskrevet herunder:
• Dokument betyder det samme som original.
• Papir er synonymt med medie eller udskriftsmedie.
Følgende tabel beskriver de konventioner, der anvendes i denne vejledning:
FUNKTIONER Dell 2145cn
USB 2.0
USB-hukommelsesgrænseflade
DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder)
Harddisk (ekstraudstyr) O
Kabelbaseret 10/100 Base TX lokalnetværk
Duplex (2 sidet) udskrivning
FAX
KONVENTION BESKRIVELSE EKSEMPEL
Fed Bruges til tekst på skærmen eller udtryk, der er trykt på maskinen. Start
Bemærk Bruges til at angive yderligere oplysninger eller detaljerede specifikationer om
maskinens funktionalitet og egenskaber.
Datoformatet kan variere fra land til
land.
Forsigtig Bruges til at give brugerne oplysninger for at beskytte maskinen mod mulige
mekaniske beskadigelser eller fejlfunktion.
Berør ikke tonerpatronens grønne
underside.
Fodnote Bruges til at angive yderligere detaljerede oplysninger om bestemte ord eller udtryk. a. sider pr. minut
(Se side 1 for at få
yderligere oplysninger)
Bruges til at føre brugere til referencesiden for yderligere oplysninger. (Se side 1 for at få yderligere oplysninger)4 | Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt
FLERE OPLYSNINGER
Du kan finde oplysninger om klargøring og brug af maskinen i de vejledninger og på det websted, der er angivet nedenfor. Du kan vælge at udskrive vejledningerne
eller få dem vist på skærmen.
Vejledning til hurtig
installation
Giver oplysninger om opsætning af maskinen, og dette kræver, at du følger instruktionerne i vejledningen for at forberede maskinen.
Onlinebrugervejledning
Indeholder trinvise beskrivelser af, hvordan du bruger alle maskinens funktioner. Desuden kan du se, hvordan maskinen skal
vedligeholdes, og hvordan du løser problemer og installerer tilbehør.
Denne brugervejledning indeholder også Softwareafsnit for at give dig oplysninger om, hvordan du udskriver dokumenter med
maskinen på forskellige operativsystemer, samt hvordan du bruger den medfølgende software.
Du kan få adgang til brugervejledningen på andre sprog i mappen Manual på cd’en med printersoftware.
Hjælp til
printerdriveren
Indeholder hjælp til printerdriverens egenskaber og vejledning om indstilling af udskrivningsegenskaber. Du åbner skærmbilledet
med hjælp til printerdriveren ved at klikke på Hjælp i dialogboksen med Printeregenskaber.
Dells websted Hvis du har adgang til internettet, kan du få hjælp og support, finde printerdrivere og vejledninger og få andre oplysninger på Dells
websted: www.dell.com eller support.dell.com.Sikkerhedsoplysninger | 5
sikkerhedsoplysninger
VIGTIGE FORSKRIFTER OG SIKKERHEDSOPLYSNINGER
Betydningen af ikoner og skilte i denne brugerhåndbog:
Disse advarselsskilte er anbragt for at forhindre, at du og andre kommer til skade. Følg dem udtrykkeligt. Når du har læst dette
afsnit, skal du opbevare det et sikkert sted til fremtidig reference.
ADVARSEL
Farer eller usikre rutiner kan medføre risiko for alvorlig personskade eller dødsfald.
FORSIGTIG
Farer eller usikre rutiner kan medføre risiko for mindre personskade eller beskadigelse af genstande.
FORSIGTIG
Følg disse grundlæggende sikkerhedsforanstaltninger for at reducere risikoen for ild, eksplosion, elektrisk stød
eller personskade.
Forsøg IKKE at.
Adskil IKKE.
Berør IKKE.
Følg udtrykkeligt retningslinjerne.
Træk stikket ud af stikkontakten.
Kontroller, at maskinen er jordet for at forhindre elektrisk stød.
Ring til servicecentret for at få hjælp.
1. Sørg for at gennemlæse og forstå alle instruktioner.
2. Brug sund fornuft ved betjening af elektrisk udstyr.
3. Følg alle advarsler og instruktioner på maskinen og i den medfølgende dokumentation.
4. Hvis en betjeningsinstruktion ser ud til at være i strid med sikkerhedsoplysningerne, skal du rette dig efter sikkerhedsoplysningerne.
Du kan have misforstået instruktionen. Hvis du ikke kan finde en løsning på problemet, kan du rådføre dig med en salgs- eller
servicerepræsentant.
5. Træk stikket ud af stikkontakten og/eller telefonstikket, inden maskinen rengøres. Undgå brug af flydende rengøringsmidler eller
midler på sprayflaske. Brug kun en fugtig klud til rengøring.
6. Maskinen må ikke placeres på en ustabil vogn, et ustabilt stativ eller bord. Den kan falde ned og forårsage alvorlig beskadigelse.
7. Maskinen må aldrig placeres på, i nærheden af eller over en radiator, et varmeapparat, airconditionanlæg eller en
ventilationsåbning.
8. Placer ikke noget på strømledningen. Placer ikke maskinen, så ledningerne udsættes for unødigt slid ved, at andre træder på dem.
9. Stikkontakter og forlængerledninger må ikke overbelastes. Dette kan medføre reduceret ydelse og kan føre til fare for brand eller
elektrisk stød.
10. Pas på, at kæledyr ikke tygger på strømledningen eller ledningerne til telefon eller pc.
11. Skub aldrig genstande ind i maskinen gennem kabinettet eller åbninger i kabinettet. De kan komme i kontakt med farlige,
strømførende steder, og der kan opstå fare for brand eller elektrisk stød. Pas på ikke at spilde væske på eller ind i maskinen.
12. Reducer risikoen for elektrisk stød ved aldrig at skille maskinen ad. Bring maskinen til en kvalificeret servicetekniker, hvis reparation
er påkrævet. Hvis dæksler åbnes eller fjernes, kan dette medføre fare for elektrisk stød eller andre farlige situationer. Ukorrekt
samling af maskinen kan medføre elektrisk stød, når maskinen efterfølgende anvendes. 6 | Sikkerhedsoplysninger
13. Tag stikket fra maskinen ud af telefonstikket, pc’en og vægstikket, og overlad serviceopgaver til kvalificerede teknikere i følgende
situationer:
• Hvis nogen del af strømledningen, stikket eller tilslutningskablet beskadiges eller bliver slidt.
• Hvis der er spildt væske i maskinen.
• Hvis maskinen har været udsat for regn eller anden form for vand.
• Hvis maskinen ikke fungerer korrekt, når instruktionerne er blevet fulgt.
• Hvis maskinen er blevet tabt, eller kabinettet ser ud til at være beskadiget.
• Hvis maskinens ydelse pludselig ændres mærkbart.
14. Juster kun indstillinger, som beskrives i brugervejledningen. Ukorrekt justering af andre indstillinger kan føre til beskadigelser, og det
kan kræve omfattende reparation af kvalificerede serviceteknikere at få maskinen til at fungere normalt igen.
15. Undgå at anvende maskinen under tordenvejr. Der er en lille risiko for at få elektrisk stød fra lynnedslag. Træk om muligt stikkene til
både lysnet og telefon ud, indtil tordenvejret er overstået.
16. Den strømledning, der følger med maskinen, bør anvendes, for at maskinen kan bruges på sikker vis. Hvis du bruger en ledning, der
er længere end 2 m med en 110 V maskine, skal den være på 16 AWG
a
eller større.
17. Brug kun en telefonledning af typen 26 AWG eller større.
18. GEM DISSE INSTRUKTIONER.
19. Denne maskine kan kun benyttes i det land, hvor du har købt den (pga. forskellig spænding, frekvens,
telekommunikationskonfiguration, etc.).
a.AWG: American Wire GuageIndhold | 7
2 Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt
5 Sikkerhedsoplysninger
INTRODUKTION
12
12 Oversigt over printeren
12 Set forfra
12 Set bagfra
13 Oversigt over kontrolpanelet
14 Status Indikatorernes betydning
14 Godkender status for tonerpatronen
15 Menuoversigt
16 Medfølgende software
16 Printerdriverfunktioner
16 Printerdriver
16 PostScript-driver
SÅDAN KOMMER DU I GANG
17
17 Opsætning af hardwaren
17 Udskrivning af testside
17 Konfiguration af netværket
17 Supported network environments
18 Konfiguration af netværksprotokol via maskinen
18 Brug af programmet SetIP
18 Systemkrav
18 Microsoft® Windows®
18 Macintosh
19 Linux
19 Installation af softwaren
20 Maskinens grundlæggende indstillinger
20 Højdejustering
20 Ændring af sprog i displayet
21 Indstilling af dato og klokkeslæt
21 Ændring af tidsformatet
21 Ændring af standardfunktionen
21 Indstilling af lyde
21 Indtastning af tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet
22 Sådan bruger du sparetilstandene
22 Indstilling af timeout for udskriftsjob
22 Auto fortsæt
23 Ændring af skrifttypeindstillinger
ILÆGNING AF ORIGINALER OG UDSKRIFTSMEDIER
24
24 Ilægning af originaler
24 På scannerglaspladen
24 I DADF’en
25 Valg af udskriftsmedier
26 Specifikationer for udskriftsmedie
27 Mediestørrelser, der understøttes i de forskellige tilstande
27 Retningslinjer for specielle udskriftsmedier
28 Ændring af papirstørrelsen i papirbakken
29 Placering af papir
29 Placering af papir i bakke 1 eller den valgfri bakke
29 Ilægning af papir i universalbakken
30 Justering af outputsupporten
30 Ved papir i Letter-størrelse
30 Ved papir i A4- eller Legal-størrelse
31 Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type
indhold8 | Indhold
indhold
KOPIERING
32
32 Valg af papirbakke
32 Kopiering
32 Ændring af indstillingerne for hver kopi
32 Mørkhed
32 Originaltype
32 Formindsket eller forstørret kopi
33 Ændring af scanningsstørrelsesindstillingerne
33 Ændring af standardindstillingerne for kopiering
33 Kopiering af ID-kort
33 Brug af de specielle kopifunktioner
33 Sortering
34 2- eller 4-op-kopiering
34 Plakatkopiering
34 Klonkopiering
34 Sletning af baggrundsbilleder
34 Bogkopiering
35 Margenskift
35 Slet kant
35 Justering af gråtone ved kopiering
35 Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret
36 Indstilling af timeout for kopiering
SCANNING
37
37 Grundlæggende om scanning
37 Scanning fra kontrolpanelet
37 Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i Dell Scan Manager.
37 Scanning til programmer
38 Scanning ved hjælp af en netværksforbindelse
38 Klargøring til netværksscanning
39 Scanning til e-mail
40 Scanning til en FTP-server
40 Scanning til en SMB-server
40 Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob
40 Ændring af standardscanningsindstillinger
40 Automatisk udskrivning af scanningsbekræftelse
41 Konfiguration af adressekartoteket
41 Registrering af hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser
41 Konfiguration af gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser
41 Hentning af globale e-mail-adresser fra LDAP-serveren
41 Brug af poster fra adressekartoteket
41 Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket
42 Udskrivning af adressekartoteket
42 Scanning af begge sider af papiret
GRUNDLÆGGENDE UDSKRIVNING
43
43 Sådan udskriver du et dokument
43 Annullering af et udskriftsjob
FAX
44
44 Afsendelse af en fax
44 Indstilling af faxhovedet
44 Justering af dokumentindstillinger
45 Automatisk afsendelse af en fax
45 Manuel afsendelse af en fax
45 Bekræftelse af en transmission
45 Automatisk genkaldIndhold | 9
indhold
45 Genopkald til det senest kaldte nummer
45 Sender faxer på begge sider af papiret
45 Modtagelse af en fax
45 Valg af papirbakke
45 Ændring af modtagetilstand
46 Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Fax
46 Manuel modtagelse i tilstanden Tel
46 Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern telefon
46 Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax
46 Modtagelse af faxer i tilstanden DRPD
47 Modtagelse i sikker modtagetilstand
47 Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand
47 Modtagelse af faxer i hukommelsen
47 Andre måder at faxe på
47 Afsendelse af en fax til flere destinationer
47 Afsendelse af en udskudt fax
48 Afsendelse af en prioriteret fax
48 Videresendelse af faxer
49 Faxopsætning
49 Ændring af faxindstillingerne
50 Ændring af standarddokumentindstillingerne
50 Automatisk udskrivning af en rapport over afsendte faxer
50 Oprettelse af et adressekartotek
BRUG AF USB-FLASH-HUKOMMELSE
53
53 Om USB-hukommelse
53 Tilslutning af en USB-hukommelsesenhed
53 Scanning til en USB-hukommelsesenhed
53 Scanning
54 Tilpasning af scanning til USB
54 Udskrivning fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed
54 Sådan udskrives et dokument fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed
54 Sikkerhedskopiering af data
54 Sikkerhedskopiering af data
54 Gendannelse af data
55 Håndtering af USB-hukommelse
55 Sletning af en billedfil
55 Formatering af en USB-hukommelsesenhed
55 Visning af USB-hukommelsesstatus
VEDLIGEHOLDELSE
56
56 Udskrivning af rapporter
56 Udskrivning af en rapport
56 Justering af farvekontrasten
57 Brug af Advarsel om lav toner
57 Sådan slettes hukommelsen
57 Rengøring af maskinen
57 Rengøring af maskinen udvendigt
57 Indvendig rengøring af maskinen
59 Rengøring af scannerenheden
59 Vedligeholdelse af patronen
59 Opbevaring af tonerpatroner
59 Forventet patronlevetid
59 Fordeling af toner
60 Udskiftning af tonerpatronen
61 Sletter meddelelsen om Ikke mere toner
61 Udskiftning af papiroverførselsbæltet
62 Vedligeholdelsesdele10 | Indhold
indhold
62 Kontrol af udskiftelige dele
63 Udskiftning af DADF gummipuden
63 Styring af maskinen fra webstedet
63 Sådan får du adgang til Embedded Web Service
63 Kontrol af maskinens serienummer
FEJLFINDING
64
64 Tip til at undgå papirstop
64 Afhjælpning af dokumentstop
64 Indføringsfejl ved dokumentindlæsning
65 Fejl ved papirudføring
65 Indføringsfejl ved valsen
65 Udbedring af papirstop
65 I papirindføringsområdet
66 I universalbakken
68 I fikseringsenheden
69 I papirudføringsområdet
70 I den valgfri bakke
71 Displaymeddelelsernes betydning
75 Løsning af andre problemer
75 Papirindføring
75 Udskrivningsproblemer
76 Problemer med udskriftskvaliteten
79 Kopieringsproblemer
80 Scanningsproblemer
80 Faxproblemer
81 Almindelige PostScript-problemer
81 Almindelige Windows-problemer
82 Almindelige Linux-problemer
84 Almindelige Macintosh-problemer
BESTILLING AF FORBRUGSSTOFFER OG EKSTRAUDSTYR
85
85 Forbrugsstoffer
85 Ekstraudstyr
85 Sådan køber du
INSTALLATION AF TILBEHØR
86
86 Der skal tages visse forholdsregler, når der installeres tilbehør
86 Aktivering af det tilføjede tilbehør i printeregenskaber
86 Opgradering af et hukommelsesmodul
86 Installation af et hukommelsesmodul
87 Brug af harddisken
87 Installation af harddisken
88 Udskrivning med harddisken (ekstraudstyr)
89 Filpolitik
90 Sletter resterende billeddata
SPECIFIKATIONER
91
91 Generelle specifikationer
91 Printerspecifikationer
92 Specifikationer for scanner
92 Specifikationer for kopimaskine
93 Specifikationer for faxIndhold | 11
indhold
PENDIKS
94
94 Dells politik for teknisk support
94 Kontakt til Dell
94 Garanti- og returpolitik
ORDLISTE
95
INDEKS12 | Introduktion
introduktion
Maskinens hovedkomponenter er:
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Oversigt over printeren
• Oversigt over kontrolpanelet
• Status Indikatorernes betydning
• Godkender status for tonerpatronen
• Menuoversigt
• Medfølgende software
• Printerdriverfunktioner
OVERSIGT OVER PRINTEREN
Set forfra Set bagfra
1
Styr til indstilling
af dokumentbredde
12 USB-hukommelsesport
2 DADF 13 Indikator for papirniveau
3 Kontrolpanel 14 Ekstra bakke 2
4 Outputsupport 15
Styr til indstilling
af papirbredde
på universalbakke
5 Frontdæksel 16 Tonerpatron
6 Håndtag til frontdæksel 17 Papiroverførselsbælte
7 Håndtag til universalbakke 18 Scannerlåg
8 Universalbakke 19 Scannerlåsekontakten
9 Bakke 1
20
Scannerglasplade
10 Dokumentindføringsbakke
21
Scannerenhed
11 Dokumentudbakke
1 USB-port 7 Tænd/sluk-kontakt
2 Netværksport 8 Strømindgang
3
15-bens valgfri
bakkeforbindelse
9 Dæksel til kontrolkort
4 Telefonstik 10 Bagdæksel
5
Telefonstik til ekstern
telefon (EXT)
11 Kabelstyring
6 HåndtagIntroduktion | 13
OVERSIGT OVER KONTROLPANELET
1 Genvejstaster
Giver dig mulighed for at gemme hyppigt kaldte
faxnumre og ringe til dem blot ved at trykke på nogle få
knapper.
2 Shift
Giver dig mulighed for at vælge hurtigopkaldstast 16 -
30.
3
Adressekartotek
( )
Du kan gemme faxnumre, du ofte bruger,
i hukommelsen eller søge efter gemte faxnumre og email-adresser.
4 Opløsning ( ) Justerer opløsningen for det dokument, der skal faxes.
5
Genopkald/Pause
( )
Hvis maskinen er i klar-tilstand, ringes der op til det
senest kaldte nummer. Hvis den er i redigeringstilstand,
indsættes der en pause i et faxnummer.
6 Fax ( ) Aktiverer faxtilstand.
7 Kopiering ( ) Aktiverer kopitilstand.
8 Scan/Email ( ) Aktiverer scanningstilstand.
9 Display
Der vises aktuel status og meddelelser i displayet, når
maskinen er i brug.
10 Toner colors
De tonerfarver, der vises under LCD-displayet fungerer
sammen med meddelelserne på displayet. Se Statusindikatorer med tonerpatronmeddelelser på side 14.
11 Menu ( )
Aktiverer menutilstanden og skifter mellem de
tilgængelige menuer.
12
Venstre og højre
pil
Bruges til at skifte mellem de tilgængelige indstillinger i
den valgte menu og til at øge eller formindske værdier.
13 OK ( ) Bekræfter det, der er valgt på skærmen.
14 Tilbage ( ) Vender tilbage til menuens øverste niveau.
15 Status ( )
Viser maskinstatus. Se ”Status Indikatorernes
betydning” på side 14.
16 Mørkhed ( )
Justerer lysstyrken for det dokument, der skal
kopieres. Se ”Mørkhed” på side 32.
17 Originaltype ( )
Bruges til at vælge dokumenttype for det aktuelle
kopieringsjob. Se ”Originaltype” på side 32.
18 Id-kopi ( )
Du kan kopiere begge sider af ID-kortet, f.eks.
et kørekort på et enkelt ark papir. Se ”Kopiering af
ID-kort” på side 33.
19
Formindsk/Forstør
( )
Gør en kopi mindre eller større end originalen.
20 Duplex ( )
Gør det muligt at udskrive på begge sider
af papiret.
21
USB-udskrivning
( )
Filer, der er gemt på en USB-enhed, kan udskrives
direkte, hvis du sætter USB-enheden i USB-porten
foran på maskinen. Se ”Om USB-hukommelse” på
side 53.
22 Taltastatur
Bruges til at ringe til et nummer eller indtaste
alfanumeriske tegn. Se ”Bogstaver og tal på
taltastaturet” på side 22.
23 Håndfrit kald ( ) Opretter forbindelse med telefonlinjen.
24 Stop/Slet ( )
Stopper en igangværende handling med det
samme. Sletter/annullerer kopieringsindstillingerne,
f.eks. mørkhed, dokumenttype, kopistørrelse og
kopiantal i klar-tilstand.
25 Color Start ( ) Starter et job i farvetilstand.
26 Black Start ( ) Starter et job i sort/hvid-tilstand.
• Alle illustrationer i denne brugervejledning kan være anderledes
end på din maskine, afhængigt af maskinens tilbehør eller model.
• Udbakkens overflade kan blive meget varm, hvis du udskriver et stort
antal sider på én gang. Pas på, at du ikke berører overfladen,
og sørg for, at børn ikke kommer i nærheden af den.
h
X
Y14 | Introduktion
STATUS INDIKATORERNES BETYDNING
Farven på Status ( )-lampen angiver maskinens aktuelle status.
GODKENDER STATUS FOR TONERPATRONEN
Statussen på tonerpatroner vises med Status ( )-indikatoren og LCDdisplayet. Hvis tonerpatronen er næsten tom, eller den skal udskiftes, lyser
Status ( )-indikatoren rødt, og displayet viser meddelelsen. Pilemærket
viser, hvilken farve toner der skaber problemer eller kan installeres med en
ny patron.
Eksempel:
Ovenstående eksempel viser tonerpatronens status for den farve, som pilen
peger på. Kontroller meddelelsen for at finde ud af, hvad problemet er,
samt hvordan det afhjælpes. Se side 71 for at få yderligere oplysninger
om fejlmeddelelser.
STATUS BESKRIVELSE
Fra • Maskinen er offlinetilstand.
• Maskinen er i strømbesparelsestilstand. Der
skiftes automatisk til online, når der modtages
data, eller når der trykkes på en vilkårlig tast.
Grøn Blinker • Når den grønne indikator blinker langsomt,
modtager printeren data fra computeren.
• Når den grønne indikator blinker hurtigt,
udskriver printeren data.
Lyser • Maskinen er tændt og kan benyttes.
Rød Blinker • Der er opstået en mindre fejl, og maskinen
venter på, at fejlen bliver rettet. Se meddelelsen
i displayet, og løs problemet ved at se under
”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71.
• Tonerpatronen er ved at være tom. Bestil en
ny tonerpatron se ”Bestilling af forbrugsstoffer
og ekstraudstyr” på side 85. Du kan midlertidigt
forbedre udskriftskvaliteten ved at fordele
den resterende toner. Se ”Udskiftning af
tonerpatronen” på side 60.
Lyser • Der er opstået et problem, f.eks. papirstop,
et åbnet dæksel, eller der er intet papir
i bakken, så maskinen kan ikke fortsætte
jobbet. Kontroller meddelelsen på displayet,
og se ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på
side 71 for at løse problemet.
• Tonerpatronen er tom, eller den skal
udskiftes. Se ”Displaymeddelelsernes
betydning” på side 71.
Kontroller altid meddelelsen på displayet for at afhjælpe problemet.
Instruktionen i afsnittet Fejlfinding hjælper dig med at betjene maskinen
korrekt. Se ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71 for flere
oplysninger.Introduktion | 15
MENUOVERSIGT
Fra kontrolpanelet kan du få adgang til menuer, så du kan klargøre maskinen eller bruge funktionerne i den. Du kan få adgang til menuerne ved at trykke på Menu ( ). Se følgende
diagram.
Nogle menuer vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes på denne maskine.
.
Fax Feature
Darkness
Multi Send
Delay Send
Priority Send
Forward
Secure Receive
Add Page
Cancel Job
Fax Setup
Sending
Redial Times
Redial Term
Prefix Dial
ECM Mode
Send Report
Image TCR
Dial Mode
Receiving
Receive Mode
Ring To Answer
Fax Setup
(fortsat)
Stamp RCV Name
RCV Start Code
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
Junk Fax Setup
DRPD Mode
Duplex Print
Change Default
Resolution
Darkness
Auto Report
Copy Feature
Copy Collation
2-Up
4-Up
Poster Copy
Clone Copy
Adjust Bkgd.
Book Copy.
Margin Shift
Edge Erase
Gray Enhance
Copy Setup
Scan Size
Change Default
Copies
Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Original Type
Scan Feature
USB Memory
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Format
E-mail
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Feature
(fortsat)
FTP
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
SMB
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
System Setup
Machine Setup
Machine ID
Machine Fax No
Date & Time
Clock Mode
Form Menu
Select Form
Language
Default Mode
Power Save
Scan PWR Save
Timeout
Job Timeout
Altitude Adj.
Auto Continue
Import Setting
Export Setting
Paper Setup
Paper Size
Paper Type
Paper Source
Wide A4
Sound/Volume
Key Sound
Alarm Sound
Speaker
Ringer
System Setup
(fortsat)
Report
All Report
Configuration
Supplies Info
Address Book
Send Report
Sent Report
Fax RCV Report
Schedule Jobs
JunkFax Report
Network Info.
NetScan Report
User Auth List
PCL Font List
PS3 Font List
Stored Job
Udført job
Net Auth Log
Maintenance
Supplies Life
Color
Serial Number
Toner Low Alert
System Setup
(fortsat)
Clear Setting
All Settings
Fax Setup
Copy Setup
Scan Setup
System Setup
Network
Address Book
Sent Report
Fax RCV Report
NetScan Report
Job Manage
Active Job
Store Job
File Policy
ImageOverwrite
Immediate
On Demand
Network
TCP/IP
Ethernet Speed
Clear Setting
Network Info
Scan Setup
Change Default
USB Memory
E-mail
FTP
SMB
Send Report16 | Introduktion
MEDFØLGENDE SOFTWARE
Når du har konfigureret printeren og sluttet den til computeren, skal du
bruge den medfølgende cd og installere programmerne til printeren og
scanneren. Cd’en giver dig adgang til følgende software:
PRINTERDRIVERFUNKTIONER
Printerdriverne understøtter følgende standardfunktioner:
• Valg af papirretning, papirstørrelse, papirkilde og medietype
• Antal kopier
Du kan desuden bruge forskellige specielle udskrivningsfunktioner.
Tabellen nedenfor indeholder en generel oversigt over funktioner,
der understøttes af dine printerdrivere:
Printerdriver
PostScript-driver
Cd INDHOLD
Cd med
printerso
ftware
Windows • Printerdriver: Benyt denne driver til at få optimalt
udbytte af printeren.
• PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug
PostScript-driveren, når du skal udskrive
dokumenter med komplekse skrifttyper og grafik
i PS-sproget.
• Scannerdriver: TWAIN og WIA-driverne
(Windows Image Acquisition) kan bruges til
scanning af dokumenter på maskinen.
• Scan Manager: Du kan finde programoplysninger
om Scan Manager og om status på den
installerede scannerdriver.
• Dell Toner Management SystemTM
: Viser
printerstatus og navnet på jobbet, når du sender
et job til udskrivning. Vinduet Dell Toner
Management SystemTM
viser også
tonerniveauet og giver dig mulighed for at bestille
nye tonerpatroner.
• Status Moniter: Med dette program
kan du overvåge maskinens status, og du bliver
advaret, hvis der sker fejl under udskrivningen.
• SmarThru Office
a
: Dette er det Windowsbaserede program, som følger med
multifunktionsmaskinen.
• Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan
du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra
computerens skrivebord.
• Firmware Update Utility: Dette program kan
hjælpe dig med at opdatere maskinens firmware.
• SetIP: Brug dette program til at definere maskinens
TCP/IP-adresser.
a. Giver dig mulighed for at redigere et scannet billede på mange måder ved
at bruge et effektivt billedredigeringsprogram og sende billedet pr. e-mail.
Du kan også åbne et andet billedredigeringsprogram, f.eks. Adobe
Photoshop, fra SmarThru. Yderligere oplysninger finder du i den
skærmhjælp, der findes i SmarThru-programmet.
Linux • PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug
denne fil til at køre maskinen fra en Linuxcomputer og udskrive dokumenter.
• SANE: Brug denne driver, når du skal scanne
dokumenter.
• Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan
du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra
computerens skrivebord.
Macintosh • Printerdriver: Benyt denne driver til at få optimalt
udbytte af printeren.
• PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug
denne fil til at køre maskinen fra en Macintoshcomputer og udskrive dokumenter.
• Scannerdriver: Du kan bruge TWAIN-driveren til
at scanne dokumenter på maskinen.
• Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan
du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra
computerens skrivebord.
FUNKTION WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH
Farvetilstand O O O
Indstilling af
udskriftskvalitet
O O O
Posterudskrivning O X X
Flere sider pr. ark
(N-op)
O O (2, 4) O
Tilpas til side O X O
a
a.Denne funktion understøttes kun af MAC OS X 10.4~10.5.
Skaleret udskrift O X O
Anden papirkilde til
første side
O X O
Vandmærke O X X
Overlay O X X
Duplex O X O
FUNKTION WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH
Farvetilstand O O O
Indstilling af
udskriftskvalitet
O O O
Posterudskrivning X X X
Flere sider pr. ark
(N-op)
O O (2, 4) O
Tilpas til side O X O
a
a.Denne funktion understøttes kun af MAC OS X 10.4~10.5.
Skaleret udskrift O X O
Anden papirkilde til
første side
X X O
Vandmærke X X X
Overlay X X X
Duplex O X OSådan kommer du i gang_ 17
sådan kommer du i gang
Dette kapitel indeholder trinvise instruktioner til, hvordan du opsætter maskinen.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Opsætning af hardwaren
• Udskrivning af testside
• Konfiguration af netværket
• Systemkrav
• Installation af softwaren
• Maskinens grundlæggende indstillinger
OPSÆTNING AF HARDWAREN
Dette afsnit viser de trin, der skal udføres for at opsætte hardwaren
og er forklaret i Lyninstallationsvejledning. Sørg for at læse
Lyninstallationsvejledning og udføre følgende trin.
1. Vælg en stabil placering.
Vælg et plant, stabilt sted med tilstrækkelig plads til luftcirkulation.
Sørg for, at der er tilstrækkelig plads til at åbne dæksler og bakker.
Stedet skal være godt udluftet og ikke udsat for direkte sollys, andre
varmekilder, kulde eller fugt. Anbring ikke maskinen tæt på kanten
af et bord eller et skrivebord.
Der kan udskrives i højder under 1.000 m. Brug højdeindstillingen til
at optimere udskrivningen. Se ”Højdejustering” på side 20 for at få
yderligere oplysninger.
Placer maskinen på et fladt og stabilt underlag, så den ikke hælder mere
end 2 mm. Ellers kan det påvirke udskriftskvaliteten.
2. Pak maskinen ud, og kontroller alle medfølgende komponenter.
3. Fjern tapen, idet du holder fast i maskinen.
4. Installer tonerpatronen.
5. Ilæg papir (se ”Placering af papir” på side 29).
6. Sørg for, at alle kabler er tilsluttet maskinen.
7. Tænd for maskinen.
UDSKRIVNING AF TESTSIDE
Udskriv en demoside for at kontrollere, at maskinen fungerer korrekt.
Sådan udskriver du en demoside:
Tryk på, og hold knappen OK nede i cirka 2 sekunder, i tilstanden Klar.
KONFIGURATION AF NETVÆRKET
Du skal konfigurere maskinens netværksprotokoller, før den kan bruges som
netværksprinter. Du kan konfigurere de grundlæggende netværksindstillinger
ved hjælp af maskinens kontrolpanel.
Supported network environments
Følgende tabel viser de netværksmiljøer, som maskinen understøtter:
Når du flytter maskinen, må du ikke vippe den eller vende den
på hovedet. Ellers kan toneren forurene maskinens indre, hvilket
kan føre til ødelæggelse af maskinen eller dårlig udskriftskvalitet.
PUNKT KRAV
Netværksinterface • Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
Netværksoperativsystem • Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista
• Forskellige Linux-operativsystemer
• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5
Netværksprotokoller • TCP/IP i Windows
• IPP
• SNMP
• DHCP
• BOOTP
Du kan konfigurere en DHCP-netværksprotokol ved at gå til webstedet
http://developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, vælge det
Bonjour-program til Windows, der er relevant for det operativsystem,
du kører, og derefter installere programmet. Med dette program får du
adgang til at foretage en automatisk rettelse af netværksparameteren.
Følg de anvisninger, der vises i installationsvinduet. Dette program
understøtter ikke Linux.18 | Sådan kommer du i gang
Konfiguration af netværksprotokol via maskinen
Du kan konfigurere TCP/IP-netværksparametre ved at følge nedenstående
fremgangsmåde.
1. Sørg for, at maskinen er tilsluttet netværket med et RJ-45 Ethernet-kabel.
2. Sørg for, at maskinen er tændt.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ) på kontrolpanelet, indtil Network vises i nederste
linje i displayet.
4. Tryk på OK for at få adgang til menuen.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil TCP/IP vises.
6. Tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Static vises.
8. Tryk på OK.
9. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil IP Address vises.
10. Tryk på OK.
Angiv en byte-værdi på mellem 0 og 255 ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Du
kan flytte mellem byte-værdierne ved at trykke på left/right arrow.
Gentag dette for at udfylde adressen fra 1. til 4. byte.
11. Tryk på OK, når du er færdig.
Gentag trin 9 og 10 for at konfigurere de andre TCP/IP-parametre:
undernetmaske og gateway-adresse.
Brug af programmet SetIP
Dette program er beregnet til konfiguration af netværkets IP-adresse på
baggrund af den MAC-adresse, der er angivet som hardwareserienummer
på netværkets printerkort eller interface. Programmet giver
netværksadministratoren adgang til at indstille flere netværks-IP-adresser
på samme tid.
Indstilling af netværksværdier
1. Udskriv en rapport over printerens netværkskonfiguration for at finde
printerens MAC-adresse. Se ”Printing reports” på side 55
2. Vælg Alle programmer → Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color
Laser MFP → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Set IP i Windows
Start-menuen.
3. Klik for at åbne TCP/IP-konfigurationsvinduet.
4. Indtast MAC-adresse, IP-adresse, undernetmaske og standardgateway
for netværkskortet, og klik derefter på Apply.
5. Klik på OK. Printeren udskriver netværksoplysningerne. Kontroller, at
indstillingerne er korrekte.
6. Klik på Exit.
SYSTEMKRAV
Før du begynder, skal du sikre dig, at dit system opfylder følgende
minimumkrav:
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Maskinen understøtter følgende Windows-operativsystemer.
Macintosh
Kontakt netværksadministratoren, hvis du ikke er sikker på, hvordan
du konfigurerer.
Du kan også konfigurere netværksindstillingerne via
netværksadministrationsprogrammerne.
• Embedded Web Service: Webserver, der er integreret
i netværksprinterserveren, og som giver dig mulighed for at:
- Konfigurere de netværksparametre, som maskinen skal bruge
til at oprette forbindelse til forskellige netværksmiljøer.
- Tilpasse maskinindstillinger.
• SetIP: Hjælpeprogram, der giver dig mulighed for at vælge
et netværksinterface og manuelt konfigurere adresser, der skal
bruges sammen med TCP/IP-protokollen.
• Du kan kun bruge programmet SetIP, når printeren er sluttet til et
netværk.
• Den følgende procedure er baseret på Windows XP.
Når du indtaster MAC-adressen. IP-adresse, undernetmaske,
standardgateway, og klik derefter på Apply.
OPERATIVS
YSTEM
KRAV (ANBEFALES)
PROCESSOR RAM
LEDIG
PLADS PÅ
HARDDISK
Windows
2000
Intel
®
Pentinum®
II 400
MHz (Pentium III 933
MHz)
64 MB
(128 MB)
600 MB
Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(256 MB)
1,5 GB
Windows
Server 2003
Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(512 MB)
1,25 GB til
2 GB
Windows
Server 2008
Pentium IV 1 GHz
(Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB
(2.048 MB)
10 GB
Windows
Vista
Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB
(1.024 MB)
15 GB
• Til alle Windows-operativsystemer kræves som minimum Internet
Explorer 5.0 eller nyere.
• Sådanne reparationer er ikke dækket af Dells garanti eller
serviceaftaler.
• Windows Terminal Services er kompatibelt med denne maskine.
OPERATIVS
YSTEM
KRAV (ANBEFALES)
PROCESSOR RAM
LEDIG
PLADS PÅ
HARDDISK
Mac OS X 10.4
eller lavere
• PowerPC G4/G5
• Intel-processor
• 128 MB til en
PowerPCbaseret Mac
(512 MB)
• 512 MB til en
Intel-baseret
Mac (1 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.5 • G4/G5 PowerPC
med en
processor på
867 MHz eller
hurtigere
• Intel-processor
• 512 MB (1
GB)
1 GBSådan kommer du i gang | 19
Linux
INSTALLATION AF SOFTWAREN
Du skal installere maskinsoftwaren til udskrivning. Softwaren omfatter
drivere, programmer og andre brugervenlige programmer.
1. Connect the network cable to your machine.
2. Sørg for, at netværkskonfigurationen for maskinen er fuldført.
(Se ”Konfiguration af netværket” på side 17). Alle programmer
på din pc bør være afsluttet, før du begynder installationen.
3. Indsæt cd-rom’en med printersoftware i cd-rom-drevet.
Cd-rom’en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et installationsvindue.
Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start → Kør. Skriv
X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med det bogstav, der repræsenterer
dit drev, og klik på OK.
Hvis du bruger Windows Vista, skal du klikke på Start → Alle
programmer → Tilbehør → Kør og skrive X:\Setup.exe.
4. Klik på Next.
• Vinduet ovenfor kan være lidt anderledes, hvis du geninstallerer
driveren.
5. Vælg Typical installation for a network printer, og klik derefter
på Next.
6. Listen over maskiner, der er tilgængelige på netværket, vises. Vælg den
printer, du ønsker at installere, på listen, og klik derefter på Next.
• Hvis maskinen ikke vises på listen, skal du klikke på Update for at opdatere
listen eller vælge Add TCP/IP Port for at tilføje maskinen på netværket.
Hvis du vil tilføje maskinen på netværket, skal du indtaste maskinens
portnavn og IP-adresse.
PUNKT KRAV
Operativ-system RedHat 8.0, 9.0 (32 bit)
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
Fedora Core 1~7 (32/64 bit)
Mandrake 9.2 (32 bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux 8.2, 9.0, 9.1 (32 bit)
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04 (32/64 bit)
Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64 bit)
Processor Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (IntelCore2)
RAM 512 MB (1024 MB)
Ledig plads på
harddisk
1 GB (1 GB)
Softwaren Linux Kernel 2.4 eller nyere
Glibc 2.2 eller nyere
CUPS
• Til arbejdet med store scannede billeder er det nødvendigt
at anvende en swap-partition på 300 MB eller mere.
• Linux-scannerdriveren understøtter den optiske opløsning
på maksimum.
• Følgende procedure er til brug af maskinen som en netværksmaskine.
Hvis du vil tilslutte en maskine via et USB-kabel, skal du se
i Softwareafsnit.
• Følgende procedure er baseret på Windows XP-operativsystemet.
Proceduren og det popup-vindue, der vises under installationen,
kan variere afhængigt af operativsystemet, printerfunktionen eller
det anvendte interface.20 | Sådan kommer du i gang
Du kontrollerer maskinens IP-adresse eller MAC-adresse ved at udskrive
en netværkskonfigurationsside (se ”Udskrivning af rapporter” på
side 56).
• Hvis du vil finde en fælles netværksprinter (UNC-stien), skal du vælge
Shared Printer [UNC] og angive delingsnavnet manuelt eller finde en
delt printer ved at klikke på knappen Browse.
7. Klik på Finish.
MASKINENS GRUNDLÆGGENDE INDSTILLINGER
Når installationen er fuldført, ønsker du måske at angive maskinens
standardindstillinger. Se næste afsnit, hvis du vil angive eller ændre
værdier.
Højdejustering
Udskriftskvaliteten påvirkes af det atmosfæriske tryk, hvor det atmosfæriske
tryk bestemmes af maskinens højde over havoverfladen. Følgende oplysninger
beskriver, hvordan du indstiller maskinen, så du får den bedste udskriftskvalitet.
Før du angiver højdeindstillingen, skal du finde den højde, du bruger
maskinen i.
1. Kontroller, at du har installeret printerdriveren med den medfølgende
cd med printersoftware.
2. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → DELL → DELL Printers → Dell
2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Setting Utility.
Du kan også klikke på Printer Setting Utility på statuslinjen i Mac OS X
(eller meddelelsesområdet i Linux).
3. Klik på Settings → Atitude adjustment. Vælg den korrekte værdi på
rullelisten, og klik derefter på Apply.
Ændring af sprog i displayet
Hvis du vil ændre det sprog, der vises i kontrolpanelet, skal du gøre følgende:
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Language vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på pileknapperne, indtil det ønskede sprog vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Hvis du ikke ved, hvad IP-adressen er, skal du kontakte
netværksadministratoren eller udskrive netværksoplysningerne
(se ”Udskrivning af rapporter” på side 56).
• Hvis maskinen ikke fungerer korrekt efter installationen,
skal du geninstallerer printerdriveren. Se Softwareafsnit.
• I forbindelse med installationen af printerdriveren registrerer
installationsprogrammet automatisk landestandarden for
operativsystemet, og standardpapirstørrelsen for maskinen
indstilles, så den passer til denne standard. Hvis du bruger en
anden landestandard på Windows-operativsystemet, skal du
ændre papirstørrelsen på maskinen, så den svarer til den
papirstørrelse, du oftest bruger. Når installationen er fuldført,
kan du ændre papirstørrelsen under printeregenskaberne.
1 Normal
2 High 1
3 High 2
4 High 3
Hvis din maskine er sluttet til et netværk, vises skærmbilledet
Embedded Web Service automatisk. Klik på Machine Settings
→ Setup (eller Machine Setup) → Altitude adj.. Vælg den
ønskede højdeværdi, og klik på Apply.
0Sådan kommer du i gang | 21
Indstilling af dato og klokkeslæt
Dato og klokkeslæt vises i displayet, når maskinen er tændt og klar til at blive
betjent.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Date & Time vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Indtast dato og klokkeslæt ved hjælp af taltastaturet.
Måned = 01 til 12
Dag = 01 til 31
År = kræver fire cifre
Time = 01 til 12 (12-timers tilstand)
00 til 23 (24-timers tilstand)
Minut = 00 til 59
Du kan også bruge venstre/højre pil til at flytte markøren til det tal, du vil ændre,
og indtaste et nyt tal.
5. Hvis du vil vælge AM eller PM til 12-timers format, skal du trykke
på knappen * eller # en hvilken som helst taltast.
Hvis markøren ikke er placeret under indikatoren for AM eller PM, flyttes
den med det samme derhen, når du trykker på knappen * eller #.
Du kan ændre tidsformatet til 24 timer (dvs. at 01:00 PM angives som 13:00).
Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger i næste afsnit.
6. Tryk på OK for at gemme klokkeslættet og datoen.
Hvis du indtaster et forkert tal, vises der Out of Range, og maskinen
forsætter ikke til næste trin. Hvis det sker, skal du blot indtaste det rigtige tal.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Ændring af tidsformatet
Du kan indstille maskinen til at vise tiden i enten 12-timers eller 24-timers format.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clock Mode vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge det andet format, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Ændring af standardfunktionen
Maskinen er på forhånd indstillet til faxtilstand. Du kan ændre denne
standardindstilling, så den enten er tilstanden Fax eller Kopi.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Default Mode vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede standardtilstand vises,
og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Indstilling af lyde
Du kan indstille følgende lyde:
• Key Sound: Slår tastelyden til eller fra. Når denne indstilling er angivet
til On, høres der en lyd, hver gang der trykkes på en tast.
• Alarm Sound: Slår alarmen til eller fra. Når denne indstilling er indstillet
til On, høres der en alarmlyd, når der opstår en fejl, eller når en
faxkommunikation afsluttes.
• Speaker: Slår lydene fra telefonlinjen via højttaleren til eller fra, f.eks.
en klartone eller en faxtone. Når denne indstilling er Comm., hvilket vil
sige ”fælles”, er højttaleren slået til, indtil den eksterne maskine svarer.
• Ringer: Justerer lydstyrken af ringesignalet. Til lydstyrken af
ringesignalet kan du vælge mellem Off, Low, Mid og High.
Højtaler, ringesignal, tastelyd, og alarmlyd
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Sound/Volume vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede lydindstilling vises,
og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status eller lydstyrke for
den valgte lyd vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Gentag trin 3 til og med 5, hvis det er nødvendigt, for at definere
andre lyde.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Højttalerstyrke
1. Tryk på Håndfrit kald ( ). Der lyder en klartone fra højttaleren.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil du hører den ønskede lydstyrke.
3. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at gemme ændringen og vende tilbage til
klar-tilstand.
Indtastning af tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet
Når du udfører forskellige opgaver, skal du muligvis skrive navne og numre.
Når du f.eks. sætter maskinen op, skal du angive dit eget eller firmaets navn
og faxnummeret. Når du gemmer faxnumre eller e-mail-adresser i hukommelsen,
kan du evt. også angive de tilsvarende navne.
Indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn
1. Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et tegn, skal du først finde knappen
med det tegn, du vil indtaste. Tryk på knappen, indtil det rigtige bogstav
vises på displayet.
Hvis du f.eks. vil skrive bogstavet O, skal du trykke på 6, der er mærket
med MNO.
Hver gang du trykker på 6, viser displayet et nyt bogstav M, N, O, m,
n, o og til sidst 6.
Du kan også indtaste specialtegn, f.eks. mellemrum, plustegn osv.
Du kan finde flere oplysninger i næste afsnit.
2. Gentag trin 1, hvis du vil indtaste flere bogstaver.
Hvis det næste bogstav findes på samme knap, flytter du markøren ved
hjælp af højre venstre/højre-pileknap og trykker derefter på knappen
med det ønskede bogstav. Markøren flyttes til højre, og det næste tal
vises på displayet.
Du kan indsætte et mellemrum ved at trykke på 1 to gange.
3. Tryk på OK, når du har indtastet de bogstaver, du ønsker.
Datoformatet kan variere fra land til land.
Du kan justere indstillingen af lydstyrken ved hjælp af Håndfrit
kald ( ).
Du kan kun justere lydstyrken i højttaleren, når der er forbindelse
med telefonlinjen.22 | Sådan kommer du i gang
Bogstaver og tal på taltastaturet
Rettelse af tal eller navne
Hvis du taster forkert, når du indtaster et nummer eller navn, skal du trykke
på venstre venstre/højre pileknap for at slette det sidst indtastede tal
eller tegn. Indtast derefter det korrekte tal eller bogstav.
Indsættelse af en pause
I nogle telefonsystemer skal du først ringe et forvalgsnummer (fx 9) og vente
på endnu en klartone. Hvis du benytter et af disse systemer, skal du indsætte
en pause i telefonnummeret. Du kan indsætte en pause, når du definerer
genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre.
Når du vil indsætte en pause, skal du trykke på Genopkald/Pause ( ),
når du kommer til det relevante sted i telefonnummeret. På displayet
vises der en ”-” på det pågældende sted i nummeret.
Sådan bruger du sparetilstandene
Strømsparetilstand
Tilstanden Strømbesparelse gør det muligt for maskinen at reducere
strømforbruget, når den ikke er i brug. Du kan aktivere denne tilstand
og vælge et bestemt tidsrum, som maskinen venter efter et afsluttet job,
før den skifter til en mindre strømkrævende tilstand.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Power Save vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises,
og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Strømsparetilstand ved scanning
Når du bruger strømsparetilstand ved scanning, kan du spare strøm ved
at slukke for scannerlampen. Scannerlampen under scannerglaspladen
slukkes automatisk, når den ikke er i brug, for at reducere strømforbruget
og forlænge lampens levetid. Lampen tændes automatisk efter en kort
opvarmningstid, når du starter scanningen.
Du kan indstille det tidsrum, som lampen venter efter en afsluttet
scanning, før den skifter til strømsparetilstand.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Scan PWR Save vises, og tryk på
OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og
tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Indstilling af timeout for udskriftsjob
Du kan definere, hvor lang tid et enkelt udskriftsjob er aktivt, før det skal
udskrives. Maskinen håndterer indgående data som et enkelt job, hvis det
ligger inden for den angivne tid. Når der opstår fejl under behandling af data
fra computeren, og datastrømmen standser, venter maskinen den angivne
tid og annullerer derefter udskrivningen, hvis datastrømmen ikke
genoptages.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Job Timeout vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk
på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Auto fortsæt
Dette er den indstilling, der bruges til at indstille maskinen til enten at fortsætte
udskrivning eller stoppe udskrivning i tilfælde af at den papirstørrelse, du har
angivet, og papiret i bakken ikke stemmer overens.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Auto Continue vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• On: udskriver automatisk, når den angivne tid er gået, når papirstørrelsen,
du har angivet, og papiret i bakken ikke stemmer overens.
• Off: venter, indtil du trykker på Black Start ( ) eller Color Start
( ) på kontrolpanelet, når papirstørrelsen, du har angivet, og papiret
i bakken ikke stemmer overens.
5. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
TAST TILDELTE TAL, BOGSTAVER OG TEGN
1 1 Mellemrum
2 A B C a b c 2
3 D E F d e f 3
4 G H I g h i 4
5 J K L j k l 5
6 M N O m n o 6
7 P Q R S p q r s 7
8 T U V t u v 8
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9
0 + - , . ‘ / * # & @ 0Sådan kommer du i gang | 23
Ændring af skrifttypeindstillinger
Din maskine har forudindstillet skrifttypen for dit område eller land.
Hvis du vil ændre den foretrukne skrifttype eller angive, hvilken skrifttype
der skal anvendes under bestemte betingelser, f.eks. i DOS-miljøet, kan
du ændre skrifttypen på følgende måde:
1. Kontroller, at du har installeret printerdriveren med den medfølgende
cd med software.
2. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → DELL → DELL Printers → Dell
2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Setting Utility.
Du kan også klikke på Printer Setting Utility på statuslinjen i Mac OS X
(eller meddelelsesområdet i Linux).
3. Klik på Emulation.
4. Bekræft, hvis PCL er valgt i Emulation Setting.
5. Klik på Setting.
6. Vælg Symbol set som din foretrukne skrifttype.
7. Klik på Apply.
Det følgende er en oversigt over sprog og deres korrekte skrifttyper.
• Russisk: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic
• Hebraisk: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (gælder kun Israel)
• Græsk: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek
• Arabisk og Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,
Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic
• OCR: OCR-A, OCR-B24 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
I dette kapitel beskrives det, hvordan du lægger originaler og udskriftsmedier i maskinen.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Ilægning af originaler
• Valg af udskriftsmedier
• Ændring af papirstørrelsen i papirbakken
• Placering af papir
• Justering af outputsupporten
• Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type
ILÆGNING AF ORIGINALER
Du kan lægge en original på scannerglaspladen eller i DADF’en, så du kan
kopiere eller scanne den eller sende den som fax.
På scannerglaspladen
Sørg for, at der ikke er originaler i DADF’en. Hvis maskinen registrerer en
original i DADF’en, får den højere prioritet end originalen på
scannerglaspladen. Det giver den bedste scanningskvalitet, specielt for
farvebilleder eller gråtoner, hvis du lægger originalen
på scannerglaspladen.
1. Løft, og åbn scannerlåget.
2. Læg originalen med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen, og ret den ind
efter registreringsstyret i glaspladens øverste, venstre hjørne.
3. Luk scannerlåget.
I DADF’en
Ved brug af DADF’en kan du ilægge op til 50 ark 75 g/m2
papir til et job.
Når du bruger DADF’en, må du ikke:
• Ilæg ikke papir, der er mindre end 148 x 148 mm eller større end 216 x
356 mm.
• Undgå følgende papirtyper:
- karbonpapir eller karbonbelagt papir
- bestrøget papir
- gennemsigtigt eller tyndt papir
- krøllet eller foldet papir
- krøllet eller rullet papir
- iturevet papir.
• Fjern alle hæfteklammer og papirclips, før du lægger papiret i.
• Sørg for, at lim, blæk eller retteblæk på papiret er tørt, før du lægger det i.
• Læg ikke papir i forskellige størrelser eller med forskellig vægt i.
• Læg ikke hæfter, pamfletter, transparenter eller dokumenter med andre
usædvanlige egenskaber i DADF’en.
Dell 2145cn har DADF-funktionen, så du kan scanne begge sider af
originalen på samme tid.
Se ”Scanning af begge sider af papiret” på side 42.
• Det kan påvirke kopikvaliteten og tonerforbruget, hvis scannerlåget
står åbent, mens du kopierer.
• Støv på scannerglaspladen kan give sorte pletter på udskriften.
Hold den altid ren.
• Hvis du kopierer en side fra en bog eller et blad, skal du løfte
op i scannerlåget, indtil hængslerne fanges af stopanordningen,
og derefter lukke låget. Hvis bogen eller bladet er tykkere end
30 mm, skal du begynde at kopiere med låget åbent.25 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
1. Bøj papirstakken frem og tilbage for at adskille siderne, før de lægges
i bakken.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med tryksiden opad. Sørg for, at bunden af
originalstakken passer til den papirstørrelse, der er markeret i
dokumentindføringsbakken.
3. Juster styrene til indstilling af dokumentbredden, så de passer til
papirets størrelse.
VALG AF UDSKRIFTSMEDIER
Du kan udskrive på en række forskellige materialer, f.eks. almindeligt papir,
konvolutter, etiketter og transparenter. Men du skal altid vælge udskriftsmedier,
der overholder de retningslinjer, der er for maskinen. Udskriftsmedier, der
ikke overholder de retningslinjer, der er beskrevet i denne brugerhåndbog,
kan forårsage følgende problemer:
• Dårlig udskriftskvalitet
• Flere papirstop
• Tidlig nedslidning af maskinen
Egenskaber som vægt, sammensætning, fiber- og fugtighedsindhold er vigtige
faktorer, der påvirker maskinens ydelse og udskriftskvalitet. Vær opmærksom
på følgende, når du vælger udskriftsmateriale:
• Typen, størrelsen og vægten på udskriftsmediet til din maskine
beskrives senere i dette afsnit.
• Ønsket resultat: Vælg udskriftsmedier, der passer til projektet.
• Hvidhed: Nogle udskriftsmedier er mere hvide end andre og giver et mere
skarpt og levende billede.
• Overfladeglathed: Jo mere glat et udskriftsmedie er, jo mere skarpt
forekommer det udskrevne billede på papiret.
Støv på DADF-glasset kan forårsage sorte streger på udskriften. Hold den
altid ren.
• Der kan forekomme tilfælde, hvor udskriftsmediet overholder alle
retningslinjer i dette afsnit, og alligevel ikke giver tilfredsstillende
resultater. Dette kan skyldes forkert håndtering, temperaturer
og fugtighedsniveauer over det anbefalede eller andre faktorer,
som Dell ikke har indflydelse på.
• Inden du køber større mængder af et bestemt udskriftsmedie,
skal du sikre dig, at det opfylder de krav, der er angivet i denne
brugerhåndbog.
Anvendelse af udskriftsmedier, der ikke overholder disse specifikationer,
kan medføre problemer, der nødvendiggør reparation. Reparationer
af denne type er ikke omfattet af Dell garanti eller serviceaftaler.26 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
Specifikationer for udskriftsmedie
TYPE STØRRELSE MÅL VÆGT
a
KAPACITET
b
Almindeligt papir Letter 216 x 279 mm • 60 til 105 g/m2
i bakken
• 60 til 163 g/m2
i
universalbakken
• 250 ark 75 g/m2
kontraktpapir
i papirbakken
• 100 ark 75 g/m2
i universalbakken
• 500 ark 75 g/m2
kontraktpapir i valgfribakke
Legal 216 x 356 mm
US Folio 216 x 330 mm
A4 210 x 297 mm
Oficio 216 x 343 mm
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm
Executive 184 x 267 mm
A5 148 x 210 mm • 60 til 105 g/m2
i bakken
• 60 til 163 g/m2
i
universalbakken
• 150 ark 75 g/m2
kontraktpapir
i papirbakken
• 100 ark 75 g/m2
i universalbakken
Statement 140 x 216 mm
A6 105 x 148 mm
Konvolut Monarch-konvolut 98 x 191 mm 75 to 105 g/m2
kontraktpapir 10 ark 75 g/m2
i universalbakken
Konvolut 6 3/4 92 x 165 mm
Konvolut nr. 10 105 x 241 mm
Konvolut nr. 9 98 x 225 mm
DL-konvolut 110 x 220 mm
C5-konvolut 162 x 229 mm
C6-konvolut 114 x 162 mm
Etiketter Letter, Legal, Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement
Se afsnittet om almindeligt papir 120 til 150 g/m2
10 ark 75 g/m2
papir
i universalbakken
Karton Letter, Legal, Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement
Se afsnittet om almindeligt papir 90 til 163 g/m2
10 ark 75 g/m2
papir
i universalbakken
Minimumstørrelse (brugerdefineret) 76 x 127 mm 60 til 163 g/m2
Maksimumstørrelse (brugerdefineret) 216 x 356 mm
a. Hvis papirets vægt er over 105 g/m2
, skal du bruge universalbakken.
b. Den maksimale kapacitet kan variere alt afhængigt af materialets vægt, tykkelse og af de omgivende forhold.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 27
Mediestørrelser, der understøttes i de forskellige
tilstande
Retningslinjer for specielle udskriftsmedier
TILSTAND STØRRELSE KILDE
Kopieringstilstand Letter, A4, Legal,
Oficio, Folio, Executive,
JIS B5, A5, A6
• bakke 1
• ekstra bakke 2
• universalbakke
Udskrivningstilstand Alle størrelser
understøttes af
maskinen
• bakke 1
• ekstra bakke 2
• universalbakke
Faxtilstand Letter, A4, Legal • bakke 1
• ekstra bakke 2
Duplexudskrivning
a
a. Kun 75 til 105 g/m2
.
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,
Oficio
• bakke 1
• ekstra bakke 2
• universalbakke
MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER
Konvolutter • Vellykket udskrivning på konvolutter er afhængig
af konvolutternes kvalitet. Ved valg af konvolutter
skal du tage følgende faktorer i betragtning:
- Vægt: Konvolutpapiret bør ikke veje mere end
90 g/m2
, da der ellers kan opstå papirstop.
- Udformning: Inden udskrivningen skal konvolutterne
ligge fladt med mindre end 6 mm rulning, og de må
ikke indeholde luft.
- Tilstand: Konvolutter bør ikke være krøllede, revet
i stykker eller på anden måde beskadiget.
- Temperatur: Brug altid konvolutter, der kan klare
den varme og det tryk, der opstår i maskinen.
• Brug kun kvalitetskonvolutter med skarpe og helt
pressede kanter.
• Brug ikke konvolutter med frimærker.
• Brug ikke konvolutter med lukkeanordninger, ruder,
belægninger, selvklæbende lukning eller andre
syntetiske materialer.
• Brug ikke beskadigede konvolutter eller konvolutter
af dårlig kvalitet.
• Kontroller, at sammenføjningerne i begge konvoluttens
ender når helt ud til konvoluttens hjørner.
1 Acceptabelt
2 Uacceptabelt
Konvolutter
(fortsat)
• Hvis du bruger konvolutter med en selvklæbende
strimmel, eller hvor mere end én flap skal foldes
over for at lukke konvolutten, skal du sikre dig,
at det selvklæbende middel kan tåle maskinens
fikseringstemperatur i 0,1 sekund. Kontroller
maskinens specifikationer for at se
fikseringstemperaturen på side 91. Ekstra flapper
og strimler kan betyde, at konvolutten krøller eller
bukker, at der opstår papirstop, og i værste fald kan
det beskadige fikseringsenheden.
• Det giver det bedste resultat, hvis margenerne ikke
placeres tættere end 15 mm på konvoluttens kanter.
• Undgå at udskrive i det område, hvor konvoluttens
sammenføjninger mødes.
Etiketter • Brug kun etiketter, der er beregnet til lasermaskiner,
så maskinen ikke beskadiges.
Ved valg af etiketter skal du tage følgende faktorer i
betragtning:
- Klæbemiddel: Klæbemidlet skal være stabilt ved
maskinens fikseringstemperatur. Kontroller
maskinens specifikationer for at se
fikseringstemperaturen på side 91.
- Placering på arket: Brug kun etiketark, hvor arket
ikke er synligt mellem de enkelte etiketter.
Etiketter kan løsne sig fra ark, hvis der er afstand
mellem dem, hvilket kan medføre alvorlige
papirstop.
- Krøl: Inden udskrivningen skal etiketarket ligge
fladt uden mere end 13 mm krøl i nogen retning.
- Tilstand: Brug ikke etiketter med rynker, bobler
eller andre tegn på manglende klæbeevne.
• Sørg for, at der ikke sidder noget udækket
klæbemateriale mellem etiketterne. Synlige områder
på arket kan medføre, at etiketterne løsnes under
udskriften, hvilket kan forårsage papirstop. Synligt
klæbemateriale kan også beskadige maskindele.
• Kør aldrig et etiketark gennem maskinen mere end
én gang. Den selvklæbende bagside er kun beregnet
til at skulle igennem maskinen én gang.
• Brug ikke etiketter, der har løsnet sig fra arket,
er krøllede, har bobler eller på anden måde
er beskadiget.
Karton eller
materialer i
brugerdefinere
de størrelser
• Udskriv aldrig på medier med en bredde på mindre
end 76 mm eller en længde på mere end 356 mm.
• Indstil margenen i programmet, så den er mindst
6,4 mm fra materialets kant.
MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER28 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
ÆNDRING AF PAPIRSTØRRELSEN
I PAPIRBAKKEN
Hvis du vil anvende længere papir, f.eks. papir i Legal-størrelse, skal du justere
papirstyrene for at forlænge papirbakken.
1. Juster papirlængdestyret i henhold til den ønskede papirlængde. Den
er forudindstillet til Letter- eller A4-størrelse, afhængigt af hvilket land
den bruges i.
2. Når der er lagt papir i bakken, skal du, mens du klemmer papirbreddestyret
sammen som vist, flytte det mod stakken af papir, indtil det berører siden
af stakken let. Klem ikke papirstyret for tæt imod papirkanten, da det kan
bøje papiret.
Hvis du bruger papir i formatet legal, skal du udvide bakkens længde.
3. Tryk på det grønne greb på bagsiden af bakken, og hold det nede. Mens
du holder grebet nede, skal du udvide bakken til den tilsvarende position.
4. Læg papir i papirbakken.
5. Sæt bakken ind i maskinen.
6. Indstil papirstørrelsen fra din computer.
Fortrykt papir • Brevpapir skal være trykt med varmebestandigt
blæk, der ikke smelter, fordamper eller afgiver
giftige gasser, når det udsættes for printerens
fikseringstemperatur i 0,1 sekund. Kontroller
maskinens specifikationer for at se
fikseringstemperaturen på side 91.
• Blækket på brevpapiret skal være ikke-brændbart
og må ikke have nogen form for negativ virkning
på printerens ruller.
• Formularer og brevpapir bør opbevares i forseglet
og fugtsikker emballage for at forhindre forandringer
under opbevaring.
• Kontroller, at blækket på papiret er tørt, før du
lægger fortrykt papir som f.eks. formularer eller
brevpapir i printeren. Under fikseringsprocessen
kan fugtigt blæk løsnes fra fortrykt papir og forringe
udskriftskvaliteten.
1 Bakkeudvidelsesgreb
2 Papirlængdestyr
3 Papirbreddestyr
MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER
• Du må ikke skubbe styrene til indstilling af papirbredden
så tæt ind mod stakken, at den begynder at bøje.
• Det kan medføre papirstop, hvis du ikke indstiller styrene
til papirbredden.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 29
PLACERING AF PAPIR
Placering af papir i bakke 1 eller den valgfri bakke
Læg det udskriftsmedie, du oftest bruger, i bakke 1. Bakke 1 kan maksimalt
indeholde 250 ark 75 g/m2
almindeligt papir.
Du kan købe en ekstra bakke og sætte den i maskinen under standardbakken.
Den rummer 500 ark papir ekstra (se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85).
1. Træk bakken ud. Juster bakkens størrelse til det medie, du lægger i.
2. Læg papiret med den side, der skal udskrives på, opad.
3. Når du udskriver et dokument, vælger du papirkilde og type i
programmet. Se Software section, hvis du vil have oplysninger om pcudskrivning.
Ilægning af papir i universalbakken
Universalbakken kan indeholde specielle størrelser og typer af udskriftsmateriale,
f.eks. postkort, notekort og konvolutter. Det er nyttigt ved udskrivning
af en enkelt side på brevpapir eller farvet papir.
Tips om brug af universalbakken
• Læg kun udskriftsmedier i ét format i universalbakken ad gangen.
• Læg ikke mere papir i universalbakken, så længe der er papir i den,
da der ellers kan opstå papirstop. Det gælder også andre typer
udskriftsmedier.
• Udskriftsmedier skal lægges midt i universalbakken med forsiden
nedad, så den øverste kant føres ind i universalbakken først.
• Brug altid kun de angivne udskriftsmedier, så du undgår papirstop
og problemer med udskriftskvaliteten (se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier”
på side 25).
• Sørg for at glatte evt. krøller på postkort, konvolutter og etiketter ud,
før du lægger dem i universalbakken.
1. Hold i håndtaget på universalbakken, og træk nedad for at åbne den.
2. Læg papiret i.
Brug af fotopapir eller coated papir kan skabe problemer, der kræver
reparation. Sådanne reparationer er ikke dækket af Dells garanti eller
serviceaftaler.
1 Fuld
2 Tom
• Hvis papirindføringen giver problemer, skal du lægge ét ark ad gangen
i universalbakken.
• Du kan ilægge papir, der allerede er skrevet på. Den trykte side skal
vende opad med en ukrøllet kant forrest. Hvis du støder på problemer
med papirindføringen, så prøv at vende papiret om. Bemærk,
at udskriftskvaliteten ikke kan garanteres.
• Hvis du vil bruge allerede anvendt papir, skal du placere papiret
med den trykte side nedad.
• Hvis du benytter papir, så bøj papirstakken frem og tilbage for
at adskille sammenhængende ark, før de lægges i bakken.30 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
3. Klem styrene til indstilling af papirbredden i universalbakken ind mod
papiret. Pres dem ikke for langt ind, da det kan få papiret til at bøje.
Det kan medføre papirstop, eller at papiret føres skævt ind.
4. Når du har lagt papir i bakken, skal du angive papirtype og -størrelse
til universalbakken. Se Software section, hvis du vil have oplysninger
om pc-udskrivning.
5. Luk universalbakken, når udskrivningen er færdig.
JUSTERING AF OUTPUTSUPPORTEN
Den udskrevne stak på ud bakken og outputsupporten medvirker til at
justere de udskrevne sider. Træk outputsupporten ud i henhold til papiret
størrelse, så den kan justere siderne korrekt.
Ved papir i Letter-størrelse
Træk outputsupporten ud til stedet markeret med LTR som vist, og fold
forlængeren ud.
Ved papir i A4- eller Legal-størrelse
Træk outputsupporten ud til stedet markeret med A4, LGL som vist, og fold
forlængeren ud.
Afhængigt af hvilken medietype du bruger, skal du følge disse
retningslinjer, når du lægger papir i maskinen:
• Konvolutter: Vend siden med flappen nedad. Frimærkesiden
skal vende opad, med frimærkeenden mod venstre.
• Etiketter: Vend udskriftssiden opad, og vend arket, så det
føres ind i maskinen på den korte led med toppen af arket
først.
• Fortrykt papir: Vend designsiden opad, og vend papiret,
så det føres ind i maskinen på den korte led.
• Karton: Vend udskriftssiden opad, og vend arket, så det føres
ind i maskinen på den korte led.
• Papir, der tidligere er udskrevet på: Vend siden med den
eksisterende udskrift nedad, og vend det, så det føres ind
i maskinen på den korte led. Den kant, der føres ind først,
må hverken være krøllet eller foldet.
De indstillinger, der foretages fra printerdriveren, tilsidesætter
indstillingerne på kontrolpanelet.
1 Outputsupport
2 Forlængeren
• Hvis outputsupporten ikke er korrekt anbragt, justeres siderne
forkert eller falder ud.
• Hvis der udskrives mange sider lige efter hinanden, kan udbakken
blive varm. Pas på ikke at berøre overfladen, og sørg især for, at
børn ikke kommer inden for rækkevidde.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 31
INDSTILLING AF PAPIRSTØRRELSE OG TYPE
Når du har lagt papir i papirbakken, skal du bruge tasterne på kontrolpanelet
og indstille papirstørrelse og -type. De valgte indstillinger gælder for
kopierings- og faxtilstand. Ved udskrivning fra pc skal du vælge
papirstørrelse og -type i det program, du bruger på pc’en.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Paper Size
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den papirstørrelse, du bruger, vises,
og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på Tilbage ( ) for at vende tilbage til det øverste niveau.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Type vises, og tryk på OK.
8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den papirtype, du bruger, vises, og tryk på OK.
9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.32 | Kopiering
:
kopiering
Dette kapitel indeholder trinvise instruktioner til kopiering af dokumenter.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Valg af papirbakke
• Kopiering
• Ændring af indstillingerne for hver kopi
• Ændring af scanningsstørrelsesindstillingerne
• Ændring af standardindstillingerne for kopiering
• Kopiering af ID-kort
• Brug af de specielle kopifunktioner
• Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret
• Indstilling af timeout for kopiering
VALG AF PAPIRBAKKE
Når du har lagt udskriftsmedier til kopier i, skal du vælge den papirbakke,
du vil bruge til kopijob.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Source vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Copy Tray.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
KOPIERING
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
Der vises Ready to Copy på den øverste linje af displayet.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Brug taltasterne, og indtast kopiantallet, hvis du vil tage flere kopier.
4. Du kan tilpasse kopiindstillingerne, bl.a. kopistørrelse, lysstyrke
og originaltype, ved at bruge tasterne på kontrolpanelet. Se ”Ændring af
indstillingerne for hver kopi” på side 32.
Hvis det er nødvendigt, kan du bruge specielle kopieringsfunktioner som
posterkopiering eller 2- eller 4 op-kopiering. Se ”Kopiering af ID-kort” på
side 33.
5. Tryk på Color Start ( ) for at starte farvekopieringen.
Eller tryk på Black Start ( ) for at begynde sort/hvid kopiering.
ÆNDRING AF INDSTILLINGERNE FOR HVER KOPI
Det er hurtigt og nemt at kopiere med maskinens standardindstillinger. Men
du kan også bruge funktionstasterne til kopiering på kontrolpanelet og ændre
indstillingerne for hver ny kopi.
Mørkhed
Hvis du har en original, der indeholder svage markeringer og mørke billeder,
kan du justere lysstyrken, så kopien bliver lettere at læse.
Hvis du vil justere lysstyrken for kopier, skal du trykke på Mørkhed ( ).
Hver gang du trykker på denne tast, kan du vælge mellem følgende
indstillinger:
• Lightest: Velegnet til mørkere tryk.
• Light: Velegnet til mørkt trykt.
• Normal: Velegnet til almindelige maskinskrevne eller udskrevne originaler.
• Dark: Velegnet til lysere tryk.
• Darkest: Velegnet til lysere tryk og til svage blyantsmarkeringer.
Originaltype
Indstillingen Originaltype bruges til at forbedre kopikvaliteten ved at angive
dokumenttype for det aktuelle kopijob.
Tryk på Originaltype ( ) for at vælge dokumenttype. Hver gang du trykker
på denne tast, kan du vælge mellem følgende indstillinger:
• Text: Bruges til originaler, der hovedsageligt indeholder tekst.
• Text/Photo: Bruges til originaler med en blanding af tekst og
fotografier.
• Photo: Bruges, hvis originalerne er fotografier.
• Magazine: Bruges, hvis originalerne er magasiner.
Formindsket eller forstørret kopi
Hvis du trykker på tasten Formindsk/Forstør ( ), kan du forstørre eller
formindske det kopierede billede fra 25 % til 400 %, når du kopierer
originaldokumenter fra scannerglaspladen, eller fra 25 % til 100 % fra
DADF’en.
Sådan vælger du blandt de foruddefinerede
kopistørrelser:
1. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ).
2. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ) eller venstre/højre pil, indtil den
ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK.
Du kan skalere kopien ved at indtaste
skaleringsforholdet direkte:
1. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ).
2. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ) eller venstre/højre pil, indtil
Custom vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Angiv skaleringsforholdet, og tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
Du kan annullere kopijobbet, mens maskinen er i gang. Tryk på
Stop/Slet ( ), så stopper kopieringen.
Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), mens du angiver
kopieringsindstillingerne, nulstilles alle de indstillinger, du har angivet
for det aktuelle kopijob, og vender tilbage til deres standardværdier.
Ellers indstilles de automatisk til deres standardværdier igen, når maskinen
har afsluttet kopieringen.
Når du formindsker en kopi, kan der forekomme sorte streger
nederst på kopien.
hKopiering | 33
ÆNDRING AF
SCANNINGSSTØRRELSESINDSTILLINGERNE
Du kan justere scanningsstørrelsen for originalpapiret. Hvis du for eksempel
scanner en original i A4-størrelse og indstiller scanningsstørrelsen til A5,
scanner maskinen kun A5-området (148 x 210 mm). Vi anbefaler, at du
skifter til den rigtige scanningsstørrelse for originalpapiret.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan Size.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
ÆNDRING AF STANDARDINDSTILLINGERNE
FOR KOPIERING
Kopieringsindstillingerne, herunder mørkhed, originaltype og antal kopier, kan
indstilles til de værdier, som bruges hyppigst. Når du kopierer et dokument,
bruges standardindstillingerne, medmindre de ændres ved hjælp af de
tilsvarende knapper på kontrolpanelet.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Change Default.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede konfigurationsindstilling
vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Gentag trin 4 til 5 efter behov.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
KOPIERING AF ID-KORT
Maskinen kan udskrive 2-sidede originaler på ét ark papir i A4-, Letter-,
Legal-, Folio-, Oficio-, Executive-, B5-, A5- eller A6-størrelse.
Når du kopierer med denne funktion, udskriver maskinen den ene side
af originalen på den øverste halvdel af papiret og den anden side på den
nederste halvdel uden at formindske originalens størrelse. Denne funktion
er velegnet til kopiering af små originaler, f.eks. navneskilte.
Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen
på scannerglaspladen.
1. Tryk på Id-kopi ( ).
2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad
på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Place Front Side and Press[Start], vises på
displayet.
4. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ).
Maskinen begynder at scanne forsiden, og der vises
Place Back Side and Press[Start] på displayet.
5. Åbn scannerlåget, og vend originalen om.
6. Tryk på Color Start ( ) for at starte farvekopieringen.
Eller tryk på Black Start ( ) for at begynde sort/hvid kopiering.
BRUG AF DE SPECIELLE KOPIFUNKTIONER
Du kan bruge følgende kopifunktioner:
Sortering
Du kan indstille maskinen, så kopieringsjob sorteres. Hvis du f.eks. opretter 2
kopier af en original på 3 sider, udskrives der et komplet dokument på 3 sider
efterfulgt af endnu et komplet dokument.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller
læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på
scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Indtast det ønskede antal kopier på taltastaturet.
4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på OK, når der vises Copy Collation.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand.
Der er to muligheder:
• Yes-Color: Farvekopi
• Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering
7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
Der udskrives et komplet dokument efterfulgt af det næste komplette
dokument.
Når du har brugt denne valgmulighed, vender maskinen automatisk
tilbage til standardindstillingen.
Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), mens du angiver
kopieringsindstillinger, annulleres de valgte indstillinger,
og standardindstillingerne gendannes.
Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), eller hvis du ikke trykker på
andre knapper i ca. 30 sekunder, annullerer maskinen kopijobbet
og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Hvis originalen er større end det område, der kan udskrives på, er det
ikke sikkert, at alle dele af originalen kan kopieres.
Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), eller hvis du ikke trykker på andre
knapper i ca. 30 sekunder, annullerer maskinen kopijobbet og vender
tilbage til klar-tilstand.34 | Kopiering
2- eller 4-op-kopiering
Maskinen kan udskrive 2 eller 4 originalbilleder formindsket, så de kan være
på ét enkelt ark papir.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller
læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på
scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil indtil 2-Up eller 4-Up vises, og
tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede
farvetilstand.
Der er to muligheder:
• Yes-Color: Farvekopi
• Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering
6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
Plakatkopiering
Maskinen kan udskrive et billede på op til 9 ark papir (3 x 3). Du kan derefter
føje de kopierede sider sammen til ét dokument i plakatstørrelse.
Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen
på scannerglaspladen.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad
på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Poster Copy vises,
og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede
farvetilstand.
Der er to muligheder:
• Yes-Color: Farvekopi
• Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering
6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
Originalen deles op i 9 dele. Hver af disse dele scannes
og kopieres en efter en i følgende rækkefølge:
Klonkopiering
Maskinen kan udskrive flere kopier af et billede fra en original på en enkelt
side. Antallet af kopier på siden bestemmes automatisk af originalen og
papirstørrelsen.
Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen
på scannerglaspladen.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad
på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clone Copy vises, og
tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand.
Der er to muligheder:
• Yes-Color: Farvekopi
• Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering
6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
Sletning af baggrundsbilleder
Du kan indstille maskinen til at udskrive et billede uden den tilhørende baggrund.
Denne kopifunktion fjerner baggrundsfarven og kan være praktisk, når du f.eks.
kopierer en avis eller et katalog med farve i baggrunden.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Adjust Bkgd. vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Bruger ikke denne funktion.
• Auto: Optimerer baggrunden.
• Enhance 1~2: Jo højere værdien er, jo mere naturtro er
baggrunden.
• Erase 1~4: Jo højere tallet er, desto lysere er baggrunden.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Bogkopiering
Funktionen Book Copy giver dig mulighed for at kopiere en hel bog. Hvis
bogen er for tyk, skal du løfte dækslet, indtil det bremses af hængslerne, og
derefter lukke dækslet. Hvis bogen eller magasinet er tykkere end 3 cm, er
du nødt til at kopiere med låget åbent.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad
på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Book Copy.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Bruger ikke denne funktion.
• Left Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive venstre side af bogen.
• Right Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive højre side af bogen.
• Both Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive begge sider af bogen.
Du kan ikke justere kopistørrelsen med knappen Formindsk/Forstør
( ), når du bruger 2- eller 4-op-kopiering.
1 2
1 2
3 4
Du kan ikke justere kopistørrelsen ved hjælp af knappen Formindsk/
Forstør ( ), mens du opretter en klonkopi.Kopiering | 35
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand.
Der er to muligheder:
• Yes-Color: Farvekopi
• Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering
7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
Margenskift
Funktionen Margin Shift giver dig mulighed for at oprette en indbindingskant
for et dokument. Billedet kan justeres op eller ned på siden og/eller forskydes
mod højre eller venstre.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller
læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på
scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Margin Shift.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Denne funktion er deaktiveret.
• Auto Center: Kopierer automatisk midt på papiret.
• Custom Margin: Indtast venstre, højre, top- eller bundmargen
fra taltastaturet.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes.
7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Slet kant
Med Slet kant kan du slette mærker, borehuller, foldemærker og mærker
efter hæfteklammer langs alle fire sider af et dokument.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller
læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på
scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af
originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Edge Erase.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Angiver ikke indbindingsindstillingen.
• Small Original: Sletter kanten af originalen, hvis den er lille.
• Hole Punch: Sletter mærkerne efter bogbindingshuller.
• Book Center: Sletter den midterste del af papiret, der er sort og
vandret, når du kopierer en bog.
• Border Erase: Sletter en bestemt mængde af kanten af udskriften.
6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Justering af gråtone ved kopiering
Når du kopierer en original i sort/hvid, kan du justere gråtoneskalaen og
optimere kvaliteten af kopien ved hjælp af denne funktion. Funktionen er
udelukkende tilgængelig i forbindelse med gråtonekopier.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Gray Enhance.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes.
6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
UDSKRIVNING PÅ BEGGE SIDER AF PAPIRET
Hvis du trykker på tasten Duplex ( ) på maskinen, kan du få adgang til at
udskrive dokumenter på begge sider af papiret.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Tryk på Duplex ( ).
3. Hold knappen left/right arrow inde, indtil den ønskede
indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Kopierer i normal tilstand.
• 1->2Side Short: Kopierer siderne, så de skal læses, ligesom når
man vipper siderne op på en notesblok.
• 1->2Side Long: Kopierer siderne, så de skal læses som i en bog.
• 2 ->1Side: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver hver
side på et separat ark.
• 2 ->2Side: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver siderne
på begge sider af papiret. Med denne funktion udskrives kopierne
Funktionen Margin Shift kan bruges enten sammen med scannerglaspladen
eller DADF'en, afhængigt at den enkelte konfiguration.
- Auto Center: Scannerglasplade
- Custom Margin: Scannerglasplade, DADF
Funktionen Edge Erase kan bruges enten sammen med scannerglaspladen
eller DADF'en, afhængigt at den enkelte konfiguration.
- Small Original: Scannerglasplade
- Hole Punch: Scannerglasplade, DADF
- Book Center: Scannerglasplade
- Border Erase: Scannerglasplade, DADF
X
Y
X
Y36 | Kopiering
som en nøjagtig gengivelse af originalerne.
• 2 ->1Side ROT2: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver
hver side på et separat ark, mens oplysningerne på bagsiden af
udskriften roteres 180°.
4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst.
INDSTILLING AF TIMEOUT FOR KOPIERING
Du kan indstille det tidsrum, maskinen venter, før den genopretter
standardkopieringsindstillingerne, hvis du ikke begynder at kopiere efter
at have ændret indstillingerne på kontrolpanelet.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Timeout vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises.
Hvis du vælger Off, betyder det, at maskinen ikke gendanner
standardindstillingerne, før du trykker på Black Start eller Color Start
( ) for at starte kopieringen, eller Stop/Slet ( ) for at annullere.
5. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
X
YScanning | 37
scanning
Du kan scanne billeder og tekst på maskinen, så de kan gemmes som digitale filer på computeren.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Grundlæggende om scanning
• Scanning fra kontrolpanelet
• Scanning ved hjælp af en netværksforbindelse
• Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob
• Automatisk udskrivning af scanningsbekræftelse
• Konfiguration af adressekartoteket
GRUNDLÆGGENDE OM SCANNING
Du kan scanne originalerne på maskinen via et USB-kabel eller netværket.
• Dell Scan Manager: Du skal blot gå hen til maskinen, scanne
originalerne fra kontrolpanelet, hvorefter de scannede data gemmes i
mappen Dokumenter på den computer, der er sluttet til maskinen. Når
installationen er fuldført, er Dell Scan Manager installeret på
computeren. Funktionen kan bruges sammen med en lokal forbindelse
eller netværksforbindelse. Se næste afsnit.
• TWAIN: TWAIN er et af de foruddefinerede programmer til
billedbehandling. Når du scanner et billede, startes det valgte program,
så du selv kan styre scanningsprocessen. Se afsnittet Software.
Funktionen kan bruges sammen med en lokal forbindelse eller
netværksforbindelse. Se Software section.
• Dell SmarThru Office: Denne funktion udgør den software, der følger
med maskinen. Programmet kan bruges til scanning af billeder eller
dokumenter, og funktionen kan bruges via en lokal forbindelse eller
netværksforbindelse. Se Software section.
• WIA: WIA er en forkortelse for Windows Images Acquisition. Hvis du vil
have adgang til at bruge denne funktion, skal computeren være sluttet
direkte til maskinen via et USB-kabel. Se Software section.
• E-mail: Du kan sende det scannede billede som en fil vedhæftet en email. Se side 39.
• FTP: Du kan scanne et billede og overføre det til en FTP-server. Se
side 40.
• SMB: Du kan scanne et billede og sende det til en delt mappe på en
SMB-server. Se side 40.
SCANNING FRA KONTROLPANELET
Maskinen giver dig nem adgang til at scanne fra kontrolpanelet og sende
det scannede dokument til mappen Dokumenter på den tilsluttede
computer. Hvis du vil have adgang til at bruge denne funktion, skal
maskinen være sluttet til computeren via et USB-kabel, eller de to enheder
skal være forbundet via netværket.
Med det medfølgende program Dell Scan Manager får du endvidere
adgang til at åbne scannede dokumenter med det program, du tidligere har
konfigureret. Microsoft Paint, Email, SmarThru Office, OCR kan
eksempelvis føjes til programmet. Se ”Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i
Dell Scan Manager.” på side 37.
Det er muligt at gemme scannede billeder som BMP-, JEPG-, TIFF- eller
PDF-filer.
Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i Dell Scan
Manager.
Du kan finde oplysninger om programmet Dell Scan Manager og om status
for den installerede scannerdriver. Du kan også ændre
scanningsindstillinger samt tilføje og slette de mapper, hvor de dokumenter
der scannes og sendes til computeren, gemmes, i programmet Dell Scan
Manager.
1. Tryk på Start → Kontrolpanel → Dell Scan Manager.
Dell Scan Manager Administration vises.
2. Vælg den relevante maskine under Dell Scan Manager.
3. Tryk på Scan Property.
4. Set Scan Button giver dig adgang til at ændre scanningsindstillinger og
det sted, hvor filerne gemmes, samt til at tilføje eller slette programmet
og formatere filer.
Du kan foretage ændringer på scannerenheden ved hjælp af Change
Port. Lokal forbindelse eller netværk.
Tryk på OK, når indstillingen er fuldført.
Scanning til programmer
1. Kontroller, at maskinen og computeren er tændt og korrekt forbundet
med hinanden.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du kan finde flere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 37.
3. Tryk på Scan/Email.
Ready to Scan vises på den øverste linje i displayet.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Scan to PC vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk
på OK.
6. Der vises forskellige meddelelser, afhængigt af portforbindelsen.
Kontroller, hvilken af følgende meddelelser der vises, og gå videre til det
angivne trin.
• Scan Destination: Tilsluttet via USB. Gå videre til trin 7.
• Id: Forbindelsen er blevet oprettet via netværket, og brugeren er
blevet registreret. Gå videre til trin 8.
• W Local PC X: Vælg USB eller netværk til scanning. Hvis du
opretter tilslutning via USB, skal du gå til trin 7. Hvis du opretter
tilslutning via netværk, skal du gå til trin 8.
• Not Available: Er ikke hverken tilsluttet via USB eller forbundet via
netværket. Kontroller portforbindelsen.
7. Hold left/right arrow inde, indtil den ønskede port vises i displayet.
Den maksimale opløsning, der kan opnås, afhænger af forskellige
faktorer, herunder computerhastighed, tilgængelig diskplads,
hukommelse, størrelsen af det scannede billede og indstillinger for
bitdybde. Alt afhængigt af systemet og af, hvad du scanner, kan du
muligvis ikke scanne ved bestemte opløsninger, især ikke, hvis du
bruger forbedret opløsning.
Programmet Dell Scan Manager kan udelukkende bruges sammen
med Windows.38 | Scanning
8. Indtast det registrerede bruger-id og PIN-koden, og klik på OK.
9. Under Scan Destination skal du trykke på left/right arrow, indtil
programmet vises. Tryk derefter på OK.
Standardindstillingen er Dokumenter.
10. Du kan scanne fra standardindstillingen ved at trykke på Color Start
( ) eller Black Start ( ). Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil den
ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk derefter på OK.
11. Scanning påbegyndes.
SCANNING VED HJÆLP AF EN NETVÆRKSFORBINDELSE
Hvis din maskine er tilsluttet et netværk, og du har valgt de rigtige
netværksparametre, kan du scanne og sende billeder over netværket.
Klargøring til netværksscanning
Inden du begynder at bruge maskinens netværksscanningsfunktioner, skal
du konfigurere følgende indstillinger afhængigt af scanningsdestinationen:
• Der skal oprettes autoriserede brugere, så der kan scannes til e-mail,
FTP og SMB.
• Der skal oprettes en SMTP-server, så der kan scannes til e-mail.
• Der skal oprettes FTP-servere, så der kan scannes til FTP.
• Der skal oprettes SMB-servere, så der kan scannes til SMB.
Brugergodkendelse til netværksscanning
Du skal registrere lokale brugere eller godkendte netværksbrugere ved
hjælp af Embedded Web Service for at kunne sende en e-mail, til FTP
eller SMB.
• Hvis brugergodkendelsen er aktiveret, er det kun godkendte brugere
på lokale databaser eller serverdatabaser (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos),
der kan sende scannede data til netværket (e-mail, FTP, SMB) ved
hjælp af maskinen.
• Du skal registrere godkendelseskonfigurationen til netværket eller
den lokale godkendelse ved hjælp af Embedded Web Service for
at kunne bruge brugergodkendelse til netværksscanning.
• Der findes 3 typer brugergodkendelser: ingen godkendelse
(standard), netværksgodkendelse og lokal godkendelse.
Registrering af lokale autoriserede brugere
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings.
3. Vælg Local Authentication på General Setup på User
Authentication-websiden.
4. Klik på Add.
5. Vælg det indeksnummer, hvor den tilsvarende indtastning skal
gemmes, fra 1 til 50.
6. Indtast dit navn, dit godkendelses-id, din adgangskode, din
e-mail-adresse og dit telefonnr.
Du skal indtaste det registrerede bruger-id og adgangskoden, når
du begynder at scanne til e-mail fra kontrolpanelet.
7. Klik på Apply.
Registrering af godkendte netværksbrugere
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings.
3. Vælg Network Authentication på General Setup på User
Authentication-websiden.
4. Klik på Apply og OK.
5. Vælg den Authentication Type, du ønsker.
6. Konfigurer en korrekt værdi for hver tjeneste, på følgende måde:
7. Klik på Apply.
Netværksbrugere, der er godkendt af Kerberos
1. Indtast den ressource, der bruges til Kerberos-login.
2. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
3. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som
et værtsnavn.
4. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Som standard er portnummeret 88.
5. Du kan tilføje et backupdomæne som i tidligere trin.
6. Klik på Apply.
Netværksbrugere, der er godkendt af SMB
1. Indtast det domæne, der bruges til SMB-login.
2. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
3. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som
et værtsnavn.
4. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Standardportnummeret er 139.
5. Brugeren kan tilføje et backupdomæne som i tidligere trin.
6. Klik på Apply.
Netværksbruger, der er godkendt af LDAP
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings og LDAP Server Setup.
3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som
et værtsnavn.
5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Som standard er portnummeret 389.
6. Indtast Search Root Directory. Det øverste søgeniveau i LDAPbibliotekstræet.
7. Vælg Authentication method. Metode til login på LDAP-server.
Anonymous: Den bruges til binde med NULL-adgangskode
og login-id (adgangskode og login-id er nedtonet i Embedded Web
Service).
Simple: Den bruges til at binde med login-id og adgangskode i
Embedded Web Service.
8. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for Append Root to Base DN.
• Id'et er det samme som det id, der er registreret for Dell Scan
Manager.
• PIN-koden er det firecifrede tal, der er registreret for Dell Scan
Manager.
Du kan tilføje eller slette den mappe, hvor den scannede fil
gemmes, ved at tilføje eller slette programmet i Dell Scan Manager → Set Scan Button.
• De scannede billeder gemmes i mappen Dokumenter → My
Pictures → Dell på computeren.
• Du kan foretage en hurtig scanning i programmet Dell Scan
Manager ved hjælp af Twain-driveren.
• Du kan også foretage scanningen ved at trykke på Start →
Kontrolpanel → Dell Scan Manager → Hurtig scanning
i Windows.
Brugeren kan tilføje op til 6 alternative domæner.Scanning | 39
9. Vælg Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute
mellem CN, UID eller UserPrincipalName.
10. Indtast loginnavnet, adgangskoden, det maksimale antal
søgeresultater og søgningens timeout-værdi.
11. Vælg den Serach Name Order, du ønsker.
12. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for "From:" Field Security Options.
13. Klik på Apply.
Konfiguration af en e-mail-konto
Hvis du vil scanne og sende et billede som en fil vedhæftet en e-mail,
skal du bruge Embedded Web Service og angive netværksparametre.
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup.
3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som
et værtsnavn.
5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Som standard er portnummeret 25.
6. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet SMTP Requires Authentication, så der
kræves godkendelse.
7. Indtast logonnavn og adgangskode til SMTP-serveren.
8. Klik på Apply.
Oprettelse af en FTP-server
Hvis du vil bruge en FTP-server, skal du bruge Embedded Web Service
og angive parametre, så du kan få adgang til FTP-servere.
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings og FTP Setup.
3. Klik på Server List.
4. Klik på Add.
5. Vælg indeksnummeret, fra 1 til 20.
6. Indtast et navn i Alias for the Setup til den tilsvarende angivelse
på serverlisten. Dette navn vises på maskinen.
7. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
8. Indtast serveradressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller
som et værtsnavn.
9. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Som standard er portnummeret 21.
10. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet Anonymous, hvis uautoriserede personer
skal kunne få adgang til FTP-serveren.
Dette felt er ikke markeret som standard.
11. Indtast logonnavnet og adgangskoden.
12. Indtast Scan File Folder under FTP-mappen til lagring af det
scannede billede.
13. Klik på Apply.
Oprettelse af en SMB-server
Hvis du vil bruge en SMB-server, skal du bruge Embedded Web Service
og angive parametre, så du kan få adgang til FTP-servere.
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings og SMB Setup.
3. Klik på Server List.
4. Klik på Add.
5. Vælg indeksnummeret, fra 1 til 20.
6. Indtast et navn i Alias for the Setup til den tilsvarende angivelse
på serverlisten. Dette navn vises på maskinen.
7. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
8. Indtast serveradressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller
som et værtsnavn.
9. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Standardportnummeret er 139.
10. Indtast Share name for serveren.
11. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet Anonymous, hvis uautoriserede personer
skal kunne få adgang til SMB-serveren.
Dette felt er ikke markeret som standard.
12. Indtast logonnavnet og adgangskoden.
13. Indtast SMB-serverens domænenavn.
14. Indtast Scan File Folder under delt mappe til lagring af det
scannede billede.
15. Klik på Apply.
Scanning til e-mail
Du kan scanne et billede og sende det som en fil vedhæftet en e-mail. Men
først skal du oprette din e-mail-konto i Embedded Web Service.
Se ”Konfiguration af en e-mail-konto” på side 39.
Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for
scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på
side 40.
1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Scan/Email.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to Email på nederste linje
i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Indtast modtagerens e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK.
Hvis du har oprettet et adressekartotek, kan du hente en adresse fra
hukommelsen ved at trykke på en genvejstast, hurtigopkaldstast eller
gruppeopkaldstast. Se ”Konfiguration af adressekartoteket” på side 41.
6. Hvis du vil indtaste flere adresser, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises
og derefter gentage trin 5.
Hvis du vil fortsætte til næste trin, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for
at vælge No og derefter trykke på OK.
7. Hvis der vises en meddelelse i displayet, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du vil
sende en e-mail til din konto, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge
Yes eller No og derefter trykke på OK.
8. Indtast et emne til e-mailen, og tryk på OK.
LDAP Referral: LDAP-klienten søger på henvisningsserveren,
hvis LDAP-serveren ikke indeholder data, der kan besvare
forespørgslen, og LDAP-serveren har en henvisningsserver.
Denne indstilling vises kun, når du har valgt indstillingen
Netværksgodkendelse i indstillingen for brugergodkendelse.
Hvis du vil søge efter oplysninger i en standard-e-mailadressegruppe, skal du markere denne indstilling.
Hvis godkendelsesmetoden for SMTP-serveren er
POP3beforeSMTP, skal du markere afkrydsningsfeltet for SMTP
Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication.
a. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer
eller som et værtsnavn.
b. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard
er portnummeret 25.
Denne prompt vises ikke, hvis du har aktiveret indstillingen Send
til selv i opsætningen af e-mail-kontoen.40 | Scanning
9. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede filformat vises, og tryk
derefter på OK eller Start.
Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter e-mailen.
10. Hvis der vises en meddelelse i displayet, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du vil
logge af din konto, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes
eller No og derefter trykke på OK.
11. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Scanning til en FTP-server
Du kan scanne et billede og derefter overføre det til en FTP-server. Du skal
angive parametre fra Embedded Web Service, så du kan få adgang til FTPservere. Se ”Oprettelse af en FTP-server” på side 39.
Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for
scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på
side 40.
1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Scan/Email.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to FTP på nederste linje
i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Indtast bruger-id’et, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast adgangskoden, og tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede FTP-server vises, og tryk
derefter på OK eller Start.
8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede filtype vises, og tryk derefter
på OK eller Start.
Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter filen til den angivne
server.
Scanning til en SMB-server
Du kan scanne et billede og derefter sende det til en SMB-server. Du skal
angive parametre fra Embedded Web Service, så du kan få adgang til SMBservere. Se ”Oprettelse af en SMB-server” på side 39.
Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for
scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på
side 40.
1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Scan/Email.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to SMB på nederste linje
i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Indtast bruger-id’et, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast adgangskoden, og tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede SMB-server vises, og tryk
derefter på OK eller Start.
8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede filformat vises, og tryk
derefter på OK eller Start.
Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter filen til den angivne
server.
ÆNDRING AF INDSTILLINGERNE FOR HVERT
SCANNINGSJOB
Du kan tilpasse scanningsjob ved at bruge følgende indstillinger på maskinen.
• Scan Size: Angiver billedstørrelsen.
• Original Type: Angiver originaldokumentets type.
• Resolution: Angiver billedopløsningen.
• Scan Color: Angiver farvetilstanden.
• Scan Format: Angiver det filformat, som billedet skal gemmes i. Hvis
du vælger TIFF eller PDF, kan du vælge at scanne flere sider. Den
valgte scanningstype bestemmer, om denne indstilling vises eller ej.
Sådan tilpasser du indstillingerne, før du begynder at scanne:
1. Tryk på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises,
og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningsindstilling vises,
og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Gentag trin 4 og 5, hvis du vil angive andre indstillinger.
7. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til
klar-tilstand.
ÆNDRING AF
STANDARDSCANNINGSINDSTILLINGER
Du kan undgå at skulle ændre indstillingerne, hver gang du scanner. I stedet
kan du angive standardscanningsindstillinger, der for hver scanningstype.
1. Tryk på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Change Default.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises,
og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningsindstilling vises,
og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK.
7. Gentag trin 5 og 6, hvis du vil ændre andre indstillinger.
8. Hvis du vil ændre standardindstillingerne for andre scanningstyper, skal
du trykke på Tilbage ( ) og gentage vejledningen fra trin 4.
9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
AUTOMATISK UDSKRIVNING AF
SCANNINGSBEKRÆFTELSE
Du kan indstille maskinen, så den udskriver en bekræftelsesrapport, der
viser, om en transmission lykkedes, hvor mange sider der blev sendt m.m.
Rapporten viser scanningsjobbet, og sender det via SMB og FTP.
1. Tryk på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Send Report.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises,
og tryk på OK.
• On-Error: Maskinen udskriver kun rapporten, hvis der opstår en fejl.
• On: Rapporten udskrives, uanset om et job fuldføres eller
mislykkes.
• Off: Der udskrives ingen rapport efter fuldførelse af et job.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.Scanning | 41
KONFIGURATION AF ADRESSEKARTOTEKET
Du kan oprette et adressekartotek med de e-mail-adresser, du oftest bruger,
via Embedded Web Service og derefter angive en e-mail-adresse hurtigt og
nemt ved at indtaste det nummer, den har fået tildelt i adressekartoteket.
Registrering af hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go
for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup.
3. Klik på Individual Address Book og Add.
4. Vælg et nummer i adressekartoteket, og indtast det brugernavn og den
e-mail-adresse, du vil gemme.
5. Klik på Apply.
Konfiguration af gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser
Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go
for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
1. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup.
2. Klik på Group Address Book og Add.
3. Vælg et gruppenummer, og indtast det ønskede gruppenavn.
4. Vælg de hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser, der skal indgå i gruppen.
5. Klik på Apply.
Hentning af globale e-mail-adresser fra LDAPserveren
Du kan ikke blot bruge lokale adresser, der er gemt i maskinens hukommelse,
men også adresser på LDAP-serveren. Hvis du vil kunne bruge globale adresser,
skal du først konfigurere LDAP-serveren via Embedded Web Service:
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go
for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings, LDAP Server Setup.
3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som
et værtsnavn.
5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Som standard er portnummeret 389.
6. Indtast Search Root Directory. Det øverste søgeniveau i LDAPbibliotekstræet
7. Vælg Authentication method. Metode til login på LDAP-server.
Anonymous: Den bruges til binde med NULL-adgangskode og login-id
(adgangskode og login-id er nedtonet i Embedded Web Service).
Simple: Den bruges til at binde med login-id og adgangskode i
Embedded Web Service.
8. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for Append Root to Base DN.
9. Indtast loginnavnet, adgangskoden, det maksimale antal søgeresultater
og søgningens timeout-værdi.
10. Vælg den Serach Name Order, du ønsker.
11. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for "From:" Field Security Options.
12. Klik på Add.
Brug af poster fra adressekartoteket
Du kan hente en e-mail-adresse fra adressekartoteket på flere måder:
Hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal
sende en e-mail, kan du indtaste det hurtignummer, hvor du har gemt
den pågældende e-mail-adresse.
• Hvis e-mail-adressen er gemt i et hurtignummer på ét ciffer, skal
du trykke på den tilsvarende taltast på taltastaturet og holde den nede.
• Hvis e-mail-adressen er gemt i et hurtignummer på to eller tre cifre,
skal du trykke på den eller de første taltaster og derefter holde den
sidste taltast nede.
Du kan også søge efter en post i hukommelsen ved at trykke på
Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i
adressekartoteket” på side 41.
Gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser
Hvis du vil bruge en e-mail-adresse, der er gemt i et gruppenummer,
skal du søge efter den i hukommelsen og vælge den derfra.
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal
sende en e-mail, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning
efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 41.
Globale e-mail-adresser
Hvis du vil bruge en global e-mail-adresse, der er gemt på LDAPserveren, skal du søge efter den i hukommelsen og vælge den derfra.
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal
sende en e-mail, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning
efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 41.
Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket
Du kan søge efter en adresse i hukommelsen på to måder. Du kan enten søge
systematisk i alfabetisk orden eller søge ved at indtaste de første bogstaver
i det navn, der hører til adressen.
Systematisk søgning i hukommelsen
1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Send på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises All.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn og den ønskede
adresse vises. Du kan søge opad og nedad gennem hele
hukommelsen i alfabetisk orden.
Søgning efter de første bogstaver i et navn
1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Send på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil ID vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Indtast de første par bogstaver i det navn, du søger efter, og tryk
derefter på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK.
Du kan også klikke på Importer og hente adressekartoteket fra
computeren.
LDAP Referral: LDAP-klienten søger på henvisningsserveren,
hvis LDAP-serveren ikke indeholder data, der kan besvare
forespørgslen, og LDAP-serveren har en henvisningsserver.42 | Scanning
Udskrivning af adressekartoteket
Du kan kontrollere indstillingerne for adressekartoteket ved at udskrive en liste.
1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Print på nederste linje af
displayet.
2. Tryk på OK.
Der udskrives en liste over dine genvejstastindstillinger og hurtig/
gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser.
SCANNING AF BEGGE SIDER AF PAPIRET
Hvis du trykker på tasten Duplex ( ) på maskinen, kan du indstille den til at
scanne begge sider af papiret.
1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Duplex ( ).
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Udskriver i normal tilstand.
• 2 Side: Scanner begge sider af originalen og udskriver siderne på
begge sider af arket. Med denne funktion er udskriften en nøjagtig
gengivelse af originalen.
• 2 ->1Side ROT2: Scanner begge sider af originalerne og udskriver
hver side på et separat ark, mens oplysningerne på bagsiden af
udskriften roteres 180°.
4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst.
X
Y
X
Y
X
YGrundlæggende udskrivning | 43
grundlæggende udskrivning
Dette kapitel forklarer almindelige udskrivningsopgaver.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Sådan udskriver du et dokument • Annullering af et udskriftsjob
SÅDAN UDSKRIVER DU ET DOKUMENT
Du kan bruge maskinen til at udskrive fra forskellige Windows-, Macintosh- eller
Linux-baserede programmer. De præcise trin, du skal følge, når du udskriver
et dokument, kan være forskellige, afhængigt af hvilket program du benytter.
Detaljerede oplysninger om udskrivning finder du i Softwareafsnit.
ANNULLERING AF ET UDSKRIFTSJOB
Hvis udskriftsjobbet venter i en printerkø eller en printspooler, f.eks.
gruppen Printere i Windows, skal du slette jobbet på følgende måde:
1. Klik på menuen Start i Windows.
2. I Windows 2000 skal du vælge Indstillinger og derefter Printere.
I Windows XP/2003 skal du vælge Printere og faxenheder.
I Windows Vista/2008 skal du vælge Kontrolpanel → Hardware og lyd
→ Printere.
3. Dobbeltklik på ikonet Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP.
4. Vælg Annuller i menuen Dokument.
Du kan også annullere det aktuelle job ved at trykke på Stop/Slet ( )
på kontrolpanelet.
Du får adgang til dette vindue ved at dobbeltklikke på printerikonet
i nederste højre hjørne af skrivebordet i Windows.44 | Fax
fax
I dette kapitel får du oplysninger om, hvordan du benytter maskinen som faxmaskine.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Afsendelse af en fax
• Modtagelse af en fax
• Andre måder at faxe på
• Faxopsætning
AFSENDELSE AF EN FAX
Indstilling af faxhovedet
I nogle lande er det lovpligtigt at angive afsenderens faxnummer på alle faxer,
der sendes. Maskinens ID, som indeholder telefonnummer og navn eller
firmanavn, bliver udskrevet øverst på hver side, som afsendes fra maskinen.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine ID.
4. Indtast navn eller firmanavn ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Du kan indtaste
alfanumeriske tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet og indsætte forskellige tegn
ved at trykke på knappen 0. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning
af alfanumeriske tegn på side 21.
5. Tryk på OK for at gemme id’et.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Machine Fax No vises, og tryk på OK.
7. Indtast dit faxnummer ved hjælp af taltastaturet, og tryk på OK.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Justering af dokumentindstillinger
Inden du begynder at faxe, skal du ændre følgende indstillinger, så de passer
til originalens status. På den måde opnår du den bedste kvalitet.
Opløsning
Standardindstillingerne for dokumenter giver et godt resultat, når der
anvendes almindelige tekstbaserede originaler. Men hvis du sender
originaler, som er i dårlig kvalitet eller indeholder billeder, kan du opnå
en bedre faxkvalitet ved at justere opløsningen.
1. Tryk på Opløsning ( ).
2. Tryk på Opløsning ( ) eller på venstre/højre pil, indtil den
ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
3. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
De anbefalede opløsningsindstillinger for forskellige typer originaler
er beskrevet i tabellen nedenfor:
Mørkhed
Du kan vælge standardkontrasten og på den måde gøre dine faxer
lysere eller mørkere.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), og tryk derefter på OK, når Fax Feature vises
på nederste linje i displayet.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Darkness.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk
på OK.
Vi anbefaler brug af de traditionelle, analoge telefontjenester (PSTN:
offentlige telefonnetværk), når der skal sluttes en fax til telefonlinjen.
Hvis du bruger andre internettjenester (DSL, ISDN, VolP), kan du
forbedre forbindelseskvaliteten ved hjælp af et mikrofilter. Mikrofilteret
eliminerer unødvendige støjsignaler og forbedrer forbindelses- eller
internetkvaliteten. Eftersom DSL-mikrofilteret ikke leveres sammen
med maskinen, skal du kontakte din internetudbyder for at få flere
oplysninger om brug af DSL-mikrofilteret.
1 Linjeport
2 Mikrofilter
3 DSL-modem / telefonlinje
TILSTAND ANBEFALES TIL:
Standard Originaler med tegn i normal størrelse.
Fine Originaler med små tegn eller tynde linjer, eller
originaler der er udskrevet på en matrixprinter.
Super Fine Originaler med mange fine detaljer. Tilstanden
Super fin kan kun aktiveres, hvis den maskine,
der kommunikeres med, også understøtter
denne tilstand.
• Ved hukommelsestransmission er
tilstanden Super Fine ikke tilgængelig.
Opløsningsindstillingen ændres
automatisk til Fine.
• Når maskinen er indstillet til opløsningen
Super Fine, og den faxmaskine, der
kommunikeres med, ikke understøtter
opløsningen Super Fine, afsender
maskinen faxen med den højeste
opløsningsgrad, der understøttes af
den modtagende faxmaskine.
Photo Fax Originaler med gråtoner eller fotografier.
Indstillingen for opløsning anvendes på det igangværende faxjob.
På side 50 kan du se, hvordan du ændrer standardindstillingen.Fax | 45
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Automatisk afsendelse af en fax
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.Der
vises Ready to Fax på den øverste linje af displayet.
3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed, så de passer til den fax,
du skal sende.
4. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine.
Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller
gruppeopkaldstaster. På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om,
hvordan du gemmer og søger efter numre.
5. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ).
6. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for
at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK.
7. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?.
Når der er ringet op til nummeret, begynder maskinen at sende faxen,
når modtagerens maskine svarer.
Manuel afsendelse af en fax
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed, så de passer til den fax,
du skal sende. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på side 44
4. Tryk på Håndfrit kald ( ). Du kan høre en klartone.
5. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine.
Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller
gruppeopkaldstaster. På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om,
hvordan du gemmer og søger efter numre.
6. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ), når du hører en skinger
faxtone fra den anden maskine.
Bekræftelse af en transmission
Når den sidste side i originalen er afsendt korrekt, bipper maskinen og
vender tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Hvis noget går galt under afsendelsen, vises der en fejlmeddelelse i displayet.
Du kan finde en liste over fejlmeddelelser og deres betydning på side 71.
Hvis der vises en fejlmeddelelse, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( )for at
slette meddelelsen og prøve at sende faxen igen.
Maskinen kan indstilles til at udskrive en bekræftelsesrapport, hver gang
den har afsluttet afsendelsen af en fax. Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger
på side 49.
Automatisk genkald
Når det nummer, du har ringet op, er optaget, eller der ikke svares, når du sender
en fax, foretager maskinen automatisk et genkald hvert tredje minut op til
syv gange (i henhold til producentens standardindstillingerne).
Når der vises Retry Redial? i displayet, skal du trykke på OK for at kalde op
til nummeret igen med det samme. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ), hvis du vil
afbryde det automatiske genkald.
Ændring af tidsintervallet mellem genkald og antallet af genkaldsforsøg.
Se ”Receiving-indstillinger” på side 49
Genopkald til det senest kaldte nummer
Sådan ringer du op igen til det nummer, du senest har kaldt:
1. Tryk på Genopkald/Pause ( ).
2. Når originalen er lagt i DADF’en, begynder maskinen automatisk at
sende.
Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for
at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK.
Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?.
Sender faxer på begge sider af papiret
Du kan indstille maskinen til at udskrive modtagne faxer på begge sider af
papiret .
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Duplex ( ).
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Sender faxer i normal tilstand.
• 2 Side: Sender faxer på begge sider af originalen.
• 2 ->1Side ROT2: Sender faxer begge sider af originalerne og
udskriver hver af dem på separate ark, men oplysningerne på
bagsiden af udskriften roteres 180°.
4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst.
MODTAGELSE AF EN FAX
Valg af papirbakke
Når du har lagt de udskriftsmedier, du vil bruge til modtagelse af faxer,
i maskinen, skal du vælge den papirbakke, du vil bruge til faxmodtagelse.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Source vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Fax Tray vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Ændring af modtagetilstand
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Receiving vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Receive Mode.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tilstand for faxmodtagelse vises.
• I tilstanden Fax besvarer maskinen et indgående opkald og skifter
øjeblikkeligt til fax-modtagetilstand.
Indstillingen for mørkhed anvendes til det igangværende faxjob.
På side 50 kan du se, hvordan du ændrer standardindstillingen.
Hvis du ønsker at annullere et faxjob, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( )
på et vilkårligt tidspunkt under afsendelsen.
Hvis du ønsker at annullere et faxjob, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( )
på et vilkårligt tidspunkt under afsendelsen.
X
Y
X
Y46 | Fax
• I tilstanden Tel kan du modtage en fax ved at trykke på Håndfrit kald
( ) og derefter på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). Du kan
også løfte røret på den eksterne telefon og derefter indtaste koden til
ekstern modtagelse. Se ”Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern
telefon” på side 46
• I tilstanden Ans/Fax besvarer en telefonsvarer, der er tilsluttet maskinen,
et indgående opkald, så den, der ringer op, kan indtale en besked.
Hvis faxmaskinen registrerer en faxtone på linjen, skifter maskinen
automatisk til Faxtilstand for at modtage faxen. Se ”Automatisk
modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax” på side 46
• I tilstanden DRPD kan du modtage et opkald ved hjælp af funktionen
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection). DRPD-funktionen registrerer
bestemte ringetonesekvenser og er en tjeneste, der leveres af
telefonselskaberne. Den gør det muligt for en bruger at besvare
opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre fra én enkelt telefonlinje.
Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger på side 46.
6. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Fax
Maskinen er forudindstillet til tilstanden Fax fra producenten. Når du modtager
en fax, besvarer maskinen opkaldet efter et bestemt antal ring og modtager
automatisk faxen.
For at ændre antallet af ring, se side 50.
Manuel modtagelse i tilstanden Tel
Du kan modtage et faxopkald ved at trykke på Håndfrit kald ( ) og derefter
trykke på Black Start ( ) eller Color Start ( ), når du hører en faxtone fra
afsendermaskinen.
Maskinen begynder at modtage en fax og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand, når
modtagelsen er afsluttet.
Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern telefon
Denne funktion fungerer bedst, når du anvender en ekstern telefon, der
er tilsluttet EXT-stikket på maskinens bagside. Du kan modtage en fax
fra en person, du taler med på den eksterne telefon, uden at skulle gå hen
til faxmaskinen.
Når du modtager et opkald på den eksterne telefon, og du kan høre faxtonen,
skal du trykke på knapperne *9* på den eksterne telefon. Så begynder
maskinen at modtage faxen.
Tryk langsomt på tasterne i den angivne rækkefølge. Prøv at trykke *9*
en gang til, hvis du stadig hører faxtonen fra den eksterne maskine.
*9* er den eksterne modtagekode, maskinen leveres med fra fabrikken.
Den første og sidste stjerne er faste, men du kan ændre det midterste tal.
På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du ændrer koden.
Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax
Hvis du vil bruge denne tilstand, skal der sættes en telefonsvarer i EXT-stikket
bag på maskinen.
Hvis den, der ringer, efterlader en besked, gemmer telefonsvareren
beskeden som normalt. Hvis maskinen registrerer en faxtone på linjen,
begynder den automatisk at modtage faxen.
Modtagelse af faxer i tilstanden DRPD
DRPD-funktionen registrerer bestemte ringetonesekvenser og er en tjeneste,
der leveres af telefonselskaberne. Den gør det muligt for en bruger at besvare
opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre fra én enkelt telefonlinje. Det nummer,
som en person ringer til dig fra, identificeres med forskellige ringemønstre,
der består af forskellige kombinationer af lange og korte ringelyde. Denne
funktion bruges ofte af svartjenester, der besvarer telefoner for mange
forskellige klienter, og som derfor har behov for at vide, hvilket nummer
en given person ringer ind fra, for at kunne besvare opkaldet korrekt.
Hvis du bruger DRPD-funktionen (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection), kan
faxmaskinen lære at genkende den ringetonesekvens, som du angiver,
at faxmaskinen skal besvare. Medmindre du ændrer den, vil denne
ringetonesekvens fortsat registreres og besvares som et faxopkald, mens
alle andre ringetonesekvenser dirigeres videre til den eksterne telefon eller
den telefonsvarer, der er sat i EXT-stikket. Du kan når som helst slå DRPDfunktionen fra eller ændre den.
Du kan først bruge DRPD-funktionen, når tjenesten er oprettet på din telefonlinje
af telefonselskabet. Hvis du vil opsætte DRPD, skal du have en anden
telefonlinje på stedet eller få en person til at ringe til dit faxnummer udefra.
Sådan opsættes tilstanden DRPD:
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Receiving vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil DRPD Mode vises, og tryk på OK.
Waiting Ring, vises på displayet.
5. Ring til dit faxnummer fra en anden telefon. Det er ikke nødvendigt
at foretage opkaldet fra en faxmaskine.
6. Når maskinen begynder at ringe, skal du ikke besvare opkaldet.
Maskinen skal registrere adskillige ring for at lære mønstret.
Når maskinen kan genkende sekvensen, vises der Completed DRPD
Setup i displayet. Hvis opsætningen af DRPD mislykkes, vises der
Error DRPD Ring. Tryk på OK, når DRPD Mode vises, og begynd forfra
fra trin 4.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
• Når der ikke er mere plads i hukommelsen, kan printeren ikke mere
modtage indgående faxer. Sørg for, at der er ledig hukommelse
ved at fjerne data, der er lagret i hukommelsen, for at kunne
genoptage funktionen.
• Hvis du vil bruge tilstanden Ans/Fax, skal du sætte en telefonsvarer
i EXT-stikket bag på maskinen.
• Hvis du vil undgå, at andre skal kunne se de dokumenter, du modtager,
kan du bruge tilstanden til sikker modtagelse. I denne tilstand
gemmes alle modtagne faxer i hukommelsen. Du kan finde
yderligere oplysninger på side 47.
• Hvis du har indstillet maskinen til tilstanden Ans/Fax,
og telefonsvareren er slået fra, eller der ikke er sat en telefonsvarer
i EXT-stikket, skifter maskinen automatisk til tilstanden Fax efter
et foruddefineret antal ring.
• Hvis din telefonsvarer har en brugerindstillet ringetæller, skal
du indstille maskinen til at besvare indgående opkald efter 1 ring.
• Hvis du har valgt tilstanden Tel (manuel modtagelse),
og telefonsvareren er tilsluttet maskinen, skal du slå
telefonsvareren fra. Ellers griber meddelelsen fra telefonsvareren
forstyrrende ind i telefonsamtalen.Fax | 47
Modtagelse i sikker modtagetilstand
Du kan få brug for at forhindre, at uvedkommende personer har adgang til
de faxer, du modtager. Du kan skifte til sikker modtagetilstand, så udskriften
af modtagne faxer begrænses, når maskinen ikke er overvåget. I sikker
modtagetilstand gemmes alle indgående faxer i hukommelsen. Når tilstanden
er deaktiveret, udskrives eventuelle gemte faxer.
Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), og tryk derefter på OK, når Fax Feature vises på
nederste linje i displayet.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Secure Receive vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil On vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Indtast en adgangskode på fire cifre, som du vil bruge, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast adgangskoden igen for at bekræfte den, og tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Når en fax modtages i sikker modtagetilstand, gemmes den i hukommelsen
og meddelelsen Secure Receive vises, så du ved, at der er modtaget en
fax.
Udskrivning af modtagne faxer
1. Åbn menuen Secure Receive ved at følge vejledningen i trin 1 til
og med 3 i ”Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand”.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Print vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Indtast den firecifrede adgangskode, og tryk på OK.
Maskinen udskriver alle faxer, der er gemt i hukommelsen.
Deaktivering af sikker modtagetilstand
1. Åbn menuen Secure Receive ved at følge vejledningen i trin 1 til og
med 3 i ”Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand”.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Off vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Indtast den firecifrede adgangskode, og tryk på OK.
Tilstanden deaktiveres, og maskinen udskriver alle faxer, der er gemt
i hukommelsen.
4. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Modtagelse af faxer i hukommelsen
Da maskinen er en multitaskingenhed, kan den modtage faxer samtidig med,
at den kopierer eller udskriver. Hvis du modtager en fax, mens du kopierer
eller udskriver, gemmer maskinen indgående faxer i hukommelsen. Så snart
kopieringen eller udskrivningen er afsluttet, udskriver maskinen automatisk
faxerne.
Maskinen modtager også fax og lagrer dem i hukommelsen, når der ikke
er papir i bakken, eller der ikke er toner i tonerpatronen.
ANDRE MÅDER AT FAXE PÅ
Afsendelse af en fax til flere destinationer
Du kan bruge funktionen til afsendelse af fax til flere destinationer.
Originalerne gemmes automatisk i hukommelsen og sendes til en ekstern
maskine. Efter transmissionen slettes originalerne automatisk fra hukommelsen.
Du kan ikke sende en farvefax ved brug af denne funktion.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får
det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på
side 44
4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Multi Send vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast nummeret på den første modtagerfaxmaskine, og tryk på OK.
Du kan bruge genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre. Du kan indtaste
gruppeopkaldsnumre ved hjælp af knappen Adressekartotek ( ). Se
side 50, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger.
7. Indtast det næste faxnummer, og tryk på OK.
Du bliver i displayet bedt om at indtaste endnu et faxnummer for
at afsende dokumentet.
8. Hvis du vil indtaste flere faxnumre, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises,
og gentage trin 6 og 7. Du kan tilføje op til 10 destinationer.
9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for
at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK.
Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser
hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen.
10. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for
at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på
OK.
Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?.
Maskinen begynder at sende faxen til de numre, du har indtastet, i den
rækkefølge, du har indtastet dem.
Afsendelse af en udskudt fax
Du kan indstille maskinen, så den sender en fax på et senere tidspunkt,
hvor du ikke selv er til stede. Du kan ikke sende en farvefax ved brug af
denne funktion.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får
det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på
side 44
4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Delay Send vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast nummeret på den modtagende maskine ved hjælp af taltastaturet.
Du kan bruge genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre. Du kan indtaste
• DRPD-funktionen skal konfigureres igen, hvis du tildeler faxnummeret
igen eller slutter maskinen til en anden telefonlinje.
• Når DRPD-funktionen er oprettet, skal du ringe dit faxnummer op igen
for at bekræfte, at maskinen svarer med en faxtone. Derefter skal
du sørge for, at der ringes op til et andet nummer, som er registreret
på samme linje, så du er sikker på, at opkaldet dirigeres videre til
den eksterne telefon eller telefonsvarer, der er sat i EXT-stikket.
Du kan aktivere sikker modtagetilstand uden at angive en
adgangskode, men så kan du ikke beskytte dine faxer.
Når først du har indtastet et gruppeopkaldsnummer, kan du ikke
senere indtaste et andet gruppeopkaldsnummer.48 | Fax
gruppeopkaldsnumre ved hjælp af knappen Adressekartotek ( ).
Se ”Oprettelse af et adressekartotek” på side 50, hvis du ønsker
yderligere oplysninger.
7. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer. Du bliver i displayet bedt
om at indtaste endnu et faxnummer for at afsende dokumentet.
8. Hvis du vil indtaste flere faxnumre, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises,
og gentage trin 6 og 7. Du kan tilføje op til 10 destinationer.
9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for
at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK.
10. Indtast det ønskede jobnavn, og tryk på OK.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn
på side 21.
Hvis du ikke ønsker at indtaste et navn, skal du blot springe dette trin over.
11. Brug taltasterne, og indtast klokkeslættet. Tryk derefter på OK eller
Black Start.
Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser
hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen.
12. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for
at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på
OK.
Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?.
Maskinen vender tilbage til klar-tilstand. Displayet minder dig om, at maskinen
befinder sig i klar-tilstand, og at den er indstillet til at sende en udskudt fax.
Tilføjelse af sider til en udskudt fax
Du kan føje flere sider til de faxer, der er gemt i maskinens hukommelse
som udskudte faxer.
1. Læg de originaler, der skal tilføjes, i maskinen, og juster
dokumentindstillingerne.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Add Page.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede faxjob vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
Maskinen scanner originalen ind i hukommelsen og viser både det
samlede antal sider og det tilføjede antal sider.
Annullering af en udskudt fax
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Cancel Job vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede faxjob vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes.
Den valgte fax slettes fra hukommelsen.
Afsendelse af en prioriteret fax
Du kan bruge denne funktion, hvis du vil sende en fax med høj prioritet før andre
reserverede handlinger. Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen og sendes
med det samme, når den igangværende handling er afsluttet. Afsendelse
af en prioriteret fax afbryder også afsendelse til flere destinationer midt mellem
afsendelserne (dvs. når afsendelsen til maskine A er afsluttet, og før
afsendelsen til maskine B starter) eller mellem opkaldsforsøg.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får
det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på
side 44.
4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Priority Send vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine.
Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller gruppeopkaldstaster.
Se side 50, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger.
7. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer.
8. Indtast det ønskede jobnavn, og tryk på OK.
Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser
hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen.
9. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for
at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på
OK.
Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?.
Maskinen viser det nummer, der ringes op til, og begynder at sende faxen.
Videresendelse af faxer
Du kan videresende indkommende og udgående faxer til en anden fax eller
email-adresse.
Videresendelse af afsendte faxer til en anden fax
Du kan indstille maskinen til at sende kopier af alle udgående faxer til
en nærmere angivet destination ud over de faxnumre, du har indtastet.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Fax.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Send Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge On, og tryk på OK.
7. Indtast nummeret på den faxmaskine, faxerne skal videresendes til,
og tryk derefter på OK.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne faxmaskine.
Videresendelse af faxer til e-mail-adresser
Du kan indstille maskinen til at sende kopier af alle udgående faxer til
en angivet destination ud over de e-mail-adresser, du har indtastet.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil E-mail vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Send Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge On, og tryk på OK.
7. Indtast din e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK.
8. Indtast email-adressen, som faxerne skal sendes til, og tryk på OK.
9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne e-mail-adresse.
Når først du har indtastet et gruppeopkaldsnummer, kan du ikke
senere indtaste et andet gruppeopkaldsnummer.
Hvis du angiver et klokkeslæt, der ligger før det nuværende
tidspunkt, sendes faxen på dette tidspunkt dagen efter. Fax | 49
Videresendelse af modtagne faxer til en anden fax
Du kan indstille maskinen til at videresende modtagne faxer til et andet
faxnummer inden for et givet tidsrum. Når maskinen modtager en fax,
gemmes den i hukommelsen. Derefter ringer maskinen til det nummer,
du har angivet, og sender faxen.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Fax.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Rcv. Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
Hvis maskinen skal indstilles til at udskrive en fax, når videresendelse
af faxer er fuldført, skal du vælge Forward&Print
7. Indtast nummeret på den faxmaskine, faxerne skal videresendes til,
og tryk derefter på OK.
8. Indtast starttidspunktet, og tryk på OK.
9. Indtast sluttidspunktet, og tryk på OK.
10. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Senere modtagne faxer videresendes til den angivne faxmaskine.
Videresendelse af modtagne faxer til e-mail-adresser
Du kan indstille din maskine til at videresende indgående faxer til den
indtastede e-mail-adresse.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil E-mail vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Rcv. Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
Hvis maskinen skal indstilles til at udskrive en fax, når videresendelse
af faxer er fuldført, skal du vælge Forward&Print
7. Indtast din e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK.
8. Indtast email-adressen, som faxerne skal sendes til, og tryk på OK.
9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne e-mail-adresse.
FAXOPSÆTNING
Ændring af faxindstillingerne
Maskinen er udstyret med forskellige indstillinger, som kan vælges af brugeren
som et led i opsætningen af faxsystemet. Du kan ændre standardindstillingerne,
så de passer til det, du har brug for.
Sådan ændres indstillingerne for faxopsætning:
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af
displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Sending eller Receiving, og tryk
på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede menupunkt vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, eller indtast
værdien for den indstilling, du har valgt, og tryk på OK.
6. Gentag om nødvendigt trin 4 til og med 5.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Sending-indstillinger
Receiving-indstillinger
INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE
Redial Times Du kan angive, hvor mange gange maskinen skal
forsøge at kalde op til et nummer igen. Hvis du
indtaster 0, ringer maskinen ikke op igen.
Redial Term Maskinen kan automatisk foretage genkald til
en anden fax, hvis den var optaget første gang.
Du kan angive et interval mellem forsøgene.
Prefix Dial Du kan angive et præfiks på op til fem cifre.
Maskinen vil så ringe dette opkaldspræfiks først, hver
gang den ringer et automatisk opkaldsnummer.
Dette er nyttigt, hvis du skal have adgang til
en PABX-omstilling.
ECM Mode Denne tilstand er en hjælp, hvis forbindelsen er dårlig.
Den sørger for, at alle faxer, du sender, sendes
uden problemer til en anden fax, der også er udstyret
med ECM-funktion. Det kan tage længere tid
at sende en fax med ECM-funktion.
Send Report Du kan indstille maskinen, så den udskriver en
bekræftelsesrapport, der viser, om en transmission
lykkedes, hvor mange sider der blev sendt m.m.
De tilgængelige indstillinger er On, Off og OnError, der kun udskriver en rapport, når
transmissionen ikke lykkes.
Image TCR Denne funktion underretter brugere om, hvilke
faxmeddelelser der er blevet sendt, ved at vise
sendte meddelelser i transmissionsrapporten.
Første side i meddelelsen omdannes til en billedfil,
der printes på transmissionsrapporten, så
brugeren kan se, hvilke meddelelser der er blevet
sendt.
Du kan ikke bruge denne funktion uden at gemme
data i hukommelsen.
Dial Mode Alt afhængigt af dit land er det ikke sikkert, at denne
indstilling er tilgængelig. Hvis du ikke kan få adgang
til denne indstilling, understøtter maskinen ikke
denne funktion.
Du kan indstille opkaldstilstanden for maskinen til
toneopkald eller impulsopkald. Hvis du har
et offentligt telefonsystem eller et privat
omstillingssystem (PBX), skal du muligvis vælge
Pulse. Kontakt telefonselskabet, hvis du ikke er
sikker på, hvilken opkaldstilstand du skal bruge.
Hvis du vælger Pulse, vil nogle
af telefonsystemets funktioner måske ikke være
tilgængelige. Det kan også tage længere tid at
kalde op til et fax- eller et telefonnummer.
INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE
Receive Mode Du kan vælge faxens standardmodtagetilstand.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om modtagelse
af faxer i de forskellige tilstande på side 45.50 | Fax
Ændring af standarddokumentindstillingerne
Faxindstillingerne, bl.a. opløsning og mørkhed, kan indstilles til de oftest
brugte tilstande. Når du sender en fax, bruges standardindstillingerne, hvis
du ikke har ændret dem ved at bruge den tilsvarende tast og menu.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af
displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Change Default vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Resolution.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede opløsning vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Darkness vises, og tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mørkhed vises, og tryk på OK.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Automatisk udskrivning af en rapport over afsendte
faxer
Du kan indstille maskinen, så der udskrives en rapport med detaljerede
oplysninger om de foregående 50 transmissioner, bl.a. klokkeslæt og dato.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af
displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Auto Report vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil On vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Oprettelse af et adressekartotek
Du kan opsætte et adressekartotek med de faxnumre, du bruger oftest. Du
kan bruge følgende funktioner, når du opsætter et adressekartotek:
• Genvejstaster
• Hurtig/gruppeopkaldsnumre
Genvejstaster
Du kan gemme faxnumre, du ofte bruger, i de 15 genvejstaster
på kontrolpanelet. Derefter kan du indtaste et faxnummer ved bare at trykke
på en tast. Med tasten Shift kan du gemme op til 30 numre i genvejstasterne.
Du kan gemme numre i genvejstasterne på to måder. Se fremgangsmåderne
nedenfor, og brug derefter den metode, der passer dig bedst:
Registrering, efter at du har trykket på en genvejstast
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på en af genvejstasterne.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes.
4. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske
Ring To Answer Du kan angive, hvor mange gange maskinen skal
ringe, før den besvarer et indgående opkald.
Stamp RCV
Name
Denne indstilling bevirker, at der automatisk udskrives
sidetal samt dato og klokkeslæt for modtagelsen
nederst på hver side af en modtaget fax.
Rcv Start Code Denne kode giver dig mulighed for at starte
faxmodtagelsen fra en ekstern telefon, der er sat
i EXT-stikket bag på maskinen. Hvis du tager den
eksterne telefon og kan høre faxtoner, skal
du indtaste koden. Fabriksindstillingen er *9*.
Auto Reduction Når du modtager en fax, der indeholder sider,
der er lige så lange som det papir, der ligger
i papirbakken, eller længere, kan maskinen
formindske originalstørrelsen, så den passer til
det papir, der ligger i maskinen. Slå denne funktion
til, hvis en indgående side skal formindskes
automatisk.
Hvis denne funktion er indstillet til Off, kan maskinen
ikke formindske originalen, så den kan være
på en enkelt side. Originalen opdeles og udskrives
i den faktiske størrelse på to eller flere sider.
Discard Size Når du modtager en fax, der indeholder sider, der
er lige så lange som det papir, der ligger i maskinen,
eller længere, kan du indstille maskinen, så der ses
bort fra en bestemt længde fra slutningen af den
modtagne fax. Maskinen udskriver den modtagne
fax på et eller flere ark papir, minus de data, der
ellers ville være udskrevet i det segment, der nu
ses bort fra.
Når den modtagne fax indeholder sider, der er større
end papiret i maskinen, og Auto Reduction
er aktiveret, formindsker maskinen faxen, så den
passer til papiret, uden at der ses bort fra visse
segmenter.
Junk Fax Setup Alt afhængigt af dit land er det ikke sikkert, at denne
indstilling er tilgængelig. Når denne funktion
er aktiveret, vil systemet ikke modtage faxer, der
er sendt fra eksterne faxer med faxnumre, der
er gemt i hukommelsen som uønskede faxnumre.
Denne funktion er nyttig, hvis du vil blokere
uønskede faxer.
Når du aktiverer denne funktion, kan du få adgang
til følgende indstillinger og angive uønskede
faxnumre.
• Add: Giver dig mulighed for at angive op til 10
faxnumre.
• Delete: Giver dig mulighed for at slette et
uønsket faxnummer.
• Delete All: Giver dig mulighed for at slette
alle uønskede faxnumre.
DRPD Mode Denne tilstand sætter en bruger i stand til at besvare
opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre via en enkelt
telefonlinje. I denne menu kan du indstille maskinen,
så den registrerer hvilke ringemønstre, den skal
besvare. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om denne
funktion på side 46.
INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE
Duplex Print
• Long Edge: Udskriver siderne, så de skal
læses som i en bog.
• Short Edge: Udskriver siderne, så de skal
læses, ligesom når man vipper siderne op på
en notesblok.
• Off: Udskriver den modtagne fax på en side af
papiret.
Inden du begynder at gemme faxnumre, skal du kontrollere,
at maskinen er i faxtilstand.
INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSEFax | 51
tegn på side 21.
5. Indtast det faxnummer, du vil gemme, og tryk på OK.
Registrering, efter at du først har indtastet et nummer
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Indtast det faxnummer, du vil gemme.
3. Tryk på en af genvejstasterne.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes.
5. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske
tegn på side 21.
6. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer.
Brug af genvejstaster
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et faxnummer, mens du er ved at sende
en fax:
• Hvis du vil hente et nummer fra genvejstast 1 til 15, skal du trykke på den
tilsvarende genvejstast og trykke på OK.
• Hvis du vil hente et nummer fra genvejstast 16 til 30, skal du trykke
på Shift og derefter på den tilsvarende genvejstast. Tryk derefter på OK.
Hurtigopkaldstaster
Du kan gemme op til 240 faxnumre, som du ofte bruger, som
hurtigopkaldstaster.
Registrering af et hurtigopkaldsnummer
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Speed Dial.
4. Indtast et hurtigopkaldsnummer mellem 0 og 239, og tryk på OK.
Hvis det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vælger, allerede er i brug, vises
navnet på displayet, så du kan ændre det. Hvis du vil begynde forfra
med et andet hurtigopkaldsnummer, skal du trykke på Tilbage ( ).
5. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske
tegn på side 21.
6. Indtast det ønskede faxnummer, og tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Redigering af hurtigopkaldsnumre
1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Speed Dial.
3. Indtast det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vil redigere, og tryk på OK.
4. Ret navnet, og tryk på OK.
5. Ret faxnummeret, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Brug af hurtigopkaldsnumre
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et destinationsnummer, mens du er ved
at sende en fax, skal du indtaste det hurtigopkaldsnummer, som du gemte
det ønskede faxnummer under.
• Hvis hurtigopkaldsnummeret er på ét ciffer (0-9), skal du trykke på den
tilsvarende taltast på taltastaturet og holde den nede.
• Hvis hurtigopkaldsnummeret er på to eller tre cifre, skal du trykke
på tasten eller tasterne med det eller de første cifre og derefter holde
tasten med det sidste ciffer nede.
Du kan også søge efter en post i hukommelsen ved at trykke
på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i
adressekartoteket” på side 51.
Gruppeopkaldsnumre
Hvis du ofte skal sende det samme dokument til flere destinationer, kan du
gruppere disse destinationer og angive dem under et gruppeopkaldsnummer.
Du kan derefter bruge gruppeopkaldsnummeret og sende dokumentet til
alle destinationerne i gruppen. Du kan angive op til 200 (0 til og med 199)
gruppeopkaldsnumre ved at bruge destinationens eksisterende
hurtigopkaldsnumre.
Registrering af et gruppeopkaldsnummer
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Group Dial vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Indtast et gruppeopkaldsnummer mellem 0 og 199, og tryk på OK.
5. Indtast et hurtigopkaldsnummer, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på OK, når hurtigopkaldsoplysningerne vises korrekt.
7. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes.
8. Gentag trin 5 og 6, hvis du vil indsætte flere hurtigopkaldsnumre i gruppen.
9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil
for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK.
10. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Redigering af et gruppeopkaldsnummer
Du kan slette et bestemt nummer fra en gruppe eller indsætte et nyt
nummer i den valgte gruppe.
1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Group Dial vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Indtast det gruppeopkaldsnummer, du vil redigere, og tryk derefter på OK.
4. Indtast det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vil tilføje eller slette, og tryk på OK.
Hvis du har indtastet et nyt hurtigopkaldsnummer, vises Add?.
Hvis du indtaster et hurtigopkaldsnummer, der er gemt i en gruppe,
vises der Delete?.
5. Tryk på OK for at tilføje eller slette nummeret.
6. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises, hvis du vil tilføje eller slette flere numre,
og gentag derefter fremgangsmåden fra trin 4 og 5.
7. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil
for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Brug af gruppeopkaldsnumre
Hvis du vil bruge et gruppeopkaldsnummer, skal du søge efter det og vælge
det i hukommelsen.
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et faxnummer, mens du er ved at sende
en fax, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se nedenfor.
Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket
Du kan søge efter et nummer i hukommelsen på to måder. Du kan enten
søge systematisk i alfabetisk rækkefølge, eller du kan søge ved at indtaste
de første bogstaver i det navn, der hører til nummeret.
Hvis du trykker på en genvejstast, hvor der allerede er gemt
et nummer, vises en meddelelse på displayet, hvor du bliver
spurgt, om du vil overskrive det gemte nummer. Tryk på OK for
at bekræfte Yes og fortsætte. Hvis du vil starte forfra med en
anden genvejstast, skal du vælge No.52 | Fax
Sekventiel søgning i hukommelsen
1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Fax.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Dial på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises All.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn og nummer vises.
Du kan søge opad og nedad gennem hele hukommelsen i alfabetisk
orden.
Søgning efter de første bogstaver i et navn
1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Fax.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Dial på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil ID vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Indtast de første par bogstaver i det navn, du søger efter, og tryk
derefter på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK.
Sletning af en post i adressekartoteket
Du kan slette numre i adressekartoteket ét ad gangen.
1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Delete på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede søgemetode vises, og
tryk derefter på OK.
Vælg Search All, hvis du vil søge efter et nummer ved at blade
gennem alle poster i adressekartoteket.
Vælg Search ID, hvis du vil søge efter et nummer ved at indtaste de
første par bogstaver i navnet.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK.
Eller indtast de første bogstaver, og tryk på OK. Tryk på venstre/
højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises for at bekræfte sletningen.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Udskrivning af adressekartoteket
1. Du kan kontrollere indstillingerne for adressekartoteket ved
at udskrive en liste.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Print på nederste
linje af displayet.
3. Tryk på OK. Der udskrives en oversigt over dine genvejstastindstillinger
og gemte hurtig- og gruppeopkaldsnumre.Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse | 53
brug af USB-flash-hukommelse
I dette kapitel beskrives det, hvordan du bruger en USB-hukommelsesenhed sammen med maskinen.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Om USB-hukommelse
• Tilslutning af en USB-hukommelsesenhed
• Scanning til en USB-hukommelsesenhed
• Udskrivning fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed
• Sikkerhedskopiering af data
• Håndtering af USB-hukommelse
OM USB-HUKOMMELSE
USB-hukommelsesenheder fås i flere forskellige størrelser, så du får
tilstrækkelig plads til lagring af dokumenter og præsentationer og download
af musik og hele videoer, fotografier med høj opløsning og et utal af andre
filer, som du vil gemme eller overføre.
Du kan bruge en USB-hukommelsesenhed til flere forskellige ting på denne
maskine. Du kan f.eks.:
• Scanne dokumenter og gemme dem på USB-enheden.
• Udskrive data, der er gemt på USB-enheden.
• Sikkerhedskopier Adressekartotek /Phone Book-poster og
maskinens systemindstillinger.
• Gendanne sikkerhedskopifiler i maskinens hukommelse.
• Formatere USB-enheden.
• Kontrollere, hvor meget hukommelse der er til rådighed.
TILSLUTNING AF EN USB-HUKOMMELSESENHED
USB-porten foran på maskinen er beregnet til en hukommelsesenhed af typen
USB V1.1 og USB V2.0. Maskinen understøtter USB-hukommelsesenheder
med FAT16/FAT32 og en sektorstørrelse på 512 byte.
Kontroller USB-hukommelsesenhedens filsystem hos en forhandler.
Du må kun bruge en godkendt USB-enhed med et tilslutningsstik af type A.
Brug kun en USB-hukommelsesenhed af metal eller med afskærmning.
Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten foran på maskinen.
SCANNING TIL EN USB-HUKOMMELSESENHED
Du kan scanne et dokument og gemme det på en USB-hukommelsesenhed.
Der er to måder at gøre dette på: Du kan scanne til enheden ved hjælp
af standardindstillingerne, eller du kan vælge dine egne scanningsindstillinger.
Scanning
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Scan/Email.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet.
5. Tryk på OK, Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ), når der vises USB.
Uanset hvilken knap, du trykker på, vælges farvetilstanden ud fra det,
den er tilpasset til. Se ”Tilpasning af scanning til USB” på side 54.
Maskinen begynder at scanne originalen, og du bliver derefter spurgt,
om du vil scanne en side til.
6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes, hvis du vil scanne flere sider. Læg en
original i maskinen, og tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ).
• Du må ikke fjerne USB-enheden, mens maskinen er i gang,
eller mens der skrives til eller læses fra USB-hukommelsen.
Maskinens garanti dækker ikke skader forårsaget af brugerens
forkerte brug.
• Hvis USB-enheden har visse funktioner, f.eks. sikkerhedsindstillinger
og adgangskodeindstillinger, er det ikke sikkert, at den kan
registreres automatisk af maskinen. Du kan finde flere
oplysninger om disse funktioner i brugerhåndbogen til enheden.54 | Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse
Uanset hvilken knap, du trykker på, vælges farvetilstanden ud fra det,
den er tilpasset til. Se ”Tilpasning af scanning til USB” på side 54.
Ellers skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No og trykke på OK.
Når scanningen er udført, kan du fjerne USB-enheden fra maskinen.
Tilpasning af scanning til USB
Du kan angive billedstørrelse, filformat og farvetilstand, hver gang du scanner
til en USB-enhed.
1. Tryk på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på ( ), indtil der vises Scan Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises USB Memory
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK.
Du kan angive følgende indstillinger:
• Scan Size: Angiver billedstørrelsen.
• Original Type: Angiver originaldokumentets type.
• Resolution: Angiver billedopløsningen.
• Scan Color: Angiver farvetilstanden. Hvis du vælger Mono her, kan
du ikke vælge JPEG i Scan Format.
• Scan Format: Angiver det filformat, som billedet skal gemmes i.
Hvis du vælger TIFF eller PDF, kan du vælge at scanne flere sider.
Hvis du vælger JPEG her, kan du ikke vælge Mono Scan Color.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Gentag trin 4 og 5, hvis du vil angive andre indstillinger.
7. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage
til klar-tilstand.
Du kan ændre standardindstillingerne for scanning. Se side 40, hvis du ønsker
yderligere oplysninger.
UDSKRIVNING FRA EN USBHUKOMMELSESENHED
Du kan udskrive filer, der er gemt på en USB-hukommelsesenhed, direkte.
Du kan udskrive TIFF-, BMP-, JPEG-, PDF- og PRN-filer.
Følgende filtyper understøttes af funktionen til direkte udskrivning:
• PRN: Dell PCL 6-kompatible.
• Du kan oprette PRN-filer ved at markere afkrydsningsfeltet Udskriv til fil,
når du udskriver et dokument. Dokumentet gemmes som en PRN-fil i stedet
for at blive udskrevet på papir. Kun PRN-filer, der oprettes på denne måde,
kan udskrives direkte fra USB-hukommelsen. Læs i Softwareafsnittet,
hvordan du opretter en PRN-fil.
• BMP: BMP, ukomprimeret
• TIFF: TIFF 6.0-baseline
• JPEG: JPEG-baseline
• PDF: PDF 1.4 og tidligere versioner
Sådan udskrives et dokument fra en USBhukommelsesenhed
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. Hvis enheden allerede
sidder i porten, skal du trykke på USB-udskrivning ( ).
Maskinen registrerer automatisk enheden og læser de data, der er gemt
på den.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mappe eller fil vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
Hvis der vises et D foran et mappenavn, er der en eller flere filer eller
mapper i den markerede mappe.
3. Hvis du vælger en fil, skal du gå videre til næste trin.
Hvis du vælger en mappe, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil, indtil den
ønskede fil vises.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge det antal kopier, der skal udskrives,
eller indtast antallet.
5. Tryk på OK, Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ) for at starte
udskrivning af den valgte fil.
Der er to muligheder:
• OK eller Color Start ( ): Farveudskrift
• Black Start ( ): Sort/hvid udskrift
Når filen er udskrevet, bliver du i displayet spurgt, om du vil udskrive
et andet job.
6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes, hvis du vil udskrive et andet job, og
gentag vejledningen fra trin 2.
Ellers skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No og trykke på OK.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
SIKKERHEDSKOPIERING AF DATA
Data i maskinens hukommelse kan slettes ved en fejltagelse i forbindelse med
et strømsvigt eller lagerfejl. Sikkerhedskopier hjælper dig med at beskytte
posteringerne i adressekartotek og systemindstillingerne ved at lagre dem
som sikkerhedskopifiler på en USB-hukommelsesenhed.
Sikkerhedskopiering af data
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Export Setting vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises.
• Adressekartotek: Sikkerhedskopierer alle posteringer i
adressekartotek.
• Setup Data: Sikkerhedskopierer alle systemindstillinger.
6. Tryk på OK for at begynde at sikkerhedskopiere.
Dataene sikkerhedskopieres til USB-hukommelsen.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Gendannelse af data
1. Sæt den USB-hukommelsesenhed, som de sikkerhedskopierede data
er gemt på, i USB-porten.
2. Tryk på Menu( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Import Setting vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede datatype vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den fil, der indeholder de data, du vil
gendanne, vises, og tryk derefter på OK.
7. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises for at gendanne de sikkerhedskopierede data
på maskinen.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Can choose paper size and tray when printing. Se ”Indstilling af
papirstørrelse og type” på side 31.Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse | 55
HÅNDTERING AF USB-HUKOMMELSE
Du kan slette billedfiler, der er gemt på en USB-hukommelsesenhed,
en ad gangen eller alle på én gang ved at omformatere enheden.
Sletning af en billedfil
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen.
2. Tryk på Scan/Email.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil File Manage vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på OK, når der vises Delete.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mappe eller fil vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
Hvis du har valgt en fil, vises filstørrelsen i displayet i ca. 2 sekunder.
Gå videre til næste trin.
Hvis du har valgt en mappe, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil, indtil den fil,
du vil slette, vises. Tryk derefter på OK.
7. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte dit valg.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Formatering af en USB-hukommelsesenhed
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen.
2. Tryk på Scan/Email.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil File Manage vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Format vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte dit valg.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Visning af USB-hukommelsesstatus
Du kan kontrollere mængden af hukommelse, der er tilgængelig til scanning
og lagring af dokumenter.
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen.
2. Tryk på Scan/Email.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på den nederste linje i displayet.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Check Space vises, og tryk på OK.
Den ledige hukommelse vises i displayet.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstanden.
Når du har slettet filer eller omformateret en USBhukommelsesenhed, kan filerne ikke længere gendannes. Inden du
sletter filerne, skal du derfor være helt sikker på, at du ikke længere
har brug for filerne.
Hvis der vises et D foran et mappenavn, er der en eller flere filer
eller mapper i den markerede mappe.56 | Vedligeholdelse
vedligeholdelse
Dette kapitel indeholder oplysninger om, hvordan du vedligeholder maskinen og tonerpatronen.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Udskrivning af rapporter
• Justering af farvekontrasten
• Brug af Advarsel om lav toner
• Sådan slettes hukommelsen
• Rengøring af maskinen
• Vedligeholdelse af patronen
• Udskiftning af tonerpatronen
• Udskiftning af papiroverførselsbæltet
• Vedligeholdelsesdele
• Styring af maskinen fra webstedet
• Kontrol af maskinens serienummer
UDSKRIVNING AF RAPPORTER
Du kan få vist forskellige rapporter med nyttige oplysninger, som du har
brug for. Der findes følgende rapporter:
Udskrivning af en rapport
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Report vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil du får vist den rapport eller liste, du vil
udskrive, og tryk på OK.
Hvis du vil udskrive alle rapporter og lister, skal du vælge All Report.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte udskrivningen.
De valgte oplysninger udskrives.
JUSTERING AF FARVEKONTRASTEN
Farvemenuen giver dig mulighed for at justere farveindstillingerne.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Maintenance.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Color vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede farvemenu vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
• Custom Color: Giver dig mulighed for at indstille kontrasten farve
for farve. Default optimerer farver automatisk. Manual Adjust giver
dig mulighed for manuelt at justere farvekontrasten for hver patron.
Nogle rapporter vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt
af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes
på denne maskine.
RAPPORT/LISTE BESKRIVELSE
Configuration Denne liste viser status for de brugerdefinerbare
indstillinger. Hvis du har foretaget ændringer,
kan du udskrive denne liste for at få bekræftet
ændringerne.
Supplies Info På listen kan du se den aktuelle status for
maskinens forbrugsstoffer.
Address Book På listen kan du se alle de faxnumre og e-mailadresser, der aktuelt er gemt i maskinens
hukommelse.
Send Report Denne rapport viser faxnummeret, antallet af sider,
hvor lang tid jobbet tog, den benyttede kommunikationstilstand og kommunikationens resultater for et
bestemt job.
Du kan indstille din maskine til automatisk at udskrive
en rapport, der bekræfter transmissionen, efter
hvert faxjob. Se ”Sending-indstillinger” på side 49.
Sent Report Denne rapport indeholder oplysninger om nyligt
afsendte faxer og e-mails.
Du kan indstille maskinen, så rapporten automatisk
udskrives, hver gang der har været
50 kommunikationer. Se ”Sending-indstillinger” på
side 49.
Fax RCV Report Denne rapport indeholder oplysninger om nyligt
afsendte faxer.
Schedule Jobs Denne liste viser de dokumenter, der aktuelt er
gemt til udskudt faxtransmission, sammen med
starttidspunktet og handlingstypen.
Junk Fax Report Denne liste viser de faxnumre, der er angivet som
uønskede faxnumre (junk). Hvis du vil føje numre til
eller slette numre fra listen, skal du åbne menuen
Junk Fax Setup Se ”Receiving-indstillinger” på
side 49.
Network Info. Denne liste viser oplysninger om maskinens
netværksforbindelse og konfiguration.
NetScan Report Denne rapport viser oplysninger vedrørende
Netværksscanningsposter, inklusive IP-adresse,
tidspunkt og dato, antal sider, der er scannet,
og resultater. Rapporten udskrives automatisk,
når der har været 50 netværksscanningsjob.
User Auth List Denne liste viser de godkendte brugere, der har
tilladelse til at bruge e-mail-funktionen.
PCL Font List Du kan udskrive PCL-skrifttypelisten.
PS3 Font List Du kan udskrive PS3-skrifttypelisten.
Stored Job På listen kan du se den aktuelle status for gemte
job på harddisken.
Completed Job Siden Gennemført job indeholder en liste over
fuldførte udskriftsjob. Listen indeholder op til 50
filer fra de seneste udskriftsjob.
Net Auth Log Denne liste viser de brugere, der er logget
på domænet, og deres id’er.
RAPPORT/LISTE BESKRIVELSEVedligeholdelse | 57
Default indstillingen er anbefalet for at få den bedste farvekvalitet.
• Auto Color Reg.: Giver dig mulighed for at indstille placeringen af
farvetekster eller grafik, så de svarer til den originale fil på skærmen.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
BRUG AF ADVARSEL OM LAV TONER
Hvis toneren i patronen er brugt op, vises der en meddelelse til brugeren
om, at tonerpatronen skal skiftes. Du kan angive, hvorvidt denne
meddelelse skal vises eller ej.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Maintenance.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Toner Low Alert vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Off.
5. Tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
SÅDAN SLETTES HUKOMMELSEN
Du kan slette selektivt blandt de oplysninger, der er gemt i maskinens
hukommelse.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clear Setting vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det element, du vil slette, vises.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes.
5. Tryk på OK igen for at bekræfte sletningen.
6. Gentag trin 3 til og med 5 for at slette endnu et element.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
RENGØRING AF MASKINEN
Hvis du vil bevare udskrifts- og scanningskvaliteten, skal du følge nedenstående
procedurer, hver gang tonerpatronen udskiftes, eller hvis der opstår problemer
med udskrifts- og scanningskvaliteten.
Rengøring af maskinen udvendigt
Gør maskinens kabinet rent med en blød fnugfri klud. Du kan fugte kluden
med lidt vand, men pas på, at vandet ikke drypper på eller ind i maskinen.
Indvendig rengøring af maskinen
Under udskrivningen kan der samle sig papir-, toner- og støvpartikler inde
i maskinen. Denne ophobning kan give problemer med udskriftskvaliteten,
så som tonerpletter eller udtværet skrift. Rengøring af maskinen indvendigt
udbedrer eller formindsker disse problemer.
1. Sluk for maskinen, og træk netledningen ud. Vent, til maskinen er kølet ned.
2. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget.
Hvis du har flyttet maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt at betjene
menuen manuelt.
Før du rydder hukommelsen, skal du kontrollere, at alle faxjob er
udført. Ellers går disse job tabt.
Nogle menuer vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt
af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes
på denne maskine.
INDSTILLINGER BESKRIVELSE
All Settings Rydder alle data, der er gemt i hukommelsen,
og nulstiller alle indstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne.
Fax Setup Gendanner alle faxindstillinger
til fabriksindstillingerne.
Copy Setup Gendanner alle kopieringsindstillinger
til fabriksindstillingerne.
Scan Setup Gendanner alle scanningsindstillinger
til fabriksindstillingerne.
System Setup Gendanner alle systemindstillinger
til fabriksindstillingerne.
Network Gendanner alle netværksindstillinger
til fabriksindstillingerne.
Address Book Sletter alle faxnumre og email-adresser
i hukommelsen.
Sent Report Sletter alle fortegnelser over afsendte faxer og e-mails.
Fax RCV Report Sletter alle poster over modtagne faxer.
NetScan Report Sletter oplysninger om netværkscanningssessioner
i hukommelsen.
• Rengøring af maskinens kabinet med rengøringsmidler,
der indeholder store mængder alkohol, opløsningsmidler eller
andre stærke kemikalier, kan medføre misfarvning eller anden
skade på kabinettet.
• Hvis maskinen eller dens omgivelser er tilsmudset med toner,
anbefaler vi, at du bruger en klud fugtet med vand til at rense den.
Hvis du bruger en støvsuger, bliver toneren hvirvlet op i luften og kan
være skadelig for dig.
• Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden
af tonerpatronen med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug
håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område.
• Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen
på papiroverførselsbæltet.
• Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter,
kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPC-tromlen.
Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af nogen årsag.
INDSTILLINGER BESKRIVELSE58 | Vedligeholdelse
3. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen.
4. Tryk på det grønne frigørelseshåndtag for at frigøre
papiroverførselsbæltet. Hold på håndtaget til papiroverførselsbæltet,
og løft bæltet ud af maskinen
5. Fjern støv og spildt toner fra området omkring tonerpatroner og deres
hulrum med en tør og fnugfri klud.
6. Find det lange stykke glas (LSU) i den øverste del af sektionen til
tonerpatronen, og tør forsigtigt glasset af for at se, om den hvide
bomuldsklud bliver sort af snavs.
7. Placer de forskellige enheder i maskinen igen, og luk frontlågen.
8. Sæt netledningen i, og tænd for maskinen.
Skal du passe på ikke at røre kontrolpanelets underside (den nederste
del af fikseringsenheden). Fikseringsenhedens temperatur kan blive
høj og kan beskadige huden.
Når du åbner frontlågen og arbejder inde i maskinen, anbefales det
kraftigt, at du først fjerner papiroverførselsbæltet. Det arbejde, du udfører,
kan forurene papiroverførselsbæltet.
Hvis du får toner på tøjet, skal du børste det af med en tør klud
og vaske det i koldt vand. Varmt vand opløser toneren i tøjet.
Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.Vedligeholdelse | 59
Rengøring af scannerenheden
Regelmæssig rengøring af scannerenheden er med til at sikre de bedst
mulige kopier. Vi foreslår, at du rengør scannerenheden hver morgen samt
i løbet af dagen efter behov.
1. Fugt en blød fnugfri klud eller et stykke køkkenrulle med lidt vand.
2. Åbn scannerlåget.
3. Tør overfladen af scannerglaspladen og DADF glaspladen af, indtil den
er ren og tør.
4. Tør undersiden af scannerlåget og den hvide flade af, indtil de er rene
og tørre.
5. Luk scannerlåget.
VEDLIGEHOLDELSE AF PATRONEN
Opbevaring af tonerpatroner
Hvis du vil have mest muligt ud af tonerpatronen, skal du være opmærksom
på følgende:
• Tag ikke tonerpatronen ud af emballagen, før den skal bruges.
• Undlad at genopfylde tonerpatronen. Maskinens garanti dækker ikke
skader forårsaget af en genopfyldt tonerpatron.
• Opbevar tonerpatroner i de samme omgivelser som maskinen.
• For at undgå beskadigelse af tonerpatronen må den ikke udsættes
for lyspåvirkning i mere end et par minutter.
Forventet patronlevetid
Tonerpatronens levetid afhænger af, hvor meget toner udskriftsjobbene
kræver. Det reelle tal kan også variere afhængigt af den udskriftstæthed,
der bruges, ligesom antallet af sider kan være påvirket af driftsmiljø,
udskrivningsinterval, medietype og mediestørrelse. Hvis du udskriver meget
grafik, kan det være nødvendigt at udskifte patronen oftere.
Fordeling af toner
Når toneren er ved at være opbrugt, kan der optræde svage eller lyse områder.
Farvebilleder kan blive udskrevet med forkerte farver på grund af forkert
blanding af tonerfarver, når en af tonerpatronerne er ved at være tom.
Du kan midlertidigt forbedre udskriftskvaliteten ved at fordele den
resterende toner.
• Tonermeddelelsen om, at der er meget lidt toner tilbage, vises muligvis
på displayet.
1. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget.
2. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen.
1 Scannerlåg
2 Scannerglasplade
3 Hvid flade
4 ADF-glas
• Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden
af tonerpatronen med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug
håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område.
• Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen
på papiroverførselsbæltet.
• Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter,
kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPCtromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af
nogen årsag.
Skal du passe på ikke at røre kontrolpanelets underside (den nederste
del af fikseringsenheden). Fikseringsenhedens temperatur kan blive
høj og kan beskadige huden.
Når du åbner frontlågen og arbejder inde i maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt,
at du først fjerner papiroverførselsbæltet. Det arbejde, du udfører, kan
forurene papiroverførselsbæltet.60 | Vedligeholdelse
3. Hold fast i begge håndtag på tonerpatronen, og ryst den fra side til side
for at fordele toneren ligeligt.
4. Skub tonerpatronen ind i maskinen igen.
5. Luk frontlågen. Kontroller, at lågen er ordentligt lukket.
UDSKIFTNING AF TONERPATRONEN
Maskinen benytter fire farver og har en tonerpatron til hver farve: gul (Y),
magenta (M), cyan (C) og sort (K).
• Statuslampen og den tonerrelaterede meddelelse på displayet angiver,
hvornår hver enkelt tonerpatron skal udskiftes.
• Indgående faxer gemmes i hukommelsen.
Så er det nødvendigt at udskifte tonerpatronen. Kontroller, hvilken type
tonerpatron der bruges til maskinen. Se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85.
1. Sluk for maskinen, og vent et par minutter, til den er kølet af.
2. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget.
3. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen.
Hvis du får toner på tøjet, skal du børste det af med en tør klud
og vaske det i koldt vand. Varmt vand opløser toneren i tøjet.
Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.
• Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller
forsiden af de enkelte tonerpatroner med hænderne eller med
andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår
at berøre dette område.
• Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen
på papiroverførselsbæltet.
• Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter,
kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPCtromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes
af nogen årsag.
Skal du passe på ikke at røre kontrolpanelets underside (den nederste
del af fikseringsenheden). Fikseringsenhedens temperatur kan blive
høj og kan beskadige huden.
Når du åbner frontlågen og arbejder inde i maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt,
at du først fjerner papiroverførselsbæltet. Det arbejde, du udfører, kan
forurene papiroverførselsbæltet.Vedligeholdelse | 61
4. Tag en ny tonerpatron ud af emballagen.
5. Hold fast i begge håndtag på tonerpatronen, og ryst den fra side til side
for at fordele toneren ligeligt.
6. Placer tonerpatronerne på en vandret overflade som vist, og fjern det papir,
der dækker patronerne, ved at fjerne tapen.
7. Sørg for, at farven på tonerpatronen stemmer overens med farven
på slotten, og tag derefter fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen. Indsæt
patronen, indtil den låses på plads med et klik.
8. Luk frontlågen. Sørg for, at dækslet sidder godt fast, og tænd for maskinen.
Sletter meddelelsen om Ikke mere toner
Når meddelelsen Ikke mere toner vises, kan du angive, at denne
meddelelse ikke skal vises igen, så den ikke forstyrrer dig.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil System Setup vises på nederste linje i
displayet, og tryk derefter på OK.
2. Tryk på rulleknapperne, indtil Maintenance vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på rulleknapperne, indtil CLR Empty Msg. vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede farvemenu vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
5. Vælg On, og tryk på OK.
6. Nu vises meddelelsen Toner Empty ikke, men meddelelsen Replace
Toner forbliver vist for at erindre dig om, at den nye patron bør
installeres af hensyn til kvaliteten.
UDSKIFTNING AF PAPIROVERFØRSELSBÆLTET
Papiroverførselsbæltets levetid er ca. 50.000 sider sorte- og farvesider.
Når papiroverførselsbæltets levetid er udløbet, skal du udskifte det.
• Meddelelsen om overførselsbæltet vises på displayet for at fortælle,
at det skal udskiftes.
1. Sluk for maskinen, og vent et par minutter, til den er kølet af.
2. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget.
3. Tryk på det grønne frigørelseshåndtag for at frigøre papiroverførselsbæltet.
Hold på håndtaget til papiroverførselsbæltet, og løft bæltet ud af maskinen.
• Benyt ikke skarpe instrumenter som knive eller sakse til
at åbne tonerpatronens emballage. Du kan beskadige
overfladen på tonerpatronerne.
• Udsæt ikke tonerpatronen for lyspåvirkning i mere end nogle
få minutter, da dette kan beskadige indholdet. Dæk den med
et stykke papir for at beskytte den om nødvendigt.
Hvis du får toner på tøjet, skal du børste det af med en tør klud
og vaske det i koldt vand. Varmt vand opløser toneren i tøjet.
Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.
• Så snart, du har valgt On, skrives denne indstilling permanent til
hukommelsen for tonerpatronen, og denne menu forsvinder fra
menuen Maintenance.
• Du kan fortsætte med at udskrive, men kvaliteten kan ikke
garanteres, og der ydes ikke længere produktsupport.
Papiroverførselsbæltets levetid kan blive påvirket af driftsmiljøet,
udskrivningsintervallet, medietypen og mediestørrelsen.62 | Vedligeholdelse
4. Tag det nye papiroverførselsbælte ud af emballagen.
5. Hold fast i håndtaget på det nye papiroverførselsbælte, og juster det med
hullerne på indersiden af frontdækslet.
6. Sænk papiroverførselsbæltet, til det ligger parallelt med frontdækslet
og sidder korrekt.
7. Luk frontdækslet.
8. Tænd for maskinen.
VEDLIGEHOLDELSESDELE
Hvis du vil undgå problemer med udskriftskvaliteten og papirindføring på grund
af slidte komponenter og vil sørge for, at din maskine altid er i god stand, skal
følgende elementer udskiftes efter det angivne sidetal, eller når det enkelte
elements levetid er udløbet.
Vi anbefaler på det kraftigste, at denne vedligeholdelse udføres af en autoriseret
serviceudbyder, en forhandler eller af den detailbutik, hvor du har købt maskinen.
Garantien omfatter ikke erstatning af vedligeholdelsesdele efter deres
levetid er udløbet.
Kontrol af udskiftelige dele
Hvis der ofte forekommer papirstop eller problemer med udskrivningen, skal
du kontrollere, hvor mange sider maskinen har udskrevet eller scannet.
Udskift de tilsvarende dele, hvis det er nødvendigt.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Maintenance vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Supplies Life vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede element vises, og tryk på OK.
• Supplies Info: Udskriver en side med oplysninger om forbrugsstoffer.
• Total: Viser, hvor mange sider der i alt er udskrevet.
• ADF Scan: Viser, hvor mange sider der er scannet via ADF’en.
• Platen Scan: Viser, hvor mange sider der er scannet
via scannerglaspladen.
• Transfer Belt, Fuser, Tray1 Roller, Tray2 Roller, MP Tray Roller: Viser,
hvor mange sider der er udskrevet af hver slags.
5. Hvis du har valgt at udskrive en side med oplysninger om forbrugsstoffer,
skal du trykke på OK for at bekræfte valget.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
• Benyt ikke skarpe instrumenter som knive eller sakse til at åbne
tonerpatronens emballage. Du risikerer at beskadige overfladen
på papiroverførselsbæltet.
• Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen
på papiroverførselsbæltet.
ELEMENTER YDELSE (GENNEMSNIT)
Fikseringsenhed Ca. 100.000 sider
DADF friktionspudesæt Ca. 20.000 sider
DADF opsamlingsrulle Ca. 80.000 sider
Opsamlingsrulle (Universalbakke,
FCF
a
, Valgfri bakke 2)
a. Første kassettearkføder (Bakke 1).
Ca. 70.000 sider
Friktionspudesæt (Universalbakke,
FCF, Valgfri bakke 2)
Ca. 70.000 siderVedligeholdelse | 63
Udskiftning af DADF gummipuden
Når der ser ud til at være vedvarende problemer med papiropsamlingen, eller
når den angivne ydelse er nået, skal du udskifte DADF gummipuden.
1. Åbn DADF-dækslet.
2. Fjern DADF-gummipuden fra DADF som vist.
3. Indsæt en ny DADF-gummipude i stedet.
4. Luk DADF-dækslet.
STYRING AF MASKINEN FRA WEBSTEDET
Hvis maskinen er tilsluttet et netværk, og TCP/IP-netværksparametrene
er defineret korrekt, kan du styre maskinen via Dells Embedded Web
Service, der er en integreret webserver. Brug Embedded Web Service til at:
• Få vist enhedsoplysninger om maskinen og kontrollere dens aktuelle status.
• Ændre TCP/IP-parametrene og definere andre netværksparametre.
• Ændre printerens egenskaber.
• Indstille maskinen til at sende besked via e-mail, så du kender
maskinens status.
• Få hjælp til brug af maskinen.
Sådan får du adgang til Embedded Web Service
1. Start en webbrowser, f.eks. Internet Explorer, i Windows.
2. Skriv maskinens IP-adresse (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) i adressefeltet, og tryk
derefter på tasten Enter, eller klik på Gå.
Maskinens websted åbnes.
KONTROL AF MASKINENS SERIENUMMER
Når du tilkalder service eller lader dig registrere som bruger på Dellwebstedet, skal du muligvis angive maskinens serienummer.
Du kan kontrollere serienummeret på følgende måde:
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Maintenance vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Serial Number vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Kontroller maskinens serienummer.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
1 DADFgummipude64 | Fejlfinding
fejlfinding
Dette kapitel indeholder nyttige oplysninger om, hvad du gør, hvis der opstår en fejl.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Tip til at undgå papirstop
• Afhjælpning af dokumentstop
• Udbedring af papirstop
• Displaymeddelelsernes betydning
• Løsning af andre problemer
TIP TIL AT UNDGÅ PAPIRSTOP
De fleste former for papirstop kan undgås, hvis du vælger den rigtige papirtype.
Når der opstår et papirstop, kan du følge trinene, der er beskrevet på side 64.
• Følg fremgangsmåderne på side 29. Sørg for, at de justerbare styr
er korrekt placeret.
• Overfyld ikke papirbakken. Sørg for, at papirniveauet er under
papirkapacitetsmærket på bakken inderside.
• Fjern ikke papir fra bakken, mens maskinen udskriver.
• Bøj, luft og ret papiret ud, inden det lægges i bakken.
• Brug ikke foldet, fugtigt eller meget krøllet papir.
• Bland ikke forskellige papirtyper i en bakke.
• Brug kun anbefalede udskriftsmedier (se ”Indstilling af papirstørrelse og
type” på side 31).
• Kontroller, at udskriftsmediet har den anbefalede side opad i bakken
eller nedad i universalbakken.
AFHJÆLPNING AF DOKUMENTSTOP
Hvis en original sidder fast, mens den føres gennem DADF’en, vises
Document Jam i displayet.
Indføringsfejl ved dokumentindlæsning
1. Fjern eventuelle resterende sider fra DADF’en.
2. Åbn DADP’ens topdæksel.
3. Træk forsigtigt det fastklemte papir ud af DADF’en.
4. Luk DADP’ens topdæksel. Placer derefter evt. fjernede ark papir i
DADF’en igen.
.
1 DADP’ens
topdæksel.
Denne illustration afviger muligvis fra din maskine afhængigt
af dens model.
Du kan undgå dokumentstop, hvis du bruger scannerglaspladen
til originaler, der er tykke, tynde eller blandede papirtyper.Fejlfinding | 65
Fejl ved papirudføring
1. Fjern eventuelle resterende sider fra DADF’en.
2. Tag fat i det forkert indførte papir, og tag papiret ud af udbakken ved forsigtigt
at trække det mod højre med begge hænder.
3. Placer evt. fjernede sider i DADF’en igen.
Indføringsfejl ved valsen
1. Åbn scannerlåget.
2. Tag fat i det forkert indførte papir, og tag papiret ud af indføringsområdet
ved forsigtigt at trække det mod højre med begge hænder.
3. Luk scannerlåget. Placer derefter evt. fjernede sider i DADF’en igen.
UDBEDRING AF PAPIRSTOP
Når der opstår papirstop, vises der en advarsel på displayet. Brug tabellen
nedenfor til at finde og udbedre papirstoppet.
I papirindføringsområdet
Hvis papiret sidder fast i papirfremføringsområdet, skal du følge
nedenstående fremgangsmåde for at fjerne det fastklemte papir.
MEDDELELSE
PAPIRSTOPPETS
PLACERING
GÅ TIL
MP Tray
Paper Jam 0
I universalbakken Se ”I universalbakken”
på side 66.
Tray 2
Paper jam 0
I den valgfri bakke Se ”I den valgfri bakke”
på side 70.
Paper Jam 0
Open/Close Door
I papirfremføringsområdet og
inde i maskinen
Se ”I
papirindføringsområde
t” på side 65, se ”I
fikseringsenheden” på
side 68.
Paper Jam 1
Open/Close Door
Inde i maskinen Se ”I universalbakken”
på side 66, se ”I
fikseringsenheden” på
side 68.
Paper Jam 2
Check Inside
Inde i maskinen og
i fikseringsområdet
Se ”I universalbakken”
på side 66, se ”I
fikseringsenheden” på
side 68.
Reverse Jam 0
Check Inside
I fikseringsområdet og omkring
dækslet til området med
duplex-enheden.
Se ”I universalbakken”
på side 66, se ”I
fikseringsenheden” på
side 68.
Reverse Jam 1
Check Inside
I det bagerste dæksel og i
dækslet på
reverseringsenheden
Se ”I universalbakken”
på side 66, se ”I
papirudføringsområdet
” på side 69.
Remove Paper
in Rear Cover
Invendigt bagdæksel Se ”I universalbakken”
på side 66, se ”I
papirudføringsområdet
” på side 69.
Duplex Jam 0
Check Inside
Inde i maskinen Se ”I universalbakken”
på side 66.
Duplex Jam 1
Open/Close Door
I papirfremføringsområdet og
inde i maskinen
Se ”I universalbakken”
på side 66, se ”I
fikseringsenheden” på
side 68.
Nogle meddelelser vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt
af instillinger eller modeller.
Træk fastklemt papir ud langsomt og forsigtigt, så det ikke rives
i stykker. Følg instruktionerne i de følgende afsnit for at afhjælpe
papirstoppet. 66 | Fejlfinding
1. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget.
2. Fjern forsigtigt papiret ved at trække det i den viste retning. Gå til trin 7.
Hvis du ikke kan finde det fastklemte papir, eller hvis du føler modstand,
når du trækker i papiret, skal du holde op med at trække i det og gå til trin 3.
3. Luk frontlågen.
4. Træk bakken ud.
5. Fjern det blokerede papir ved forsigtigt at trække det lige ud som
vist nedenfor.
6. For at sætte bakken i igen skal du sænke bagkanten, justere den med
åbningen og skubbe den ind i maskinen.
7. Åbn frontdækslet, og luk det igen. Maskinen genoptager udskrivningen.
I universalbakken
Når du skriver ud fra universalbakken, og maskinen opdager, at der ikke
er noget papir, eller at papiret er lagt forkert i, skal du følge denne
fremgangsmåde for at fjerne det fastklemte papir.
• Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller
forsiden af de enkelte tonerpatroner med hænderne eller med
andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår
at berøre dette område.
• Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen
på papiroverførselsbæltet.
• Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter,
kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPCtromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes
af nogen årsag.Fejlfinding | 67
1. Kontroller, om papiret sidder fast i fremføringsområdet. Hvis det er tilfældet,
skal du trække det forsigtigt og langsomt ud.
Hvis du ikke kan finde det fastklemte papir, eller hvis du føler modstand, når
du trækker i papiret, skal du stoppe med at trække i det og gå videre til trin 2.
2. Luk universalbakken.
3. Træk bakken ud.
4. Åbn det indre dæksel, mens du skubber på håndtaget med to hænder.
5. Træk forsigtigt papiret ud.
6. Udskift bakken.
Hvis du ikke kan finde det fastklemte papir, eller hvis du føler modstand, når
du trækker i papiret, skal du stoppe med at trække i det, og gå videre til trin 8.
7. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget.
8. Fjern det fastklemte papir ved at trække det i den viste retning.
Træk papiret stille og roligt ud for at undgå, at det rives over.
9. Luk frontdækslet. Maskinen genoptager udskrivningen.
• Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller
forsiden af de enkelte tonerpatroner med hænderne eller med
andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår
at berøre dette område.
• Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen
på papiroverførselsbæltet.
• Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter,
kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPCtromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes
af nogen årsag.
Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.68 | Fejlfinding
I fikseringsenheden
Hvis papiret sidder fast i fikseringsenheden, skal du benytte denne
fremgangsmåde for at fjerne det fastklemte papir.
1. Åbn scannerenheden.
2. Åbn den inderste låge ved hjælp af håndtaget.
3. Åbn det inderste dæksel med håndtaget, og tag forsigtigt det fastklemte
papir ud af maskinen.
4. Træk papirstophåndtaget op for at løsne fikseringsdelen, og tag forsigtigt
det fastklemte papir ud af maskinen.
5. Tryk ned på papirstophåndtaget for at fastgøre fikseringsdelen.
6. Luk det indre dæksel.
7. Sænk scannerenheden forsigtigt og langsomt , indtil den er helt lukket.
Kontroller, at den er lukket sikkert.
Pas på ikke at klemme fingrene!
Undlad at berøre fikseringsenheden inden for det inderste dæksel.
Den er varm og give forbrændinger! Fikseringsenhedens
driftstemperatur er 180 °C. Vær forsigtig, når du fjerner papir
fra maskinen.
Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis scannerenheden ikke er helt lukket.Fejlfinding | 69
I papirudføringsområdet
Hvis papiret er fastklemt i udføringsområdet, skal du følge de næste trin for
at frigøre det fastklemte papir.
1. Hvis en stor del af papiret er synligt, så træk det ud. Åbn og luk frontdækslet.
Maskinen genoptager udskrivningen.
Hvis du ikke kan finde det fastklemte papir, eller hvis du føler modstand, når
du trækker i papiret, skal du stoppe med at trække i det og gå videre til trin 2.
2. Åbn scannerenheden.
3. Åbn det dækslet på reverseringsenheden med håndtaget på den,
og tag forsigtigt det fastklemte papir ud af maskinen.
Hvis du mærker modstand, når du forsøger at fjerne papiret, eller hvis
du har svært ved at fjerne papir, der sidder i klemme, skal du undlade at
trække i papiret og i stedet dreje på udløserknappen i den angivne
retning for at fjerne det fastklemte papir.
4. Luk dækslet på reverseringsenheden.
5. Sænk scannerenheden forsigtigt og langsomt , indtil den er helt lukket.
Kontroller, at den er lukket sikkert.
Pas på ikke at klemme fingrene!
Hvis du ikke kan finde det fastklemte papir, eller hvis du føler modstand, når
du trækker i papiret, skal du stoppe med at trække i det, og gå videre til trin 6.
6. Åbn bagdækslet, og tag forsigtigt det fastklemte papir ud af maskinen.
7. Luk bagdækslet.
Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis scannerenheden ikke er helt lukket.70 | Fejlfinding
I den valgfri bakke
Hvis papir sidder fast i den valgfri bakke, skal du benytte denne
fremgangsmåde for at fjerne det fastklemte papir.
1. Træk den valgfri bakke op. Når du har trukket den helt ud, skal du løfte
den forreste del af bakken en smule for at frigøre bakken fra maskinen.
2. Hvis du kan se det fastklemte papir, skal du fjerne papiret fra maskinen
ved forsigtigt at trække det lige ud som vist nedenfor.
3. Skub bakken tilbage i maskinen, og luk de to dæksler.
4. Åbn frontlågen.
5. Træk det fastsiddende papir i den viste retning. Træk papiret stille og roligt
ud for at undgå, at det rives over.
6. Luk frontdækslet. Maskinen genoptager udskrivningen.
Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.Fejlfinding | 71
DISPLAYMEDDELELSERNES BETYDNING
På displayet på kontrolpanelet vises en række meddelelser, der angiver
maskinens status eller fejl. I tabellerne herunder kan du se meddelelsernes
betydning, så du afhjælpe problemet, hvis det er nødvendigt.
Meddelelserne og deres betydning er anført i alfabetisk rækkefølge.
• Hvis meddelelsen ikke vises i tabellen, skal du slukke og tænde for
strømmen og prøve at udskrive jobbet igen. Ring efter service, hvis
problemet fortsætter.
• Nogle meddelelser vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt
af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes
på denne maskine.
• xxx angiver medietypen.
• yyy angiver bakketypen.
MEDDELELSE BETYDNING
FORSLAG TIL
MULIGE LØSNINGER
[Incompatible] Maskinen har modtaget
en fax, der er registreret
som et junkfaxnummer.
De modtagne faxdata vil
blive slettet.
Bekræft
junkfaxindstillingen igen.
Se ”Receivingindstillinger” på side 49.
[No Answer] Den modtagende
faxmaskine har ikke
svaret efter adskillige
genkaldsforsøg.
Prøv igen. Kontroller,
at den modtagende
maskine virker.
[COMM. Error] Maskinen har et
kommunikationsproblem.
Bed afsenderen
om at forsøge igen.
[Line Error] Maskinen kan ikke
oprette forbindelse
med den modtagende
faxmaskine eller har
mistet kontakten pga.
et problem med
telefonlinjen.
Prøv igen. Hvis problemet
fortsætter, skal du vente
en times tid på, at linjen
går i orden, og forsøge
igen.
Eller aktiver ECMtilstanden. Se ”Sendingindstillinger” på side 49.
[Stop Pressed] Stop/Slet ( ) er
blevet trykket under en
operation.
Prøv igen.
[yyy]
Paper Empty
Der er ikke noget papir
i bakken.
Læg papir i bakken.
[yyy]
Cassette Out
Bakkekassetten er ikke
korrekt lukket.
For at lukke bakken skal
du sænke bagkanten,
justere den med
åbningen og skubbe
den ind i printeren.
[yyy]
Paper Mismatch
Den papirstørrelse, der
er angivet under
printeregenskaber,
svarer ikke til det papir,
du indfører.
Læg det korrekte papir
i bakken.
Tray 2
Paper jam 0
Papiret sidder fast
i papirindføringsområdet.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”I
papirindføringsområdet”
på side 65.
Data Read Fail
Check USB Mem.
Tiden udløb under
læsning af data.
Prøv igen.
Data Write Fail
Check USB Mem.
Lagring i USBhukommelsen
mislykkedes.
Kontroller, hvor meget
USB-hukommelse, der
er til rådighed.
Duplex Jam 0
Check Inside
Papiret har sat sig fast
under
duplexudskrivning.
Dette gælder kun for
maskiner med denne
funktion.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”Udbedring af
papirstop” på side 65.
Duplex Jam 1
Open/Close Door
Papiret har sat sig fast
under
duplexudskrivning.
Dette gælder kun for
maskiner med denne
funktion.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”Udbedring af
papirstop” på side 65.
One Page is
Too Large
Enkeltsidedata
overstiger den
konfigurerede
mailstørrelse.
Reducer opløsningen,
og prøv igen.
Fuser Fan
Locked
Der er opstået
et problem i maskinens
blæser.
Åbn frontdækslet, og luk
det derefter igen.
File Access
Denied
Login på netværket
lykkedes. Der blev dog
ikke givet adgang til filen
på netværksserveren.
Rediger
serverindstillingerne.
File Format
Not Supported
Det valgte filformat
understøttes ikke.
Brug det korrekte
filformat.
File Name Exist Det indtastede filnavn
eksisterer allerede.
Indtast en andet filnavn.
File Name
Over Limit
Du kan benytte filnavne
fra doc001 til doc999.
Men alle filnavne
er i brug.
Slet unødvendige filer.
Connection Failed Den angivne protokol
understøttes ikke eller
serverporten er forkert.
Kontroller protokollen
eller serverporten.
Connection Error Forbindelse til SMTPserveren mislykkedes.
Kontroller
serverindstillingerne
og netværkskablet.
Retry Redial? Maskinen venter
et foruddefineret
tidsrum, før den
foretager genkald til
en tidligere optaget
modtager.
Du kan trykke på OK for
at foretage genkaldet
med det samme eller
på Stop/Slet ( ) for at
annullere genkaldet.
MEDDELELSE BETYDNING
FORSLAG TIL
MULIGE LØSNINGER72 | Fejlfinding
Global Address
Not Found
Hvis enheden ikke kan
finde den angivne
adresse på den
globale server.
Kontroller søge-id’et.
Global Query
Size Exceeded
Dette er er en
fejlmeddelelse, som
vises, når den globale
forespørgsels størrelse
er blevet overskredet.
Der er for mange
søgeresultater. Du kan
forbedre søgningen med
at indtaste flere
bogstaver.
Kontakt en LDAPserveradministrator.
Global Server
Query Timeout
NIC (Network
Information Center) fik
ikke det korrekte svar
fra LDAP-serveren
inden for det angivne
tidsrum.
Kontroller LDAPserverens indstilling.
LDAP-serverens
indstilling er forkert.
Global Server
Auth Failed
Denne meddelelse
vises, hvis der opstår
en godkendelsesfejl
under forsøg på at
oprette forbindelse til
den globale server.
Kontroller
godkendelseskonto
og adgangskode.
Global Server
Not Found
Hvis enheden ikke kan
finde den globale server.
Kontroller LDAPserverens adresse.
LDAP-serverens
adresse er forkert, eller
der er opstået en fejl
på serveren.
Global Server
Not Configured
Denne meddelelse
vises, hvis der ikke er
konfigureret en global
server.
Kontroller LDAPserverens
konfigurationsindstillinger.
Global Server
Comm Error
Denne fejlmeddelelse
vises, hvis der opstår
en kommunikationsfejl
mellem den globale
server og enheden.
Prøv igen.
Kontakt en LDAPserveradministrator.
Authentication Failure Det indtastede ID eller
password er forkert.
Indtast korrekt ID
eller password.
Group Not
Available
Du har forsøgt at vælge
et gruppeplaceringsnr.,
hvor der kun kan
benyttes et enkelt
placeringsnr., som når
der tilføjes placeringer
til afsendelse til flere.
Brug et
hurtigkaldsnummer,
eller indtast et nummer
manuelt på taltastaturet.
Operation
Not Assigned
Du har valgt Add
Page/Cancel Job,
men der er ingen
gemte job.
Se på displayet, om der
er nogen planlagte job.
Main Motor
Locked
Der er opstået
et problem i
hovedmotoren.
Åbn frontdækslet, og
luk det derefter igen.
MEDDELELSE BETYDNING
FORSLAG TIL
MULIGE LØSNINGER
Memory Full Der er ikke mere plads
i hukommelsen.
Slet unødvendige faxjob,
og send dem igen, når
der er mere hukommelse
tilgængelig. Alternativt
kan du opdele
transmissionen i mere
end en handling.
Not Assigned Genvejstasten eller
hurtigopkaldsnummeret,
du forsøgte at bruge,
er ikke tildelt noget
nummer.
Angiv nummeret manuelt
ved hjælp af taltastaturet,
eller gem nummeret
eller adressen.
Enter Again Du har indtastet et
ikke-tilgængeligt punkt.
Indtast det korrekte
punkt igen.
Install
[xxx]
Den tilhørende del
af maskinen er ikke
installeret.
Installer delen
på maskinen.
IP Conflict Den netværks-IPadresse, du har
angivet, benyttes
af en anden enhed.
Kontroller IP-adressen,
og ret den om nødvendigt.
Se ”Konfiguration af
netværket” på side 17.
Adjusting...
Registration
Maskinen justerer
farveregistreringen.
Vent nogle få minutter.
Door Open Frontdækslet eller
bagdækslet er ikke
lukket korrekt.
Luk dækslet, indtil det
klikker på plads.
Low Power Maskinen er i en
tidligere tilstand til
strømbesparelse.
Når printeren modtager
data, skifter den
automatisk til online.
Line Busy Den modtagende
faxmaskine svarer
ikke, eller linjen er
allerede optaget.
Prøv igen om et par
minutter.
Network Error Der er opstået
et problem med
netværket.
Kontakt
netværksadministratoren.
Reverse Jam 0
Check Inside
Der er opstået et
papirstop i
fikseringsområdet og
omkring dækslet til
området med duplexenheden.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”I
papirudføringsområdet”
på side 69.
Reverse Jam 1
Check Inside
Der er opstået papirstop
i dækslet
på reverseringsenheden
eller i bagdækslet.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”I fikseringsenheden”
på side 68.
Document Jam Den ilagte original
sidder fast i DADF’en.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”Afhjælpning af
dokumentstop” på
side 64.
MEDDELELSE BETYDNING
FORSLAG TIL
MULIGE LØSNINGERFejlfinding | 73
Paper Jam 0
Open/Close Door
Der er opstået papirstop
i papirbakkens
indføringsområde.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”I
papirindføringsområdet”
på side 65.
Paper Jam 1
Open/Close Door
Der er papirstop inde i
maskinen.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”I fikseringsenheden”
på side 68.
Paper Jam 2
Check Inside
Et specielt
udskriftsmedie sidder
fast i
papirudgangsområdet.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”I
papirudføringsområdet”
på side 69.
Mail Exceeds
Server Support
Mailstørrelsen er større
end den størrelse, der
understøttes af SMTPserveren.
Del mailen eller reducer
opløsningen.
NonDELL Toner
T
Farvetonerpatronen,
som pilen angiver,
er ikke en ægte Delltonerpatron.
Tryk på OK for at skifte
fejlmeddelelsen mellem
Stop eller Continue.
W Stop X
Du kan vælge enten
Stop eller Continue
med venstre/højre pil.
Hvis du vælger Stop
ved at trykke på OK
på kontrolpanelet,
vi maskinen stoppe
udskrivningen. Hvis
du vælger Continue,
vil maskinen fortsætte
udskrivningen, men
kvaliteten kan være
forringet.
Hvis du ikke vælger
noget, fungerer maskinen,
som om du har valgt Stop.
Udskift den pågældende
tonerpatron med en ægte
Dell-tonerpatron.
Se ”Udskiftning af
tonerpatronen” på
side 60.
Refilled Toner
T
Den tonerpatron, du har
installeret, er ikke
original, eller den
er genopfyldt.
Udskriftskvaliteten kan
blive dårlig, hvis der
installeres en genopfyldt
tonerpatron, da en sådan
patrons egenskaber kan
afvige betydeligt fra den
original patrons
egenskaber.
Vi anbefaler, at der
bruges originale Dellfarvetonerpatroner.
Not Available
Try Again Later
Kan ikke udføre
opgaven med det
samme, fordi der
udføres for mange
aktive opgaver på
én gang.
Prøv igen, når den
pågældende opgave
er udført.
MEDDELELSE BETYDNING
FORSLAG TIL
MULIGE LØSNINGER
Updating Data
Please Wait...
Dit bericht wordt
weergegeven wanneer
u een
systeeminstelling
wijzigt of een back-up
maakt van gegevens.
Schakel het apparaat
niet uit wanneer dit
bericht wordt
weergegeven. Anders
kunnen er wijzigingen
en gegevens verloren
gaan.
Toner Empty
T
Farvetonerpatronen
er løbet tør. Maskinen
stopper med at udskrive.
Tryk på OK for at skifte
mellem Stop,
Continue eller Black
Only for meddelelsen.
W Stop X
Hvis den sorte
tonerpatron er
tom, vises
meddelelsen
Black Only
ikke.
Du kan vælge enten Stop
eller Continue med
venstre/højre pil.
Hvis du vælger Stop ved at
trykke på OK
på kontrolpanelet, vil
maskinen stoppe
udskrivningen. Hvis
du vælger Continue, vil
maskinen fortsætte
udskrivningen, men
kvaliteten kan være
forringet.
Hvis du vælger Black
Only, udskriver maskinen
farvedata i sort.
Hvis du ikke vælger noget,
fungerer maskinen, som om
du har valgt Stop.
Udskift farvetonerpatronen
med en ny. Se ”Udskiftning
af tonerpatronen” på
side 60.
Install Toner
T
Farvetonerpatronen
er ikke installeret.
Installer
farvetonerpatronen.
Toner Low
T
Den tilsvarende
farvetonerpatron er
næsten tom.
Hvis du ikke
ønsker, at
denne
meddelelse
skal vises, kan
du finde flere
oplysninger i
"Brug af
Advarsel om
lav toner" på
side 57.
Tag tonerpatronen ud,
og ryst den omhyggeligt.
Ved at gøre dette kan
du midlertidigt
genoptage udskrivningen.
Toner Exhausted
T
Farvetonerpatronen,
der er angivet med
pilen, er udtjent.
Denne meddelelse vises,
når tonerpatronen er helt
tom, og din maskiner
stopper udskrivningen.
Udskift den pågældende
tonerpatron med en ægte
Dell-tonerpatron.
Se ”Udskiftning af
tonerpatronen” på
side 60.
Invalid Toner
T
Den installerede
farvetonerpatron er
ikke beregnet til din
maskine.
Installer en original Dell
farvetonerpatron, der
er designet til maskinen.
MEDDELELSE BETYDNING
FORSLAG TIL
MULIGE LØSNINGER74 | Fejlfinding
Scanner locked Scannermodulet er låst. Lås op for scanneren,
og tryk på Stop/Slet
( ).
Self Diagnostics
Temperature
Maskinens motor
kontrollerer problemer,
der er fundet.
Vent nogle få minutter.
Self Diagnostics
LSU
LSU-enheden
(Laser Scanning Unit)
på maskinen kontrollerer
problemer, der er fundet.
Vent nogle få minutter.
Send Error
(AUTH)
Der er et problem
i SMTP-godkendelsen.
Konfigurer
godkendelsesindstillingerne.
Send Error
(DNS)
Der er et problem i DNS. Konfigurer DNSindstillingerne.
Send Error
(Wrong Config)
Der er et problem
på netværkskortet.
Konfigurer
netværkskortet korrekt.
Send Error
(POP3)
Der er et problem
i POP3-godkendelsen.
Konfigurer POP3-
indstillingen.
Send Error
(SMTP)
Der er et problem
i SMTP.
Skift til den tilgængelige
server.
Power Failure Der er slukket og
derefter tændt for
strømmen igen,
og maskinens
hukommelse er ikke
sikkerhedskopieret.
Det job, du forsøgte
at udføre før strømsvigtet,
skal udføres forfra.
Cancel?
W Yes X
Maskinens hukommelse
blev fyldt op under
forsøg på at gemme
en original
i hukommelsen.
Hvis du vil annullere
faxjobbet, skal du trykke
på tasten OK for at
acceptere Yes.
Hvis du vil sende de
sider, der er gemt
korrekt, skal du trykke
på tasten OK for at
acceptere No. Du kan
sende de resterende
sider senere, når der er
tilgængelig
hukommelse.
Out-Bin Full Maskinens udbakke
er fuld af papir.
Fjern papiret.
Replace
[xxx] Soon
Delens levetid
udløber snart.
Se ”Kontrol af
udskiftelige dele” på
side 62, og ring
efter service.
Replace
[xxx]
Delens levetid er helt
udløbet.
Udskift delen med en ny.
Ring efter service.
Invalid Server Address Den indtastede
serveradresse
er ugyldig.
Indtast den korrekte
serveradresse.
MEDDELELSE BETYDNING
FORSLAG TIL
MULIGE LØSNINGER
Invalid
[xxx]
Maskinens farvedel
er ikke for din maskine.
Installer en original Dell
del, der er designet til
maskinen.
MP Tray
Paper Jam 0
Der er opstået papirstop
i universalbakkens
indføringsområde.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”I
papirindføringsområdet”
på side 65.
Load Manually
Press Start Key
Universalbakken
er tom i tilstanden
manuel indføring.
Læg papir i
universalbakken.
Remove Paper
in Rear Cover
Der er opstået
papirstop ved det
bagerste dæksel.
Afhjælp papirstoppet.
DADF Cover
Open Error
DADF-dækslet er ikke
lukket korrekt.
Luk DADF-dækslet,
indtil det låses på plads.
MEDDELELSE BETYDNING
FORSLAG TIL
MULIGE LØSNINGERFejlfinding | 75
LØSNING AF ANDRE PROBLEMER
Den følgende tabel viser nogle af de situationer, der kan opstå,
og de anbefalede løsninger. Følg de anbefalede retningslinjer, indtil
problemet er afhjulpet. Ring efter service, hvis problemet fortsætter.
Papirindføring
Udskrivningsproblemer
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Der er opstået
papirstop under
udskrivning.
Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”Tip til at undgå
papirstop” på side 64.
Papirarkene hænger
sammen.
• Sørg for, at der ikke er for meget papir i bakken.
Bakken kan indeholde op til 250 ark papir
afhængig af papirets tykkelse.
• Kontroller, at du benytter en korrekt papirtype.
Se ”Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type” på
side 31.
• Fjern papiret fra bakken, og bøj og luft papiret.
• Fugtige omgivelser kan medføre,
at papirarkene hænger sammen.
Der kan ikke indføres
flere sider i maskinen
på én gang.
• Der er muligvis forskellige typer papir i bakken.
Ilæg kun papir af samme type, størrelse og vægt.
• Hvis flere sider har forårsaget papirstop, skal
det udbedres. Se ”Tip til at undgå papirstop” på
side 64.
Papiret indføres
ikke i maskinen.
• Fjern eventuelle forhindringer fra maskinens indre.
• Papiret er ikke lagt korrekt i maskinen. Fjern
papiret fra bakken, og ilæg det korrekt.
• Der er for meget papir i bakken. Fjern det
overskydende papir fra bakken.
• Papiret er for tykt. Brug kun papir, der overholder
de angivne specifikationer for denne maskine.
Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25.
• Hvis en original ikke indføres i maskinen, kan
det være nødvendigt at udskifte DADF
gummipuden. Se ”Udskiftning af DADF
gummipuden” på side 63.
Der opstår hele
tiden papirstop.
• Der er for meget papir i bakken. Fjern det
overskydende papir fra bakken. Hvis du udskriver
på specialmaterialer, skal du bruge
universalbakken.
• Der bruges en forkert type papir. Brug kun papir,
der overholder de angivne specifikationer for
denne maskine. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier”
på side 25.
• Der kan være papirrester inde i maskinen.
Åbn frontlågen, og fjern resterne.
• Hvis en original ikke indføres i maskinen, kan
det være nødvendigt at udskifte DADF
gummipuden. Se ”Udskiftning af DADF
gummipuden” på side 63.
Konvolutter vrides
eller indføres forkert
i maskinen.
Sørg for, at papirstyrene støder helt op til begge
sider af konvolutterne.
TILSTAND MULIG ÅRSAG
FORSLAG TIL MULIGE
LØSNINGER
Maskinen
udskriver ikke.
Maskinen får
ingen strøm.
Kontroller strøm forbindelsen.
Kontroller afbryderen
og stikkontakten.
Maskinen er ikke valgt
som standardprinter.
Vælg Dell 2145cn Color
Laser MFP som din
standardprinter i Windows.
Undersøg maskinen for følgende:
• Frontdækslet er ikke lukket. Luk dækslet.
• Der er papirstop. Afhjælp papirstoppet.
Se ”Udbedring af papirstop” på side 65.
• Der er intet papir i printeren. Ilæg papir.
Se ”Placering af papir” på side 29.
• Tonerpatronen er ikke installeret. Installer
tonerpatronen.
• Hvis der opstår en systemfejl, skal du kontakte
en servicerepræsentant.
Kablet mellem
computeren og
maskinen er ikke
tilsluttet korrekt.
Tag printerkablet ud,
og sæt det i igen.
Kablet mellem
computeren
og maskinen
er beskadiget.
Tilslut kablet til en anden
computer, der fungerer korrekt,
hvis det er muligt, og udskriv
et job. Du kan også forsøge
med et andet printerkabel.
Portindstillingen
er forkert.
Kontroller
printerindstillingerne under
Windows for at sikre,
at udskriftsjobbet sendes
til den korrekte port. Hvis
computeren har mere end
én port, skal du kontrollere,
at maskinen er tilsluttet den
korrekte port.
Maskinen kan være
forkert konfigureret.
Kontroller
printeregenskaberne
for at sikre dig,
at udskriftsindstillingerne
er korrekte.
Printerdriveren kan
være forkert
installeret.
Reparer printersoftwaren.
Se Software section.
Der er opstået
en funktionsfejl
i maskinen.
Se på kontrolpanelets display,
om der er opstået en systemfejl.
Dokumentet er så
stort, at der ikke er
tilstrækkelig plads
på computerens
harddisk til at åbne
udskriftsjobbet.
Skaf mere plads
på harddisken, og udskriv
dokumentet igen.76 | Fejlfinding
Problemer med udskriftskvaliteten
Hvis den indvendige del af maskinen er snavset, eller hvis der er indført papir
forkert, kan du opleve en forringet udskriftskvalitet. Se i tabellen nedenfor,
hvordan du kan løse problemet.
Maskinen
vælger papir
fra den forkerte
papirkilde.
Valget af papirkilde
i printerens
egenskaber kan
være forkert.
I mange programmer findes
indstillingen til valg af papirkilde
på fanen Paper under
printeregenskaber. Vælg den
korrekte papirkilde.
Se printerdriverens
hjælpeskærm.
Et udskriftsjob
behandles
meget langsomt.
Jobbet kan være
meget komplekst.
Gør siden mindre kompleks,
eller juster indstillingerne for
udskriftskvaliteten.
Halvdelen
af siden
er blank.
Indstillingen
for papirretningen
kan være forkert.
Skift papirretning
i programmet.
Se printerdriverens
hjælpeskærm.
Papirstørrelsen
og indstillingerne
for papirstørrelse
stemmer ikke
overens.
Sørg for, at indstillingen
for papirstørrelse
i printerdriveren stemmer
overens med papiret
i bakken.
Eller sørg for, at indstillingen
for papirstørrelse
i printerdriveren stemmer
overens med indstillingen
for papirstørrelse i det
program, du bruger.
Maskinen
udskriver, men
teksten er forkert,
forvansket eller
ufuldstændig.
Printerkablet sidder
løst eller er defekt.
Tag printerkablet ud, og tilslut
det igen. Prøv at udskrive et
job, du allerede har udskrevet
tidligere. Hvis du har mulighed
for det, kan du tilslutte kablet
og maskinen til en anden
computer og udskrive et job,
du ved virker. Endelig kan du
prøve med et nyt printerkabel.
Der er valgt
en forkert
printerdriver.
Kontroller programmets menu
for printervalg for at sikre,
at din maskine er valgt.
Der er funktionsfejl
i programmet.
Prøv at udskrive et job fra
et andet program.
Der er funktionsfejl
i operativsystemet.
Afslut Windows, og genstart
computeren. Sluk maskinen,
og start den igen.
Der udskrives
sider, men de er
blanke.
Tonerpatronen
er defekt eller tom.
Fordel toneren i patronen, hvis
det er påkrævet. Se side 59.
Udskift tonerpatronen, hvis
det er nødvendigt.
Filen kan indeholde
blanke sider.
Kontroller, at filen ikke
indeholder blanke sider.
Nogle dele, f.eks.
controlleren eller
kortet, kan være
defekte.
Kontakt en servicetekniker.
TILSTAND MULIG ÅRSAG
FORSLAG TIL MULIGE
LØSNINGER
Printeren
udskriver ikke
PDF-filen
korrekt. Visse
dele af grafik,
tekst eller
illustrationer
mangler.
Inkompatibilitet
mellem PDF-filen
og Acrobatprodukterne.
Du kan muligvis løse dette
problem ved at udskrive
PDF-filen som et billede.
Vælg Udskriv som billede
fra Acrobatudskrivningsmuligheder.
Det tager længere
tid at udskrive, når du
udskriver en PDF-fil
som et billede.
Udskriftskvalitet
en for fotografier
er ikke god.
Billederne
er ikke klare.
Opløsningen for
fotografiet er meget
lav.
Reducer fotografiets
størrelse. Hvis du gør
fotografiet større i
programmet, bliver
opløsningen reduceret.
Maskinen
udskriver,
men teksten
er forkert,
forvansket eller
ufuldstændig.
Hvis du er i DOSmiljøet, kan din
maskines
skrifttypeindstilling
være angivet forkert.
Forslag til mulige løsninger:
Skift skrifttypeindstillingen.
Se Ӯndring af
skrifttypeindstillinger” på
side 23.
Før udskriving
udskiller
maskinen
dunste nær
udbakken.
Brug af fugtigt papir
kan forårsage
dampe under
udskrivning.
Dette skaber ikke problemer.
Fortsæt med udskrivningen.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Lys eller falmet
udskrift
Hvis der vises en hvid stribe eller et falmet
område på siden:
• Der er kun lidt toner tilbage. Du kan måske
midlertidigt forlænge tonerpatronens levetid.
Se side 60. Hvis dette ikke forbedrer
udskriftskvaliteten, skal du isætte
en ny tonerpatron.
• Papiret overholder muligvis ikke de angivne
specifikationer. Det kan f.eks. være for fugtigt
eller for groft. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier”
på side 25.
• Hvis hele siden er lys, er indstillingen for
udskriftsopløsningen sat for lavt. Juster
udskriftsopløsningen. Se hjælpeskærmen
til printerdriveren.
• En kombination af falmede og udtværede
udskriftsfejl kan betyde, at tonerpatronen
trænger til rengøring.
• LSU-enhedens overflade inde i maskinen
kan være snavset. Rengør LSU, og kontakt
en servicetekniker.
TILSTAND MULIG ÅRSAG
FORSLAG TIL MULIGE
LØSNINGERFejlfinding | 77
Tonerpletter • Papiret overholder muligvis ikke de angivne
specifikationer. Det kan f.eks. være for fugtigt
eller for groft. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier”
på side 25.
• Papirgangen trænger muligvis til rengøring.
Se ”Indvendig rengøring af maskinen” på
side 57.
Udfald Hvis der opstår falmede, oftest runde, områder
tilfældigt rundt om på siden:
• Et enkelt ark papir kan være defekt. Prøv
at udskrive jobbet igen.
• Papirets fugtighed kan være ujævn, eller der
kan være fugtige områder på overfladen.
Prøv et andet papirmærke. Se ”Valg af
udskriftsmedier” på side 25.
• Hele papirstakken er af dårlig kvalitet.
Fremstillingsprocessen kan gøre nogle
områder uimodtagelige for toner. Prøv en
anden papirtype eller et andet papirfabrikat.
• Skift printerindstilling, og forsøg igen. Gå til
printeregenskaber, klik på fanen Paper, og
angiv typen til Tykt papir. Yderligere
oplysninger finder du i Software section.
Hvis disse trin ikke løser problemet, skal
du kontakte en servicetekniker.
Hvide pletter Der vises hvide pletter på siden:
• Papiret er for groft og en hel del snavs
fra papiret falder ned i maskinen,
så overførselsbæltet kan være snavset.
Rengør det indvendige af maskinen.
Kontakt en servicetekniker.
• Papirgangen trænger muligvis til rengøring.
Kontakt en servicetekniker.
Lodrette streger Hvis der forekommer sorte, lodrette striber på
siden:
• Tromlen inde i tonerpatronen er sandsynligvis
blevet ridset. Tag tonerpatronen ud, og sæt
en ny i. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på
side 60.
Hvis der er lodrette hvide striber på siden:
• LSU-enhedens overflade inde i maskinen
kan være snavset. Rengør LSU, og kontakt
en servicetekniker.
Hvis der forekommer lodrette striber på siden:
• Scannerglaspladen og den hvide overflade
kan være snavsede. Rens disse enheder.
Se ”Rengøring af scannerenheden” på
side 59. Kontakt en servicerepræsentant,
hvis problemet fortsætter.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
Farvet eller
sort baggrund
Hvis baggrundsskyggen bliver uacceptabel:
• Skift til en lettere type papir. Se ”Valg af
udskriftsmedier” på side 25.
• Kontroller maskinens omgivelser: meget
tørre omgivelser (lav luftfugtighed) eller
høj luftfugtighed (højere end 80 % RF)
kan øge mængden af baggrundsskygge.
• Fjern den gamle tonerpatron, og installer
en ny. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på
side 60.
Udtværing af toner • Rengør printeren indvendigt. Se ”Indvendig
rengøring af maskinen” på side 57.
• Kontroller papirtypen og papirkvaliteten.
Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25.
• Tag tonerpatronen ud, og sæt en ny i.
Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på
side 60.
Gentagne lodrette
defekter
Hvis der gentagne gange forekommer mærker
på den beskrevne side af papiret med
regelmæssige intervaller:
• Tonerpatronen kan være beskadiget. Hvis
det samme mærke forekommer flere
steder på siden, skal du først køre
et renseark gennem maskinen flere gange
for at rense patronen. Hvis du stadig har
de samme problemer efter udskrivningen,
skal du fjerne tonerpatronen og installere
en ny. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på
side 60.
• Der kan være kommet toner på dele
af maskinen. Hvis defekterne forekommer
på papirets bagside, løses problemet
sandsynligvis af sig selv efter nogle
få yderligere sider.
• Fikseringsenheden kan være beskadiget.
Kontakt en servicetekniker.
Spredte
baggrundspletter
Spredt baggrundsmisfarvning er resultatet
af små mængder toner, der spredes tilfældigt
ud på udskriften.
• Papiret kan være for fugtigt. Prøv
at udskrive på papir fra et andet parti.
Åbn ikke pakker med papir, før det
er nødvendigt, så papiret ikke absorberer
for meget fugtighed.
• Hvis der forekommer spredt
baggrundsmisfarvning på en konvolut,
kan du ændre udskriftslayoutet, så du ikke
udskriver i områder af konvolutten, hvor
der er overliggende sammenføjninger
på bagsiden. Udskrivning hen over
sammenføjninger kan give problemer.
• Hvis den spredte baggrundsmisfarvning
dækker hele overfladen på en side, må du
ændre udskriftsopløsningen i programmet
eller i egenskaberne for printeren.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
A78 | Fejlfinding
Misdannede tegn • Hvis tegnene er misdannede og giver hule
billeder, kan papirtypen være for glat. Prøv
noget andet papir. Se ”Valg af
udskriftsmedier” på side 25.
• Hvis tegnene er misdannede og forekommer
bølgede, har scannerenheden muligvis brug for
eftersyn. Kontakt en servicemedarbejder,
hvis dette er tilfældet.
Skrå skrift • Kontroller, at papiret ligger korrekt.
• Kontroller papirtypen og papirkvaliteten.
Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25.
• Sørg for, at papiret eller andet materiale er lagt
rigtigt i, og at styrene ikke er for stramme eller
for løse omkring papirstakken.
Krøller eller bølger • Kontroller, at papiret ligger korrekt.
• Kontroller papirtypen og papirkvaliteten.
Både høj temperatur og fugt kan få papir
til at krølle. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på
side 25.
• Vend papirstakken i bakken. Prøv også
at vende papiret 180° i bakken.
Folder eller
bukninger
• Kontroller, at papiret ligger korrekt.
• Kontroller papirtypen og papirkvaliteten.
Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25.
• Vend papirstakken i bakken. Prøv også
at vende papiret 180° i bakken.
Bagsiden
af udskrifterne
er snavset
Kontroller, at tonerpatronen ikke lækker.
Rengør printeren indvendigt. Se ”Indvendig
rengøring af maskinen” på side 57.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Helt farvede eller
helt sorte sider
• Tonerpatronen er muligvis ikke installeret
korrekt. Tag patronen ud, og sæt den i igen.
• Tonerpatronen er muligvis defekt og skal
udskiftes. Tag tonerpatronen ud, og sæt
en ny i. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på
side 60.
• Maskinen skal muligvis repareres.
Kontakt en servicetekniker.
Løs toner • Rengør printeren indvendigt. Se ”Indvendig
rengøring af maskinen” på side 57.
• Kontroller papirtypen og papirkvaliteten.
Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25.
• Tag tonerpatronen ud, og sæt en ny i.
Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på
side 60.
• Hvis problemet fortsætter, skal maskinen
muligvis repareres. Kontakt en servicetekniker.
Tegnhuller Blanke områder i tegnene er utrykte områder
inde i dele af tegn, der burde være helt sorte:
• Hvis du bruger transparenter, kan du forsøge
med en anden type transparent. På grund
af transparentens sammensætning, er det
normalt med nogle blanke områder i tegnene.
• Måske udskriver du på den forkerte side
af arket. Tag papiret ud, og vend det om.
• Papiret overholder muligvis ikke
papirspecifikationerne. Se ”Valg af
udskriftsmedier” på side 25.
Vandrette striber Hvis der opstår vandrette parallelle striber eller
udtværinger:
• Tonerpatronen kan være installeret forkert.
Tag patronen ud, og sæt den i igen.
• Tonerpatronen kan være defekt.
Tag tonerpatronen ud, og sæt en ny i.
Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på
side 60.
• Hvis problemet fortsætter, skal maskinen
muligvis repareres. Kontakt en
servicetekniker.
Krøl Hvis det udskrevne papir er krøllet, eller papiret
ikke indføres i maskinen:
• Vend papirstakken i bakken. Prøv også
at vende papiret 180° i bakken.
• Skift printerindstilling, og forsøg igen. Gå til
printeregenskaber, klik på fanen Paper,
og angiv typen til Tyndt papir. Yderligere
oplysninger finder du i Software section.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
A
A
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCcFejlfinding | 79
Kopieringsproblemer
Et ukendt billede
vises gentagne
gange på de næste
par ark, eller der
forekommer løs
toner, lys udskrift
eller forurening.
Din printer anvendes sandsynligvis ved en højde
på 1.000 m eller derover.
Den store højde kan påvirke udskriftkvaliteten,
f.eks. i form af løs toner eller lyse udskrifter. Du
kan vælge denne indstilling via Start →
Programs → DELL → DELL Printers →
navnet på din printerdriver → Printer
Settings Utility. Se ”Højdejustering” på
side 20.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Kopierne er for lyse
eller for mørke.
Brug Mørkhed ( ) til at gøre baggrunden
på kopierne mørkere eller lysere.
Der forekommer
udtværinger, striber,
mærker eller pletter
på kopierne.
• Hvis der er fejl på originalen, skal du trykke
på Mørkhed ( ) for at gøre baggrunden
på kopierne lysere.
• Hvis der ikke er nogen fejl på originalen, skal
du rengøre scannerenheden.
Se ”Rengøring af scannerenheden” på
side 59.
Kopiens indhold
er skævt.
• Sørg for, at originalen vender tryksiden
nedad på scannerglaspladen eller tryksiden
opad i DADF’en.
• Kontroller, at kopipapiret er lagt korrekt
i papirbakken.
Der udskrives
blanke sider.
Sørg for, at originalen vender tryksiden nedad
på scannerglaspladen eller tryksiden opad
i DADF’en.
Trykket tværes
nemt af kopien.
• Udskift papiret i papirbakken med papir
fra en ny pakke.
• I områder med høj luftfugtighed bør papiret
ikke efterlades i maskinen i længere perioder.
Der opstår hyppige
papirstop.
• Luft papirstakken, og vend den i bakken.
Udskift papiret i bakken med en frisk forsyning.
Juster papirstyrene, hvis det er nødvendigt.
• Kontroller, at papiret har den rigtige vægt.
Det anbefalede er 75 g/m2
kontraktpapir.
• Undersøg maskinen for kopipapir eller
papirstykker, efter du har afhjulpet
et papirstop.
Tonerpatronen
udskriver færre
kopier end forventet,
før den løber
tør for toner.
• Originalerne indeholder muligvis billeder,
farvede felter eller tykke streger.
Originalerne kan f.eks. være formularer,
nyhedsbreve, bøger eller andre
dokumenter, der bruger mere toner.
• Maskinen tændes og slukkes muligvis ofte.
• Scannerlåget er muligvis åbent, mens
der kopieres.80 | Fejlfinding
Scanningsproblemer Faxproblemer
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Scanneren
fungerer ikke.
• Sørg for at anbringe den original, du vil scanne,
med tryksiden nedad på scannerglaspladen
eller med tryksiden opad i DADF.
• Der er muligvis ikke tilstrækkelig hukommelse
til at behandle det dokument, du vil scanne.
Prøv forscanningsfunktionen for at se,
om den virker. Prøv at reducere
scanningens opløsningsgrad.
• Kontroller, at USB-kablet er tilsluttet korrekt.
• Kontroller, at USB-kablet ikke er defekt.
Udskift kablet med et, du ved er i orden.
Udskift kablet, hvis det er nødvendigt.
• Kontroller, at scanneren er konfigureret
korrekt. Kontroller scanningsindstillingen
i SmarThru-konfigurationen eller det
program, du vil bruge, for at sikre dig,
at scannerjobbet sendes til den rigtige port.
Enheden scanner
meget langsomt.
• Kontroller, om maskinen udskriver de data,
den modtager. Hvis dette er tilfældet, kan
du scanne dokumentet, når de modtagne
data er udskrevet.
• Grafik scannes langsommere end tekst.
• Kommunikationshastigheden bliver
langsommere, når maskinen scanner, pga.
den store mængde hukommelse, der
er nødvendig for at analysere og gengive
et scannet billede eller en scannet tekst.
Indstil computeren til ECP-printertilstand ved
hjælp af BIOS-indstillingerne. Det vil hjælpe
med til at øge hastigheden. Hvis du ønsker
oplysninger om, hvordan du indstiller BIOS,
kan du se i brugerhåndbogen til computeren.
Følgende meddelelse
vises på
computerskærmen:
• ”Enheden kan ikke
indstilles til den
hardwaretilstand,
som du ønsker.”
• ”Port bruges af
et andet program.”
• ”Port deaktiveret.”
• ”Scanner modtager
eller udskriver data.
Prøv igen efter det
aktuelle job.”
• ”Ugyldig handle.”
• ”Scanning
mislykkedes.”
• Der kan være et kopieringsjob eller
udskriftsjob i gang. Forsøg jobbet igen, når
det igangværende job er færdigt.
• Den valgte port anvendes i øjeblikket.
Genstart computeren, og prøv igen.
• Printerkablet er muligvis ikke tilsluttet
korrekt, eller strømtilførslen kan være
afbrudt.
• Scannerdriveren er ikke installeret, eller
driftsmiljøet er ikke konfigureret korrekt.
• Kontroller, at maskinen er korrekt tilsluttet,
og at der er tændt for strømmen, og genstart
derefter computeren.
• USB-kablet er muligvis ikke tilsluttet korrekt,
eller strømtilførslen kan være afbrudt.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Maskinen virker ikke,
displayet lyser ikke,
og knapperne
fungerer ikke.
• Træk netledningen ud og sæt den i igen.
• Find ud af, om der er strøm i stikkontakten.
Der høres ingen
ringetone.
• Kontroller, at telefonledningen er tilsluttet
korrekt.
• Kontroller, at telefonstikket i væggen
fungerer, ved at tilslutte en anden telefon.
De tal, der er lagret
i hukommelsen,
ringer ikke til det
korrekte nummer.
Sørg for, at tallene i er gemt korrekt
i hukommelsen. Udskriv en liste for
Telefonbogen. Se ”Udskrivning af
adressekartoteket” på side 52.
Originalen bliver ikke
ført ind i maskinen.
• Kontroller, at papiret ikke er krøllet, og at det
er korrekt ilagt. Kontroller, om originalen har
den rigtige størrelse og ikke er for tyk eller
for tynd.
• Sørg for, at DADF’en er lukket helt.
• DADF-gummipuden skal evt. udskiftes.
Se ”Udskiftning af DADF gummipuden” på
side 63.
Faxer modtages
ikke automatisk.
• Modtagetilstanden skal indstilles til Fax.
• Der skal være papir i papirbakken.
• Kontroller, om der vises fejlmeddelelser
i displayet. Hvis der er nogen, skal
du afhjælpe problemet.
Maskinen
sender ikke.
• Kontroller, at der er en original i DADF’en
eller på scannerglasset.
• Sending bør blive vist i displayet.
• Kontroller, om den faxmaskine, du sender
til, kan modtage din fax.
Indgående faxer har
blanke områder eller
kvaliteten er dårlig.
• Den maskine, der sender faxen, kan være
defekt.
• Støj på telefonlinjen kan medføre linjefejl.
• Kontroller maskinen ved at tage en kopi.
• Tonerpatronen kan være tom. Udskift
tonerpatronen. Se ”Udskiftning af
tonerpatronen” på side 60.
Nogle af ordene
på en modtaget fax
er strukket ud.
Den maskine, der sendte faxen, havde
et midlertidigt dokumentstop.
Der er striber på de
originaler, du sender.
Undersøg scannerenheden for pletter,
og gør den ren. Se ”Rengøring af
scannerenheden” på side 59.
Maskinen ringer op
til et nummer, men
det lykkes ikke at
oprette forbindelse
med den anden
faxmaskine.
Den anden faxmaskine kan være slukket,
mangle papir eller være ude af stand til at
besvare de opkald, den modtager. Tal med
den person, der betjener den anden maskine,
og bed vedkommende om at afhjælpe
problemet.Fejlfinding | 81
Almindelige PostScript-problemer
De følgende situationer er PS-sprogspecifikke og kan forekomme, når der
anvendes flere forskellige printersprog.
Almindelige Windows-problemer
Faxer gemmes ikke
i hukommelsen.
Der er muligvis ikke tilstrækkelig hukommelse
til at gemme faxen. Hvis der vises en Memory
Full-meddelelse i displayet, skal du slette de
faxer, som du ikke længere har brug for, fra
hukommelsen og derefter prøve at gemme
faxen igen.
Der opstår blanke
områder i bunden
af hver side, eller
på andre sider, med
en smal stribe tekst
foroven.
Du har muligvis valgt den forkerte papirindstilling
i opsætningen af brugerindstillingerne. Se side 25,
hvis du ønsker oplysninger om papirindstillinger.
Hvis du vil have udskrevet en meddelelse eller have den vist på skærmen,
når der opstår PostScript-fejl, skal du åbne vinduet
Udskriftsindstillinger og klikke på den ønskede indstilling ud for området
med PostScript-fejl.
PROBLEM MULIG ÅRSAG LØSNING
PostScript-filen
kan ikke
udskrives.
PostScriptdriveren
er muligvis ikke
installeret korrekt.
• Installer PostScript-driveren.
Se Software section.
• Udskriv en
konfigurationsside,
og kontroller, at PSversionen er tilgængelig til
udskrivning.
• Kontakt en
servicerepræsentant, hvis
problemet fortsætter.
Meddelelsen
”Grænsekontrolf
ejl” vises.
Udskriftsjobbet
er for komplekst.
Du er muligvis nødt til
at reducere sidens
kompleksitet eller installere
mere hukommelse.
Der udskrives
en PostScriptfejlside.
Udskriftsjobbet
er muligvis ikke
PostScript.
Kontroller, at udskriftsjobbet
er et PostScript-job.
Kontroller, om programmet
forventede, at der blev sendt
en installationsfil eller
en PostScript-headerfil til
maskinen.
Den valgfri bakke
er ikke valgt
i driveren.
Printerdriveren
er ikke konfigureret
til at genkende den
valgfri bakke.
Åben PostScriptdriveregenskaberne, vælg
fanen Device Settings, og
angiv indstillingen Tray
i afsnittet Installable Options
til Installed.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Når du udskriver
et dokument
i Macintosh
med Acrobat
Reader 6.0 eller
nyere, udskrives
farverne ikke
korrekt.
Printerdriverens
indstilling for
opløsning stemmer
muligvis ikke
overens med
indstillingen
i Acrobat Reader.
Sørg for,
at opløsningsindstillingen
i printerdriveren stemmer
overens med indstillingen
i Acrobat Reader.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Meddelelsen ”Filen
er i brug” vises
under installationen.
Afslut alle programmer. Fjern alle programmer
i startgruppen, og genstart Windows.
Geninstaller printerdriveren.
Meddelelserne
”Generel
beskyttelsesfejl”,
”Undtagelse OE”,
”Spool32” eller
”Ugyldig handling”
vises.
Luk alle andre programmer, og genstart Windows.
Meddelelserne
”Kan ikke udskrive”,
”Der er opstået en
printertimeout-fejl”
vises.
Disse meddelelser kan blive vist under
udskrivningen. Vent, indtil maskinen er færdig
med at udskrive. Hvis denne meddelelse vises
i klar-tilstanden, når udskrivningen er færdig,
skal du kontrollere forbindelsen, og/eller om
der er opstået en fejl.
Du finder oplysninger om fejlmeddelelser i Windows i den
dokumentation til Microsoft Windows, der fulgte med din pc.
PROBLEM MULIG ÅRSAG LØSNING82 | Fejlfinding
Almindelige Linux-problemer
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Maskinen
udskriver ikke.
• Kontroller, om printerdriveren er installeret
på systemet. Åbn Unified Driver configurator
og skift til fanen Printers i vinduet Printers
configuration for at få vist listen over
tilgængelige printere. Kontroller, at maskinen
vises på listen. Hvis den ikke gør, skal du starte
guiden Add new printer for at konfigurere
enheden.
• Kontroller, om printeren er startet. Åbn Printers
configuration, og marker maskinen på listen
over printere. Læs beskrivelsen i ruden
Selected printer. Hvis status indeholder
strengen ”(stopped)”, skal du trykke
på knappen Start. Herefter burde printeren
fungere som normalt. Statusangivelsen
”stopped” kan blive aktiveret, når der opstår
visse problemer med udskrivningen. Dette
kan f.eks. være et forsøg på at udskrive
et dokument, mens porten bruges af et
scannerprogram.
• Kontroller, at porten ikke er optaget.
Da funktionelle komponenter i MFP
(printer og scanner) deler den samme I/Ogrænseflade (MFP-port), er det muligt, at der
opstår en situation, hvor forskellige ”bruger”-
programmer samtidigt forsøger at få adgang
til den samme port. Hvis du vil undgå konflikter,
skal de kun have tilladelse til at få kontrol
over enheden en ad gangen. Den anden
”bruger” vil få meddelelsen ”device busy”.
Du bør åbne Ports Configuration og markere
den port, der er tildelt printeren. I ruden Selected
port kan du se, om porten er optaget af et andet
program. Hvis det er tilfældet, skal du vente
til det aktuelle job er afsluttet, eller du skal
klikke på knappen Release port, hvis du er
sikker på, at den aktuelle ports ejer ikke
fungerer korrekt.
• Kontroller, om programmet har
en specialindstilling for udskrivning som
f.eks. ”-oraw”. Hvis der står ”-oraw”
i kommandolinjeparameteren, skal du fjerne
den, før der kan udskrives korrekt. For Gimp
Front-end skal du vælge ”print” -> ”Setup
printer” og redigere
kommandolinjeparameteren
på kommandolinjen.
• Den CUPS-version (Common Unix Printing
System), der distribueres med SuSE
Linux 9.2 (cups-1.1.21), har et problem med
IPP-udskrivning (Internet Printing Protocol).
Brug socketudskrivning i stedet for IPP, eller
installer en nyere version af CUPS
(cups-1.1.22 eller nyere).
Visse farver
udskrives helt sorte.
Dette er en kendt fejl i Ghostscript
(indtil GNU Ghostscript version 7.05), hvor
grundfarverummet i dokumentet er et
indekseret farverum, der konverteres via CIEfarverum. Da PostScript benytter CIE-farverum
som farvematchningssystem, bør du opdatere
Ghostscript på dit system til mindst GNU
Ghostscript version 7.06 eller nyere. Du kan
finde de seneste versioner af Ghostscript på
www.ghostscript.com.
Nogle farvebilleder
udskrives i uventede
farver.
Dette er en kendt fejl i Ghostscript (indtil
GNU Ghostscript version 7.xx), hvor
grundfarverummet i dokumentet er et
indekseret RGB-farverum, der konverteres via
CIE-farverum. Da PostScript benytter CIEfarverum som farvematchningssystem, bør
du opdatere Ghostscript på dit system til mindst
GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx eller nyere.
Du kan finde de seneste versioner af
Ghostscript på www.ghostscript.com.
Maskinen udskriver
ikke hele sider.
Det er et kendt problem, der opstår, når der
bruges en farveprinter til version 8.51 eller
ældre af Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, og det
rapporteres til bugs.ghostscript.com som
Ghostscript Bug 688252.
Problemet er løst i AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52
eller nyere. Hent den nyeste version af AFPL
Ghostscript fra http://sourceforge.net/projects/
ghostscript/, og installer den, så problemet
bliver løst.
Jeg kan ikke scanne
via Gimp Front-end.
Kontroller, om Gimp Front-end har ”Xsane:
Device dialog” i menuen ”Acquire”. Hvis det
ikke er tilfældet, skal du installere plug-in’en
Xsane til Gimp på computeren. Du kan finde
plug-in-pakken Xsane til Gimp på Linux
distributions-cd’en eller på Gimps hjemmeside.
Hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger,
henvises du til distributions-cd’en med Hjælp
til Linux eller programmet Gimp Front-end.
Hvis du ønsker at bruge en anden type
scannerprogram, henvises du til Hjælp
i programmet.
Jeg får fejlen
”Cannot open port
device file”, når
jeg udskriver et
dokument.
Undgå at ændre parametre for udskriftsjobbet
(f.eks. via LPR-brugergrænsefladen) under
et igangværende udskriftsjob. Kendte versioner
af CUPS-server afbryder udskriftsjobbet, hver
gang udskriftsindstillingerne ændres, og forsøger
derefter at starte jobbet igen fra starten.
Da Unified Linux Driver låser porten under
udskrivning, vil den bratte afslutning af driveren
medføre, at porten forbliver låst og dermed
utilgængelig for efterfølgende udskriftsjob. Hvis
denne situation opstod, skal du prøve at frigøre
porten.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGERFejlfinding | 83
Maskinen vises ikke
på scannerlisten.
• Kontroller, om maskinen er tilsluttet
computeren. Sørg for, at den er tilsluttet
korrekt via USB-porten, og at den er tændt.
• Kontroller, om scannerdriveren til maskinen
er installeret i systemet. Åbn Unified Driver
configurator, skift til Scanners configuration,
og tryk derefter på Drivers. Kontroller, at der
vises en driver med et navn, der svarer til
maskinen navn, i vinduet. Kontroller, at porten
ikke er optaget. Da funktionelle komponenter
i MFP (printer og scanner) deler den samme
I/O-grænseflade (MFP-port), er det muligt,
at der opstår en situation, hvor forskellige
”bruger”-programmer samtidigt forsøger
at få adgang til den samme port. Hvis du vil
undgå konflikter, skal de kun have tilladelse
til at få kontrol over enheden en ad gangen.
Den anden ”bruger” vil få meddelelsen
”device busy”. Dette kan normalt ske under
starten af en scanningsprocedure. Der vises
en relevant meddelelsesboks.
• Hvis du vil finde årsagen til problemet, skal
du åbne portkonfigurationen og vælge den
port, der er tildelt din scanner. port symbol /
dev/mfp0 svarer til den LP:0 -betegnelse, der
vises i scannerens indstillinger, /dev/mfp1
relaterer til LP:1 og så videre. USB-porte
starter ved /dev/mfp4, så en scanner
på USB:0 svarer til /dev/mfp4 osv. I ruden
Selected port kan du se, om porten
er optaget af et andet program. Hvis det
er tilfældet, skal du vente, til det aktuelle job
er afsluttet, eller du skal trykke på knappen
Release port, hvis du er sikker på, at den
aktuelle ports ejer ikke fungerer korrekt.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Maskinen
scanner ikke.
• Kontroller, at der er lagt et dokument
i maskinen.
• Kontroller, om maskinen er tilsluttet
computeren. Sørg for, at den er tilsluttet
korrekt, hvis der rapporteres om I/O-fejl
under scanningen.
• Kontroller, at porten ikke er optaget. Da
funktionelle komponenter i MFP (printer og
scanner) deler den samme I/O-grænseflade
(MFP-port), er det muligt, at der opstår
en situation, hvor forskellige ”bruger”-
programmer samtidigt forsøger at få adgang
til den samme port. Hvis du vil undgå
konflikter, skal de kun have tilladelse til
at få kontrol over enheden en ad gangen.
Den anden ”bruger” vil få meddelelsen
”device busy”. Dette kan normalt ske under
starten af en scanningsprocedure. Der vises
en relevant meddelelsesboks.
Hvis du vil identificere kilden til problemet, skal
du åbne MFP Ports Configuration og markere
den port, der er tildelt scanneren.
Portsymbolet /dev/mfp0 svarer til den LP:0-
betegnelse, der vises i scannerens indstillinger,
/dev/mfp1 svarer til LP:1 osv. USB-porte
starter ved /dev/mfp4, så en scanner
på USB:0 svarer til /dev/mfp4 osv. I ruden
Selected port kan du se, om porten
er optaget af et andet program. Hvis det
er tilfældet, skal du vente, til det aktuelle job
er afsluttet, eller du skal trykke på knappen
Release port, hvis du er sikker på, at den
aktuelle ports ejer ikke fungerer korrekt.
Du finder oplysninger om fejlmeddelelser i Linux i den brugerhåndbog
til Linux, der fulgte med din pc.
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER84 | Fejlfinding
Almindelige Macintosh-problemer
TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER
Printeren udskriver ikke
PDF-filen korrekt. Visse
dele af grafik, tekst eller
illustrationer mangler.
Inkompatibilitet mellem PDF-filen
og Acrobat-produktern:
Du kan muligvis løse dette problem ved
at udskrive PDF-filen som et billede.
Vælg Udskriv som billede fra Acrobatudskrivningsmuligheder.
Det tager længere tid at udskrive,
når du udskriver en PDF-fil som
et billede.
Dokumentet er blevet
udskrevet, men
udskriftsjobbet er ikke
forsvundet fra
printerspooleren
i Mac OS 10.3.2.
Opdater Mac OS til OS 10.3.3 eller nyere.
Nogle bogstaver vises
ikke som normalt under
udskrivning af forsiden.
Dette problem skyldes, at Mac OS ikke
kan oprette skrifttypen under udskrivning
af forsiden. Det engelske alfabet
og engelske tal vises som normalt
på forsiden.
Du finder oplysninger om Mac OS-fejlmeddelelser i den
brugerhåndbog til Mac OS, der fulgte med din pc.Bestilling af forbrugsstoffer og ekstraudstyr | 85
bestilling af forbrugsstoffer og ekstraudstyr
Kapitlet indeholder oplysninger om køb af patroner og ekstraudstyr til maskinen.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Forbrugsstoffer
• Ekstraudstyr
• Sådan køber du
FORBRUGSSTOFFER
Når toneren er tom, kan du bestille følgende typer tonerpatroner til maskinen:
EKSTRAUDSTYR
Du kan købe og installere tilbehør, så maskinens ydeevne og kapacitet
forbedres.
SÅDAN KØBER DU
Når du vil bestille Dell-godkendte forbrugsstoffer eller ekstraudstyr, skal du
kontakte din lokale Dell-forhandler eller den forhandler, hvor du har købt
maskinen. Du kan også besøge vores websted www.dell.com eller
support.dell.com og vælge land/område for at få oplysninger om kontakt til
teknisk support.
Ekstraudstyr og -funktioner varierer fra land til land. Du kan forhøre
dig hos din sælger vedr. tilgængeligheden af den pågældende del
i dit land.
TYPE GENNEMSNITSYDELSE
a
a. Erklæret ydelsesværdi i henhold til ISO/IEC 19798.
ARTIKELNUMMER
Tonerpatron
med
standardydelse
• Gennemsnitlig ydelse
ved kontinuert brug for
sort tonerpatron: 2.500
standardsider (sort)
• Gennemsnitlig ydelse
ved kontinuert brug for
farvetonerpatron: 2.000
standardsider (gul/
magenta/cyan)
T272J (Black)
P586K (Cyan)
K756K (Magenta)
M802K (Yellow)
Høj ydelse
tonerpatron
• Gennemsnitlig ydelse
ved kontinuert brug for
sort tonerpatron: 5.500
standardsider (sort)
• Gennemsnitlig ydelse
ved kontinuert brug for
farvetonerpatron: 5.000
standardsider (gul/
magenta/cyan)
R717J (Black)
P587K (Cyan)
K757K (Magenta)
M803K (Yellow)
Papiroverførsel
sbælte
Ca. 50.000
Når overførselsbæltet er
slidt ned, skal det
udskiftes. Du vil muligvis få
besked, når det er tid, via
den bælterelaterede
meddelelse på displayet.
U265J
Når du køber en ny tonerpatron eller forbrugsstoffer, skal du købe
dem i det samme land, hvor du har købt maskinen.
Ellers vil tonerpatronen eller forbrugsstofferne ikke være kompatible
med maskinen, da konfigurationen for tonerpatronen eller
forbrugsstofferne varierer alt afhængigt af landet.
EKSTRAUDSTYR BESKRIVELSE ARTIKELNUMMER
Hukommelsesmodul
Udvider maskinens
hukommelseskapacitet.
KR039: 256 MB
Ekstra bakke 2 Hvis du ofte har
problemer med
papirtilførslen, kan
du bruge en ekstra
bakke til 500 ark.
Du kan udskrive
dokumenter
i forskellige størrelser
og på forskellige
udskriftsmaterialer.
P955J
Harddisk Gør det muligt at
forbedre maskinens
funktioner og udskrive
på forskellige måder.
N573K
Maskinen har muligvis to hukommelsesstik med et forudinstalleret
hukommelsesmodul i det ene stik. Når du udvider
hukommelseskapaciteten, kan du tilføje et hukommelsesmodul i det
ledige stik i overensstemmelse med tabellen ovenfor. Det anbefales
kraftigt, at du kun indsætter et hukommelsesmodul i det ledige
hukommelsesstik uden at fjerne det forudinstallerede
hukommelsesmodul. Hvis maskinen har en hukommelseskapacitet
på 128 MB, og du tilføjer 256 MB, bliver hukommelseskapaciteten
forøget til 384 MB.86 | Installation af tilbehør
installation af tilbehør
Maskinen er en komplet model, der er optimeret til at klare de fleste udskrivningsopgaver. Men i anerkendelse af,
at kravene varierer meget fra bruger til bruger, fremstiller Dell en række forskelligt tilbehør, der giver maskinen endnu
større kapacitet.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Der skal tages visse forholdsregler, når der installeres tilbehør
• Aktivering af det tilføjede tilbehør i printeregenskaber
• Opgradering af et hukommelsesmodul
• Brug af harddisken
DER SKAL TAGES VISSE FORHOLDSREGLER,
NÅR DER INSTALLERES TILBEHØR
• Tag netledningen ud
Fjern aldrig kontrolkortdækslet, når strømmen er tilsluttet.
Tag altid strømkablet ud, inden du installerer eller fjerner NOGET
ekstraudstyr og tilbehør, uanset om det skal installeres uden på eller
inden i maskinen. Så undgår du at få stød.
• Aflad statisk elektricitet
Kontrolkortet og internt tilbehør (netværkskort eller hukommelsesmodul)
er følsomme over for statisk elektricitet. Inden du installerer eller fjerner
internt tilbehør, skal du derfor sørge for, at du ikke selv giver stød.
Du kan aflade statisk elektricitet ved at røre ved metal, f.eks.
metalbagpladen på en enhed, der er sat i en stikkontakt med jordforbindelse.
Hvis du går rundt, før du afslutter installationen, skal du gentage denne
procedure for at aflade eventuel statisk elektricitet igen.
• Efter installation af tilbehør som f.eks. en ekstra bakke skal brugere af
PS-driveren indstille bakken til brug. Gå til PS-printeregenskaberne, og
aktiver det tilføjede tilbehør.
AKTIVERING AF DET TILFØJEDE TILBEHØR I
PRINTEREGENSKABER
Når du har installeret tilbehør, skal du vælge det i printeregenskaberne i
printerdriveren, før du kan bruge det.
1. Installer driveren (se ”Installation af softwaren” på side 19).
2. Klik på menuen Start i Windows.
• I Windows 2000 kan du vælge Indstillinger → Printere.
• I Windows XP/2003 skal du vælge Printere og faxenheder.
• I Windows Vista/2008 skal du vælge Kontrolpanel → Hardware og
lyd → Printere.
3. Vælg maskinens driver, og højreklik for at åbne Egenskaber.
• Til PS-driveren skal du vælge PS-driver og højreklikke for at åbne
Egenskaber.
4. Vælg Enhedsindstillinger i egenskaberne for printerdriveren.
• Vælg Enhedsindstillinger for PS-driveren.
5. Angiv de nødvendige indstillinger i egenskaberne for printerdriveren.
• Vælg afsnittet Installerbare komponenter for PS-driver, og angiv
de nødvendige indstillinger.
6. Klik på OK.
OPGRADERING AF ET HUKOMMELSESMODUL
Maskinen har et ekstra stik til et DIMM-hukommelsesmodul (dual in-line memory
module). Du kan bruge dette modulstik til at installere ekstra hukommelse.
Maskinen har to hukommelsesstik med et hukommelsesmodul, der
er præinstalleret fra fabrikken, i det ene stik. Når du udvider
hukommelseskapaciteten, kan du tilføje et hukommelsesmodul til det
ledige hukommelsesstik. Det anbefales kraftigt, at du kun udvider med
et hukommelsesmodul i det ledige hukommelsesstik uden at fjerne
det præinstallerede hukommelsesmodul. Hvis maskinen har
en hukommelseskapacitet på 128 MB, og du tilføjer 256 MB, bliver
hukommelseskapaciteten forøget til 384 MB. Der findes oplysninger til
bestilling af ekstra hukommelsesmoduler (se ”Bestilling af forbrugsstoffer og
ekstraudstyr” på side 85).
Installation af et hukommelsesmodul
1. Sluk for maskinen, og træk alle kabler ud.
2. Løsn skruen, og fjern bagdækslet.
Batteriet inden i maskinen, er en servicekomponent. Forsøg ikke at
udskifte det selv.
Der er risiko for eksplosion, hvis batteriet udskiftes med en ukorrekt
type batteri. Kasser brugte batterier i henhold til instruktionerne.Installation af tilbehør | 87
3. Løsn skruen, og løft dækslet en smule opad, og træk dækslet mod højre.
4. Tag det nye hukommelseskort ud af plastikemballagen.
5. Tag fat om hukommelseskortet i kanterne, og ret det ind imod
hukommelsesstikket med en vinkel på ca. 30 grader. Kontroller, at
hakkerne på modulet passer til stikkets riller.
6. Skub hukommelseskortet ind i stikket, indtil du hører et ”klik”.
7. Sæt dækslet til kontrolkort på igen, og fastgør dækslet med skruen.
8. Udskift bagdækslet, og fastgør dækslet med skruen.
9. Sæt netledningen og printerkablet i maskinen igen, og tænd for den.
10. Hvis du bruger the PS-driveren, skal du aktivere den ekstra hukommelse
i egenskaberne for PS-driveren. Se ”Aktivering af det tilføjede tilbehør i
printeregenskaber” på side 86.
BRUG AF HARDDISKEN
Installation af harddisken gør det muligt at sende data fra din computer til
udskrivningskøen på printerens harddisk. Dette nedsætter computerens
arbejdsbyrde. Du kan også benytte forskellige funktioner som f.eks. at gemme
et job på harddisken, køre stavekontrol på et job og udskrive private dokumenter.
Installation af harddisken
Bestillingsoplysninger, se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85 Gennemse
forholdsreglerne på side 86.
1. Sluk for maskinen, og træk alle kabler ud.
2. Løsn skruen, og fjern bagdækslet.
1 Dæksel til
kontrolkort
Hvis du vil fjerne et eksisterende hukommelsesmodul, skal du skubbe
de to klammer i enderne af modulet udad.
De indhak og riller, der er vist ovenfor, svarer muligvis ikke
nøjagtigt til dem på modulet og på maskinen.
Brug ikke vold, når du håndterer hukommelsesmodulet, da det i så fald
kan tage skade. Hvis hukommelsesmodulet ikke lader til at passe
til stikket, skal du forsigtigt gentage forrige procedure.
Hvis du vil frigøre hukommelsesmodulet, skal du trække de to tapper
på siderne udad, hvorefter modulet skubbes ud. 88 | Installation af tilbehør
3. Åben kontrolkortdækslet. Løsn skruen, og løft dækslet en smule opad,
og træk dækslet mod højre.
4. Hold forbindelsesstikket på harddisken, så det flugter med stikket
på kontrolkortet. Skub harddisken ind, indtil den klikker på plads.
.
5. Stram de skruer, som blev leveret sammen med den nye harddisk.
6. Sæt dækslet til kontrolkort på igen, og fastgør dækslet med skruen.
7. Udskift bagdækslet, og fastgør dækslet med skruen.
8. Sæt netledningen og printerkablet i maskinen igen, og tænd for den.
9. Udskriv en konfigurationsside fra kontrolpanelet for at kontrollere,
om harddisken er korrekt installeret. Se ”Udskrivning af rapporter” på
side 56.
10. Hvis du bruger PS-driveren, skal du aktivere den tilføjede harddisk i
egenskaberne for PS-driveren. Se ”Aktivering af det tilføjede tilbehør i
printeregenskaber” på side 86.
Udskrivning med harddisken (ekstraudstyr)
Når du har installeret den valgfrie harddisk, kan du benytte avancerede
udskrivningsfunktioner som f.eks. at gemme eller spoole et udskriftsjob,
læse korrektur på et job og udskrive et privat job i vinduet for printeregenskaber.
Når du har gemt filer på harddisken, kan du let udskrive de gemte filer igen
eller slette dem ved hjælp af printerens kontrolpanel.
Lagring af et job
Du kan gemme job på den installerede harddisk.
1. Åbn den fil, du vil gemme.
2. Vælg Print i menuen File. Vinduet Udskriv vises.
3. Klik på Properties. Hvis du ser Setup, Print eller Options, skal du
klikke på knappen i stedte for.
4. Klik på fanen Other Options, og klik derefter på Job type.
5. Vælg den ønskede udskrivningstilstand i rullemenuen.
• Normal: Udskriver i normaltilstand.
• Proof: Udskriver den første fil, og efter en pause udskrives næste fil.
• Confidentical: Gemmer filerne og sikrer dem med en
adgangskode.
• Store: Gemmer filen på harddisken.
• Spool: Spooler filen på harddisken og udskriver den fra harddiskkøen.
• Delay: Udskriver filen på et angivet tidspunkt.
6. Indtast brugernavn og filnavn.
7. Klik på OK, indtil vinduet Udskriv vises.
8. Klik på OK eller Print for at starte udskrivningen.
Udskrivning af et gemt job
Du kan udskrive job, der i øjeblikket er gemt på harddisken.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Job Manage.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Store Job vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede brugernavn og filnavn
vises, og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Hvis den valgte fil er et fortroligt udskriftsjob, skal du indtaste den
angivne firecifrede adgangskode.
Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at indtaste det første ciffer, og tryk
derefter på OK. Markøren flytter automatisk til pladsen for næste
ciffer. Indtast andet, tredje og fjerde ciffer på samme måde.
6. Når Print vises, skal du trykke på OK.
Hvis du indtaster en forkert adgangskode, vises Invalid Password.
Indtast den korrekte adgangskode.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede antal kopier vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
8. Tryk på OK. Udskrivningen starter.
Sletning af et lagret job
Du kan slette job, der i øjeblikket er gemt på harddisken.
1 Dæksel til
kontrolkortInstallation af tilbehør | 89
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Job Manage.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Store Job vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede brugernavn og filnavn
vises, og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Hvis den valgte fil er et fortroligt udskriftsjob, skal du indtaste den
angivne firecifrede adgangskode.
Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at indtaste det første ciffer, og tryk
derefter på OK. Markøren flytter automatisk til pladsen for næste
ciffer. Indtast andet, tredje og fjerde ciffer på samme måde.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Delete vises, og tryk på OK.
Hvis du indtaster en forkert adgangskode, vises Invalid Password.
Indtast den korrekte adgangskode.
7. Når Yes vises, skal du trykke på OK.
Styring af køen over aktive job
Alle udskrivningsjob, der venter på at blive udskrevet, optræder på listen
Aktiv jobkø, i den rækkefølge som du har sendt dem til printeren. Du kan
slette et job fra køen, før det udskrives, eller rykke et job op, så det
udskrives tidligere.
Sådan slettes en fil fra jobkøen:
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Job Manage.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Active Job vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede brugernavn og filnavn vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Hvis den valgte fil er et fortroligt udskriftsjob, skal du indtaste den
angivne firecifrede adgangskode.
Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at indtaste det første ciffer, og tryk
derefter på OK. Markøren flytter automatisk til pladsen for næste
ciffer. Indtast andet, tredje og fjerde ciffer på samme måde.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Cancel vises, og tryk på OK.
Hvis du indtaster en forkert adgangskode, vises Invalid Password.
Indtast den korrekte adgangskode.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Yes vises, og tryk på OK.
Sådan rykkes en fil op i jobkøen:
Du kan vælge et job, der venter i køen over aktive job, og ændre dets
udskrivningsrækkefølge, så det udskrives tidligere.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Job Manage.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Active Job vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede brugernavn og filnavn
vises, og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Hvis den valgte fil er et fortroligt udskriftsjob, skal du indtaste den
angivne firecifrede adgangskode.
Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at indtaste det første ciffer, og tryk
derefter på OK. Markøren flytter automatisk til pladsen for næste
ciffer. Indtast andet, tredje og fjerde ciffer på samme måde.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Promote vises, og tryk på OK.
Hvis du indtaster en forkert adgangskode, vises Invalid Password.
Indtast den korrekte adgangskode.
Sådan udskrives en fil med det samme:
Du kan udskrive et job, som er planlagt til at blive udskrevet på et bestemt
tidspunkt, med det samme. Det aktuelle udskrivningsjob bliver stoppet,
og det valgte job bliver udskrevet. Denne funktion er tilgængelig, hvis
jobbet er planlagt til at blive udskrevet senere.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Job Manage.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Active Job vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede brugernavn og filnavn
vises, og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Hvis den valgte fil er et fortroligt udskriftsjob, skal du indtaste den
angivne firecifrede adgangskode.
Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at indtaste det første ciffer, og tryk derefter
på OK. Markøren flytter automatisk til pladsen for næste ciffer.
Indtast andet, tredje og fjerde ciffer på samme måde.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Release vises, og tryk på OK.
Denne valgmulighed vises kun, hvis du vælger et Delayudskrivningsjob. Se side 88.
Hvis du indtaster en forkert adgangskode, vises Invalid Password.
Indtast den korrekte adgangskode.
Udskrivning ved brug af formularfilerne
Du kan gemme op til 10 formularfiler på harddisken og udskrive dem
sammen med et dokument.
Du skal først oprette en formularfil ved hjælp af printerdriveren.
Se Software section.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Form Menu vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede formular vises, og tryk på OK.
• Off: Udskriver i normaltilstand.
• Single Form: Udskriver alle sider ved hjælp af den første formular.
• Double Form: Udskriver forsiden ved hjælp af den første
formular og udskriver bagsiden hjælp af den anden formular.
4. Tryk på Tilbage ( ) for at vende tilbage til det øverste niveau i
menuen.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Select Form vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på OK, når 1st Form vises.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede formularfil vises,
og tryk på OK.
Hvis du vælger Double Form, skal du fortsætte til næste trin.
8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil 2nd Form vises, og tryk på OK.
9. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil formularfilen for den anden formular
vises, og tryk på OK.
Filpolitik
Du kan vælge en politik for generering af filnavne, inden du fortsætter med
jobbet via harddisken. Hvis hukommelsen på harddisken allerede har det
samme navn, kan du omdøbe eller overskrive den, når du indtaster et nyt
filnavn.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil System Setup vises på nederste linje på
skærmen, og tryk derefter på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil Job Manage vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil File Policy vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil den ønskede jobindstilling vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
• Rename: Hvis hukommelsen på harddisken allerede har det
samme navn, når du indtaster et nyt filnavn, gemmes filen med et 90 | Installation af tilbehør
andet navn, som programmeres automatisk.
• Overwrite: Du kan indstille maskinen til at slette de forrige
joboplysninger på harddisken, når du gemmer nye joboplysninger.
5. Tryk på OK.
Sletter resterende billeddata
ImageOverwrite er en sikkerhedsfunktion for kunder, der er bekymrede
over uautoriseret adgang og kopiering af fortrolige eller private dokumenter.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil System Setup vises på nederste linje på
skærmen, og tryk derefter på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil ImageOverwrite vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil den ønskede jobindstilling vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
• Immediate: Alle resterende billeddata fra maskinen slettes med det
samme, når et job er blevet behandlet.
• On Demand: Denne funktion gør det muligt for en
systemadministrator at slette alle ægte billeddata på harddisken
efter behov, når funktionen er aktiveret. Alle eksisterende jobs
slettes uanset deres status, og det vil ikke være muligt at sende flere
jobs, mens overskrivningen foregår.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast for at flytte til On eller Off for
Immediate.
Tryk på venstre/højre piletast for at flytte til Enable eller Disable for
On Demand.
5. Tryk på OK.
Hvis du har aktiveret On Demand, bekræfter maskinen, når
overskrivningen begynder. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast for at
vælge Yes eller No. Hvis du vælger Yes, On Demand begynder
overskrivningen, så snart du vælger Yes. Hvis du vælger No, er
denne funktion aktiveret.Specifikationer | 91
specifikationer
Dette kapitel giver dig oplysninger om maskinens specifikationer, f.eks. forskellige funktioner.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Generelle specifikationer
• Printerspecifikationer
• Specifikationer for scanner
• Specifikationer for kopimaskine
• Specifikationer for fax
GENERELLE SPECIFIKATIONER
PRINTERSPECIFIKATIONER
Symbolet * angiver en valgfri funktion afhængigt af maskinen.
PUNKT BESKRIVELSE
DADF’ens
kapacitet
Op til 50 ark (75 g/m2
kontraktpapir)
Dokumentstørrelse for
DADF
Bredde: 148 til 216 mm
Længde: 148 til 356 mm
Kapacitet for
papirbakke
• Bakke: 250 sider almindeligt papir
(75 g/m2
kontraktpapir)
• Universalbakke: 100 sider almindeligt papir
(75 g/m2
kontraktpapir)
• Valgfri bakke: 500 sider almindeligt papir
(75 g/m2
kontraktpapir)
Hvis du vil have yderligere oplysninger
om papirkapaciteten, kan du se side 26.
Udskriftskapacitet
Udskriftsside nedad: 170 arks 75 g/m2
kontraktpapir
Nominel effekt 110 - 127 V vekselstrøm eller 220 - 240 V vekselstrøm.
Se etiketten på maskinen for at få oplysninger om den
korrekte spænding, frekvens (hertz) og strømtype.
Strømforbrug • Gennemsnitlig betjeningstilstand: Mindre end 580 W
• Klar-tilstand: Mindre end 82 W
• Strømsparetilstand: Mindre end 18 W
• Slukket-tilstand: 0 W
Støjniveau
a
• Klar-tilstand: Mindre end 32 dBA
• Udskrivningstilstand: Mindre end 53 dBA
• Kopieringstilstand: Mindre end 54 dBA
Standardtidsrum fra strømsparetilstand
til klartilstand
20 minutter
Opstarttijd • Mindre end 49 sekunder
De opstarttijd zal langer zijn naarmate er meer gegevens
op de harde schijf staan
Driftsmiljø Temperatur: 15 til 32,5 °C
Fugtighed: 20 til 80 % relativ luftfugtighed
Display 16 tegn x 2 linjer
Levetid for
tonerpatron
b
Sort Gennemsnitlig ydelse ved kontinuert
brug for sort tonerpatron: 5.500
standardsider (Leveres med en 2.500
siders starttonerpatron).
Farve
(Gul/magenta/
cyan)
Gennemsnitlig ydelse ved kontinuert
brug for farve tonerpatron: 5.000
standardsider (Leveres med en 2.000
siders starttonerpatron).
Papiroverførselsbælte
Ca. 50.000 sider (A4, Letter)
Hukommelse
(kan udvides)*
128 MB (maks. 384 MB)
Eksterne mål
(B x D x H)
468 x 498 x 651 mm
uden valgfri bakke
Vægt
(inklusive
forbrugsstoffer)
36 kg
Emballagens
vægt
Papir: 5,8 kg
Plastik: 1,8 kg
Driftscyklus Op til 65.000 sider
Fikseringstemperatur
180 °C
a. Lydtryksniveau, ISO 7779.
b. Deklareret ydelse i henhold til ISO/IEC 19798. Antallet af sider kan
påvirkes af driftsmiljø, udskrivningsinterval, medietype og -størrelse.
PUNKT BESKRIVELSE
Udskrivningsmetode
Udskrivning med farvelaserstråle
Udskrivningshastighed
a
Op til 20 sider pr. minut (A4), 21 sider pr. minut
(Letter)
Hastighed ved
duplexudskrivning
Op til 7 tryk pr. minut (A4, Letter)
PUNKT BESKRIVELSE92 | Specifikationer
SPECIFIKATIONER FOR SCANNER
SPECIFIKATIONER FOR KOPIMASKINE
Tid for første
udskrift
Sort-hvid
Fra Klar: Mindre end 25 sekunder
Fra koldstart: Mindre end 75 sekunder
Farve
Fra Klar: Mindre end 25 sekunder
Fra koldstart: Mindre end 75 sekunder
Udskriftsopløsning
Højst 2.400 x 600 dpi effektivt output
Printersprog SPL, PostScript 3, PCL5ce, PCL6
Kompatibilitet med
operativsystemer
b
• Windows: 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista
• Linux: RedHat 8.0 ~ 9.0, Mandrake 9.2 ~ 10.1,
SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2 og Fedora Core 1 ~ 4
• Macintosh: Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5 og Universal Mac
Interface USB 2.0 med høj hastighed
Ethernet 10/100 Base TX (integreret type)
a. Denne afhænger af det anvendte operativsystem, computerens
ydeevne, program, tilslutningsmetode, medietype, mediestørrelse og
jobkompleksitet.
b. Besøg www.dell.com, hvor du kan hente de seneste programversioner.
PUNKT BESKRIVELSE
Kompatibilitet TWAIN-standard/WIA-standard
Scanningsmetode Farve CCD
Opløsning
a
a. På grund af scanningsprogrammerne kan den maksimale opløsning
variere.
TWAINstandard/WIAstandard
• Optisk: 600 x 1.200 dpi
• Forbedret: 4.800 x 4.800 dpi
Scan til USB 100, 200, 300 dpi
Scan til e-mail 100, 200, 300 dpi
Scan til PC 75, 150, 200, 300, 600 dpi
Netværksscannin
gsfilformat
PDF, TIFF, JPEG
b
, BMP
b.JPEG er ikke tilgængelig, når du vælger mono-tilstand for
scanningsfarve.
Effektiv
scanningslængde
• Scannerglasplade: 289 mm
• DADF: 348 mm
Effektiv
scanningsbredde
Maks. 208 mm
Farvebitdybde • Internt: 36 bit
• Eksternt: 24 bit
Monobitdybde • 1 bit i sort/hvid-tilstand
• 8 bit i gråtoneskala
PUNKT BESKRIVELSE
PUNKT BESKRIVELSE
Kopieringshastighed
a
a. Kopieringshastigheden er baseret på ét dokument flere kopier.
Op til 20 kopier pr. minut i A4, 21 kopier pr. minut i
Letter
Kopieringsopløsning
Tekst • DADF: Op til 600 x 600 dpi
• Scannerglasplade: Op til 600 x
600 dpi
Tekst/Foto Op til 600 x 600 dpi
Magasin Op til 600 x 600 dpi
Foto • DADF: Op til 600 x 600 dpi
• Scannerglasplade: Op til 1.200 x
1.200 dpi
Zoomområde • DADP: 25 til 100 %
• Scannerglasplade: 25 til 400 %Specifikationer | 93
SPECIFIKATIONER FOR FAX
PUNKT BESKRIVELSE
Kompatibilitet ITU-T G3
Anvendelig linje PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) eller
bag PABX
Datakodning MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG
Modemhastighed 33,6 Kbps
Overførselshastighed
Op til 3 sekunder/side
a
a. Standardopløsning, MMR (JBIG), maksimal modemhastighed, fase
”C” med ITU-T nr.1-diagram, overførsel fra hukommelse, ECM.
Maksimal
dokumentlængde
356 mm
Opløsning Farve 200 x 200 dpi
Sort • Standard: 203 x 98 dpi
• Fin: 203 x 196 dpi
• Superfin: 300 x 300 dpi (kun
modtagelse)
Hukommelse 4 MB (Ca. 200 sider)
Halvtone 256 niveauer94 | pendiks
Pendiks
DELLS POLITIK FOR TEKNISK SUPPORT
Teknisk support med teknikerassistance forudsætter kundens samarbejde og deltagelse i fejlfindingsprocessen og omfatter gendannelse af operativsystemet samt
programmer og hardwaredrivere til den oprindelige standardkonfiguration, der blev leveret af Dell, samt verificering af, at printeren og al hardware, som er
installeret af Dell, fungerer korrekt. Ud over denne tekniske support med teknikerassistance er der mulighed for teknisk onlinesupport fra Dell Support. Der kan
muligvis købes yderligere tekniske supportløsninger.
Dell yder begrænset teknisk support til printeren samt eventuelle programmer og eksterne enheder, der er installeret af Dell. Support til programmer og eksterne
enheder fra tredjepart ydes af producenten, herunder programmer og eksterne enheder købt og/eller installeret via Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare
og Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
KONTAKT TIL DELL
Du kan få adgang til Dell Support på support.dell.com. Vælg din region på siden WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT, og angiv de ønskede oplysninger for at åbne
hjælpeværktøjer og oplysninger.
Du kan kontakte Dell elektronisk på følgende adresser:
• Internettet
www.dell.com/
www.dell.com/ap/ (kun lande i Asien/Stillehavsområdet)
www.dell.com/jp/ (kun Japan)
www.euro.dell.com (kun Europa)
www.dell.com/la/ (Latinamerika og Caribien)
www.dell.ca (kun Canada)
• Anonym FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
ftp.dell.com
Log på som bruger: anonym, og brug din e-mail-adresse som adgangskode.
• Elektronisk supportservice
mobile_support@us.dell.com
support@us.dell.com
la-techsupport@dell.com (kun Latinamerika og Caribien)
apsupport@dell.com (kun lande i Asien/Stillehavsområdet)
support.jp.dell.com (kun Japan)
support.euro.dell.com (kun Europa)
• Elektronisk tilbudsservice
apmarketing@dell.com (kun lande i Asien/Stillehavsområdet)
sale_canada@dell.com (kun Canada)
GARANTI- OG RETURPOLITIK
Dell Inc. (”Dell”) fremstiller hardwareprodukter af dele og komponenter, som er nye eller svarende til nye i overensstemmelse med den praksis, som er standard
inden for branchen. Se Produktinformationsguiden, hvis du vil have oplysninger om Dells garanti for din printer.Ordliste | 95
ordliste
ADF
En automatisk dokumentføder (ADF) er en mekanisme, der automatisk
indfører en papiroriginal, så maskinen kan scanne noget af papiret med
det samme.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk er en samling varemærkebeskyttede protokoller, der er
udviklet af Apple, Inc til computernetværk. Den var medtaget i den
oprindelige Macintosh (1984) og er nu forladt af Apple til fordel for
TCP/IP-netværk.
Bitdybde
En betegnelse i forbindelse med computergrafik der beskriver antallet af bit,
der bruges til at repræsentere farven af en enkelt pixel i et bitmapbillede.
En større farvedybde giver et større spektrum af klare farver. Når antallet
af bit forøges, bliver antallet af mulige farver upraktisk stort til et farveskema.
1-bits farve kaldes normalt monokromt eller sort-hvid.
BMP
Et bitmapgrafikformat, der bruges internt af Microsoft Windowsgrafikundersystemet (GDI), og som normalt bruges som et filformat
til enkle grafikfiler på denne platform.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. En netværksprotokol, som en netværksklient benytter
til at hente en IP-adresse automatisk. Dette foregår normalt i bootstrapprocessen for en computer eller det operativsystem, der kører på den.
BOOTP-serverne tildeler IP-adressen til hver klient fra en pulje med
adresser. BOOTP gør det muligt for arbejdsstationscomputere uden
harddisk at hente en IP-adresse, inden der indlæses et avanceret
operativsystem.
CCD
CCD (Charge Coupled Device) er en hardwareenhed, der gør det muligt
at foretage en scanning. CCD-låsemekanismen bruges også til at fastholde
CCD-modulet for at forhindre beskadigelse, når du flytter maskinen.
CSV
CSV (Comma Separated Value) er en type filformat. CSV bruges til
at udveksle data mellem uensartede programmer. Filformatet, som
det bruges i Microsoft Excel, er blevet en slags pseudostandard i hele
branchen, selv på ikke-Microsoft-platforme.
DADF
En automatisk duplex-dokumentføder (DADF) er en mekanisme, der
automatisk indfører og vender en papiroriginal, så maskinen kan scanne
begge sider af papiret.
Dækning
Det er et udskrivningsbegreb, der bruges i forbindelse med målingen
af tonerforbrug ved udskrivning. F.eks. betyder 5 % dækning, at der
på et stykke A4-papir er ca. 5 % billeder eller tekst. Hvis papiret eller
originalen indeholder komplicerede billeder eller en mængde tekst,
er dækningen derfor højere, og samtidig er tonerforbruget det samme
som dækningen.
DHCP
En DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) er en client-servernetværksprotokol. En DHCP-server leverer konfigurationsparametre
specifikt til den anmodende DHCP-klientvært, generelt oplysninger, som
klientværten behøver for til deltage på et IP-netværk. DHCP indeholder
også en mekanisme til allokering af IP-adresser for klientværter.
DIMM
DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) er et lille trykt kredsløb, der indeholder
hukommelse. DIMM gemmer alle data i maskinen, f.eks. udskriftsdata
og modtagne faxdata.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name Server) er et system, der gemmer oplysninger
i forbindelse med domænenavne i en distribueret database på netværk,
f.eks. internettet.
DPI
DPI (Dots Per Inch) er et mål for opløsning, der bruges i forbindelse
med scanning og udskrivning. Generelt resulterer et højere DPI-tal
i en højere opløsning, flere synlige detaljer i billedet og større filer.
Driftscyklus
Driftscyklus er det antal sider pr. måned, der ikke påvirker printerens
ydeevne. Generelt har printeren en levetidsbegrænsning, f.eks. antal
sider pr. år. Levetiden betyder den gennemsnitlige udskriftskapacitet,
normalt inden for garantiperioden. Hvis driftscyklussen f.eks. er 48.000
sider pr. måned, idet der regnes med 20 arbejdsdage, har en printer
en grænse på 2.400 sider om dagen.
DRPD
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection). ”Distinctive Ring” er en
tjeneste, der giver brugeren mulighed for at bruge en enkelt telefonlinje
til at besvare flere forskellige telefonnumre.
Duplex
En mekanisme, der automatisk vender et ark papir, så maskinen kan
skrive (eller scanne) begge sider af papiret. En printer med Duplex kan
udskrive dobbeltsidet.
ECM
ECM (Error Correction Mode) er en valgfri transmissionstilstand, der
er indbygget i Class 1-faxmaskiner eller faxmodemmer. Det registrerer
og korrigerer automatisk de fejl i faxtransmissionsprocessen, der nogen
gange skyldes støj på telefonlinjen.
Emulering
Emulering er en teknik, hvor én maskine opnår de samme resultater
som en anden.
En emulator duplikerer funktionerne i et system til et andet system,
så det andet system fungerer som det første system. Emulering
fokuserer på nøjagtig reproduktion af ekstern funktion i modsætning
til simulering, der handler om at en abstrakt model af systemet
simuleres, ofte under hensyn til systemets interne tilstand.
Ethernet
Ethernet er en rammebaseret computernetværksteknologi til LAN-netværk
(Local Area Network). Den fastlægger ledningsføring og signaler på det
fysiske lag samt rammeformater og protokoller på MAC-laget (Media
Access Control Layer) og dataforbindelseslaget (Data Link Layer) i OSImodellen. Ethernet er for det meste standardiseret som IEEE 802.3. Det
er blevet den mest udbredte LAN-teknologi siden 1990’erne og til i dag.
EtherTalk
En samling af protokoller, der er udviklet af Apple Computer til
computernetværk. Den var medtaget i den oprindelige Macintosh (1984)
og er nu forladt af Apple til fordel for TCP/IP-netværk.
Nedenstående ordliste hjælper dig til at få kendskab til produktet ved
at give dig en forståelse af den terminologi, der bruges sammen med
udskrivning, og som anvendes i denne brugervejledning.96 | Ordliste
FDI
FDI (Foreign Device Interface) er et kort, der er installeret inden i maskinen,
så det er muligt at anvende enheder fra tredjepart, f.eks. en møntbetjent
enhed eller en kortlæser. Med disse enheder kan maskinen bruges som
udskriftstjeneste mod betaling.
Fikseringsenhed
Den del af en laserprinter, der smelter toneren på udskriftsmediet. Den
består af en varm rulle og en backup-rulle. Når toneren er overført til
papiret, bruger fikseringsenheden varme og tryk til at sikre, at toneren
bliver på papiret permanent. Det er årsagen til, at papiret er varmt, når
det kommer ud af en laserprinter.
FTP
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) er en almindelig brugt protokol til udveksling
af filer over alle netværk, der understøtter TCP/IP-protokollen (f.eks.
internettet eller et intranet).
Gateway
En forbindelse mellem computernetværk eller mellem et computernetværk
og en telefonlinje. Den er særdeles populær, eftersom det er en computer
eller et netværk, der giver adgang til andre computere eller netværk.
Gråtoner
Toner af gråt, der repræsenterer lyse og mørke dele af et billede,
når farvebilleder konverteres til gråtoner. Farverne repræsenteres
af de forskellige toner af gråt.
Halvtone
En billedtype, der simulerer gråtoner ved at variere antallet af punkter.
Områder med megen farve består af et stort antal punkter, mens lysere
områder består af et mindre antal punkter.
Harddisk
Harddisk, der normalt kaldes et diskdrev eller en harddisk, er en permanent
lagerenhed, der lagrer digitalt kodede data på hurtigt roterende plader med
magnetiske overflader.
IEEE
IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) er en international
nonprofit, faglig organisation til udbredelse af teknologi med forbindelse
til elektricitet.
IEEE 1284
Standarden for 1284-parallelporten blev udviklet af IEEE (Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers). Betegnelsen ”1284-B” refererer til
en specifik konnektortype i enden af det parallelkabel, der sluttes til ydre
enheder (f.eks. en printer).
Intranet
Et privat netværk, der benytter internetprotokollerne, netværksforbindelser
og muligvis det offentlige telekommunikationssystem til sikkert at dele
en del af en organisations oplysninger eller drift med medarbejderne.
Begrebet henviser undertiden kun til den mest synlige tjeneste, som
er det interne websted.
IP-adresse
En IP-adresse (Internet Protocol-adresse) er et entydigt tal, som enheder
benytter til at identificere og kommunikere med hinanden på et netværk
ved hjælp af IP-standarden (Internet Protocol).
IPM
IPM (Images Per Minute) er en metode til måling af en printers hastighed.
En IPM-hastighed viser, hvor mange enkeltsidede ark en printer kan
producere i løbet af et minut.
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) definerer en standardprotokol for udskrivning
samt styring af udskriftsjob, mediestørrelser, opløsning osv. IPP kan
bruges lokalt eller over internettet til hundredvis af printere og understøtter
også adgangskontrol, godkendelse og kryptering, hvilket gør det til en meget
mere omfattende og sikker udskrivningsløsning eller ældre løsninger.
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX står for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange.
Det er en netværksprotokol, der bruger af Novell NetWareoperativsystemerne. IPX og SPX sørger begge for forbindelsestjenester,
der svarer til TCP/IP, hvor IPX-protokollen ligner IP, og SPX ligner TCP.
IPX/SPX blev primært udviklet til lokale netværk (LAN), og det er en meget
effektiv protokol til dette formål (typisk har den en bedre ydeevne end
TCP/IP på et LAN).
ISO
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) er en international
organisation for fastlæggelse af standarder, der er sammensat
af repræsentanter fra de nationale standardiseringsorganisationer.
Den udarbejder globale industrielle og kommercielle standarder.
ITU-T
ITU (International Telecommunication Union) er en international
organisation, der er etableret for at standardisere og regulere den
internationale radio- og telekommunikation. Dens hovedopgaver
omfatter standardisering, allokering af radiospektrum og organisering
af forbindelsesaftaler mellem forskellige lande for at tillade internationale
telefonopkald. Et -T uden for ITU-T betyder telekommunikation.
ITU-T No. 1-ark
Et standardiseret testark, der er udgivet af ITU-T til faxtransmissioner
af dokumenter.
JBIG
JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group) er en standard for
billedkomprimering uden tab af nøjagtighed eller kvalitet, der
er beregnet til komprimering af binære billeder, specielt til faxe,
men den kan også bruges til andre billeder.
JPEG
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) er den mest almindelig brugte
standardmetode til komprimering af fotografiske billeder med tab af kvalitet.
Det er det format, der bruges til lagring og transmission af fotografier
på internettet.
Kontrolpanel
Et kontrolpanel er et fladt, typisk lodret område, hvor der er placeret
knapper eller overvågningsinstrumenter. De findes typisk foran på maskinen.
LDAP
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) er en netværksprotokol til
forespørgsel på og redigering af katalogtjenester, der kører via TCP/IP.
LED
En lysdiode (LED) er en halvlederenhed, der viser maskinens status.
MAC-adresse
MAC (Media Access Control)-adressen er et entydigt id, der er knyttet
til et netværkskort. MAC-adressen er et entydigt 48-bit id, der
normalt skrives som 12 hexadecimale tegn, der er grupperet i par
(f.eks. 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). Denne adresse er normalt hardcoded
i et netværkskort (NIC) af fabrikanten, og den bruges som en hjælp
for routere, der prøver at lokalisere lokale maskiner i store netværk.Ordliste | 97
Matrixprinter
En matrixprinter refererer til en type computerprinter med et printhoved,
der kører frem og tilbage på siden og skriver med anslag ved at slå et
tekstilfarvebånd mod papiret, meget lig en skrivemaskine.
MFP
MFP (Multi Function Peripheral) er en kontormaskine, der omfatter
følgende funktionalitet i én fysisk ramme, f.eks. en printer, en kopimaskine,
en fax, en scanner osv.
MH
MH (Modified Huffman) er en kompressionsmetode til nedsættelse
af mængden af data, der skal transmitteres mellem faxmaskiner for
at overføre det billede, der anbefales i ITU-T T.4. MH er et kodebogsbaseret
RLE-skema, der er optimeret til en effektiv komprimering af blanke
områder. Da de fleste faxer mest består af blanke områder, minimerer
dette transmissionstiden for de fleste faxer.
MMR
MMR (Modified Modified READ) er en komprimeringsmetode,
der er anbefalet i ITU-T T.6.
Modem
En enhed, der modulerer et bærebølgesignal til at kode digitale oplysninger,
og som også demodulerer bærebølgesignalet for at afkode de
transmitterede oplysninger.
MR
MR (Modified Read) er en kompressionsmetode, der anbefales i ITU-T T.4.
MR koder den første scannede linje ved hjælp af MH. Den næste linje
sammenlignes med den første, forskellene bestemmes, og derefter
kodes forskellene og sendes.
NetWare
Et netværksoperativsystem, der er udviklet af Novell, Inc. Det brugte
oprindeligt kooperativ multitasking til at køre forskellige tjenester på en
pc, og netværksprotokollerne var baseret på den oprindelige Xerox
XNS-stak. I dag understøtter NetWare TCP/IP og IPX/SPX.
OPC
OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) er en mekanisme, der fremstiller et virtuelt
billede til udskrivning ved hjælp af en laserstråle fra en laserprinter. Den
er normalt grønlig eller grålig og cylinderformet.
Fremkaldelsesdelen af en tromle slides langsomt væk, når printeren bruges,
og den skal udskiftes med passende mellemrum, da den ridses af støvet
i papiret.
Opløsning
Et billedes skarphed målt i punkter pr. tommer (DPI). Jo højere dpi-tal,
jo højere opløsning.
Originaler
Det første eksemplar af noget, f.eks. et dokument, et fotografi eller en tekst
osv., der kopieres, reproduceres eller oversættes for at producere andre
eksemplarer, men som ikke selv er kopieret eller uddraget fra noget andet.
OSI
OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) er en model, der er udviklet af ISO
(International Organization for Standardization) til kommunikation. OSI
giver en standardiseret, modulær indgang til netværksdesign, der opdeler
det nødvendige sæt af komplekse funktioner i håndterbare, selvstændige
funktionelle lag. Lagene er fra top til bund: program, præsentation, session,
transport, netværk, dataforbindelse og fysisk lag.
PABX
En privat automatisk omstilling (PABX) er et automatisk
telefonomstillingsanlæg i en privat virksomhed.
PCL
PCL (Printer Command Language) er et PDL (Page Description
Language - sidebeskrivelsessprog), der er udviklet af HP som en
printerprotokol og er blevet en branchestandard. PCL blev oprindeligt
udviklet til de tidlige inkjet-printere og er siden udgivet i forskellige udgaver
til termo-, matrix- og sideprintere.
PDF
PDF (Portable Document Format) er et varemærkebeskyttet filformat,
der er udviklet af Adobe Systems, til repræsentation af todimensionelle
dokumenter i et format, som er uafhængigt af enheder og opløsning.
PostScript
PostScript (PS) er et sidebeskrivelsessprog og programmeringssprog,
der hovedsageligt benyttes inden for elektronik og DTP, og som udføres
i en fortolker for at producere et billede.
Printerdriver
Et program, der bruges til at sende kommandoer og overføre data
fra computeren til printeren.
PPM
PPM (Pages Per Minute - sider pr. minut) er en målemetode til bestemmelse
af, hvor hurtigt en printer arbejder, dvs. hvor mange sider den kan producere
pr. minut.
PRN-fil
En grænseflade til en enhedsdriver, der tillader softwaren at kommunikere
med enhedsdriveren ved hjælp af standardsystemkald til input/output,
hvilket forenkler mange opgaver.
Protokol
En konvention eller standard, der kontrollerer eller muliggør forbindelse,
kommunikation og dataoverførsel mellem to computere.
PS
Se PostScript.
PSTN
PSTN (Public-Switched Telephone Network - det offentlige analoge
koblede telefonnet) er det netværk, der består af verdens offentlige
analoge telefonnetværk, der normalt ledes gennem en omstilling
i virksomheder.
Sortering
Sortering er en proces, hvor et kopijob med flere kopier udskrives i sæt.
Når sortering er valgt, udskriver enheden et helt sæt, før der udskrives
yderligere kopier.
SMB
SMB (Server Message Block (SMB) er en netværksprotokol, der især
anvendes til at dele filer, printere, serielle porte og forskellige former
for kommunikation mellem noder i et netværk. Den indeholder også
en mekanisme til godkendelse af kommunikation mellem processer.
SMTP
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) er standarden for transmissionen
af e-mails over internettet. SMTP er en relativ enkel tekstbaseret
protokol, hvor en eller flere modtagere af meddelelser er angivet,
hvorefter meddelelsesteksten overføres. Det er en client-serverprotokol, hvor klienten overfører en e-mail-meddelelse til serveren.
Standard
Den værdi eller indstilling, der er i kraft, når en printer pakkes ud,
nulstilles eller initialiseres.
TCP/IP
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) og IP (Internet Protocol) er det sæt
kommunikationsprotokoller, der implementerer den protokolstak, som
internettet og de fleste kommercielle netværk kører på.98 | Ordliste
TCR
TCR (Transmission Confirmation Report) indeholder oplysninger
om hver transmission, f.eks. jobstatus, transmissionsresultat og antal
sendte sider. Rapporten kan indstilles til at blive udskrevet efter hvert job
eller kun efter mislykkede transmissioner.
TIFF
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) er et bitmapbilledformat med variabel
opløsning. TIFF beskriver billeddata, der typisk kommer fra scannere.
TIFF-billeder bruger mærker, nøgleord, der definerer egenskaberne for
det billede, der er inkluderet i filen. Dette fleksible og platformuafhængige
format kan bruges til billeder, der er fremstillet i forskellige programmer
til billedbehandling.
Tonerpatron
En slags flaske inde i en maskine, f.eks. en printer, som indeholder
toner. Toner er et pulver, der bruges i laserprintere
og fotokopieringsmaskiner, og som danner teksten og billederne på den
udskrevne papir. Toneren smeltes af varmen fra fikseringsenheden,
så den klæber til papirets fibre.
TWAIN
En branchestandard for scannere og software. Hvis der bruges
en TWAIN-kompatibel scanner sammen med et TWAIN-kompatibelt
program, kan en scanning startes fra programmet ved hjælp af en API,
der kan hente billeder, til operativsystemerne Microsoft Windows
og Apple Macintosh.
Udskriftsmedie
De medier som papir, kuverter, etiketter og transparenter, der kan bruges
i en printer, en scanner, en fax eller en kopimaskine.
UNC-sti
UNC (Uniform Naming Convention) er en standardiseret adgangsmåde
til netværksshares i Windows NT og andre Microsoft-produkter.
Formatet for en UNC-sti er:
\\\\
Undernetmaske
Undernetmasken bruges i forbindelse med netværksadressen til
at bestemme, hvilken del af adressen der er netværksadressen,
og hvilken del af adressen der er værtsadressen.
URL
URL (Uniform Resource Locator) er den globale adresse på dokumenter
og ressourcer på internettet. Den første del af adressen angiver, hvilken
protokol der skal bruges, og den anden del angiver den IP-adresse eller
det domænenavn, hvor ressourcen er placeret.
USB
USB (Universal Serial Bus) er en standard for tilslutning af ydre enheder
til computere, der blev udviklet af USB Implementers Forum, Inc.
I modsætning til den parallelle port er USB udviklet til samtidig tilslutning
af flere ydre enheder til en enkelt USB-port på computeren.
Vandmærke
Et vandmærke er et genkendeligt billede eller mønster i papiret, der
virker lysere, når det holdes op imod lyset. Vandmærker blev første
gang introduceret i Bologna, Italien i 1282. De er blevet brugt af
papirfabrikanterne til at identificere deres produkter, ligesom de også
bruges i frimærker, pengesedler og andre officielle dokumenter for at
forhindre forfalskninger.
WIA
WIA (Windows Imaging Architecture) er en billedbehandlingsarkitektur,
der oprindelig blev introduceret i Windows Me og Windows XP.
En scanning kan startes fra disse operativsystemer ved brug af en WIAkompatibel scanner.Indeks | 99
indeks
A
adressekartotek
genvejstaster 50
gruppeopkaldsnumre 51
hurtigopkaldsnumre 51
adressekartotek, bruge 41
alarmlyd 21
B
baggrundsbillede, slette 34
bakke
justere bredde og længde 28
brug af
SetIP 18
D
DADF 12
DADF, placere i 24
DADF-gummipude, udskifte 63
dato og tid, indstille 21
displaysprog, ændre 20
driver
installation 19
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection)
46
E
ekstraudstyr installere
harddisk 87
F
faxe
faxopsætning 49
flere destinationer, sende faxer til 47
modtage faxer 45
prioritetsfaxer 48
sende faxer 45
standardindstillinger, ændre 50
udskudte faxer 47
videresende faxer 48
faxhoved, indstille 44
faxnummer, indstille 44
Faxtilstand, modtagetilstand 46
forbrugsstoffer
forventet levetid for tonerpatron 59
kontrollere levetid 62
G
genkald
automatisk 45
manuelt 45
genvejstaster, indstille 50
gruppeopkaldsnumre, indstille 51
H
harddisk
bruge 88
installere 87
højttalerlyd 21
højttalerstyrke 21
hukommelse, rydde 57
hukommelsesmodul
bestille 85
installere 86
hurtigopkaldsnumre, indstille 51
I
ID Copy 13
ID-kort, speciel kopi 33
ilægge originaler
ADF 24
scannerglasplade 24
indikator
status 14
indstille
skrifttype 23
installere ekstraudstyr
harddisk 87
J
jobtimeout, indstille 22
justering
højde 20
K
kontrolpanel 13
kopiere
2-op, 4-op 34
bog 34
ID-kort-kopi 33
klone 34
margenskift 35
mørkhed 32
original type 32
plakat 34
slet kant 35
slette baggrund 34
sortering 33
standardindstilling, ændre 33
timeout, indstille 36
L
Linux-problemer 82
lyde, indstille 21
lydstyrke, justere
højttaler 21
ringer 21
M
margenskift, speciel kopifunktion 35
maskine-ID, indstille 44
modtage en fax
i Ans/Fax-tilstand 46
i Faxtilstand 46
i hukommelsen 42
i Tel-tilstand 46
i tilstanden Sikker modtagelse 47
modtage en fax i DRPD-tilstand 46
modtagetilstande 45100 | Indeks
N
netværk
opsætning 17
O
originaler
ilægge 24
stop, afhjælpe 64
P
papir
ændre størrelsen 28
afhjælpe papirstop 65
lægge i bakke 1 29
lægge i den valgfri bakke 29
lægge i universalbakken 29
papirbakke, angive
kopiere 32
papirbakke, indstille
fax 45
papirstop
afhjælpe i bakke 1 65
tip til at undgå papirstop 64
papirstop, afhjælpe
dokument 64
papirtype
indstilling 31
PostScript
problemer 81
prioriteret fax 48
problem, løse
faxe 80
kopiering 79
Linux 82
papirindføring 75
scanning 80
udskriftskvalitet 76
Windows 81
R
rapporter, udskrive 56
rengøre
indvendig 57
scannerenhed 59
udvendig 57
ringesignal 21
S
scanne
standardindstilling, ændre 40
USB-flashhukommelse 53
scannerglasplade
ilægge dokumenter 24
rengøre 59
scanning
til e-mail 39
scanning til FTP-server 40
scanning til SMB-server 40
sende en fax
automatisk 45
sende faxer til flere destinationer 47
sikker modtagetilstand 47
slet kant, speciel kopifunktion 35
slette baggrund, speciel kopi 34
sortering, speciel kopifunktion 33
specielle kopifunktioner 33
standardindstilling, ændring af 21
strømsparetilstand 22
strømsparetilstand ved scanning 22
Sv/fax-tilstand, modtagetilstand 46
T
tastelyd 21
tegn, indtaste 21
testside, udskrive 17
tidsformat 21
Tlf-tilstand, modtagetilstand 46
tonerpatron
udskifte 61
U
udskifte
DADF-gummipude 63
udskifte komponenter
tonerpatron 60
udskifte, tonerpatron 61
udskriftskvalitetsproblemer, løse 76
udskrive
rapporter 56
testside 17
USB-flashhukommelse 54
udskudt fax 47
USB-flashhukommelse
administrere 55
scanne 53
sikkerhedskopiere data 54
udskrive 54
V
valgfri bakke 62, 85
vedligeholdelse
tonerpatron 59
vedligeholdelsesdele 62
vidersendelse af faxer 48
W
Windows-problemer 81© 2009 Dell Inc. Alle rettigheder forbeholdes.
Denne brugervejledning leveres kun med til oplysningsformål. Alle oplysninger indeholdt heri kan til enhver tid ændres uden forudgående varsel.
Dell er ikke ansvarlig for skader, direkte eller indirekte, der opstår som følge af brugen af denne brugerhåndbog.
• Dell og Dell-logoet er varemærker tilhørende Dell Inc.
• PCL og PCL 6 er varemærker tilhørende Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Microsoft, Windows og Windows Vista er enten registrerede varemærker eller varemærker, der tilhører Microsoft Corporation.
• PostScript 3 er et varemærke, der tilhører Adobe System, Inc.
• UFST® og MicroType™ er registrerede varemærker, der tilhører Monotype Imaging Inc.
• TrueType, LaserWriter og Macintosh er varemærker, der tilhører Apple Computer, Inc.
• Alle andre navne på mærker eller produkter er varemærker tilhørende de respektive virksomheder og organisationer.Softwareafsnit1
SOFTWAREAFSNIT
INDHOLDSFORTEGNELSE
Kapitel 1: INSTALLATION AF PRINTERSOFTWARE UNDER WINDOWS
Installation af printersoftware ............................................................................................................................................. 4
Installation af software til lokal udskrivning ................................................................................................................. 4
Installation af software til netværksudskrivning ........................................................................................................... 6
Geninstallation af printersoftware ....................................................................................................................................... 9
Fjernelse af printersoftware ................................................................................................................................................ 9
Kapitel 2: GRUNDLÆGGENDE UDSKRIVNING
Udskrivning af et dokument .............................................................................................................................................. 10
Udskrivning til en fil (PRN) ............................................................................................................................................... 10
Printerindstillinger ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Fanen Layout ............................................................................................................................................................ 11
Fanen Papir .............................................................................................................................................................. 12
Fanen Grafik ............................................................................................................................................................. 13
Fanen Ekstra ............................................................................................................................................................ 14
Fanen Om ................................................................................................................................................................. 14
Fanen Printer ............................................................................................................................................................ 14
Brug af en foretrukken indstilling ............................................................................................................................... 14
Brug af Hjælp ............................................................................................................................................................ 15
Kapitel 3: AVANCERET UDSKRIVNING
Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir (N-op-udskrivning) ........................................................................................... 16
Udskrivning af poster ........................................................................................................................................................ 17
Udskrivning af brochurer ................................................................................................................................................. 17
Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret .............................................................................................................................. 18
Udskrivning af et formindsket eller forstørret dokument ................................................................................................... 18
Tilpasning af dokumentet til en valgt papirstørrelse ......................................................................................................... 182
Brug af vandmærker ......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Brug af et eksisterende vandmærke ......................................................................................................................... 19
Oprettelse af et vandmærke ..................................................................................................................................... 19
Redigering af et vandmærke ..................................................................................................................................... 19
Sletning af et vandmærke ......................................................................................................................................... 19
Brug af overlays ................................................................................................................................................................ 20
Hvad er et overlay? ................................................................................................................................................... 20
Oprettelse af et nyt sideoverlay ................................................................................................................................ 20
Anvendelse af sideoverlay ........................................................................................................................................ 20
Sletning af et sideoverlay .......................................................................................................................................... 20
Kapitel 4: BRUG AF WINDOWS' POSTSCRIPT-DRIVER
Printerindstillinger ............................................................................................................................................................. 21
Avanceret .................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Brug af Hjælp ............................................................................................................................................................ 21
Kapitel 5: DELING AF PRINTEREN LOKALT
Konfiguration af en værtscomputer .................................................................................................................................. 22
Konfiguration af en klientcomputer ................................................................................................................................... 22
Kapitel 6: SCANNING
SmarThru Office ............................................................................................................................................................... 23
Sådan starter du SmarThru Office ............................................................................................................................ 23
Quick Start Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 23
Brug af SmarThru Office ........................................................................................................................................... 23
Scanning med TWAIN-kompatible programmer ............................................................................................................... 24
Scanning ved brug af WIA-driveren .................................................................................................................................. 25
Windows XP .............................................................................................................................................................. 25
Windows Vista .......................................................................................................................................................... 25
Kapitel 7: BRUG AF ANDRE PROGRAMMER
Overvågning af printerstatus ............................................................................................................................................ 26
Printerindstillingsværktøj .................................................................................................................................................. 263
Dell-program til genbestilling af toner ............................................................................................................................... 27
Firmware Update Utility .................................................................................................................................................... 27
Kapitel 8: BRUG AF PRINTEREN UNDER LINUX
Introduktion ....................................................................................................................................................................... 28
Installation af Unified Linux Driver .................................................................................................................................... 28
Installation af Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................................................................ 28
Afinstallation af Unified Linux Driver ......................................................................................................................... 29
Brug af Unified Driver Configurator .................................................................................................................................. 30
Åbning af Unified Driver Configurator ....................................................................................................................... 30
Printers Configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 31
Scanners Configuration ............................................................................................................................................ 31
Ports Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 32
Konfiguration af printeregenskaber .................................................................................................................................. 32
Udskrivning af et dokument .............................................................................................................................................. 33
Udskrivning fra programmer ..................................................................................................................................... 33
Udskrivning af filer .................................................................................................................................................... 33
Scanning af et dokument .................................................................................................................................................. 34
Brug af Image Editor ................................................................................................................................................. 35
Kapitel 10: BRUG AF DIN PRINTER MED EN MACINTOSH
Installation af software til Macintosh ................................................................................................................................. 36
Afinstallation af printerdriveren ......................................................................................................................................... 36
Konfiguration af printeren ................................................................................................................................................. 37
Netværkstilsluttet ...................................................................................................................................................... 37
USB-tilsluttet Macintosh ............................................................................................................................................ 37
Udskrivning ....................................................................................................................................................................... 38
Udskrivning af et dokument ...................................................................................................................................... 38
Ændring af printerindstillinger ................................................................................................................................... 38
Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir .................................................................................................................. 39
Scanning ........................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Scanning via USB ..................................................................................................................................................... 40Installation af printersoftware under Windows
4
1 Installation af printersoftware
under Windows
Dette kapitel omfatter:
• Installation af printersoftware
• Geninstallation af printersoftware
• Fjernelse af printersoftware
Installation af printersoftware
Du kan installere printersoftwaren til lokal udskrivning eller
netværksudskrivning. Når du vil installere printersoftwaren på computeren,
skal du foretage den rette installationsprocedure afhængig af den
anvendte printer.
En printerdriver er software, der gør det muligt for computeren
at kommunikere med printeren. Den procedure, du skal bruge til at
installere drivere, kan variere afhængig af det anvendte operativsystem.
Alle programmer på pc'en bør være lukket, før du begynder installationen.
Installation af software til lokal udskrivning
En lokal printer er en printer, der er sluttet direkte til computeren ved brug
af det printerkabel, der blev leveret med printeren, f.eks. et USB-kabel
eller et parallelkabel. Hvis printeren er sluttet til et netværk, skal du ignorere
dette trin og gå til ”Installation af software til netværksudskrivning” på
side 6.
Du kan installere printersoftwaren ved brug af standard- eller
specialmetoden.
BEMÆRK! Hvis vinduet ”Guiden Ny hardware fundet” vises under
installationsproceduren, skal du klikke på i øverste højre hjørne
af vinduet for at lukke det. Ellers skal du klikke på Annuller.
Standardinstallation
Dette anbefales til de fleste brugere. Alle komponenter, der
er nødvendige af hensyn til printerens drift, installeres.
1 Sørg for, at printeren er tilsluttet computeren, og at den er tændt.
2 Indsæt den medfølgende cd-rom i cd-rom-drevet.
Cd-rom'en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et
installationsvindue.
Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start og
derefter på Kør. Skriv X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med
det bogstav, der repræsenterer dit drev, og klik på OK.
Klik på Start → Alle programmer → Tilbehør → Kør, og skriv
X:\Setup.exe, hvis du bruger Windows Vista
®
.
Hvis vinduet AutoPlay vises i Windows Vista
®
, skal du klikke på
Kør Setup.exe i feltet Installer eller kør program og klikke på
Fortsæt i vinduet Brugerkontokontrol.
3 Klik på Next.
• Hvis det er nødvendigt, skal du vælge et sprog på rullelisten.
4 Vælg Typical installation for a local printer. Klik på Next.Installation af printersoftware under Windows
5
BEMÆRK! Hvis printeren ikke allerede er tilsluttet computeren, vises
følgende vindue.
• Klik på Next, når printeren er tilsluttet.
• Hvis du ikke ønsker at tilslutte printeren lige nu, skal du klikke på Next og
No på følgende skærmbillede. Derefter startes installationen, og der
udskrives ikke nogen testside, når installationen er færdig.
• Installationsvinduet, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog, kan være
forskelligt på den printer og den brugerflade, som du anvender.
5 Når installationen er afsluttet, vises der et vindue, hvor du bliver
bedt om at udskrive en testside. Hvis du vælger at udskrive en
testside, skal du markere afkrydsningsfeltet og klikke på Next.
Ellers skal du blot klikke på Next og fortsætte til trin 7.
6 Klik på Yes, hvis testsiden udskrives korrekt.
Hvis ikke skal du klikke på No for at udskrive den igen.
7 Klik på Finish.
BEMÆRK! Hvis printerdriveren ikke fungerer korrekt, når installationen
er fuldført, skal du geninstallere printerdriveren. Se ”Geninstallation af
printersoftware” på side 9.
Specialinstallation
Du kan vælge individuelle komponenter, der skal installeres.
1 Sørg for, at printeren er tilsluttet computeren, og at den er tændt.
2 Indsæt den medfølgende cd-rom i cd-rom-drevet.
Cd-rom'en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et
installationsvindue.
Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start og
derefter på Kør. Skriv X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med
det bogstav, der repræsenterer dit drev, og klik på OK.
Klik på Start → Alle programmer → Tilbehør → Kør, og skriv
X:\Setup.exe, hvis du bruger Windows Vista
®
.
Hvis vinduet AutoPlay vises i Windows Vista
®
, skal du klikke på
Kør Setup.exe i feltet Installer eller kør program og klikke på
Fortsæt i vinduet Brugerkontokontrol.
3 Klik på Next.
• Hvis det er nødvendigt, skal du vælge et sprog på rullelisten.
4 Vælg Custom installation. Klik på Next.
5 Vælg printeren, og klik på Next.Installation af printersoftware under Windows
6
BEMÆRK! Hvis printeren ikke allerede er tilsluttet computeren, vises
følgende vindue.
• Klik på Next, når printeren er tilsluttet.
• Hvis du ikke ønsker at tilslutte printeren lige nu, skal du klikke på Next og
No på følgende skærmbillede. Derefter startes installationen, og der
udskrives ikke nogen testside, når installationen er færdig.
• Installationsvinduet, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog, kan være
forskelligt på den printer og den brugerflade, som du anvender.
6 Vælg de komponenter, der skal installeres, og klik på Next.
BEMÆRK! Du kan ændre installationsmappen ved at klikke på
[Browse].
7 Når installationen er afsluttet, vises der et vindue, hvor du bliver
bedt om at udskrive en testside. Hvis du vælger at udskrive en
testside, skal du markere afkrydsningsfeltet og klikke på Next.
Ellers skal du blot klikke på Next og fortsætte til trin 9.
8 Klik på Yes, hvis testsiden udskrives korrekt.
Hvis ikke skal du klikke på No for at udskrive den igen.
9 Klik på Finish.
Installation af software til
netværksudskrivning
Hvis du slutter printeren til et netværk, skal du først konfigurere
TCP/IP-indstillingerne for printeren. Når du har tildelt og bekræftet
TCP/IP-indstillingerne, er du klar til at installere softwaren på hver
computer på netværket.
Du kan installere printersoftwaren ved brug af standard- eller
specialmetoden.
Standardinstallation
Dette anbefales til de fleste brugere. Alle komponenter, der
er nødvendige af hensyn til printerens drift, installeres.
1 Sørg for, at printeren er tilsluttet netværket, og at den er tændt.
Yderligere oplysninger om tilslutning til netværket finder du i den
brugerhåndbog der følger med printeren.
2 Indsæt den medfølgende cd-rom i cd-rom-drevet.
Cd-rom'en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et
installationsvindue.
Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start og
derefter på Kør. Skriv X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med
det bogstav, der repræsenterer dit drev, og klik på OK.
Klik på Start → Alle programmer → Tilbehør → Kør, og skriv
X:\Setup.exe, hvis du bruger Windows Vista
®
.
Hvis vinduet AutoPlay vises i Windows Vista
®
, skal du klikke på
Kør Setup.exe i feltet Installer eller kør program og klikke på
Fortsæt i vinduet Brugerkontokontrol.
3 Klik på Next.
• Hvis det er nødvendigt, skal du vælge et sprog på rullelisten.Installation af printersoftware under Windows
7
4 Vælg Typical installation for a network printer. Klik på Next.
5 Listen over de printere, der er tilgængelige på netværket, vises.
Vælg den printer, du ønsker at installere, på listen, og klik derefter
på Next.
• Hvis printeren ikke vises på listen, kan du klikke på Update for at
opdatere listen, eller vælge Add TCP/IP Port for at tilføje
printeren til netværket. Hvis du vil tilføje printeren på netværket,
skal du angive portens navn og printerens IP- adresse.
Kontroller printerens IP-adresse eller MAC-adresse ved at
udskrive en netværkskonfigurationsside.
• Hvis du vil finde en fælles netværksprinter (UNC-stien), skal du
vælge Shared Printer [UNC] og angive delingsnavnet manuelt
eller finde en delt printer ved at klikke på knappen Browse.
BEMÆRK! Hvis du ikke kan finde din maskine på netværket, skal du
deaktivere firewallen og klikke på Update.
Hvis du har et Windows-operativsystem, skal du klikke på Start →
Kontrolpanel, starte Windows Firewall og angive denne indstilling som
uaktiveret. Hvis du bruger et andet operativsystem, skal du se dets
onlineguide.
6 Klik på Finish.
BEMÆRK! Hvis printerdriveren ikke fungerer korrekt, når installationen
er fuldført, skal du geninstallere printerdriveren. Se ”Geninstallation af
printersoftware” på side 9.
Specialinstallation
Du kan vælge, hvilke komponenter du vil installere og angive en bestemt
IP-adresse.
1 Sørg for, at printeren er tilsluttet netværket, og at den er tændt.
Yderligere oplysninger om tilslutning til netværket finder du i den
brugerhåndbog der følger med printeren.
2 Indsæt den medfølgende cd-rom i cd-rom-drevet.
Cd-rom'en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et
installationsvindue.
Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start og
derefter på Kør. Skriv X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med
det bogstav, der repræsenterer dit drev, og klik på OK.
Klik på Start → Alle programmer → Tilbehør → Kør, og skriv
X:\Setup.exe, hvis du bruger Windows Vista
®
.
Hvis vinduet AutoPlay vises i Windows Vista
®
, skal du klikke på
Kør Setup.exe i feltet Installer eller kør program og klikke på
Fortsæt i vinduet Brugerkontokontrol.
3 Klik på Next.
• Hvis det er nødvendigt, skal du vælge et sprog på rullelisten.Installation af printersoftware under Windows
8
4 Vælg Custom installation. Klik på Next.
5 Listen over de printere, der er tilgængelige på netværket, vises.
Vælg den printer, du ønsker at installere, på listen, og klik derefter
på Next.
• Hvis printeren ikke vises på listen, kan du klikke på Update for at
opdatere listen, eller vælge Add TCP/IP Port for at tilføje
printeren til netværket. Hvis du vil tilføje printeren på netværket,
skal du angive portens navn og printerens IP- adresse.
Kontroller printerens IP-adresse eller MAC-adresse ved at
udskrive en netværkskonfigurationsside.
• Hvis du vil finde en fælles netværksprinter (UNC-stien), skal du
vælge Shared Printer [UNC] og angive delingsnavnet manuelt
eller finde en delt printer ved at klikke på knappen Browse.
BEMÆRK! Hvis du ikke kan finde din maskine på netværket, skal du
deaktivere firewallen og klikke på Update.
Hvis du har et Windows-operativsystem, skal du klikke på Start →
Kontrolpanel, starte Windows Firewall og angive denne indstilling som
uaktiveret. Hvis du bruger et andet operativsystem, skal du se dets
onlineguide.
TIP! Hvis du ønsker at angive en specifik IP-adresse på en specifik
netværksprinter, skal du klikke på knappen Set IP Address.
Vinduet Indstil IP-adresse vises. Gør følgende:
a. Vælg den printer, der skal indstilles med en specifik IP-adresse,
på listen.
b. Konfigurer en IP-adresse, undernetmaske og gateway for printeren
manuelt, og klik på Configure for at angive den specifikke
IP-adresse for netværksprinteren.
c. Klik på Next.
6 Vælg de komponenter, der skal installeres. Når du har valgt
komponenterne, vises følgende vindue. Du kan også ændre
printernavnet, angive den printer, der skal deles på netværket,
angive printeren som standardprinter og skifte portnavn for hver
printer. Klik på Next.
Hvis du vil installere denne software på en server, skal du markere
afkrydsningsfeltet Setting up this printer on a server.
7 Klik på Finish.
BEMÆRK! Hvis printerdriveren ikke fungerer korrekt, når installationen
er fuldført, skal du geninstallere printerdriveren. Se ”Geninstallation af
printersoftware” på side 9.Installation af printersoftware under Windows
9
Geninstallation af printersoftware
Du kan geninstallere softwaren, hvis installationen mislykkes.
1 Start Windows.
2 Vælg Start og derefter Programs eller All Programs → navnet
på printerdriveren → Maintenance.
3 Vælg Repair, og klik på Next.
4 Listen over de printere, der er tilgængelige på netværket, vises.
Vælg den printer, du ønsker at installere, på listen, og klik derefter
på Next.
• Hvis printeren ikke vises på listen, kan du klikke på Update for at
opdatere listen, eller vælge Add TCP/IP Port for at tilføje
printeren til netværket. Hvis du vil tilføje printeren på netværket,
skal du angive portens navn og printerens IP- adresse.
• Hvis du vil finde en fælles netværksprinter (UNC-stien), skal du
vælge Shared Printer [UNC] og angive delingsnavnet manuelt
eller finde en delt printer ved at klikke på knappen Browse.
Der vises en liste over komponenter, så du kan geninstallere
elementerne individuelt.
BEMÆRK! Hvis printeren ikke allerede er tilsluttet computeren, vises
følgende vindue.
• Klik på Next, når printeren er tilsluttet.
• Hvis du ikke ønsker at tilslutte printeren lige nu, skal du klikke
på Next og No på følgende skærmbillede. Derefter startes
installationen, og der udskrives ikke en testside, når installationen
er færdig.
• Geninstallationsvinduet, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog,
kan være anderledes på den printer og den brugerflade, som
du anvender.
5 Marker de komponenter, du vil geninstallere, og klik på Next.
Hvis du installerede printersoftwaren til lokal udskrivning, og du
vælger printerdrivernavnet, vises der et vindue, hvor du bliver
spurgt, om du ønsker at udskrive en testside. Gør følgende:
a. Hvis du vil udskrive en testside, skal du markere
afkrydsningsfeltet og klikke på Next.
b. Hvis testsiden udskrives korrekt, skal du klikke på Yes.
Hvis den ikke gør, skal du klikke på No for at udskrive
den igen.
6 Klik på Finish, når geninstallationen er udført.
Fjernelse af printersoftware
1 Start Windows.
2 Vælg Start og derefter Programs eller All Programs → navnet
på printerdriveren → Maintenance.
3 Vælg Remove, og klik på Next.
Der vises en liste over komponenter, så du kan fjerne elementerne
individuelt.
4 Marker de komponenter, du vil fjerne, og klik derefter på Next.
5 Klik på Yes, når du bliver bedt om at bekræfte markeringerne.
Den markerede driver og alle dens komponenter fjernes fra
computeren.
6 Klik på Finish, når softwaren er fjernet.Grundlæggende udskrivning
10
2 Grundlæggende
udskrivning
I dette kapitel forklares printerens funktioner og almindelige
udskrivningsfunktioner i Windows.
Dette kapitel omfatter:
• Udskrivning af et dokument
• Udskrivning til en fil (PRN)
• Printerindstillinger
- Fanen Layout
- Fanen Papir
- Fanen Grafik
- Fanen Ekstra
- Fanen Om
- Fanen Printer
- Brug af en foretrukken indstilling
- Brug af Hjælp
Udskrivning af et dokument
BEMÆRK:
• Printerdrivervinduet Egenskaber, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog,
kan være anderledes på den printer, som du anvender. Men
sammensætningen af vinduet med printeregenskaber er ens.
• Kontroller, at operativsystemet/-systemerne er kompatible
med printeren. Se i afsnittet Operativsystem - Kompatibilitet
i printerspecifikationerne i brugerhåndbogen til printeren.
• Hvis du har brug for at kende det nøjagtige navn på printeren,
kan du se på den medfølgende cd-rom.
• Når du vælger en indstilling under printerindstillinger, vises der
muligvis et udråbstegn eller et mærke af typen . Et
udråbstegn angiver, at du har adgang til at vælge den pågældende
indstilling, men at dette frarådes, mens et mærke af typen
angiver, at det ikke er muligt at vælge den pågældende indstilling på
grund af maskinens konfiguration eller driftsmiljø.
Den følgende procedure demonstrerer den generelle fremgangsmåde,
du skal benytte, når du vil udskrive fra forskellige Windows-programmer.
De præcise trin, du skal følge, når du udskriver et dokument, kan
afhænge af, hvilket program du benytter. Se i brugerhåndbogen til
softwaren for at finde den nøjagtige udskrivningsprocedure.
1 Åbn det dokument, du vil udskrive.
2 Vælg Udskriv i menuen Filer. Vinduet Udskriv vises. Udseendet
kan variere en smule afhængig af programmet.
De grundlæggende indstillinger for udskrivning vælges i
dialogboksen Udskriv. Disse indstillinger omfatter antallet
af kopier og udskriftsområde.
3 Marker din printerdriver på rullelisten Navn.
4 Hvis du vil udnytte udskriftsfunktionerne i printerdriveren, skal
du klikke på Egenskaber eller Indstillinger i programvinduet
Udskriv. Se ”Printerindstillinger” på side 11, hvis du ønsker
yderligere oplysninger.
Hvis der i stedet for vises Konfiguration, Printer eller
Indstillinger i vinduet Udskriv, skal du klikke på det. Klik derefter
på Egenskaber på det næste skærmbillede.
5 Klik på OK for at lukke vinduet med printeregenskaber.
6 Begynd udskriftsjobbet ved at klikke på OK eller Udskriv i vinduet
Udskriv.
Udskrivning til en fil (PRN)
Undertiden vil du have brug for at gemme udskriftsdata som en fil til et
bestemt formål.
Sådan opretter du en fil:
1 Marker feltet Skriv til fil i vinduet Udskriv.
2 Klik på Udskriv.
3 Indtast mappenavnet, giv filen et navn, og klik derefter på OK.
Kontroller, at din printer
er markeret.Grundlæggende udskrivning
11
Printerindstillinger
Du kan bruge vinduet med printeregenskaber til at få adgang til
alle de oplysninger, du har brug for vedrørende din printer. Når
printeregenskaberne vises, kan du gennemse og redigere de viste
indstillinger, så de svarer til dine aktuelle behov.
Dit printeregenskabsvindue kan være anderledes, afhængig af dit
operativsystem. Denne brugerhåndbog til software viser vinduet
Egenskaber, som det ser ud i Windows XP.
Printerdrivervinduet Egenskaber, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog,
kan være anderledes på den printer, som du anvender.
Hvis du får adgang til printergenskaberne via mappen Printere, kan du
få vist yderligere Windows-baserede faner (se i brugerhåndbogen til
Windows) og fanen Printer (se ”Fanen Printer” på side 14).
BEMÆRKNINGER:
• De fleste Windows-programmer overskriver de indstillinger,
du angiver i printerdriveren. Rediger alle de tilgængelige
printerindstillinger i programmet først, og rediger derefter
de resterende indstillinger i printerdriveren.
• De ændringer, du foretager, forbliver kun aktive, mens
du bruger det aktuelle program. Hvis du vil gøre disse
ændringer permanente, skal du foretage dem i mappen Printere.
• Følgende procedure gælder for Windows XP. Hvis du bruger andre
Windows-operativsystemer, henvises du til den tilhørende Windowsbrugerhåndbog eller online Hjælp.
1. Klik på knappen Start i Windows.
2. Vælg Printere og faxenheder.
3. Marker printerdriverikonet.
4. Højreklik på printerdriverikonet, og vælg
Udskriftsindstillinger.
5. Rediger indstillingerne på hver fane, og klik på OK.
Fanen Layout
Fanen Layout indeholder indstillinger, hvor du kan justere, hvordan
dokumentet skal se ud på den udskrevne side. Layout Options omfatter
Multiple Pages per Side og Poster Printing. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om,
hvordan du får adgang til printeregenskaberne.
Paper Orientation
Paper Orientation bestemmer, i hvilken retning oplysningerne udskrives
på en side.
• Portrait udskriver på tværs af sidebredden som i et brev.
• Landscape udskriver på tværs af sidelængden som på et regneark.
• Rotate giver dig mulighed for at rotere siden det valgte antal grader.
Layout Options
Layout Options giver dig mulighed for at vælge avancerede
udskriftsindstillinger. Du kan vælge Multiple Pages per Side og Poster
Printing.
• Se ”Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir (N-op-udskrivning)” på side 16,
hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger.
• Se ”Udskrivning af poster” på side 17, hvis du ønsker yderligere
oplysninger.
• Se ”Udskrivning af brochurer” på side 17, hvis du ønsker yderligere
oplysninger.
Double-sided Printing
Double-sided Printing giver dig mulighed for at udskrive på begge sider af
papiret. Hvis denne indstilling ikke vises, har din printer
ikke denne funktion.
• Se ”Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret” på side 18, hvis du ønsker
yderligere oplysninger.
Stående LiggendeGrundlæggende udskrivning
12
Fanen Papir
Brug følgende indstillinger til at angive de grundlæggende
papirhåndteringsspecifikationer, når du har åbnet vinduet med
printeregenskaber. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10,
hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du får adgang
til printeregenskaberne.
Klik på fanen Paper for at få adgang til forskellige papiregenskaber.
Copies
Copies giver dig mulighed for at vælge det antal kopier, der skal udskrives.
Du kan angive fra 1 til 999 kopier.
Paper Options
Size
Size giver dig mulighed for at angive størrelsen på det papir, du har lagt i
bakken.
Hvis den pågældende størrelse ikke findes på listen Size, kan du klikke på
Custom. Når vinduet Custom Paper Setting vises, kan du angive
papirstørrelsen og klikke på OK. Indstillingen vises nu på listen, så du kan
vælge den.
Source
Sørg for, at Source er angivet til den tilsvarende papirbakke.
Brug Multi-Purpose Tray, når du udskriver på specielle materialer som
konvolutter og transparenter. Du skal lægge et ark i den manuelle bakke
eller flerfunktionsbakken ad gangen.
Hvis papirkilden er indstillet til Auto Selection, henter printeren automatisk
udskriftsmateriale i følgende rækkefølge: Den manuelle bakke eller
flerfunktionsbakken, bakke 1, ekstrabakke 2.
Type
Indstil Type, så det svarer til papiret i bakken, hvorfra du vil udskrive. På
den måde får du den bedste udskrift. Hvis ikke, svarer udskriftskvaliteten
muligvis ikke til det, der ønskes.
Thin Paper: 90~105 g/m2
tykt papir.
Thick Paper: 60~70 g/m2
tyndt papir.
Bond Paper: Vælg denne indstilling, når du bruger kontraktpapir.
Cotton Paper: 75~90 g/m2
bomuldspapir, f.eks. Gilbert 25 % og Gilbert
100 %.
Archive Paper: Vælg denne indstilling, hvis du har brug for at opbevare
udskrifter i en længere periode, f.eks. i et arkiv..
Plain Paper: Normalt almindeligt papir. Vælg denne type, hvis printeren er
monokrom og udskriver på 60 g/m2
bomuldspapir.
Recycled Paper: 75~90 g/m2
genbrugspapir.
Color Paper: 75~90 g/m2
papir med farvet baggrund.
First Page
Denne egenskab giver dig mulighed for at udskrive den første side på en
anden type papir end resten af dokumentet. Du kan vælge papirkilden for
den første side.
Ilæg f.eks. tykt karton til den første side i flerfunktionsbakken og almindeligt
papir i bakke1. Vælg derefter Tray1 under Source og Multi-Purpose Tray
under First Page. Hvis denne indstilling ikke vises, har din
printer ikke denne funktion.
Scaling Printing
Scaling Printing giver dig mulighed for automatisk eller manuelt
at skalere udskriftsjobbet på en side. Du kan vælge mellem None, Reduce/
Enlarge og Fit to Page.
• Se ”Udskrivning af et formindsket eller forstørret dokument” på side 18, hvis
du ønsker yderligere oplysninger.
• Se, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger ”Tilpasning af dokumentet til
en valgt papirstørrelse” på side 18.Grundlæggende udskrivning
13
Fanen Grafik
Du kan benytte de følgende indstillinger for grafik til at justere
udskriftskvaliteten, så den passer til dine specifikke behov. Se
”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10, hvis du ønsker yderligere
oplysninger om, hvordan du får adgang til printeregenskaberne.
Klik på fanen Graphic for at få vist de egenskaber, der vises herunder.
Quality
Hvilke opløsningsindstillinger, du kan vælge, kan variere
afhængig af printermodellen. Jo højere indstilling, desto skarpere bliver
de udskrevne tegn og den udskrevne grafik. En højere indstilling kan
forlænge den tid, det tager at udskrive et dokument.
Color Mode
Du kan vælge farveindstillinger. Indstillingen Color giver typisk den bedste
udskriftskvalitet til farvedokumenter. Vælg Grayscale, hvis du vil udskrive
et farvedokument i gråtoner. Hvis du vil justere farveindstillingerne manuelt,
skal du vælge Manual og klikke på knappen Color Adjust Color
Matching.
• Copies Setting : In order to use this option, first you need to set total
number of copies from Paper tab. Hvis du udskriver flere kopier, og
nogle af kopierne skal udskrives i farve, mens andre skal udskrives i
gråtoner, skal du bruge denne indstilling og vælge antallet af kopier i
gråtoner.
• Color Adjust: Du kan justere udseendet af billederne ved at ændre
indstillingerne under indstillingen Levels.
• Color Matching: Du kan få printerens udskriftsfarver til at stemme
overens med farverne på skærmen med indstillingen Settings.
Advanced Options
Du kan angive avancerede indstillinger ved at klikke på knappen
Advanced Options.
• Raster Compression: Denne indstilling fastsætter
komprimeringsniveauet for billeder ved overførsel af data fra en
computer til en printer. Hvis du sætter denne indstilling til Maksimum,
øges udskrivningshastigheden, men udskriftskvaliteten vil være lav.
Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6-
printerdriveren.
• TrueType Options: Denne indstilling bestemmer, hvad driveren
fortæller printeren om, hvordan teksten i dokumentet skal afbildes. Vælg
den indstilling, der svarer til dokumentets status. Denne indstilling er
kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6-printerdriveren.
- Download as Outline: Når denne indstilling er valgt, henter printeren
alle TrueType-skrifttyper, der bruges i dokumentet, og som ikke
allerede er gemt (resident) i printeren. Hvis skrifttyperne efter
udskrivning af et dokument ikke er udskrevet korrekt, skal du vælge
Hent som bitmap-billede og udskive dokumentet igen. Indstillingen
Hent som bitmap-billede bruges ofte ved udskrivning fra Adobeprogrammer. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger
PCL 6-printerdriveren.
- Download as Bitmap: Når denne indstilling er valgt, henter driveren
skrifttypedata som bitmapbilleder. Dokumenter med komplicerede
skrifttyper, f.eks. koreansk eller kinesisk eller visse andre skrifttyper
udskrives hurtigere med denne indstilling. Denne indstilling er kun
tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6-printerdriveren.
- Print as Graphics: Når denne indstilling er valgt henter driveren alle
TrueType-skrifttyper som grafik. Når du udskriver dokumenter
med stort indhold af grafik og relativt få TrueType-skrifttyper, kan
udskrivningshastigheden forøges, hvis denne indstilling er valgt.
Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6-
printerdriveren.
• Print all text in black: Når afkrydsningsfeltet Print all text in black
er markeret, udskrives alt tekst i dokumentet med sort, uanset hvilken
farve det vises i på skærmen.
• Print All Text To Darken: Når afkrydsningsfeltet Print All Text To
Darken er markeret, bliver al tekst i dokumentet udskrevet mørkere end i
et normalt dokument.
• Grayscale Enhancement: Tryk på fanen Smart Color. Den giver
brugerne mulighed for at bevare detaljerne i naturfotos og forbedre
kontrasten og læsbarheden af gråtonefarver i forbindelse med
udskrivning af farvedokumenter i gråtoner.
• Fine Edge: Tryk på fanen Smart Color. Den giver brugerne mulighed for
at fremhæve tekstkanter og tynde linjer for at forbedre læsbarheden og
for at ligestille hver enkelt farvekanalregistrering, når der printes i farver.
Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger SPL-printerdriveren. Grundlæggende udskrivning
14
Fanen Ekstra
Du kan vælge outputindstillinger for dokumentet. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om,
hvordan du får adgang til printeregenskaberne.
Klik på fanen Other Options for at få adgang til følgende funktion:
Watermark
Du kan oprette et baggrundstekstbillede, der skal udskrives på hver
side af dokumentet. Se ”Brug af vandmærker” på side 19, hvis du
ønsker yderligere oplysninger.
Overlay
Overlays benyttes hyppigt i stedet for fortrykte formularer og brevpapir.
Se ”Brug af overlays” på side 20, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger.
Output Options
• Print Subset: Du kan angive den rækkefølge, som siderne
skal udskrives i. Vælg udskrivningsrækkefølgen på rullelisten.
- Normal (1,2,3): Printeren udskriver alle sider fra den første til den sidste.
- Reverse All Pages (3,2,1): Printeren udskriver alle sider fra den sidste
til den første.
- Print Odd Pages: Printeren udskriver kun sider med ulige sidenumre.
- Print Even Pages: Printeren udskriver kun sider med lige sidenumre.
• Use Printer Fonts: Når Benyt skrifttyper i printeren er markeret, bruger
printeren de skrifttyper, der er gemt i dens hukommelse (residente
skrifttyper) til at udskrive dokumentet i stedet for at hente de skrifttyper,
der bruges i dokumentet. Da overførsel af skrifttyper er tidskrævende,
kan valg af denne indstilling øge udskrivningshastigheden. Hvis der
bruges printerskrifttyper, forsøger printeren at afstemme de skrifttyper,
der bruges i dokumentet, med de skrifttyper, der er gemt i dens hukommelse.
Hvis du imidlertid bruger skrifttyper i dokumentet, der er meget forskellige
fra de skrifttyper, der er residente i printeren, kan udskriften forekomme
meget forskellig fra, hvordan den ser ud på skærmen. Denne indstilling
er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6-printerdriveren.
• Save as Form for Overlay: Vælg Gem som formular til overlay for at
gemme dokumentet som en formularfil (C:\FORMOVER\*.FOM). Så snart
denne indstilling er valgt, kræver printerdriveren filnavnet og destinationsstien,
hver gang du udskriver. Hvis du ønsker at forudindstille filnavnet og
angive stien, skal du klikke på knappen i udskriftsområdet og skrive
filnavnet og angive stien. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når
du bruger PCL 6-printerdriveren.
Job type
Dialogboksen Udskriv og gem giver dig mulighed for at vælge, hvordan du
udskriver og gemmer udskriftsfilen ved brug af harddisken (ekstraudstyr).
Nogle printere understøtter ikke denne funktion.
Brug af online hjælpefilen
• Hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om Job type, skal du klikke på
i øverste højre hjørne af vinduet. Vinduet Hjælp til Job type åbnes
og giver dig mulighed for at få vist skærmhjælp til Job type.
Fanen Om
Brug fanen About til at få vist meddelelsen om ophavsret og driverens
versionsnummer. Hvis du har en internetbrowser, kan du oprette
forbindelse til internettet ved at klikke på ikonet for webstedet.
Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10, hvis du ønsker yderligere
oplysninger om, hvordan du får adgang til printeregenskaberne.
Fanen Printer
Hvis du får adgang til printeregenskaberne via mappen Printers,
kan du se fanen Printer. Du kan angive printerkonfigurationen.
Følgende procedure gælder for Windows XP. Hvis du bruger andre
Windows-operativsystemer, henvises du til den tilhørende Windowsbrugerhåndbog eller online Hjælp.
1 Klik på menuen Start i Windows.
2 Vælg Printere og faxenheder.
3 Marker printerdriverikonet.
4 Højreklik på printerdriverikonet, og vælg Egenskaber.
5 Klik på fanen Printer, og angiv indstillingerne.
Brug af en foretrukken indstilling
Indstillingen Favorites, som vises på hver af egenskabsfanerne, giver
dig mulighed for at gemme de aktuelle egenskabsindstillinger til fremtidig
brug.
Sådan gemmer du en indstilling for Favorites:
1 Rediger indstillingerne på hver fane efter behov. Grundlæggende udskrivning
15
2 Indtast et navn for indstillingen i feltet Favorites.
3 Klik på Save.
Når du gemmer Favorites, gemmes alle aktuelle driverindstillinger.
Hvis du vil bruge en gemt indstilling, skal du markere den på rullelisten
Favorites. Printeren er nu indstillet til at udskrive i overensstemmelse
med den foretrukne indstilling, du har valgt.
Hvis du vil slette en indstilling for Foretrukne, skal du markere den på
listen og klikke på Delete.
Du kan også gendanne printerdriverens standardindstillinger ved at
markere Printer Default på listen.
Brug af Hjælp
Printeren har en hjælpeskærm, der kan aktiveres ved at klikke på
knappen Help i vinduet med printeregenskaber. Disse hjælpeskærme
giver detaljerede oplysninger om de funktioner, som printerdriveren giver
adgang til.
Du kan også klikke på i øverste højre hjørne og derefter på enhver
af egenskaberne. Avanceret udskrivning
16
3 Avanceret udskrivning
I dette kapitel forklares printerens udskriftsindstillinger og avancerede
udskriftsfunktioner.
BEMÆRK:
• Printerdrivervinduet Egenskaber, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog,
kan være anderledes på den printer, som du anvender. Men
sammensætningen af vinduet med printeregenskaber er ens.
• Hvis du har brug for at kende det nøjagtige navn på printeren,
kan du se på den medfølgende cd-rom.
Dette kapitel omfatter:
• Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir (N-op-udskrivning)
• Udskrivning af poster
• Udskrivning af brochurer
• Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret
• Udskrivning af et formindsket eller forstørret dokument
• Tilpasning af dokumentet til en valgt papirstørrelse
• Brug af vandmærker
• Brug af overlays
Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark
papir (N-op-udskrivning)
Du kan vælge det antal sider du vil udskrive på et enkelt ark papir. Hvis
du vil udskrive mere end en side pr. ark, reduceres sidernes størrelse,
og de arrangeres i den rækkefølge, du angiver. Du kan udskrive op til 16
sider på et ark.
1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10.
2 Vælg fanen Layout, og vælg Multiple Pages per Side på
rullelisten Layout Type.
3 Vælg det antal sider, du vil udskrive pr. ark (1, 2, 4, 6, 9 eller 16)
på rullelisten Pages per Side.
4 Vælg siderækkefølgen på rullelisten Page Order, efter behov.
Marker Print Page Border for at udskrive en kant omkring hver
side på arket.
5 Klik på fanen Paper, og vælg papirkilde, -størrelse og -type.
6 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet.
1 2
3 4Avanceret udskrivning
17
Udskrivning af poster
Med denne funktion kan du udskrive et enkeltsidet dokument på 4, 9
eller 16 ark papir, så de bagefter kan sættes sammen til et dokument
i posterstørrelse.
1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10.
2 Klik på fanen Layout, og vælg Poster Printing på rullelisten
Layout Type.
3 Konfigurer posterindstillingen:
Du kan vælge et sidelayout på Poster<2x2>, Poster<3x3>,
Poster<4x4> eller Custom. Hvis du vælger Poster<2x2>, vil
udskriften automatisk blive fordelt på 4 fysiske sider. Hvis
indstillingen Brugerdefineret er valgt, kan du forstørre originalen
med 150 % til 400 %. Alt afhængigt af forstørrelsesgraden
justeres sidelayoutet automatisk til Poster<2x2>, Poster<3x3>,
Poster<4x4>.
Angiv en overlapning i millimeter eller tommer for at gøre det
lettere at sætte arkene sammen.
4 Klik på fanen Paper, og vælg papirkilde, -størrelse og -type.
5 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet. Du kan færdiggøre posteren
ved at sætte arkene sammen.
0,15 tommer
0,15 tommer
Udskrivning af brochurer
Med funktionen Brochureudskrivning kan du udskrive på begge sider af
papiret og arrangere siderne, så papiret efter udskrivningen kan foldes
på midten og danne en brochure.
1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du ind i printeregenskaberne. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument”
på side 10.
2 Vælg fanen Layout, og vælg Booklet Printing på rullelisten
Layout Type.
BEMÆRK: Indstillingen Booklet Printing er ikke tilgængelig for alle
papirstørrelser. Hvis du vil finde den tilgængelige papirstørrelse for
denne funktion, skal du vælge papirstørrelsen i indstillingen Size på
fanen Paper og derefter kontrollere, at Booklet Printing er aktiveret på
rullelisten Layout Type på fanen Layout.
3 Klik på fanen Paper , og vælg papirkilde, -format og -type.
4 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet.
5 Fold siderne, og hæft dem sammen, når de er udskrevet.
8
9
8
9Avanceret udskrivning
18
Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret
Du kan udskrive på begge sider af et ark papir. Før du udskriver, skal
du angive udskriftsretningen.
Følgende indstillinger er tilgængelige:
• Printer Setting – hvis du vælger denne indstilling, bestemmes denne
egenskab af den indstilling, du har valgt på printerens kontrolpanel.
Hvis denne indstilling ikke vises, har din printer ikke
denne funktion.
• None
• Long Edge, som er det konventionelle layout, der anvendes
i bogbinding.
• Short Edge, som er den indbindingstype, der oftest bruges i kalendere.
• Omvendt duplexudskrivning – giver dig mulighed for at vælge den
generelle udskrivningsrækkefølge i modsætning
til duplexudskrivningsrækkefølge. Hvis denne indstilling ikke
vises, har din printer ikke denne funktion.
BEMÆRK! Skriv ikke på begge sider af etiketter, transparenter,
konvolutter eller tykt papir. Dette kan resultere i papirstop og
beskadigelse af printeren.
1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10.
2 Vælg papirretning på fanen Layout.
3 Vælg den ønskede indstilling for duplexindbinding i afsnittet
Double-sided Printing.
4 Klik på fanen Paper, og vælg papirkilde, -format og -type.
5 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet.
BEMÆRK! Hvis printeren ikke har en duplexenhed, skal du fuldføre
udskriftsjobbet manuelt. Printeren udskriver hver anden side af
dokumentet først. Efter udskrivning af den første side af jobbet, vises
vinduet Udskrivningstip. Følg vejledningen på skærmen for at fuldføre
udskriftsjobbet.
▲ Lang kant ▲ Kort kant
2 5
3
2
5
3
2 5
3
2
5
3
Udskrivning af et formindsket eller
forstørret dokument
Du kan ændre størrelsen på en sides indhold, så det vises større eller
mindre på den udskrevne side.
1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10.
2 Vælg fanen Paper, og vælg Reduce/Enlarge på rullelisten
Output size.
3 Angive skaleringsgraden i feltet Percentage.
Du kan også klikke på knappen eller .
4 Vælg papirkilde, -størrelse og -type under Paper Options.
5 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet.
Tilpasning af dokumentet til en valgt
papirstørrelse
Med denne printerfunktion kan du skalere udskriftsjobbet til enhver
papirstørrelse, uanset den digitale størrelse på dokumentet. Dette kan
være nyttigt, hvis du vil undersøge små detaljer på et lille dokument.
1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10.
2 Vælg fanen Paper, og vælg Fit to Page på rullelisten Output
size.
3 Vælg den korrekte størrelse på rullelisten Unskriftsstørrelse .
4 Vælg papirkilde, -størrelse og -type under Paper Options.
5 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet.
AAvanceret udskrivning
19
Brug af vandmærker
Indstillingen Vandmærke giver dig mulighed for at udskrive tekst hen over
et eksisterende dokument. Du kunne f.eks. ønske ordene ”KLADDE” eller
”FORTROLIGT” skrevet med store grå bogstaver diagonalt hen over den
første eller alle siderne i et dokument.
Der findes allerede adskillige foruddefinerede vandmærker i printeren.
Disse kan redigeres, eller der kan tilføjes nye på listen.
Brug af et eksisterende vandmærke
1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10.
2 Klik på fanen Other Options, og marker det ønskede vandmærke
på rullelisten Watermark. Du vil kunne se det valgte vandmærke
på eksempelbilledet.
3 Klik på OK, og start udskrivningen.
BEMÆRK: Eksempelbilledet viser, hvordan siden vil se ud, når den er
udskrevet.
Oprettelse af et vandmærke
1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10.
2 Klik på fanen Other Options, og klik på knappen Edit i sektionen
Watermark. Vinduet Edit Watermark vises.
3 Skriv vandmærketeksten i tekstfeltet Watermark Message. Du
kan indtaste op til 40 tegn. Teksten vises i eksempelvinduet.
Når afkrydsningsfeltet First Page Only er markeret, udskrives
vandmærket kun på den første side.
4 Vælg indstillinger for vandmærket.
Du kan vælge skrifttypenavn, typografi, størrelse eller gråskalaniveau
i sektionen Font Attributes og angive vinklen på vandmærket i
sektionen Message Angle.
5 Klik på Add for at tilføje et nyt vandmærke på listen.
6 Når du er færdig med redigeringen, skal du klikke på OK og starte
udskrivningen.
Hvis du vil stoppe udskrivning af vandmærket, skal du markere (No
Watermark) på rullelisten Watermark.
Redigering af et vandmærke
1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10.
2 Klik på fanen Other Options, og klik på knappen Edit i sektionen
Watermark. Vinduet Edit Watermark vises.
3 Vælg det vandmærke, du vil redigere, på listen Current
Watermarks. Nu kan du ændre vandmærkets tekst og
øvrige indstillinger.
4 Klik på Update for at gemme ændringerne.
5 Klik på OK, indtil vinduet Udskriv afsluttes.
Sletning af et vandmærke
1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10.
2 Vælg fanen Other Options, og klik på knappen Edit i sektionen
Vandmærke. Vinduet Edit Watermark vises.
3 Marker det vandmærke, du vil slette, på listen Current
Watermarks, og klik på Delete.
4 Klik på OK, indtil vinduet Udskriv afsluttes.Avanceret udskrivning
20
Brug af overlays
Hvad er et overlay?
Et overlay er tekst og/eller grafik, der er gemt på computerens harddisk
i et specielt filformat, og som kan udskrives på alle dokumenter.
Overlays benyttes hyppigt i stedet for fortrykte formularer og brevpapir. I
stedet for at benytte fortrykt brevpapir kan du oprette et overlay, der
indeholder præcis samme oplysninger som på dit brevpapir. Hvis du vil
udskrive et brev på firmaets brevpapir, behøver du ikke at lægge fortrykt
papir i printeren. Du behøver blot at indstille printeren til at udskrive
brevhovedet som overlay på dokumentet.
Oprettelse af et nyt sideoverlay
For at kunne benytte et sideoverlay skal du oprette et nyt sideoverlay
med dit logo eller billede.
1 Opret, eller åbn et dokument med den tekst og/eller grafik, der skal
bruges i det nye sideoverlay. Placer elementerne, præcis som du
ønsker dem udskrevet, på det nye overlay.
2 Hvis du vil gemme dokumentet som et overlay, skal du åbne
egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på
side 10.
3 Klik på fanen Other Options, og klik på knappen Edit i sektionen
Overlay.
4 Klik på Create Overlay i vinduet Rediger overlay.
5 Skriv et navn på op til otte tegn i feltet File name i vinduet Opret
overlay. Vælg destinationsstien, efter behov. (Standard er
C:\Formover.)
6 Klik på Save. Navnet vises i feltet Overlay List.
7 Klik på OK eller Yes for at afslutte oprettelsen.
Filen udskrives ikke. Den gemmes i stedet på computerens
harddisk.
BEMÆRK: Overlayet skal have den samme størrelse som de
dokumenter, du vil udskrive det på. Opret ikke et overlay med et
vandmærke.
WORLD BEST
Dear ABC
Regards
WORLD BEST
Anvendelse af sideoverlay
Når du har oprettet et overlay, er det klar til at blive udskrevet sammen
med et dokument. Sådan udskriver du et overlay sammen med et
dokument:
1 Opret, eller åbn det dokument, du vil udskrive.
2 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet,
skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et
dokument” på side 10.
3 Klik på fanen Other Options.
4 Marker det ønskede overlay på rullelisten Overlay.
5 Hvis den ønskede overlayfil ikke vises på listen Overlay, skal
du klikke på knappen Edit og Load Overlay og markere
overlayfilen.
Hvis du har gemt den overlayfil, du vil bruge, i en ekstern kilde,
kan du også indlæse filen fra vinduet Load Overlay.
Klik på Open, når du har markeret filen. Filen vises i feltet Overlay
List og er tilgængelig for udskrivning. Marker overlayet i feltet
Overlay List.
6 Klik om nødvendigt på Confirm Page Overlay When Printing.
Hvis dette afkrydsningsfelt er markeret, vises der en meddelelsesboks,
hver gang du sender et dokument til udskrivning, hvor du bliver
bedt om at bekræfte, at du ønsker at udskrive et overlay sammen
med dokumentet.
Hvis afkrydsningsfeltet ikke er markeret, og der er markeret et
overlay, udskrives overlayet automatisk sammen med dokumentet.
7 Klik på OK eller Yes, indtil udskrivningen begynder.
Det markerede overlay hentes sammen med udskriftsjobbet og
udskrives med dokumentet.
BEMÆRK: Overlayets opløsningsgrad skal være den samme som
opløsningsgraden for det dokument, du vil udskrive overlayet sammen
med.
Sletning af et sideoverlay
Du kan slette sideoverlay, du ikke længere bruger.
1 Klik på fanen Other Options i vinduet med printeregenskaber.
2 Klik på knappen Edit i sektionen Overlay.
3 Marker det overlay, du vil udskrive, i feltet Overlay List.
4 Klik på Delete Overlay.
5 Klik på Yes, når der vises en bekæftelsesmeddelelse.
6 Klik på OK, indtil vinduet Udskriv afsluttes.Brug af Windows' PostScript-driver
21
4 Brug af Windows'
PostScript-driver
Hvis du ønsker at bruge den PostScript-driver, der findes på systemcd'en, til at udskrive et dokument.
PPD'er giver i kombination med PostScript-driveren adgang til
printerfunktionerne og gør det muligt for computeren at kommunikere
med printeren. Der findes et installationsprogram til PPD'erne på den
medfølgende software-cd.
Dette kapitel omfatter:
Printerindstillinger
Du kan bruge vinduet med printeregenskaber til at få adgang
til alle de oplysninger, du har brug for vedrørende din printer.
Når printeregenskaberne vises, kan du gennemse og redigere
de viste indstillinger, så de svarer til dine aktuelle behov.
Dit printeregenskabsvindue kan være anderledes, afhængig af
dit operativsystem. Denne softwarebrugerhåndbog viser vinduet
Egenskaber, som det ser ud i Windows XP.
Printerdrivervinduet Egenskaber, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog,
kan være anderledes på den printer, som du anvender.
BEMÆRK!
• De fleste Windows-programmer overskriver de indstillinger, du
angiver i printerdriveren. Rediger alle de tilgængelige printerindstillinger
i programmet først, og rediger derefter de resterende indstillinger
i printerdriveren.
• De indstillinger, du ændrer, påvirker kun det aktuelle program.
Hvis du vil gøre disse ændringer permanente, skal du foretage
dem i mappen Printere.
• Følgende procedure gælder for Windows XP. Hvis du bruger andre
Windows-operativsystemer, henvises du til den tilhørende Windowsbrugerhåndbog eller online Hjælp.
1. Klik på knappen Start i Windows.
2. Vælg Printere og faxenheder.
3. Marker printerdriverikonet.
4. Højreklik på printerdriverikonet, og vælg
Udskriftsindstillinger.
5. Rediger indstillingerne på hver fane, og klik på OK.
Avanceret
Du kan bruge avancerede indstillinger ved at klikke på knappen
Avanceret.
• Paper/Output – denne indstilling giver dig mulighed for at vælge
størrelsen på det papir, der er i bakken.
• Graphic – denne indstilling giver dig mulighed for at justere
udskriftskvaliteten, så den passer til dine udskrivningsbehov.
• Document Options – disse indstillinger giver dig mulighed for at angive
PostScript-indstillinger eller printerfunktioner.
Brug af Hjælp
Du kan klikke på i øverste højre hjørne i vinduet og derefter
på enhver af indstillingerne. Deling af printeren lokalt
22
5 Deling af printeren lokalt
Printeren kan tilsluttes direkte til en valgt computer på netværket, som
kaldes ”værtscomputer”.
Følgende procedure gælder for Windows XP. Til andre Windowsoperativsystemer henvises du til den tilhørende Windows-brugerhåndbog
eller online Hjælp.
BEMÆRKNINGER!
• Kontroller, hvilke operativsystemer der er kompatible med printeren.
Se i afsnittet om operativsystemkompatibilitet i printerspecifikationerne
i brugerhåndbogen til printeren.
• Hvis du har bruge for at kende det nøjagtige navn på printeren, kan
du se på den medfølgende cd-rom.
Konfiguration af en værtscomputer
1 Start Windows.
2 Vælg Printere og faxenheder i menuen Start.
3 Dobbeltklik på printerdriverikonet.
4 Vælg Printer og derefter Deling.
5 Marker feltet Del denne printer.
6 Udfyld feltet Sharenavn, og klik derefter på OK.
Konfiguration af en klientcomputer
1 Højreklik på knappen Start i Windows, og vælg Stifinder.
2 Vælg Netværkssteder,, og højreklik derefter på Søg efter
computere.
3 Skriv IP-adressen på værtscomputeren i feltet Computernavn, og
klik derefter på Søg. (Hvis værtscomputeren kræver Brugernavn
og Adgangskode, skal du skrive bruger-id’et og adgangskoden til
værtscomputerens konto.)
4 Dobbeltklik på Printere og faxenheder.
5 Højreklik på ikonet til printerdriveren, og vælg Opret forbindelse.
6 Klik på Ja, hvis installationsbekræftelsen vises.Scanning
23
6 Scanning
Med scanning kan du konvertere billeder og tekst til digitale filer på
computeren. Derefter kan du faxe eller sende filerne med e-mail, få dem
vist på dit websted eller bruge dem til at oprette projekter, som du kan
udskrive ved brug af SmarThru-software eller WIA-driveren.
Dette kapitel indeholder:
• SmarThru Office
• Scanning med TWAIN-kompatible programmer
• Scanning ved brug af WIA-driveren
BEMÆRKNINGER:
• Kontroller, hvilke operativsystemer, der er kompatible med
printeren. Se i afsnittet om operativsystemkompatibilitet i
printerspecifikationerne i brugerhåndbogen til printeren.
• Du kan kontrollere printernavnet på den medfølgende Drivers
and Utilities-cd-rom.
• Den maksimale opløsning, der kan opnås, afhænger af
forskellige faktorer, herunder computerhastighed, tilgængelig
diskplads, hukommelse, størrelsen af det scannede billede og
indstillinger for bitdybde. Afhængig af systemet og det du
scanner, er det ikke sikkert, at du kan scanne ved bestemte
opløsninger, især ikke hvis du bruger forbedret dpi.
SmarThru Office
Den medfølgende Drivers and Utilities-cd-rom indeholder SmarThru
Office. SmarThru Office indeholder praktiske funktioner, som du kan
bruge til maskinen.
Sådan starter du SmarThru Office
SmarThru Office findes på den medfølgende software-cd. SmarThru
Office indeholder praktiske funktioner, som du kan bruge til maskinen.
1 Kontroller, at maskinen og computeren er tændt og korrekt
forbundet med hinanden.
2 Når du har installeret SmarThru Office, vises ikonet SmarThru
Office på skrivebordet.
3 Dobbeltklik på ikonet SmarThru Office.
4 SmarThru Office vises.
Yderligere oplysninger finder du i Help → SmarThru Office Help.
Quick Start Guide
Denne menu viser hurtigknapper til en række funktioner.
Hurtigknapperne omfatter: Categories, Binder, Life Cycle, Scan and
OCR, Fix and Enhance og Dell Website. Du kan deaktivere denne
menu ved at klikke på ”Do not show this diaglog again”.
Brug af SmarThru Office
Scanning
1 Klik på scanningsikonet.
BEMÆRKNINGER:
• I operativsystemet Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP kan du bruge
startprogrammet til SmarThru Office yderst til højre på proceslinjen til
at åbne vinduet Scan Setting.
• I andre operativsystemer end Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP skal du klikke
på SmarThru-ikonet på proceslinjen i Windows for at aktivere
startprogrammet til SmarThru Office.Scanning
24
2 Vinduet Scan Setting åbnes.
BEMÆRK! Klik på knappen Advanced for at angive flere
scanningsindstillinger.
3 Vælg scanningsindstillinger, og klik på Scan. Yderligere
oplysninger finder du ved at klikke på Help → SmarThru Office
Help.
Send to
E-mail
Du kan sende e-mail, mens du arbejder med SmarThru Office.
BEMÆRK! Der kræves et e-mail-klientprogram, f.eks. Outlook
Express, for at sende e-mail i SmarThru Office. Proceduren for at sende
e-mail kan variere afhængigt af, hvilket e-mail-klientprogram du bruger.
1 Vælg File → Send to → Send By E-mail.
1
Select
Scanner
Gør det muligt at vælge mellem en lokal scanner
eller netværksscanner.
2
Select
Profile
Gør det muligt at gemme indstillinger
regelmæssigt til senere brug. Klik på New Profile
for at gemme indstillingen.
3
Scan
Settings
Gør det muligt at tilpasse indstillingerne til Scan
Size og Paper Source.
4 Scan To
Gør det muligt at tilpasse indstillingerne til File
Name og den placering, scannede data sendes til.
2 Der åbnes en e-mail-klient.
3 Indtast de nødvendige oplysninger, og send din e-mail.
Fax
Du kan sende e-mails, mens du arbejder med SmarThru Office.
1 Vælg File → Send to → Send By Fax.
2 Vinduet Send Fax åbnes.
3 Skriv de nødvendige oplysninger, og klik på Send Fax.
BEMÆRK! Du kan få flere oplysninger om SmarThru Office, hvis du
klikker på Help → SmarThru Office Help. Vinduet SmarThru Office Help
vises. Du kan få vist skærmhjælpen, der fulgte med programmet
SmarThru.
Følg trinene nedenfor for at afinstallere SmarThru Office. Før du
påbegynder afinstallationen, skal du sikre dig, at alle programmer på
computeren er lukkede.
a I menuen Start skal du vælge Programmer eller Alle Programmer.
b Vælg SmarThru Office, og vælg derefter Uninstall SmarThru Office.
c Når computeren beder dig om at bekræfte dit valg, skal du læse
erklæringen og klikke på OK.
d Klik på Finish.
Scanning med TWAIN-kompatible
programmer
Hvis du vil scanne dokumenter med andre programmer, skal du bruge
TWAIN-kompatible programmer, f.eks. Adobe Photoshop. Adobe
®
Photoshop
®
. Første gang du bruger maskinen til scanning, skal du
vælge den som din TWAIN-kilde i det anvendte program.
Den grundlæggende scanningsproces omfatter en række forskellige trin:
1 Kontroller, at maskinen og computeren er tændt og korrekt
forbundet med hinanden.
2 Anbring et enkelt dokument på glaspladen med tryksiden nedad.
Du kan også lægge dokumentet/dokumenterne i r DADF'en med
tryksiden opad.
3 Åbn et program, f.eks. Photoshop.
4 Åbn vinduet TWAIN, og angiv de forskellige indstillinger til
scanning.
5 Scan og gem det scannede dokument.Scanning
25
BEMÆRK! Følg programmets anvisninger for, hvordan du indlæser
et billede. Se i brugerhåndbogen til programmet.
Scanning ved brug af WIA-driveren
Maskinen understøtter også WIA-driveren (Windows Image Acquisition)
til scanning af billeder. WIA er en af de standardkomponenter, der leveres
af Microsoft Windows XP, og som fungerer med digitale kameraer
og scannere. I modsætning til TWAIN-driveren, giver WIA-driveren dig
mulighed for at scanne og nemt manipulere med billeder uden brug af
yderligere software.
BEMÆRK! WIA-driveren fungerer kun på Windows XP/Vista med
USB-port.
Windows XP
1 Anbring et enkelt dokument på glaspladen med tryksiden nedad.
Du kan også lægge dokumentet/dokumenterne i DADF'en med
tryksiden opad.
2 Vælg menuen Start på skrivebordet, vælg Indstillinger,
Kontrolpanel og derefter Scannere og kameraer.
3 Dobbeltklik på printerdriverikonet. Guiden Scanner og kamera
startes.
4 Vælg dine scanningsindstillinger, og klik på Eksempel for at se,
hvordan indstillingerne påvirker billedet.
5 Klik på Næste.
6 Indtast et billednavn, og vælg et filformat og en destination til
lagring af billedet.
7 Følg vejledningen på skærmen for at redigere billedet, efter det
er kopieret til computeren.
Windows Vista
1 Anbring et enkelt dokument på glaspladen med tryksiden nedad.
Du kan også lægge dokumentet/dokumenterne i DADF'en med
tryksiden opad.
2 Klik på Start → Kontrolpanel → Hardware og lyd → Scannere
og kameraer.
3 Klik på Scan et dokument eller billede. Programmet Windows
Fax og scanning åbnes automatisk.
BEMÆRK! Scannerne vises, hvis brugeren klikker på Vis scannere
og kameraer.
4 Klik på Scan, så scannerdriveren åbnes.
5 Vælg dine scanningsindstillinger, og klik på Eksempel for at se,
hvordan indstillingerne påvirker billedet.
6 Klik på Scan.
BEMÆRK! Hvis du ønsker at afbryde scanningsjobbet, skal du trykke
på knappen Annuller i guiden Scanner og kamera.Brug af andre programmer
26
7 Brug af andre
programmer
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Overvågning af printerstatus
• Printerindstillingsværktøj
• Dell-program til genbestilling af toner
• Firmware Update Utility
Overvågning af printerstatus
Skærmbilledet til overvågning af printerstatus åbnes, når du
sender et udskriftsjob til printeren. Vinduet vises kun på
computerskærmen. Det afhænger af det resterende
tonerniveau, hvordan den åbnede statusovervågningsskærm
ser ud.
Hvis du er Windows-bruger, skal du fra menuen Start vælge
Programmer eller Alle Programmer → Dell → Dell
Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Status
Monitor.
Programmet Printer Status Monitor viser printerens aktuelle
status, hvor meget toner der er tilbage i tonerpatronerne, og
forskellige andre oplysninger. Du kan også ændre
indstillingerne.
• Printing Status: Programmet Printer Status Monitor
viser printerens aktuelle status.
• Toner Level: Du kan få vist, hvor meget toner der er
tilbage i tonerpatronerne.
• Order Supplies: Klik for at bestille en ny tonerpatron
online.
• Br'ugerhåndbog: Giver dig mulighed for at få vist Dell
2145cn Color Laser MFP-brugerhåndbogen.
Printerindstillingsværktøj
Når du installerer Dell-softwaren, installeres Printer Settings
Utility automatisk.
Sådan åbnes Printer Settings Utility.
1 Klik på Start → Programmer eller Alle Programmer →
Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP
→ Printer Settings Utility.
Vinduet Printer Settings Utility åbnes.
2 Vinduet Printer Settings Utility indeholder flere
funktioner.
Yderligere oplysninger fås ved at klikke på knappen .
Hvis du vil bruge standardindstillingerne, skal du klikke på
knappen Printer Default og derefter klikke på Apply.
Hvis du vil afslutte, skl du klikke på knappen Exit nederst i
vinduet.Brug af andre programmer
27
Dell-program til genbestilling af
toner
Hvis du vil bestille nye tonerpatroner eller forsyninger fra Dell:
1 Dobbeltklik på ikonet for Dell Toner Reorder Program på
skrivebordet.
eller
Klik på Start → Programmer eller Alle Programmer →
Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP
→ Dell 2145cn MFP Toner Reorder.
2 Vinduet Dell 2145cn MFP Toner Reorder åbnes.
Firmware Update Utility
Du kan opdatere printerens firmware med Firmware Update
Utility.
1 Klik på Start → Programmer eller Alle Programmer →
Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP
→ Firmware Update Utility.
Vinduet Firmware Update Utility åbnes.
Følg vejledningen på skærmen for at fuldføre
firmwareopdateringen.Brug af printeren under Linux
28
8 Brug af printeren under
Linux
Du kan bruge printeren i et Linux-miljø.
Dette kapitel omfatter:
• Introduktion
• Installation af Unified Linux Driver
• Brug af Unified Driver Configurator
• Konfiguration af printeregenskaber
• Udskrivning af et dokument
• Scanning af et dokument
Introduktion
På den medfølgende cd-rom finder du Dell Unified Linux Driverpakke til brug af maskinen med en Linux-computer.
Dell Unified Linux Driver-pakke indeholder printer-
og scannerdrivere, som giver dig mulighed for at udskrive
dokumenter og scanne billeder. Pakken indeholder også nyttige
programmer til konfigurering af maskinen og yderligere
behandling af de scannede dokumenter.
Når driveren er installeret på Linux-systemet, giver
driverpakken dig mulighed for at overvåge en række
maskinenheder via hurtige parallelle ECP-porte og USB
samtidigt.
De hentede dokumenter kan derefter redigeres, udskrives på
de samme lokale enheder eller på netværksenheder, sendes
med e-mail, overføres til et FTP-sted eller overføres til et
eksternt OCR-system.
Unified Linux Driver-pakken leveres med et smart og fleksibelt
installationsprogram. Du behøver ikke søge efter yderligere
komponenter, der kan være nødvendige for Unified Linux
Driver-softwaren: Alle krævede pakker overføres til dit system
og installeres automatisk - dette er muligt på en lang række af
de mest populære Linux-kloner.
Installation af Unified Linux Driver
Installation af Unified Linux Driver
1 Sørg for, at du slutter maskinen til computeren. Tænd
både computeren og maskinen.
2 Når vinduet Administrator Login vises, skal du skrive root
i feltet Login og angive systemets adgangskode.
BEMÆRK: Du skal logge ind som superbruger (root) for at
installere printerprogrammerne. Hvis du ikke er superbruger,
skal du spørge systemadministratoren.
3 Læg cd-rom'en med printersoftwaren i cd-rom-drevet.
Cd-rom'en kører automatisk.
Hvis cd-rom'en ikke kører automatisk, skal du klikke på
ikonet nederst på skrivebordet. Nå vinduet Terminal
vises, skal du skrive:
Hvis cd-rom'en er sekundær master og placeringen,
der skal tilsluttes, er /mnt/cdrom,
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/
cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost root]#./install.sh
Hvis det stadig ikke er muligt at køre cd-rom’en, skal du
indtaste følgende i den viste rækkefølge:
[root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/
cdrom
BEMÆRK: Installationsprogrammet køres automatisk,
hvis du ikke har en softwarepakke installeret og konfigureret
til automatisk kørsel.
4 Klik på Next, når velkomstskærmen vises.Brug af printeren under Linux
29
5 Klik på Finish, når installationen er afsluttet.
Installationsprogrammet har tilføjet skrivebordsikonet
Unified Driver Configurator og gruppen Dell Unified Driver
til systemmenuen. Hvis du får problemer, kan du se i den
skærmhjælp, der er tilgængelig gennem systemmenuen, eller
som kan kaldes på anden måde fra driverpakkens
vinduesprogrammer, f.eks. Unified Driver Configurator
eller Image Manager.
BEMÆRK: Installation af driveren i teksttilstand:
Hvis du ikke bruger den grafiske brugergrænseflade, eller
hvis driverinstallationen er mislykkedes, er det nødvendigt
at bruge driveren i teksttilstand.
Følg trin 1 til 3, indtast [root@localhost Linux]# ./
install.sh, og følg herefter instruktionerne på skærmen.
Installationen er nu gennemført.
Hvis du vil afinstallere driveren, skal du følge ovenstående
instruktioner, men i stedet indtaste [root@localhost
Linux]# ./uninstall.sh på skærmen.
Afinstallation af Unified Linux Driver
1 Når vinduet Administrator Login vises, skal du skrive root
i feltet Login og angive systemets adgangskode.
BEMÆRK: Det er nødvendigt at logge på som superbruger
(root) for at afinstallere printersoftwaren. Hvis du ikke er
superbruger, skal du spørge systemadministratoren.
2 Læg cd-rom'en med printersoftwaren i cd-rom-drevet.
Cd-rom'en kører automatisk.
Hvis cd-rom'en ikke kører automatisk, skal du klikke på
ikonet nederst på skrivebordet. Nå vinduet Terminal
vises, skal du skrive:
Hvis cd-rom'en er sekundær master og placeringen,
der skal tilsluttes, er /mnt/cdrom,
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/
cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost root]#./uninstall.sh
BEMÆRK: Installationsprogrammet køres automatisk,
hvis du ikke har en softwarepakke installeret og konfigureret
til automatisk kørsel.
3 Klik på Uninstall.
4 Klik på Next.
5 Klik på Finish.Brug af printeren under Linux
30
Brug af Unified Driver
Configurator
Unified Linux Driver Configurator er et værktøj, der primært
er beregnet til konfiguration af printer- eller MFP-enheder.
Da en MFP-enhed kombinerer en printer og en scanner, indeholder
Unified Linux Driver Configurator indstillinger, der er logisk
grupperet efter printer- og scannerfunktioner. Der er også en
speciel MFP-portindstilling, der er ansvarlig for reguleringen af
adgangen til en MFP-printer og -scanner via en enkelt I/O-kanal.
Når du har installeret Unified Linux driver, oprettes ikonet
Unified Linux Driver Configurator på skivebordet.
Åbning af Unified Driver Configurator
1 Dobbeltklik på Unified Driver Configurator på skrivebordet.
Du kan også klikke på menuikonet Startup og vælge Dell
Unified Driver og derefter Unified Driver Configurator.
2 Klik på hver af knapperne i ruden Modules for at skifte
til det tilsvarende konfigurationsvindue.
Knappen Printers Configuration
Knappen Scanners Configuration
Knappen Ports Configuration
Du kan bruge skærmhjælpen ved at klikke på Help.
3 Når du har ændret konfigurationerne, skal du klikke på Exit
for at lukke Unified Driver Configurator.
Knappen Printers Configuration
Knappen Ports ConfigurationBrug af printeren under Linux
31
Printers Configuration
Vinduet Printers Configuration indeholder to faner: Printers
og Classes.
Fanen Printers
Du kan få vist det aktuelle systems printerkonfiguration
ved at klikke på printerikonet i venstre side af vinduet Unified
Driver Configurator.
Du kan bruge følgende printerstyringsknapper:
• Refresh: opdaterer listen over tilgængelige printere.
• Add Printer: giver dig mulighed for at tilføje en ny printer.
• Remove Printer: fjerner den markerede printer.
• Set as Default: angiver den aktuelle printer som
standardprinter.
• Stop/Start: stopper/starter printeren.
• Test: giver dig mulighed for at udskrive en testside,
hvis du vil kontrollere, om maskinen fungerer korrekt.
• Properties: giver dig mulighed for at få vist og ændre
printeregenskaber. Yderligere oplysninger finder du
på side 32.
Viser alle
installerede
printere.
Skifter til Printers
Configuration.
Viser status,
modelnavn og URI
på printeren.
Fanen Classes
Fanen Classes viser en liste over tilgængelige printerklasser.
• Refresh: Opdaterer listen over klasser.
• Add Class...: Giver dig mulighed for at tilføje
en ny printerklasse.
• Remove Class: Fjerner den valgte printerklasse.
Scanners Configuration
I dette vindue kan du overvåge aktiviteten af scannerenheder,
få vist listen over installerede Dell MFP-enheder, ændre
enhedens egenskaber og scanne billeder.
• Properties...: Giver dig mulighed for at ændre
scanningsegenskaber og scanne et dokument. Se side 34.
Viser status på klassen
og antallet af printere
i klassen.
Viser alle
printerklasserne.
Skifter til
Scanners
Configuration.
Viser alle installerede
scannere.
Viser leverandøren,
modelnavn og typen
på scanneren. Brug af printeren under Linux
32
Ports Configuration
I dette vindue kan du få vist listen over tilgængelige porte,
kontrollere status for hver port og frigive en port, der er stoppet
i optaget-tilstand, når dens ejer af en eller anden grund er
afsluttet.
• Refresh: Opdaterer listen over tilgængelige porte.
• Release port: Frigiver den markerede port.
Deling af porte mellem printere og scannere
Maskinen kan være tilsluttet en værtscomputer via den
parallelle port eller USB-porten. Da MFP-enheden indeholder
mere end en enhed (printer og scanner), er det nødvendigt
at arrangere den rette adgang til ”bruger”-programmer til
disse enheder via den enkelte I/O-port.
Dell Unified Linux Driver-pakken indeholder den rette
portdelingsfunktion, der bruges af Dell printer- og
scannerdrivere. Driverne adresserer deres enheder via såkaldte
MFP-porte. Den aktuelle status for enhver MFP-port kan blive
vist via vinduet Ports configuration. Portdeling forhindrer dig
i at få adgang til en funktionel blok af MFP-enheden, mens
en anden blok er i brug.
Når du installerer en ny MFP-printer på systemet, anbefales det
kraftigt, at du gør dette med hjælp af Unified Driver
Configurator. I denne situation vil du blive bedt om at vælge I/
O-port til den nye enhed. Dette valg vil give den mest egnede
konfiguration af MFP's funktioner. Scannerdrivere vælger
automatisk I/O-porte til MFP-scannere, så de rette indstillinger
anvendes som standard.
Skifter til Ports
Configuration.
Viser porttypen,
enhed, der er tilsluttet
porten, samt status.
Viser alle
tilgængelige porte.
Konfiguration af
printeregenskaber
Ved at bruge egenskabsvinduet, der vises, når du vælger
Printers Configuration, kan du ændre de forskellige
printeregenskaber for din maskine.
1 Åbn Unified Driver Configurator.
Skift om nødvendigt til vinduet Printers Configuration.
2 Marker din maskine på listen over tilgængelige printere,
og klik på Properties.
3 Vinduet Printer Properties åbnes.
Følgende fem faner vises øverst i vinduet:
•General: giver dig mulighed for at ændre printerplacering
og navn. Det navn, der angives under denne fane, vises
på printerlisten i Printers Configuration.
•Connection: giver dig mulighed for at få vist eller vælge
en anden port. Hvis du ændrer printerport fra USB til parallel
eller omvendt, skal du omkonfigurere printerporten under
denne fane.
•Driver: giver dig mulighed for at få vist eller vælge en
anden driver. Hvis du klikker på Options, kan du angive
standardindstillinger for enheden.
•Jobs: viser listen over udskriftsjob. Klik på Cancel job
for at annullere det valgte job, og marker afkrydsningsfeltet
Show completed jobs for at få vist tidligere job på listen.
•Classes: viser den klasse, som printeren er i. Klik på
Add to Class for at tilføje printeren i en bestemt klasse,
eller klik på Remove from Class for at fjerne printeren
fra den valgte klasse.
4 Klik på OK for at anvende ændringerne og lukke vinduet
Printer Properties.Brug af printeren under Linux
33
Udskrivning af et dokument
Udskrivning fra programmer
Der er en lang række Linux-programmer, som du kan udskrive
fra ved brug af CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System). Du kan
udskrive på maskinen fra ethvert af disse programmer.
1 Vælg Print i menuen File i det program, du er ved at bruge.
2 Vælg Print direkte ved brug af lpr.
3 Vælg maskinens modelnavn på printerlisten, og klik
på Properties i vinduet LPR GUI.
4 Skift printer og egenskaber for udskriftsjob.
Klik her.
Følgende fire faner vises øverst i vinduet.
•General - giver dig mulighed for at skifte papirformat,
papirtype og udskriftsretning for dokumenterne,
aktivere duplexudskrivning, tilføje begyndelses- og
slutseparationssider samt redigere antallet af sider pr. ark.
•Text - giver dig mulighed for at angive sidemargener
og angive tekstindstillinger, f.eks. afstand eller kolonner.
•Graphics - giver dig mulighed for at angive
billedindstillinger, der skal bruges, når der udskrives
billeder/filer, f.eks. farveindstillinger, billedstørrelse eller
billedposition.
•Device - giver dig mulighed for at angive udskriftsopløsning,
papirkilde og destination.
5 Klik på Apply for at anvende ændringerne og lukke
vinduet Properties.
6 Klik på OK i vinduet LPR GUI for at starte udskrivningen.
7 Vinduet Printing vises, hvor du kan overvåge status for
udskriftsjobbet.
Hvis du vil afbryde det aktuelle job, skal du klikke på Cancel.
Udskrivning af filer
Du kan udskrive mange forskellige typer filer på Dell-enheden
ved hjælp af CUPS-standardmetoden - direkte
fra kommandolinjen. CUPS lpr-hjælpeprogrammet giver dig
mulighed for at gøre dette. Men driverpakken erstatter lprstandardværktøjet med et meget mere brugervenligt LPR GUI
program.
Sådan udskriver du en dokumentfil:
1 Skriv lpr fra Linux shell-kommandolinjen,
og tryk på Enter. Vinduet LPR GUI vises.
Hvis du kun skriver lpr og trykker på Enter, vises
udskriftsvinduet Select file(s) to print først. Marker
blot enhver fil, du ønsker at udskrive, og klik på Open.
2 Marker printeren på listen, og skift egenskaber for printer
og udskriftsjob i vinduet LPR GUI.
Se side 33, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger
om egenskabsvinduet.
3 Klik på OK for at starte udskrivningen.Brug af printeren under Linux
34
Scanning af et dokument
Du kan scanne et dokument ved hjælp af vinduet Unified Driver
Configurator.
1 Dobbeltklik på Unified Driver Configurator på skrivebordet.
2 Klik på knappen for at skifte til Scanners Configuration.
3 Marker scanneren på listen.
Hvis du kun har en MFP-enhed, og den er tilsluttet
computeren og tændt, vises scanneren på listen
og markeres automatisk.
Hvis du har to eller flere scannere tilsluttet computeren,
kan du når som helst vælge den scanner, du vil bruge.
Mens scanningen er i gang på den første scanner, kan
du vælge den anden scanner, angive enhedsindstillinger
og starte billedscanningen samtidigt.
4 Klik på Properties.
5 Læg det dokument, der skal scannes, i ADF'en (automatisk
dokumentføder) med tryksiden opad eller med tryksiden
nedad på glaspladen.
6 Klik på Preview i vinduet Scanner Properties.
Klik på
scanneren.
Dokumentet scannes, og eksempelbilledet vises i ruden
Preview.
7 Rediger scanningsindstillingerne i afsnittene Image Quality
og Scan Area.
•Image Quality: giver dig mulighed for at vælge
farvekomposition og scanningsopløsning for billedet.
•Scan Area: giver dig mulighed for at vælge sidestørrelsen.
Med knappen Advanced kan du angive sidestørrelsen
manuelt.
Hvis du ønsker at bruge en af de foruddefinerede
scanningsindstillinger, skal du markere den på rullelisten
Job Type. Se side 35, hvis du ønsker oplysninger om
de foruddefinerede indstillinger for Job Type.
Du kan gendanne standardindstillingen for
scanningsindstillingerne ved at klikke på Default.
8 Klik på Scan for at starte scanning, når du er færdig.
Statuslinjen vises nederst til venstre i vinduet for at vise
dig status på scanningen. Tryk på Cancel for at afbryde
scanningen.
9 Det scannede billede vises i den nye Image Editor-fane.
Hvis du vil redigere det scannede billede, skal du bruge
værktøjslinjen. Se side 35, hvis du ønsker yderligere
oplysninger om redigering af et billede.
Træk markøren
for at angive
det billedområde,
der skal scannes.Brug af printeren under Linux
35
10 Klik på Save på værktøjslinjen, når du er færdig.
11 Vælg det filbibliotek, hvor du vil gemme billedet, og
indtast filnavnet.
12 Klik på Save.
Tilføjelse af indstillinger for Job Type
Du kan gemme dine scanningsindstillinger, så du kan hente
dem til en senere scanning.
Sådan gemmer du en ny indstilling for Job Type:
1 Rediger indstillingerne i vinduet Scanner Properties.
2 Klik på Save As.
3 Indtast navnet på indstillingen.
4 Klik på OK.
Indstillingen tilføjes på rullelisten Saved Settings.
Sådan gemmer du en indstilling for Job Type for det næste
scanningsjob:
1 Marker den indstilling, du vil bruge, på rullelisten Job
Type.
2 Næste gang du åbner vinduet Scanner Properties, vælges
den gemte indstilling automatisk til scanningsjobbet.
Sådan slettes en indstilling for Job Type:
1 Marker den indstilling, du vil slette, på rullelisten Job Type.
2 Klik på Delete.
Indstillingen slettes fra listen.
Brug af Image Editor
Vinduet Image Manager indeholder menukommandoer
og værktøjer til at redigere det scannede billede.
Brug disse
værktøjer til at
redigere billedet.
Du kan bruge følgende værktøjer til at redigere billedet:
Hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om programmet Image
Manager, kan du se i skærmhjælpen.
Værktøjer Funktion
Gemmer billedet.
Annullerer den seneste handling.
Gendanner den handling, du annullerede.
Giver dig mulighed for at flytte gennem
billedet.
Beskærer det markerede billedområde.
Zoomer ud på billedet.
Zoomer ind på billedet.
Giver dig mulighed for at skalere billedstørrelsen.
Du kan indtaste størrelsen manuelt eller
angive den grad, der skal skaleres med
proportionalt, lodret eller vandret.
Giver dig mulighed for at rotere billedet.
Du kan vælge antallet af grader på rullelisten.
Giver dig mulighed for at vende billedet lodret
eller vandret.
Giver dig mulighed for at justere lysstyrken
eller kontrasten på billedet eller for at invertere
billedet.
Viser billedets egenskaber.Brug af din printer med en Macintosh
36
10 Brug af din printer med
en Macintosh
Maskinen understøtter Macintosh-systemer med en indbygget USBgrænseflade eller et 10/100 Base-TX-netværkskort. Når du udskriver
en fil fra en Macintosh-computer, kan du bruge PostScript-driveren
ved at installere PPD-filen.
BEMÆRK! Nogle printere kan ikke bruges som netværksprintere.
Kontroller, at printeren understøtter netværksgrænsefladen ved
at se i printerspecifikationerne i brugerhåndbogen til printeren.
Dette kapitel omfatter:
• Installation af software til Macintosh
• Afinstallation af printerdriveren
• Konfiguration af printeren
• Udskrivning
• Scanning
Installation af software til Macintosh
Den cd-rom, der blev leveret sammen med din printer, indeholder en
PPD-fil, der giver dig mulighed for at bruge CUPS-driveren eller Apple
LaserWriter-driveren (kun tilgængelig, når du bruger en printer, der
understøtter PostScript-driveren) til udskrivning på en Macintoshcomputer.
Du får også Twain-driveren til scanning på en Macintosh-computer.
1 Sørg for, at slutter printeren til computeren. Tænd for computer
og printer.
2 Læg den cd-rom, der blev leveret med printeren i cd-rom-drevet.
3 Dobbeltklik på CD-ROM-ikonet, som vises på Macintoshcomputerens skrivebord.
4 Dobbeltklik på mappen MAC_Installer.
5 Dobbeltklik på ikonet Installer.
6 Indtast adgangskoden, og klik på OK.
7 Vinduet Dell Installer åbnes. Klik på Continue.
8 Vælg Easy Install, og klik på Install. Easy Install anbefales til de
fleste brugere. Alle komponenter, der er nødvendige af hensyn til
printerens drift, installeres. Hvis du vælger Custom Install, kan du
installere individuelle komponenter.
9 Der vises en meddelelse med advarsel om, at alle programmer
lukkes. Klik på Continue.
10 Vælg Typical installation for a local printer, og klik derefter på
OK.
11 Klik på Quit, når installationen er fuldført.
BEMÆRK!:
• Hvis du har installeret scannerdriver, skal du trykke på Restart.
• Se "Konfiguration af printeren" på side 37, når installationen er fuldført.
Afinstallation af printerdriveren
Det er nødvendigt at afinstallere, hvis du vil opgradere programmerne,
eller hvis installationen mislykkes.
1 Sørg for, at slutter printeren til computeren. Tænd for computer
og printer.
2 Læg den cd-rom, der blev leveret med printeren, i cd-romdrevet.
3 Dobbeltklik på CD-ROM-ikonet, som vises på Macintoshcomputerens skrivebord.
4 Dobbeltklik på mappen MAC_Installer.
5 Dobbeltklik på ikonet Installer.
6 Indtast adgangskoden, og klik på OK.
7 Vinduet Dell Installer åbnes. Klik på Continue.
8 Vælg Uninstall, og klik derefter på Uninstall.
9 Der vises en meddelelse med advarsel om, at alle programmer
lukkes. Klik på Continue.
10 Klik på Quit, når afinstallationen er gennemført.Brug af din printer med en Macintosh
37
Konfiguration af printeren
Konfigurer printeren i henhold til, hvilket kabel du bruger til at slutte
printeren til computeren – netværkskablet eller USB-kablet.
Netværkstilsluttet
BEMÆRK! Nogle printere kan ikke bruges som netværksprintere.
Før du tilslutter printeren, skal du kontrollere, at printeren understøtter
netværksgrænsefladen, ved at se i printerspecifikationerne
i brugerhåndbogen til printeren.
1 Følg instruktionerne i ”Installation af software til Macintosh” på
side 36, når du vil installere PPD-filen på din computer.
2 Åbn mappen Applications → Utilities, og Print Setup Utility.
• I MAC OS 10.5 skal du åbne System Preferences fra
mappen Applications og klikke på Printer & Fax.
3 Klik på Add på Printer List.
• I MAC OS 10.5 skal du klikke på ikonet ”+”, hvorefter der vises
et vindue.
4 I MAC OS 10.3 skal du vælge fanen Rendezvous.
• I MAC OS 10.4 skal du klikke på Default browser og finde
Bonjour.
• I MAC OS 10.5 skal du klikke på Default og finde Bonjour.
Navnet på maskinen vises på listen. Vælg
DELL000xxxxxxxxx i printerboksen, hvor xxxxxxxxx er
forskellig for hver af maskinerne.
5 Hvis Vælg automatisk ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du vælge Dell
i Printer model og your printer name i Model til MAC OS 10.3.
• Hvis Vælg automatisk ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du vælge Dell
i Printer model og your printer name i Model til MAC OS 10.4.
• Hvis Automatisk valg ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du klikke
på Select a driver to use... og navnet på din printer i Print
Using til MAC OS 10.5.
Maskinen vises på printerlisten og angives som standardprinter.
6 Klik på Add.
USB-tilsluttet Macintosh
1 Følg instruktionerne i ”Installation af software til Macintosh” på
side 36, når du vil installere PPD-filen på din computer.
2 Åbn mappen Applications → Utilities, og Print Setup Utility.
• I MAC OS 10.5 skal du åbne System Preferences fra
mappen Applications og klikke på Printer & Fax.
3 Klik på Add på Printer List.
• I MAC OS 10.5 skal du klikke på ikonet ”+”, hvorefter der vises
et vindue.
4 I MAC OS 10.3 skal du vælge fanen USB.
• I MAC OS 10.4 skal du klikke på Default Browser og finde
USB-forbindelsen.
• I MAC OS 10.5 skal du klikke på Default og finde USBforbindelsen.
5 Vælg your printer name.
6 Hvis Vælg automatisk ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du vælge Dell
i Printer model og your printer name i Model til MAC OS 10.3.
• Hvis Vælg automatisk ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du vælge Dell
i Printer model og your printer name i Model til MAC OS 10.4.
• Hvis Automatisk valg ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du
klikke på Select a driver to use... og navnet på din printer i
Print Using til MAC OS 10.5.
Maskinen vises på printerlisten og angives som standardprinter.
7 Klik på Add. Brug af printeren med en Macintosh
38
Udskrivning
BEMÆRK!
• Det Macintosh-egenskabsvindue, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog,
kan være anderledes på den printer, som du anvender. Men
sammensætningen af vinduet med printeregenskaber er ens.
• Du kan kontrollere printernavnet på den medfølgende cd-rom.
Udskrivning af et dokument
Når du udskriver fra en Macintosh, skal du kontrollere indstillingerne for
printeren i alle programmer, du benytter. Følg disse trin for at udskrive
fra Macintosh:
1 Åbn et Macintosh-program, og vælg den fil, du vil udskrive.
2 Åbn menuen File, og klik på Page Setup (Document Setup
i nogle programmer).
3 Vælg papirformat, papirretning, skalering og andre indstillinger,
og klik på OK.
4 Åbn menuen File, og klik på Print.
5 Vælg det ønskede antal kopier, og angiv, hvilke sider du vil udskrive.
6 Klik på Print, når du er færdig med at angive indstillingerne.
Kontroller, at din printer
er markeret.
▲ Mac OS 10.5
Ændring af printerindstillinger
Du kan bruge avancerede udskrivningsfunktioner, når du bruger printeren.
Vælg Print i menuen File i dit Macintosh-program. Det printernavn, der
vises i vinduet med printeregenskaber, kan være anderledes, afhængigt
af hvilken printer du bruger. Bortset fra navnet, ligner
printeregenskabsvinduerne hinanden.
BEMÆRK! De opties kunnen verschillen afhankelijk van de printer en
de versie van het Macintosh-besturingssysteem.
Layout
Fanen Layout indeholder indstillinger, som du kan bruge til at justere,
hvordan dokumentet skal se ud på den udskrevne side. Du kan udskrive
flere sider på ét ark papir. Vælg Layout på rullelisten Presets for at få
adgang til de følgende funktioner.
• Pages per Sheet: Denne funktion fastsætter, hvor mange sider
der udskrives på én side. Du kan finde flere oplysninger under
"Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir" i den næste kolonne.
• Layout Direction: Du kan vælge udskrivningsretningen på en
side som i eksemplerne i brugergrænsefladen.
▲ Mac OS 10.5Brug af printeren med en Macintosh
39
Graphics
Fanen Graphics indeholder indstillinger til valg af Quality og Color
Mode. Vælg Graphics på rullelisten Presets for at få adgang til
grafikfunktionerne.
• Quality: Du kan vælge udskriftsopløsningen. Jo højere
indstilling, desto skarpere bliver de udskrevne tegn og den
udskrevne grafik. En højere indstilling kan dog forlænge den tid,
det tager at udskrive et dokument.
• Color Mode: Du kan angive farveindstillinger. Indstillingen Color
giver normalt den bedste udskriftskvalitet for farvedokumenter.
Vælg Grayscale, hvis du vil udskrive et farvedokument i
gråtoner.
Paper
Vælg en indstilling for Paper Type, som svarer til det papir, der er lagt i
den bakke, som du vil udskrive fra. På den måde får du den bedste
udskrift. Hvis du bruger en anden type udskriftsmateriale, skal du vælge
den tilsvarende papirtype.
▲ Mac OS 10.5
▲ Mac OS 10.5
Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir
Du kan udskrive mere end en side på et enkelt ark papir. Denne funktion
giver dig mulighed for at udskrive kladder på en omkostningseffektiv måde.
1 Vælg Print i menuen File i dit Macintosh-program.
2 Vælg Layout.
3 Vælg det antal sider, du vil udskrive på et ark papir, på rullelisten
Pages per Sheet.
4 Vælg siderækkefølgen under Layout Direction.
Hvis du vil udskrive en ramme om hver side på arket, skal
du vælge den ønskede indstilling på rullelisten Border.
5 Klik på Print. Printeren udskriver nu det angivne antal sider
på den ene side af hvert ark.
▲ Mac OS 10.5Brug af printeren med en Macintosh
40
Scanning
Du kan scanne dokumenter med Image Capture. Macintosh OS leveres
med programmet Image Capture.
Scanning via USB
1 Kontroller, at maskinen og computeren er tændt og korrekt
forbundet med hinanden.
2 Anbring et enkelt dokument på glaspladen med tryksiden nedad.
Du kan også lægge dokumentet/dokumenterne i ADF’en (eller
DADF'en) med tryksiden opad.
3 Start Applications og klik på Image Capture.
BEMÆRK! Hvis meddelelsen No Image Capture device connected
vises, skal du tage USB-stikket ud og sætte det i igen. Hvis problemet
ikke forsvinder, så se i Image Capture hjælp.
4 Angiv scanner-indstillingerne på dette program.
5 Scan og gem det scannede billede.
BEMÆRK!
• Yderligere oplysninger om Image Capture finder du i Image Capture
hjælp.
• Hvis du vil scanne via DADF, skal du bruge TWAIN-kompatibel
software.
• Du kan også scanne med TWAIN-kompatibel software, f.eks. Adobe
®
Photoshop
®
.
• Scanningsprocessen afhænger af TWAIN-softwaren. Se i
brugerhåndbogen til programmet.
• Opdater til den nyeste version af Mac OS, hvis scanningen ikke
fungerer i Image Capture. Image Capture fungerer korrekt under
Mac OS 10.3.9 eller nyere og Mac OS 10.4.7 eller nyere.41
SOFTWAREAFSNIT
INDEKS
A
afinstaller, software
Macintosh 36
afinstallere
MFP-driver
Linux 29
annullere
scanning 25
avanceret udskrivning, bruge 16
B
brochureudskrivning 17
D
dobbeltsidet udskrivning 18
dokument, udskrive
Macintosh 38
Windows 10
E
ekstra egenskaber, indstille 14
F
fjerne installation, software
Windows 9
foretrukne indstillinger, bruge 14
G
grafikegenskaber, indstille 13
H
hjælp, anvende 21
hjælp, bruge 15
I
indstilling
billedtilstand 13
foretrukne 14
mørkhed 13
opløsning
Windows 13
tonerbesparelse 13
true-type-indstilling 13
installere
Linux-software 28
printerdriver
Macintosh 36
Windows 4
L
layoutegenskaber, angive
Macintosh 38
layoutegenskaber, indstille
Windows 11
Linux
driver, installere 28
printeregenskaber 32
scanne 34
udskrive 33
M
Macintosh
driver
afinstallere 36
installere 36
konfigurere printeren 37
scanne 40
udskrivning 38
MFP-driver, installere
Linux 28
N
n op-udskrivning
Macintosh 39
n-op udskrive
Windows 16
O
opløsning
udskrivning 33
overlay
oprette 20
slette 20
udskrive 20
P
papiregenskaber, indstille 12
papirformat, indstille
udskrive 33
papirkilde, indstille 33
Windows 12
papirretning, udskrive 33
papirstørrelse, indstille 12
papirtype, indstille
udskrive 33
plakat, udskrive 17
PostScript-driver
installere 21
printerdriver, installere
Linux 28
printeregenskaber
Linux 33
printeregenskaber, angive
Macintosh 38
printeregenskaber, indstille
Windows 11, 21
printeropløsning, indstille
Windows 13
printerprogram
afinstallere
Macintosh 36
printersoftware
fjerne installation
Windows 9
installere
Macintosh 36
Windows 4
R
retning, udskrive
Windows 1142
S
scanne
Linux 34
scanne fra Macintosh 40
scanning
SmarThru 23
TWAIN 24
WIA-driver 25
software
afinstallere
Macintosh 36
fjerne installation
Windows 9
geninstallere
Windows 9
installere
Macintosh 36
Windows 4
systemkrav
Macintosh 36
statusovervågning, bruge 26
T
tonerbesparelse, indstille 13
TWAIN, scanne 24
U
udskriftsopløsning 33
udskrive
dokument 10
fra Linux 33
fra Macintosh 38
fra Windows 10
N op
Macintosh 39
n-op
Windows 16
overlay 20
plakat 19
skalere 18
tilpas til side 18
vandmærke 19
udskrivning
brochurer 17
dobbeltsidet 18
V
vandmærke
oprette 19
print 19
redigere 19
slette 19
W
WIA, scan 25
Dell PowerVault MD3200 and
MD3220 Storage Arrays
Getting Started
With Your System
Začínáme se systémem
Mise en route
Handbuch zum Einstieg
Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας
Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem
Начало работы с системой
Introducción al sistema
Sisteminizi Kullanmaya BaşlarkenDell PowerVault MD3200 and
MD3220 Storage Arrays
Getting Started
With Your System
Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04JNotes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use
of your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data
if instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage,
personal injury, or death.
____________________
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
© 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc.
is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerVault™ are trademarks of Dell Inc.
Microsoft
®
and Windows Server
®
are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat
®
and Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
are
registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. SUSE
®
is a registered
trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. VMware
®
is a registered trademark
of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming
the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and
trade names other than its own.
Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04J
2011 - 08 P/N D76VD Rev. A02Getting Started With Your System 3
Before You Begin
NOTE: Throughout the document, Dell PowerVault MD3200 series storage array
refers to both Dell PowerVault MD3200 and Dell PowerVault MD3220. Dell
PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure refers to both Dell PowerVault
MD1200 and Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Before setting up your Dell PowerVault MD3200 series storage array, you must
consider certain best practices to ensure that your storage array operates at
maximum efficiency and offers full redundancy (if required).
• Throughout the network, always use a Category 5e (or higher)
Ethernet cable.
• Before connecting any cables between the host server and storage array,
physically label each port and connector.
• Always follow proper power-up and power-down procedures when cycling
power across the network. You must also ensure that critical network
components are on separate power circuits.
Other Documentation and Media You May Need
WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with
your system. Warranty information may be included within this document or
as a separate document.
NOTE: All PowerVault MD3200 series documents are available at
support.dell.com/manuals.
• The rack documentation included with your rack solution describes how to
install your system into a rack.
• The Owner’s Manual provides information about system features and
describes how to troubleshoot the system and install or replace system
components.
• The Deployment Guide provides information about installing and
configuring the software and hardware.
• The CLI Guide provides information about using the command line
interface (CLI) to configure and manage your storage array.4 Getting Started With Your System
• The SMI-S Programmer’s Guide provides information about using the
SMI-S provider and SMI-S programming.
• Any media that ships with your system that provides documentation and
tools for configuring and managing your system, including those
pertaining to the operating system, system management software,
system updates, and system components that you purchased
with your system.
NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the
updates first because they often supersede information in other documents.
Supported Operating Systems
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
NOTE: For the latest information on all the supported operating system versions,
see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals.Getting Started With Your System 5
Common Configurations
Cabling Your Direct-Attached Hosts
Server 1 Server 2
Corporate, public,
or private network
Server 3 Server 4
PowerVault MD3200
series storage array6 Getting Started With Your System
Installation and Configuration
WARNING: Before performing the following procedure, review the safety
instructions that came with the system.
Unpacking the System
Unpack your system and identify each item with the packing list that shipped
with your system.
Installing the Rails and System in a Rack
Assemble the rails and install the system in the rack following the safety
instructions and the rack installation instructions provided with your system.
NOTE: To balance the weight load, it is recommended that you install the
PowerVault MD3200 series storage array at the bottom of the rack and the
PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures above it.Getting Started With Your System 7
Connecting the Power Cable(s)
Ensure that the power switch is in the OFF position before connecting the
power cables. Connect the system’s power cable(s) to the system.
Securing the Power Cable(s)
Secure the cable(s) firmly to the bracket using the provided strap.
Plug the other end of the power cables into a grounded electrical outlet or
a separate power source such as an uninterrupted power supply (UPS) or
a power distribution unit (PDU). Each power supply must be connected
to a separate power circuit.8 Getting Started With Your System
Cabling Your Expansion Enclosure
Turning On the Enclosure
Turn on the components in the following order:
1 PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures (if used)
NOTE: Before turning on the storage array, ensure that the expansion
enclosure status LED is blue.
PowerVault MD3200
series storage array
PowerVault MD1200
series expansion
enclosure 1 (optional)
PowerVault MD1200
series expansion
enclosure 2 (optional)Getting Started With Your System 9
2 PowerVault MD3200 series storage array
NOTE: Before turning on the host server(s), ensure that the storage array
status LED is blue.
3 Host server(s)
Installing the Bezel
Install the bezel (optional).
Installing the MD Storage Software
NOTE: For detailed instructions about installing the MD storage software, setting
up the enclosure, and the post-installation tasks, see the Deployment Guide.
The MD Storage Manager application configures, manages, and monitors the
storage array. To install the MD storage software:
1 Insert the MD series resource media.
Depending on your operating system, the installer may launch
automatically. If the installer does not launch automatically, navigate to
the root directory of the installation media (or downloaded installer
image) and run the md_launcher.exe file. For Linux-based systems,
navigate to the root of the resource media and run the autorun file.
NOTE: By default, the Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating system mounts the
resource media with the -noexec mount option which does not allow you to
run executable files. To change this setting, see the Readme file in the root
directory of the installation media.10 Getting Started With Your System
2 Select Install MD Storage Software.
3 Read and accept the license agreement.
4 Select one of the following installation options from the Install Set
drop-down menu:
• Full (recommended)—Installs the MD Storage Manager (client)
software, host-based storage agent, multipath driver, and hardware
providers.
• Host Only—Installs the host-based storage agent and multipath
drivers.
• Management—Installs the management software and hardware
providers.
• Custom—Allows you to select specific components.
5 Select the MD storage array model(s) you are setting up to serve as data
storage for this host server.
6 Choose whether to start the event monitor service automatically when the
host server reboots or manually
NOTE: This option is applicable only to Windows client software installation.
7 Confirm the installation location and click Install.
8 If prompted, reboot the host server once the installation completes.
9 Start the MD Storage Manager and discover the array(s).
10 If applicable, activate any premium features purchased with your storage
array. If you purchased premium features, see the printed activation card
shipped with your storage array.
NOTE: The MD Storage Manager installer automatically installs the required
drivers, firmware, and operating system patches/hotfixes to operate your storage
array. These drivers and firmware are also available at support.dell.com. In
addition, see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals for any additional
settings and/or software required for your specific storage array.Getting Started With Your System 11
Locating Your Service Tag
Your system is identified by a unique Express Service Code and Service Tag
number. The Express Service Code and Service Tag are found on the front
of the system and at the back of the system next to the RAID controller
modules. This information is used by Dell to route support calls to the
appropriate personnel.
NOM Information (Mexico Only)
The following information is provided on the device described
in this document in compliance with the requirements of the
official Mexican standards (NOM):
Importer:
Model number: E03J and E04J
Supply voltage: 100–240 V CA
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Current consumption: 8.6 A12 Getting Started With Your System
Technical Specifications
Drives
PowerVault MD3200 Up to twelve 3.5-inch SAS hot-swappable
hard drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps)
PowerVault MD3220 Up to twenty four 2.5-inch SAS hot-swappable
hard drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps)
RAID Controller Modules
RAID controller modules • One or two hot-swappable modules with
temperature sensors
• 2 GB of cache per controller
Back-Panel Connectors (Per RAID Controller Module)
SAS connectors • Four SAS IN ports to connect hosts
• One SAS OUT port for expansion to an additional
PowerVault MD1200 series enclosure
NOTE: SAS connectors are SFF-8088 compliant.
Serial connector One 6-pin mini-DIN connector
NOTE: For technical support use only.
Management Ethernet
connector
One 100/1000 Base-T port Ethernet for out-of-band
management of the enclosure
NOTE: The default management port IP addresses for
the primary and secondary RAID controller modules
are 192.168.128.101 and 192.168.128.102, respectively.
By default, the management ports are set to Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If the controller
is unable to get an IP address configuration from
a DHCP server within a specified time out period
(approximately 3 minutes), it defaults back to
static IP addressing. For more information,
see the Deployment Guide.Getting Started With Your System 13
Expansion
PowerVault MD1200 series Supports a maximum of 192 hard drives with any
combination of PowerVault MD1200 or PowerVault
MD1220 expansion enclosures. Support for 192 hard
drives is a Premium Feature and requires activation.
The maximum number of hard drives supported
without using the Premium Feature is 120.
Redundant path connectivity provides redundant
data paths to each hard drive.
Backplane Board
Connectors • 12 or 24 SAS hard-drive connectors
• Two power supply/cooling fan module connectors
• Two sets of RAID controller module connectors
• One control panel connector for front LEDs and
system identification button
Sensors Two temperature sensors
LED Indicators
Front panel • One two-color LED indicator for system status
• Two single-color LED indicators for power and
enclosure mode
NOTE: The enclosure mode LED is not applicable to
the PowerVault MD3200 series storage array.
Hard-drive carrier • One single-color activity LED
• One two-color LED status indicator per drive
Power supply/cooling fan Three LED status indicators for power supply status,
power supply/fan fault, and AC status14 Getting Started With Your System
RAID controller module Six single-color LEDs:
• One battery fault
• One cache active
• One controller fault
• One controller power
• One system identification
• One management Ethernet activity
Six two-color LEDs:
• Four SAS IN link or fault
• One SAS OUT link or fault
• One management Ethernet link speed
Switch
System identification button Located on the front control panel. This button is
used to locate a system within a rack.
Enclosure mode switch Located on the front of the system. This switch is
not applicable to the PowerVault MD3200 series
storage array.
Password reset switch Located on the back-panel of the RAID controller
module. This switch is used to reset the storage array
password.
Power Supplies
AC power supply (per power supply)
Wattage 600 W
Voltage 100–240 VAC (8.6 A–4.3 A)
Heat dissipation 100 W
Maximum inrush current Under typical line conditions and over the entire
system ambient operating range, the inrush current
may reach a maximum of 55 A per power supply for
10 ms or less.
LED Indicators (continued)Getting Started With Your System 15
Available Hard Drive Power (Per Slot)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
RAID Controller Module Power (Per Slot)
Maximum power consumption 100 W
Physical
PowerVault MD3200
Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches)
Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches)
Depth 60.20 cm (23.70 inches)
Weight (maximum
configuration)
29.30 kg (64.6 lb)
Weight (empty) 8.84 kg (19.5 lb)
PowerVault MD3220
Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches)
Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches)
Depth 54.90 cm (21.61 inches)
Weight (maximum
configuration)
24.22 kg (53.4 lb)
Weight (empty) 8.61 kg (19 lb)16 Getting Started With Your System
Environmental
NOTE: For additional information about environmental measurements for specific
system configurations, see www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Temperature
Operating 10 °C to 35 °C (50 °F to 95 °F) with a maximum
temperature gradation of 10 °C per hour
NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum
operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft.
Storage –40 °C to 65 °C (–40 °F to 149 °F) with a maximum
temperature gradation of 20°C per hour.
Relative humidity
Operating 20% to 80% (noncondensing) with a maximum
humidity gradation of 10% per hour
Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing)
Maximum vibration
Operating 0.25 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min
Storage 0.5 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min
Maximum shock
Operating One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on
each side of the system) of 31 G for 2.6 ms in the
operational orientation
Storage Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the
positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on
each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms
Altitude
Operating –16 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)
NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum
operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft.
Storage –16 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)
Airborne Contaminant Level
Class G1 as defined by ISA-S71.04-1985Disková pole Dell PowerVault
MD3200 a MD3220
Začínáme se systémem
Číslo modelu série: E03J a E04JPoznámky a upozornění
POZNÁMKA: POZNÁMKA označuje důležité informace, které pomáhají lepšímu využití
počítače.
UPOZORNĚNÍ: UPOZORNĚNÍ poukazuje na možnost poškození hardwaru nebo
ztráty dat v případě nedodržení pokynů.
VAROVÁNÍ: VAROVÁNÍ upozorňuje na potenciální nebezpečí poškození majetku,
úrazu nebo smrti.
____________________
Informace v této publikaci se mohou bez předchozího upozornění změnit.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Všechna práva vyhrazena.
Jakákoli reprodukce těchto materiálů bez písemného povolení společnosti Dell Inc. je přísně zakázána.
Ochranné známky použité v tomto textu: Dell™, logo DELL a PowerVault™ jsou ochranné známky
společnosti Dell Inc. Microsoft
®
a Windows Server
®
jsou buď ochranné známky nebo registrované
ochranné známky společnosti Microsoft Corporation ve Spojených státech anebo v jiných zemích.
Red Hat
®
a Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
jsou registrované ochranné známky společnosti Red Hat, Inc.
v USA a v dalších zemích. SUSE
®
je registrovaná ochranná známka společnosti Novell, Inc. v USA
a dalších zemích. VMware
®
je registrovaná ochranná známka společnosti VMware, Inc. v USA anebo
v dalších zemích.
Ostatní ochranné známky a obchodní názvy mohou být v této publikaci použity v souvislosti
s právními subjekty, které si na tyto ochranné známky a názvy svých produktů činí nárok. Společnost
Dell Inc. se zříká všech vlastnických nároků na ochranné známky a obchodní názvy jiné než vlastní.
Číslo modelu série: E03J a E04J
2011 - 08 Č. dílu D76VD Rev. A02Začínáme se systémem 19
Než začnete
POZNÁMKA: V tomto dokumentu označuje název diskové pole série Dell PowerVault
MD3200 jak Dell PowerVault MD3200, tak i Dell PowerVault MD3220. Název rozšiřující
skříň série Dell PowerVault MD1200 se vztahuje jak k Dell PowerVault MD1200, tak k
Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Než začnete s instalací diskového pole série Dell PowerVault MD3200, vezměte
v úvahu osvědčené metody, s jejichž pomocí zajistíte, aby diskové pole pracovalo
s maximální účinností a nabízelo plnou redundanci (pokud je třeba).
• V celé síti používejte Ethernetový kabel kategorie 5e (nebo vyšší).
• Než mezi hostitelským serverem a diskovým polem připojíte jakékoli
kabely, označte každý port a konektor.
• Pokud jsou sesít’ované systémy pod napětím, vždy dodržujte správné
postupy při zapínání a vypínání systémů. Musíte též zajistit, aby důležité
sít’ové komponenty měly oddělené hlavní obvody.
Další dokumenty a média, které můžete potřebovat
VAROVÁNÍ: Prostudujte si informace o bezpečnosti a předpisech, které byly
dodány se systémem. Informace o záruce jsou součástí tohoto dokumentu nebo
jsou přiloženy samostatně.
POZNÁMKA: Veškeré dokumenty pro sérii PowerVault MD3200 lze získat na adrese
support.dell.com/manuals.
• Pokyny k instalaci do stojanu dodané se stojanovým řešením popisují
instalaci systému do stojanu.
• Příručka majitele hardwaru obsahuje informace o funkcích systému a
popisuje řešení problémů se systémem a instalaci nebo výměnu
komponent.
• Instalační příručka obsahuje informace o instalaci a konfiguraci softwaru a
hardwaru.
• Příručka CLI obsahuje informace o tom, jak ke konfiguraci a správě
diskového pole používat rozhraní CLI.
• Příručka programátora SMI-S obsahuje informace o tom, jak používat
poskytovatele SMI-A, a o programování SMI-S.20 Začínáme se systémem
• Média dodaná se systémem obsahují dokumentaci a nástroje pro
konfiguraci a správu systému. Mohou být dodána například média týkající
se operačního systému, softwaru pro správu systému, aktualizací systému a
komponent zakoupených se systémem.
POZNÁMKA: Vždy nejprve zkontrolujte a pročtěte aktualizace uvedené na adrese
support.dell.com/manuals, protože tyto aktualizace často nahrazují informace v
ostatních dokumentech.
Podporované operační systémy
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
POZNÁMKA: Nejnovější informace o verzích všech podporovaných operačních
systémů naleznete v matici odborné pomoci na adrese support.dell.com/manuals.Začínáme se systémem 21
Obvyklé konfigurace
Připojení hostitelských systémů v DAS
Server 1 Server 2
Firemní, veřejná
nebo soukromá sít’
Server 3 Server 4
Diskové pole série
PowerVault MD320022 Začínáme se systémem
Instalace a konfigurace
VAROVÁNÍ: Před provedením následujícího postupu si prostudujte bezpečnostní
pokyny dodané se systémem.
Rozbalení systému
Rozbalte systém a zkontrolujte každou položku dle seznamu, který jste
obdrželi společně se systémem.
Instalace kolejniček a systému do stojanu
Sestavte kolejničky a nainstalujte systém do stojanu podle bezpečnostních
pokynů a pokynů k instalaci do stojanu dodaných se systémem.
POZNÁMKA: Chcete-li správně vyvážit stojan, doporučujeme namontovat
diskové pole série PowerVault MD3200 do spodní části stojanu a rozšiřující skříně
PowerVault MD1200 nad ně.Začínáme se systémem 23
Připojení napájecích kabelů
Předtím, než připojíte napájecí kabely, se prosím ujistěte, že se vypínač
nachází v poloze VYPNUTÝ. Připojte napájecí kabely k systému.
Zajištění napájecích kabelů
Pomocí řemínku pevně připevněte kabely k držáku.
Poté zasuňte druhé konce napájecích kabelů do uzemněné elektrické zásuvky
nebo je připojte k samostatnému zdroji napájení, například ke zdroji
nepřerušitelného napájení (UPS) nebo k jednotce rozvaděče (PDU). Každý
zdroj energie musí být připojen k vlastnímu hlavnímu obvodu.24 Začínáme se systémem
Připojení rozšiřující skříně
Zapnutí rozšiřující skříně
Zapněte komponenty v následujícím pořadí:
1 Rozšiřující skříně série PowerVault MD1200 (pokud se používají).
POZNÁMKA: Než zapnete diskové pole, ujistěte se, že LED na rozšiřující skříni
svítí modře.
Disková pole série
PowerVault MD3200
Rozšiřující skříň
PowerVault MD1200 1
(volitelné)
Rozšiřující skříň
PowerVault MD1200 2
(volitelné)Začínáme se systémem 25
2 Disková pole série PowerVault MD3200.
POZNÁMKA: Než zapnete hostitelské servery, ujistěte se, že LED na diskovém
poli svítí modře.
3 Hostitelské servery.
Instalace čelního krytu
Nainstalujte čelní kryt (volitelný).
Instalace softwaru pro úložiště MD Storage
POZNÁMKA: Podrobné pokyny k instalaci softwaru pro úložiště MD Storage, nastavení
skříně a k úkolům, které je třeba vykonat po instalaci, viz Instalační příručka.
Aplikace MD Storage Manager slouží ke konfiguraci, správě a sledování
diskového pole. Chcete-li nainstalovat software pro úložiště MD Storage:
1 Vložte zdrojové médium série MD.
V závislosti na vašem operačním systému se může automaticky spustit
instalační program. Pokud se instalační program automaticky nespustí,
přejděte do kořenového adresáře instalačního média (nebo staženého
obrazu instalačního programu) a spust’te soubor md_launcher.exe. U
systémů Linux přejděte do kořenového adresáře zdrojového média a
spust’te soubor autorun.26 Začínáme se systémem
POZNÁMKA: Operační systém Red Hat Enterprise Linux standardně připojí
zdrojové médium za použití možnosti –noexec, která vám neumožňuje spouštět
spustitelné soubory. Chcete-li toto nastavení změnit, nahlédněte do souboru
Readme v kořenovém adresáři instalačního média.
2 Zvolte možnost Install MD Storage Software (Instalovat software pro
úložiště MD).
3 Přečtěte si licenční smlouvu a přijměte ji.
4 V nabídce Install Set (Instalační balík) vyberte jednu z následujících
možností instalace:
• Full (Kompletní - doporučené) - umožňuje instalaci programu MD
Storage Manager (klient), hostitelského agenta, ovladačů vícecestných
disků a poskytovatele hardwaru.
• Host Only (Lokální) - umožňuje instalaci hostitelského agenta a
ovladačů vícecestných disků.
• Management (Správa) - umožňuje instalaci softwaru pro správu a
poskytovatele hardwaru.
• Custom (Vlastní) - umožňuje vybrat konkrétní komponenty.
5 Vyberte modely diskových polí MD, které mají sloužit jako datová úložiště
tohoto hostitelského serveru.
6 Vyberte, zda se má po restartu hostitelského serveru spustit služba
sledování událostí automaticky nebo manuálně.
POZNÁMKA: Tato možnost je platná pouze pro instalace klientského softwaru
systému Windows.
7 Potvrd’te umístění instalace a klepněte na Install (Instalace).
8 Jakmile o to budete po dokončení instalace požádáni, restartujte
hostitelský server.
9 Spust’te správce MD Storage Manager a vyhledejte disková pole.
10 Pokud je třeba, aktivujte veškeré dodatečné funkce zakoupené s diskovým
polem. Pokud jste si zakoupili dodatečné funkce, použijte tištěnou
aktivační kartu dodanou s diskovým polem.
POZNÁMKA: Instalátor programu MD Storage Manager automaticky nainstaluje
ovladače, firmware a opravy/hotfixy operačního systému potřebné pro práci s diskovým
polem. Tyto ovladače a firmware lze též získat na adrese support.dell.com. Další
informace o nastavení anebo softwaru potřebném pro konkrétní diskové pole naleznete v
matici odborné pomoci na adrese support.dell.com/manuals.Začínáme se systémem 27
Vyhledání servisního označení
Váš systém je identifikován jedinečným kódem expresní služby a číslem
servisního označení. Kód expresní služby a servisní označení lze nalézt na
přední straně systému a na zadní straně systému vedle modulů řadičů RAID.
Tyto informace používá společnost Dell k nasměrování žádostí o odbornou
pomoc příslušným zaměstnancům.
Informace NOM (jen pro Mexiko)
K zařízení popsanému v tomto dokumentu se vztahují v souladu s požadavky
oficiální mexické normy NOM následující informace:
Dovozce: Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V.
Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso
Col. Lomas Altas
11950 México, D.F.
Číslo modelu: E03J a E04J
Napájecí napětí: 100–240 V stř.
Frekvence: 50/60 Hz
Spotřeba proudu: 8,6 A28 Začínáme se systémem
Technické specifikace
Jednotky
PowerVault MD3200 Až dvanáct 3,5palcových pevných disků SAS, které
lze vyměňovat za chodu (3,0 Gb/s a 6,0 Gb/s)
PowerVault MD3220 Až dvacet čtyři 2,5palcových pevných disků SAS,
které lze vyměňovat za chodu (3,0 Gb/s a 6,0 Gb/s)
Moduly řadičů RAID
Moduly řadičů RAID • Jeden nebo dva moduly s tepelnými čidly, které lze
vyměňovat za chodu
• 2 GB vyrovnávací paměti na řadič
Konektory na zadním panelu (na jeden modul řadiče RAID)
Konektory SAS • Čtyři vstupní porty SAS IN k připojení hostitelů
• Jeden výstupní port SAS OUT k rozšíření o další
skříň série PowerVault MD1200
POZNÁMKA: Konektory SAS vyhovují SFF-8088.
Konektor sériového rozhraní Jeden 6kolíkový konektor mini-DIN
POZNÁMKA: Pouze pro zaměstnance odborné pomoci.
Konektor Ethernetu pro řízení Jeden port pro Ethernet typu 100/1000 Base-T pro
vzdálenou správu skříně
POZNÁMKA: Výchozí IP adresy řídicích portů primárního
a sekundárního modulu řadiče RAID jsou 192.168.128.101
a 192.168.128.102. Řídicí porty jsou standardně
nastaveny na práci s protokolem DHCP. Pokud řadič není
schopen získat od serveru DHCP konfiguraci IP adresy ve
stanoveném časovém limitu (přibližně 3 minuty),
standardně se přepne na používání statické IP adresy.
Další informace viz Instalační příručka.Začínáme se systémem 29
Rozšíření
Série PowerVault MD1200 Podporuje maximálně 192 pevných disků s jakoukoli
kombinací rozšiřujících skříní PowerVault MD1200
či PowerVault MD1220. Podpora 192 pevných disků
je dodatečná funkce a vyžaduje aktivaci. Maximální
počet podporovaných pevných disků bez použití
této dodatečné funkce je 120.
Redundantní konektivita cest poskytuje
redundantní datové cesty pro každý pevný disk.
Zadní deska
Konektory • 12 nebo 24 konektorů pro pevné disky SAS
• Dva konektory pro napájecí zdroje/moduly s
chladicími ventilátory
• Dvě sady konektorů pro moduly řadičů RAID
• Jeden konektor pro ovládací panel předních LED a
tlačítko identifikace systému
Senzory Dva senzory teploty
Indikátory LED
Čelní panel • Jeden dvoubarevný indikátor LED pro
stav systému
• Dva jednobarevné indikátory LED pro napájení a
režim pro použití ve skříni
POZNÁMKA: Indikátor LED pro režim ve skříni se
nenachází na diskových polích série PowerVault MD3200.
Nosič pevných disků • Jeden jednobarevný indikátor LED pro aktivitu
• Jeden dvoubarevný indikátor LED pro stav
každého disku
Napájecí zdroj/chladicí
ventilátor
Tři indikátory LED pro stav napájecího zdroje,
selhání napájecího zdroje nebo ventilátoru a stav
napájení střídavým proudem30 Začínáme se systémem
Modul řadiče RAID Šest jednobarevných indikátorů LED:
• Jeden pro závadu baterie
• Jeden pro aktivní vyrovnávací pamět’
• Jeden pro závadu řadiče
• Jeden pro napájení řadiče
• Jeden pro identifikaci systému
• Jeden pro aktivitu Ethernetu pro řízení
Šest dvoubarevných indikátorů LED:
• Čtyři pro připojení nebo závady SAS IN
• Jeden pro připojení nebo závady SAS OUT
• Jeden pro rychlost připojení Ethernetu pro řízení
Přepínač
Tlačítko pro identifikaci
systému
Umístěno na předním řídícím panelu. Toto tlačítko
slouží k nalezení systému uvnitř stojanu.
Přepínač režimu pro použití ve
skříni
Umístěný na přední straně systému. Tento přepínač
se nenachází v diskovém poli PowerVault MD3200.
Tlačítko pro vymazání hesla Umístěno na zadní straně modulu řadiče RAID.
Toto tlačítko se používá k resetování hesla diskových
polí.
Dodávky energie
Střídavý proud (na jeden napájecí zdroj)
Výkon 600 W
Napětí 100 – 240 V stř. (8,6 A – 4,3 A)
Odvod tepla 100 W
Maximální nárazový proud V typických podmínkách napájení a v celém
provozním rozsahu systému může nárazový proud
dosáhnout 55 A na jeden napájecí zdroj po dobu
10 ms nebo méně.
Indikátory LED (pokračování)Začínáme se systémem 31
Dostupné napájení pevných disků (na zdířku)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
Napájení modulu řadiče RAID (na zdířku)
Maximální spotřeba energie 100 W
Rozměry
PowerVault MD3200
Výška 8,68 cm (3,41 palců)
Šířka 44,63 cm (17,57 palců)
Hloubka 60,20 cm (23,70 palců)
Hmotnost (maximální
konfigurace)
29,30 kg (64,6 lb)
Hmotnost (prázdné) 8,84 kg (19,5 lb)
PowerVault MD3220
Výška 8,68 cm (3,41 palců)
Šířka 44,63 cm (17,57 palců)
Hloubka 54,90 cm (21,61 palců)
Hmotnost (maximální
konfigurace)
24,22 kg (53,4 lb)
Hmotnost (prázdné) 8,61 kg (19 lb)32 Začínáme se systémem
Prostředí
POZNÁMKA: Další informace o měřených údajích prostředí najdete pro jednotlivé
systémové konfigurace na adrese www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Teplota
Provozní 10 až 35 °C s maximálním nárůstem teploty o 10 °C
za hodinu
POZNÁMKA: V nadmořských výškách nad 900 metrů je
maximální provozní teplota snížena o 1 °C na každých
300 metrů.
Skladovací -40 až 65 °C s maximálním nárůstem teploty o 20 °C
za hodinu
Relativní vlhkost
Provozní 20 až 80 % (bez kondenzace) s maximálním
nárůstem vlhkosti o 10 % za hodinu
Skladovací 5 až 95 % (bez kondenzace)
Maximální vibrace
Provozní 0,25 G při 3–200 Hz po dobu 15 minut
Skladovací 0,5 G při 3–200 Hz po dobu 15 minut
Maximální ráz
Provozní Jeden rázový impuls v kladné ose z (jeden impuls na
každé straně systému) o síle 31 G v délce do 2,6 ms v
provozní orientaci
Skladovací Šest po sobě jdoucích rázových impulsů v kladné i
záporné ose x, y a z (jeden impuls na každé straně
systému) o síle 71 G v délce do 2 ms
Nadmořská výška
Provozní -16 až 3 048 m
POZNÁMKA: V nadmořských výškách nad 900 metrů je
maximální provozní teplota snížena o 1 °C na každých
300 metrů.
Skladovací -16 až 10 600 m
Úroveň znečištění vzduchu
Třída G1 dle normy ISA-S71.04-1985Matrices de stockage
Dell PowerVault MD3200
et MD3220
Guide de mise en route
Séries de modèle réglementaire E03J et E04JRemarques, précautions et avertissements
REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent
vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION vous avertit d'un risque d'endommagement du
matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non-respect des instructions.
AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement
du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort.
____________________
Les informations que contient ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc.
est strictement interdite.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL et PowerVault™ sont des marques de
Dell Inc. Microsoft
®
et Windows Server
®
sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft
Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat
®
et Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
sont des
marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. SUSE
®
est une marque
déposée de Novell, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. VMware
®
est une marque déposée de
VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres juridictions.
D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence
aux entités revendiquant la propriété de ces marques ou de ces noms de produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout
intérêt exclusif dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens.
Séries de modèle réglementaire E03J et E04J
2011 - 08 N/P D76VD Rév. A02Guide de mise en route 35
Avant de commencer
REMARQUE : dans ce document, les références à la matrice de stockage Dell
PowerVault série MD3200 concernent les matrices de stockage Dell PowerVault
MD3200 et Dell PowerVault MD3220. Le boîtier d'extension Dell PowerVault MD1200
désigne les boîtiers Dell PowerVault MD1200 et Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Avant d'installer votre matrice de stockage Dell PowerVault série MD3200,
vous devez considérer certaines pratiques d'excellence pour assurer le
fonctionnement le plus efficace possible de votre matrice de stockage et une
redondance complète (si nécessaire).
• Utilisez toujours un câble Ethernet de catégorie 5e (ou plus) à travers
le réseau.
• Avant de connecter tout câble entre le serveur hôte et la matrice de
stockage, étiquetez physiquement chaque port et chaque connecteur.
• Suivez toujours les procédures de mise sous et hors tension lors des
cycles d'alimentation du réseau. Vous devez également vous assurer que
les composants essentiels du réseau se trouvent sur différents circuits
d'alimentation.
Autre documentation et support dont vous
pourriez avoir besoin
AVERTISSEMENT : reportez-vous aux informations sur la sécurité et les
réglementations qui accompagnent votre système. Les informations sur la garantie
se trouvent dans ce document ou dans un document distinct.
REMARQUE : tous les documents PowerVault série MD3200 sont disponibles sur
le site support.dell.com/manuals.
• La documentation fournie avec le rack indique comment installer le
système dans un rack.
• Le Manuel du propriétaire du matériel contient des informations sur les
caractéristiques du système, ainsi que des instructions relatives au
dépannage et à l'installation ou au remplacement de composants.
• Le Guide de déploiement fournit des informations sur l'installation et la
configuration du logiciel et du matériel.
• Le Guide CLI fournit des informations sur l'utilisation de l'interface de ligne
de commande (CLI) pour configurer et gérer votre matrice de stockage.36 Guide de mise en route
• Le document SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Guide de programmeur SMI-S)
contient des informations sur l'utilisation de l'opérateur SMI-S et la
programmation de SMI-S.
• Tous les supports fournis avec le système contiennent de la documentation
et des outils de configuration et de gestion de votre système d'exploitation,
notamment du système même et du logiciel de gestion, des mises à jour et
des composants système que vous avez achetés avec le système.
REMARQUE : vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site
support.dell.com/manuals et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent
souvent les informations que contiennent les autres documents.
Systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
REMARQUE : pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes sur toutes les
versions de système d'exploitation prises en charge, reportez-vous à la
Matrice de support à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals.Guide de mise en route 37
Configurations courantes
Câblage des hôtes reliés directement
Serveur 1 Serveur 2
Réseau d'entreprise,
public ou privé
Serveur 3 Serveur 4
Matrice de stockage
PowerVault série MD3200 38 Guide de mise en route
Installation et configuration
AVERTISSEMENT : avant d'exécuter la procédure ci-dessous, lisez les
consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système.
Déballage du système
Déballez votre système et identifiez chaque élément en consultant la liste de
composants livrée avec votre système.
Installation des rails et du système dans un rack
Assemblez les rails et installez le système dans le rack en suivant les consignes
de sécurité et les instructions d'installation du rack fournies avec votre système.
REMARQUE : pour équilibrer la charge, nous vous recommandons d'installer la
matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200 en bas du rack et les boîtiers
d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 au-dessus.Guide de mise en route 39
Branchement du ou des câbles d'alimentation
Avant de connecter les câbles d'alimentation, assurez-vous que le commutateur
d'alimentation est en position OFF (ÉTEINT). Branchez le ou les câbles
d'alimentation sur le système.
Fixation du ou des câbles d'alimentation
Fixez fermement les câbles au support de fixation à l'aide de la lanière fournie.
Branchez ensuite l'autre extrémité des câbles d'alimentation sur une prise de
courant mise à la masse ou sur une source d'alimentation autonome (onduleur
[UPS] ou unité de distribution de l'alimentation [PDU]...). Chaque bloc
d'alimentation doit être connecté à un circuit d'alimentation séparé.40 Guide de mise en route
Câblage de votre boîtier d'extension
Mise sous tension du boîtier
Mettez les composants sous tension dans l'ordre suivant :
1 Boîtiers d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 (si utilisés)
REMARQUE : avant d'allumer la matrice de stockage, assurez-vous que le
voyant d'état du boîtier d'extension est bleu.
Matrice de stockage
PowerVault série
MD3200
Boîtier d'extension
PowerVault série
MD1200 1 (en option)
Boîtier d'extension
PowerVault série
MD1200 2 (en option)Guide de mise en route 41
2 Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200
REMARQUE : avant d'allumer le(s) serveur(s) hôte, assurez-vous que le
voyant d'état de la matrice de stockage est bleu.
3 Serveur(s) hôte
Installation du cadre
Installez le cadre (en option).
Installation du logiciel MD Storage
REMARQUE : pour des instructions détaillées sur l'installation du logiciel
MD Storage, la configuration du boîtier et les tâches de post-installation, voir le
Guide de déploiement.
L'application MD Storage Manager configure, gère et contrôle la matrice de
stockage. Pour installer le logiciel MD Storage Manager :
1 Insérez le support Ressource série MD.
En fonction de votre système d'exploitation, l'installateur se lancera peut-
être automatiquement. Si l'installateur ne se lance pas automatiquement,
naviguez dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation (ou téléchargez
l'image d'installateur) et exécutez le fichier md_launcher.exe. Pour les
systèmes exécutant Linux, naviguez vers la racine du support Ressource et
exécutez le fichier autorun (Exécution auto).42 Guide de mise en route
REMARQUE : par défaut, Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) monte le support
Ressource à l'aide de l'option de montage –noexec mount, qui ne vous permet
pas d'exécuter les fichiers exécutables. Pour modifier ce paramètre, consultez
le fichier Lisez-moi dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation.
2 Sélectionnez Install MD Storage Software (Installer le logiciel de
stockage MD).
3 Lisez le contrat de licence et acceptez-le.
4 Sélectionnez l'une des options d'installation suivantes dans le menu
déroulant Install Set (Configuration d'installation) :
• Full (recommended) (Complète - recommandée) : installe le logiciel
(client) MD Storage Manager, l'agent de stockage hôte, le pilote
multivoies et les fournisseurs de matériel.
• Host Only (Hôte uniquement) : installe l'agent de stockage hôte et
les pilotes multivoies.
• Management (Gestion) : installe le logiciel de gestion et les
fournisseurs de matériel.
• Custom (Personnalisée) : permet de sélectionner des composants
spécifiques.
5 Sélectionnez le(s) modèle(s) de matrice de stockage MD que vous
souhaitez définir comme stockage de données pour ce serveur hôte.
6 Choisissez de démarrer le service de moniteur des événements
automatiquement lors du redémarrage du serveur hôte ou manuellement.
REMARQUE : cette option ne s'applique qu'à l'installation du logiciel
client Windows.
7 Confirmez l'emplacement de l'installation et cliquez sur Install (Installer).
8 En réponse à l'invitation (le cas échéant), redémarrez le serveur hôte une
fois l'installation terminée.
9 Démarrez MD Storage Manager et lancez la détection des matrices.
10 Le cas échéant, activez les fonctions premium achetées avec votre matrice
de stockage. Si vous avez acheté des fonctions premium, consultez la carte
d'activation livrée avec votre matrice de stockage.Guide de mise en route 43
REMARQUE : l'installateur MD Storage Manager installe automatiquement les
pilotes, micrologiciel, et correctifs de système d'exploitation nécessaires pour le
fonctionnement de votre matrice de stockage. Ces pilotes et micrologiciels sont
également disponibles à l'adresse support.dell.com. Consultez également la Matrice
de prise en charge à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals pour des paramètres et/ou
logiciels supplémentaires requis pour votre matrice de stockage spécifique.
Identification du numéro de service
Votre système est identifié par un code de service express et un numéro de
service uniques. Le code de service express et le numéro de service se situent à
l'avant et à l'arrière du système à côté des modules de contrôleur RAID.
Dell utilise ces informations pour acheminer les appels de support au
technicien qui convient.44 Guide de mise en route
Informations NOM (Mexique uniquement)
Les informations suivantes sur l'appareil décrit dans ce document sont fournies
conformément aux exigences de la Norme Officielle Mexicaine (NOM) :
Caractéristiques techniques
Importateur :
Numéro de modèle : E03J et E04J
Tension
d'alimentation :
100 à 240 V CA
Fréquence : 50/60 Hz
Consommation
électrique :
8,6 A
Lecteurs
PowerVault MD3200 Jusqu'à douze disques durs SAS 3,5 pouces
remplaçables à chaud (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s)
PowerVault MD3220 Jusqu'à vingt-quatre disques durs SAS 2,5 pouces
remplaçables à chaud (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s)
Modules de contrôleur RAID
Les modules de contrôleur
RAID
• Un ou deux modules remplaçables à chaud avec
capteurs de température
• 2 Go de mémoire cache par contrôleurGuide de mise en route 45
Connecteurs du panneau arrière (par module de contrôleur RAID)
Connecteurs SAS • Quatre ports d'entrée SAS pour connecter
des hôtes
• Un port de sortie SAS pour l'extension à un boîtier
PowerVault MD1200 supplémentaire
REMARQUE : les connecteurs SAS sont conformes
SFF-8088.
Connecteur série Un connecteur mini-DIN à 6 broches
REMARQUE : cette option est réservée au personnel
de maintenance.
Connecteur Ethernet de gestion Un port Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T pour une gestion
hors bande du boîtier
REMARQUE : les adresses IP de port de gestion par
défaut des modules de contrôleur RAID principal et
secondaire sont respectivement192.168.128.101 et
192.168.128.102. Par défaut, les ports de gestion sont
définis sur le protocole DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration). Si le contrôleur ne parvient pas à
obtenir une configuration d'adresse IP depuis un
serveur DHCP au cours d'une durée d'attente
spécifiée (environ 3 minutes), il revient à l'adressage
IP statique par défaut. Pour plus d'informations, voir le
Guide de déploiement.
Extension
PowerVault Série MD1200 Prend en charge jusqu'à 192 disques durs avec
n'importe quelle combinaison de boîtiers
d'extension PowerVault MD1200 ou PowerVault
MD1220. La prise en charge de 192 disques durs est
une fonction premium qui doit être activée. Le
nombre maximum de disques durs pris en charge
sans recours à la fonction premium est 120.
La connectivité à chemin redondant fournit des
chemins de données redondants à chaque disque dur. 46 Guide de mise en route
Carte de fond de panier
Connecteurs • 12 ou 24 connecteurs de disque dur SAS
• Deux connecteurs pour les modules de
ventilation/alimentation
• Deux ensembles de connecteurs de module de
contrôleur RAID
• Un connecteur de panneau de configuration pour
les voyants avant et le bouton d'identification de
système
Capteurs Deux capteurs de température
Voyants
Panneau avant • Un voyant bichrome indiquant l'état du système
• Deux voyants monochromes (alimentation et
mode boîtier)
REMARQUE : le voyant du mode boîtier ne
s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage PowerVault
série MD3200.
Support de disque dur • Un voyant d'activité monochrome
• Un voyant d'état bichrome par lecteur
Bloc d'alimentation/ventilateur
de refroidissement
Trois voyants d'état (état du bloc d'alimentation,
panne du bloc d'alimentation/Ventilateur et état de
l'alimentation)
Module de contrôleur RAID Six voyants monochromes :
• Un voyant de panne de batterie
• Un voyant d'activité de la mémoire cache
• Un voyant de panne du contrôleur
• Un voyant d'état de l'alimentation du contrôleur
• Un voyant système
• Un voyant d'activité de gestion Ethernet
Six voyants bichromes :
• Quatre voyants de liaison d'entrée SAS ou d'erreur
• Un voyant de panne ou de lien de sortie SAS
• Un voyant de vitesse de lien Ethernet de gestionGuide de mise en route 47
Commutateur
Bouton d'identification du
système
Situé sur le panneau de commande avant. Ce bouton
sert à localiser un système au sein d'un rack.
Sélecteur de mode du boîtier Situé sur le devant du système. Ce sélecteur
ne s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage
PowerVault MD3200.
Sélecteur de réinitialisation du
mot de passe
Situé sur le panneau arrière du module de contrôleur
RAID. Ce sélecteur permet de réinitialiser le mot de
passe de la matrice de stockage.
Blocs d'alimentation
Alimentation secteur (par bloc d'alimentation)
Puissance 600 W
Tension 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A)
Dissipation thermique 100 W
Courant d'appel maximal Dans des conditions de ligne typiques et dans toute
la gamme ambiante de fonctionnement du système,
l'appel de courant peut atteindre 55 A par bloc
d'alimentation pendant un maximum de 10 ms.
Alimentation disponible pour les disques durs (par logement)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
Alimentation du module de contrôleur RAID (par emplacement)
Consommation de courant
maximale
100 W48 Guide de mise en route
Caractéristiques physiques
PowerVault MD3200
Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces)
Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces)
Profondeur 60,20 cm (23,70 pouces)
Poids (configuration
maximale)
29,30 kg (64,6 livres)
Poids (vide) 8,84 kg (19,5 livres)
PowerVault MD3220
Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces)
Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces)
Profondeur 54,90 cm (21,61 pouces)
Poids (configuration
maximale)
24,22 kg (53,4 livres)
Poids (vide) 8,61 kg (19 livres)
Environnement
REMARQUE : pour des informations supplémentaires sur les mesures
environnementales liées aux différentes configurations du système, voir
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Température
En fonctionnement De 10 à 35 °C (50 à 95 °F) avec un gradient
thermique maximal de 10 °C par heure
REMARQUE : à des altitudes supérieures à
900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de
fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les
168 mètres (550 pieds).
Entreposage De -40 à 65 °C (-40 à 149 °F) avec un gradient
thermique maximal de 20 °C par heure
Humidité relative
En fonctionnement De 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) avec un gradient
d'humidité maximal de 10 % par heureGuide de mise en route 49
Entreposage De 5 à 95 % (sans condensation)
Tolérance maximale aux vibrations
En fonctionnement 0,25 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant
15 minutes
Entreposage 0,5 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant
15 minutes
Choc maximal
En fonctionnement Une impulsion de choc de 31 G pendant un
maximum de 2,6 ms sur l'axe z positif
(une impulsion de chaque côté du système)
Entreposage Six chocs consécutifs de 71 G pendant un maximum
de 2 ms en positif et négatif sur les axes x, y et z
(une impulsion de chaque côté du système)
Altitude
En fonctionnement De -16 à 3 048 m (-50 à 10 000 pieds)
REMARQUE : À des altitudes supérieures à
900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de
fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les
168 mètres (550 pieds).
Entreposage De -16 à 10 600 m (-50 à 35 000 pieds)
Contaminants en suspension dans l'air
Classe G1 selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985
Environnement (suite)50 Guide de mise en routeDell PowerVault
Speicher-Arrays der Reihen
MD3200 und MD3220
Handbuch zum Einstieg
mit dem System
Vorschriftenmodell Serie E03J und E04JAnmerkungen, Vorsichtshinweise und
Warnhinweise
ANMERKUNG: Eine ANMERKUNG macht auf wichtige Informationen aufmerksam, mit denen Sie das System besser einsetzen können.
VORSICHTSHINWEIS: Ein VORSICHTSHINWEIS macht darauf aufmerksam, dass
bei Nichtbefolgung von Anweisungen eine mögliche Beschädigung der Hardware
oder ein Verlust von Daten droht.
WARNUNG: Durch eine WARNUNG werden Sie auf Gefahrenquellen hingewiesen, die materielle Schäden, Verletzungen oder sogar den Tod von Personen
zur Folge haben können.
____________________
Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
Die Vervielfältigung oder Wiedergabe dieser Materialien in jeglicher Weise ohne vorherige schriftliche
Genehmigung von Dell Inc. ist strengstens untersagt.
In diesem Text verwendete Marken: Dell™, das DELL Logo und PowerVault™ sind Marken von
Dell Inc. Microsoft
®
und Windows Server
®
sind Marken oder eingetragene Marken der Microsoft
Corporation in den USA und/oder anderen Ländern. Red Hat
®
und Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
sind
eingetragene Marken von Red Hat, Inc. in den USA und anderen Ländern. SUSE
®
ist eine eingetragene
Marke von Novell, Inc. in den USA und anderen Ländern. VMware
®
ist eine eingetragene Marke von
VMware, Inc. in den USA und/oder anderen Gerichtsbarkeiten.
Alle anderen in dieser Publikation möglicherweise verwendeten Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen
beziehen sich entweder auf die entsprechenden Hersteller und Firmen oder auf deren Produkte. Dell Inc.
erhebt keinen Anspruch auf Markenzeichen und Handelsbezeichnungen mit Ausnahme der eigenen.
Vorschriftenmodell Serie E03J und E04J
2011 - 08 Teilenr. D76VD Rev. A02Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 53
Bevor Sie beginnen
ANMERKUNG: In der vorliegenden Dokumentation bezieht sich der Ausdruck
„Dell PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200“ auf sowohl Dell PowerVault
MD3200 als auch auf Dell PowerVault MD3220. Das Erweiterungsgehäuse für Dell
PowerVault der Reihe MD1200 bezieht sich sowohl auf Dell PowerVault MD1200 als
auch auf Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Bevor Sie Ihr Dell PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200 einrichten,
sollten Sie einige bewährte Verfahren beachten, um sicherzustellen, dass Ihr
Speicher-Gehäuse bei maximaler Effizienz arbeitet und, soweit zutreffend,
eine vollständige Redundanz bietet.
• Verwenden Sie für das gesamte Netzwerk Ethernet-Kabel der Kategorie 5 e
(oder höher).
• Bevor Sie Kabel zwischen dem Host-Server und dem Speicher-Array anschließen, sollten Sie alle Ports und Stecker physikalisch kennzeichnen.
• Beachten Sie stets die Vorschriften für das ordnungsgemäße Ein- und
Ausschalten, wenn Sie das Netzwerk mit Strom versorgen. Stellen Sie
außerdem sicher, dass kritische Netzwerkkomponenten an separate Stromkreise angeschlossen sind.
Sonstige hilfreiche Dokumentationen und Medien
WARNUNG: Beachten Sie die Sicherheits- und Betriebsbestimmungen, die mit
dem Computer geliefert wurden. Garantiebestimmungen können möglicherweise
als separates Dokument beigelegt sein.
ANMERKUNG: Sämtliche PowerVault MD3200-Dokumente sind unter
support.dell.com/manuals verfügbar.
• In der zusammen mit der Rack-Lösung gelieferten Rack-Dokumentation
ist beschrieben, wie das System in einem Rack installiert wird.
• Im Hardware-Benutzerhandbuch erhalten Sie Informationen über Systemfunktionen, zur Fehlerbehebung am System und zum Installieren oder
Austauschen von Systemkomponenten.
• Im Bereitstellungshandbuch erhalten Sie Informationen zum Installieren
und Konfigurieren der Software und Hardware.
• Im CLI-Handbuch erhalten Sie Informationen zum Verwalten und Konfigurieren Ihres Speicher-Arrays über die Befehlszeilenschnittstelle (CLI).54 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System
• Im SMI-S-Handbuch für Programmierer erhalten Sie Informationen zum
Verwenden des SMI-S-Anbieters und zur SMI-S-Programmierung.
• Alle im Lieferumfang des Systems enthaltenen Medien mit Dokumentation und Hilfsmitteln zur Konfiguration und Verwaltung des Systems,
insbesondere in Bezug auf Betriebssystem, Systemverwaltungssoftware,
System-Updates und mit dem System erworbene Komponenten.
ANMERKUNG: Wenn auf der Website support.dell.com/manuals
aktualisierte Dokumente vorliegen, lesen Sie diese immer zuerst, denn frühere
Informationen werden damit gegebenenfalls ungültig.
Unterstützte Betriebssysteme
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
ANMERKUNG: Aktuelle Informationen zu den unterstützten Betriebssystemversionen finden Sie in der Matrix der unterstützten Systeme unter
support.dell.com/manuals.Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 55
Allgemeine Konfigurationen
Verkabeln der direkt angeschlossenen Hosts
Server 1 Server 2
Firmen-,
öffentliches oder
privates Netzwerk
Server 3 Server 4
PowerVault SpeicherArray der Reihe MD3200 56 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System
Installation und Konfiguration
WARNUNG: Lesen Sie vor dem Ausführen der folgenden Schritte die Sicherheitshinweise für das System.
Auspacken des Systems
Nehmen Sie das System aus der Verpackung heraus, und vergleichen Sie die
einzelnen Teile mit der mitgelieferten Packliste.
Installation der Schienen und des Systems in einem Rack
Lesen Sie vor der Montage der Schienen und dem Einbau des Systems im
Rack zunächst die mit dem System gelieferten Sicherheitshinweise und die
Installationsanleitung für das Rack.
ANMERKUNG: Aus Gründen der Stabilität wird empfohlen, das PowerVault
Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200 unten im Rack zu installieren und die Erweiterungsgehäuse für den PowerVault der Reihe MD1200 darüber.Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 57
Anschließen des/der Netzstromkabel(s)
Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Netzschalter auf der OFF (AUS)-Einstellung ist,
bevor Sie die Stromversorgungskabel verbinden. Verbinden Sie das bzw. die
Stromversorgungskabel mit dem System.
Befestigen des/der Netzstromkabel(s)
Befestigen Sie die Kabel fest mit der Halterung, und verwenden Sie dazu das
mitgelieferte Band.
Stecken Sie jedes Stromversorgungskabel in eine geerdete Steckdose oder an
eine separate Spannungsquelle, etwa eine unterbrechungsfreien Stromversorgung (USV) oder einem Stromverteiler (PDU). Jedes Netzteil muss an
einen separaten Stromkreis angeschlossen werden.58 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System
Verkabeln des Erweiterungsgehäuses
Einschalten des Gehäuses
Schalten Sie die Komponenten in der folgenden Reihenfolge ein:
1 Erweiterungsgehäuse für PowerVault der Reihe MD1200 (falls verwendet)
ANMERKUNG: Stellen Sie vor dem Einschalten des Speicher-Arrays sicher,
dass die Status-LED des Erweiterungsgehäuses blau leuchtet.
PowerVault
Speicher-Array der
Reihe MD3200
PowerVault
Erweiterungsgehäuse 1 der
Reihe MD1200 (optional)
PowerVault
Erweiterungsgehäuse 2 der
Reihe MD1200 (optional)Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 59
2 PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200
ANMERKUNG: Stellen Sie vor dem Einschalten der Host-Server sicher, dass
die Status-LED des Speicher-Arrays blau leuchtet.
3 Host-Server
Befestigen der Blende
Befestigen Sie die Frontblende (optional).
Installieren der MD-Storage-Software
ANMERKUNG: Ausführliche Anweisungen zum Installieren der MD-StorageSoftware, zum Einrichten des Gehäuses und zum Durchführen von Schritten im
Anschluss an die Installation finden Sie im Bereitstellungshandbuch.
Die MD-Storage-Manager-Anwendung konfiguriert, verwaltet und überwacht
das Speicher-Array. So installieren Sie die MD Storage-Software:
1 Legen Sie das Resource-Medium der MD-Reihe ein.
Je nach Betriebssystem startet das Installationsprogramm möglicherweise
automatisch. Wenn das Installationsprogramm nicht automatisch startet,
navigieren Sie zum Root-Verzeichnis des Installationsmediums (oder zum
heruntergeladenen Image für das Installationsprogramm), und führen Sie
die Datei md_launcher.exe aus. Rufen Sie bei Linux-basierten Systemen
das Stammverzeichnis des Ressourcen-Datenträgers auf und führen Sie
die Datei autorun aus.
ANMERKUNG: Standardmäßig wird durch Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)
das Resource-Medium mit der Option –noexec mount bereitgestellt, die das
Ausführen der selbstextrahierenden Programmdatei nicht zulässt. Wenn Sie
diese Einstellung ändern möchten, lesen Sie die entsprechenden Informationen
in der Info-Datei, die Sie im Root-Verzeichnis des Installationsmediums finden.60 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System
2 Wählen Sie die Option MD-Storage-Software installieren.
3 Lesen Sie den Lizenzvertrag, und stimmen Sie dem Vertrag zu.
4 Wählen Sie eine der folgenden Installationsoptionen aus dem DropDown-Menü Installationsart aus:
• Vollständig (empfohlen) – Mit dieser Option werden die MD-StorageManager-Software (Client), der hostbasierte Speicher-Agent, der
Multipath-Treiber und die Hardwarekomponenten installiert.
• Nur Host – Mit dieser Option werden nur der hostbasierte SpeicherAgent und die Multipath-Treiber installiert.
• Verwaltung – Mit dieser Option werden die Verwaltungssoftware und
die Hardwarekomponenten installiert.
• Benutzerdefiniert – Mit dieser Option können Sie bestimmte Komponenten auswählen.
5 Wählen Sie die MD-Speicher-Array-Modelle aus, die Sie einrichten möchten, damit sie als Datenspeicher für diesen Hostserver verwendet werden
können.
6 Legen Sie fest, ob die Ereignisüberwachung automatisch gestartet werden
soll, wenn der Hostserver neu gestartet wird, oder ob Sie sie manuell starten möchten.
ANMERKUNG: Diese Option ist nur im Rahmen der Installation der
Windows-Client-Software verfügbar.
7 Bestätigen Sie den Installationsort, und klicken Sie auf Installieren.
8 Starten Sie den Hostserver nach erfolgreicher Installation nach Aufforderung neu.
9 Starten Sie den MD Storage Manager, und ermitteln Sie das/die Array(s).
10 Aktivieren Sie, falls zutreffend, alle Erweiterungsfunktionen, die im Lieferumfang Ihres Speicher-Arrays enthalten sind. Wenn Sie Erweiterungsfunktionen erworben haben, finden Sie weitere Informationen auf der
gedruckten Aktivierungskarte, die im Lieferumfang Ihres Speicher-Arrays
enthalten ist.
ANMERKUNG: Das Installationsprogramm für den MD Storage Manager installiert
die für den Betrieb Ihres Speicher-Arrays erforderlichen Treiber, die Firmware und die
Betriebssystem-Patches/-Hotfixes automatisch. Sie können diese Treiber und die
Firmware auch von der Website support.dell.com herunterladen. Weitere für Ihren
speziellen Speicher-Array verfügbare Einstellungen und/oder Software finden Sie
außerdem in der Support-Matrix unter support.dell.com/manuals.Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 61
Ausfindig machen der Service-Tag-Nummer
Ihr System wird durch einen eindeutigen Express-Servicecode und eine
eindeutige Service-Tag-Nummer identifiziert. Der Express-Servicecode und
die Service-Tag-Nummer befinden sich an der Rückseite des Systems, neben
den RAID-Controller-Modulen. Mithilfe dieser Informationen kann Dell
Support-Anrufe an den richtigen Mitarbeiter weiterleiten.
NOM-Informationen (nur Mexiko)
Die folgenden Informationen beziehen sich auf die in diesem Dokument
beschriebenen Geräte und gründen auf der mexikanischen Norm NOM:
Importeur:
Modellnummer: E03J und E04J
Netzspannung: 100-240 V Wechselspannung
Frequenz: 50/60 Hz
Stromaufnahme: 8,6 A62 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System
Technische Daten
Laufwerke
PowerVault MD3200 Bis zu 12 Hot-Swap-fähige 3,5-Zoll-SAS-Festplatten
(3,0 Gbit/s und 6,0 Gbit/s)
PowerVault MD3220 Bis zu 24 Hot-Swap-fähige 2,5-Zoll-SAS-Festplatten
(3,0 Gbit/s und 6,0 Gbit/s)
RAID-Controller-Module
RAID-Controller-Module • Ein oder zwei Hot-Swap-fähige Module
mit Temperatursensoren
• 2-GB-Cache pro Controller
Rückseitige Anschlüsse (pro RAID-Controller-Modul)
SAS-Anschlüsse • Vier SAS-IN Anschlüsse für den Anschluss
von Hosts
• Ein SAS-OUT-Port für den Anschluss eines
zusätzlichen PowerVault Gehäuses der
Reihe MD1200.
ANMERKUNG: Die SAS-Anschlüsse sind
SFF-8088-kompatibel.
Serieller Anschluss Ein 6-poliger Mini-DIN-Anschluss
ANMERKUNG: Nur für den Technischen Support.
Ethernet-Verwaltungsanschluss Ein 100/1000-Base-T-Port-Ethernet-Anschluss für
die bandexterne Verwaltung des Gehäuses
ANMERKUNG: Die IP-Adressen für die standardmäßige Verwaltungsschnittstelle der primären und
sekundären RAID-Controller-Module lauten
192.168.128.101 und 192.168.128.102. Die Verwaltungsschnittstellen sind standardmäßig auf Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) eingestellt. Wenn der
Controller nicht in der Lage ist, die IP-Adresskonfiguration innerhalb eines festgelegten Zeitraums (etwa
drei Minuten) von einem DHCP-Server abzurufen,
greift er standardmäßig auf die statische IP-Adressierung zurück. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im
Bereitstellungshandbuch.Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 63
Erweiterung
PowerVault der Reihe MD1200 Unterstützt bis zu 192 Festplatten mit einer beliebigen
Kombination aus PowerVault MD1200- und
PowerVault MD1220-Erweiterungsgehäusen. Die
Unterstützung von 192 Festplatten ist eine Erweiterungsfunktion und muss daher aktiviert werden. Ohne
Erweiterungsfunktion werden maximal 120 Festplatten unterstützt.
Redundante Pfadkonnektiviät liefert redundante
Datenpfade zu jedem Festplattenlaufwerk.
Rückwandplatine
Anschlüsse • Zwölf oder 24 SAS-Festplattenanschlüsse
• Zwei Anschlüsse für Netzteil-/Lüftermodule
• Zwei Sätze RAID-Controller-Modul-Anschlüsse
• Ein Anschluss für das Front-Bedienfeld mit LEDs
und Systemidentifizierungstaste
Sensoren Zwei Temperaturfühler
LED-Anzeigen
Frontblende • Eine zweifarbige LED-Anzeige für den Systemstatus
• Zwei einfarbige LED-Anzeigen für Stromversorgung und Split-Betrieb
ANMERKUNG: Die Gehäusemodus-LED gilt nicht
für das PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200.
Festplattenträger • Eine einfarbige Aktivitäts-LED
• Eine zweifarbige LED-Statusanzeige je Laufwerk
Netzteil/Lüfter Drei LED-Statusanzeigen für Netzteilstatus,
Netzteil-/Lüfterfehler und Wechselstromstatus64 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System
RAID-Controller-Modul Sechs einfarbige LEDs:
• Eine Akkufehler-LED
• Eine Cache-Aktivitäts-LED
• Eine Controller-Fehler-LED
• Eine Controller-Stromversorgungs-LED
• Eine Systemidentifizierungs-LED
• Eine Ethernet-Verwaltungsaktivitäts-LED
Sechs zweifarbige LEDs:
• Vier SAS-IN-Verbindungs- oder Fehler-LED
• Eine SAS-OUT-Verbindungs- oder Fehler-LED
• Eine Ethernet-Verwaltungs-Verbindungsgeschwindigkeits-LED
Schalter
Systemidentifikationstaste Befindet sich auf dem Bedienfeld an der Vorderseite.
Dieser Schalter wird verwendet, um ein System
innerhalb eines Racks zu identifizieren.
Schalter für
Gehäusebetriebsart
Befindet sich an der Vorderseite des Systems. Dieser
Schalter gilt nicht für das PowerVault Speicher-Array
der Reihe MD3200.
Schalter zum Zurücksetzen des
Kennworts
Befindet sich an der Rückseite des RAID-ControllerModuls. Mithilfe dieses Schalters können Sie das
Speicher-Array-Kennwort zurücksetzen.
Netzteile
Wechselstromversorgung (je Netzteil)
Leistung 600 W
Spannung 100–240 V Wechselstrom (4,3-8,6 A)
Wärmeabgabe 100 W
Maximaler Einschaltstrom Unter typischen Leitungsbedingungen und über den
gesamten Umgebungsbetriebsbereich des Systems
kann der Einschaltstrom 55 A pro Netzteil über
einen Zeitraum von 10 ms oder kürzer erreichen.
LED-Anzeigen (fortgesetzt)Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 65
Verfügbare Leistung für Festplatten (pro Schacht)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
Stromverbrauch RAID-Controller-Modul (pro Steckplatz)
Maximaler Stromverbrauch 100 W
Abmessungen und Gewicht
PowerVault MD3200
Höhe 8,68 cm
Breite 44,63 cm
Tiefe 60,20 cm
Gewicht
(maximale Konfiguration)
29,30 kg
Gewicht (leer) 8,84 kg
PowerVault MD3220
Höhe 8,68 cm
Breite 44,63 cm
Tiefe 54,90 cm
Gewicht (maximale
Konfiguration)
24,22 kg
Gewicht (leer) 8,61 kg 66 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System
Umgebungsbedingungen
ANMERKUNG: Weitere Informationen zu Umgebungsbedingungen bei verschiedenen
Systemkonfigurationen finden Sie unter www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Temperatur
Betrieb 10 °C bis 35 °C mit einem maximalen Temperaturanstieg von 10 °C pro Stunde
ANMERKUNG: Bei Höhen über 900 Meter verringert
sich die maximale Betriebstemperatur um 1 ºC/300 m.
Lagerung -40 °C bis 65 °C bei einem maximalen Temperaturverlauf von 20 °C pro Stunde
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit
Betrieb 20% bis 80% (nicht-kondensierend) mit einem
maximalen Luftfeuchtegradienten von 10%
pro Stunde
Lagerung 5 % bis 95 % (nicht kondensierend)
Zulässige Erschütterung
Betrieb 0,25 G bei 3-200 Hz, 15 Min. lang
Lagerung 0,5 G bei 3-200 Hz, 15 Min. lang
Zulässige Stoßeinwirkung
Betrieb Ein Stoß von 31 G in der positiven Z-Achse (ein
Stoß auf jeder Seite des Systems) über einen
Zeitraum von 2,6 ms in der Betriebsrichtung.
Lagerung Sechs nacheinander ausgeführte Stöße mit 71 G von
bis zu 2 ms Dauer in positiver und negativer
X-, Y- und Z-Richtung (ein Stoß auf jeder
Seite des Systems)
Höhe über NN
Betrieb -16 bis 3 048 m
ANMERKUNG: Bei Höhen über 900 Meter verringert
sich die maximale Betriebstemperatur um 1 °C/300 m.
Lagerung -16 bis 10 600 m
Luftverschmutzungsklasse
Klasse G1 gemäß ISA-S71.04-1985Συστοιχίες αποθήκευσης
Dell PowerVault
MD3200 και MD3220
Τα πρώτα βήματα με το
σύστημά σας
Μοντέλο κατά τους κανονισμούς:
Σειρά E03J και E04JΣημειώσεις, ειδοποιήσεις και προσοχές
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ αφορά σημαντικές πληροφορίες που σας βοηθούν να
χρησιμοποιείτε καλύτερα τον υπολογιστή σας.
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Η ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ υποδηλώνει δυνητική υλική ζημιά ή απώλεια
δεδομένων, αν δεν ακολουθούνται οι οδηγίες.
ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Η ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ υποδηλώνει δυνητική υλική ζημιά,
σωματική βλάβη ή θάνατο.
____________________
Οι πληροφορίες αυτής της δημοσίευσης υπόκεινται σε αλλαγές χωρίς ειδοποίηση.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Με επιφύλαξη κάθε νόμιμου δικαιώματος.
Απαγορεύεται αυστηρά η αναπαραγωγή αυτών των υλικών με οποιονδήποτε τρόποχωρίς την έγγραφη
άδεια της Dell Inc.
Εμπορικά σήματα που χρησιμοποιούνται στο παρόν κείμενο: Η ονομασία Dell™, το λογότυπο DELL
και η ονομασία PowerVault™ είναι εμπορικά σήματα της Dell Inc. Οι ονομασίες Microsoft
®
και
Windows Server® είναι είτε εμπορικά σήματα είτε σήματα κατατεθέντα της Microsoft Corporation
στις Ηνωμένες Πολιτείες ή/και σε άλλες χώρες. Οι ονομασίες Red Hat
®
και Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
είναι σήματα κατατεθέντα της Red Hat, Inc. στις Ηνωμένες Πολιτείες και σε άλλες χώρες. Η ονομασία
SUSE
®
είναι σήμα κατατεθέν της Novell, Inc. στιςΗνωμένεςΠολιτείες και σε άλλες χώρες. Ηονομασία
VMware
®
είναι σήμα κατατεθέν της VMware, Inc. στις Ηνωμένες Πολιτείες ή/και σε άλλες περιοχές.
Άλλα εμπορικά σήματα και εμπορικές ονομασίες μπορεί να χρησιμοποιούνται στην παρούσα έκδοση
αναφερόμενα είτε στους κατόχους των σημάτων και των ονομάτων είτε στα προϊόντα τους. Η Dell Inc.
παραιτείται από κάθε δικαίωμα σε εμπορικά σήματα και εμπορικές ονομασίες τρίτων.
Μοντέλο κατά τους κανονισμούς: Σειρά E03J και E04J
2011 - 08 P/N D76VD Αναθ. A02Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 69
Πριν ξεκινήσετε
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Στο έγγραφο αυτό, η συστοιχία αποθήκευσης Dell PowerVault σειρά
MD3200 αναφέρεται τόσο στο Dell PowerVault MD3200 όσο και στο Dell PowerVault
MD3220. Το κουτί επέκτασης Dell PowerVault σειρά MD1200 αναφέρεται στόσο στο
Dell PowerVault MD1200 όσο και στο Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Πριν ρυθμίσετε τη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης Dell PowerVault σειρά MD3200
θα πρέπει να λάβετε υπόψη σας διάφορες βέλτιστες πρακτικές, για να
διασφαλίσετε ότι η συστοιχία αποθήκευσης θα λειτουργεί με τη μέγιστη δυνατή
αποδοτικότητα και θα προσφέρει πλήρη δυνατότητα πλεονασμού (εάν απαιτείται).
• Στο δίκτυο, χρησιμοποιείτε πάντα καλώδιο Ethernet κατηγορίας 5e
(ή ανώτερο).
• Πριν συνδέσετε τυχόν καλώδια μεταξύ του διακομιστή κεντρικού
υπολογιστή και της συστοιχίας αποθήκευσης, ονομάστε κάθε θύρα και
κάθε υποδοχή.
• Ακολουθείτε πάντα τις σωστές διαδικασίες έναρξης και τερματισμού
λειτουργίας στο δίκτυο. Θα πρέπει επίσης να διασφαλίσετε ότι σημαντικά
στοιχεία του δικτύου βρίσκονται σε διαφορετικά ηλεκτρικά κυκλώματα.
Λοιπή τεκμηρίωση και μέσα που μπορεί να
χρειαστείτε
ΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Ανατρέξτε στις πληροφορίες σχετικά με την ασφάλεια και
τους κανονισμούς που έχουν αποσταλεί με το σύστημά σας. Οι πληροφορίες
για την εγγύηση ενδέχεται να συμπεριλαμβάνονται σε αυτό το έγγραφο ή να
αποτελούν ξεχωριστό έγγραφο.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Όλα τα έγγραφα για το PowerVault MD3200 είναι διαθέσιμα στην
τοποθεσία support.dell.com/manuals.
• Η αντίστοιχη τεκμηρίωση που συνοδεύει τη δική σας λύση για τοποθέτηση
σε rack περιγράφει τον τρόπο τοποθέτησης του συστήματός σας σε rack.
• Το Εγχειρίδιο κατόχου παρέχει πληροφορίες σχετικά με τα χαρακτηριστικά
του συστήματος και περιγράφει την αντιμετώπιση προβλημάτων του
συστήματός σας και την εγκατάσταση ή την επανατοποθέτηση εξαρτημάτων
του συστήματος.
• Ο Οδηγός ανάπτυξης παρέχει πληροφορίες σχετικά με την εγκατάσταση και
τη ρύθμιση του λογισμικού και του υλικού. 70 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας
• Ο Οδηγός CLI παρέχει πληροφορίες σχετικά με τη χρήση της γραμμής
εντολών (CLI) για τη ρύθμιση και τη διαχείριση της συστοιχίας
αποθήκευσης.
• Ο Οδηγός προγραμματιστή SMI-S παρέχει πληροφορίες σχετικά με τη χρήση
του παρόχου SMI-S και του προγραμματισμού SMI-S.
• Τυχόν δίσκοι CD/DVD που συνοδεύουν το σύστημά σας και παρέχουν
τεκμηρίωση και εργαλεία για τη ρύθμιση και τη διαχείριση του συστήματός
σας, όπου συμπεριλαμβάνονται η τεκμηρίωση και τα εργαλεία για το
λειτουργικό σύστημα, το λογισμικό διαχείρισης συστήματος, οι ενημερώσεις
συστήματος και τα εξαρτήματα που αγοράσατε μαζί με το σύστημά σας.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Ελέγχετε πάντοτε για ενημερωμένες εκδόσεις στην τοποθεσία
support.dell.com/manuals και να διαβάζετε πρώτα τις ενημερωμένες
εκδόσεις επειδή πολύ συχνά αντικαθιστούν τις πληροφορίες άλλων εγγράφων.
Λειτουργικά συστήματα που υποστηρίζονται
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για τις πιο πρόσφατες πληροφορίες σχετικά με όλες τις
υποστηριζόμενες εκδόσεις λειτουργικού συστήματος, ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα
Support Matrix στην τοποθεσία support.dell.com/manuals.Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 71
Συνηθισμένες διαμορφώσεις
Καλωδίωση των άμεσα συνδεδεμένων διακομιστών
∆ιακομιστής 1 ∆ιακομιστής 2
Εταιρικό, δημόσιο
ή ιδιωτικό δίκτυο
∆ιακομιστής 3 ∆ιακομιστής 4
Συστοιχία αποθήκευσης
PowerVault σειρά MD320072 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας
Εγκατάσταση και διαμόρφωση
ΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Προτού εκτελέσετε την παρακάτω διαδικασία,
συμβουλευθείτε τις οδηγίες ασφάλειας που συνοδεύουν το σύστημά σας.
Άνοιγμα της συσκευασίας του συστήματος
Ανοίξτε τη συσκευασία του συστήματος σας και αναγνωρίστε κάθε στοιχείο
βάσει της λίστας περιεχομένων που στάλθηκε μαζί με το σύστημά σας.
Τοποθέτηση των ραγών και του συστήματος σε rack
Συναρμολογήστε τις ράγες και εγκαταστήστε το σύστημα σε rack σύμφωνα με
τις οδηγίες ασφάλειας και τις οδηγίες εγκατάστασης σε rack που παρέχονται με
το σύστημά σας.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Προκειμένου να εξισορροπηθεί το φορτίο βάρους, συνιστάται να
εγκαταστήσετε τη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης PowerVault σειρά MD3200 στο κάτω
μέρος του rack και τα κουτιά επέκτασης του PowerVault MD1200 πάνω από αυτό.Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 73
Σύνδεση των καλωδίων τροφοδοσίας
Βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο διακόπτης τροφοδοσίας είναι στη θέση OFF πριν συνδέσετε τα
καλώδια τροφοδοσίας ρεύματος. Συνδέστε τα καλώδια τροφοδοσίας στο σύστημα.
Ασφάλιση των καλωδίων τροφοδοσίας
Ασφαλίστε τα καλώδια τροφοδοσίας σταθερά στο στήριγμα χρησιμοποιώντας
την παρεχόμενη ταινία.
Βάλτε το φις των καλωδίων ρεύματος σε γειωμένη πρίζα ή ξεχωριστή πηγή
ρεύματος όπως π.χ. συσκευή αδιάλειπτης παροχής ρεύματος (UPS) ή μονάδα
διανομής ρεύματος (PDU). Κάθε τροφοδοτικό θα πρέπει να
συνδέεται σε ξεχωριστό ηλεκτρικό κύκλωμα.74 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας
Καλωδίωση του κουτιού επέκτασης
Ενεργοποίηση του κουτιού
Ενεργοποιήστε τα εξαρτήματα με την εξής σειρά:
1 Κουτιά επέκτασης PowerVault σειρά MD1200 (αν χρησιμοποιούνται).
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Πριν την ενεργοποίηση της συστοιχίας αποθήκευσης,
βεβαιωθείτε ότι η λυχνία LED κατάστασης του κουτιού επέκτασης είναι μπλε.
2 Συστοιχία αποθήκευσης PowerVault σειρά MD3200.
Συστοιχία
αποθήκευσης
PowerVault σειρά
MD3200
Κουτί επέκτασης
1 PowerVault σειρά
MD1200 (προαιρετικό)
Κουτί επέκτασης
2 PowerVault σειρά
MD1200 (προαιρετικό)Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 75
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Πριν ενεργοποιήσετε τον διακομιστή κεντρικού υπολογιστή,
βεβαιωθείτε ότι η λυχνία LED κατάστασης της συστοιχίας αποθήκευσης
είναι μπλε.
3 Διακομιστής(ές) κεντρικού υπολογιστή.
Εγκατάσταση του πλαισίου
Τοποθετήστε το πλαίσιο (προαιρετικά).
Εγκατάσταση του λογισμικού αποθήκευσης MD
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για λεπτομερείς οδηγίες σχετικά με την εγκατάσταση λογισμικού
αποθήκευσης MD, τη ρύθμιση του κουτιού και τις εργασίες μετά την εγκατάσταση,
ανατρέξτε στον Οδηγό ανάπτυξης.
Η εφαρμογή MD Storage Manager ρυθμίζει, διαχειρίζεται και παρακολουθεί τη
συστοιχία αποθήκευσης. Για να εγκαταστήσετε το λογισμικό αποθήκευσης MD:
1 Τοποθετήστε το μέσο πόρων της σειράς MD.
Ανάλογα με το λειτουργικό σας σύστημα, το πρόγραμμα εγκατάστασης
μπορεί να ξεκινήσει αυτόματα. Αν το πρόγραμμα εγκατάστασης δεν
ξεκινήσει αυτόματα, πλοηγηθείτε στο ριζικό κατάλογο του μέσου
εγκατάστασης (ή κατεβάστε ένα αντίγραφο του προγράμματος
εγκατάστασης) και εκτελέστε το αρχείο md_launcher.exe. Σε συστήματα
με Linux, περιηγηθείτε στον γονικό κατάλογο του μέσου πόρων και
εκτελέστε το αρχείο autorun.76 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Από προεπιλογή, το Red Hat Enterprise Linux μοντάρει το μέσο
πόρων με την επιλογή μονταρίσματος -noexec η οποία δεν επιτρέπει την
εκτέλεση εκτελέσιμων αρχείων. Για να αλλάξετε αυτή τη ρύθμιση, ανατρέξτε
στο αρχείο Readme στο ριζικό κατάλογο του μέσου εγκατάστασης.
2 Επιλέξτε Install MD Storage Software (Εγκατάσταση λογισμικού
αποθήκευσης MD).
3 Διαβάστε και αποδεχτείτε την άδεια χρήσης.
4 Επιλέξτε μία από τις παρακάτω επιλογές εγκατάστασης από το
αναπτυσσόμενο μενού Install Set (Σύνολο εγκατάστασης):
• Full (recommended)—Εγκαθιστά το λογισμικό MD Storage Manager
(πρόγραμμα-πελάτης), τον παράγοντα αποθήκευσης host-based,
πρόγραμμα οδήγησης πολλαπλών διαδρομών και παροχείς υλικού.
• Host Only—Εγκαθιστά μόνο τον παράγοντα αποθήκευσης host-based
και προγράμματα οδήγησης πολλαπλών διαδρομών.
• Management—Εγκαθιστά το λογισμικό διαχείρισης και τους παροχείς
υλικού.
• Custom—Σας επιτρέπει να επιλέχετε συγκεκριμένα στοιχεία.
5 Επιλέξτε το μοντέλο ή τα μοντέλα συστοιχίας αποθήκευσης MD που
ρυθμίζετε για να λειτουργήσουν ως μέσα αποθήκευσης δεδομένων για τον
συγκεκριμένο διακομιστή κεντρικού υπολογιστή.
6 Επιλέξτε αν η υπηρεσία παρακολούθησης συμβάντων θα ξεκινάει αυτόματα
με την εκκίνηση του διακομιστή κεντρικού υπολογιστή ή μη αυτόματα
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η επιλογή αυτή ισχύει μόνο για εγκατάσταση λογισμικού πελάτη
Windows.
7 Επιβεβαιώστε τη θέση της εγκατάστασης και κάντε κλικ στο Install
(Εγκατάσταση).
8 Εάν σας ζητηθεί, επανεκκινήστε το διακομιστή κεντρικού υπολογιστή μόλις
ολοκληρωθεί η εγκατάσταση.
9 Ξεκινήστε το MD Storage Manager και βρείτε τη συστοιχία(ες).
10 Εάν χρειάζεται, ενεργοποιήστε τυχόν premium δυνατότητες που αγοράσατε
μαζί με τη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης. Εάν αγοράσατε premium δυνατότητες,
ανατρέξτε στην έντυπη κάρτα ενεργοποίησης που αποστάλθηκε μαζί με τη
συστοιχία αποθήκευσής σας.Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 77
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Το πρόγραμμα εγκατάστασης του MD Storage Manager εγκαθιστά
αυτόματα τα απαιτούμενα προγράμματα οδήγησης, υλικολογισμικό και ενημερώσεις
κώδικα/άμεσες επιδιορθώσεις λειτουργικού συστήματος για τη λειτουργία της
συστοιχίας αποθήκευσής σας. Αυτά τα προγράμματα οδήγησης και το
υλικολογισμικό είναι επίσης διαθέσιμα στη διεύθυνση support.dell.com. Επιπλέον,
ανατρέξτε στο Support Matrix στη διεύθυνση support.dell.com/manuals για
πρόσθετες ρυθμίσεις ή/και λογσιμικό που απαιτείται για τη συγκεκριμένη συστοιχία
αποθήκευσης.
Εύρεση της ετικέτας εξυπηρέτησης
Το σύστημά σας αναγνωρίζεται από έναν μοναδικό κωδικό ταχεία
εξυπηρέτησης και έναν αριθμό ετικέτας εξυπηρέτησης. Ο κωδικός ταχείας
εξυπηρέτησης και η ετικέτα εξυπηρέτησης βρίσκονται στην μπροστινή αλλά
και στην πίσω πλευρά του συστήματος δίπλα στις μονάδες ελεγκτή RAID. Οι
πληροφορίες αυτές χρησιμοποιούνται από την Dell για την προώθηση κλήσεων
υποστήριξης στο κατάλληλο προσωπικό.78 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας
Πληροφορίες NOM (Μόνο για Μεξικό)
Οι παρακάτω πληροφορίες παρέχονται για τη συσκευή που περιγράφεται στο
παρόν έγγραφο, σύμφωνα με τις προδιαγραφές των επίσημων προτύπων του
Μεξικού (NOM):
Τεχνικές προδιαγραφές
Εισαγωγέας: Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V.
Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso
Col. Lomas Altas
11950 Mιxico, D.F.
Αριθμός μοντέλου: E03J και E04J
Τάση παροχής: 100–240 V CA
Συχνότητα: 50/60 Hz
Κατανάλωση
ρεύματος:
8,6 Α
Μονάδες δίσκων
PowerVault MD3200 Έως και δώδεκα σκληροί δίσκοι άμεσης σύνδεσης
SAS 3,5'' (3,0 Gbps και 6,0 Gbps)
PowerVault MD3220 Έως και είκοσι τέσσερις δίσκοι άμεσης σύνδεσης
SAS 2,5'' (3,0 Gbps και 6,0 Gbps)
Μονάδες ελεγκτή RAID
Μονάδες ελεγκτή RAID • Μία ή δύο μονάδες με δυνατότητα άμεσης σύνδεσης
με αισθητήρες θερμοκρασίας
• 2 GB μνήμης cache ανά ελεγκτή
Πίσω θύρες (ανά μονάδα ελεγκτή RAID)
Θύρες SAS • Τέσσερις θύρες SAS IN για τη σύνδεση κεντρικών
υπολογιστών
• Μία θύρα SAS OUT για επέκταση σε πρόσθετο
κουτί PowerVault MD1200
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Οι θύρες SAS είναι συμβατές με το
SFF-8088.Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 79
Σειριακή θύρα Μία θύρα 6 ακίδων mini-DIN
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Μόνο για χρήση κατά την τεχνική
υποστήριξη.
Θύρα διαχείρισης Ethernet Μία θύρα Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T για εξερχόμενη
διαχείριση του κουτιού
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Οι προεπιλεγμένες διεύθυνσεις IP
διαχείρισης θύρας για την κύρια και τη δευτερεύουσα
μονάδα ελεγκτή RAID είναι 192.168.128.101 και
192.168.128.102, αντίστοιχα. Από προεπιλογή, οι
θύρες διαχείρισης είναι ρυθμισμένες σε Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Αν ο ελεγκτής
δεν μπορέσει να λάβει διαμόρφωση διεύθυνσης IP
από ένα διακομιστή DHCP εντός ενός καθορισμένου
χρονικού διαστήματος (περίπου 3 λεπτά), επιστρέφει
στη χρήση στατικής διεύθυνσης IP. Για περισσότερες
πληροφορίες, ανατρέξτε στον Οδηγό ανάπτυξης.
Επέκταση
PowerVault σειρά MD1200 Υποστηρίζει το πολύ 192 σκληρούς δίσκους με
οποιοδήποτε συνδυασμό κουτιών επέκτασης
PowerVault MD1200 ή PowerVault MD1220. Η
υποστήριξη για 192 σκληρούς δίσκους είναι premium
δυνατότητα και απαιτεί ενεργοποίηση. Ο μέγιστος
αριθμός σκληρών δίσκων που υποστηρίζεται χωρίς τη
χρήση της premium δυνατότητας είναι 120.
Η συνδεσιμότητα εφεδρικής διαδρομής παρέχει
εφεδρικές διαδρομές δεδομένων σε κάθε μονάδα
σκληρού δίσκου.
Πίσω πλευρά
Θύρες • 12 ή 24 θύρες SAS σκληρού δίσκου
• Δύο θύρες τροφοδοτικών/ανεμιστήρα ψύξης
• Δύο σετ θυρών μονάδας ελεγκτή RAID
• Μία θύρα πίνακα ελέγχου για τις μπροστινές λυχνίες
LED και το κουμπί αναγνώρισης συστήματος
Αισθητήρες Δύο αισθητήρες θερμοκρασίας
Πίσω θύρες (ανά μονάδα ελεγκτή RAID) (συνέχεια)80 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας
Λυχνίες LED
Μπροστινό μέρος • Μία δίχρωμη λυχνία LED για την κατάσταση του
συστήματος
• Δύο μονόχρωμες λυχνίες LED για την τροφοδοσία
και τη λειτουργία κουτιού
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η λυχνία LED λειτουργίας κουτιού δεν
ισχύει για τη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης PowerVault
σειρά MD3200.
Θήκη μονάδας σκληρού δίσκου • Μία μονόχρωμη λυχνία LED για τη δραστηριότητα
• Μία δίχρωμη λυχνία LED για την κατάσταση
ανά μονάδα δίσκου.
Τροφοδοτικό/ανεμιστήρας
ψύξης
Τρεις λυχνίες LED για την κατάσταση της παροχής
τροφοδοσίας, για σφάλμα στην παροχή
τροφοδοσίας/ανεμιστήρα και για την κατάσταση AC
Μονάδα ελεγκτή RAID Έξι μονόχρωμες λυχνίες LED:
• Μία για σφάλμα μπαταρίας
• Μία για ενεργή μνήμη cache
• Μία για σφάλμα ελεγκτή
• Μία για τροφοδοσία ελεγκτή
• Μία για αναγνώριση συστήματος
• Μία για δραστηριότητα διαχείρισης Ethernet
Έξι δίχρωμες λυχνίες LED:
• Σύνδεση ή σφάλμα τεσσάρων SAS IN
• Μία για σύνδεση ή σφάλμα SAS OUT
• Μία για ταχύτητα σύνδεσης διαχείρισης Ethernet
∆ιακόπτης
Κουμπί αναγνώρισης
συστήματος
Βρίσκεται στον εμπρόσθιο πίνακα ελέγχου. Αυτό το
κουμπί χρησιμοποιείται για να εντοπίσει ένα σύστημα
σε ένα rack.
Διακόπτης λειτουργίας κουτιού Στην μπροστινή πλευρά του συστήματος.
Ο διακόπτης αυτός δεν υπάρχει στη συστοιχία
αποθήκευσης PowerVault σειρά MD3200.Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 81
Διακόπτης επαναφοράς κωδικού
πρόσβασης
Στην πίσω πλευρά της μονάδας ελεγκτή RAID. Ο
διακόπτης αυτός χρησιμοποιείται για την
επαναφορά του κωδικού πρόσβασης της συστοιχίας
αποθήκευσης.
Τροφοδοτικά
Τροφοδοσία AC (ανά παροχή τροφοδοσίας)
Ισχύς σε watt 600 W
Τάση 100–240 VAC (8,6 A–4,3 A)
Έκλυση θερμότητας 100 W
Μέγιστο ρεύμα εισροής Κάτω από τυπικές συνθήκες γραμμής και πάνω από
την περιοχή λειτουργίας περιβάλλοντος ολόκληρου
του συστήματος, το ρεύμα εισροής μπορεί να αγγίξει
το πολύ τα 55 A ανά παροχή τροφοδοσίας για 10 ms
ή λιγότερο.
∆ιαθέσιμη τροφοδοσία σκληρού δίσκου (ανά υποδοχή)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
Ισχύς μονάδας ελεγκτή RAID (ανά υποδοχή)
Μέγιστη κατανάλωση ισχύος 100 W
Φυσικά χαρακτηριστικά
PowerVault MD3200
Ύψος 8,68 mm
Πλάτος 44,63 mm
Βάθος 60,20 cm
Βάρος (μέγιστη διαμόρφωση) 29,30 kg
Βάρος (κενό) 8,84 kg
PowerVault MD3220
Ύψος 8,68 mm
∆ιακόπτης (συνέχεια)82 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας
Πλάτος 44,63 mm
Βάθος 54,90 mm
Βάρος (μέγιστη διαμόρφωση) 24,22 kg
Βάρος (κενό) 8,61 kg
Χαρακτηριστικά περιβάλλοντος
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για επιπλέον πληροφορίες σχετικά με τις περιβαλλοντικές μετρήσεις για
συγκεκριμένες διαμορφώσεις συστήματος, επισκεφτείτε τη διεύθυνση
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Θερμοκρασία
Κατά τη λειτουργία 10 °C έως 35 °C, με μέγιστο ρυθμό μεταβολής της
θερμοκρασίας τους 10 °C ανά ώρα
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για υψόμετρο άνω των 900 μέτρων, η
μέγιστη θερμοκρασία λειτουργίας ελαττώνεται
ονομαστικά κατά 7°C ανά 168 μέτρα.
Κατά την αποθήκευση –40 °C έως 65 °C, με μέγιστο ρυθμό μεταβολής της
θερμοκρασίας τους 20 °C ανά ώρα
Σχετική υγρασία
Κατά τη λειτουργία 20% έως 80% (χωρίς συμπύκνωση) με μέγιστο ρυθμό
μεταβολής της υγρασίας 10% ανά ώρα
Κατά την αποθήκευση 5% έως 95% (χωρίς συμπύκνωση)
Μέγιστη ταλάντευση
Κατά τη λειτουργία 0,25 G στα 3–200 Hz για 15 λεπτά
Κατά την αποθήκευση 0,5 G στα 3–200 Hz για 15 λεπτά
Μέγιστη δόνηση
Κατά τη λειτουργία Ένας παλμός δόνησης στο θετικό τμήμα του άξονα z
(ένας παλμός σε κάθε πλευρά του συστήματος) των
31 G για έως και 2,6 ms προς τις κατευθύνσεις
λειτουργίας
Φυσικά χαρακτηριστικά (συνέχεια)Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 83
Κατά την αποθήκευση Έξι διαδοχικά εκτελεσμένοι παλμοί δόνησης
στο θετικό και αρνητικό τμήμα των αξόνων x, y και z
(ένας παλμός σε κάθε πλευρά του συστήματος) των
71 G για έως και 2 ms
Υψόμετρο
Κατά τη λειτουργία από –16 έως 3.048 μέτρα
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για υψόμετρο άνω των 900 μέτρων, η
μέγιστη θερμοκρασία λειτουργίας ελαττώνεται
ονομαστικά κατά 7°C ανά 168 μέτρα.
Κατά την αποθήκευση από -16 έως 10.600 μέτρα
Επίπεδα ρύπων στην ατμόσφαιρα
Κατηγορία G1, όπως ορίζεται από το ISA-S71.04-1985
Χαρακτηριστικά περιβάλλοντος (συνέχεια)84 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σαςMacierze pamięci masowej
Dell PowerVault
MD3200 i MD3220
Rozpoczęcie
pracy z systemem
Dotyczy modeli E03J i E04JUwagi, przestrogi i ostrzeżenia
UWAGA: Napis UWAGA oznacza ważną wiadomość, która pomoże lepiej
wykorzystać komputer.
PRZESTROGA: Napis PRZESTROGA wskazuje na ryzyko uszkodzenia sprzętu lub
utraty danych w razie nieprzestrzegania instrukcji.
OSTRZEŻENIE: Napis OSTRZEŻENIE informuje o sytuacjach, w których
występuje ryzyko uszkodzenia mienia, odniesienia obrażeń ciała lub śmierci.
____________________
Informacje zawarte w tym dokumencie mogą zostać zmienione bez uprzedzenia.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Wszelkie prawa zastrzeżone.
Powielanie tych materiałów w jakiejkolwiek formie bez pisemnej zgody firmy Dell Inc. jest
surowo zabronione.
Znaki towarowe użyte w tym tekście: Dell™, logo DELL i PowerVault™ są znakami towarowymi
firmy Dell Inc. Microsoft® oraz Windows Server® są znakami towarowymi lub zarejestrowanymi
znakami towarowymi firmy Microsoft Corporation w Stanach Zjednoczonych i/lub innych krajach.
Red Hat
®
oraz Red Hat Enterprise Linux® są zarejestrowanymi znakami towarowymi firmy Red Hat,
Inc. w Stanach Zjednoczonych i innych krajach. SUSE® jest zarejestrowanym znakiem towarowym
firmy Novell, Inc. w Stanach Zjednoczonych i innych krajach. VMware® jest zarejestrowanym
znakiem towarowym firmy VMware, Inc. w Stanach Zjednoczonych i/lub innych jurysdykcjach.
W niniejszym dokumencie mogą zostać także użyte inne znaki towarowe i nazwy handlowe
w odniesieniu do podmiotów posiadających prawa do znaków i nazw lub do ich produktów. Firma
Dell Inc. nie rości sobie żadnych praw do znaków towarowych i nazw handlowych innych niż jej własne.
Dotyczy modeli E03J i E04J
2011 - 08 Nr ref. D76VD Wersja. A02Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 87
Zanim zaczniesz
UWAGA: Termin macierz pamięci masowej Dell PowerVault MD3200, używany
w niniejszej dokumentacji, odnosi się zarówno do modelu Dell PowerVault MD3200,
jak i Dell PowerVault MD3220. Podobnie termin Dell PowerVault MD1200 odnosi się
zarówno do modelu Dell PowerVault MD1200, jak i Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Przed konfiguracją macierzy pamięci masowej Dell PowerVault MD3200 należy
wziąć pod uwagę najlepsze praktyki, aby zapewnić maksymalną wydajność
i pełną nadmiarowość macierzy pamięci masowej (w razie potrzeby).
• Zaleca się stosowanie kabla kategorii 5e (lub wyższej) w całej sieci Ethernet.
• Przed podłączeniem kabli między serwerem głównym i macierzą pamięci
masowej należy sprawdzić etykiety poszczególnych portów i złączy.
• Zawsze należy przestrzegać odpowiednich procedur włączania i wyłączania
zasilania w całej sieci. Najważniejsze elementy sieci należy podłączać do
różnych obwodów zasilania.
Pozostała dokumentacja i wymagane nośniki
OSTRZEŻENIE: Zobacz uwagi dotyczące bezpieczeństwa i przepisów prawnych w
dokumencie dostarczonym wraz z systemem. Informacje dotyczące gwarancji mogą
zostać zamieszczone w tym dokumencie lub dostarczone jako oddzielny dokument.
UWAGA: Dokumentację dotyczącą macierzy pamięci masowej PowerVault MD3200
można znaleźć na stronie support.dell.com/manuals.
• Dokumentacja dołączona do stojaka przedstawia sposób montowania
w nim systemu.
• Podręcznik użytkownika zawiera informacje o funkcjach systemu i opis
sposobów rozwiązywania problemów zaistniałych podczas użytkowania
systemu, a także instrukcje dotyczące instalacji lub wymiany elementów
systemu.
• Podręcznik wdrożeniowy zawiera informacje o instalacji oraz konfiguracji
oprogramowania i sprzętu.
• Podręcznik CLI zawiera informacje o korzystaniu z interfejsu wiersza
poleceń (CLI - Command Line Interface) do konfiguracji i zarządzania
macierzą pamięci masowej.
• Podręcznik programisty SMI-S zawiera informacje o korzystaniu z usługi
SMI-S i programowaniu SMI-S.88 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem
• Wszystkie nośniki dostarczone z systemem zawierające dokumentację
i narzędzia do konfiguracji systemu oraz zarządzania nim, wliczając te,
które dotyczą systemu operacyjnego, oprogramowania do zarządzania
systemem, aktualizacji systemu oraz elementów nabytych wraz
z systemem.
UWAGA: Należy zawsze sprawdzać, czy na stronie support.dell.com/manuals
pojawiły się aktualizacje, i zapoznawać się z nimi w pierwszej kolejności, ponieważ
informacje w nich zawarte zastępują informacje z innych dokumentów.
Obsługiwane systemy operacyjne
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
UWAGA: Więcej informacji o obsługiwanych wersjach systemów operacyjnych można
znaleźć w tabeli Support Matrix (Obsługiwane systemy operacyjne) na stronie
support.dell.com/manuals.Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 89
Typowe konfiguracje
Podłączanie hostów dołączanych bezpośrednio
Serwer 1 Serwer 2
Sieć firmowa,
publiczna lub
prywatna
Serwer 3 Serwer 4
Macierz pamięci masowej
PowerVault MD320090 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem
Instalacja i konfiguracja
OSTRZEŻENIE: Przed rozpoczęciem wykonywania poniższej procedury należy
zapoznać się z instrukcjami dotyczącymi bezpieczeństwa dołączonymi do systemu.
Rozpakowanie systemu
Rozpakuj system i zidentyfikuj poszczególne elementy z listy dostarczonej
wraz z systemem.
Instalowanie prowadnic i systemu w stojaku
Zamontuj prowadnice i zainstaluj system w stojaku zgodnie z instrukcjami
dotyczącymi bezpieczeństwa oraz instrukcjami dotyczącymi montowania
systemów w stojaku dostarczonymi wraz z systemem.
UWAGA: Aby zrównoważyć obciążenie stojaka, zaleca się instalowanie macierzy
pamięci masowej PowerVault MD3200 w dolnej części stojaka, a obudowy rozszerzenia
PowerVault MD1200 w górnej części.Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 91
Podłączanie kabli zasilania
Upewnij się, że przycisk zasilania znajduje się w położeniu wyłączony
przed przystąpieniem do podłączania kabli zasilania. Podłącz kable zasilania
do systemu.
Mocowanie kabli zasilania
Zamocuj kable na wsporniku, używając załączonej opaski.
Następnie podłącz drugą końcówkę kabli zasilania do uziemionego gniazdka
elektrycznego lub oddzielnego źródła zasilania, np. do zasilania bezprzerwowego
(UPS) lub do jednostki rozdziału zasilania (PDU). Każdy zasilacz należy
podłączyć do oddzielnego obwodu zasilania.92 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem
Podłączanie obudowy rozszerzenia
Włączanie obudowy
Elementy należy włączać w następującej kolejności:
1 Obudowy rozszerzenia PowerVault MD1200 (jeśli są używane).
UWAGA: Przed włączeniem macierzy pamięci masowej, upewnij się, że wskaźnik
LED obudowy rozszerzenia świeci na niebiesko.
2 Macierz pamięci masowej PowerVault MD3200.
Macierz pamięci
masowej
PowerVault MD3200
Obudowa rozszerzenia
PowerVault MD1200 1
(opcjonalna)
Obudowa rozszerzenia
PowerVault MD1200 2
(opcjonalna)Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 93
UWAGA: Przed włączeniem serwerów głównych, upewnij się, że wskaźnik LED
macierzy pamięci masowej świeci na niebiesko.
3 Serwery główne.
Instalowanie osłony
Zamontuj osłonę (opcjonalną).
Instalowanie oprogramowania MD Storage
UWAGA: Więcej informacji o instalacji oprogramowania MD Storage, konfiguracji
obudowy i czynnościach wykonywanych po instalacji można znaleźć w podręczniku
Podręcznik wdrożeniowy.
Aplikacja MD Storage Manager pozwala na konfigurację, zarządzanie i
monitorowanie macierzy pamięci masowej. Aby zainstalować oprogramowanie
MD Storage:
1 Włóż nośnik instalacyjny oprogramowania MD Storage do napędu.
Program instalacyjny może zostać uruchomiony automatycznie, zależnie
od posiadanego systemu. Jeśli program instalacyjny nie zostanie
uruchomiony automatycznie, przejdź do katalogu głównego nośnika
instalacyjnego (lub pobranego obrazu programu instalacyjnego) i uruchom
plik md_launcher.exe. W przypadku systemów Linux przejdź do katalogu
głównego nośnika instalacyjnego i uruchom plik autorun.94 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem
UWAGA: Domyślnie system operacyjny Red Hat Enterprise Linux montuje
nośnik instalacyjny z opcją –noexec, która nie umożliwia uruchamiania plików
wykonywalnych. Aby zmienić to ustawienie, należy zapoznać się z plikiem Readme
znajdującym się w katalogu głównym nośnika instalacyjnego.
2 Wybierz opcję Install MD Storage Software (Zainstaluj oprogramowanie
MD Storage).
3 Zapoznaj się z umową licencyjną i wyraź zgodę na jej warunki.
4 Wybierz jedną z poniższych opcji z listy rozwijanej Install Set (Zestaw
instalacyjny):
• Full (recommended) (Pełna (zalecana)) — opcja obejmuje instalację
oprogramowania MD Storage Manager (klient), agenta pamięci
masowej, sterownika wielościeżkowego i usług sprzętowych.
• Host Only (Tylko host) — opcja obejmuje instalację agenta pamięci
masowej i sterownika wielościeżkowego.
• Management (Zarządzanie) — opcja obejmuje instalację
oprogramowania do zarządzania i usług sprzętowych.
• Custom (Niestandardowa) — opcja umożliwia wybór poszczególnych
składników.
5 Wybierz modele macierzy pamięci masowej MD, które będą
konfigurowane jako pamięć masowa dla tego serwera głównego.
6 Ustaw, czy usługa monitorowania zdarzeń ma być uruchamiana
automatycznie po ponownym uruchomieniu serwera głównego.
UWAGA: Ta opcja dotyczy tylko instalacji oprogramowania klienta w systemie
Windows.
7 Potwierdź katalog instalacji i kliknij przycisk Install (Instaluj).
8 Po zakończeniu instalacji i wyświetleniu monitu ponownie uruchom
serwer główny.
9 Uruchom oprogramowanie MD Storage Manager i przeprowadź operację
wykrywania macierzy.
10 Jeśli dotyczy, aktywuj dodatkowe funkcje zamówione z macierzą pamięci
masowej. Aby dowiedzieć się więcej o funkcjach Premium, zapoznaj się
z drukowaną kartą aktywacji dostarczoną w zestawie.Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 95
UWAGA: Program instalacyjny oprogramowania MD Storage Manager powoduje
automatyczną instalację sterowników, oprogramowania układowego oraz poprawek
i łatek systemu operacyjnego wymaganych do obsługi macierzy pamięci masowej.
Sterowniki i oprogramowanie układowe są również dostępne na stronie
support.dell.com. Więcej informacji o dodatkowych ustawieniach i oprogramowaniu
wymaganym do prawidłowej pracy macierzy pamięci masowej można znaleźć w tabeli
Support Matrix na stronie support.dell.com/manuals.
Znajdowanie kodu Service Tag
Każdy system jest oznaczony unikatowym kodem Express Service Code i
Service Tag. Kody Express Service Code i Service Tag znajdują się na panelu
przednim systemu oraz obok modułów kontrolera RAID z tyłu systemu.
Informacje są używane przez firmę Dell do kierowania rozmowy telefonicznej
bezpośrednio do właściwego działu pomocy technicznej.96 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem
Informacja NOM (tylko Meksyk)
Informacje przedstawione poniżej dotyczą urządzenia opisanego
w niniejszym dokumencie i są zgodne z wymogami standardowych norm
obowiązujących w Meksyku (NOM):
Dane techniczne
Importer: Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V.
Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso
Col. Lomas Altas
11950 México, D.F.
Numer modelu: E03J i E04J
Napięcie zasilania: 100–240 V prądu zmiennego
Częstotliwość: 50/60 Hz
Pobór prądu: 8,6 A
Napędy
PowerVault MD3200 Obsługa do dwunastu 3,5-calowych,
wymienianych podczas pracy dysków twardych
SAS (3,0 Gb/s i 6,0 Gb/s)
PowerVault MD3220 Obsługa do dwudziestu czterech 2,5-calowych,
wymienianych podczas pracy dysków twardych
SAS (3,0 Gb/s i 6,0 Gb/s)
Moduły kontrolera RAID
Moduły kontrolera RAID • Jeden lub dwa wymieniane podczas pracy moduły z
czujnikami temperatury
• 2 GB pamięci podręcznej na każdy kontrolerRozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 97
Złącza na panelu tylnym (dla każdego modułu kontrolera RAID)
Złącza SAS • Cztery porty wejściowe SAS do podłączenia hostów
• Jeden port wyjściowy SAS do podłączenia
dodatkowej obudowy rozszerzenia
PowerVault MD1200
UWAGA: Złącza SAS są zgodne ze standardem
SFF-8088.
Złącze szeregowe Jedno 6-stykowe złącze mini-DIN
UWAGA: Wyłącznie do obsługi serwisowej.
Złącza sieci Ethernet do
zarządzania
Jeden port 100/1000 Base-T sieci Ethernet do
pozapasmowego zarządzania obudową
UWAGA: Adresy IP portów do zarządzania dla
podstawowego i pomocniczego modułu kontrolera
RAID są domyślnie ustawione na odpowiednio
192.168.128.101 i 192.168.128.102. Domyślnie adresy
IP portów do zarządzania są jednak konfigurowane
automatycznie za pośrednictwem protokołu Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Jeśli sterownik
nie będzie mógł uzyskać adresu IP z serwera DHCP
w określonym czasie (w przybliżeniu 3 minuty)
przywrócone zostaną domyślne, statyczne adresy IP.
Więcej informacji można znaleźć
w Podręczniku wdrożeniowym.
Obudowa rozszerzenia
PowerVault MD1200 Obsługa maksymalnie do 192 dysków twardych
w dowolnej konfiguracji obudów rozszerzenia
PowerVault MD1200 lub PowerVault MD1220.
Obsługa 192 dysków twardych jest funkcją Premium
i wymaga dodatkowej aktywacji. Maksymalna liczba
obsługiwanych dysków twardych bez funkcji
Premium wynosi 120.
Łączność przy użyciu nadmiarowych ścieżek danych
zapewnia nadmiarowe ścieżki danych dla każdego
dysku twardego. 98 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem
Tablica połączeń
Złącza • Złącza dla 12 lub 24 dysków twardych SAS
• Dwa złącza dla zasilacza i modułu wentylatora
• Dwa zestawy złączy dla modułu kontrolera RAID
• Jedno złącze panelu sterowania dla wskaźników
LED na panelu przednim i przycisk identyfikacji
systemu
Czujniki Dwa czujniki temperatury
Wskaźniki LED
Panel przedni • Jeden dwukolorowy wskaźnik LED informujący o
stanie systemu
• Dwa jednokolorowe wskaźniki LED informujące o
zasilaniu i trybie pracy obudowy
UWAGA: Wskaźnik LED trybu pracy obudowy
nie jest używany w macierzy pamięci masowej
PowerVault MD3200.
Nośnik dysku twardego • Jeden jednokolorowy wskaźnik LED informujący o
pracy dysku
• Jeden dwukolorowy wskaźnik LED informujący o
stanie każdego dysku
Zasilacz/wentylator Trzy wskaźniki LED informujące o stanie zasilacza,
awarii zasilacza/wentylatora i stanie zasilania prądem
zmiennymRozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 99
Moduł kontrolera RAID Sześć jednokolorowych wskaźników LED:
• Jeden informujący o uszkodzeniu baterii
• Jeden informujący o aktywności pamięci
podręcznej
• Jeden informujący o awarii kontrolera
• Jeden informujący o zasilaniu kontrolera
• Jeden informujący o identyfikacji systemu
• Jeden informujący o aktywności portu Ethernet do
zarządzania
Sześć dwukolorowych wskaźników LED:
• Cztery informujące o stanie lub awarii portu
wejściowego SAS
• Jeden informujący o stanie lub awarii portu
wyjściowego SAS
• Jeden informujący o szybkości łącza Ethernet do
zarządzania
Przełącznik
Przycisk identyfikacji systemu Umieszczony na przednim panelu sterowania.
Ten przycisk jest używany do lokalizacji systemu
w stojaku.
Przycisk trybu pracy obudowy Umieszczony na panelu przednim systemu.
Przełącznika nie można stosować w macierzy
pamięci masowej PowerVault MD3200.
Przycisk resetowania hasła Umieszczony na panelu tylnym modułu kontrolera
RAID. Ten przycisk jest używany do
resetowania hasła macierzy pamięci masowej.
Zasilanie
Zasilacz prądu zmiennego (na zasilacz)
Moc 600 W
Napięcie 100 – 240 V prądu zmiennego (8,6 A – 4,3 A)
Emisja ciepła 100 W
Wskaźniki LED (ciąg dalszy)100 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem
Maks. natężenie prądu przy
włączeniu
Przy typowym zasilaniu i w całym dozwolonym
zakresie warunków pracy systemu natężenie prądu
przy włączeniu może osiągnąć maksymalnie 55 A na
zasilacz przez 10 ms lub krócej.
Dostępne zasilanie dysku twardego (dla każdego gniazda)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
Dostępne zasilanie modułu kontrolera RAID (dla każdego gniazda)
Maksymalne zużycie energii 100 W
Cechy fizyczne
PowerVault MD3200
Wysokość 8,68 cm (3,41 cala)
Szerokość 44,63 cm (17,57 cala)
Głębokość 60,20 cm (23,70 cala)
Waga (przy maksymalnej
konfiguracji)
29,30 kg (64,6 funta)
Waga (bez wyposażenia) 8,84 kg (19,5 funta)
PowerVault MD3220
Wysokość 8,68 cm (3,41 cala)
Szerokość 44,63 cm (17,57 cala)
Głębokość 54,90 cm (21,61 cala)
Waga (przy maksymalnej
konfiguracji)
24,22 kg (53,4 funta)
Waga (bez wyposażenia) 8,61 kg (19 funtów)
Zasilanie (ciąg dalszy)Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 101
Warunki otoczenia
UWAGA: Dodatkowe informacje o warunkach otoczenia przewidzianych dla poszczególnych
konfiguracji systemu można znaleźć na stronie www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Temperatura:
W trakcie pracy Od 10°C do 35°C (od 50°F do 95°F) przy
maksymalnym gradiencie temperaturowym
10°C na godzinę
UWAGA: W przypadku wysokości powyżej 2950 stóp
(ok. 900 m) maksymalna temperatura, w jakiej urządzenie
może pracować, obniża się o 1°F (ok. 0,6°C) na każde
550 stóp (ok. 167 m).
Przechowywanie Od –40°C do 65°C (od –40°F do 149°F)
przy maksymalnym gradiencie temperaturowym
wynoszącym 20°C na godzinę
Wilgotność względna
W trakcie pracy Od 20 do 80% (bez kondensacji) przy maksymalnym
gradiencie wilgotności 10% na godzinę
Przechowywanie Od 5% do 95% (bez kondensacji)
Maksymalne drgania
W trakcie pracy 0,25 G przy częstotliwości 3 – 200 Hz przez 15 min
Przechowywanie 0,5 G przy częstotliwości 3 - 200 Hz przez 15 min
Maksymalny wstrząs
W trakcie pracy Jeden impuls wstrząsowy na dodatniej osi Z
(jeden wstrząs po każdej stronie systemu) o sile
31 G, trwający przez 2,6 ms w kierunkach działania
Przechowywanie Sześć kolejnych impulsów wstrząsowych na dodatniej
i ujemnej stronie osi X, Y, Z (jeden wstrząs po każdej
stronie systemu) o sile 71 G, trwających do 2 ms102 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem
Wysokość n.p.m.
W trakcie pracy Od -16 do 3048 m (od -50 do 10 000 stóp)
UWAGA: W przypadku wysokości powyżej 2950 stóp
(ok. 900 m) maksymalna temperatura, w jakiej urządzenie
może pracować, obniża się o 1°F (ok. 0,6°C) na każde 550
stóp (ok. 167 m).
Przechowywanie Od -16 do 10 600 m (od –50 do 35 000 stóp)
Poziom zanieczyszczeń w powietrzu
Klasa G1 wg definicji w ISA-S71.04-1985
Warunki otoczenia (ciąg dalszy)Массивы хранения
данных PowerVault
MD3200 и MD3220
Начало работы с
системой
Нормативная модель серии E03J и E04JПримечания, предупреждения и
предостережения
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ указывает на важную информацию, которая
поможет использовать компьютер более эффективно.
ВНИМАНИЕ: ВНИМАНИЕ указывает на риск повреждения оборудования или
потери данных в случае несоблюдения инструкций.
ОСТОРОЖНО: ОСТОРОЖНО указывает на потенциальную опасность
повреждения оборудования, получения легких травм или угрозу для жизни.
____________________
Информация, содержащаяся в данной публикации, может быть изменена без уведомления.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Все права защищены.
Воспроизведениематериалов данного руководства в любойформе безписьменного разрешения
корпорации Dell Inc. строго запрещается.
Используемые в данном тексте товарные знаки: Dell™, логотип DELL и PowerVault™ являются
товарными знаками корпорации Dell Inc. Microsoft
®
и Windows Server
®
являются товарными
знаками или зарегистрированными товарными знаками корпорации Microsoft в Соединенных
Штатах Америки и/или других странах. Red Hat
®
и Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
являются
зарегистрированными товарными знаками корпорации Red Hat, Inc. в США и других странах.
SUSE
®
является зарегистрированным товарным знаком корпорации Novell, Inc. в США и
другихстранах. VMware
®
является зарегистрированнымтоварнымзнакомкорпорации VMware
в США и/или других юрисдикциях.
Прочие товарные знаки и названия продуктов могут использоваться в данной публикации для
обозначения компаний, заявляющих права на эти товарные знаки и названия, или продуктов
этих компаний. Dell Inc. не претендует на права собственности в отношении каких-либо
товарных знаков и торговых наименований, кроме своих собственных.
Нормативная модель серии E03J и E04J
2011 08 P/N D76VD Ред. A02Начало работы с системой 105
Предварительные замечания
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: В этом документе под массивом хранения данных Dell
PowerVault серии MD3200 подразумевается, как модель Dell PowerVault
MD3200, так и Dell PowerVault MD3220. Корпус расширения Dell PowerVault
MD1200 означает, как Dell PowerVault MD1200, так и Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Перед установкой массива хранения данных Dell PowerVault MD3200
необходимо ознакомиться с рекомендациями по его эксплуатации - это
позволит обеспечить работу массива с максимальной эффективностью и
полной избыточностью (при необходимости).
• Во всей сети должен использоваться кабель Ethernet категории 5e
(или выше).
• Перед соединением хост-сервера и массива хранения данных кабелями
промаркируйте все порты и разъемы.
• Соблюдайте правила эксплуатации сетевого оборудования при
включении и выключении питания. Критически важные компоненты
сети должны питаться от раздельных силовых цепей.
Другая необходимая документация и носители
данных
ОСТОРОЖНО: Ознакомьтесь с правилами техники безопасности,
включенными в комплект поставки системы. Условия гарантийного
обязательства приведены в соответствующем разделе данного документа
или в отдельном документе.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Полная документация по массиву PowerVault MD3200
доступна по адресу support.dell.com/manuals.
• В документации на стойку, поставляемой в комплекте со стойкой,
содержатся инструкции по установке системы в эту стойку.
• В Руководстве по эксплуатации оборудования представлена
информация о характеристиках системы, описан порядок устранения
неисправностей системы, установки или замены ее компонентов.
• В Руководстве по развертыванию представлена информация об
установке и настройке программного обеспечения и оборудования.
• В Инструкциях к интерфейсу СLI (CLI Guide) представлена
информация об использовании интерфейса командной строки (CLI) для
настройки и администрирования массива хранения данных.106 Начало работы с системой
• В документе SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Руководство программиста
SMI-S) представлена информация об использовании поставщика SMI-S
и программировании SMI-S.
• Любой носитель, поставляемый в комплекте с системой, содержащий
документацию и программные средства для настройки системы и
управления ею, включая компоненты, относящиеся к операционной
системе, ПО для управления системой и обновления системы, а также
компоненты, приобретенные вместе с системой.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Обязательно проверяйте страницу
support.dell.com/manuals на наличие обновлений. Обновленные
документы часто заменяют собой другие материалы – читайте их в
первую очередь.
Поддерживаемые операционные системы
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Последняя информация обо всех поддерживаемых версиях
операционных систем приведена в разделе Support Matrix (Таблица
поддержки) по адресу support.dell.com/manuals.Начало работы с системой 107
Стандартные конфигурации
Монтаж кабельной проводки хостов прямого подключения
Сервер 1 Сервер 2
Корпоративная,
открытая или
частная сеть
Сервер 3 Сервер 4
Массив хранения
данных серии MD3200108 Начало работы с системой
Установка и конфигурирование
ОСТОРОЖНО: Перед тем, как приступить к выполнению следующей
процедуры, изучите инструкции по технике безопасности, прилагаемые к
системе.
Распаковка системы
Распакуйте систему, найдите каждый элемент с помощью упаковочной
описи, поставляемой вместе с системой.
Установка направляющих и системы в стойку
Смонтируйте направляющие кронштейны и установите систему в стойку
согласно прилагаемым инструкциям по технике безопасности и
инструкциям по установке стойки.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Для балансировки весовой нагрузки рекомендуется
установить массив хранения данных PowerVault MD3200 на дно стойки, а
корпуса расширения PowerVault MD1200 – расположить сверху.Начало работы с системой 109
Подключение кабеля(ей) питания
Перед подключением кабелей питания убедитесь, что переключатель
питания находится в положении ВЫКЛ. Подсоедините кабель(и) питания к
системе.
Фиксация кабелей питания
Надежно прикрепите кабель(и) к скобке с помощью ремешка, входящего в
комплект поставки.
Подключите другой конец кабеля(ей) питания к заземленной розетке или
отдельному источнику питания, например источнику бесперебойного
питания (ИБП) или блоку распределения питания (БРП). Каждый источник
питания должен быть подключен к отдельной цепи питания.110 Начало работы с системой
Монтаж кабельной проводки корпуса расширения
Включение корпуса
Включите компоненты в следующем порядке:
1 Корпуса расширения PowerVault серии MD1200 (при наличии)
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Перед включением массива хранения данных
убедитесь, что индикатор состояния корпуса расширения синего цвета.
Массив хранения
данных серии
MD3200
Корпус расширения
1 серии PowerVault
MD1200 (опция)
Корпус расширения
2 серии PowerVault
MD1200 (опция)Начало работы с системой 111
2 Массив хранения данных серии MD3200
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Перед включением хост8сервера (8ов) убедитесь, что
индикатор состояния корпуса для массива хранения данных синего
цвета.
3 Хост-сервер(ы)
Установка лицевой панели
Установите лицевую панель (опция).
Установка программного обеспечения MD Storage
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Подробные инструкции по установке программного
обеспечения MD Storage, установке корпуса и для задач, выполняемых после
установки, приведены в документе Deployment Guide (Руководство по
развертыванию).
Приложение MD Storage Manager осуществляет настройку,
администрирование и мониторинг массива хранения данных. Чтобы
установить программное обеспечение MD Storage Manager:
1 Вставьте носитель с ресурсами для серии MD.
В зависимости от вашей операционной системы программа установки
может запуститься автоматически. Если программа установки не
запускается автоматически, перейдите в корневой каталог
установочного носителя (или загруженного образа программы
установки) и запустите файл md_launcher.exe. В системах Linux -
перейдите в корневой каталог внешнего носителя и запустите файл
autorun.112 Начало работы с системой
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Операционная система Red Hat Enterprise Linux по
умолчанию присваивает внешним носителям атрибут -noexec mount,
который запрещает запуск файлов с расширением .exe. Чтобы изменить
этот атрибут обратитесь к файлу Readme, расположенном в корневом
каталоге установочного носителя.
2 Выберите Install MD Storage Software (Установка программного
обеспечения MD).
3 Прочтите и примите лицензионное соглашение.
4 Выберите одну из следующих опций установки из раскрывающегося
меню Install Set (Опции установки):
• Full (recommended)/Полная (рекомендуется) — Устанавливает
программное обеспечение MD Storage Manager (клиент), хостовый
агент системы хранения, многоканальный драйвер и провайдеры
оборудования.
• Host Only (Только хост) — Устанавливает хостовый агент системы
хранения и многоканальные драйвера.
• Management (Администрирование) — Устанавливает только
администрирующее программное обеспечение и провайдеры
оборудования.
• Custom (Настраиваемая) —Позволяет вам выбрать
соответствующие компоненты.
5 Выберите модель массива хранения данных, которые вы собираетесь
настроить для обслуживания хранилищ данных данного хост-сервера.
6 Выберите, запускать ли сервис мониторинга событий автоматически
при перезагрузке хост-сервера или вручную.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Данная опция доступна только для установки
клиентского программного обеспечения под Windows.
7 Подтвердите выбор места для установки и нажмите Install
(Установить).
8 При появлении запроса перезагрузите хост-сервер после завершения
установки.
9 Запустите MD Storage Manager и найдите массив(ы).Начало работы с системой 113
10 Активируйте, при их наличии, любые дополнительные функции,
приобретенные вместе с массивом хранения данных. Если вы
приобрели дополнительные функции, см. бумажную карту активации,
поставляемую вместе с вашим массивом хранения данных.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Установочная программа MD Storage Manager автоматически
устанавливает требуемые драйвера, прошивку и дополнения/исправления
для операционной системы, необходимые для использования вашего
массива хранения данных. Данные драйвера и прошивка доступны по адресу
support.dell.com. Для получения дополнительной информации по любым
настройкам и/или программному обеспечению, требуемому для вашего
конкретного массива для хранения данных см. раздел Support Matrix (Таблица
совместимости) по адресу support.dell.com/manuals.
Как найти метку обслуживания
Система идентифицируется по уникальному коду экспресс-обслуживания
и номеру метки обслуживания. Код экспресс-обслуживания и метка
обслуживания расположены спереди и сзади системы, рядом с модулями
контроллеров RAID. Эта информация необходима для того чтобы ваши
звонки могли быть соответствующим образом перенаправлены
сотрудникам службы технического обслуживания корпорации Dell.114 Начало работы с системой
Информация NOM (только для Мексики)
В соответствии с требованиями официальных стандартов Мексики (NOM)
на устройстве, описанном в данном документе, указывается следующая
информация.
Технические характеристики
Импортер:
Номер модели: E03J и E04J
Напряжение в сети: 100–240 В переменного тока
Частота: 50/60 Гц
Потребляемый ток: 8,6 A
Накопители
PowerVault MD3200 До двенадцати жестких дисков SAS 3,5 дюйма с
возможностью горячей замены
(3,0 Гбит/с и 6,0 Гбит/с)
PowerVault MD3220 До двадцати четырех жестких дисков
SAS 2,5 дюйма с возможностью горячей замены
(3,0 Гбит/с и 6,0 Гбит/с)
Модули RAID-котроллеров
Модули RAID-котроллеров • Один из двух модулей с возможностью горячей
замены с температурными датчиками
• Кэш - по 2 ГБ на контроллерНачало работы с системой 115
Разъемы задней панели (на модуль RAID-контроллера)
Разъемы SAS • Четыре порта входа SAS для подключения хостов
• Один порт выхода SAS для расширения на
дополнительный корпус PowerVault серии
MD1200
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Разъемы SAS совместимы с
SFF88088.
Разъем последовательного
порта
Один 6-контактный разъем mini-DIN
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Только для специалистов службы
технической поддержки.
Разъем управления Ethernet Один порт 100/1000 Base-T Ethernet для
управления корпусом вне диапазона.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: По умолчанию IP8адресами
управляющего порта для первичного и вторичного
модулей RAID8контроллера являются
192.168.128.101 и 192.168.128.102
соответственно. По умолчанию управляющие
порты настроены на использование протокола
DHCP. Если контроллер не может получить
конфигурацию
IP8адреса от DHCP8сервера в течение заданного
промежутка времени (приблизительно 3 минуты),
он по умолчанию возвращается к использованию
статической IP8адресации. Для получения более
подробной информации см. Руководство по
развертыванию.116 Начало работы с системой
Расширение
Серия PowerVault MD1200 Поддержка максимум 192 жестких дисков с любой
комбинацией корпусов расширения PowerVault
MD1200 или PowerVault MD1220. Поддержка до
192 жестких дисков является дополнительной
функцией и требует активации. Максимальное
количество жестких дисков, поддерживаемое без
использования дополнительных функций,
равняется 120.
Возможность резервного подключения
обеспечивает резервирование каналов данных для
каждого жесткого диска.
Объединительная плата
Разъемы • 12 или 24 разъема для жестких дисков SAS
• Два разъема для модулей источника питания и
охлаждающих вентиляторов
• Два набора разъемов модулей RAID-контроллера
• Один разъем панели управления для передних
индикаторов и кнопка идентификации системы
Датчики Два датчика температуры
Светодиодные индикаторы
Передняя панель • Один двухцветный светодиодный индикатор
состояния системы
• Два одноцветных светодиодных индикатора
питания и режима корпуса
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Светодиод режима корпуса не
применим к массиву хранения данных PowerVault
MD3600f.
Салазки для жесткого диска • Один одноцветный светодиодный индикатор
активности
• Один двухцветный светодиодный индикатор
состояния для каждого дискаНачало работы с системой 117
Источник питания и
охлаждающий вентилятор
3 светодиодных индикатора состояния для
индикации состояния источника питания,
неисправности источника питания или
вентилятора и состояния подачи переменного тока
Модуль RAID-контроллера Шесть одноцветных индикаторов:
• Один для индикации отказа аккумулятора
• Один для индикации активного состояния кэша
• Один для индикации отказа контроллера
• Один для индикации питания контроллера
• Один для идентификации системы
• Один для индикации активности управления
через Ethernet
Шесть двуцветных индикаторов:
• Четыре канала входа SAS или отказ
• Один для индикации канала выхода SAS или
отказа
• Один для индикации скорости управления через
Ethernet
Переключатель
Кнопка идентификации
системы
Находится на передней панели управления.
Данная кнопка используется для определения
местонахождения системы в стойке.
Переключатель режима
корпуса
Расположен спереди системы. Этот переключатель
не применим к массиву хранения данных
PowerVault серии MD3200.
Переключатель сброса пароля Расположен на задней панели модуля RAID-
контроллера. Этот переключатель используется
для сброса пароля массива хранения данных.
Светодиодные индикаторы (продолжение)118 Начало работы с системой
Источники питания
Источник питания переменного тока (для каждого источника питания)
Мощность 600 Вт
Напряжение 100 — 240 В пер. тока (8,6 A — 4,3 A)
Теплоотдача 100 Вт
Максимальный бросок тока При стандартных параметрах питающей сети и во
всем рабочем диапазоне внешних параметров
системы бросок тока может достигать максимума
55 А для каждого источника питания в течение не
более 10 мс.
Доступное питание жестких дисков (для каждого слота)
PowerVault MD3200 25 Вт
PowerVault MD3220 12 Вт
Модуль питания RAID-контроллера (на слот)
Максимальная потребляемая
мощность
100 Вт
Физические характеристики
PowerVault MD3200
Высота 8,68 см (3,41 дюйма)
Ширина 44,63 см (17,57 дюйма)
Длина 60,20 см (23,70 дюйма)
Масса (макс. конфигурация) 29,30 кг (64,6 фунта)
Масса (пустой) 8,84 кг (19,5 фунта)
PowerVault MD3220
Высота 8,68 см (3,41 дюйма)
Ширина 44,63 см (17,57 дюйма)
Длина 54,90 см (21,61 дюйма)
Масса (макс. конфигурация) 24,22 кг (53,4 фунта)
Масса (пустой) 8,61 кг (19 фунта)Начало работы с системой 119
Условия эксплуатации и хранения
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Дополнительную информацию о параметрах окружающей среды
для установки определенной конфигурации системы см. на веб8странице
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Температура
В процессе работы От 10 до 35 °C с максимальной скоростью
изменения температуры 10 °C в час
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Если высота над уровнем моря
превышает 900 м (2950 футов), максимальная
рабочая температура снижается на 1°F/168 м
(550 футов).
Хранение От –40 до 65 °C (от –40 °F до 149 °F)
с максимальной скоростью изменения
температуры 20 °C в час
Относительная влажность
В процессе работы От 20% до 80% (без конденсации)
с максимальными колебаниями
влажности 10% в час
Хранение От 5 % до 95 % (без конденсации)
Максимальная вибрация
В процессе работы 0,25 G при частоте от 3 до 200 Гц в течение
15 минут
Хранение 0,5 G при частоте от 3 до 200 Гц в течение
15 минут
Максимальная ударная нагрузка
В процессе работы Один импульс ударной нагрузки с ускорением
31 G длительностью не более 2,6 мс в
положительном направлении по оси z
(по одному импульсу с каждой стороны системы)
при рабочей ориентации
Хранение Шесть последовательных ударных
импульсов 71 G длительностью не более 2 мс
в положительном и отрицательном направлениях
по осям x, y и z (по одному импульсу с каждой
стороны системы)120 Начало работы с системой
Высота над уровнем моря
В процессе работы От –16 до 3048 м (от –50 до 10 000 футов)
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Если высота над уровнем моря
превышает 900 м (2950 футов), максимальная
рабочая температура снижается на 1 °F
(1°F=приблиз. 0,555°C)/168 м (550 футов).
Хранение От –16 до 10 600 м (от –50 до 35 000 футов)
Уровень загрязняющих веществ в атмосфере
Класс G1 согласно классификации ISA-S71.04-1985
Условия эксплуатации и хранения (продолжение)Matrices de almacenamiento
Dell PowerVault MD3200 y
MD3220
Introducción al sistema
Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04JNotas, precauciones y avisos
NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar
mejor el ordenador.
PRECAUCIÓN: un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN indica la posibilidad de que se
produzcan daños en el hardware o haya pérdida de datos si no se siguen las
instrucciones.
AVISO: un mensaje de AVISO indica la posibilidad de que se produzcan daños
materiales, lesiones personales e incluso la muerte.
____________________
La información contenida en esta publicación puede modificarse sin previo aviso.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados.
Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de estos materiales en cualquier forma sin la
autorización por escrito de Dell Inc.
Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell™, el logotipo de DELL y PowerVault™ son marcas
comerciales de Dell Inc. Microsoft
®
y Windows Server
®
son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales
registradas de Microsoft Corporation en Estados Unidos y/o en otros países. Red Hat
®
y Red Hat
Enterprise Linux
®
son marcas comerciales registradas de Red Hat, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en
otros países. SUSE
®
es una marca comercial registrada de Novell, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en
otros países. VMware
®
es una marca comercial registrada de VMware, Inc. en los Estados Unidos
y/o en otras jurisdicciones.
Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en esta publicación para hacer referencia
a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la
propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos.
Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04J
08/2011 P/N D76VD Rev. A02Introducción al sistema 123
Antes de comenzar
NOTA: a lo largo del documento, la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell
PowerVault MD3200 hace referencia a Dell PowerVault MD3200 y Dell PowerVault
MD3220. El gabinete de expansión de la serie Dell PowerVault MD1200 hace
referencia a Dell PowerVault MD1200 y Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Antes de configurar la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault
MD3200, debe tener en cuenta una serie de prácticas recomendadas para
garantizar que la matriz de almacenamiento funcione a un rendimiento
máximo y ofrezca completa redundancia (si es necesario).
• Utilice en toda la red un cable Ethernet de categoría 5e (o superior).
• Antes de conectar cables entre el servidor host y la matriz de
almacenamiento, etiquete todos los puertos y conectores.
• Durante los ciclos de encendido de la red, siga siempre los procedimientos
adecuados de encendido y apagado. Asegúrese también de que los
componentes de red críticos se encuentren en circuitos de alimentación
diferentes.
Documentación y soportes adicionales útiles
AVISO: consulte la información sobre normativas y seguridad suministrada con
el sistema. La información sobre la garantía puede estar incluida en este
documento o en un documento aparte.
NOTA: todos los documentos de la serie PowerVault MD3200 están disponibles en
la dirección support.dell.com/manuals.
• En la documentación del bastidor incluida con la solución de bastidor se
describe cómo instalar el sistema en un bastidor.
• En el Manual del propietario se proporciona información acerca de las
funciones del sistema y se describe cómo solucionar problemas del sistema
e instalar o sustituir componentes.
• En la Guía de implementación se proporciona información acerca de la
instalación y configuración del software y hardware.
• En la Guía CLI se proporciona información acerca de cómo utilizar la
interfaz de línea de comandos (CLI) para configurar y administrar la
matriz de almacenamiento.124 Introducción al sistema
• La SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Guía de los programadores de SMI-S)
proporciona información acerca del uso del proveedor de SMI-S y la
programación de SMI-S.
• En los soportes suministrados con el sistema se incluyen documentación y
herramientas para configurar y administrar el sistema, incluidas las del
sistema operativo, el software de administración del sistema, las
actualizaciones del sistema y los componentes del sistema que haya
adquirido con el sistema.
NOTA: compruebe si hay actualizaciones en support.dell.com/manuals y, si
las hay, léalas antes de proceder a la instalación, puesto que a menudo
sustituyen la información contenida en otros documentos.
Sistemas operativos admitidos
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
NOTA: para obtener la información más actual acerca de todas las versiones de
sistemas operativos compatibles, consulte la Matriz de soporte en la dirección
support.dell.com/manuals.Introducción al sistema 125
Configuraciones comunes
Cableado de los hosts de conexión directa
Servidor 1 Servidor 2
Red corporativa,
pública o privada
Servidor 3 Servidor 4
Matriz de
almacenamiento de
la serie Dell 126 Introducción al sistema
Instalación y configuración
AVISO: antes de realizar el procedimiento siguiente, revise las instrucciones de
seguridad incluidas con el sistema.
Desembalaje del sistema
Desembale el sistema e identifique cada elemento de la lista de embalaje que
se envió con el sistema.
Instalación de los rieles y del sistema en un bastidor
Monte los rieles e instale el sistema en el bastidor siguiendo las instrucciones
de seguridad y de instalación del bastidor incluidas con el sistema.
NOTA: para equilibrar la carga del peso, se recomienda instalar la matriz de
almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200 en la parte inferior del bastidor y
los gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 encima de este.Introducción al sistema 127
Conexión de los cables de alimentación
Asegúrese de que el conmutador de alimentación esté en la posición de
APAGADO antes de conectar los cables de alimentación. Conecte los cables
de alimentación al sistema.
Fijación de los cables de alimentación
Fije los cables al soporte con firmeza con la cinta proporcionada.128 Introducción al sistema
Conecte el otro extremo de los cables de alimentación a una toma eléctrica
con conexión a tierra o a otra fuente de alimentación, como por ejemplo un
Sistema de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) o una Unidad de distribución
de alimentación (PDU). Cada suministro de energía debe estar conectado a
un circuito de alimentación diferente.
Cableado del gabinete de expansión
Encendido del gabinete
Matriz de
almacenamiento de
la serie Dell
PowerVault MD3200
Gabinete 1 de
expansión de la serie
PowerVault MD1200
(opcional)
Gabinete 2 de
expansión de la serie
PowerVault MD1200
(opcional)Introducción al sistema 129
Encienda los componentes en el orden siguiente :
1 Los gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (si es
necesario)
NOTA: antes de encender la matriz de almacenamiento, asegúrese de que el
LED de estado del gabinete de expansión está iluminado en azul.
2 Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200
NOTA: antes de encender los servidores host, asegúrese de que el LED de
estado de la matriz de almacenamiento está iluminado en azul.
3 Servidores host
Instalación del bisel
Instale el bisel (opcional).
Instalación del software MD Storage
NOTA: para obtener instrucciones detalladas sobre la instalación del software MD
Storage, la configuración del gabinete y las tareas posteriores a la instalación,
consulte la Guía de implementación.
La aplicación MD Storage Manager configura, administra y supervisa la
matriz de almacenamiento. Instalación del software MD Storage:
1 Inserte el soporte de recursos de la serie MD.130 Introducción al sistema
Dependiendo del sistema operativo, el instalador se puede iniciar
automáticamente. Si el instalador no se inicia automáticamente, vaya al
directorio raíz del soporte de instalación (o imagen del instalador
descargado) y ejecute el archivo md_launcher.exe. Para sistemas basados
en Linux, vaya a la raíz del soporte de recursos y ejecute el archivo autorun.
NOTA: de manera predeterminada, el sistema operativo Red Hat Enterprise
Linux monta el soporte de recursos con la opción noexec mount la cual no
permite ejecutar archivos ejecutables. Para cambiar esta configuración,
consulte el archivo Readme (Léame) en el directorio raíz del soporte de
instalación.
2 Seleccione Install MD Storage Software (Instalar el software MD
Storage).
3 Lea y acepte el contrato de licencia.
4 Seleccione una de las siguientes opciones de instalación del menú
desplegable Install Set (Conjunto de instalación):
• Full (recommended) (Total [recomendado]): instala el software MD
Storage Manager (cliente), el agente de almacenamiento basado en
host, el controlador multirruta y los proveedores de hardware.
• Host Only (Solamente host): instala el agente de almacenamiento
basado en host y los controladores multirruta.
• Management (Administración): instala el software de administración
y los proveedores de hardware.
• Custom (Personalizado): permite seleccionar componentes
específicos.
5 Seleccione los modelos de matrices de almacenamientos MD que está
configurando para que sirvan como almacenamiento de datos para este
servidor host.
6 Elija si desea iniciar el servicio de monitor de eventos automática o
manualmente al reiniciar el servidor host
NOTA: esta opción se aplica solo para la instalación del software cliente de
Windows.
7 Confirme la ubicación de la instalación y haga clic en Install (Instalar).
8 Si se le solicita, reinicie el servidor host tras completar la instalación.
9 Inicie MD Storage Manager y detecte las matrices.Introducción al sistema 131
10 Si se aplica, active cualquiera de las funciones premium adquiridas con la
matriz de almacenamiento. Si ha adquirido una función premium,
consulte la tarjeta de activación impresa enviada con la matriz de
almacenamiento.
NOTA: el instalador de MD Storage Manager instala automáticamente los
controladores, el firmware y las revisiones/correcciones del sistema operativo
necesarios para que funcione la matriz de almacenamiento. Estos controladores y
el firmware se encuentran disponibles en support.dell.com. Además, consulte la
Support Matrix (Matriz de compatibilidad) en support.dell.com/manuals para
obtener configuraciones adicionales o software necesarios para la matriz de
almacenamiento específica
Localización de la etiqueta de servicio
El sistema se identifica mediante un Código de servicio rápido y un número
de Etiqueta de servicio únicos. El código de servicio rápido y la etiqueta de
servicio se encuentran en la parte anterior del sistema y también en la parte
posterior, junto a los módulos de la controladora RAID. Dell utiliza esta
información para dirigir las llamadas de asistencia al personal
correspondiente.132 Introducción al sistema
Información de la NOM (sólo para México)
La información que se proporciona a continuación aparece en el dispositivo
descrito en este documento en cumplimiento con los requisitos de la Norma
Oficial Mexicana (NOM):
Especificaciones técnicas
Importador:
Número de modelo: E03J y E04J
Voltaje de
alimentación:
100-240 VCA
Frecuencia: 50 Hz/60 Hz
Consumo eléctrico: 8,6 A
Unidades
PowerVault MD3200 Hasta doce unidades de disco duro de intercambio
directo SAS de 3,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y 6,0 Gbps)
PowerVault MD3220 Hasta veinticuatro unidades de disco duro de
intercambio directo SAS de 2,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y
6,0 Gbps)
Módulos de la controladora RAID
Módulos de la controladora
RAID
• Uno o dos módulos de intercambio directo con
sensores de temperatura
• 2 GB de caché por controladora
Conectores del panel posterior (por módulo de controladora RAID)
Conectores SAS • Cuatro puertos de entrada SAS para conectar hosts
• Un puerto de salida SAS para añadir un gabinete
de la serie PowerVault MD1200 adicional
NOTA: los conectores SAS son compatibles con
SFF-8088.Introducción al sistema 133
Conector serie Un conector miniDIN de 6 patas
NOTA: sólo para asistencia técnica.
Conector Ethernet de
administración
Un puerto Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T para la
administración fuera de banda del gabinete
NOTA: las direcciones IP de puerto de administración
predeterminadas para los módulos de la controladora
RAID primarios y secundarios son 192.168.128.101 y
192.168.128.102, respectivamente. De manera
predeterminada, los puertos de administración se
configuran en el Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). Si la controladora no es capaz de obtener una
configuración de dirección IP de un servidor DHCP en
un tiempo de espera determinado (aproximadamente 3
minutos), vuelve de manera predeterminada al
direccionamiento IP estático. Para obtener más
información, consulte la Guía de implementación.
Expansión
PowerVault serie MD1200 Admite un máximo de 192 unidades de disco duro
con cualquier combinación de gabinetes de
expansión PowerVault MD1200 o PowerVault
MD1220. El soporte para 192 unidades de disco
duro es una función Premium y requiere activación.
La cantidad máxima de discos duros admitidos sin
utilizar la función Premium es 120.
La conectividad de la ruta de acceso redundante
proporciona rutas de acceso redundantes a cada
unidad de disco duro.
Placa de plano posterior
Conectores • 12 ó 24 conectores de unidad de disco duro SAS
• Dos conectores para módulos de suministro de
energía/ventilador de enfriamiento
• Dos conjuntos de conectores del módulo de
controladora RAID
• Un conector del panel de control para LED
anteriores y un botón de identificación del sistema
Sensores Dos sensores de temperatura
Conectores del panel posterior (por módulo de controladora RAID) (continuación)134 Introducción al sistema
Indicadores LED
Panel anterior • Un indicador LED de dos colores para el estado del
sistema
• Dos indicadores LED de un solo color para la
alimentación y el modo gabinete
NOTA: el LED del modo gabinete no es aplicable a
la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault
MD3200.
Portaunidades de disco duro • Un indicador LED de un solo color de actividad
• Un indicador LED de dos colores de estado por
disco
Suministro de
energía/ventilador de
enfriamiento
Tres indicadores LED de estado para el estado del
suministro de energía, los fallos del suministro de
energía/ventilador y el estado de CA
Módulo de la controladora
RAID
Seis LED de un solo color:
• Uno de batería defectuosa
• Uno de caché activa
• Uno de controladora defectuosa
• Uno de alimentación de controladora
• Uno de identificación del sistema
• Uno de actividad Ethernet de administración
Seis LED de dos colores:
• Cuatro de fallo o enlace de entrada SAS
• Uno de fallo o enlace de salida de SAS
• Uno de velocidad del enlace Ethernet de
administraciónIntroducción al sistema 135
Conmutador
Botón de identificación del
sistema
Ubicado en el panel de control anterior. Este botón
se usa para ubicar un sistema en un bastidor.
Conmutador de modo de
alojamiento
Situado en la parte anterior del sistema.
Este conmutador no se aplica a la matriz de
almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200.
Conmutador de
restablecimiento de contraseña
Situado en el panel posterior del módulo de
controladora RAID. Este conmutador se utiliza para
restablecer la contraseña de la matriz de
almacenamiento.
Suministros de energía
Fuente de alimentación de CA (por fuente de alimentación)
Potencia 600 W
Voltaje 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A)
Disipación de calor 100 W
Corriente de conexión
máxima
En condiciones normales de línea y en todo el rango
operativo ambiente del sistema, la irrupción de
corriente puede alcanzar un máximo de 55 A por
cada suministro de energía durante 10 ms o menos.
Alimentación de la unidad de disco duro disponible (por ranura)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
Alimentación del módulo de controladora RAID (por ranura)
Consumo de energía máximo 100 W
Características físicas
PowerVault MD3200
Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas)
Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas)
Profundidad 60,20 cm (23,70 pulgadas)136 Introducción al sistema
Peso (configuración máxima) 29,30 kg (64,6 libras)
Peso (vacío) 8,84 kg (19,5 libras)
PowerVault MD3220
Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas)
Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas)
Profundidad 54,90 cm (21,61 pulgadas)
Peso (configuración máxima) 24,22 kg (53,4 lbs)
Peso (vacío) 8,61 kg (19 lbs)
Especificaciones medioambientales
NOTA: para obtener información adicional acerca de medidas ambientales relativas a
configuraciones del sistema específicas, vaya a
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Temperatura
En funcionamiento De 10 °C a 35 °C (de 50 °F a 95 °F) con una
gradación de temperatura máxima de 10 °C por hora
NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m, la
temperatura máxima de funcionamiento se reduce
1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies).
Almacenamiento De -40 °C a 65 °C (de -40 °F a 149 °F) con una
gradación de temperatura máxima de 20 °C
por hora.
Humedad relativa
En funcionamiento Del 20% al 80% (sin condensación) con una
gradación de humedad máxima del 10% por hora
Almacenamiento Del 5% al 95% (sin condensación)
Vibración máxima
En funcionamiento De 0,25 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos
Almacenamiento De 0.5 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos
Impacto máximo
Características físicas (continuación)Introducción al sistema 137
En funcionamiento Un impulso de descarga en el sentido positivo del eje
z (un impulso en cada lado del sistema) de 31 G
durante 2,6 ms en la orientación de funcionamiento
Almacenamiento Seis impulsos de descarga ejecutados
consecutivamente en los ejes positivos y negativos x,
y y z (un impulso en cada lado del sistema) de 71 G
durante un máximo de 2 ms
Altitud
En funcionamiento De –16 m a 3.048 m (de –50 pies a 10.000 pies)
NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m (2950 pies),
la temperatura de funcionamiento máxima se reduce
1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies).
Almacenamiento De –16 m a 10.600 m (de –50 pies a 35.000 pies)
Nivel de contaminación atmosférica
Clase G1 de acuerdo con ISA-S71.04-1985
Especificaciones medioambientales (continuación)138 Introducción al sistemaDell PowerVault MD3200 ve
MD3220 Depolama Dizileri
Sisteminizi Kullanmaya
Başlarken
Resmi Model Serisi E03J ve E04JNotlar, Dikkat Edilecek Noktalar ve Uyarılar
NOT: NOT, bilgisayarınızdan daha iyi şekilde yararlanmanıza yardımcı olacak
önemli bilgiler verir.
DİKKAT: DİKKAT, yönergelere uyulmadığında donanımın zarar görebileceğini
veya veri kaybı olabileceğini belirtir.
UYARI: UYARI, meydana gelebilecek olası maddi hasar, kişisel yaralanma
veya ölüm tehlikesi anlamına gelir.
____________________
Bu belgedeki bilgiler önceden bildirilmeksizin değiştirilebilir.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Tüm hakları saklıdır.
Dell Inc.'in yazılı izni olmadan bu belgelerin herhangi bir şekilde çoğaltılması kesinlikle yasaktır.
Bu metinde kullanılan ticari markalar: Dell™, DELL logosu ve PowerVault™ Dell Inc. kuruluşunun
ticari markalarıdır. Microsoft
®
ve Windows Server
®
, Microsoft Corporation kuruluşunun ABD ve/
veya diğer ülkelerdeki ticari markaları ya da tescilli ticari markalarıdır. Red Hat
®
ve Red Hat Enterprise
Linux
®
Red Hat, Inc. şirketinin ABD ve diğer ülkelerdeki tescilli ticari markalarıdır. SUSE
®
Novell,
Inc. şirketinin ABD ve diğer ülkelerdeki tescilli ticari markasıdır. VMware
®
VMware, Inc. şirketinin
ABD ve/veya diğer hükümetlerdeki tescilli ticari markasıdır.
Bu belgede, marka ve adların sahiplerine ya da ürünlerine atıfta bulunmak için başka ticari marka ve
ticari adlar kullanılabilir. Dell Inc. kendine ait olanların dışındaki ticari markalar ve ticari isimlerle
ilgili hiçbir mülkiyet hakkı olmadığını beyan eder.
Resmi Model Serisi E03J ve E04J
2011 - 08 P/N D76VD Rev. A02Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 141
Başlamadan Önce
NOT: Bu belgenin tamamında Dell PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisi, hem
Dell PowerVault MD3200 hem de Dell PowerVault MD3220 ürününü ifade
etmektedir. Dell PowerVault MD1200 serisi genişletme kasaları hem Dell
PowerVault MD1200 hem de Dell PowerVault MD1220 ürününü ifade etmektedir.
Dell PowerVault MD3200 depolama dizinizi kurmadan önce, depolama
dizinizin maksimum verimlilikte çalışması ve tam yedeklilik sunması için
(gerekliyse), belirli en iyi uygulamaları göz önünde bulundurun.
• Ağ boyunca, Kategori 5e (veya üstü) Ethernet kablosu kullanın.
• Ana sunucu ve depolama dizisi arasına herhangi bir kablo bağlamadan önce,
her bir bağlantı noktasını ve konektörü fiziksel olarak etiketleyin.
• Ağ boyunca güç dolaşımı sağlarken, her zaman güç açma ve güç kapama
yordamlarını uygulayın. Ayrıca, kritik ağ bileşenlerinin farklı güç
devrelerinde olduğundan da emin olmalısınız.
İhtiyaç Duyabileceğiniz Diğer Belge ve
Ortamlar
UYARI: Sisteminizle birlikte verilen güvenlik bilgilerine ve düzenleyici
bilgilere bakın. Garanti bilgileri bu belgeye dahil edilmiş veya ayrı bir belge
olarak eklenmiş olabilir.
NOT: Tüm PowerVault MD3200 serisi belgelerini support.dell.com/manuals
adresinde bulabilirsiniz.
• Raf çözümünüze dahil edilmiş olan raf belgeleri sisteminizi bir rafa nasıl
kuracağınızı açıklar.
• Kullanıcı El Kitabı, sistem özellikleri üzerine bilgiler içermekte ve sistemde
sorun giderme, sistem bileşenlerinin yüklenmesi veya değiştirilmesi
işlemlerinin nasıl yapılacağını anlatmaktadır.
• Uygulama Kılavuzu, yazılım ve donanımın kurulması ve yapılandırılması
hakkında bilgiler sunar.
• CLI Kılavuzu, depolama dizinizi yapılandırmak ve yönetmek için komut hattı
arabiriminin (CLI) kullanılması hakkında bilgiler sunar.
• SMI-S Programlayıcı Kılavuzu, SMI-S sağlayıcının kullanılması ve SMI-S
programlama hakkında bilgiler sunar.142 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken
• Sisteminizle birlikte satın aldığınız işletim sistemi, sistem yönetimi yazılımı,
sistem güncellemeleri ve sistem bileşenleri ile ilgili olanlar dahil,
sisteminizle birlikte gönderilen ve sisteminizin yapılandırılması ve
yönetilmesi için belgeler ve araçlar sunan her türlü ortam.
NOT: Her zaman support.dell.com/manuals adresindeki güncellemeleri
kontrol edin ve genellikle diğer belgelerdekinden daha güncel bilgiler içerdiği
için ilk önce güncellemeleri okuyun.
Desteklenen İşletim Sistemleri
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
NOT: Tüm desteklenen işletim sistemi sürümleri hakkında en yeni bilgiler için, bkz.
support.dell.com/manuals adresindeki Destek Matrisi bölümü.
Genel Yapılandırmalar
Doğrudan Bağlanan Ana Sunucularınızı Kablolama
Sunucu 1 Sunucu 2
Kurumsal, kamu
veya özel ağ
Sunucu 3 Sunucu 4
PowerVault MD3200
serisi depolama dizisiSisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 143
Kurulum ve Yapılandırma
UYARI: Bir sonraki yordamı uygulamadan önce, sistemle birlikte gelen
güvenlik yönergelerini inceleyin.
Sistemi Paketinden Çıkarma
Sisteminizi paketinden çıkarın ve ambalaj listesindeki tüm öğelerin sisteminizde
bulunup bulunmadığını kontrol edin.
Rayları ve Sistemi Rafa Monte Etme
Rayların ve sistemin rafa montajını sistemle birlikte sağlanan güvenlik
yönergelerini ve raf montaj yönergelerini izleyerek gerçekleştirin.
NOT: Ağırlık yükünü dengelemek için, PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisini
rafın alt kısmına ve PowerVault MD1200 genişletme kasalarını bunun üzerine
monte etmeniz önerilir.144 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken
Güç Kablolarının Bağlanması
Güç kablolarını bağlamadan önce güç anahtarının KAPALI konumda
olduğundan emin olun. Sistemin güç kablolarını sisteme bağlayın.
Güç Kablolarının Sabitlenmesi
Sağlanan şeridi kullanarak kabloları desteğe sıkıca sabitleyin.
Güç kablolarının diğer uçlarını topraklı bir elektrik prizine ya da kesintisiz güç
kaynağı (UPS) veya güç dağıtım birimi (PDU) gibi ayrı bir güç kaynağına takın.
Her bir güç kaynağı ayrı bir güç devresine bağlanmalıdır.Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 145
Genişletme Kasanızı Kablolama
Kasayı Açma
Bileşenleri aşağıdaki sırayla açın:
1 PowerVault MD1200 serisi genişletme kasaları (kullanılıyorsa).
NOT: Depolama dizisini açmadan önce, genişletme kasası durum LED'inin
mavi yandığından emin olun.
PowerVault MD3200
serisi depolama dizisi
PowerVault MD1200
serisi genişletme
kasası 1 (isteğe bağlı)
PowerVault MD1200
serisi genişletme
kasası 2 (isteğe bağlı)146 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken
2 PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisi.
NOT: Ana sunucuları açmadan önce, depolama dizisi durum LED'inin mavi
yandığından emin olun.
3 Ana sunucular.
Çerçevenin Takılması
Çerçeveyi takın (isteğe bağlı).
MD Depolama Yazılımını Kurma
NOT: MD depolama yazılımını kurma, kasayı kurma ve kurulum sonrası görevlerle
ilgili ayrıntılı yönergeler için, bkz. Uygulama Kılavuzu.
MD Depolama Yöneticisi uygulaması, depolama dizisini yapılandırır, yönetir ve
izler. MD depolama yazılımını kurmak için:
1 MD serisi kaynak ortamını takın.
İşletim sisteminize bağlı olarak yükleyici otomatik olarak başlamalıdır.
Yükleyici otomatik olarak çalışmazsa, kurulum ortamının kök dizinine gidin
(veya yükleyici görüntüsünü indirin) ve md_launcher.exe dosyasını
çalıştırın. Linux tabanlı sistemlerde, kaynak ortamın köküne gidin ve
autorun dosyasını çalıştırın.
NOT: Red Hat Enterprise Linux işletim sistemi, varsayılan olarak, kaynak
ortamı yürütülebilir dosyaları çalıştırmanıza olanak tanımayan –noexec
montaj seçeneğiyle monte eder. Bu ayarı değiştirmek için kurulum ortamının
kök dizinindeki Benioku dosyasına bakın.Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 147
2 MD Depolama Yazılımını Kur seçeneğini belirleyin.
3 Lisans sözleşmesini okuyun ve kabul edin.
4 Kurulum Grubu açılır menüsünden aşağıdaki kurulum seçeneklerinden
birini seçin:
• Tam (önerilen)—MD Depolama Yöneticisi (istemci) yazılımını, ana
sunucu tabanlı depolama aracısını, çok yollu sürücüyü ve donanım
sağlayıcıları yükler.
• Sadece Ana Makine—Ana sunucu tabanlı depolama aracısını ve çok
yollu sürücüleri yükler.
• Yönetim—Yönetim yazılımını ve donanım sağlayıcıları yükler.
• Özel—Belirli bileşenleri seçmenize olanak tanır.
5 Bu ana sunucu için veri depolamaya yönelik ayarladığınız MD depolama
dizisi modellerini seçin.
6 Ana sunucu yeniden başlatıldığında olay izleyicisi hizmetinin manuel ya da
otomatik olarak başlatılacağını seçin.
NOT: Bu seçenek sadece Windows istemci yazılımı kurulumu için geçerlidir.
7 Yükleme konumunu onaylayın ve Yükle öğesini tıklatın.
8 İstenirse kurulum tamamlandığında ana sunucuyu yeniden başlatın.
9 MD Depolama Yöneticisi'ni başlatın ve dizileri algılamasını sağlayın.
10 Mevcutsa, depolama diziniz ile birlikte satın aldığınız premium özellikleri
etkinleştirin. Premium özellikler satın aldıysanız depolama diziniz ile birlikte
gönderilen baskılı etkinleştirme kartınıza bakın.
NOT: MD Depolama Yöneticisi yükleyicisi depolama dizinizi çalıştırmak için
gerekli sürücüleri, ürün yazılımını ve işletim sistemi yamalarını/düzeltmelerini
otomatik olarak yükler. Bu sürücüleri ve ürün yazılımlarını support.dell.com
adresinden de edinebilirsiniz. Ayrıca, depolama dizinize yönelik ek ayarlar ve/veya
yazılımlar için support.dell.com/manuals adresindeki Support Matrix (Destek
Matrisi) bölümüne bakın.148 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken
Servis Etiketinizin Yerini Bulma
Sisteminiz benzersiz bir Hızlı Hizmet Kodu ve Hizmet Etiketi numarası
aracılığıyla tanınır. Hızlı Hizmet Kodu ve Hizmet Etiketi sistemin ön tarafında
ve arka tarafında RAID denetleyici modüllerinin yanında bulunur. Bu bilgiler,
Dell tarafından destek aramalarının uygun personele yönlendirilmesinde
kullanılır.
NOM Bilgisi (Yalnızca Meksika İçin)
Aşağıdaki bilgiler, resmi Meksika standartlarının (NOM) gerekliliklerine uygun
olarak bu belgede açıklanan aygıt üzerinde bulunmaktadır:
İthalatçı: Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V.
Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso
Col. Lomas Altas
11950 México, D.F.
Model numarası: E03J ve E04J
Besleme gerilimi: 100–240 V CA
Frekans: 50/60 Hz
Akım tüketimi: 8,6 ASisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 149
Teknik Özellikler
Sürücüler
PowerVault MD3200 Maksimum on iki adet 3,5 inç SAS çalışırken
takılabilir sabit sürücü (3.0 Gbps ve 6.0 Gbps)
PowerVault MD3220 Maksimum yirmi dört adet 2,5 inç SAS çalışırken
takılabilir sabit sürücü (3.0 Gbps ve 6.0 Gbps)
RAID Denetleyici Modülleri
RAID denetleyici modülleri • Bir veya iki adet çalışırken takılabilir, sıcaklık
sensörlü modül
• Denetleyici başına 2 GB önbellek
Arka Panel Konektörleri (RAID Denetleyici Modülü Başına)
SAS konektörleri • Ana sunuculara bağlantı için dört adet SAS GİRİŞ
bağlantı noktası
• Genişletme kasası ve ek PowerVault MD1200 serisi
kasa için bir adet SAS Çıkış konektörü
NOT: SAS konektörleri, SFF-8088 uyumludur.
Seri konektör Bir adet 6 pimli mini DIN konektörü
NOT: Sadece teknik destek amaçlı kullanım için.
Yönetim Ethernet konektörü Kasanın bant dışı yönetimi için bir adet 100/1000
Base-T port Ethernet
NOT: Birincil ve ikincil RAID denetleyici modülleri için
varsayılan yönetim bağlantı noktası IP adresleri
sırasıyla: 192.168.128.101 ve 192.168.128.102
Varsayılan olarak yönetim bağlantı noktaları Dinamik
Ana Makine Yapılandırma Protokolü'ne (DHCP)
ayarlıdır. Denetleyici belirli bir zaman aşımı süresi
(yaklaşık 3 dakika) içinde DHCP sunucusundan IP
adresi yapılandırması alamazsa varsayılan statik IP
adresi ayarına geri döner. Daha fazla bilgi için bkz.
Uygulama Kılavuzu.150 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken
Genişletme
PowerVault MD1200 serisi PowerVault MD1200 veya PowerVault MD1220
genişletme kasalarının tüm kombinasyonlarıyla
maksimum 192 adet sabit sürücüyü destekler.
192 sabit sürücü desteği Premium Özelliktir ve
etkinleştirme gerektirir. Premium Özellik
kullanılmadan desteklenen maksimum sabit sürücü
sayısı 120'dir.
Yedek yol bağlantısı, her sabit sürücüye yedek veri
yolları sağlar.
Arka Panel Kartı
Konektörler • 12 veya 24 adet SAS sabit sürücü konektörü
• İki güç kaynağı/soğutma fanı modülü konektörü
• İki set RAID denetleyici modülü konektörü
• Ön LED'ler ve sistem tanımlama düğmesi için bir
kontrol paneli konektörü
Sensörler İki adet sıcaklık sensörü
LED Göstergeleri
Ön panel • Sistem durumu için bir adet iki renkli LED
göstergesi
• Güç ve kasa modu için iki adet tek renkli LED
göstergesi
NOT: PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisinde,
kasa modu LED'i bulunmamaktadır.
Sabit sürücü taşıyıcısı • Bir adet tek renkli etkinlik LED'i
• Sürücü başına bir adet iki renkli LED durum
göstergesi
Güç kaynağı/soğutma fanı Güç kaynağı durumu, güç kaynağı/fan arızası ve AC
durumu için üç adet LED durumu göstergesiSisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 151
RAID denetleyici modülü Altı adet tek renkli LED:
• Bir adet pil hatası
• Bir adet önbellek etkinliği
• Bir adet denetleyici hatası
• Bir adet denetleyici gücü
• Bir adet sistem tanımlama
• Bir adet yönetim Ethernet etkinliği
Altı adet iki renkli LED:
• Dört adet SAS Giriş bağlantısı veya hata
• Bir adet SAS ÇIKIŞI bağlantısı veya hatası
• Bir adet yönetim Ethernet bağlantı hızı
Anahtar
Sistem tanımlama düğmesi Ön kontrol panelinde yer alır. Bu düğme raf içindeki
bir sistemi bulmak için kullanılır.
Kasa modu anahtarı Sistemin ön kısmında yer alır. Bu anahtar, PowerVault
MD3200 serisi depolama dizisinde bulunmamaktadır.
Parola sıfırlama anahtarı RAID denetleyici modülünün arka panelinde yer alır.
Bu anahtar depolama dizisi parolasını sıfırlamak için
kullanılır.
Güç Kaynakları
AC güç kaynağı (güç kaynağı başına)
Vat Değeri 600 V
Gerilim 100–240 VAC (8,6 A–4,3 A)
Isı dağıtımı 100 V
Maksimum ani akım Normal hat koşulları altında ve sistemin ortam
çalışma aralığının tamamı boyunca, ani akım 10 ms
veya daha kısa bir süre için güç kaynağı başına
maksimum 55 A'ya ulaşabilir.
LED Göstergeleri (devamı)152 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken
Kullanılabilir Sabit Sürücü Gücü (Yuva Başına)
PowerVault MD3200 25 V
PowerVault MD3220 12 V
RAID Denetleyici Modülü Gücü (Yuva Başına)
Maksimum güç tüketimi 100 V
Fiziksel
PowerVault MD3200
Yükseklik 8,68 cm (3,41 inç)
Genişlik 44,63 cm (17,57 inç)
Derinlik 60,20 cm (23,70 inç)
Ağırlık (maksimum
yapılandırma)
29,30 kg (64,6 lb)
Ağırlık (boş durumda) 8,84 kg (19,5 lb)
PowerVault MD3220
Yükseklik 8,68 cm (3,41 inç)
Genişlik 44,63 cm (17,57 inç)
Derinlik 54,90 cm (21,61 inç)
Ağırlık (maksimum
yapılandırma)
24,22 kg (53,4 lb)
Ağırlık (boş durumda) 8,61 kg (19 lb)
Çevre Özellikleri
NOT: Belirli sistem yapılandırmalarına ilişkin çevresel ölçümlerle ilgili ek bilgi için bkz.
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Sıcaklık
Çalışma Saatte maksimum 10°C'lik sıcaklık değişimli
10° - 35°C (50° - 95°F)
NOT: 2950 fitten fazla yükseklikler için, maksimum
çalışma sıcaklığı 1ºF/550 ft. düşer.Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 153
Depolama Saatte maksimum 20°C'lik sıcaklık değişimli
-40° - 65°C (-40° - 149°F).
Bağıl nem
Çalışma Saatte maksimum %10'luk nem değişimli %20 - %80
(yoğuşmasız)
Depolama %5 - %95 (yoğuşmasız)
Maksimum titreşim
Çalışma 15 dk. için 3–200 Hz'de 0,25 G
Depolama 15 dk. için 3–200 Hz'de 0,5 G
Maksimum sarsıntı
Çalışma Çalışma yönünde 2,6 ms için 31 G'lik pozitif z
ekseninde (sistemin her tarafında tek darbe) tek
sarsıntı darbesi
Depolama Pozitif ve negatif x, y ve z eksenlerinde 2 ms'ye kadar
71 G değerinde gerçekleşen birbiri ardına altı sarsıntı
darbesi (sistemin her tarafında tek darbe)
Yükseklik
Çalışma -16 - 3048 m (-50 - 10.000 ft)
NOT: 2950 fitin üzerindeki yükseklikler
için, maksimum çalışma sıcaklığı 1ºF/550 ft düşer.
Depolama -16 - 10.600 m (-50 - 35.000 ft)
Havadan Geçen Madde Düzeyi
Sınıf ISA-S71.04-1985 ile tanımlanan biçimde G1
Çevre Özellikleri (devamı)154 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken170 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת
סביבתי
הערה: לקבלת מידע נוסף אודות מדידות סביבתיות עבור תצורות מערכת
.www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets ראה ,מסוימות
טמפרטורה
הפעלה °10 עד °35 צלזיוס )°50 עד °95 פרנהייט( עם שינוי
הדרגתי מרבי בטמפרטורה של °10 צלזיוס בשעה
הערה: בגבהים שמעל 900 מטר, טמפרטורת
ההפעלה המרבית יורדת ב- 0.5 מעלות צלזיוס
בקירוב לכל 165 מ'.
אחסון °40– עד °35 צלזיוס )°40– עד °149 פרנהייט( עם
שינוי הדרגתי מרבי בטמפרטורה של °20 צלזיוס בשעה.
לחות יחסית
הפעלה %20 עד %80 )ללא התעבות( עם שינוי הדרגתי מרבי
בלחות של %10 בשעה
אחסון %5 עד %95 )ללא התעבות(
מידת תנודה מרבית
דקות 15 במשך הרץ 3-200 -ב 0.25 G הפעלה
דקות 15 במשך הרץ 3-200 -ב 0.5 G אחסון
מידת זעזועים מרבית
הפעלה פעימת זעזוע אחת של 31 G בציר Z החיובי )פעימה
אחת בכל צד של המערכת( למשך 2.6 מילי-שניות בכיוון
ההפעלה
אחסון שש פעימות זעזוע של 71 G המופעלות בזו אחר זו בצירי
Y ,X ו- Z החיוביים והשליליים )פעימה אחת בכל צד של
המערכת( למשך עד 2 אלפיות השנייה
גובה
הפעלה 16– עד 3048 מטר )50– עד 10,000 רגל(
הערה: בגבהים שמעל 900 מטר, טמפרטורת
ההפעלה המרבית יורדת ב- 0.5 מעלות צלזיוס
בקירוב לכל 165 מטר.
)רגל 35,000 עד –50( מטר 10,600 עד –16 אחסון
רמת זיהום אווירי
ISA-S71.04-1985 -ב כמוגדר G1 סיווגתחילת עבודה עם המערכת 169
אספקת חשמל זמינה לכונן קשיח )לחריץ(
וואט 25 PowerVault MD3200
וואט 12 PowerVault MD3220
אספקת חשמל למודול בקר RAID )לחריץ(
צריכת זרם מרבית 100 וואט
פיזי
PowerVault MD3200
גובה 8.68 ס"מ
רוחב 44.63 ס"מ
עומק 60.20 ס"מ
משקל )תצורה מרבית( 29.30 ק"ג
משקל )ריק( 8.84 ק"ג
PowerVault MD3220
גובה 8.68 ס"מ
רוחב 44.63 ס"מ
עומק 54.90 ס"מ
משקל )תצורה מרבית( 24.22 ק"ג
משקל )ריק( 8.61 ק"ג168 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת
נוריות חיווי )המשך(
מודול בקר RAID שש נוריות בצבע אחד:
אחת לתקלה בסוללה
אחת למטמון פעיל
אחת לתקלה בבקר
אחת לאספקת חשמל לבקר
אחת לזיהוי מערכת
אחת לניהול פעילות Ethernet
שש נוריות בשני צבעים:
ארבע לקישור או תקלה של SAS IN
אחת לקישור או תקלה של SAS OUT
אחת לניהול מהירות קישור Ethernet
מתג
לחצן זיהוי מערכת ממוקם בלוח הבקרה הקדמי. לחצן זה משמש לאיתור
מערכת בתוך מעמד.
מתג מצב זיווד ממוקם בחזית המערכת. מתג זה אינו ישים למערך האחסון
.PowerVault MD3200 Series
מתג איפוס סיסמה נמצא בלוח האחורי של מודול בקר ה- RAID. מתג זה
משמש לאיפוס סיסמת מערך האחסון.
ספקי זרם
זרם חילופין )לכל ספק זרם(
הספק 600 וואט
)אמפר 8.6–4.3( ח"ז וולט 100–240 מתח
פיזור חום 100 וואט
זרם נהירה מרבי בתנאי קו טיפוסיים ובטווח הפעולה של סביבת המערכת
כולה, זרם הנהירה )inrush( עשוי להגיע ל- 55 אמפר
לכל היותר לכל ספק זרם למשך 10 מ"ש או פחות.תחילת עבודה עם המערכת 167
הרחבה
PowerVault MD1200 Series תמיכה ב- 192 כוננים קשיחים לכל היותר, עם כל
צירוף של זיוודי הרחבה PowerVault MD1200
או PowerVault MD1220. תמיכה ב- 192 כוננים
קשיחים היא תכונת פרמיום ומחייבת הפעלה. המספר
המרבי של כוננים קשיחים שנתמך ללא שימוש בתכונת
פרמיום הוא 120.
קישוריות נתיבים יתירים מספקת נתיבי נתונים יתירים
לכל כונן קשיח.
לוח אם
מחברים 12 או 24 מחברי כונן קשיח SAS
שני מחברי מודול ספק זרם/מאוורר קירור
שתי ערכות של מחברי מודול בקר RAID
מחבר לוח בקרה אחד עבור נוריות קדמיות ולחצן זיהוי
מערכת
חיישנים שני חיישני טמפרטורה
נוריות חיווי
לוח קדמי נורית חיווי אחת בעלת שני צבעים לציון מצב המערכת
שתי נוריות חיווי בעלות צבע אחד למצב אספקת
חשמל וזיווד
הערה: נורית מצב זיווד אינה ישימה למערך
.PowerVault MD3200 Series האחסון
מפרץ כונן קשיח נורית פעילות אחת בעלת צבע אחד
נורית חיווי מצב אחת בעלת שני צבעים לכל כונן
ספק זרם/מאוורר קירור שלוש נוריות חיווי מצב לציון מצב ספק הזרם, כשל בספק
זרם/מאוורר ומצב זרם חילופין166 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת
מפרט טכני
כוננים
PowerVault MD3200 עד שניים עשר כוננים קשיחים מסוג SAS בגודל
3.5 אינץ' עם אפשרות להחלפה חמה )3.0 Gbps ו-
)6.0 Gbps
PowerVault MD3220 עד עשרים וארבעה כוננים קשיחים מסוג SAS בגודל
2.5 אינץ' עם אפשרות להחלפה חמה )3.0 Gbps ו-
)6.0 Gbps
מודולי בקר RAID
מודולי בקר RAID מודול אחד או שניים, עם אפשרות להחלפה חמה, עם
חיישני טמפרטורה
מטמון של 2 GB לכל בקר
מחברי לוח אחורי )לכל מודול בקר RAID(
מחברי SAS ארבע יציאות SAS IN לחיבור מארחים
יציאת SAS OUT אחת להרחבה של זיווד
נוסף PowerVault MD1200 Series
הערה: מחברי SAS תואמים ל- SFF-8088.
מחבר טורי מחבר 6 פינים אחד מסוג מיני-DIN
הערה: לשימוש תמיכה טכנית בלבד.
ניהול עבור אחד 100/1000 Base-T port Ethernet Ethernet ניהול מחבר
הזיווד של out-of-band
הערה: כתובות ה- IP של יציאות הניהול
עבור מודולי בקר ה- RAID הראשי והמשני הן
,192.168.128.102 -ו 192.168.128.101
בהתאמה. כברירת מחדל, יציאות הניהול מוגדרות
Dynamic Host Configuration לפרוטוקול
DHCP( Protocol(. אם הבקר אינו מצליח לקבל
תצורת כתובת IP משרת ה- DHCP תוך זמן
מוגדר )3 דקות לערך(, הוא חוזר חזרה לברירת
המחדל של מיעון IP סטטי. לקבלת מידע נוסף,
עיין במדריך הפריסה.תחילת עבודה עם המערכת 165
איתור תג השירות
המערכת מזוהה באמצעות קוד שירות מהיר ומספר תג שירות ייחודיים. קוד השירות
המהיר ותג השירות נמצאים בחזית המערכת ובגב המערכת, ליד מודולי בקר ה- RAID.
מידע זה משמש את Dell לניתוב שיחות תמיכה לעובדים המתאימים.
מידע NOM )מקסיקו בלבד(
המידע הבא ניתן עבור ההתקן המתואר במסמך זה, בהתאם לדרישות התקנים
המקסיקניים הרשמיים )NOM(:
יבואן:
מספר דגם: E03J ו- E04J
מתח חשמלי: 240–100 וולט CA
תדר: 50/60 הרץ
צריכת זרם: 8.6 אמפר164 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת
.Install MD Storage Software באפשרות בחר 2
3 קרא את הסכם הרשיון וקבל אותו.
4 בחר את אפשרויות ההתקנה הבאות מתוך התפריט הנפתח Install Set:
(Full (recommended )מלא )מומלץ(( — התקנת תוכנת
MD Storage Manager )לקוח(, סוכן אחסון מבוסס מארח, מנהלי התקנים
לריבוי נתיבים וספקי חומרה.
Host Only )מארח בלבד( — התקנת סוכן האחסון מבוסס המארח ומנהלי
התקנים לריבוי נתיבים.
Management )ניהול( — התקנת תוכנת הניהול וספקי החומרה.
Custom )מותאמת אישית( — אפשרות לבחור רכיבים מסוימים.
5 בחר את דגמי מערך האחסון MD שאתה מגדיר לשימוש כאחסון נתונים עבור
שרת מארח זה.
6 בחר אם להפעיל שירות ניטור אירועים בצורה אוטומטית או ידנית, בעת אתחול
מחדש של השרת המארח.
הערה: אפשרות זו ישימה רק להתקנת תוכנת לקוח ל- Windows.
7 אשר את מיקום ההתקנה ולאחר מכן לחץ על Install )התקנה(.
8 אם תתבקש, אתחל את השרת המארח עם השלמת ההתקנה.
9 הפעל את MD Storage Manager ואתר את המערך או המערכים.
10 אם מתאים, הפעל תכונות פרמיום שרכשת עם מערך האחסון. אם רכשת תכונות
פרמיום, עיין בכרטיס ההפעלה המודפס המצורף למערך האחסון.
הערה: תוכנית ההתקנה של MD Storage Manager מתקינה אוטומטית את
מנהלי ההתקנים הדרושים, קושחה וטלאים/תיקונים חמים של מערכת ההפעלה
שמיועדים להפעלת מערך האחסון. מנהלי התקנים וקושחה אלו זמינים גם
באתר support.dell.com. נוסף על כך, עיין ב- Support Matrix )מטריצת
תמיכה( באתר support.dell.com/manuals לקבלת הגדרות ו/או תוכנות
נוספות הדרושות למערך האחסון שברשותך.תחילת עבודה עם המערכת 163
.PowerVault MD3200 Series אחסון מערך 2
הערה: לפני הפעלת השרתים המארחים, ודא שנורית המצב של מערך
האחסון מאירה בכחול.
3 שרתים מארחים.
התקנת הלוח הקדמי
התקן את הלוח הקדמי )אופציונלי(.
התקנת תוכנת האחסון MD
הערה: לקבלת הוראות מפורטות לגבי ההתקנה של תוכנת האחסון MD,
הגדרת הזיווד והמשימות שלאחר ההתקנה, עיין במדריך הפריסה.
היישום MD Storage Manager קובע את התצורה, מנהל ומבצע ניטור של מערך
האחסון. כדי להתקין את תוכנת האחסון MD:
1 הכנס את מדיית המשאבים של MD Series.
בהתאם למערכת ההפעלה, ייתכן שתוכנית ההתקנה תופעל אוטומטית. אם תוכנית
ההתקנה אינה מופעלת אוטומטית, נווט לספריית השורש במדיית ההתקנה )או תמונת
תוכנית ההתקנה שהורדת( והפעל את הקובץ md_launcher.exe. במערכות
מבוססות Linux, נווט אל השורש של מדיית המשאב והפעל את הקובץ autorun.
הערה: כברירת מחדל, מערכת ההפעלה Red Hat Enterprise Linux
מרכיבה את מדיית המשאב באמצעות האפשרות noexec mount-,
אשר אינה מאפשרת להפעיל קובצי הפעלה. כדי לשנות הגדרה זו, עיין
בקובץ Readme שבספריית השורש של מדיית ההתקנה.162 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת
חיווט זיווד ההרחבה
מערך אחסון
PowerVault MD3200
Series
זיווד הרחבה
PowerVault MD1200
)אופציונלי( 2 Series
זיווד הרחבה
PowerVault MD1200
)אופציונלי( 1 Series
הפעלת הזיווד
הפעל את הרכיבים בסדר הבא:
1 זיווד הרחבה PowerVault MD1200 Series )אם בשימוש(.
הערה: לפני הפעלת מערך האחסון, ודא שנורית המצב של זיווד ההרחבה
מאירה בכחול.תחילת עבודה עם המערכת 161
חיבור כבלי החשמל
ודא שמתג ההפעלה נמצא במצב כבוי )OFF(, לפני שתחבר את כבלי החשמל. חבר אל
המערכת את כבל)י( החשמל של המערכת.
אבטחת כבלי החשמל
אבטח את הכבלים היטב לכן באמצעות הרצועה המצורפת.
חבר את הקצה השני של כבלי החשמל לשקע חשמל מוארק או למקור חשמל נפרד, כגון
אל-פסק )UPS( או ליחידת חלוקת חשמל )PDU(. כל ספק זרם צריך להיות מחובר
למעגל חשמלי נפרד.160 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת
התקנה וקביעת תצורה
אזהרה: לפני ביצוע ההליך הבא, עיין בהוראות הבטיחות המצורפות
למערכת.
הוצאת המערכת מהאריזה
הוצא את המערכת מהאריזה וזהה כל פריט, לפי רשימת האריזה שמצורפת למערכת.
התקנת המסילות והמערכת במעמד
הרכב את המסילות והתקן את המערכת במעמד, תוך ביצוע הוראות הבטיחות והוראות
התקנת המעמד המצורפות למערכת.
הערה: כדי לאזן את עומס המשקל, מומלץ להתקין את מערך האחסון
PowerVault MD3200 Series בחלק התחתון של המעמד ואת זיוודי
.מעליו PowerVault MD1200 Series ההרחבהתחילת עבודה עם המערכת 159
תצורות נפוצות
חיווט המארחים המחוברים ישירות
רשת ארגונית,
ציבורית או פרטית
שרת 4 שרת 3 שרת 2 שרת 1
מערך אחסון
PowerVault MD3200 Series158 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת
המדריך למתכנת SMI-S מספק מידע על השימוש בספק ה- SMI-S
.SMI-S ובתכנות
כל מדיה המצורפת למערכת המספקת תיעוד וכלים לקביעת תצורה וניהול של
המערכת, כולל אלה השייכים למערכת ההפעלה, תוכנת ניהול המערכת, עדכוני
מערכת ורכיבי מערכת שרכשת עם המערכת.
הערה: בדוק תמיד עדכונים באתר support.dell.com/manuals
וקרא את העדכונים תחילה, מכיוון שפעמים רבות הם מחליפים מידע
במסמכים אחרים.
מערכות הפעלה נתמכות
Microsoft Windows Server
Red Hat Enterprise Linux
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
VMware
הערה: לקבלת המידע העדכני ביותר על כל הגרסאות של מערכות
ההפעלה הנתמכות, ראה Support Matrix )מטריצת תמיכה( באתר
.support.dell.com/manualsתחילת עבודה עם המערכת 157
לפני שתתחיל
הערה: לאורך המסמך, מערך האחסון Dell PowerVault MD3200 Series
.Dell PowerVault MD3220 -ל והן Dell PowerVault MD3200 -ל הן מתייחס
זיווד ההרחבה Dell PowerVault MD1200 Series מתייחס הן ל-
.Dell PowerVault MD1220 -ל והן Dell PowerVault MD1200
לפני הגדרת מערך האחסון Dell PowerVault MD3200 Series, עליך לקחת
בחשבון נהלי עבודה מיטביים מסוימים כדי להבטיח שמערך האחסון יפעל ביעילות
מרבית ויציע יתירות מלאה )אם נדרש(.
בכל הרשת, השתמש תמיד בכבל Ethernet מקטגוריה 5e )או גבוהה יותר(.
לפני חיבור כבלים כלשהם בין השרת המארח ומערך האחסון, סמן פיזית כל
יציאה ומחבר.
בצע תמיד הליכי הפעלה וכיבוי מתאימים, בעת ביצוע מחזור הפעלה ברשת. כמו
כן, עליך להקפיד לחבר רכיבי רשת קריטיים למעגלים חשמליים נפרדים.
תיעוד ומדיה נוספים שעשויים להידרש לך
אזהרה: עיין במידע הבטיחות והתקינה המצורף למערכת שברשותך. מידע
בנוגע לאחריות עשוי להיות כלול במסמך זה או כמסמך נפרד.
הערה: כל מסמכי PowerVault MD3200 Series זמינים בכתובת
.support.dell.com/manuals
תיעוד המעמד המצורף לפתרון המעמד שברשותך מתאר את אופן התקנת
המערכת במעמד.
המדריך למשתמש מספק מידע אודות תכונות מערכת ומתאר כיצד לפתור בעיות
במערכת וכן כיצד להתקין או להחליף רכיבי מערכת.
מדריך הפריסה מספק מידע על התקנה וקביעת תצורה של תוכנה וחומרה.
מדריך ה- CLI מספק מידע על שימוש בממשק שורת הפקודה )CLI( לקביעת
התצורה ולניהול מערך האחסון.הערות, התראות ואזהרות
הערה: "הערה" מציינת מידע חשוב המסייע להשתמש במחשב ביתר יעילות.
התראה: "התראה" מציינת נזק אפשרי לחומרה או אובדן נתונים, במקרה
של אי ציות להוראות.
אזהרה: "אזהרה" מציינת אפשרות של נזק לרכוש, פגיעה גופנית או מוות.
____________________
המידע בפרסום זה עשוי להשתנות ללא הודעה.
2011 Dell Inc ©. כל הזכויות שמורות.
חל איסור מוחלט על העתקה מכל סוג של חומרים אלה ללא הרשאה בכתב מ- Dell Inc.
סימנים מסחריים שבשימוש בטקסט זה: ™Dell, הלוגו DELL ו- ™PowerVault הם סימנים מסחריים
®Windows Server הם סימנים מסחריים או סימנים מסחריים רשומים של
®Microsoft ו-
Dell Inc. של
Red Hat Enterprise -ו Red Hat®
Microsoft Corporation בארצות הברית ו/או במדינות אחרות.
®SUSE הוא
®Linux הם סימנים מסחריים רשומים של .Red Hat, Inc בארצות הברית ובמדינות אחרות.
®VMware הוא סימן מסחרי רשום
סימן מסחרי רשום של .Novell, Inc בארצות הברית ובמדינות אחרות.
של .VMware, Inc בארצות הברית ו/או בתחומי שיפוט אחרים.
ייתכן שייעשה שימוש בסימנים מסחריים ובשמות מסחריים אחרים בפרסום זה כדי להתייחס לישויות
הטוענות לבעלות על הסימנים והשמות, או למוצרים שלהן. .Dell Inc מוותרת על כל חלק קנייני בסימנים
מסחריים ושמות מסחריים פרט לאלה שבבעלותה.
סדרת דגם תקינה E03J ו- E04J
A02 מהדורה D76VD חלק מספר 2011 - 08סדרת דגם תקינה E03J ו- E04J
מערכי אחסון Dell PowerVault
MD3220 -ו MD3200
תחילת עבודה עם
המערכתwww.dell.com | support.dell.com
Printed in Poland
Vytištěno v Polsku.
Imprimé en Pologne.
Gedruckt in Polen.
Εκτύπωση στην Πολωνία.
Wydrukowano w Polsce.
Напечатано в Польше.
Impreso en Polonia.
Polonya’da basılmıştır.
Dell PowerVault MD3200i and
MD3220i Storage Arrays
Getting Started
With Your System
Guide de mise en route
Introdução ao uso do sistema
Introducción al sistemaDell PowerVault MD3200i and
MD3220i Storage Arrays
Getting Started
With Your System
Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04JNotes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use
of your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data
if instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage,
personal injury, or death.
____________________
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
© 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc.
is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerVault™ are trademarks of Dell Inc.
Microsoft
®
and Windows Server
®
are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat
®
and Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
are
registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. SUSE
®
is a registered
trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. VMware
®
is a registered trademark
of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming
the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and
trade names other than its own.
Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04J
2011 - 08 P/N TFKD1 Rev. A02Getting Started With Your System 3
Before You Begin
NOTE: Throughout the document, Dell PowerVault MD3200i series storage array
refers to both Dell PowerVault MD3200i and Dell PowerVault MD3220i. Dell
PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure refers to both Dell PowerVault
MD1200 and Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Before setting up your Dell PowerVault MD3200i series storage array,
you must consider certain best practices to ensure that your storage array
operates at maximum efficiency and offers full redundancy (if required).
• It is recommended that you use a dedicated IP SAN for iSCSI data
transmission. Management traffic can be isolated on a separate
management network.
• Complete the iSCSI configuration worksheet before configuring iSCSI.
See "Completing the iSCSI Worksheet" on page 4. This worksheet gathers
physical network information in a single source.
• After completing the iSCSI worksheet, draw the configuration before
setting up the solution.
• Always configure redundant iSCSI data paths to provide alternate paths to
and from the host server should one of the data paths become disabled.
• If multiple NICs are installed on a host, it is recommeded that you use
different subnets for management and iSCSI data links.
• Throughout the network, always use a Category 5e (or higher)
Ethernet cable.
• Before connecting any cables between the host server and storage array,
physically label each port and connector.
• Always follow proper power-up and power-down procedures when cycling
power across the network. You must also ensure that critical network
components are on separate power circuits.
NOTE: The illustrations in this document show cabling for only one PowerVault
MD3200i series storage array in a SAN environment. The illustrations also show
only the default IP addresses for the PowerVault MD3200i series storage array. To
cable more than one PowerVault MD3200i series storage array in a SAN
environment, see the Deployment Guide.4 Getting Started With Your System
Completing the iSCSI Worksheet
IPv4 Settings
Mutual
CHAP Secret
Target CHAP
Secret
A
B
host server
PowerVault
MD3200i series
storage array
192.168.130.101 (In 0 default)
192.168.131.101 (In 1 default)
192.168.132.101 (In 2 default)
192.168.133.101 (In 3 default) 192.168.128.101 (management network port)
192.168.130.102 (In 0 default)
192.168.131.102 (In 1 default)
192.168.132.102 (In 2 default)
192.168.133.102 (In 3 default)
192.168.128.102 (management network port)
If you need additional space for more than one host server, use an additional sheet.
iSCSI port 1
iSCSI port 2
iSCSI port 3
iSCSI port 4
Management port
A Static IP address (host server) Subnet mask Default gateway
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
NOTE: The host server can support up to four NICs.Getting Started With Your System 5
NOTE: For information about the IPv6 worksheet, see the Deployment Guide.
Other Documentation and Media You May Need
WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with
your system. Warranty information may be included within this document or
as a separate document.
NOTE: All PowerVault MD3200i series storage array documents are available at
support.dell.com/manuals.
• The rack documentation included with your rack solution describes how
to install your system into a rack.
• The Owner’s Manual provides information about system features and
describes how to troubleshoot the system and install or replace system
components.
• The Deployment Guide provides information about installing and
configuring the software and hardware.
• The CLI Guide provides information about using the command line
interface (CLI) to configure and manage your storage array.
B Static IP address (storage array) Subnet mask Default gateway
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
iSCSI controller 0, In 0
iSCSI controller 0, In 1
iSCSI controller 0, In 2
iSCSI controller 0, In 3
Management port cntrl 0
iSCSI controller 1, In 0
iSCSI controller 1, In 1
iSCSI controller 1, In 2
iSCSI controller 1, In 3
Management port cntrl 1
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___6 Getting Started With Your System
• The SMI-S Programmer’s Guide provides information about using
the SMI-S provider and SMI-S programming.
• Any media that ships with your system that provides documentation and tools
for configuring and managing your system, including those pertaining to the
operating system, system management software, system updates, and system
components that you purchased with your system.
NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the
updates first because they often supersede information in other documents.
Preparing the Host Server
Supported Operating Systems
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
NOTE: For the latest information on all supported operating system versions,
see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals.
Additional NICs for iSCSI
When installing additional NICs, it is recommended that:
• You use dedicated redundant storage networks for iSCSI traffic.
If a dedicated network is not feasible, isolate the iSCSI traffic from
general network traffic using virtual local area networks (VLAN).
• You use additional NICs dedicated for iSCSI traffic.
• The NICs must be added in pairs for redundancy (up to four NICs).
NOTE: A single NIC is also supported.
NIC Configuration
In a SAN environment, depending on the number of switches, it is
recommended that you use two or four unique subnets for iSCSI traffic.
For direct-attached storage environments, each NIC directly connected to
the PowerVault MD3200i series storage array must be on a separate subnet.Getting Started With Your System 7
Common Configurations
Cabling Your Direct-Attached Hosts
Server 1 Server 2
Storage array
Server 3 Server 4
Corporate, public,
or private network8 Getting Started With Your System
Cabling Your SAN-Attached Hosts
Storage array
Corporate, public,
or private network
Switch 1 Switch 2
ServerGetting Started With Your System 9
Up to 32 hosts
Server 1 Server 2
Storage array
Corporate, public,
or private network
Switch 1 Switch 210 Getting Started With Your System
Installation and Configuration
WARNING: Before performing the following procedure, review the safety
instructions that came with the system.
Unpacking the System
Unpack your system and identify each item with the packing list that shipped
with your system.
Installing the Rails and System in a Rack
Assemble the rails and install the system in the rack following the safety
instructions and the rack installation instructions provided with your system.
NOTE: To balance the weight load, it is recommended that you install the
PowerVault MD3200i series storage array at the bottom of the rack and the
PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures above it.Getting Started With Your System 11
Connecting the Power Cable(s)
Ensure that the power switch is in the OFF position before connecting the
power cables. Connect the system’s power cable(s) to the system.
Securing the Power Cable(s)
Secure the cable(s) firmly to the bracket using the provided strap.
Plug the other end of the power cables into a grounded electrical outlet or
a separate power source such as an uninterrupted power supply (UPS) or
a power distribution unit (PDU). Each power supply must be connected to a
separate power circuit.12 Getting Started With Your System
Cabling Your Expansion Enclosure
Turning On the Enclosure
PowerVault MD3200i
series storage array
PowerVault MD1200
series expansion
enclosure 1 (optional)
PowerVault MD1200
series expansion
enclosure 2 (optional)Getting Started With Your System 13
Turn on components in the following order
1 Ethernet switches (if used)
2 PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures (if used)
NOTE: Before turning on the storage array, ensure that the expansion
enclosure status LED is blue.
3 PowerVault MD3200i series storage array
NOTE: Before turning on the host server(s), ensure that the storage array
status LED is blue.
4 Host server(s)
Installing the Bezel
Install the bezel (optional).
Installing the MD Storage Software
NOTE: For detailed instructions about installing the MD storage software, setting
up the enclosure, and the post-installation tasks, see the Deployment Guide.
The MD Storage Manager software configures, manages and monitors the
storage array. The MD Configuration Utility (MDCU) is an optional utility
that provides a consolidated approach for configuring the management and 14 Getting Started With Your System
iSCSI host ports, and creating sessions for the iSCSI modular disk storage
arrays. It is recommended that you use MDCU to configure iSCSI on each
host server connected to the storage array. To install the MD storage software:
1 Insert the MD series resource media.
Depending on your operating system, the installer may launch
automatically. If the installer does not launch automatically, navigate to
the root directory of the installation media (or downloaded installer
image) and run the md_launcher.exe file. For Linux-based systems,
navigate to the root of the resource media and run the autorun file.
NOTE: By default, the Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating system mounts the
resource media with the -noexec mount option which does not allow you to
run executable files. To change this setting, see the Readme file in the root
directory of the installation media.
2 Select Install MD Storage Software.
3 Read and accept the license agreement.
4 Select one of the following installation options from the Install Set dropdown menu:
• Full (recommended)— Installs the MD Storage Manager (client)
software, host-based storage agent, multipath driver, and hardware
providers.
• Host Only—Installs the host-based storage agent and multipath
drivers.
• Management—Installs the management software and hardware
providers.
• Custom—Allows you to select specific components.
5 Select the MD storage array model(s) you are setting up to serve as data
storage for this host server.
6 Choose whether to start the event monitor service automatically when the
host server reboots or manually
NOTE: This option is applicable only to Windows client software installation.
7 Confirm the installation location and click Install.
8 If prompted, reboot the host server after the installation completes.Getting Started With Your System 15
9 When the reboot is complete, the MDCU may launch automatically. If
the MDCU does not launch automatically, launch it manually.
• In a Windows-based operating system, click Start→ Dell→ Modular
Disk Configuration Utility.
• In a Linux-based operating system, double-click the Modular Disk
Configuration Utility icon on the desktop.
NOTE: If MDCU is not installed, see the Deployment Guide at
support.dell.com/manuals.
10 Start the MD Storage Manager and discover the array(s).
11 If applicable, activate any premium features purchased with your storage
array. If you purchased premium features, see the printed activation card
shipped with your storage array.
NOTE: The MD Storage Manager installer automatically installs the required
drivers, firmware, and operating system patches/hotfixes to operate your storage
array. These drivers and firmware are also available at support.dell.com. In
addition, see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals for any additional
settings and/or software required for your specific storage array.
Locating Your Service Tag
Your system is identified by a unique Express Service Code and Service Tag
number. The Express Service Code and Service Tag are found on the front of
the system and at the back of the system next to the RAID controller
modules. This information is used by Dell to route support calls to the
appropriate personnel.16 Getting Started With Your System
NOM Information (Mexico Only)
The following information is provided on the device described
in this document in compliance with the requirements of the
official Mexican standards (NOM):
Technical Specifications
Importer:
Model number: E03J and E04J
Supply voltage: 100–240 V CA
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Current consumption: 8.6 A
Drives
PowerVault MD3200i Up to twelve 3.5-inch SAS hot-swappable hard
drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps)
PowerVault MD3220i Up to twenty four 2.5-inch SAS hot-swappable hard
drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps)
RAID Controller Modules
RAID controller modules • One or two hot-swappable modules
with temperature sensors
• 2 GB of cache per controller
Back-Panel Connectors (Per RAID Controller Module)
iSCSI connectors Four 1 GB iSCSI IN connectors to connect hosts
SAS expansion connector One SAS OUT port for expansion to an additional
PowerVault MD1200 series enclosure.
NOTE: SAS connectors are SFF-8088 compliant.
Serial connector One 6-pin mini-DIN connector
NOTE: For technical support use only.Getting Started With Your System 17
Management Ethernet
connector
One 100/1000 Base-T port Ethernet for out-of-band
management of the enclosure
NOTE: The default management port IP addresses for
the primary and secondary RAID controller modules
are 192.168.128.101 and 192.168.128.102, respectively.
By default, the management ports are set to Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If the controller is
unable to get an IP address configuration from a DHCP
server within a specified time out period
(approximately 3 minutes), it defaults back to static IP
addressing. For more information, see the Deployment
Guide.
Expansion
PowerVault MD1200 series Supports a maximum of 192 hard drives with any
combination of PowerVault MD1200 or PowerVault
MD1220 expansion enclosures. Support for 192 hard
drives is a Premium Feature and requires activation.
The maximum number of hard drives supported
without using the Premium Feature is 120.
Redundant path connectivity provides redundant
data paths to each hard drive.
Backplane Board
Connectors • 12 or 24 SAS hard-drive connectors
• Two power supply/cooling fan module connectors
• Two sets of RAID controller module connectors
• One control panel connector for front LEDs and
enclosure mode switch
Sensors Two temperature sensors
Back-Panel Connectors (Per RAID Controller Module) (continued)18 Getting Started With Your System
LED Indicators
Front panel • One two-color LED indicator for system status
• Two single-color LED indicators for power and
enclosure mode
NOTE: The enclosure mode LED is not applicable to
the PowerVault MD3200i series storage array.
Hard-drive carrier • One single-color activity LED
• One two-color LED status indicator per drive
Power supply/cooling fan Three LED status indicators for power supply status,
power supply/fan fault, and AC status
RAID controller module Ten single-color LEDs:
• One battery fault
• One cache active
• One controller fault
• One controller power
• One system identification
• One management Ethernet activity
• Four iSCSI IN port activity
Six two-color LEDs:
• Four iSCSI IN link speed
• One SAS OUT link or fault
• One management Ethernet link speed
Switch
System identification button Located on the front control panel. This button is
used to locate a system within a rack.
Enclosure mode switch Located on the front of the system. This switch is
not applicable to the PowerVault MD3200i series
storage array.
Password reset switch Located on the back panel of the RAID controller
module. This switch is used to reset the storage array
password.Getting Started With Your System 19
Power Supplies
AC power supply (per power supply)
Wattage 600 W
Voltage 100–240 VAC (8.6 A–4.3 A)
Heat dissipation 100 W
Maximum inrush current Under typical line conditions and over the entire
system ambient operating range, the inrush current
may reach a maximum of 55 A per power supply for
10 ms or less.
Available Hard-Drive Power (Per Slot)
PowerVault MD3200i 25 W
PowerVault MD3220i 12 W
RAID Controller Module Power (Per Slot)
Maximum power consumption 100 W
Physical
PowerVault MD3200i
Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches)
Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches)
Depth 60.20 cm (23.70 inches)
Weight (maximum
configuration)
29.30 kg (64.6 lb)
Weight (empty) 8.84 kg (19.5 lb)
PowerVault MD3220i
Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches)
Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches)
Depth 54.90 cm (21.61 inches)
Weight (maximum
configuration)
24.22 kg (53.4 lb)
Weight (empty) 8.61 kg (19lb)20 Getting Started With Your System
Environmental
NOTE: For additional information about environmental measurements for specific
system configurations, see www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Temperature
Operating 10 °C to 35 °C (50 °F to 95 °F) with a maximum
temperature gradation of 10 °C per hour
NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum
operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft.
Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) with a maximum
temperature gradation of 20°C per hour
Relative humidity
Operating 20% to 80% (noncondensing) with a maximum
humidity gradation of 10% per hour
Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing)
Maximum vibration
Operating 0.25 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min
Storage 0.5 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min
Maximum shock
Operating One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on
each side of the system) of 31 G for 2.6 ms in the
operational orientation
Storage Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the
positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on
each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms
Altitude
Operating –16 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)
NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum
operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft.
Storage –16 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)
Airborne Contaminant Level
Class G1 as defined by ISA-S71.04-1985Matrices de stockage
Dell PowerVault MD3200i
et MD3220i
Guide de mise en route
Séries E03J et E04J de modèle réglementaireRemarques, précautions et avertissements
REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent
vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION vous avertit d'un risque d'endommagement du
matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non-respect des instructions.
AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement
du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort.
____________________
Les informations que contient ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc.
est strictement interdite.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL et PowerVault™ sont des marques de
Dell Inc. Microsoft
®
et Windows Server
®
sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft
Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat
®
et Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
sont des
marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. SUSE
®
est une marque
déposée de Novell, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. VMware
®
est une marque déposée de
VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres juridictions.
D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence
aux entités revendiquant la propriété de ces marques ou de ces noms de produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout
intérêt exclusif dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens.
Séries E03J et E04J de modèle réglementaire
2011 - 08 N/P TFKD1 Rév. A02Guide de mise en route 23
Avant de commencer
REMARQUE : Dans ce document, les références à la matrice de stockage
Dell PowerVault série MD3200i concernent les matrices de stockage
Dell PowerVault MD3200i et Dell PowerVault MD3220i. Le boîtier d'extension
Dell PowerVault MD1200 désigne les boîtiers Dell PowerVault MD1200 et
Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Avant d'installer votre matrice de stockage Dell PowerVault série MD3200i,
vous devez considérer certaines des meilleures pratiques pour assurer le
fonctionnement le plus efficace possible de votre matrice de stockage et une
redondance complète (si nécessaire).
• Il vous est recommandé d'utiliser un IP SAN dédié pour la transmission
des données iSCSI. La gestion de trafic peut être isolée sur un réseau de
gestion distinct.
• Renseignez la liste de vérification de la configuration de l'interface iSCSI
avant de configurer iSCSI. Voir « Compléter la liste de vérification de
l'interface iSCSI. », à la page 24. Cette liste permet de regrouper les
informations de réseaux physiques en un seul endroit.
• Esquissez la configuration après avoir complété la liste de vérification
iSCSI et avant de définir la solution.
• Configurez toujours des chemins d'accès aux données redondants de
manière à fournir différents chemins d'accès allant au serveur hôte et en
sortant, dans l'éventualité d'une défaillance de l'un d'eux.
• Si plusieurs cartes réseau sont installées sur un hôte, il vous est
recommandé d'utiliser plusieurs sous-réseaux pour la gestion et les liaisons
de données iSCSI.
• Utilisez toujours un câble Ethernet de catégorie 5e (ou plus) à travers
le réseau.
• Avant de connecter tout câble entre le serveur hôte et la matrice de
stockage, étiquetez physiquement chaque port et chaque connecteur.
• Suivez toujours les procédures de mise sous et hors tension lors des
cycles d'alimentation du réseau. Vous devez également vous assurer
que les composants essentiels du réseau se trouvent sur différents
circuits d'alimentation.
REMARQUE : les illustrations qui figurent dans ce document montrent aussi le
câblage d'une seule matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i dans un
environnement de réseau SAN. Elles ne montrent également que les adresses IP
par défaut de la matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i. Pour câbler plus
d'une matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i dans un environnement de
réseau SAN, voir le Guide de déploiement.24 Guide de mise en route
Compléter la liste de vérification de
l'interface iSCSI.
Paramètres IPv4
Clé secrète
CHAP mutuelle
Clé secrète
CHAP cible
A
B
serveur hôte
Matrice de
stockage
PowerVault série
MD3200i
192.168.130.101 (entrée 0 par défaut)
192.168.131.101 (ent. 1 par défaut)
192.168.132.101 (entrée 2 par défaut)
192.168.133.101 (ent. 3 par défaut) 192.168.128.101 (port du réseau de gestion)
192.168.130.102 (ent. 0 par défaut)
192.168.131.102 (entrée 1 par défaut)
192.168.132.102 (ent. 2 par défaut)
192.168.133.102 (entrée 3 par défaut)
192.168.128.102 (port réseau de gestion)
Au besoin, utilisez une feuille supplémentaire (si vous disposez de plusieurs serveurs hôtes,
par exemple).
Port iSCSI 1
Port iSCSI 2
Port iSCSI 3
Port iSCSI 4
Port de gestion
Adresse IP statique (serveur hôte)
Masque de
sous-réseau
A Passerelle par défaut
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
REMARQUE : le serveur hôte peut prendre en charge jusqu'à quatre cartes réseauGuide de mise en route 25
REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations sur la liste de vérification IPv6, voir le Guide
de déploiement.
Autre documentation et support dont vous
pourriez avoir besoin
AVERTISSEMENT : reportez-vous aux informations sur la sécurité et les
réglementations qui accompagnent votre système. Les informations sur la garantie
se trouvent dans ce document ou dans un document distinct.
REMARQUE : tous les documents PowerVault série MD3200i sont disponibles sur
le site support.dell.com/manuals.
• La documentation fournie avec le rack indique comment installer le
système dans un rack.
• Le Manuel du propriétaire du matériel contient des informations sur les
caractéristiques du système, ainsi que des instructions relatives au
dépannage et à l'installation ou au remplacement de composants.
• Le Guide de déploiement fournit des informations sur l'installation et la
configuration du logiciel et du matériel.
• Le Guide CLI fournit des informations sur l'utilisation de l'interface de ligne
de commande (CLI) pour configurer et gérer votre matrice de stockage.
Adresse IP statique (m. de stockage)
Masque de
sous-réseau
Passerelle par
défaut
B
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
Contrôleur iSCSI 0, Ent. 0
Contrôleur iSCSI 0, Ent. 1
Contrôleur iSCSI 0, Ent. 2
Contrôleur iSCSI 0, Ent. 3
Port de gestion cntrl 0
Contrôleur iSCSI 1, Ent. 0
Contrôleur iSCSI 1, Ent. 1
Contrôleur iSCSI 1, Ent. 2
Contrôleur iSCSI 1, Ent. 3
Port de gestion cntrl 1
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___ ___26 Guide de mise en route
• Le Guide de programmation SMI-S fournit des informations sur
l'utilisation du fournisseur MI-S et la programmation SMI-S.
• Tous les supports fournis avec le système contiennent de la documentation et
des outils de configuration et de gestion du système, notamment du système
d'exploitation même et du logiciel de gestion du système ; les supports
contiennent également des mises à jour et les composants système que vous
avez achetés avec le système.
REMARQUE : vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site
support.dell.com/manuals et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent
souvent les informations que contiennent les autres documents.
Préparation du serveur hôte
Systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
REMARQUE : pour les informations les plus récentes sur toutes les versions de
système d'exploitation prises en charge, reportez-vous à la Matrice de support sur
support.dell.com/manuals.
Cartes réseau supplémentaires pour l'interface iSCSI
Lors de l'installation de cartes réseau supplémentaires, il vous est
recommandé de :
• Utiliser des réseaux de stockage redondants dédiés pour le trafic iSCSI.
Isoler le trafic iSCSI du trafic de réseau général à l'aide du réseau local
virtuel (VLAN) si un réseau dédié n'est pas disponible.
• Utiliser des cartes réseau dédiées supplémentaires pour le trafic iSCSI.
• Les cartes réseau doivent être ajoutées en paires (jusqu'à quatre
cartes réseau).
REMARQUE : une carte réseau seule est également prise en charge.
Configuration de carte réseau
Dans un environnement de réseau SAN, selon le nombre de commutateurs, il
vous est recommandé d'utiliser deux ou quatre sous-réseaux uniques pour le
trafic iSCSI. Dans les environnements de stockage reliés directement, chaque
carte réseau en connexion directe avec la matrice de stockage série MD3200i
doit se trouver sur un sous-réseau différent.Guide de mise en route 27
Configurations courantes
Câblage des hôtes reliés directement
Serveur 1 Serveur 2
Matrice de
stockage
Serveur 3 Serveur 4
Réseau
d'entreprise, public
ou privé28 Guide de mise en route
Câblage des hôtes reliés au réseau SAN
Matrice de
stockage
Réseau
d'entreprise, public
ou privé
Commutateur 1 Commutateur 2
ServeurGuide de mise en route 29
Jusqu'à 32 hôtes
Serveur 1 Serveur 2
Matrice de
stockage
Réseau
d'entreprise, public
ou privé
Commutateur 1 Commutateur 230 Guide de mise en route
Installation et configuration
AVERTISSEMENT : avant d'exécuter la procédure ci-dessous, lisez les
consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système.
Déballage du système
Déballez votre système et identifiez chaque élément en consultant la liste de
composants livrée avec votre système.
Installation des rails et du système dans un rack
Assemblez les rails et installez le système dans le rack en suivant les consignes
de sécurité et les instructions d'installation du rack fournies avec votre système.
REMARQUE : pour équilibrer la charge, nous vous recommandons d'installer la
matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i en bas du rack et les boîtiers
d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 au-dessus.Guide de mise en route 31
Branchement du ou des câbles d'alimentation
Avant de connecter les câbles d'alimentation, assurez-vous que le
commutateur d'alimentation est en position OFF (ÉTEINT). Branchez le ou
les câbles d'alimentation sur le système.
Fixation du ou des câbles d'alimentation
Fixez fermement les câbles au support de fixation à l'aide de la lanière fournie.
Branchez ensuite l'autre extrémité des câbles d'alimentation sur une prise de
courant mise à la masse ou sur une source d'alimentation autonome (onduleur
[UPS] ou unité de distribution de l'alimentation [PDU]...). Chaque bloc
d'alimentation doit être connecté à un circuit d'alimentation différent.32 Guide de mise en route
Câblage de votre boîtier d'extension
Mise sous tension du boîtier
Matrice de stockage
PowerVault série
MD3200i
Boîtier d'extension
PowerVault série
MD1200 1 (en option)
Boîtier d'extension
PowerVault série
MD1200 2 (en option)Guide de mise en route 33
Mettez les composants sous tension dans l'ordre suivant
1 Commutateurs Ethernet (si utilisés).
2 Boîtiers d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 (si utilisés).
REMARQUE : avant d'allumer la matrice de stockage, assurez-vous que le
voyant d'état du boîtier d'extension est bleu.
3 Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i.
REMARQUE : avant d'allumer le(s) serveur(s) hôte, assurez-vous que le
voyant d'état de la matrice de stockage est bleu.
4 Serveur(s) hôte.
Installation du cadre
Installez le cadre (en option).
Installation du logiciel MD Storage
REMARQUE : pour des instructions détaillées concernant l'installation du logiciel
de stockage MD, la configuration du boîtier et les tâches après installation, voir le
Guide de déploiement.34 Guide de mise en route
L'application MD Storage Manager configure, gère, et contrôle la matrice de
stockage. L'utilitaire de configuration MD (MDCU) est un utilitaire
optionnel qui permet une approche consolidée de la configuration des ports
de gestion, des ports hôtes iSCSI et de la création de sessions pour les
matrices de stockage sur disques modulaires iSCSI. Il vous est recommandé
d'utiliser l'utilitaire MDCU pour configurer iSCSI sur chaque hôte connecté à
la matrice de stockage. Pour installer le logiciel MD Storage Manager :
1 Insérez le support Ressource série MD.
En fonction de votre système d'exploitation, l'installateur se lancera peut-
être automatiquement. Si l'installateur ne se lance pas automatiquement,
naviguez dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation (ou téléchargez
l'image d'installateur) et exécutez le fichier md_launcher.exe. Pour les
systèmes exécutant Linux, naviguez vers la racine du support Ressource et
exécutez le fichier autorun (Exécution auto).
REMARQUE : par défaut, le système d'exploitation Red Hat Enterprise Linux
(RHEL) monte le support Ressource à l'aide de l'option de montage –noexec
mount, qui ne vous permet pas d'exécuter les fichiers exécutables. Pour
modifier ce paramètre, consultez le fichier Lisez-moi dans le répertoire racine
du support d'installation.
2 Sélectionnez Install MD Storage Software (Installer le logiciel de
stockage MD).
3 Lisez le contrat de licence et acceptez-le.
4 Sélectionnez l'une des options d'installation suivantes dans le menu
déroulant Install Set (Configuration d'installation) :
• Full (recommended) (Complète - recommandée) : installe le logiciel
(client) MD Storage Manager, l'agent de stockage hôte, le pilote
multivoies, et les fournisseurs de matériel.
• Host Only (Hôte uniquement) : installe l'agent de stockage hôte et les
pilotes multivoies.
• Management (Gestion) : installe le logiciel de gestion et les
fournisseurs de matériel.
• Custom (Personnalisée) : permet de sélectionner des
composants spécifiques.
5 Sélectionnez le(s) modèle(s) de matrice de stockage MD que vous
souhaitez définir comme stockage de données pour ce serveur hôte.
6 Choisissez de démarrer le service de moniteur des événements
automatiquement lors du redémarrage du serveur hôte ou manuellement Guide de mise en route 35
REMARQUE : cette option ne s'applique qu'à l'installation du logiciel
client Windows.
7 Confirmez l'emplacement de l'installation et cliquez sur Install (Installer).
8 À l'invitation (le cas échéant), redémarrez le serveur hôte après la fin
de l'installation.
9 Lorsque le redémarrage est terminé, l'utilitaire MDCU peut se
lancer automatiquement. S'il ne se lance pas automatiquement,
lancez-le manuellement.
• Dans un système d'exploitation Windows, cliquez sur
Démarrer→ Dell→ Modular Disk Configuration Utility (Utilitaire
de configuration de disques modulaires).
• Dans un système d'exploitation Linux, double-cliquez sur l'icône
Modular Disk Configuration Utility (Utilitaire de configuration de
disques modulaires) sur le bureau.
REMARQUE : si l'utilitaire MDCU n'est pas installé, voir le Guide de
déploiement à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals.
10 Démarrez MD Storage Manager et lancez la détection des matrices.
11 Le cas échéant, activez les fonctions premium achetées avec votre matrice
de stockage. Si vous avez acheté des fonctions premium, consultez la carte
d'activation livrée avec votre matrice de stockage.
REMARQUE : l'installateur MD Storage Manager installe automatiquement les
pilotes, micrologiciel, et correctifs de système d'exploitation nécessaires au
fonctionnement de votre matrice de stockage. Ces pilotes et micrologiciels sont
également disponibles à l'adresse support.dell.com. Consultez également la
Matrice de prise en charge à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals pour connaître
les paramètres et/ou logiciels supplémentaires requis pour votre matrice de
stockage particulière.36 Guide de mise en route
Identification du numéro de service
Votre système est identifié par un code de service express et un numéro de
service uniques. Le code de service express et le numéro de service se trouvent
sur le devant et l'arrière du système à côté des modules de contrôleur RAID.
Dell utilise ces informations pour acheminer les appels de support au
technicien qui convient.
Informations NOM (Mexique uniquement)
Les informations suivantes sur l'appareil décrit dans ce document sont fournies
conformément aux exigences de la Norme Officielle Mexicaine (NOM) :
Importateur : Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V.
Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso
Col. Lomas Altas
11950 México, D.F.
Numéro de modèle : E03J et E04J
Tension
d'alimentation :
100 à 240 V CA
Fréquence : 50/60 Hz
Consommation
électrique :
8,6 AGuide de mise en route 37
Caractéristiques techniques
Lecteurs
PowerVault MD3200i Jusqu'à 12 disques durs SAS remplaçables à chaud
3,5 pouces (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s)
PowerVault MD3220i Jusqu'à 24 disques durs SAS remplaçables à chaud
2,5 pouces (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s)
Modules de contrôleur RAID
Modules de contrôleur RAID • Un ou deux modules remplaçables à chaud avec
capteurs de température.
• 2 Go de mémoire cache par contrôleur
Connecteurs du panneau arrière (par module de contrôleur RAID)
Connecteurs iSCSI Quatre connecteurs d'entrée iSCSI de 1 Go pour
connecter les hôtes
Connecteur d'extension SAS Un port de sortie SAS pour l'extension à un boîtier
PowerVault série MD1200 supplémentaire.
REMARQUE : les connecteurs SAS sont
conformes SFF-8088
Connecteur série Un connecteur mini-DIN à 6 broches
REMARQUE : cette option est réservée au personnel
de maintenance.
Connecteur Ethernet
de gestion
Un port Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T pour une gestion
hors bande du boîtier
REMARQUE : les adresses IP de port de gestion par
défaut des modules de contrôleur RAID primaire et
secondaire sont respectivement192.168.128.101 et
192.168.128.102. Par défaut, les ports de gestion sont
définis sur le protocole DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration). Si le contrôleur ne parvient pas à obtenir
une configuration d'adresse IP d'un serveur DHCP au
cours d'une période de temps donnée (environ 3
minutes), par défaut il utilise l'adressage IP statique.
Pour plus d'informations, voir le Guide de déploiement.38 Guide de mise en route
Extension
PowerVault Série MD1200 Prend en charge jusqu'à 192 disques durs avec
n'importe quelle combinaison de boîtiers
d'extension PowerVault MD1200 ou PowerVault
MD1220. La prise en charge de 192 disques durs est
une fonction premium et doit être activée. Le
nombre maximum de disques durs pris en charge
sans utiliser la fonction premium est 120.
La connectivité à chemin redondant fournit des
chemins de données redondants à chaque disque dur.
Carte de fond de panier
Connecteurs • 12 ou 24 connecteurs de disque dur SAS
• Deux connecteurs pour les modules de
ventilation/alimentation
• Deux ensembles de connecteurs de module de
contrôleur RAID
• Un connecteur de panneau de commande pour
les voyants frontaux et le commutateur de
mode boîtier
Capteurs Deux capteurs de température
Voyants
Panneau avant • Un voyant bicolore indiquant l'état du système
• Deux voyants monochromes (alimentation et
mode boîtier)
REMARQUE : le voyant du mode boîtier ne s'applique
pas à la matrice de stockage
PowerVault série MD3200i.
Support de disque dur • Un voyant d'activité monochrome
• Un voyant d'état bichrome par lecteur
Bloc d'alimentation/ventilateur
de refroidissement
Trois voyants d'état (état du bloc d'alimentation,
panne du bloc d'alimentation/ventilateur et état
de l'alimentation)Guide de mise en route 39
Module de contrôleur RAID Dix voyants monochromes :
• Un voyant de panne de batterie
• Un voyant d'activité de la mémoire cache
• Un voyant de panne du contrôleur
• Un voyant d'état de l'alimentation de contrôleur
• Un voyant système
• Un voyant d'activité de gestion Ethernet
• Quatre voyants d'activité de port d'entrée iSCSI
Six voyants bichromes :
• Quatre voyants de vitesse de lien d'entrée iSCSI
• Un voyant de panne ou de lien de sortie SAS
• Un voyant de vitesse de lien Ethernet de gestion
Commutateur
Bouton d'identification du
système
Situé sur le panneau de commande avant. Ce
bouton sert à localiser un système au sein d'un rack.
Sélecteur de mode Boîtier Situé sur le devant du système. Ce sélecteur
ne s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage
PowerVault série MD3200i.
Sélecteur de réinitialisation du
mot de passe
Situé sur le panneau arrière du module de contrôleur
RAID. Ce sélecteur permet de réinitialiser le mot de
passe de la matrice de stockage.
Blocs d'alimentation
Alimentation secteur (par bloc d'alimentation)
Puissance 600 W
Tension 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A)
Dissipation thermique 100 W
Courant d'appel maximal Dans des conditions de ligne typiques et dans toute
la gamme ambiante de fonctionnement du système,
l'appel de courant peut atteindre 55 A par bloc
d'alimentation pendant un maximum de 10 ms.
Voyants (suite)40 Guide de mise en route
Alimentation disponible pour les disques durs (par logement)
PowerVault MD3200i 25 W
PowerVault MD3220i 12 W
Alimentation du module de contrôleur RAID (par emplacement)
Consommation de courant
maximale
100 W
Caractéristiques physiques
PowerVault MD3200i
Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces)
Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces)
Profondeur 60,20 cm (23,70 pouces)
Poids (configuration maximale) 29,30 kg (64,6 livres)
Poids (vide) 8,84 kg (19,5 livres)
PowerVault MD3220i
Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces)
Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces)
Profondeur 54,90 cm (21,61 pouces)
Poids (configuration maximale) 24,22 kg (53,4 livres)
Poids (vide) 8,61 kg (19 livres)
Environnement
REMARQUE : pour des informations supplémentaires sur les mesures
environnementales liées aux différentes configurations du système, voir
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Température
En fonctionnement De 10 à 35 °C (50 à 95 °F) avec un gradient
thermique maximal de 10 °C par heure
REMARQUE : pour les altitudes supérieures à
900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de
fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les
168 mètres (550 pieds).
Entreposage De -40 à 65 °C (-40 à 149 °F) avec un gradient
thermique maximal de 20 °C par heureGuide de mise en route 41
Humidité relative
En fonctionnement De 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) avec un gradient
d'humidité maximal de 10 % par heure
Entreposage De 5 à 95 % (sans condensation)
Tolérance maximale aux vibrations
En fonctionnement 0,25 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant
15 minutes
Entreposage 0,5 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant
15 minutes
Choc maximal
En fonctionnement Une impulsion de choc de 31 G pendant un
maximum de 2,6 ms sur l'axe z positif (une
impulsion de chaque côté du système)
Entreposage Six chocs consécutifs de 71 G pendant un maximum
de 2 ms en positif et négatif sur les axes x, y et z (une
impulsion de chaque côté du système)
Altitude
En fonctionnement De -16 à 3 048 m (-50 à 10 000 pieds)
REMARQUE : Pour les altitudes supérieures à
900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de
fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les
168 mètres (550 pieds).
Entreposage De -16 à 10 600 m (-50 à 35 000 pieds)
Contaminants en suspension dans l'air
Classe G1 selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985
Environnement (suite)42 Guide de mise en routeMatrizes de armazenamento
Dell PowerVault MD3200i
e MD3220i
Introdução ao uso
do sistema
Modelo de normalização séries E03J e E04JNotas, Avisos e Advertências
NOTA: uma NOTA fornece informações importantes para ajudar você a aproveitar
melhor os recursos do computador.
AVISO: um AVISO indica um potencial de danos ao hardware ou a perda de dados
se as instruções não forem seguidas.
ADVERTÊNCIA: uma ADVERTÊNCIA indica um potencial de danos à propriedade,
risco de lesões corporais ou mesmo de risco de vida.
____________________
As informações contidas nesta publicação estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Todos os direitos reservados.
Qualquer forma de reprodução deste material sem a permissão por escrito da Dell Inc. é
expressamente proibida.
Marcas comerciais usadas neste texto: Dell™, o logotipo DELL e PowerVault™ são marcas comerciais
da Dell Inc.; Microsoft
®
e Windows Server
®
são marcas comerciais ou marcas registradas da Microsoft
Corporation nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. Red Hat
®
e Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
são marcas
registradas da Red Hat, Inc. nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. SUSE
®
é marca registrada da
Novell, Inc. nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. VMware
®
é marca registrada da VMware, Inc.
nos Estados Unidos e/ou em outras jurisdições.
Outras marcas e nomes comerciais podem ser usados nesta publicação como referência às entidades
que reivindicam essas marcas e nomes ou a seus produtos. A Dell Inc. declara que não tem interesse
de propriedade sobre marcas comerciais e nomes de terceiros.
Modelo de normalização séries E03J e E04J
Agosto de 2011 N/P TFKD1 Rev. A02Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 45
Antes de começar
NOTA: Neste documento, a matriz de armazenamento Dell PowerVault
série MD3200i se refere tanto à matriz Dell PowerVault MD3200i quanto à matriz
Dell PowerVault MD3220i. O gabinete de expansão Dell PowerVault série MD1200
se refere tanto ao Dell PowerVault MD1200 quanto ao Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Antes de configurar a matriz de armazenamento Dell PowerVault série MD3200i,
você precisa considerar certas práticas recomendadas que garantem que a sua
matriz de armazenamento funcione com a máxima eficiência e ofereça
redundância total (se necessário).
• É recomendável que você use uma SAN de IP dedicado para a transmissão
de dados iSCSI. O gerenciamento de tráfego pode ser isolado em uma rede
de gerenciamento separada.
• Preencha a planilha de configuração iSCSI antes de configurar o iSCSI.
Consulte “Preencher a planilha iSCSI” na página 46. Esta planilha reúne
informações da rede física em uma única fonte.
• Depois de preencher a planilha iSCSI, faça um desenho da configuração
antes de configurar a solução.
• Configure sempre caminhos redundantes de dados iSCSI para fornecer
caminhos alternativos de e para o servidor host, na eventualidade de um
destes caminhos se tornar indisponível.
• Se houver múltiplas placas de rede instaladas em um host, recomenda-se
que você use diferentes sub-redes para gerenciamento e para links de
dados iSCSI.
• Use sempre cabos de rede Ethernet Categoria 5e (ou melhores) em toda
a rede.
• Antes de conectar quaisquer cabos entre o servidor host e a matriz de
armazenamento, coloque uma etiqueta em cada porta e em cada conector.
• Siga sempre os procedimentos adequados para fazer o “power cycle”
(desligar e religar em seguida) de dispositivos da rede. Você precisa garantir
também que os componentes críticos da rede estejam em circuitos de
alimentação separados.
NOTA: As ilustrações deste documento mostram o cabeamento de apenas uma
matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i em um ambiente SAN. As
ilustrações mostram também apenas os endereços IP padrão da matriz de
armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i. Para fazer o cabeamento de mais de
uma matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i em um ambiente SAN,
consulte o guia de implementação.46 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Preencher a planilha iSCSI
Configurações de IPv4
Segredo CHAP
do destino
Segredo
CHAP mútuo
A
B
servidor host
Matriz de
armazenamento
PowerVault série
MD3200i
192.168.130.101 (em 0 por padrão)
192.168.131.101 (em 1 por padrão)
192.168.132.101 (em 2 por padrão)
192.168.133.101 (em 3 por padrão)
192.168.128.101 (porta da rede de gerenciamento)
192.168.130.102 (em 0 por padrão)
192.168.131.102 (em 1 por padrão)
192.168.132.102 (em 2 por padrão)
192.168.133.102 (em 3 por padrão)
192.168.128.102 (porta da rede de gerenciamento)
Se você precisar de espaço adicional para mais de um servidor host, use uma folha adicional.
Porta iSCSI 1
Porta iSCSI 2
Porta iSCSI 3
Porta iSCSI 4
Porta de
gerenciamento
A Endereço IP estático (servidor host) Máscara de sub-rede Gateway padrão
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
NOTA: O servidor host pode suportar até quatro placas de rede.Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 47
NOTA: Para obter informações sobre a planilha de IPv6, consulte o guia de
implementação.
Outros documentos e mídias dos quais você pode
precisar
ADVERTÊNCIA: Consulte as informações de normalização e segurança
fornecidas com o sistema. As informações de garantia podem estar neste
documento ou podem ser fornecidas como um documento separado.
NOTA: Todos os documentos da matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série
MD3200i estão disponíveis em support.dell.com/manuals.
• A documentação fornecida com o rack contém o procedimento de
instalação do sistema no rack.
• O Manual do proprietário fornece informações sobre os recursos do
sistema e descreve como solucionar problemas do sistema e como instalar
ou trocar componentes.
• O Guia de implementação fornece informações sobre a instalação e a
configuração do software e do hardware.
• O Guia da Interface de Linha de Comando (CLI) fornece informações
sobre o uso da interface de linha de comando para configurar e gerenciar
a matriz de armazenamento.
Endereço IP estático (matriz
de armazenamento)
B Máscara de sub-rede Gateway padrão
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
controlador iSCSI 0, em 0
controlador iSCSI 0, em 1
controlador iSCSI 0, em 2
controlador iSCSI 0, em 3
controlador da porta de
gerenciamento 0
controlador iSCSI 1, em 0
controlador iSCSI 1, em 1
controlador iSCSI 1, em 2
controlador iSCSI 1, em 3
controlador da porta de
gerenciamento 1
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___48 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
• O Guia do programador de SMI-S fornece informações sobre o uso do
provedor de SMI-S e sobre a programação de SMI-S.
• As mídias fornecidas com o sistema que contêm documentação e ferramentas
para a configuração e o gerenciamento do sistema, incluindo aquelas
relacionadas ao sistema operacional, ao software de gerenciamento do sistema,
a atualizações do sistema e a componentes adquiridos com o sistema.
NOTA: Verifique sempre se há atualizações disponíveis no site
support.dell.com/manuals (em inglês) e leia primeiro as atualizações, pois
estas geralmente substituem informações contidas em outros documentos.
Preparar o servidor host
Sistemas operacionais suportados
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
NOTA: Para obter as informações mais recentes sobre todas as versões de
sistemas operacionais suportadas, consulte Support Matrix (Matriz de suporte) no
site support.dell.com/manuals.
Placas de rede adicionais para iSCSI
Quando for instalar placas de rede adicionais, é recomendável que:
• Você use redes de armazenamento redundante dedicadas para tráfego
iSCSI. Se não for possível ter uma rede dedicada, isole o tráfego iSCSI do
tráfego da rede geral usando redes locais virtuais (VLANs - virtual local
area networks).
• Você use placas de rede adicionais dedicadas para o tráfego iSCSI.
• As placas de rede precisam ser adicionadas em pares para se obter
redundância (até quatro placas de rede).
NOTA: A configuração com uma única placa de rede é também suportada.
Configuração da placa de rede
Em um ambiente de SAN, dependendo do número de comutadores, é
recomendável que você use duas ou quatro sub-redes exclusivas para o tráfego
iSCSI. Em ambientes nos quais os dispositivos de armazenamento são diretamente
conectados, cada placa de rede diretamente conectada à matriz de armazenamento
PowerVault série MD3200i precisa estar em uma sub-rede separada.Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 49
Configurações comuns
Cabeamento de hosts conectados diretamente
Servidor 1 Servidor 2
Matriz de
armazenamento
Servidor 3 Servidor 4
Rede corporativa,
pública ou privada50 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Cabeamento de hosts conectados à SAN
Matriz de
armazenamento
Rede corporativa,
pública ou privada
Comutador 1 Comutador 2
ServidorIntrodução ao Uso do Sistema 51
Até 32 hosts
Servidor 1 Servidor 2
Matriz de
armazenamento
Rede corporativa,
pública ou privada
Comutador 1 Comutador 252 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Instalação e configuração
ADVERTÊNCIA: Antes de executar o procedimento abaixo, siga as instruções de
segurança fornecidas com o sistema.
Remover o sistema da embalagem
Desembale o sistema e identifique cada item de acordo com a lista fornecida.
Instalar os trilhos e o sistema no rack
Monte os trilhos e instale o sistema no rack, seguindo as instruções de
segurança e as instruções de instalação fornecidas com o sistema.
NOTA: Para contrabalançar o peso, é recomendável que você instale a matriz de
armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i na parte inferior do rack e os gabinetes
de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 acima dela.Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 53
Conectar o(s) cabo(s) de alimentação
Verifique se a chave está na posição “desligada” (OFF), antes de conectar os
cabos de alimentação. Conecte o(s) cabos de alimentação ao sistema.
Prender o(s) cabo(s) de alimentação
Prenda firmemente os cabos ao gancho usando a tira fornecida.
Conecte a outra extremidade do(s) cabo(s) de alimentação a uma tomada
elétrica aterrada ou a uma fonte de alimentação separada, por exemplo, uma
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply [fonte de alimentação ininterrupta]) ou
uma PDU (Power Distribution Unit [unidade de distribuição de energia]).
Cada fonte de alimentação precisa ser conectada a um circuito de
alimentação separado.54 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Cabeamento do gabinete de expansão
Ligar o gabinete
Matriz de
armazenamento
PowerVault série
MD3200i
Gabinete de expansão
PowerVault série
MD1200 1 (opcional)
Gabinete de expansão
PowerVault série
MD1200 2 (opcional)Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 55
Ligue os componentes na seguinte ordem:
1 Comutadores Ethernet (se forem usados).
2 Gabinetes de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 (se estiverem
sendo usados).
NOTA: Antes de ligar a matriz de armazenamento, verifique se o LED de
status do gabinete de expansão está azul.
3 Matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i.
NOTA: Antes de ligar o(s) servidor(es) host, verifique se o LED de status da
matriz de armazenamento está azul.
4 Servidor(es) host.
Instalar o bezel
Instale o bezel (opcional).
Instalar o software de armazenamento MD
NOTA: Para obter instruções detalhadas sobre a instalação do software de
armazenamento de discos modulares, a configuração do gabinete e as tarefas de
pós-instalação, consulte o guia de implementação.56 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
O software MD Storage Manager (gerenciamento de armazenamento em discos
modulares) configura, gerencia e monitora a matriz de armazenamento. O
utilitário de configuração de MD (MDCU - MD Configuration Utility) é um
utilitário opcional que faz abordagem consolidada para a configuração de portas
de gerenciamento, portas de host iSCSI e para a criação de sessões das matrizes
modulares de armazenamento em disco iSCSI. É recomendável que você use o
MDCU para configurar o iSCSI em cada servidor host conectado à matriz de
armazenamento. Para instalar o software de armazenamento MD:
1 Insira a mídia de recursos da série MD.
Dependendo do seu sistema operacional, o instalador pode ser aberto
automaticamente. Se o instalador não abrir automaticamente, vá até o
diretório raiz da mídia de instalação (ou da imagem baixada do instalador)
e execute o arquivo md_launcher.exe. Nos sistemas Linux, navegue até a
raiz da mídia de recursos e execute o arquivo autorun.
NOTA: Por padrão, o sistema operacional Red Hat Enterprise Linux monta a
mídia de recursos com a opção – noexec mount, a qual não permite rodar
arquivos executáveis. Para mudar esta configuração, consulte o arquivo
Readme que está no diretório raiz da mídia de instalação.
2 Selecione Install MD Storage Software (Instalar o software de
armazenamento em discos modulares).
3 Leia e aceite o contrato de licença.
4 Selecione uma das seguintes opções de instalação no menu suspenso
Install Set (Conjunto de instalação):
• Full (recommended) — (Completa (recomendável)) - Instala o
software cliente do gerenciador de armazenamento MD (MD Storage
Manager (client)), o agente de armazenamento baseado em host, o
driver de multi-caminhos e os provedores de hardware.
• Host Only — (Apenas host) - Instala o agente de armazenamento
baseado em host e os drivers de multi-caminhos.
• Management — (Gerenciamento) - Instala o software de
gerenciamento e os provedores de hardware.
• Custom — (Personalizada) - Permite que você selecione
componentes específicos.
5 Selecione o(s) modelo(s) de matriz de armazenamento MD que você está
configurando como armazenamento de dados para este servidor host.
6 Indique se você quer começar a monitoração de eventos automaticamente
quando o servidor é reinicializado ou manualmente. Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 57
NOTA: Esta opção só se aplica à instalação de software de cliente Windows.
7 Confirme o local de instalação e clique em Install.
8 Se for solicitado, reinicialize o servidor quando a instalação terminar.
9 Quando a reinicialização terminar, o MDCU será aberto automaticamente.
Se o MDCU não for aberto automaticamente, abra-o manualmente.
• Em sistemas operacionais baseados no Windows,clique em
Iniciar→ Dell→ Modular Disk Configuration Utility.
• Em sistemas operacionais baseados no Linux, clique duas vezes no
ícone do Modular Disk Configuration Utility (utilitário de
configuração de discos modulares) na área de trabalho.
NOTA: Se o MDCU não for instalado, consulte o Deployment Guide (guia de
implementação) em support.dell.com/manuals.
10 Abra o aplicativo MD Storage Manager (gerenciador de armazenamento
MD) e faça a descoberta da(s) matriz(es).
11 Se for o caso, ative todos os recursos Premium comprados com a sua matriz
de armazenamento. Se for o caso, consulte o cartão impresso de ativação
que é fornecido com a sua matriz de armazenamento.
NOTA: O instalador do MD Storage Manager (gerenciador de armazenamento MD)
instala automaticamente os drivers, o firmware e os patches do sistema
operacional necessários para operar a matriz de armazenamento. Estes drivers e
firmware estão também disponíveis em support.dell.com. Além disso, consulte
Support Matrix (Matriz de suporte) em support.dell.com/manuals para obter
configurações e/ou software adicionais necessários para a sua matriz de
armazenamento específica.
Localizar a etiqueta de serviço
O seu sistema é identificado por um número exclusivo de código de serviço
expresso e de etiqueta de serviço. O código de serviço expresso (Express
Service Code) e a etiqueta de serviço (Service Tag) estão localizados na parte
frontal e na parte traseira do sistema, próximos aos módulos do controlador
de RAID. Estas informações são usadas pela Dell para dirigir as chamadas que
são feitas ao serviço de suporte para o pessoal adequado.58 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Informações da norma NOM
(apenas para o México)
As informações a seguir são fornecidas sobre o dispositivo descrito neste
documento em conformidade com os requisitos das normas oficiais
mexicanas (NOM):
Especificações técnicas
Importador:
Número do modelo: E03J e E04J
Tensão de alimentação: 100 a 240 VCA
Frequência: 50/60 Hz
Consumo de corrente: 8,6 A
Unidades
PowerVault MD3200i Até 12 discos rígidos SAS de 3,5 polegadas (3,0 Gbps
e 6,0 Gbps) com troca a quente (“hot swappable”)
PowerVault MD3220i Até 24 discos rígidos SAS de 2,5 polegadas (3,0 Gbps
e 6,0 Gbps) com troca a quente (“hot swappable”)Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 59
Módulos controladores de RAID
Módulos controladores
de RAID
• Um ou dois módulos de troca a quente (“hot
swappable”) com sensores de temperatura
• 2 GB de cache por controlador
Conectores do painel traseiro (por módulo controlador de RAID)
Conectores iSCSI Quatro conectores de entrada iSCSI de 1 GB para a
conexão de hosts
Conector de expansão SAS Uma porta de saída SAS (SAS OUT) para expansão
com um gabinete PowerVault série MD1200 adicional.
NOTA: Os conectores SAS são compatíveis
com SFF-8088.
Conector serial Um conector mini-DIN de 6 pinos
NOTA: Para uso exclusivo pelo suporte técnico.
Conector Ethernet
de gerenciamento
Uma porta Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T para
gerenciamento fora da banda do gabinete
NOTA: Os endereços IP padrão das portas de
gerenciamento dos módulos controladores de
RAID primário e secundário são 192.168.128.101 e
192.168.128.102, respectivamente. Por padrão, as
portas de gerenciamento são configuradas para
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Se o
controlador não conseguir obter um endereço IP a
partir de um servidor DHCP dentro de um tempo
especificado (cerca de 3 minutos), ele volta a usar o
padrão, isto é, endereçamento IP estático. Para obter
mais informações, consulte o guia de implementação.60 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Expansão
PowerVault série MD1200 Suporta um máximo de 192 discos rígidos com
qualquer combinação de gabinetes de expansão
PowerVault MD1200 ou PowerVault MD1220.
O suporte para 192 discos rígidos é um recurso
Premium e precisa ser ativado. O número máximo
de discos rígidos suportados sem o uso de recursos
Premium é 120.
A conectividade de caminho redundante fornece
caminhos redundantes de dados para cada disco rígido.
Placa backplane
Conectores • 12 ou 24 conectores para discos rígidos SAS
• Dois conectores para módulos de fonte de
alimentação ou ventiladores de resfriamento
• Dois conjuntos de conectores para módulo de
controlador de RAID
• Um conector no painel de controle para os LEDs
frontais e para a chave de modo do gabinete
Sensores Dois sensores de temperatura
LEDs indicadores
Painel frontal • Um LED de duas cores para indicação do status
do sistema
• Dois LEDs de cor única para indicação de
alimentação e de modo do gabinete.
NOTA: O LED de modo do gabinete não é aplicável à
matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i.
Apoio do disco rígido • Um LED de cor única para atividade.
• Um LED de duas cores para indicação de status,
por unidade.
Fonte de alimentação ou
ventilador de resfriamento
Três LEDs para indicar o status da fonte de
alimentação, o status de falha da fonte alimentação
ou do ventilador e o status da alimentação CA Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 61
Módulo controlador de RAID Dez LEDs de cor única:
• Um para falha da bateria
• Um para atividade de cache
• Um para falha do controlador
• Um para alimentação do controlador
• Um para identificação do sistema
• Um para atividade da Ethernet de gerenciamento
• Quatro para atividade das portas de entrada iSCSI
Seis LEDs de duas cores:
• Quatro para velocidade do link de entrada iSCSI
• Um para falha ou link de saída SAS
• Um para velocidade do link Ethernet de
gerenciamento
Chave
Botão de identificação do
sistema
Localizado no painel de controle frontal. Este botão é
usado para localizar um sistema dentro de um rack.
Chave de modo do gabinete Localizada na parte frontal do sistema. Esta chave
não é aplicável à matriz de armazenamento
PowerVault série MD3200i.
Chave de redefinição da senha Localizada no painel traseiro do módulo controlador
de RAID. Esta chave é usada para redefinir a senha
da matriz de armazenamento.
Fontes de alimentação
Fonte de alimentação CA (por fonte de alimentação)
Potência 600 W
Tensão 100 a 240 VAC (8,6 A a 4,3 A)
Dissipação de calor 100 W
Pico de corrente
inicial máximo
Sob condições de linha típicas e na faixa inteira de
temperatura ambiente de funcionamento do
sistema, o pico de corrente inicial (“inrush”) pode
atingir um máximo de 55 A por fonte de
alimentação por 10 ms ou menos.
LEDs indicadores (continuação)62 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Potência disponível para discos rígidos (por slot)
PowerVault MD3200i 25 W
PowerVault MD3220i 12 W
Potência do módulo controlador de RAID (por slot)
Consumo máximo de potência 100 W
Características físicas
PowerVault MD3200i
Altura 8,68 cm
Largura 44,63 cm
Profundidade 60,20 cm
Peso (com a configuração
máxima)
29,30 kg
Peso (em vazio) 8,84 kg
PowerVault MD3220i
Altura 8,68 cm
Largura 44,63 cm
Profundidade 54,90 cm
Peso (com a
configuração máxima)
24,22 kg
Peso (em vazio) 8,61 kg
Requisitos ambientais
NOTA: Para obter informações adicionais sobre os requisitos ambientais para
configurações específicas do sistema, visite o site
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets (em inglês).
Temperatura
De operação 10°C a 35°C com variação máxima de 10°C por hora
NOTA: Para altitudes acima de 900 metros, a
temperatura máxima de operação diminui à razão
de 1°C / 300 metros. Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 63
De armazenamento -40°C a 65°C com variação máxima de temperatura
de 20°C por hora
Umidade relativa
De operação 20% a 80% (sem condensação) com variação de
umidade máxima de 10% por hora
De armazenamento 5% a 95% (sem condensação)
Vibração máxima
De operação 0,25 g em 3 a 200 Hz por 15 minutos
De armazenamento 0,5 g em 3 a 200 Hz por 15 minutos
Choque máximo
De operação Um pulso de choque no eixo z positivo (um pulso
em cada lado do sistema) de 31 g por 2,6 ms na
orientação operacional
De armazenamento Seis pulsos de choque aplicados consecutivamente
nos eixos x, y e z positivos e negativos (um pulso de
cada lado do sistema) de 71 g por até 2 ms
Altitude
De operação -16 m a 3.048 m
NOTA: Para altitudes acima de 900 m, a temperatura
máxima de operação diminui à razão de 1°C / 300 m
De armazenamento -16 m a 10.600 m
Nível de poluentes transportados pelo ar
Classe G1 conforme definido pela norma ISA-S71.04-1985
Requisitos ambientais (continuação)64 Introdução ao Uso do SistemaMatrices de almacenamiento
Dell PowerVault MD3200i
y MD3220i
Introducción al sistema
Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04JNotas, precauciones y avisos
NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar
mejor el ordenador.
PRECAUCIÓN: un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN indica la posibilidad de que se
produzcan daños en el hardware o haya pérdida de datos si no se siguen
las instrucciones.
AVISO: un mensaje de AVISO indica la posibilidad de que se produzcan daños
materiales, lesiones personales e incluso la muerte.
____________________
La información contenida en esta publicación puede modificarse sin previo aviso.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados.
Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de estos materiales en cualquier forma sin la
autorización por escrito de Dell Inc.
Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell™, el logotipo de DELL y PowerVault™ son marcas
comerciales de Dell Inc. Microsoft
®
y Windows Server
®
son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales
registradas de Microsoft Corporation en Estados Unidos y/o en otros países. Red Hat
®
y Red Hat
Enterprise Linux
®
son marcas comerciales registradas de Red Hat, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en
otros países. SUSE
®
es una marca comercial registrada de Novell, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en
otros países. VMware
®
es una marca comercial registrada de VMware, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y/
o en otras jurisdicciones.
Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en esta publicación para hacer referencia
a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la
propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos.
Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04J
08/2011 N/P TFKD1 Rev. A02Introducción al sistema 67
Antes de comenzar
NOTA: a lo largo del documento, la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie
Dell PowerVault MD3200i hace referencia a Dell PowerVault MD3200i y
Dell PowerVault MD3220i. El gabinete de expansión de la serie
Dell PowerVault MD1200 hace referencia a Dell PowerVault MD1200 y
Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Antes de configurar la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie
Dell PowerVault MD3200i, debe tener en cuenta una serie de prácticas
recomendadas para garantizar que la matriz de almacenamiento funcione a
un rendimiento máximo y ofrezca redundancia total (si es necesario).
• Se recomienda utilizar una SAN IP dedicada para la transmisión de datos
iSCSI. El tráfico de administración se puede aislar en una red de
administración independiente.
• Complete la hoja de trabajo de configuración de iSCSI antes de
configurar iSCSI. Ver “Cómo completar la hoja de trabajo de iSCSI” en la
página 68. Esta hoja de trabajo reúne la información de la red física de
forma centralizada.
• Una vez que haya completado la hoja de trabajo de iSCSI, dibuje la
configuración antes de configurar la solución.
• Configure siempre las rutas de datos iSCSI redundantes para disponer de
rutas alternativas al servidor host y desde el servidor host en caso de que se
deshabilite una de las rutas de datos.
• Si se instalan varias NICs en un host, es recomendable utilizar subredes
diferentes para la administración y los enlaces de datos iSCSI.
• Utilice siempre en toda la red un cable Ethernet de categoría 5e (o superior).
• Antes de conectar cables entre el servidor host y la matriz de
almacenamiento, etiquete todos los puertos y conectores.
• Durante los ciclos de encendido de la red, siga siempre los
procedimientos adecuados de encendido y apagado. Asegúrese también
de que los componentes de red críticos se encuentren en circuitos de
alimentación diferentes.
NOTA: en las ilustraciones de este documento se muestra el cableado de
solamente una matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i en un
entorno SAN. Asimismo, las ilustraciones solo muestran las direcciones IP
predeterminadas para la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie
PowerVault MD3200i. Para cablear varias matrices de almacenamiento de la serie
PowerVault MD3200i en un entorno SAN, ver la Guía de implementación.68 Introducción al sistema
Cómo completar la hoja de trabajo de iSCSI
Configuración de IPv4
Puerto 1 iSCSI
Puerto 2 iSCSI
Puerto 3 iSCSI
Puerto 4 iSCSI
Puerto de
administración
Dir. IP estática (servidor host) Máscara de subred
Puerta de enlace
A predeterminada
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
Secreto
CHAP mutuo
Secreto CHAP
de destino
A
B
Servidor host
Matriz de
almacenamiento
de la serie
PowerVault
MD3200i
192.168.130.101 (predet.: entrada 0)
192.168.131.101 (predet.: entrada 1)
192.168.132.101 (predet.: entrada 2)
192.168.133.101 (predet.: entrada 3) 192.168.128.101 (puerto de red de admin.)
192.168.130.102 (predet.: entrada 0)
192.168.131.102 (predet.: entrada 1)
192.168.132.102 (predet.: entrada 2)
192.168.133.102 (predet.: entrada 3) 192.168.128.102 (puerto de red de admin.)
Si necesita espacio adicional para más de un servidor host, utilice otra hoja.
NOTA: el servidor host admite un máximo de cuatro NICs.Introducción al sistema 69
NOTA: para obtener más información sobre la hoja de trabajo de IPv6, consulte la
Guía de implementación.
Documentación y soportes adicionales útiles
AVISO: consulte la información reglamentaria y de seguridad suministrada con el
sistema. La información sobre la garantía puede estar incluida en este documento
o en un documento aparte.
NOTA: todos los documentos de la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie
PowerVault MD3200i están disponibles en support.dell.com/manuals.
• En la documentación del bastidor incluida con la solución de bastidor se
describe cómo instalar el sistema en un bastidor.
• En el Manual del propietario se proporciona información acerca de las
funciones del sistema y se describe cómo solucionar problemas del sistema
e instalar o sustituir componentes del sistema.
• En la Guía de implementación se proporciona información acerca de la
instalación y configuración del software y hardware.
• En la Guía de CLI se proporciona información acerca de cómo utilizar la
Interfaz de línea de comandos (CLI) para configurar y administrar la
matriz de almacenamiento.
Dir. IP estática (matriz almacen.) Máscara de subred
Puerta de enlace
predeterminada
B
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
Contrl. iSCSI 0, entrada 0
Contrl. iSCSI 1, entrada 0
Contrl. iSCSI 2, entrada 0
Contrl. iSCSI 3, entrada 0
Puerto admin., contrl. 0
Contrl. iSCSI 1, entrada 0
Contrl. iSCSI 1, entrada 1
Contrl. iSCSI 2, entrada 1
Contrl. iSCSI 3, entrada 1
Puerto admin., contrl. 1
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___
___ . ___ . ___ . ___70 Introducción al sistema
• En la SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Guía de los programadores de SMI-S) se
proporciona información acerca de cómo utilizar el proveedor y la
programación de SMI-S.
• En los soportes suministrados con el sistema se incluyen documentación y
herramientas para configurar y administrar el sistema, incluidas las del sistema
operativo, el software de administración del sistema, las actualizaciones del
sistema y los componentes del sistema que haya adquirido con el sistema.
NOTA: compruebe si hay actualizaciones en support.dell.com/manuals y, si
las hay, léalas antes de proceder a la instalación, puesto que a menudo
sustituyen la información contenida en otros documentos.
Preparación del servidor host
Sistemas operativos admitidos
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
NOTA: si desea consultar la información más reciente acerca de todas las
versiones compatibles de sistemas operativos, consulte la Support Matrix (Matriz
de compatibilidad) en support.dell.com/manuals.
NICs adicionales para iSCSI
Recomendaciones para la instalación de NICs adicionales:
• Utilice redes de almacenamiento redundante dedicadas para el tráfico
iSCSI. Si no es factible disponer de una red dedicada, separe el tráfico iSCSI
del tráfico de red general mediante redes de área local virtuales (VLAN).
• Utilice NICs adicionales dedicadas para el tráfico iSCSI.
• Las NICs deben añadirse en pares para obtener redundancia (máximo de
cuatro NICs).
NOTA: también se admite una sola NIC.
Configuración de la NIC
En un entorno SAN, se recomienda utilizar dos o cuatro subredes únicas para
el tráfico iSCSI, en función del número de conmutadores. En los entornos de
almacenamiento de conexión directa, cada NIC conectada directamente a la
matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i debe estar en una
subred diferente.Introducción al sistema 71
Configuraciones comunes
Cableado de los hosts de conexión directa
Servidor 1 Servidor 2
Matriz de
almacenamiento
Servidor 3 Servidor 4
Red corporativa,
pública o privada72 Introducción al sistema
Cableado de los hosts de conexión SAN
Matriz de
almacenamiento
Red corporativa,
pública o privada
Conmutador 1 Conmutador 2
ServidorIntroducción al sistema 73
Máximo de 32 hosts
Servidor 1 Servidor
Matriz de
almacenamiento
Red corporativa,
pública o privada
Conmutador 1 Conmutador 274 Introducción al sistema
Instalación y configuración
AVISO: antes de realizar el procedimiento siguiente, revise las instrucciones de
seguridad incluidas con el sistema.
Desembalaje del sistema
Desembale el sistema e identifique cada parte de la lista de embalaje que se
envió con el sistema.
Instalación de los rieles y del sistema en un bastidor
Ensamble los rieles e instale el sistema en el bastidor siguiendo las instrucciones
de seguridad y de instalación del bastidor incluidas con el sistema.
NOTA: para equilibrar la carga del peso, se recomienda instalar la matriz de
almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i en la parte inferior del bastidor y
los gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 encima de este.Introducción al sistema 75
Conexión de los cables de alimentación
Asegúrese de que el conmutador de alimentación esté en la posición de
APAGADO antes de conectar los cables de alimentación. Conecte los cables
de alimentación del sistema al sistema.
Fijación de los cables de alimentación
Fije los cables al soporte con firmeza con la cinta proporcionada.
Conecte el otro extremo de los cables de alimentación a una toma eléctrica
con conexión a tierra o a otra fuente de alimentación, como por ejemplo un
Sistema de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) o una Unidad de distribución
de alimentación (PDU). Cada suministro de energía debe conectarse a un
circuito de alimentación diferente.76 Introducción al sistema
Cableado del gabinete de expansión
Encendido del gabinete
Matriz de almacenamiento
de la serie PowerVault
MD3200i
Gabinete 1 de expansión
de la serie PowerVault
MD1200 (opcional)
Gabinete 2 de expansión
de la serie PowerVault
MD1200 (opcional)Introducción al sistema 77
Encienda los componentes en el orden siguiente:
1 Conmutadores Ethernet (si se utilizan).
2 Gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (si se utilizan).
NOTA: antes de encender la matriz de almacenamiento, asegúrese de que el
LED de estado del gabinete de expansión está iluminado en azul.
3 Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i.
NOTA: antes de encender los servidores host, asegúrese de que el LED de
estado de la matriz de almacenamiento está iluminado en azul.
4 Servidores host.
Instalación del bisel
Instale el bisel (opcional).
Instalación del software MD Storage
NOTA: para obtener instrucciones detalladas acerca de la instalación del software
MD Storage, la configuración del gabinete y las tareas posteriores a la instalación,
consulte la Guía de implementación.78 Introducción al sistema
El software MD Storage Manager configura, administra y supervisa la matriz de
almacenamiento. La MD Configuration Utility (MDCU) es una utilidad
opcional que proporciona un enfoque consolidado para la configuración de
puertos de administración y de host iSCSI, y de la creación de sesiones para las
matrices de almacenamiento en disco modular iSCSI. Se recomienda utilizar
MDCU para configurar iSCSI en cada uno de los servidores hosts conectados a la
matriz de almacenamiento. Instalación del software MD Storage:
1 Inserte el soporte de recurso de la serie MD.
Dependiendo del sistema operativo que tenga, el instalador puede
iniciarse automáticamente. Si el instalador no se inicia automáticamente,
vaya al directorio raíz del soporte de instalación (o imagen del instalador
descargado) y ejecute el archivo md_launcher.exe. Para sistemas basados
en Linux, vaya a la raíz del soporte de recursos y ejecute el archivo autorun.
NOTA: de manera predeterminada, el sistema operativo Red Hat Enterprise
Linux monta el soporte de recursos con la opción –noexec mount, la cual no
permite ejecutar archivos ejecutables. Para cambiar esta configuración,
consulte el archivo Léame en el directorio raíz del soporte de instalación.
2 Seleccione Install MD Storage Software (Instalar el software
MD Storage).
3 Lea y acepte el contrato de licencia.
4 Seleccione una de las siguientes opciones de instalación del menú
desplegable Install Set (Conjunto de instalación):
• Full (recommended) (Total [recomendado]): instala el software MD
Storage Manager (cliente), el agente de almacenamiento basado en
host, el controlador multirruta y proveedores de hardware.
• Host Only (Solamente host): instala el agente de almacenamiento
basado en host y los controladores multirrutas
• Management (Administración): instala el software de administración
y los proveedores de hardware.
• Custom (Personalizado): permite seleccionar componentes específicos.
5 Seleccione los modelos de matrices MD Storage que está configurando
para que sirvan como almacenamiento de datos para este servidor host.
6 Elija si desea iniciar el servicio de monitor de eventos automática o
manualmente al reiniciar el servidor host Introducción al sistema 79
NOTA: esta opción se aplica solo para la instalación del software cliente
de Windows.
7 Confirme la ubicación de la instalación y haga clic en Install (Instalar).
8 Si se le solicita, reinicie el servidor host después de completar la instalación.
9 Una vez terminado el reinicio, la MDCU puede iniciarse automáticamente.
Si la MDCU no se inicia automáticamente, iníciela manualmente.
• En un sistema operativo basado en Windows, haga clic en
Inicio→ Dell→ Modular Disk Configuration Utility.
• En un sistema operativo basado en Linux, haga doble clic en el icono
del escritorio Modular Disk Configuration Utility.
NOTA: si no está instalada la MDCU, consulte la Guía de implementación en
support.dell.com/manuals.
10 Inicie MD Storage Manager y detecte las matrices.
11 Si se aplica, active cualquiera de las funciones premium adquiridas con la
matriz de almacenamiento. Si ha adquirido una función premium, consulte
la tarjeta de activación impresa enviada con la matriz de almacenamiento.
NOTA: el instalador de MD Storage Manager instala automáticamente los
controladores, el firmware y las revisiones/correcciones urgentes del sistema
operativo necesarios para que funcione la matriz de almacenamiento. Estos
controladores y el firmware se encuentran disponibles en support.dell.com.
Además, consulte la Support Matrix (Matriz de compatibilidad) en
support.dell.com/manuals para obtener configuraciones adicionales o software
necesarios para la matriz de almacenamiento específica.
Localización de la etiqueta de servicio
El sistema se identifica mediante un Código de servicio rápido y un número de
Etiqueta de servicio únicos. El Código de servicio rápido y la Etiqueta de
servicio se encuentran en la parte anterior del sistema y también en la parte
posterior, junto a los módulos de la controladora RAID. Dell utiliza esta
información para dirigir las llamadas de asistencia al personal correspondiente.80 Introducción al sistema
Información de la NOM (sólo para México)
La información que se proporciona a continuación aparece en el dispositivo
descrito en este documento en cumplimiento con los requisitos de la Norma
Oficial Mexicana (NOM):
Especificaciones técnicas
Importador:
Número de modelo: E03J y E04J
Voltaje de
alimentación:
100-240 VCA
Frecuencia: 50 Hz/60 Hz
Consumo eléctrico: 8,6 A
Unidades
PowerVault MD3200i Hasta doce unidades de disco duro de intercambio
directo SAS de 3,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y 6,0 Gbps)
PowerVault MD3220i Hasta doce unidades de disco duro de intercambio
directo SAS de 2,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y 6,0 Gbps)Introducción al sistema 81
Módulos de la controladora RAID
Módulos de la
controladora RAID
• Uno o dos módulos de intercambio directo con
sensores de temperatura
• 2 GB de caché por controladora
Conectores del panel posterior (por módulo de controladora RAID)
Conectores iSCSI Cuatro conectores de entrada iSCSI de 1 GB para
conectar hosts
Conector de expansión SAS Un puerto de salida SAS para la expansión a un
gabinete de la serie PowerVault MD1200 adicional
NOTA: los conectores SAS son compatibles con SFF-8088.
Conector serie Un conector miniDIN de 6 patas
NOTA: sólo para asistencia técnica.
Conector Ethernet de
administración
Un puerto Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T para la
administración fuera de banda del gabinete
NOTA: las direcciones IP de puerto de administración
predeterminadas para los módulos de la controladora
RAID primarios y secundarios son 192.168.128.101 y
192.168.128.102, respectivamente. De manera
predeterminada, los puertos de administración están
definidos para el Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). Si la controladora no puede encontrar una
configuración de la dirección IP de un servidor DHCP en
un período de tiempo especificado (aproximadamente 3
minutos), vuelve de manera predeterminada al
direccionamiento IP estático. Para obtener más
información, consulte la Guía de implementación.
Expansión
Serie PowerVault MD1200 Admite un máximo de 192 unidades de disco duro con
cualquier combinación de gabinetes de expansión
PowerVault MD1200 o PowerVault MD1220. El soporte
para 192 unidades de disco duro es una función Premium
y requiere activación. La cantidad máxima de discos
duros admitidos sin utilizar la función Premium es 120
La conectividad de la ruta de acceso redundante
proporciona rutas de acceso redundantes a cada unidad
de disco duro82 Introducción al sistema
Placa de plano posterior
Conectores • 12 ó 24 conectores de unidad de disco duro SAS
• Dos conectores para módulos de suministro de
energía/ventilador de enfriamiento
• Dos conjuntos de conectores del módulo de
controladora RAID
• Un conector del panel de control para LED
anteriores y un conmutador de modo de
alojamiento
Sensores Dos sensores de temperatura
Indicadores LED
Panel anterior • Un indicador LED de dos colores para el estado
del sistema
• Dos indicadores LED de un solo color para la
alimentación y el modo gabinete
NOTA: el LED del modo gabinete no es aplicable a
la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie
PowerVault MD3200i.
Portaunidades de disco duro • Un indicador LED de un solo color de actividad
• Un indicador LED de dos colores de estado por disco
Suministro de
energía/ventilador
de enfriamiento
Tres indicadores LED de estado para el estado del
suministro de energía, los fallos del suministro de
energía/ventilador y el estado de CAIntroducción al sistema 83
Módulo de la
controladora RAID
Diez LEDs de un solo color:
• Uno de batería defectuosa
• Uno de caché activa
• Uno de controladora defectuosa
• Uno de alimentación de controladora
• Uno de identificación del sistema
• Uno de actividad Ethernet de administración
• Cuatro de actividad del puerto de entrada iSCSI
Seis LEDs de dos colores:
• Cuatro de velocidad del enlace de entrada iSCSI
• Uno de fallo o enlace de salida de SAS
• Uno de velocidad del enlace Ethernet de
administración
Conmutador
Botón de identificación del
sistema
Ubicado en el panel de control anterior. Este botón se
usa para ubicar un sistema en un bastidor.
Conmutador de modo de
alojamiento
Situado en la parte anterior del sistema. Este
conmutador no se aplica a la matriz de almacenamiento
de la serie PowerVault MD3200i
Conmutador de
restablecimiento de
contraseña
Situado en el panel posterior del módulo de controladora
RAID. Este conmutador se utiliza para restablecer la
contraseña de la matriz de almacenamiento
Indicadores LED (continuación)84 Introducción al sistema
Suministros de energía
Suministro de energía de CA (por suministro de energía)
Potencia 600 W
Voltaje 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A)
Disipación de calor 100 W
Corriente de conexión
máxima
En condiciones normales de línea y en todo el rango
operativo ambiente del sistema, la irrupción de
corriente puede alcanzar un máximo de 55 A por
cada suministro de energía durante 10 ms o menos
Alimentación de la unidad de disco duro disponible (por ranura)
PowerVault MD3200i 25 W
PowerVault MD3220i 12 W
Alimentación del módulo de controladora RAID (por ranura)
Consumo de energía máximo 100 W
Características físicas
PowerVault MD3200i
Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas)
Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas)
Profundidad 60,20 cm (23,70 pulgadas)
Peso (configuración máxima) 29,30 kg (64,6 libras)
Peso (vacío) 8,84 kg (19,5 libras)
PowerVault MD3220i
Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas)
Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas)
Profundidad 54,90 cm (21,61 pulgadas)
Peso (configuración máxima) 24,22 kg (53,4 libras)
Peso (vacío) 8,61 kg (19 libras)Introducción al sistema 85
Especificaciones medioambientales
NOTA: para obtener información adicional acerca de medidas ambientales relativas a
configuraciones del sistema específicas, vaya a
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Temperatura
En funcionamiento De 10 °C a 35 °C (de 50 °F a 95 °F) con una
gradación de temperatura máxima de 10 °C por hora
NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m, la
temperatura máxima de funcionamiento se
reduce 1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies)
Almacenamiento De –40 °C a 65 °C (de –40 °F a 149 °F) con una
gradación de temperatura máxima de 20 °C por hora
Humedad relativa
En funcionamiento Del 20 al 80% (sin condensación) con una gradación
de humedad máxima del 10% por hora
Almacenamiento Del 5 al 95% (sin condensación)
Vibración máxima
En funcionamiento De 0,25 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos
Almacenamiento De 0,5 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos
Impacto máximo
En funcionamiento Un choque en el sentido positivo del eje z (un
choque en cada lado del sistema) de 31 G durante
2,6 ms en la orientación de funcionamiento
Almacenamiento Seis impulsos de choque ejecutados
consecutivamente en los ejes x, y y z positivo y
negativo (un impulso en cada lado del sistema)
de 71 G durante un máximo de 2 ms
Altitud
En funcionamiento De –16 m a 3.048 m (de –50 pies a 10.000 pies)
NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m (2.950 pies),
la temperatura máxima de funcionamiento se
reduce 1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies)
Almacenamiento De –16 m a 10,600 m (de –50 pies a 35.000 pies)
Nivel de contaminación atmosférica
Clase G1 de acuerdo con ISA-S71.04-198586 Introducción al sistemawww.dell.com | support.dell.com
Printed in the U.S.A.
Imprimé aux U.S.A.
Impresso nos EUA.
Impreso en los EE.UU.www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Printed in Brazil.
Imprimé au Brésil.
Impresso no Brasil.
Impreso en Brasil.
Dell PowerVault MD3200 and
MD3220 Storage Arrays
Getting Started
With Your System
Guide de mise en route
Introdução ao uso do sistema
Introducción al sistemaDell PowerVault MD3200 and
MD3220 Storage Arrays
Getting Started
With Your System
Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04JNotes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use
of your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data
if instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage,
personal injury, or death.
____________________
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
© 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc.
is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerVault™ are trademarks of Dell Inc.
Microsoft
®
and Windows Server
®
are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat
®
and Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
are
registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. SUSE
®
is a registered
trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. VMware
®
is a registered trademark
of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming
the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and
trade names other than its own.
Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04J
2011 - 08 P/N VC9TD Rev. A02Getting Started With Your System 3
Before You Begin
NOTE: Throughout the document, Dell PowerVault MD3200 series storage array
refers to both Dell PowerVault MD3200 and Dell PowerVault MD3220. Dell
PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure refers to both Dell PowerVault
MD1200 and Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Before setting up your Dell PowerVault MD3200 series storage array, you must
consider certain best practices to ensure that your storage array operates at
maximum efficiency and offers full redundancy (if required).
• Throughout the network, always use a Category 5e (or higher)
Ethernet cable.
• Before connecting any cables between the host server and storage array,
physically label each port and connector.
• Always follow proper power-up and power-down procedures when cycling
power across the network. You must also ensure that critical network
components are on separate power circuits.
Other Documentation and Media You May Need
WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with
your system. Warranty information may be included within this document or
as a separate document.
NOTE: All PowerVault MD3200 series documents are available at
support.dell.com/manuals.
• The rack documentation included with your rack solution describes how to
install your system into a rack.
• The Owner’s Manual provides information about system features and
describes how to troubleshoot the system and install or replace system
components.
• The Deployment Guide provides information about installing and
configuring the software and hardware.
• The CLI Guide provides information about using the command line
interface (CLI) to configure and manage your storage array.4 Getting Started With Your System
• The SMI-S Programmer’s Guide provides information about using the
SMI-S provider and SMI-S programming.
• Any media that ships with your system that provides documentation and
tools for configuring and managing your system, including those
pertaining to the operating system, system management software,
system updates, and system components that you purchased
with your system.
NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the
updates first because they often supersede information in other documents.
Supported Operating Systems
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
NOTE: For the latest information on all the supported operating system versions,
see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals.Getting Started With Your System 5
Common Configurations
Cabling Your Direct-Attached Hosts
Server 1 Server 2
Corporate, public,
or private network
Server 3 Server 4
PowerVault MD3200
series storage array6 Getting Started With Your System
Installation and Configuration
WARNING: Before performing the following procedure, review the safety
instructions that came with the system.
Unpacking the System
Unpack your system and identify each item with the packing list that shipped
with your system.
Installing the Rails and System in a Rack
Assemble the rails and install the system in the rack following the safety
instructions and the rack installation instructions provided with your system.
NOTE: To balance the weight load, it is recommended that you install the
PowerVault MD3200 series storage array at the bottom of the rack and the
PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures above it.Getting Started With Your System 7
Connecting the Power Cable(s)
Ensure that the power switch is in the OFF position before connecting the
power cables. Connect the system’s power cable(s) to the system.
Securing the Power Cable(s)
Secure the cable(s) firmly to the bracket using the provided strap.
Plug the other end of the power cables into a grounded electrical outlet or
a separate power source such as an uninterrupted power supply (UPS) or
a power distribution unit (PDU). Each power supply must be connected
to a separate power circuit.8 Getting Started With Your System
Cabling Your Expansion Enclosure
Turning On the Enclosure
Turn on the components in the following order:
1 PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures (if used)
NOTE: Before turning on the storage array, ensure that the expansion
enclosure status LED is blue.
PowerVault MD3200
series storage array
PowerVault MD1200
series expansion
enclosure 1 (optional)
PowerVault MD1200
series expansion
enclosure 2 (optional)Getting Started With Your System 9
2 PowerVault MD3200 series storage array
NOTE: Before turning on the host server(s), ensure that the storage array
status LED is blue.
3 Host server(s)
Installing the Bezel
Install the bezel (optional).
Installing the MD Storage Software
NOTE: For detailed instructions about installing the MD storage software, setting
up the enclosure, and the post-installation tasks, see the Deployment Guide.
The MD Storage Manager application configures, manages, and monitors the
storage array. To install the MD storage software:
1 Insert the MD series resource media.
Depending on your operating system, the installer may launch
automatically. If the installer does not launch automatically, navigate to
the root directory of the installation media (or downloaded installer
image) and run the md_launcher.exe file. For Linux-based systems,
navigate to the root of the resource media and run the autorun file.
NOTE: By default, the Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating system mounts the
resource media with the -noexec mount option which does not allow you to
run executable files. To change this setting, see the Readme file in the root
directory of the installation media.10 Getting Started With Your System
2 Select Install MD Storage Software.
3 Read and accept the license agreement.
4 Select one of the following installation options from the Install Set
drop-down menu:
• Full (recommended)—Installs the MD Storage Manager (client)
software, host-based storage agent, multipath driver, and hardware
providers.
• Host Only—Installs the host-based storage agent and multipath
drivers.
• Management—Installs the management software and hardware
providers.
• Custom—Allows you to select specific components.
5 Select the MD storage array model(s) you are setting up to serve as data
storage for this host server.
6 Choose whether to start the event monitor service automatically when the
host server reboots or manually
NOTE: This option is applicable only to Windows client software installation.
7 Confirm the installation location and click Install.
8 If prompted, reboot the host server once the installation completes.
9 Start the MD Storage Manager and discover the array(s).
10 If applicable, activate any premium features purchased with your storage
array. If you purchased premium features, see the printed activation card
shipped with your storage array.
NOTE: The MD Storage Manager installer automatically installs the required
drivers, firmware, and operating system patches/hotfixes to operate your storage
array. These drivers and firmware are also available at support.dell.com. In
addition, see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals for any additional
settings and/or software required for your specific storage array.Getting Started With Your System 11
Locating Your Service Tag
Your system is identified by a unique Express Service Code and Service Tag
number. The Express Service Code and Service Tag are found on the front
of the system and at the back of the system next to the RAID controller
modules. This information is used by Dell to route support calls to the
appropriate personnel.
NOM Information (Mexico Only)
The following information is provided on the device described
in this document in compliance with the requirements of the
official Mexican standards (NOM):
Importer:
Model number: E03J and E04J
Supply voltage: 100–240 V CA
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Current consumption: 8.6 A12 Getting Started With Your System
Technical Specifications
Drives
PowerVault MD3200 Up to twelve 3.5-inch SAS hot-swappable
hard drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps)
PowerVault MD3220 Up to twenty four 2.5-inch SAS hot-swappable
hard drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps)
RAID Controller Modules
RAID controller modules • One or two hot-swappable modules with
temperature sensors
• 2 GB of cache per controller
Back-Panel Connectors (Per RAID Controller Module)
SAS connectors • Four SAS IN ports to connect hosts
• One SAS OUT port for expansion to an additional
PowerVault MD1200 series enclosure
NOTE: SAS connectors are SFF-8088 compliant.
Serial connector One 6-pin mini-DIN connector
NOTE: For technical support use only.
Management Ethernet
connector
One 100/1000 Base-T port Ethernet for out-of-band
management of the enclosure
NOTE: The default management port IP addresses for
the primary and secondary RAID controller modules
are 192.168.128.101 and 192.168.128.102, respectively.
By default, the management ports are set to Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If the controller
is unable to get an IP address configuration from
a DHCP server within a specified time out period
(approximately 3 minutes), it defaults back to
static IP addressing. For more information,
see the Deployment Guide.Getting Started With Your System 13
Expansion
PowerVault MD1200 series Supports a maximum of 192 hard drives with any
combination of PowerVault MD1200 or PowerVault
MD1220 expansion enclosures. Support for 192 hard
drives is a Premium Feature and requires activation.
The maximum number of hard drives supported
without using the Premium Feature is 120.
Redundant path connectivity provides redundant
data paths to each hard drive.
Backplane Board
Connectors • 12 or 24 SAS hard-drive connectors
• Two power supply/cooling fan module connectors
• Two sets of RAID controller module connectors
• One control panel connector for front LEDs and
system identification button
Sensors Two temperature sensors
LED Indicators
Front panel • One two-color LED indicator for system status
• Two single-color LED indicators for power and
enclosure mode
NOTE: The enclosure mode LED is not applicable to
the PowerVault MD3200 series storage array.
Hard-drive carrier • One single-color activity LED
• One two-color LED status indicator per drive
Power supply/cooling fan Three LED status indicators for power supply status,
power supply/fan fault, and AC status14 Getting Started With Your System
RAID controller module Six single-color LEDs:
• One battery fault
• One cache active
• One controller fault
• One controller power
• One system identification
• One management Ethernet activity
Six two-color LEDs:
• Four SAS IN link or fault
• One SAS OUT link or fault
• One management Ethernet link speed
Switch
System identification button Located on the front control panel. This button is
used to locate a system within a rack.
Enclosure mode switch Located on the front of the system. This switch is
not applicable to the PowerVault MD3200 series
storage array.
Password reset switch Located on the back-panel of the RAID controller
module. This switch is used to reset the storage array
password.
Power Supplies
AC power supply (per power supply)
Wattage 600 W
Voltage 100–240 VAC (8.6 A–4.3 A)
Heat dissipation 100 W
Maximum inrush current Under typical line conditions and over the entire
system ambient operating range, the inrush current
may reach a maximum of 55 A per power supply for
10 ms or less.
LED Indicators (continued)Getting Started With Your System 15
Available Hard Drive Power (Per Slot)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
RAID Controller Module Power (Per Slot)
Maximum power consumption 100 W
Physical
PowerVault MD3200
Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches)
Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches)
Depth 60.20 cm (23.70 inches)
Weight (maximum
configuration)
29.30 kg (64.6 lb)
Weight (empty) 8.84 kg (19.5 lb)
PowerVault MD3220
Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches)
Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches)
Depth 54.90 cm (21.61 inches)
Weight (maximum
configuration)
24.22 kg (53.4 lb)
Weight (empty) 8.61 kg (19 lb)16 Getting Started With Your System
Environmental
NOTE: For additional information about environmental measurements for specific
system configurations, see www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Temperature
Operating 10 °C to 35 °C (50 °F to 95 °F) with a maximum
temperature gradation of 10 °C per hour
NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum
operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft.
Storage –40 °C to 65 °C (–40 °F to 149 °F) with a maximum
temperature gradation of 20°C per hour.
Relative humidity
Operating 20% to 80% (noncondensing) with a maximum
humidity gradation of 10% per hour
Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing)
Maximum vibration
Operating 0.25 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min
Storage 0.5 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min
Maximum shock
Operating One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on
each side of the system) of 31 G for 2.6 ms in the
operational orientation
Storage Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the
positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on
each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms
Altitude
Operating –16 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)
NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum
operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft.
Storage –16 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)
Airborne Contaminant Level
Class G1 as defined by ISA-S71.04-1985Matrices de stockage
Dell PowerVault MD3200
et MD3220
Guide de mise en route
Séries de modèle réglementaire E03J et E04JRemarques, précautions et avertissements
REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent
vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION vous avertit d'un risque d'endommagement du
matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non-respect des instructions.
AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement
du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort.
____________________
Les informations que contient ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc.
est strictement interdite.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL et PowerVault™ sont des marques de
Dell Inc. Microsoft
®
et Windows Server
®
sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft
Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat
®
et Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
sont des
marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. SUSE
®
est une marque
déposée de Novell, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. VMware
®
est une marque déposée de
VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres juridictions.
D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence
aux entités revendiquant la propriété de ces marques ou de ces noms de produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout
intérêt exclusif dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens.
Séries de modèle réglementaire E03J et E04J
2011 - 08 N/P VC9TD Rév. A02Guide de mise en route 19
Avant de commencer
REMARQUE : dans ce document, les références à la matrice de stockage Dell
PowerVault série MD3200 concernent les matrices de stockage Dell PowerVault
MD3200 et Dell PowerVault MD3220. Le boîtier d'extension Dell PowerVault MD1200
désigne les boîtiers Dell PowerVault MD1200 et Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Avant d'installer votre matrice de stockage Dell PowerVault série MD3200,
vous devez considérer certaines pratiques d'excellence pour assurer le
fonctionnement le plus efficace possible de votre matrice de stockage et une
redondance complète (si nécessaire).
• Utilisez toujours un câble Ethernet de catégorie 5e (ou plus) à travers
le réseau.
• Avant de connecter tout câble entre le serveur hôte et la matrice de
stockage, étiquetez physiquement chaque port et chaque connecteur.
• Suivez toujours les procédures de mise sous et hors tension lors des
cycles d'alimentation du réseau. Vous devez également vous assurer que
les composants essentiels du réseau se trouvent sur différents circuits
d'alimentation.
Autre documentation et support dont vous
pourriez avoir besoin
AVERTISSEMENT : reportez-vous aux informations sur la sécurité et les
réglementations qui accompagnent votre système. Les informations sur la garantie
se trouvent dans ce document ou dans un document distinct.
REMARQUE : tous les documents PowerVault série MD3200 sont disponibles sur
le site support.dell.com/manuals.
• La documentation fournie avec le rack indique comment installer le
système dans un rack.
• Le Manuel du propriétaire du matériel contient des informations sur les
caractéristiques du système, ainsi que des instructions relatives au
dépannage et à l'installation ou au remplacement de composants.
• Le Guide de déploiement fournit des informations sur l'installation et la
configuration du logiciel et du matériel.
• Le Guide CLI fournit des informations sur l'utilisation de l'interface de ligne
de commande (CLI) pour configurer et gérer votre matrice de stockage.20 Guide de mise en route
• Le document SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Guide de programmeur SMI-S)
contient des informations sur l'utilisation de l'opérateur SMI-S et la
programmation de SMI-S.
• Tous les supports fournis avec le système contiennent de la documentation
et des outils de configuration et de gestion de votre système d'exploitation,
notamment du système même et du logiciel de gestion, des mises à jour et
des composants système que vous avez achetés avec le système.
REMARQUE : vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site
support.dell.com/manuals et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent
souvent les informations que contiennent les autres documents.
Systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
REMARQUE : pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes sur toutes les
versions de système d'exploitation prises en charge, reportez-vous à la
Matrice de support à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals.Guide de mise en route 21
Configurations courantes
Câblage des hôtes reliés directement
Serveur 1 Serveur 2
Réseau d'entreprise,
public ou privé
Serveur 3 Serveur 4
Matrice de stockage
PowerVault série MD3200 22 Guide de mise en route
Installation et configuration
AVERTISSEMENT : avant d'exécuter la procédure ci-dessous, lisez les
consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système.
Déballage du système
Déballez votre système et identifiez chaque élément en consultant la liste de
composants livrée avec votre système.
Installation des rails et du système dans un rack
Assemblez les rails et installez le système dans le rack en suivant les consignes
de sécurité et les instructions d'installation du rack fournies avec votre système.
REMARQUE : pour équilibrer la charge, nous vous recommandons d'installer la
matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200 en bas du rack et les boîtiers
d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 au-dessus.Guide de mise en route 23
Branchement du ou des câbles d'alimentation
Avant de connecter les câbles d'alimentation, assurez-vous que le commutateur
d'alimentation est en position OFF (ÉTEINT). Branchez le ou les câbles
d'alimentation sur le système.
Fixation du ou des câbles d'alimentation
Fixez fermement les câbles au support de fixation à l'aide de la lanière fournie.
Branchez ensuite l'autre extrémité des câbles d'alimentation sur une prise de
courant mise à la masse ou sur une source d'alimentation autonome (onduleur
[UPS] ou unité de distribution de l'alimentation [PDU]...). Chaque bloc
d'alimentation doit être connecté à un circuit d'alimentation séparé.24 Guide de mise en route
Câblage de votre boîtier d'extension
Mise sous tension du boîtier
Mettez les composants sous tension dans l'ordre suivant :
1 Boîtiers d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 (si utilisés)
REMARQUE : avant d'allumer la matrice de stockage, assurez-vous que le
voyant d'état du boîtier d'extension est bleu.
Matrice de stockage
PowerVault série
MD3200
Boîtier d'extension
PowerVault série
MD1200 1 (en option)
Boîtier d'extension
PowerVault série
MD1200 2 (en option)Guide de mise en route 25
2 Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200
REMARQUE : avant d'allumer le(s) serveur(s) hôte, assurez-vous que le
voyant d'état de la matrice de stockage est bleu.
3 Serveur(s) hôte
Installation du cadre
Installez le cadre (en option).
Installation du logiciel MD Storage
REMARQUE : pour des instructions détaillées sur l'installation du logiciel
MD Storage, la configuration du boîtier et les tâches de post-installation, voir le
Guide de déploiement.
L'application MD Storage Manager configure, gère et contrôle la matrice de
stockage. Pour installer le logiciel MD Storage Manager :
1 Insérez le support Ressource série MD.
En fonction de votre système d'exploitation, l'installateur se lancera peut-
être automatiquement. Si l'installateur ne se lance pas automatiquement,
naviguez dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation (ou téléchargez
l'image d'installateur) et exécutez le fichier md_launcher.exe. Pour les
systèmes exécutant Linux, naviguez vers la racine du support Ressource et
exécutez le fichier autorun (Exécution auto).26 Guide de mise en route
REMARQUE : par défaut, Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) monte le support
Ressource à l'aide de l'option de montage –noexec mount, qui ne vous permet
pas d'exécuter les fichiers exécutables. Pour modifier ce paramètre, consultez
le fichier Lisez-moi dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation.
2 Sélectionnez Install MD Storage Software (Installer le logiciel de
stockage MD).
3 Lisez le contrat de licence et acceptez-le.
4 Sélectionnez l'une des options d'installation suivantes dans le menu
déroulant Install Set (Configuration d'installation) :
• Full (recommended) (Complète - recommandée) : installe le logiciel
(client) MD Storage Manager, l'agent de stockage hôte, le pilote
multivoies et les fournisseurs de matériel.
• Host Only (Hôte uniquement) : installe l'agent de stockage hôte et
les pilotes multivoies.
• Management (Gestion) : installe le logiciel de gestion et les
fournisseurs de matériel.
• Custom (Personnalisée) : permet de sélectionner des composants
spécifiques.
5 Sélectionnez le(s) modèle(s) de matrice de stockage MD que vous
souhaitez définir comme stockage de données pour ce serveur hôte.
6 Choisissez de démarrer le service de moniteur des événements
automatiquement lors du redémarrage du serveur hôte ou manuellement.
REMARQUE : cette option ne s'applique qu'à l'installation du logiciel
client Windows.
7 Confirmez l'emplacement de l'installation et cliquez sur Install (Installer).
8 En réponse à l'invitation (le cas échéant), redémarrez le serveur hôte une
fois l'installation terminée.
9 Démarrez MD Storage Manager et lancez la détection des matrices.
10 Le cas échéant, activez les fonctions premium achetées avec votre matrice
de stockage. Si vous avez acheté des fonctions premium, consultez la carte
d'activation livrée avec votre matrice de stockage.
REMARQUE : l'installateur MD Storage Manager installe automatiquement les
pilotes, micrologiciel, et correctifs de système d'exploitation nécessaires pour le
fonctionnement de votre matrice de stockage. Ces pilotes et micrologiciels sont
également disponibles à l'adresse support.dell.com. Consultez également la Matrice
de prise en charge à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals pour des paramètres et/ou
logiciels supplémentaires requis pour votre matrice de stockage spécifique.Guide de mise en route 27
Identification du numéro de service
Votre système est identifié par un code de service express et un numéro de
service uniques. Le code de service express et le numéro de service se situent à
l'avant et à l'arrière du système à côté des modules de contrôleur RAID.
Dell utilise ces informations pour acheminer les appels de support au
technicien qui convient.
Informations NOM (Mexique uniquement)
Les informations suivantes sur l'appareil décrit dans ce document sont fournies
conformément aux exigences de la Norme Officielle Mexicaine (NOM) :
Importateur :
Numéro de modèle : E03J et E04J
Tension
d'alimentation :
100 à 240 V CA
Fréquence : 50/60 Hz
Consommation
électrique :
8,6 A28 Guide de mise en route
Caractéristiques techniques
Lecteurs
PowerVault MD3200 Jusqu'à douze disques durs SAS 3,5 pouces
remplaçables à chaud (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s)
PowerVault MD3220 Jusqu'à vingt-quatre disques durs SAS 2,5 pouces
remplaçables à chaud (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s)
Modules de contrôleur RAID
Les modules de contrôleur
RAID
• Un ou deux modules remplaçables à chaud avec
capteurs de température
• 2 Go de mémoire cache par contrôleur
Connecteurs du panneau arrière (par module de contrôleur RAID)
Connecteurs SAS • Quatre ports d'entrée SAS pour connecter
des hôtes
• Un port de sortie SAS pour l'extension à un boîtier
PowerVault MD1200 supplémentaire
REMARQUE : les connecteurs SAS sont conformes
SFF-8088.
Connecteur série Un connecteur mini-DIN à 6 broches
REMARQUE : cette option est réservée au personnel
de maintenance.
Connecteur Ethernet de gestion Un port Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T pour une gestion
hors bande du boîtier
REMARQUE : les adresses IP de port de gestion par
défaut des modules de contrôleur RAID principal et
secondaire sont respectivement192.168.128.101 et
192.168.128.102. Par défaut, les ports de gestion sont
définis sur le protocole DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration). Si le contrôleur ne parvient pas à
obtenir une configuration d'adresse IP depuis un
serveur DHCP au cours d'une durée d'attente
spécifiée (environ 3 minutes), il revient à l'adressage
IP statique par défaut. Pour plus d'informations, voir le
Guide de déploiement.Guide de mise en route 29
Extension
PowerVault Série MD1200 Prend en charge jusqu'à 192 disques durs avec
n'importe quelle combinaison de boîtiers
d'extension PowerVault MD1200 ou PowerVault
MD1220. La prise en charge de 192 disques durs est
une fonction premium qui doit être activée. Le
nombre maximum de disques durs pris en charge
sans recours à la fonction premium est 120.
La connectivité à chemin redondant fournit des
chemins de données redondants à chaque disque dur.
Carte de fond de panier
Connecteurs • 12 ou 24 connecteurs de disque dur SAS
• Deux connecteurs pour les modules de
ventilation/alimentation
• Deux ensembles de connecteurs de module de
contrôleur RAID
• Un connecteur de panneau de configuration pour
les voyants avant et le bouton d'identification de
système
Capteurs Deux capteurs de température
Voyants
Panneau avant • Un voyant bichrome indiquant l'état du système
• Deux voyants monochromes (alimentation et
mode boîtier)
REMARQUE : le voyant du mode boîtier ne
s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage PowerVault
série MD3200.
Support de disque dur • Un voyant d'activité monochrome
• Un voyant d'état bichrome par lecteur
Bloc d'alimentation/ventilateur
de refroidissement
Trois voyants d'état (état du bloc d'alimentation,
panne du bloc d'alimentation/Ventilateur et état de
l'alimentation)30 Guide de mise en route
Module de contrôleur RAID Six voyants monochromes :
• Un voyant de panne de batterie
• Un voyant d'activité de la mémoire cache
• Un voyant de panne du contrôleur
• Un voyant d'état de l'alimentation du contrôleur
• Un voyant système
• Un voyant d'activité de gestion Ethernet
Six voyants bichromes :
• Quatre voyants de liaison d'entrée SAS ou d'erreur
• Un voyant de panne ou de lien de sortie SAS
• Un voyant de vitesse de lien Ethernet de gestion
Commutateur
Bouton d'identification du
système
Situé sur le panneau de commande avant. Ce bouton
sert à localiser un système au sein d'un rack.
Sélecteur de mode du boîtier Situé sur le devant du système. Ce sélecteur
ne s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage
PowerVault MD3200.
Sélecteur de réinitialisation du
mot de passe
Situé sur le panneau arrière du module de contrôleur
RAID. Ce sélecteur permet de réinitialiser le mot de
passe de la matrice de stockage.
Blocs d'alimentation
Alimentation secteur (par bloc d'alimentation)
Puissance 600 W
Tension 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A)
Dissipation thermique 100 W
Courant d'appel maximal Dans des conditions de ligne typiques et dans toute
la gamme ambiante de fonctionnement du système,
l'appel de courant peut atteindre 55 A par bloc
d'alimentation pendant un maximum de 10 ms.
Alimentation disponible pour les disques durs (par logement)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
Voyants (suite)Guide de mise en route 31
Alimentation du module de contrôleur RAID (par emplacement)
Consommation de courant
maximale
100 W
Caractéristiques physiques
PowerVault MD3200
Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces)
Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces)
Profondeur 60,20 cm (23,70 pouces)
Poids (configuration
maximale)
29,30 kg (64,6 livres)
Poids (vide) 8,84 kg (19,5 livres)
PowerVault MD3220
Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces)
Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces)
Profondeur 54,90 cm (21,61 pouces)
Poids (configuration
maximale)
24,22 kg (53,4 livres)
Poids (vide) 8,61 kg (19 livres)
Environnement
REMARQUE : pour des informations supplémentaires sur les mesures
environnementales liées aux différentes configurations du système, voir
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Température
En fonctionnement De 10 à 35 °C (50 à 95 °F) avec un gradient
thermique maximal de 10 °C par heure
REMARQUE : à des altitudes supérieures à
900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de
fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les
168 mètres (550 pieds).
Entreposage De -40 à 65 °C (-40 à 149 °F) avec un gradient
thermique maximal de 20 °C par heure32 Guide de mise en route
Humidité relative
En fonctionnement De 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) avec un gradient
d'humidité maximal de 10 % par heure
Entreposage De 5 à 95 % (sans condensation)
Tolérance maximale aux vibrations
En fonctionnement 0,25 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant
15 minutes
Entreposage 0,5 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant
15 minutes
Choc maximal
En fonctionnement Une impulsion de choc de 31 G pendant un
maximum de 2,6 ms sur l'axe z positif
(une impulsion de chaque côté du système)
Entreposage Six chocs consécutifs de 71 G pendant un maximum
de 2 ms en positif et négatif sur les axes x, y et z
(une impulsion de chaque côté du système)
Altitude
En fonctionnement De -16 à 3 048 m (-50 à 10 000 pieds)
REMARQUE : À des altitudes supérieures à
900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de
fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les
168 mètres (550 pieds).
Entreposage De -16 à 10 600 m (-50 à 35 000 pieds)
Contaminants en suspension dans l'air
Classe G1 selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985
Environnement (suite)Guide de mise en route 3334 Guide de mise en routeMatrizes de armazenamento
Dell PowerVault MD3200 e
MD3220
Introdução ao uso do
sistema
Modelo normativo séries E03J e E04JNotas, Avisos e Advertências
NOTA: uma NOTA fornece informações importantes para ajudar você a aproveitar
melhor os recursos do seu computador.
AVISO: um AVISO indica um potencial de danos ao hardware ou a perda de dados
se as instruções não forem seguidas.
ADVERTÊNCIA: uma ADVERTÊNCIA indica um potencial de danos à propriedade,
risco de lesões corporais ou mesmo de risco de vida.
____________________
As informações contidas nesta publicação estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Todos os direitos reservados.
Qualquer forma de reprodução deste material sem a permissão por escrito da Dell Inc. é expressamente
proibida.
Marcas comerciais usadas neste texto: Dell™, o logotipo DELL e PowerVault™ são marcas comerciais
da Dell Inc.; Microsoft
®
e Windows Server
®
são marcas comerciais ou marcas registradas da Microsoft
Corporation nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. Red Hat
®
e Red Hat Enterprise Linux
®
são marcas
registradas da Red Hat, Inc. nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. SUSE
®
é marca registrada da
Novell, Inc. nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. VMware
®
é marca registrada da VMware, Inc.
nos Estados Unidos e/ou em outras jurisdições.
Outras marcas e nomes comerciais podem ser usados nesta publicação como referência às entidades
que reivindicam essas marcas e nomes ou a seus produtos. A Dell Inc. declara que não tem interesse
de propriedade sobre marcas comerciais e nomes de terceiros.
Modelo normativo séries E03J e E04J
Agosto de 2011 N/P VC9TD Rev. A02Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 37
Antes de começar
NOTA: Neste documento, a matriz de armazenamento Dell PowerVault série
MD3200 se refere tanto à matriz Dell PowerVault MD3200 quanto à matriz Dell
PowerVault MD3220. O gabinete de expansão Dell PowerVault série MD1200 se
refere tanto ao Dell PowerVault MD1200 quanto ao Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Antes de configurar a matriz de armazenamento Dell PowerVault série
MD3200, você precisa considerar certas práticas recomendadas que garantem
que a sua matriz de armazenamento funcione com a máxima eficiência e
ofereça redundância total (se necessário).
• Use sempre cabos de rede Ethernet Categoria 5e (ou melhores) em toda a
rede.
• Antes de conectar quaisquer cabos entre o servidor host e a matriz de
armazenamento, coloque uma etiqueta em cada porta e em cada conector.
• Siga sempre os procedimentos adequados para fazer o “power cycle”
(desligar e religar em seguida) de dispositivos da rede. Você precisa garantir
também que os componentes críticos da rede estejam em circuitos de
alimentação separados.
Outros documentos e mídias dos quais você pode
precisar
ADVERTÊNCIA: Consulte as informações de normalização e segurança
fornecidas com o sistema. As informações de garantia podem estar neste
documento ou podem ser fornecidas como um documento separado.
NOTA: Todos os documentos do PowerVault série MD3200 estão disponíveis em
support.dell.com/manuals.
• The rack documentation included with your rack solution describes how to
install your system into a rack.
• O Manual do proprietário fornece informações sobre os recursos do sistema
e descreve como solucionar problemas do sistema e como instalar ou trocar
componentes.
• O Guia de implementação fornece informações sobre a instalação e a
configuração do software e do hardware. 38 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
• O Guia da Interface de Linha de Comando (CLI) fornece informações sobre
o uso da interface de linha de comando para configurar e gerenciar a
matriz de armazenamento.
• O Guia do programador de SMI-S fornece informações sobre o uso do
provedor de SMI-S e sobre a programação de SMI-S.
• Qualquer mídia que acompanha o sistema e que contém documentação e
ferramentas para a configuração e o gerenciamento do sistema, incluindo
aquelas relacionadas ao sistema operacional, software de gerenciamento do
sistema, atualizações do sistema e componentes adquiridos com o sistema.
NOTA: Verifique sempre se há atualizações disponíveis no site
support.dell.com/manuals (em inglês) e leia primeiro as atualizações, pois
estas geralmente substituem informações contidas em outros documentos.
Sistemas operacionais suportados
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
NOTA: Para obter as informações mais recentes sobre todas as versões de
sistemas operacionais suportadas, consulte Support Matrix (Matriz de suporte) no
site support.dell.com/manuals.Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 39
Configurações comuns
Cabeamento de hosts conectados diretamente
Servidor 1 Servidor 2
Rede corporativa,
pública ou privada
Servidor 3 Servidor 4
Matriz de
armazenamento
PowerVault série
MD3200 40 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Instalação e configuração
ADVERTÊNCIA: Antes de executar o procedimento abaixo, siga as instruções de
segurança fornecidas com o sistema.
Remover o sistema da embalagem
Desembale o sistema e identifique cada item de acordo com a lista fornecida.
Instalar os trilhos e o sistema no rack
Monte os trilhos e instale o sistema no rack, seguindo as instruções de
segurança e as instruções de instalação fornecidas com o sistema.
NOTA: Para contrabalançar o peso, é recomendável que você instale a matriz de
armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200 na parte inferior do rack e os gabinetes
de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 acima dela.Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 41
Conectar o(s) cabo(s) de alimentação
Verifique se a chave está na posição “desligada” (OFF), antes de conectar os
cabos de alimentação. Conecte o(s) cabos de alimentação ao sistema.
Prender o(s) cabo(s) de alimentação
Prenda firmemente os cabos ao gancho usando a tira fornecida.42 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Conecte a outra extremidade do(s) cabo(s) de alimentação a uma tomada
elétrica aterrada ou a uma fonte de alimentação separada, por exemplo, uma
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply [fonte de alimentação ininterrupta]) ou
uma PDU (Power Distribution Unit [unidade de distribuição de energia]).
Cada fonte de alimentação precisa ser conectada a um circuito de
alimentação separado.
Cabeamento do gabinete de expansão
Ligar o gabinete
Matriz de
armazenamento
PowerVault série
MD3200
Gabinete de expansão
PowerVault série
MD1200 1 (opcional)
Gabinete de expansão
PowerVault série
MD1200 2 (opcional)Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 43
Ligue os componentes na seguinte ordem:
1 Gabinetes de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 (se estiverem sendo
usados)
NOTA: Antes de ligar a matriz de armazenamento, verifique se o LED de
status do gabinete de expansão está azul.
2 Matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200
NOTA: Antes de ligar o(s) servidor(es) host, verifique se o LED de status da
matriz de armazenamento está azul.
3 Servidor(es) host
Instalar o bezel
Instale o bezel (opcional).
Instalar o software de armazenamento MD
NOTA: Para obter instruções detalhadas sobre a instalação do software de
armazenamento MD, a configuração do gabinete e as tarefas de pós-instalação,
consulte o guia de implementação.
O aplicativo MD Storage Manager (gerenciamento de armazenamento MD)
configura, gerencia e monitora a matriz de armazenamento. Para instalar o
software de armazenamento MD:
1 Insira a mídia de recursos da série MD.44 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Dependendo do seu sistema operacional, o instalador pode ser aberto
automaticamente. Se o instalador não abrir automaticamente, vá até o
diretório raiz da mídia de instalação (ou da imagem baixada do instalador)
e execute o arquivo md_launcher.exe. Nos sistemas Linux, navegue até a
raiz da mídia de recursos e execute o arquivo autorun.
NOTA: Por padrão, o sistema operacional Red Hat Enterprise Linux monta a
mídia de recursos com a opção –noexec mount, a qual não permite rodar
arquivos executáveis. Para mudar esta configuração, consulte o arquivo
Readme que está no diretório raiz da mídia de instalação.
2 Selecione Install MD Storage Software.
3 Leia e aceite o contrato de licença.
4 Selecione uma das seguintes opções de instalação no menu suspenso
Install Set (Conjunto de instalação):
• Full (recommended) — (Completa (recomendável)) - Instala o
software cliente do Gerenciador de armazenamento MD (MD Storage
Manager (client)), o agente de armazenamento baseado no host, o
driver de multi-caminho e os provedores de hardware.
• Host Only — (Apenas host) - Instala o agente de armazenamento
baseado em host e os drivers de multi-caminhos.
• Management — (Gerenciamento) - Instala o software de
gerenciamento e os provedores de hardware.
• Custom — (Personalizada) - Permite que você selecione componentes
específicos.
5 Selecione o(s) modelo(s) de matriz de armazenamento MD que você está
configurando como armazenamento de dados para este servidor host.
6 Indique se você quer começar a monitoração de eventos automaticamente
quando o servidor é reinicializado ou manualmente.
NOTA: Esta opção só se aplica à instalação de software de cliente Windows.
7 Confirme o local de instalação e clique em Install.
8 Se for solicitado, reinicialize o servidor quando a instalação terminar.
9 Abra o aplicativo MD Storage Manager (Gerenciador de armazenamento
MD) e faça a descoberta da(s) matriz(es).Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 45
10 Se for o caso, ative todos os recursos Premium comprados com a sua matriz
de armazenamento. Se for o caso, consulte o cartão impresso de ativação
que é fornecido com a sua matriz de armazenamento.
NOTA: O instalador do MD Storage Manager (gerenciador de armazenamento MD)
instala automaticamente os drivers, o firmware e os patches do sistema
operacional necessários para operar a matriz de armazenamento. Estes drivers e
firmware estão também disponíveis em support.dell.com. Além disso, consulte
Support Matrix (Matriz de suporte) em support.dell.com/manuals para obter
configurações e/ou software adicionais necessários para a sua matriz de
armazenamento específica.
Localizar a etiqueta de serviço
O seu sistema é identificado por um número exclusivo de código de serviço
expresso e de etiqueta de serviço. O código de serviço expresso (Express
Service Code) e a etiqueta de serviço (Service Tag) estão localizados na parte
frontal e na parte traseira do sistema, próximos aos módulos controladores de
RAID. Estas informações são usadas pela Dell para dirigir as chamadas que
são feitas ao serviço de suporte para o pessoal adequado.46 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Informações da norma NOM (apenas para o
México)
As informações a seguir são fornecidas sobre o dispositivo descrito neste
documento em conformidade com os requisitos das normas oficiais
mexicanas (NOM):
Especificações técnicas
Importador:
Número do modelo: E03J e E04J
Tensão de
alimentação:
100 a 240 VCA
Frequência: 50/60 Hz
Consumo de corrente: 8,6 A
Unidades
PowerVault MD3200 Até 12 discos rígidos SAS de 3,5 polegadas (3,0 Gbps
e 6,0 Gbps) com troca a quente (“hot swappable”)
PowerVault MD3220 Até 24 discos rígidos SAS de 2,5 polegadas (3,0 Gbps
e 6,0 Gbps) com troca a quente (“hot swappable”)
Módulos controladores de RAID
Módulos controladores de
RAID
• Um ou dois módulos com troca a quente
(“hot-swappable”) com sensores de temperatura
• 2 GB de cache por controladorIntrodução ao Uso do Sistema 47
Conectores do painel traseiro (por módulo controlador de RAID)
Conectores SAS • Quatro portas de entrada SAS para conectar hosts
• Uma porta de saída SAS (SAS OUT) para expansão
com um gabinete PowerVault série MD1200
adicional
NOTA: Os conectores SAS são compatíveis com
SFF-8088.
Conector serial Um conector mini-DIN de 6 pinos
NOTA: Para uso exclusivo pelo suporte técnico.
Conector Ethernet de
gerenciamento
Uma porta Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T para
gerenciamento fora da banda do gabinete
NOTA: Os endereços IP padrão das portas de
gerenciamento dos módulos controladores de RAID
primário e secundário são 192.168.128.101 e
192.168.128.102, respectivamente. Por padrão, as
portas de gerenciamento são configuradas para DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Se o
controlador não conseguir obter um endereço IP a
partir de um servidor DHCP dentro de um tempo
especificado (cerca de 3 minutos), ele volta a usar o
padrão, isto é, endereçamento IP estático. Para obter
mais informações, consulte o Guia de implementação.
Expansão
PowerVault série MD1200 Suporta um máximo de 192 discos rígidos com
qualquer combinação de gabinetes de expansão
PowerVault MD1200 ou PowerVault MD1220. O
suporte para 192 discos rígidos é um recurso
Premium e precisa ser ativado. O número máximo
de discos rígidos suportados sem o uso do recurso
Premium é 120.
A conectividade de caminho redundante fornece
caminhos redundantes de dados para cada disco
rígido. 48 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Placa backplane
Conectores • 12 ou 24 conectores para discos rígidos SAS
• Dois conectores para módulos de fonte de
alimentação ou ventiladores de resfriamento
• Dois conjuntos de conectores para módulo de
controlador de RAID
• Um conector no painel de controle para os LEDs
frontais e para o botão de identificação do sistema
Sensores Dois sensores de temperatura
LEDs indicadores
Painel frontal • Um LED de duas cores para indicação do status do
sistema
• Dois LEDs de cor única para indicação de
alimentação e de modo do gabinete.
NOTA: O LED de modo do gabinete não é aplicável
à matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série
MD3200.
Apoio do disco rígido • Um LED de cor única para atividade.
• Um LED de duas cores para indicação de status,
por unidade.
Fonte de alimentação ou
ventilador de resfriamento
Três LEDs para indicar o status da fonte de
alimentação, o status de falha da fonte alimentação
ou do ventilador e o status da alimentação CA Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 49
Módulo controlador de RAID Seis LEDs de cor única:
• Um para falha da bateria
• Um para atividade de cache
• Um para falha do controlador
• Um para alimentação do controlador
• Um para identificação do sistema
• Um para atividade da Ethernet de gerenciamento
Seis LEDs de duas cores:
• Quatro para falha ou link de entrada SAS
• Um para falha ou link de saída SAS
• Um para velocidade do link Ethernet de
gerenciamento
Chave
Botão de identificação do
sistema
Localizado no painel de controle frontal. Este botão
é usado para localizar um sistema dentro de um
rack.
Chave de modo do gabinete Localizada na parte frontal do sistema. Esta chave
não é aplicável à matriz de armazenamento
PowerVault série MD3200.
Chave de redefinição da senha Localizada no painel traseiro do módulo controlador
de RAID. Esta chave é usada para redefinir a senha
da matriz de armazenamento.
Fontes de alimentação
Fonte de alimentação CA (por fonte de alimentação)
Potência 600 W
Tensão 100 a 240 VAC (8,6 A a 4,3 A)
Dissipação de calor 100 W
LEDs indicadores (continuação)50 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema
Pico de corrente inicial
máximo
Sob condições de linha típicas e na faixa inteira de
temperatura ambiente de funcionamento do
sistema, o pico de corrente inicial (“inrush”) pode
atingir um máximo de 55 A por fonte de
alimentação por 10 ms ou menos.
Potência disponível para o disco rígido (por slot)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
Potência do módulo controlador de RAID (por slot)
Consumo máximo de potência 100 W
Características físicas
PowerVault MD3200
Altura 8,68 cm
Largura 44,63 cm
Profundidade 60,20 cm
Peso (com a configuração
máxima)
29,30 kg
Peso (em vazio) 8,84 kg
PowerVault MD3220
Altura 8,68 cm
Largura 44,63 cm
Profundidade 54,90 cm
Peso (com a configuração
máxima)
24,22 kg
Peso (em vazio) 8,61 kg
Fontes de alimentação (continuação)Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 51
Requisitos ambientais
NOTA: Para obter informações adicionais sobre os requisitos ambientais para
configurações específicas do sistema, visite o site
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets (em inglês).
Temperatura
De operação 10°C a 35°C com variação máxima de 10°C por hora
NOTA: Para altitudes acima de 900 metros, a
temperatura máxima de operação diminui à razão de
1°C / 300 metros
De armazenamento -40°C a 65°C com variação máxima de temperatura
de 20°C por hora.
Umidade relativa
De operação 20% a 80% (sem condensação) com variação de
umidade máxima de 10% por hora
De armazenamento 5% a 95% (sem condensação)
Vibração máxima
De operação 0,25 g em 3 a 200 Hz por 15 minutos
De armazenamento 0,5 g em 3 a 200 Hz por 15 minutos
Choque máximo
De operação Um pulso de choque no eixo z positivo (um pulso
em cada lado do sistema) de 31 g por 2,6 ms na
orientação operacional
De armazenamento Seis pulsos de choque aplicados consecutivamente
nos eixos x, y e z positivos e negativos (um pulso de
cada lado do sistema) de 71 g por até 2 ms
Altitude
De operação -16 m a 3.048 m
NOTA: Para altitudes acima de 900 m, a temperatura
máxima de operação diminui à razão de 1°C / 300 m
De armazenamento -16 m a 10.600 m
Nível de poluentes transportados pelo ar
Classe G1 conforme definido pela norma ISA-S71.04-198552 Introdução ao Uso do SistemaMatrices de almacenamiento
Dell PowerVault MD3200 y
MD3220
Introducción al sistema
Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04JNotas, precauciones y avisos
NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar
mejor el ordenador.
PRECAUCIÓN: un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN indica la posibilidad de que se
produzcan daños en el hardware o haya pérdida de datos si no se siguen las
instrucciones.
AVISO: un mensaje de AVISO indica la posibilidad de que se produzcan daños
materiales, lesiones personales e incluso la muerte.
____________________
La información contenida en esta publicación puede modificarse sin previo aviso.
© 2011 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados.
Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de estos materiales en cualquier forma sin la
autorización por escrito de Dell Inc.
Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell™, el logotipo de DELL y PowerVault™ son marcas
comerciales de Dell Inc. Microsoft
®
y Windows Server
®
son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales
registradas de Microsoft Corporation en Estados Unidos y/o en otros países. Red Hat
®
y Red Hat
Enterprise Linux
®
son marcas comerciales registradas de Red Hat, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en
otros países. SUSE
®
es una marca comercial registrada de Novell, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en
otros países. VMware
®
es una marca comercial registrada de VMware, Inc. en los Estados Unidos
y/o en otras jurisdicciones.
Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en esta publicación para hacer referencia
a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la
propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos.
Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04J
08/2011 P/N VC9TD Rev. A02Introducción al sistema 55
Antes de comenzar
NOTA: a lo largo del documento, la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell
PowerVault MD3200 hace referencia a Dell PowerVault MD3200 y Dell PowerVault
MD3220. El gabinete de expansión de la serie Dell PowerVault MD1200 hace
referencia a Dell PowerVault MD1200 y Dell PowerVault MD1220.
Antes de configurar la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault
MD3200, debe tener en cuenta una serie de prácticas recomendadas para
garantizar que la matriz de almacenamiento funcione a un rendimiento
máximo y ofrezca completa redundancia (si es necesario).
• Utilice en toda la red un cable Ethernet de categoría 5e (o superior).
• Antes de conectar cables entre el servidor host y la matriz de
almacenamiento, etiquete todos los puertos y conectores.
• Durante los ciclos de encendido de la red, siga siempre los procedimientos
adecuados de encendido y apagado. Asegúrese también de que los
componentes de red críticos se encuentren en circuitos de alimentación
diferentes.
Documentación y soportes adicionales útiles
AVISO: consulte la información sobre normativas y seguridad suministrada con
el sistema. La información sobre la garantía puede estar incluida en este
documento o en un documento aparte.
NOTA: todos los documentos de la serie PowerVault MD3200 están disponibles en
la dirección support.dell.com/manuals.
• En la documentación del bastidor incluida con la solución de bastidor se
describe cómo instalar el sistema en un bastidor.
• En el Manual del propietario se proporciona información acerca de las
funciones del sistema y se describe cómo solucionar problemas del sistema
e instalar o sustituir componentes.
• En la Guía de implementación se proporciona información acerca de la
instalación y configuración del software y hardware.
• En la Guía CLI se proporciona información acerca de cómo utilizar la
interfaz de línea de comandos (CLI) para configurar y administrar la
matriz de almacenamiento.56 Introducción al sistema
• La SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Guía de los programadores de SMI-S)
proporciona información acerca del uso del proveedor de SMI-S y la
programación de SMI-S.
• En los soportes suministrados con el sistema se incluyen documentación y
herramientas para configurar y administrar el sistema, incluidas las del
sistema operativo, el software de administración del sistema, las
actualizaciones del sistema y los componentes del sistema que haya
adquirido con el sistema.
NOTA: compruebe si hay actualizaciones en support.dell.com/manuals y, si
las hay, léalas antes de proceder a la instalación, puesto que a menudo
sustituyen la información contenida en otros documentos.
Sistemas operativos admitidos
• Microsoft Windows Server
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• VMware
NOTA: para obtener la información más actual acerca de todas las versiones de
sistemas operativos compatibles, consulte la Matriz de soporte en la dirección
support.dell.com/manuals.Introducción al sistema 57
Configuraciones comunes
Cableado de los hosts de conexión directa
Servidor 1 Servidor 2
Red corporativa,
pública o privada
Servidor 3 Servidor 4
Matriz de
almacenamiento de
la serie Dell 58 Introducción al sistema
Instalación y configuración
AVISO: antes de realizar el procedimiento siguiente, revise las instrucciones de
seguridad incluidas con el sistema.
Desembalaje del sistema
Desembale el sistema e identifique cada elemento de la lista de embalaje que
se envió con el sistema.
Instalación de los rieles y del sistema en un bastidor
Monte los rieles e instale el sistema en el bastidor siguiendo las instrucciones
de seguridad y de instalación del bastidor incluidas con el sistema.
NOTA: para equilibrar la carga del peso, se recomienda instalar la matriz de
almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200 en la parte inferior del bastidor y
los gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 encima de este.Introducción al sistema 59
Conexión de los cables de alimentación
Asegúrese de que el conmutador de alimentación esté en la posición de
APAGADO antes de conectar los cables de alimentación. Conecte los cables
de alimentación al sistema.
Fijación de los cables de alimentación
Fije los cables al soporte con firmeza con la cinta proporcionada.60 Introducción al sistema
Conecte el otro extremo de los cables de alimentación a una toma eléctrica
con conexión a tierra o a otra fuente de alimentación, como por ejemplo un
Sistema de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) o una Unidad de distribución
de alimentación (PDU). Cada suministro de energía debe estar conectado a
un circuito de alimentación diferente.
Cableado del gabinete de expansión
Encendido del gabinete
Matriz de
almacenamiento de
la serie Dell
PowerVault MD3200
Gabinete 1 de
expansión de la serie
PowerVault MD1200
(opcional)
Gabinete 2 de
expansión de la serie
PowerVault MD1200
(opcional)Introducción al sistema 61
Encienda los componentes en el orden siguiente :
1 Los gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (si es
necesario)
NOTA: antes de encender la matriz de almacenamiento, asegúrese de que el
LED de estado del gabinete de expansión está iluminado en azul.
2 Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200
NOTA: antes de encender los servidores host, asegúrese de que el LED de
estado de la matriz de almacenamiento está iluminado en azul.
3 Servidores host
Instalación del bisel
Instale el bisel (opcional).
Instalación del software MD Storage
NOTA: para obtener instrucciones detalladas sobre la instalación del software MD
Storage, la configuración del gabinete y las tareas posteriores a la instalación,
consulte la Guía de implementación.
La aplicación MD Storage Manager configura, administra y supervisa la
matriz de almacenamiento. Instalación del software MD Storage:
1 Inserte el soporte de recursos de la serie MD.62 Introducción al sistema
Dependiendo del sistema operativo, el instalador se puede iniciar
automáticamente. Si el instalador no se inicia automáticamente, vaya al
directorio raíz del soporte de instalación (o imagen del instalador
descargado) y ejecute el archivo md_launcher.exe. Para sistemas basados
en Linux, vaya a la raíz del soporte de recursos y ejecute el archivo autorun.
NOTA: de manera predeterminada, el sistema operativo Red Hat Enterprise
Linux monta el soporte de recursos con la opción noexec mount la cual no
permite ejecutar archivos ejecutables. Para cambiar esta configuración,
consulte el archivo Readme (Léame) en el directorio raíz del soporte de
instalación.
2 Seleccione Install MD Storage Software (Instalar el software MD
Storage).
3 Lea y acepte el contrato de licencia.
4 Seleccione una de las siguientes opciones de instalación del menú
desplegable Install Set (Conjunto de instalación):
• Full (recommended) (Total [recomendado]): instala el software MD
Storage Manager (cliente), el agente de almacenamiento basado en
host, el controlador multirruta y los proveedores de hardware.
• Host Only (Solamente host): instala el agente de almacenamiento
basado en host y los controladores multirruta.
• Management (Administración): instala el software de administración
y los proveedores de hardware.
• Custom (Personalizado): permite seleccionar componentes
específicos.
5 Seleccione los modelos de matrices de almacenamientos MD que está
configurando para que sirvan como almacenamiento de datos para este
servidor host.
6 Elija si desea iniciar el servicio de monitor de eventos automática o
manualmente al reiniciar el servidor host
NOTA: esta opción se aplica solo para la instalación del software cliente de
Windows.
7 Confirme la ubicación de la instalación y haga clic en Install (Instalar).
8 Si se le solicita, reinicie el servidor host tras completar la instalación.
9 Inicie MD Storage Manager y detecte las matrices.Introducción al sistema 63
10 Si se aplica, active cualquiera de las funciones premium adquiridas con la
matriz de almacenamiento. Si ha adquirido una función premium,
consulte la tarjeta de activación impresa enviada con la matriz de
almacenamiento.
NOTA: el instalador de MD Storage Manager instala automáticamente los
controladores, el firmware y las revisiones/correcciones del sistema operativo
necesarios para que funcione la matriz de almacenamiento. Estos controladores y
el firmware se encuentran disponibles en support.dell.com. Además, consulte la
Support Matrix (Matriz de compatibilidad) en support.dell.com/manuals para
obtener configuraciones adicionales o software necesarios para la matriz de
almacenamiento específica
Localización de la etiqueta de servicio
El sistema se identifica mediante un Código de servicio rápido y un número
de Etiqueta de servicio únicos. El código de servicio rápido y la etiqueta de
servicio se encuentran en la parte anterior del sistema y también en la parte
posterior, junto a los módulos de la controladora RAID. Dell utiliza esta
información para dirigir las llamadas de asistencia al personal
correspondiente.64 Introducción al sistema
Información de la NOM (sólo para México)
La información que se proporciona a continuación aparece en el dispositivo
descrito en este documento en cumplimiento con los requisitos de la Norma
Oficial Mexicana (NOM):
Especificaciones técnicas
Importador:
Número de modelo: E03J y E04J
Voltaje de
alimentación:
100-240 VCA
Frecuencia: 50 Hz/60 Hz
Consumo eléctrico: 8,6 A
Unidades
PowerVault MD3200 Hasta doce unidades de disco duro de intercambio
directo SAS de 3,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y 6,0 Gbps)
PowerVault MD3220 Hasta veinticuatro unidades de disco duro de
intercambio directo SAS de 2,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y
6,0 Gbps)
Módulos de la controladora RAID
Módulos de la controladora
RAID
• Uno o dos módulos de intercambio directo con
sensores de temperatura
• 2 GB de caché por controladora
Conectores del panel posterior (por módulo de controladora RAID)
Conectores SAS • Cuatro puertos de entrada SAS para conectar hosts
• Un puerto de salida SAS para añadir un gabinete
de la serie PowerVault MD1200 adicional
NOTA: los conectores SAS son compatibles con
SFF-8088.Introducción al sistema 65
Conector serie Un conector miniDIN de 6 patas
NOTA: sólo para asistencia técnica.
Conector Ethernet de
administración
Un puerto Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T para la
administración fuera de banda del gabinete
NOTA: las direcciones IP de puerto de administración
predeterminadas para los módulos de la controladora
RAID primarios y secundarios son 192.168.128.101 y
192.168.128.102, respectivamente. De manera
predeterminada, los puertos de administración se
configuran en el Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). Si la controladora no es capaz de obtener una
configuración de dirección IP de un servidor DHCP en
un tiempo de espera determinado (aproximadamente 3
minutos), vuelve de manera predeterminada al
direccionamiento IP estático. Para obtener más
información, consulte la Guía de implementación.
Expansión
PowerVault serie MD1200 Admite un máximo de 192 unidades de disco duro
con cualquier combinación de gabinetes de
expansión PowerVault MD1200 o PowerVault
MD1220. El soporte para 192 unidades de disco
duro es una función Premium y requiere activación.
La cantidad máxima de discos duros admitidos sin
utilizar la función Premium es 120.
La conectividad de la ruta de acceso redundante
proporciona rutas de acceso redundantes a cada
unidad de disco duro.
Placa de plano posterior
Conectores • 12 ó 24 conectores de unidad de disco duro SAS
• Dos conectores para módulos de suministro de
energía/ventilador de enfriamiento
• Dos conjuntos de conectores del módulo de
controladora RAID
• Un conector del panel de control para LED
anteriores y un botón de identificación del sistema
Sensores Dos sensores de temperatura
Conectores del panel posterior (por módulo de controladora RAID) (continuación)66 Introducción al sistema
Indicadores LED
Panel anterior • Un indicador LED de dos colores para el estado del
sistema
• Dos indicadores LED de un solo color para la
alimentación y el modo gabinete
NOTA: el LED del modo gabinete no es aplicable a
la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault
MD3200.
Portaunidades de disco duro • Un indicador LED de un solo color de actividad
• Un indicador LED de dos colores de estado por
disco
Suministro de
energía/ventilador de
enfriamiento
Tres indicadores LED de estado para el estado del
suministro de energía, los fallos del suministro de
energía/ventilador y el estado de CA
Módulo de la controladora
RAID
Seis LED de un solo color:
• Uno de batería defectuosa
• Uno de caché activa
• Uno de controladora defectuosa
• Uno de alimentación de controladora
• Uno de identificación del sistema
• Uno de actividad Ethernet de administración
Seis LED de dos colores:
• Cuatro de fallo o enlace de entrada SAS
• Uno de fallo o enlace de salida de SAS
• Uno de velocidad del enlace Ethernet de
administraciónIntroducción al sistema 67
Conmutador
Botón de identificación del
sistema
Ubicado en el panel de control anterior. Este botón
se usa para ubicar un sistema en un bastidor.
Conmutador de modo de
alojamiento
Situado en la parte anterior del sistema.
Este conmutador no se aplica a la matriz de
almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200.
Conmutador de
restablecimiento de contraseña
Situado en el panel posterior del módulo de
controladora RAID. Este conmutador se utiliza para
restablecer la contraseña de la matriz de
almacenamiento.
Suministros de energía
Fuente de alimentación de CA (por fuente de alimentación)
Potencia 600 W
Voltaje 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A)
Disipación de calor 100 W
Corriente de conexión
máxima
En condiciones normales de línea y en todo el rango
operativo ambiente del sistema, la irrupción de
corriente puede alcanzar un máximo de 55 A por
cada suministro de energía durante 10 ms o menos.
Alimentación de la unidad de disco duro disponible (por ranura)
PowerVault MD3200 25 W
PowerVault MD3220 12 W
Alimentación del módulo de controladora RAID (por ranura)
Consumo de energía máximo 100 W
Características físicas
PowerVault MD3200
Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas)
Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas)
Profundidad 60,20 cm (23,70 pulgadas)68 Introducción al sistema
Peso (configuración máxima) 29,30 kg (64,6 libras)
Peso (vacío) 8,84 kg (19,5 libras)
PowerVault MD3220
Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas)
Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas)
Profundidad 54,90 cm (21,61 pulgadas)
Peso (configuración máxima) 24,22 kg (53,4 lbs)
Peso (vacío) 8,61 kg (19 lbs)
Especificaciones medioambientales
NOTA: para obtener información adicional acerca de medidas ambientales relativas a
configuraciones del sistema específicas, vaya a
www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets.
Temperatura
En funcionamiento De 10 °C a 35 °C (de 50 °F a 95 °F) con una
gradación de temperatura máxima de 10 °C por hora
NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m, la
temperatura máxima de funcionamiento se reduce
1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies).
Almacenamiento De -40 °C a 65 °C (de -40 °F a 149 °F) con una
gradación de temperatura máxima de 20 °C
por hora.
Humedad relativa
En funcionamiento Del 20% al 80% (sin condensación) con una
gradación de humedad máxima del 10% por hora
Almacenamiento Del 5% al 95% (sin condensación)
Vibración máxima
En funcionamiento De 0,25 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos
Almacenamiento De 0.5 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos
Impacto máximo
Características físicas (continuación)Introducción al sistema 69
En funcionamiento Un impulso de descarga en el sentido positivo del eje
z (un impulso en cada lado del sistema) de 31 G
durante 2,6 ms en la orientación de funcionamiento
Almacenamiento Seis impulsos de descarga ejecutados
consecutivamente en los ejes positivos y negativos x,
y y z (un impulso en cada lado del sistema) de 71 G
durante un máximo de 2 ms
Altitud
En funcionamiento De –16 m a 3.048 m (de –50 pies a 10.000 pies)
NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m (2950 pies),
la temperatura de funcionamiento máxima se reduce
1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies).
Almacenamiento De –16 m a 10.600 m (de –50 pies a 35.000 pies)
Nivel de contaminación atmosférica
Clase G1 de acuerdo con ISA-S71.04-1985
Especificaciones medioambientales (continuación)70 Introducción al sistemawww.dell.com | support.dell.com
Printed in Brazil.
Imprimé au Brésil.
Impresso no Brasil.
Impreso en Brasil.www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Printed in the U.S.A.
Imprimé aux U.S.A.
Impresso nos EUA.
Impreso en los EE.UU.
Déballage de votre imprimante multifonction
1. Choisissez un emplacement pour votre imprimante.
l Ménagez un espace suffisant pour permettre l'ouverture du bac, des capots, des portes et des différentes options. Il est également important de laisser
un espace suffisant autour de l'imprimante pour permettre une ventilation adéquate.
l Choisissez un environnement adéquat :
l Une surface solide et plane
l Loin de l'air rejeté par les climatiseurs, les radiateurs et les ventilateurs
l Protégé du soleil, d'une humidité excessive ou de variations de température trop importantes
l L'endroit doit être propre, sec et non poussiéreux
2. Assurez-vous que les articles suivants sont dans la boîte avec l'imprimante laser multi-fonctions Dell™ 1815dn. S'il manque un article, contactez Dell :
a. L'aspect du câble d'alimentation électrique et du câble de téléphone peut différer en fonction des spécifications en vigueur dans votre pays.
b. Le CD Pilotes et Utilitaires contient des pilotes d'impression Dell, des pilotes de numérisation, un utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante, un Set
IP, un pilote Macintosh, un pilote Linux, les utilitaires Dell Toner Management System™, Dell ScanCenter™ et PaperPort
®, et le Guide l'utilisateur
en version HTML.
c. Cet article n'est fourni que dans certains pays.
3. Conservez le carton et les matériaux d'emballage pour le cas où l'imprimante doit être remballée.
4. Retirez les bandes adhésives situées sur le dessus, à l'arrière et sur les côtés de l'imprimante.
ATTENTION : Au moins deux personnes sont nécessaires pour soulever l'imprimante en toute sécurité.
REMARQUE : Conservez l'imprimante dans son emballage tant que vous n'êtes pas prêt à l'installer.
cartouche de toner cordon d'alimentation
a
manuel du propriétaire
cordon de ligne téléphonique
CD Pilotes et Utilitaires
b
boîtier de terminaison
c
schéma de montage guide de référence rapide (facultatif)
REMARQUE : Utilisez le câble de téléphone fourni avec votre imprimante. Si vous choisissez d'utiliser un autre câble, utilisez alors un câble calibré AWG n°
26 ou inférieur dont la longueur ne dépasse pas 2,50 m.
REMARQUE : Le cordon d'alimentation électrique doit être branché sur une prise reliée à la terre.5. Retirez l'étiquette du module de numérisation en tirant dessus avec précaution. Le bouton de déverrouillage du scanner se met automatiquement en
position déverrouillée.
6. Un espace situé sur le panneau de commande a été aménagé pour maintenir le guide de référence rapide (facultatif) afin d'y accéder facilement à tout
moment. Retirez la bande adhésive placée au dos du guide de référence rapide (facultatif).
7. Fixez le guide de référence rapide (facultatif) sur l'espace prévu sur le panneau de commande.
A propos de votre imprimante multifonction
Il s'agit des composants principaux de votre imprimante. Les illustrations suivantes présentent le Dell Laser MFP 1815dn avec un bac optionnel 2 :
Vue avant
REMARQUE : Pour vérifier que le scanner est déverrouillé, ouvrez le capot du scanner et regardez au travers de la vitre d'exposition pour vous
assurer que le verrou bleu est bien dans la position déverrouillée ( ). Si ce n'est pas le cas, attrapez-le sous le panneau de commande, puis tirezle vers l'avant.
REMARQUE : Si vous déplacez l'imprimante ou si vous n'avez pas l'intention de l'utiliser pendant une période prolongée, déplacez le taquet VERS
L'ARRIERE pour la mettre dans la position verrouillée, comme indiqué sur l'illustration.
Si vous voulez numériser ou copier un document, le taquet doit être en position déverrouillée.Vue arrière
a. Si la communication téléphonique est en mode série dans votre pays (comme en Allemagne, Suède, Danemark, Autriche, Belgique, Italie, France et Suisse),
vous devez retirer la fiche du connecteur de téléphone et insérer le boîtier de terminaison fourni.
b. Vous pouvez acheter et installer un dispositif de verrouillage interdisant le retrait de la carte mémoire installée.
Fonctions des touches du panneau de commande
Touches communes
Clavier numérique
Appuyez sur : Pour :
Retourner au niveau supérieur du menu.
Faire défiler jusqu'aux options disponibles.
Confirmer la sélection sur l'écran.
Démarrer une tâche.
Arrêter une opération à tout moment ou retourner au menu principal.
Appuyez sur : Pour :Polices
L'imprimante laser Dell reconnaît les polices suivantes :
Installation de la cartouche d'encre
1. Ouvrez le capot avant.
2. Retirez la cartouche de toner de son emballage et secouez-la plusieurs fois de chaque côté pour répartir l'encre uniformément à l'intérieur de celle-ci.
Composer/entrer un numéro ou entrer des caractères alphanumérique.
Mettre en mémoire des numéros de télécopie fréquemment utilisés ou rechercher des
numéros de télécopie ou des adresses e-mail enregistrées.
Cette touche permet également d'imprimer la liste des entrées du répertoire.
Insérer une pause dans un numéro de télécopie en mode édition.
ATTENTION : Évitez d'exposer la cartouche d'encre à la lumière plus de 2 ou 3 minutes. 3. En maintenant la cartouche de toner par la poignée, faite la glisser dans l'imprimante jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit fermement en place.
4. Fermez le capot avant.
Chargement du papier
Mettez jusqu'à 250 feuilles de papier ordinaire (75 g/m2
) dans le bac d'alimentation papier.
Chargement du papier :
1. Ouvrez le bac d'alimentation papier et retirez-le de l'imprimante.
REMARQUE : Si vous tachez vos vêtements avec de l'encre, éliminez-la avec un chiffon sec et lavez vos vêtements à l'eau froide. L'eau chaude fixe
l'encre sur le tissu.
ATTENTION : Evitez de toucher la partie inférieure verte de la cartouche d'encre. Utilisez la poignée de la cartouche pour éviter de toucher
la zone en question.
REMARQUE : Définissez le type et le format de papier une fois celui-ci chargé dans le bac d'alimentation. Reportez-vous aux sections "Configuration du
type de papier" et "Configuration du format de papier" pour plus d'informations sur le papier à utiliser pour la copie et la télécopie, ou à la section
"Onglet Papier" pour l'impression avec le PC.2. Si vous chargez un papier plus long que le format standard (Letter ou A4), par exemple un papier Legal, appuyez pour débloquer le verrouillage du
guide, puis faites glisser le guide-papier complètement vers l'extérieur pour donner toute sa longueur au bac d'alimentation papier.
3. Déramez les feuilles pour séparer les pages, puis ventilez-les. Evitez le plier ou de froisser le support d'impression. Alignez les bords sur une surface
plane.
4. Insérez la pile de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier en plaçant le côté à imprimer, face vers le bas.
5. Ne dépassez pas la hauteur de papier maximale indiquée sur les deux côtés intérieurs du bac.
6. Faites glisser le guide de longueur du papier jusqu'à ce qu'il touche légèrement l'extrémité de la pile de papier.
Pour les feuilles dont le format est plus petit que le format Letter, réglez le guide de longueur avant de manière à le positionner contre la pile de papier.
REMARQUE : Faute de quoi vous risqueriez de créer des bourrages.7. Saisissez le guide-papier, comme indiqué, et amenez-le au contact de la pile de papier sans pression excessive.
8. Insérez et poussez le bac d'alimentation papier dans l'imprimante.
9. Définissez le type et le format de papier. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du type de papier"et à la "Configuration du format de papier".
Connexions
Accès à la ligne téléphonique
1. Branchez une extrémité du câble de téléphone dans la prise de ligne du téléphone (Line) et l'autre dans une prise murale active.
Pour connecter un téléphone et/ou un répondeur téléphonique à votre imprimante, retirez la fiche de la prise du poste téléphonique (EXT) ( ) et
branchez le téléphone ou le répondeur téléphonique dans la prise du poste téléphonique (EXT).
Si votre imprimante n'est pas bloquée avec la fiche, branchez directement le téléphone ou le répondeur téléphonique dans la prise du poste
téléphonique (EXT) ( ).
REMARQUE : Un mauvais réglage du guide-papier peut entraîner des bourrages papier.
REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section "Utilisation du répondeur téléphonique" ou "Utilisation d'un modem d'ordinateur".Si la communication téléphonique est en mode série dans votre pays (comme en Allemagne, Suède, Danemark, Autriche, Belgique, Italie, France et Suisse),
retirez la fiche du connecteur de la prise du poste téléphonique (EXT) ( ) et insérez le boîtier de terminaison fourni.
Branchement du câble d'imprimante
Branchement de l'imprimante localement
Une imprimante locale est une imprimante branchée à votre ordinateur à l'aide d'un câble USB. Si votre imprimante est reliée à un réseau et non à votre
ordinateur, ignorez cette étape et passez à la section "Connexion de l'imprimante au réseau".
Pour connecter l'imprimante à un ordinateur :
1. Assurez-vous que l'imprimante, l'ordinateur et tout autre périphérique raccordé sont éteints et débranchés.
2. Connectez un câble USB au port USB de votre imprimante.
3. Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble dans le port USB disponible sur l'ordinateur, et non pas sur le clavier USB.
Connexion de l'imprimante au réseau
1. Assurez-vous que l'imprimante, l'ordinateur et tout autre périphérique raccordé sont éteints et débranchés.
2. Branchez une extrémité d'un câble réseau standard à paire torsadée non blindée (UTP) de catégorie 5 à un terminal multipoint ou un concentrateur
multiport du LAN (réseau local) et l'autre extrémité au port réseau Ethernet situé à l'arrière de l'imprimante. L'imprimante s'adapte automatiquement à
la vitesse du réseau.
REMARQUE : Les câbles USB sont vendus séparément. Contactez Dell pour acheter un câble USB.
REMARQUE : Un câble certifié USB est nécessaire pour connecter l'imprimante au port USB de l'ordinateur. Vous devrez faire l'acquisition d'un câble USB
2.0 d'environ 3 m de long.Mise sous tension de l'imprimante multifonction
Pour mettre l'imprimante sous tension :
1. Branchez une extrémité du câble d'alimentation électrique dans la prise d'alimentation située à l'arrière de l'imprimante et l'autre dans une prise secteur
reliée à la terre.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton marche/arrêt pour mettre l'imprimante sous tension. PRECHAUFFAGE apparaît sur l'affichage indiquant que l'imprimante est
maintenant en marche.
Pour afficher le texte de votre écran dans une autre langue, voir "Changement de la langue d'affichage".
Dell Laser MFP 1815dn - Menu Fonctions
REMARQUE : Une fois l'imprimante installée, vous devez configurer les paramètres réseau sur le panneau de commande. Reportez-vous à la
"Impression d'une page de configuration réseau".
ATTENTION : La zone de chauffe à l'arrière de la partie intérieure de votre imprimante devient chaude lorsque l'imprimante est mise sous
tension.
ATTENTION : En accédant à cette partie, faites attention aux zones très chaudes.
ATTENTION : Ne démontez jamais l'imprimante lorsqu'elle est sous tension. Si vous procédez ainsi, vous risquez de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
1. CONFIG PAPIER 2. REGL DEF COPIE 3. REGL. DEF. FAX
FORMAT PAPIER
TYPE PAPIER
NB DE COPIES
ZOOM
CONTRASTE
QUALITE
SELECT BAC
RECTO-VERSO
CONTRASTE
RESOLUTION
NB. SONNERIES
MODE RECEPTION
RECOMP. DIFF.
TENT. RECOMP.
CONF. EMISSION
JOURNAL AUTO
REDUCTION AUTO
EFFACER TAILLE
CODE RECEPTION
MODE DRPD
RECTO-VERSO
4. REGL. DEF NUM. 5. FONCT AV. FAX 6. REPERTOIRE
TAILLE IMAGE
FORMAT FICHIER
RESOLUTION
TEMP. NUM RES
RENVOI EMISS.
RECEPT ENVOIS
APPEL ECO
CFG FAX INDES.
RECEP PROTEGEE
PREFIXE RECOMP
DONNEES RECEPT
MODE ECM
VITESSE MODEM
DESACT. RECEP.
ANNUAIRE
E-MAIL1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance le paramètre désiré.
3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) ou sélectionnez le paramètre affiché.
Changement de la langue d'affichage
Pour modifier la langue d'affichage du panneau de commande, procédez comme suit :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance LANGUE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher la langue souhaitée.
Les langues disponibles sont les suivantes : anglais, français, allemand, italien, espagnol, tchèque, portugais ibérique, néerlandais, polonais, norvégien,
suédois, finnois, danois et russe.
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie.
6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Choix Pays
Pour modifier le pays qui s'affiche sur le panneau de commande, procédez comme suit :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CHOIX PAYS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le pays de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
7. JOURNAUX 8. CONFIG E-MAIL 9. CONFIG RESEAU
ANNUAIRE
JOURN ENVOIS
JOURN RECEPT.
DONNEES SYST
TRAV. PROGRAM.
CONF. EMISSION
LISTE REC SEL.
JOURNAL NUMER.
RAPPORT E-MAIL
SERVEUR SMTP
CONFIG. UTIL.
AUTO-ENVOI
DESTIN. DEFAUT
OBJET DEFAUT
TRANSF. E-MAIL
CONTROLE ACCES
DEFINIR LE CODE
CONFIGURATION
EFFACER REGL.
IMPR DONN. SYS
10. SON/VOLUME 11. CONFIG MACHINE 12. MAINTENANCE
HAUT-PARLEUR
SONNERIE
TOUCHE
TONAL. ALARME
ID MACHINE
DATE & HEURE
MODE HORLOGE
LANGUE
ECO ENERGIE
TEMPORISATION
ECO ENERG CCD
ECO TONER
CHOIX PAYS
ACCES GLOBAL
CONFIG IMPORT.
CONFIG EXPORT.
NETT. TAMBOUR
EFFACER REGL.Mode Économie d'encre
Le mode Économie d'encre permet à votre imprimante d'utiliser moins d'encre par page. Avec ce mode, la durée de vie de la cartouche peut être rallongée par
rapport au mode normal, mais la qualité d'impression est moins bonne.
Pour activer le mode Économie d'encre :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ECO TONER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ACTIVE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Mode veille
Le mode veille permet à votre imprimante de réduire sa consommation électrique, si vous ne l'utilisez pas. Vous pouvez activer ce mode en sélectionnant le
temps d'attente après une impression pour que l'imprimante passe en mode de consommation d'énergie réduite.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ECO ENERGIE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher ACTIVE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le paramétrage de temps de votre choix.
Vous pouvez choisir entre 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 et 120 (minutes).
6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie.
7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Mode Économie d'énergie CCD (Charge-Coupled Device)
La lampe de numérisation située sous la vitre d'exposition s'éteint automatiquement si elle n'est pas utilisée pendant une période prédéfinie afin de réduire la
consommation électrique et de prolonger la durée de vie de la lampe. La lampe s'allume automatiquement et le cycle de préchauffage démarre dès qu'une
touche quelconque est activée, que le chargeur de document est ouvert ou qu'un document est détecté dans le chargeur automatique.
Vous pouvez sélectionner le temps mis par la lampe de numérisation à passer en mode Économie d'énergie après une tâche de numérisation.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ECO ENERG CCD, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le paramétrage de temps de votre choix.
Les options disponibles sont 30, 60 et 120 (minutes).
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie.
6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
REMARQUE : En mode d'impression PC, vous pouvez aussi activer ou désactiver le mode Économie d'encre dans les propriétés de l'imprimante.
Reportez-vous à la "Onglet Graphiques".Réglage du délai de réinitialisation
Vous pouvez définir le temps que l'imprimante doit attendre avant de restaurer les paramètres par défaut de copie ou de télécopie, si aucune copie ou télécopie
n'est lancée après avoir modifié les paramètres sur le panneau de commande.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TEMPORISATION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher la valeur de temporisation de votre choix.
Vous avez le choix entre 15, 30, 60 et 180 (secondes). Si vous sélectionnez DESACTIVE, vous spécifiez que l'imprimante ne doit pas restaurer les
paramètres par défaut tant que vous n'avez pas appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour lancer la copie ou la télécopie ou sur Annuler ( ) pour annuler.
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie.
6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Protection de votre imprimante par un code
Vous pouvez attribuer un code à votre imprimante pour empêcher tout utilisateur non autorisé de l'utiliser.
Attribution d'un code
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ACCES GLOBAL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGLAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Entrez un code de quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Activation de la fonction de protection
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ACCES GLOBAL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour accéder à PROTEGER.
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher ACTIVE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.Copie
Chargement du papier
Que vous travailliez en mode impression, copie ou télécopie, les instructions relatives au chargement du papier sont identiques. Pour plus d'informations,
reportez-vous à la section "Chargement du papier" pour le chargement du papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier et à la section "Utilisation du passe copie"
pour le chargement du papier dans le passe copie.
Sélection du bac d'alimentation
Après avoir chargé le support, sélectionnez le bac d'alimentation que vous allez utiliser.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance SELECT BAC, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le bac d'alimentation papier de votre choix.
Vous pouvez choisir entre le BAC 1, BAC 2 (option) et SPECIAL. Si vous n'installez pas le bac optionnel 2, l'option de menu BAC 2 (option) peut ne pas
apparaître sur l'écran.
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie.
5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Préparation d'un document
Vous pouvez utiliser la vitre d'exposition ou le chargeur automatique pour charger un document original en copie, en numérisation et pour un envoi par
télécopie. Si vous optez pour le chargeur automatique, vous pouvez introduire des documents de jusqu'à 50 feuilles de papier 75 g/m2
pour une tâche. En
revanche, si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, le chargement s'effectue feuille par feuille.
Lorsque vous utilisez le chargeur :
l Ne chargez pas de documents de format inférieur à 142 x 148 mm ou supérieur à 216 x 356 mm.
l Ne chargez pas les types de document suivants :
Papier carbone ou papier autocopiant
Papier couché
Papier bible ou trop fin
Papier froissé ou plié
Papier ondulé ou en rouleau
Chargement du papier Paramétrage des options de copie
Sélection du bac d'alimentation Utilisation des fonctions de copie spéciales
Préparation d'un document Impression de copies en mode resto-verso
Chargement d'un document original Modification des réglages par défaut
Réalisation de copies
REMARQUE : Vous obtiendrez une meilleure qualité de numérisation, notamment pour des images en couleur ou en nuances de gris, en préférant la
vitre d'exposition au chargeur automatique.Papier déchiré
l Retirez tout trombone ou agrafe avant de charger des documents.
l Si vous avez utilisé de la colle ou du correcteur ou si vous avez écrit à l'encre, vérifiez que le papier est entièrement sec avant de charger les
documents.
l Ne chargez pas de documents de tailles ou de grammages différents les uns des autres.
l Ne chargez pas de documents reliés, de livrets, de transparents ou de documents non standard.
Chargement d'un document original
Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur automatique ou la vitre d'exposition pour charger un document original. Si vous utilisez le chargeur automatique, vous pouvez
insérer jusqu'à 50 feuilles de papier 75 g/m2
à la fois. En revanche, si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, le chargement s'effectue feuille par feuille.
Pour charger le document dans le chargeur automatique, procédez comme suit :
1. Placez le ou les documents face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique, le bord supérieur en premier.
2. Réglez les guides de largeur de document à la taille du document. Assurez-vous que le bord droit du document est aligné sur la marque de format de
papier présente sur le chargeur automatique.
Pour des consignes détaillées de préparation du document original, reportez-vous à la "Préparation d'un document".
Pour charger le document sur la vitre d'exposition, procédez comme suit :
1. Ouvrez le capot.
REMARQUE : Avant de numériser un document à partir de la vitre d'exposition, vérifiez que le chargeur automatique ne contient aucun document. Tout
document détecté dans le chargeur automatique est prioritaire sur le document posé sur la vitre d'exposition.
REMARQUE : Vous obtiendrez une meilleure qualité de numérisation, notamment pour des images en couleur ou en nuances de gris, en préférant la
vitre d'exposition au chargeur automatique.2. Placez le document face vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition en l'alignant avec le guide de repérage situé à l'angle supérieur gauche de la vitre.
Pour des consignes détaillées de préparation du document original, reportez-vous à la "Préparation d'un document".
3. Fermez le couvercle.
Réalisation de copies
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, leur format, le contraste et la qualité de l'image, en sélectionnant le menu de
copie ou en utilisant les boutons du panneau de commande. Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie".
Pour effacer les paramètres, utilisez le bouton Annuler ( ).
3. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez utiliser des fonctions de copie spéciales, comme l'ajustement automatique, le clone, le poster ou la copie d'identité en vous
reportant à la section "Utilisation des fonctions de copie spéciales".
4. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie. L'écran affiche la progression du travail en cours.
REMARQUE : Lorsque vous numérisez une page d'un livre ou d'un magazine, ouvrez complètement le chargeur, puis refermez-le. Si l'épaisseur du
livre ou du magazine est supérieure à 30 mm, copiez avec le capot ouvert.
REMARQUE : Refermez toujours le chargeur de documents pour obtenir une qualité d'impression optimale et réduire la consommation d'encre.
REMARQUE : Il n'est pas nécessaire d'être connecté à un ordinateur pour effectuer une copie de documents.
REMARQUE : Toute impureté présente sur la vitre du chargeur automatique ou sur la vitre d'exposition peuvent se retrouver sur le document imprimé
sous la forme de lignes noires verticales ou de point noirs. Pour obtenir de meilleurs résultats, nettoyez la vitre du chargeur de document ou la vitre
d'exposition avant usage. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage du scanner".
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez annuler la tâche en cours à tout moment. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour arrêter la copie.Paramétrage des options de copie
Les menus Copie du panneau de commande vous permettent de personnaliser toutes les options de copie de base : nombre de copies, format des copies,
contraste et qualité de l'image. Définissez les options suivantes pour la tâche de copie en cours avant d'appuyer sur Départ ( ) pour effectuer les copies.
Nombre de copies
Vous pouvez sélectionner un nombre de copie compris entre 1 et 199.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à NB DE COPIES.
3. Entrez la valeur de votre choix à l'aide du clavier numérique.
Réduction ou agrandissement
Vous pouvez réduire ou agrandir la taille d'une image copiée, de 25 % à 400 % avec des documents originaux disposés sur la vitre d'exposition ou de 25 % à
100 % avec des documents placés dans le chargeur automatique. Veuillez noter que les facteurs de zoom disponibles diffèrent selon que vous utilisez la vitre
d'exposition ou le chargeur automatique de documents.
Pour sélectionner des tailles de copie prédéfinies :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ZOOM, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour trouver le paramètre de taille de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Pour définir avec précision le format de copie :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ZOOM, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher AUTRE (25-400) (à partir du verre inactinique) ou AUTRE (25-100) (à partir de l'ADF)
et appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Entrez la valeur de votre choix à l'aide du clavier numérique.
Contraste
Réglez le contraste pour que la copie soit plus claire ou plus foncée que l'original.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONTRASTE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour régler le contraste.
Qualité
Les réglages Qualité vous permettent d'améliorer la qualité de l'image en sélectionnant le type de document pour la tâche de copie en cours.
REMARQUE : Si vous appuyez sur Annuler ( ) alors que vous définissez les options de copie, vous risquez d'annuler toutes les options que vous avez
définies pour la tâche de copie en cours et de les voir revenir à leur valeurs par défaut. Les réglages reprendront leurs valeurs par défaut une fois la
copie terminée.
REMARQUE : Lors d'une réduction d'échelle, des lignes noires peuvent apparaître dans la partie inférieure de votre copie.1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance QUALITE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le mode de qualité de l'image, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
l TEXTE : Adapté aux documents contenant des détails, tels que de petits caractères.
l TEXTE & PHOTO : Adapté aux documents contenant à la fois du texte et des photos ou des niveaux de gris.
l PHOTO : Adapté aux documents contenant des photos ou des niveaux de gris.
Utilisation des fonctions de copie spéciales
Le menu MISE EN PAGE vous permet d'accéder aux fonctions de copie suivantes :
l DESACTIVE : Imprime en mode normal.
l ID COPIE : Permet d'imprimer un document original de deux pages sur une seule feuille. Reportez-vous à la "Copie d'identité".
l AUTO-AJUST. : Réduit ou agrandit automatiquement l'image originale pour l'ajuster au format du papier actuellement chargé dans l'imprimante.
Reportez-vous à la "Ajustement automatique".
l AFFICHE : Permet d'imprimer une image sur 9 feuilles (3 x 3). Il suffit ensuite de coller ces feuilles ensemble pour former un poster. Reportez-vous à la
"Copie de type Affiche".
l CLONE : Permet de reproduire plusieurs copies d'un original sur une seule page. Le nombre d'images est automatiquement déterminé en fonction de
l'image d'origine et du format du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Clone".
Copie d'identité
Pour effectuer une copie d'identité, procédez comme suit :
1. Placez le document à copier sur la vitre d'exposition, puis refermez le chargeur.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MISE EN PAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ID COPIE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Si nécessaire, personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, le contraste et la qualité de l'image à l'aide des menus Copie.
Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie".
6. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie.
Votre imprimante commence par numériser le côté recto.
7. Lorsque PRESENTER VERSO apparaît sur la ligne du bas, soulevez le couvercle du chargeur de document, puis retournez le document en plaçant le
côté verso face vers le bas. Fermez le couvercle.
8. Appuyez à nouveau sur Départ ( ).
REMARQUE : Certaines fonctions peuvent ne pas être accessibles selon le mode de chargement utilisé : vitre d'exposition ou chargeur automatique.
Si vous utilisez cette fonction pour une copie, l'imprimante imprime un côté sur la moitié supérieure du papier et l'autre côté sur la moitié
inférieure sans réduire le format de l'original. Cette fonction est particulièrement adaptée aux documents de format réduit, tels que les
cartes de visite.
Si le document original est plus grand que la zone imprimable, certaines parties peuvent ne pas être imprimées.
Cette fonction de copie spéciale ne s'applique qu'aux documents placés sur la vitre d'exposition. Si un document est détecté dans le chargeur
automatique, la fonction de copie d'identité ne fonctionne pas.
REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas régler le format de copie à l'aide du menu ZOOM pour la copie d'identité.
REMARQUE : Si vous appuyez sur le bouton Annuler ( ) ou si vous n'appuyez sur aucun bouton dans les 30 secondes, l'imprimante annule la tâche
de copie et retourne au mode veille.Ajustement automatique
Copie de type Affiche
Clone
Cette fonction de copie spéciale ne s'applique qu'aux documents placés sur la vitre d'exposition. Si un document est détecté dans le chargeur
automatique, la fonctionnalité Ajustement automatique ne fonctionne pas.
Pour effectuer un ajustement automatique :
1. Placez le document à copier sur la vitre d'exposition, puis refermez le couvercle du chargeur de document.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MISE EN PAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance AUTO-AJUST., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Si nécessaire, personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, le contraste et la qualité de l'image à l'aide
des menus Copie. Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie".
6. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie.
REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas régler le format de copie à l'aide du menu ZOOM tant que la copie avec Ajustement automatique
est activée.
Cette fonction de copie spéciale ne s'applique qu'aux documents placés sur la vitre d'exposition. Si un document est détecté dans le chargeur
automatique, la fonction de copie Poster ne fonctionne pas.
Pour effectuer une copie en mode Poster :
1. Placez le document à copier sur la vitre d'exposition, puis refermez le chargeur.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MISE EN PAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance AFFICHE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Si nécessaire, personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, le contraste et la qualité de l'image à l'aide
des menus Copie. Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie".
6. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie.
Le document est divisé en 9 zones. Les zones sont numérisées et imprimées les unes après les autres dans l'ordre ci-contre.
REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas régler le format de copie à l'aide du bouton du menu ZOOM pour faire un poster.
La copie Clone ne fonctionne que si vous chargez un document à l'aide de la vitre d'exposition. Si un document est détecté dans le chargeur
automatique, la fonction de copie Clone ne fonctionne pas.
Pour utiliser le mode Clone :
1. Placez le document à copier sur la vitre d'exposition, puis refermez le chargeur.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MISE EN PAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CLONE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas régler le format de copie à l'aide du menu ZOOM tant que vous êtes en mode copie Clone.Impression de copies en mode resto-verso
Vous pouvez régler l'imprimante pour une impression en mode recto-verso automatiquement.
1. Chargez les documents à copier dans le chargeur automatique.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RECTO-VERSO, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'option de reliure de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
l DESACTIVE : Imprime en mode normal.
l BORD LONG : Imprime les pages pour être lues comme un livre.
l BORD COURT : Imprime les pages pour être lues en les feuilletant comme sur un bloc-note.
5. Si nécessaire, personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, le format de copie, le contraste et la qualité de l'image à l'aide
des menus Copie. Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie".
6. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie.
Votre imprimante imprime des deux côtés du papier automatiquement.
Modification des réglages par défaut
Les options de copie, telles que le contraste, la qualité d'image, le nombre et le format, peuvent être définies pour les modes les plus fréquemment utilisés.
Lorsque vous copiez un document, les paramètres par défaut sont utilisez sauf si vous les modifiez à l'aide des menus Copie.
Pour créer vos propres paramètres par défaut :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGL DEF COPIE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour faire défiler les options jusqu'aux options de configuration.
4. Lorsque l'option à définir apparaît, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour y accéder.
5. Modifiez le paramétrage à l'aide du bouton de défilement ( ou ) ou entrez la valeur à l'aide du clavier numérique.
6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie.
7. Répétez les étapes 3 à 6, si nécessaire.
8. Pour retourner au mode veille, appuyez sur Annuler ( ).
5. Si nécessaire, personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, le contraste et la qualité de l'image à l'aide
des menus Copie. Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie".
6. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie.
REMARQUE : Si vous appuyez sur Annuler ( ) alors que vous modifiez des options de copie, vous annulez les modifications apportées aux paramètres
qui reprennent leur valeur par défaut.Télécopie
Configuration de l'ID de l'imprimante
Dans la plupart des pays, vous êtes légalement obligés d'indiquer votre numéro de télécopie sur chaque document envoyé. L'ID de l'imprimante, contenant
votre numéro de téléphone et votre notre nom ou celui de la société, peut être imprimé en haut de chaque page envoyée depuis votre imprimante.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à ID MACHINE.
4. Saisissez votre numéro de télécopie à l'aide du pavé numérique.
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) si le numéro affiché à l'écran est correct. Un message vous demande de saisir l'identifiant de l'appareil.
6. Entrez votre nom ou celui de votre entreprise à l'aide du clavier numérique.
7. Le clavier numérique vous permet d'entrer des caractères alphanumériques ainsi que des symboles spéciaux en appuyant sur le bouton 1.
Pour plus de détails concernant l'utilisation du pavé numérique pour saisir des caractères alphanumériques, voir "Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la
saisie de caractères".
8. Appuyez sur OK ( ) si le nom affiché à l'écran est correct.
9. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la saisie de caractères
Lors de l'exécution de diverses tâches, vous devrez indiquer différents noms et numéros. Par exemple, lorsque vous configurez votre imprimante, vous entrez
votre nom ou celui de votre société ainsi que le numéro de téléphone. Lorsque vous enregistrez des numéros de télécopie en mémoire, vous pouvez
également entrer les noms correspondants.
l Lorsque vous êtes invité à saisir une lettre, appuyez sur la touche appropriée jusqu'à ce que la lettre souhaitée s'affiche à l'écran.
Par exemple, pour entrer un O, appuyez sur 6.
l A chaque pression successive sur la touche 6, une lettre différente s'affiche : M, N, O et finalement 6.
l Pour saisir des caractères supplémentaires, recommencez la procédure à partir de l'étape initiale.
l Appuyez sur 1 plusieurs fois pour entrer un espace et appuyez également sur 1 pour entrer des caractères spéciaux.
l Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur OK ( ).
Configuration de l'ID de l'imprimante Envoi d'une télécopie
Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la saisie de caractères Réception d'une télécopie
Configuration de l'heure et de la date Composition automatique
Modification du mode d'horloge Fonctions avancées
Réglage du son Fonctions supplémentaires
Mode d'envoi économique Envoi d'une télécopie depuis un PC
Configuration du télécopieur
REMARQUE : En cas d'erreur en entrant des numéros, appuyez sur le bouton défilement ( ) gauche pour supprimer le dernier chiffre.Lettres et chiffres du clavier
Modification de numéros ou de noms
En cas d'erreur en entrant un numéro ou un nom, appuyez sur le bouton de défilement ( ) gauche pour supprimer le dernier chiffre ou caractère. Tapez
ensuite le chiffre ou le caractère approprié.
Insertion d'une pause
Certains systèmes téléphoniques requièrent la saisie d'un code d'accès suivi d'une tonalité. Vous devez insérer une pause afin que le code d'accès fonctionne.
Par exemple, entrez le code d'accès 9, puis appuyez sur Pause ( ) avant d'entrer le numéro de téléphone. Le symbole " , " apparaît à l'écran pour indiquer
qu'une pause a été insérée.
Configuration de l'heure et de la date
L'heure et la date sont imprimées sur tous les fax envoyés.
Pour définir l'heure et la date :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance DATE & HEURE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Saisissez la date et l'heure correctes à l'aide du clavier numérique.
Mois = 01 ~ 12
Jour = 01 à 31
Année = 1990 ~ 2089
Heure = 01 ~ 12 (format 12 heures)
00 à 23 (format 24 heures)
Minute = 00 ~ 59
Vous pouvez également utiliser le bouton de défilement ( ou ) pour déplacer le curseur sous le chiffre que vous souhaitez corriger et entrer un
autre numéro.
5. Pour sélectionner AM ou PM pour un format 12 heures, appuyez sur le bouton ou .
Si le curseur n'est pas placé sous l'indicateur AM ou PM, appuyez sur le bouton ou pour déplacer immédiatement le curseur vers l'indicateur.
Vous pouvez afficher l'heure au format 24 heures (ex : 01:00 PM devient 13:00). Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Modification du mode
Touche Chiffres, lettres ou caractères associés
1 1 @ . _ space , / * # & $ + - `
2 A B C 2
3 D E F 3
4 G H I 4
5 J K L 5
6 M N O 6
7 P Q R S 7
8 T U V 8
9 W X Y Z 9
0 0
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez avoir besoin de modifier la date et l'heure exactes en cas de panne de courant sur l'imprimante.d'horloge".
6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) si la date et l'heure affichées à l'écran sont correctes.
Modification du mode d'horloge
Vous pouvez définir votre imprimante pour qu'elle affiche l'heure, au format 12 heures ou 24 heures.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODE HORLOGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
L'imprimante affiche l'état du mode Horloge qui est actuellement défini.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'autre mode et appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la sélection.
5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille.
Réglage du son
Sons du haut-parleur, des sonneries, des boutons et des alarmes
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance SON/VOLUME, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour faire défiler les options. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque l'option de son de votre choix apparaît.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher l'état ou la sonorité désirée pour l'option sélectionnée.
Pour le volume de sonnerie, vous pouvez sélectionner entre DESACTIVE, FAIBLE, MOYEN et ELEVEE. Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver la
sonnerie. L'imprimante fonctionne normalement même lorsque la sonnerie est désactivée.
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie.
6. Si nécessaire, répétez les étapes 3 à 5.
7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille.
Volume du haut-parleur
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COMP. EN LIGNE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à OUI.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez la sonorité voulue. L'écran affiche le niveau de volume
correspondant.
Mode d'envoi économique
Vous pouvez utiliser le mode d'envoi économique pour enregistrer des documents numérisés et les transmettre à une heure donnée, et bénéficier ainsi de
tarifs longues distances avantageux.
REMARQUE : L'imprimante émet un signal sonore et vous interdit de passer à l'étape suivante si un numéro incorrect est entré.
REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez régler le volume du haut-parleur que lorsque le cordon de la ligne téléphonique est connecté.Pour activer le mode d'envoi économique :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCT AV. FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance APPEL ECO, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher ACTIVE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Après 1 seconde, entrez à l'aide du clavier numérique, la date et l'heure de début d'envoi de télécopies en mode d'envoi économique.
Pour sélectionner AM ou PM pour un format 12 heures, appuyez sur le bouton ou .
6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) si l'heure de début affichée à l'écran est correcte.
7. Après 1 seconde, entrez à l'aide du clavier numérique, la date et l'heure de fin de transmission en mode d'envoi économique.
8. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer le réglage.
9. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille.
Lorsque vous avez activé le mode d'envoi économique, votre imprimante enregistre dans sa mémoire tous les documents à télécopier, puis les envoi à l'heure
programmée.
Désactivez le mode d'envoi économique, suivez les étapes 1 et 3 de la section "Mode d'envoi économique", appuyez ensuite sur les touches de défilement (
ou ) jusqu'à ce que DESACTIVE apparaisse, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Configuration du télécopieur
Modification des paramètres du télécopieur
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGL. DEF. FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher l'option de menu désirée, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Utiliser le bouton de défilement ( ou ) pour connaître l'état de l'option ; vous pouvez également entrer une valeur pour l'option sélectionnée à
l'aide du clavier numérique.
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie.
6. Si nécessaire, répétez les étapes 3 à 5.
7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille.
Options par défaut disponibles pour des télécopies
Vous pouvez utiliser les options de configuration suivantes pour configurer votre télécopieur :
option Description
CONTRASTE Vous pouvez sélectionner la valeur de contraste par défaut pour télécopier vos documents trop clairs ou trop
foncés.
RESOLUTION Vous pouvez sélectionner le paramètre de résolution par défaut à STANDARD, SUPERIEURE ou OPTIMALE.
NB. SONNERIES Vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de fois que la sonnerie de l'imprimante doit retentir, de 1 à 7, avant de répondre
à un appel entrant.
MODE RECEPTION Vous pouvez sélectionner le mode de réception de télécopie par défaut.
• Mode Fax (mode de réception automatique) : L'imprimante répond à un appel entrant et
passe directement en mode réception. Vous pouvez définir le nombre de sonneries à
entendre avant que l'imprimante ne réponde à l'aide de l'option NB. SONNERIES. Si la
mémoire de l'utilisateur est pleine, l'imprimante ne peut plus recevoir de fax entrant.
Assurez-vous de la mémoire libre en supprimant certaines données stockées dans la
mémoire.
• Mode TEL (mode de réception manuelle) : Le mode de réception manuelle est activé lorsque la
réception automatique des télécopies est désactivée.
Vous pouvez recevoir des télécopies par les moyens suivants :Envoi d'une télécopie
Il est possible de commencer à composer le numéro sur le clavier numérique sans avoir préalablement sélectionné le mode télécopie. L'imprimante peut passer
automatiquement en mode télécopie dès l'entrée du quatrième chiffre que le clavier numérique.
Réglage du contraste du document
Utilisez le paramètre Contraste pour télécopier vos documents trop clairs ou trop foncés.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONTRASTE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le CONTRASTE de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
l PLUS CLAIR convient aux images sombres.
l NORMAL convient aux documents imprimés ou dactylographiés classiques.
l PLUS SOMBRE convient aux documents clairs ou écrits à la main.
Réglage de la résolution du document
• en décrochant le combiné du poste téléphonique n'étant pas directement raccordé à l'arrière de
l'imprimante, puis en entrant le code de réception à distance, ou
• en décrochant le combiné du poste téléphonique directement raccordé à l'arrière de l'imprimante
multifonction, puis en appuyant sur Départ ( ), ou
• en accédant à FAX COMP. EN LIGNE OUI lorsque la sonnerie retentit (vous pouvez entendre
des tonalités vocales ou de fax émises par l'appareil distant), puis en appuyant sur Départ ( ) sur le
panneau de commande.
• Mode REP/FAX : L'imprimante peut partager une ligne de téléphone avec un répondeur
téléphonique. Dans ce mode, l'imprimante peut surveiller le signal de télécopie et prendre
la ligne s'il s'agit d'une tonalité de télécopie. Si les communications téléphoniques sont en
mode série dans votre pays, ce mode n'est pas disponible.
• Mode DRPD : Avant d'utiliser l'option DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection , détection du motif de
sonnerie distincte), assurez-vous que le service de sonnerie distincte a été installé sur votre ligne
téléphonique par l'opérateur télécom. Une fois que l'opérateur télécom vous a fourni un numéro de fax
séparé avec motif de sonnerie identifiable, vous devez définir en conséquence les options de
configuration du télécopieur.
RECOMP. DIFF. Votre imprimante peut recomposer automatiquement le numéro d'un télécopieur distant, si celui-ci sonnait occupé.
Vous pouvez définir des intervalles compris entre 1 et 15 minutes.
TENT. RECOMP. Vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de tentatives d'appel entre 1 et 13.
CONF. EMISSION Vous pouvez configurer votre imprimante pour qu'elle imprime un rapport indiquant que la transmission a réussi,
le nombre de pages envoyées, etc. Les options disponibles sont ACTIVE, DESACTIVE et SI ERREUR, qui n'est
imprimé que lorsque la transmission échoue.
JOURNAL AUTO Rapport détaillé concernant les 50 dernières communications, heures et dates comprises. Les options disponibles
sont ACTIVE ou DESACTIVE.
REDUCTION AUTO Si la longueur d'un document en réception est égale ou supérieure au à celle du papier chargé dans le bac
d'alimentation papier, l'imprimante peut réduire la taille du document pour l'adapter au format de papier chargé
dans l'imprimante. Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour que le document entrant soit automatiquement réduit.
Si cette fonction est définie à DESACTIVE, l'imprimante ne peut pas réduire la taille du document pour l'adapter
au format d'une page. Le document est divisé et imprimé au format réel, sur deux pages ou plus.
EFFACER TAILLE Si la longueur du document est égale ou supérieure à celle du papier installé dans votre imprimante, vous pouvez
paramétrer votre imprimante pour qu'elle efface tout excédant situé au bas de la page. Si la page reçue va au-delà
des marges que vous avez définies, celle-ci peut s'imprimer sur deux feuilles de papier en respectant la taille réelle.
Si le document respecte les marges et que la fonction REDUCTION AUTO (Auto Reduction) est activée, l'imprimante
réduit le document pour qu'il s'adapte au format de papier approprié sans avoir à effacer les parties en surplus. Si
la fonction de réduction automatique est désactivée ou ne fonctionne pas, les données débordant des marges
peuvent être supprimées. Vous pouvez définir une marge comprise entre 0 et 30 mm.
CODE RECEPTION Le code de réception vous permet de lancer la réception d'une télécopie à partir d'un poste téléphonique branché
sur la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à l'arrière de l'imprimante. Si vous décrochez le combiné du poste
téléphonique et entendez la tonalité de réception d'une télécopie, entrez le code de réception. Le code de réception
est prédéfini en usine à *9* (étoile 9 étoile). Vous pouvez définir une marge comprise entre 0 et 9. Pour plus
d'informations sur l'utilisation du code, reportez-vous à la section "Réception manuelle avec un poste
téléphonique".
MODE DRPD Lors de toute réception d'appel, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) qui
permet de répondre à plusieurs numéros différents à l'aide d'une seule ligne téléphonique. Ce menu vous permet
de configurer l'imprimante pour qu'elle reconnaisse les modes de sonnerie auxquelles elle doit répondre. Pour
plus d'informations sur cette fonction, reportez-vous à la "Réception de télécopies en mode DRPD".
RECTO-VERSO Vous pouvez définir l'imprimante pour qu'elle imprime les télécopies reçues en mode recto-verso. Les options
disponibles sont les suivantes : DESACTIVE, BORD LONG et BORD COURT.Utilisez le paramètre Résolution pour améliorer la qualité de la sortie d'un original ou pour numériser des photographies.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RESOLUTION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le mode de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Les types de documents recommandés pour chaque réglage de résolution sont décrits ci-dessous.
Envoi automatique d'une télécopie
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies.
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document".
4. Saisissez le numéro du télécopieur destinataire à l'aide du pavé numérique.
Vous pouvez également utiliser les numéros de composition abrégée à un, deux ou trois chiffres ou les numéros composition de groupes. Pour plus
d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Composition automatique".
5. Appuyez sur Départ ( ).
6. Lorsque vous chargez le document à partir de la vitre d'exposition, AUTRE PAGE ? apparaît sur la ligne supérieur de l'écran, une fois le document
numérisé et mémorisé. Si vous avez d'autres pages à numériser, retirez la page numérisée et placez la nouvelle page sur la vitre d'exposition, puis
sélectionnez OUI. Répétez ces étapes si nécessaire.
Après avoir numérisé toutes les pages, sélectionnez NON lorsque AUTRE PAGE ? apparaît sur l'écran.
7. Lorsque l'imprimante établit un contact avec l'appareil en réception, elle compose son numéro et envoie la télécopie.
Envoi manuel d'une télécopie
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies.
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document".
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COMP. EN LIGNE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Mode Recommandé pour :
STANDARD Documents comportant des caractères de taille normale.
SUPERIEURE pour les documents contenant des petits caractères ou des lignes fines, ou imprimés à l'aide d'une imprimante matricielle.
OPTIMALE Documents contenant des détails extrêmement fins. Le mode de résolution Très élevée n'est disponible que si le système
cible prend également en charge ce type de résolution. Reportez-vous aux remarques ci-dessous.
PHOTO Documents contenant des niveaux de gris ou des photographies.
COULEUR Documents comportant des couleurs. Vous ne pouvez envoyer un fax en couleur que si l'imprimante à distance prend en
charge la réception des fax en couleur et si vous envoyez le fax manuellement. Dans ce mode, l'envoi de documents
mémorisés n'est pas disponible.
REMARQUE : Les télécopies numérisées avec une résolution Super Fine peuvent être transmises à la résolution la plus élevée qui est acceptée par le
périphérique en réception.
REMARQUE : Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour annuler à tout moment la tâche de télécopie, lors de l'envoi de la télécopie.5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner OUI.
6. Entrez le numéro du télécopieur distant à l'aide du clavier numérique.
7. Si vous entendez une tonalité aiguë de télécopie émise par le télécopieur distant, appuyez sur Départ ( ).
Confirmation d'un envoi
Après avoir correctement envoyé la dernière page de votre document, l'imprimante émet un signal sonore et retourne au mode veille.
Si quelque chose d'anormal se produit alors vous envoyez votre télécopie, l'écran affiche alors un message d'erreur. Pour obtenir la liste des messages d'erreur et
leur signification, reportez-vous à la "Messages d'erreur et dépannage".
Si vous recevez un message d'erreur, appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour effacer le message et effectuer une nouvelle tentative d'envoi du document.
Vous pouvez configurer votre imprimante pour qu'elle imprime automatiquement un rapport de confirmation après chaque transmission par télécopie. Pour de
plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la rubrique CONF. EMISSION de la section "Options par défaut disponibles pour des télécopies".
Recomposition automatique
Si le numéro que vous avez composé sonne occupé ou si vous n'obtenez pas de réponse lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie, l'imprimante recompose
automatiquement le numéro toutes les trois minutes, jusqu'à sept fois.
Quand Att. recomp. apparaît sur l'affichage, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour recomposer le numéro sans attendre. Pour annuler la recomposition automatique,
appuyez sur Annuler ( ).
Pour modifier l'intervalle de temps séparant des recompositions de numéros et le nombre de tentatives de recomposition, reportez-vous à la section "Options
par défaut disponibles pour des télécopies".
Réception d'une télécopie
À propos des modes de réception
Lorsque la mémoire est pleine, l'imprimante ne peut plus recevoir de fax entrant. Assurez-vous de la mémoire libre en supprimant certaines données
stockées dans la mémoire.
Chargement du papier pour les télécopies entrantes
Le chargement du papier dans le bac d'alimentation s'effectue de la même façon pour l'impression, la télécopie ou la copie, si ce n'est que les télécopies
peuvent uniquement être imprimées sur du papier au format Letter, A4 ou Legal. Pour plus d'informations sur le chargement du papier, reportez-vous à la
section "Chargement du papier". Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage du type et du format de papier, reportez-vous aux sections "Configuration du type de
papier" et "Configuration du format de papier".
REMARQUE : Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour annuler à tout moment la tâche de télécopie, lors de l'envoi de la télécopie.
REMARQUE : Le Dell Laser MFP 1815dn ne peut pas recevoir de fax en couleurs.
REMARQUE : Pour utiliser le mode REP/FAX, branchez un répondeur téléphonique sur la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à l'arrière de votre
imprimante. Réception automatique en mode FAX
Votre imprimante est prédéfinie en usine en mode télécopie.
Lorsque vous recevez une télécopie, l'imprimante répond à l'appel en respectant le nombre de sonneries spécifiées, puis reçoit automatiquement la télécopie.
Pour modifier le nombre de sonneries, voir "Options par défaut disponibles pour des télécopies".
Pour régler le volume de la sonnerie, reportez-vous à la section "Réglage du son".
Réception manuelle en mode TEL
Vous pouvez recevoir une télécopie en décrochant le combiné du poste téléphonique, puis en entrant le code de réception à distance (voir la section "CODE
RECEPTION"), ou en accédant à FAX COMP. EN LIGNE OUI lorsque la sonnerie retentit (vous pouvez entendre des tonalités vocales ou de fax émises
par l'appareil distant), puis en appuyant sur Départ ( ) sur le panneau de commande.
L'imprimante commence la réception de la télécopie, puis retourne au mode veille, une fois la réception terminée.
Réception automatique en mode REP/FAX
Si vous utilisez un répondeur téléphonique dans ce mode, raccordez-le à la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à l'arrière de votre imprimante.
Si votre imprimante ne détecte pas la tonalité de la télécopie, le répondeur téléphonique prend alors l'appel. En revanche, si la tonalité de la télécopie est détectée,
l'imprimante lance alors automatiquement la réception de télécopie.
Réception manuelle avec un poste téléphonique
Vous obtenez un meilleur résultat avec cette fonctionnalité si vous utilisez un poste téléphonique connecté à la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à
l'arrière de votre imprimante. Vous pouvez recevoir une télécopie d'une personne à laquelle vous parlez sur le téléphone auxiliaire sans accéder au
télécopieur.
Lorsque vous recevez un appel sur le poste téléphonique et entendez la tonalité d'une télécopie, appuyez sur les touches *9* (étoile neuf étoile) du poste
téléphonique.
L'imprimante reçoit le document.
Appuyez sur les touches doucement et l'une après l'autre. Si vous continuez à entendre la tonalité de la télécopie provenant de l'appareil distant, refaites une
tentative en appuyant sur *9* une nouvelle fois.
*9* est le code de réception prédéfini en usine. Le premier et le dernier caractère sont fixes, mais vous pouvez modifier le caractère central comme vous le
souhaitez. Le code doit comporter un chiffre. Pour plus d'informations sur le changement de code, reportez-vous à la "Options par défaut disponibles pour des
télécopies".
Réception de télécopies en mode DRPD
REMARQUE : Si vous avez activé votre imprimante en mode REP/FAX et que votre répondeur téléphonique est éteint ou qu'aucun répondeur n'est
connecté à votre appareil, votre imprimante peut passer automatiquement en mode télécopie après un nombre prédéfini de sonneries. La sonnerie distincte est un service des opérateurs télécom qui vous permet d'utiliser une même ligne téléphonique pour répondre à plusieurs numéros de
téléphones différents. Différents motifs de sonneries, combinés à des sonneries d'appel longues ou courtes, permettent d'identifier le numéro particulier qu'un
individu utilise pour vous appeler.
La fonction de détection du motif de sonnerie distincte (DRPD) permet à votre télécopieur de mémoriser le motif de sonnerie auquel il doit répondre. Ce motif
de sonnerie est reconnaissable pour y répondre comme pour un appel fax, tandis que tous les autres motifs de sonnerie peuvent être transférés vers le poste
ou le répondeur téléphonique raccordé à la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à l'arrière de votre imprimante. À tout moment, vous pouvez suspendre ou
modifier la détection du motif de sonnerie distinct.
Avant d'utiliser l'option de détection du motif de sonnerie distincte (DRPD), assurez-vous que le service de sonnerie distincte a été installé pour votre ligne
téléphonique par l'opérateur télécom. Pour configurer l'option de détection du motif de sonnerie distincte (DRPD), vous pouvez avoir besoin d'une autre ligne
de téléphone sur place et composer le numéro de votre à partir de l'autre ligne.
Pour configurer le mode DRPD :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGL. DEF. FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODE DRPD, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGLAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
L'écran LCD affiche Waiting Ring.
5. Composez votre numéro de télécopieur à partir d'un autre téléphone. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'effectuer l'appel à partir d'un télécopieur.
6. Lorsque votre imprimante commence à sonner, ne répondez pas à l'appel. L'imprimante doit attendre plusieurs sonneries pour apprendre le motif de
sonnerie.
7. Lorsque l'imprimante a fini d'apprendre, l'écran affiche End DRPD [Setup].
Si la configuration DRPD échoue, c'est le message "DRPD Ring Error" qui apparaîtra. Appuyez sur OK ( ) à l'affichage de MODE DRPD, puis refaites une
tentative à partir de l'étape 5.
8. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille.
Lorsque la configuration de la fonctionnalité DRPD est terminée, l'option DRPD devient accessible dans le menu MODE RECEPTION. Pour recevoir des télécopies
en mode DRPD, vous devez régler le menu sur DRPD. Consultez "Options par défaut disponibles pour des télécopies".
Réception de télécopies en mémoire
REMARQUE : Vous devez reconfigurer DRPD en cas de réattribution de votre numéro de télécopie ou si vous raccordez votre imprimante à une autre
ligne téléphonique.
REMARQUE : Après avoir configuré DRPD, composez votre numéro de télécopie pour vérifier que l'imprimante répond avec une tonalité de télécopie.
Appelez ensuite un numéro différent attribué à cette même ligne pour vous assurer que l'appel est bien transféré au poste ou au répondeur
téléphonique branché sur la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à l'arrière de l'imprimante.
Puisque votre imprimante est un périphérique multitâche, elle peut recevoir des télécopies tout en exécutant d'autres tâches. Si vous recevez une télécopie
alors que copiez, imprimez ou même tombez en panne de papier ou d'encre, votre imprimante stocke les télécopies entrantes dans la mémoire. Dès que vous avez
terminé de copier, d'imprimer ou de réalimenter les consommables, l'imprimante procède automatiquement à l'impression de la télécopie mémorisée.
Composition automatique
Composition abrégée
Vous pouvez mémoriser jusqu'à 400 numéros fréquemment utilisés, sous forme de numéros de composition abrégée à un, deux ou trois chiffres (de 0 à 399).
Enregistrement d'un numéro de composition abrégée
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance AJOUT PERSONNE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Entrez un nom, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie d'un nom, reportez-vous à "Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la
saisie de caractères".
5. À l'aide du clavier numérique, entrez un numéro de composition abrégée à un, deux ou trois chiffres compris entre 0 et 399, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Ou sélectionnez l'emplacement en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ).
6. À l'aide du clavier numérique, entrez le numéro de télécopie que vous souhaitez mémoriser, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Pour insérer une pause entre des numéros, appuyez sur Pause ( ) et un " , " apparaît sur l'écran.
7. Pour enregistrer des numéros de télécopie supplémentaires, répétez les étapes 3 à 6.
OU
Pour retourner au mode veille, appuyez sur Annuler ( ).
Modification des numéros de composition abrégée
Vous pouvez modifier un numéro d'appel de composition abrégée spécifique.
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODIFIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour accéder à MODIF PERSONNE.
5. Entrez le numéro de composition abrégée à modifier ou sélectionnez le numéro de composition abrégée en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement (
ou ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ).
6. Entrez le numéro de télécopie de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Entrez le nom de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
8. Pour modifier un autre numéro de composition abrégée, recommencez la procédure à partir de l'étape 5.
OU
Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Envoi d'une télécopie à l'aide d'un numéro de composition abrégée
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies.
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document".
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner FAX VERS.5. Saisissez le numéro de composition abrégée.
l Dans le cas d'un numéro de composition abrégée à un chiffre, appuyez sur la touche appropriée et maintenez-la enfoncée.
l Pour un numéro de composition abrégée à deux chiffres, appuyez une fois sur la première touche et de façon prolongée sur la seconde.
l Pour un numéro de composition abrégé à trois chiffres, appuyez une fois sur la première et la deuxième touche et de façon prolongée sur la
troisième.
Le nom de l'entrée correspondante s'affiche brièvement.
6. Le document est mémorisé.
Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI pour ajouter d'autres
documents ou NON pour démarrer immédiatement l'envoi de la télécopie.
7. Le numéro de télécopie enregistré dans le registre des numéros de composition abrégée est composé de façon automatique. Le document est transmis
lorsque le télécopieur distant répond.
Composition de groupe
Si vous envoyez fréquemment un même document à plusieurs destinataires, vous pouvez créer un groupe de diffusion et l'attribuer à un numéro de composition
de groupe à un, deux ou trois chiffres. Vous pouvez dès lors envoyer le même document à l'ensemble des membres du groupe à l'aide du numéro de groupe.
Définition d'un groupe de diffusion
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance AJOUT GROUPE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Entrez un nom, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Entrez un numéro de groupe compris entre 0 et 399, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Ou sélectionnez l'emplacement de votre choix en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ).
6. Entrez un numéro de composition abrégée à un, deux ou trois chiffres que vous souhaitez attribuer au groupe, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Ou sélectionnez l'emplacement en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ).
7. A l'invite Ajouter un autre ? (Add Another?) appuyez sur OK ( ) pour entrer d'autres numéros de composition abrégée dans le groupe.
Ou, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( or ) pour afficher NON, appuyez ensuite sur OK ( ) après avoir entré tous les numéro désirés.
8. Pour attribuer un autre groupe de diffusion, recommencez la procédure à partir de l'étape 3.
OU
Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille.
Modification des numéros d'appel de groupe
Vous pouvez supprimer un numéro de composition abrégée d'un groupe ou ajouter un nouveau numéro au groupe sélectionné.
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
REMARQUE : Il n'est pas possible d'inclure un numéro de groupe dans un autre numéro de groupe.2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODIFIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODIF GROUPE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Entrez le numéro d'appel de groupe à modifier ou sélectionnez le numéro d'appel de groupe en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ), puis
en appuyant sur OK ( ).
6. Modifiez le nom, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Pour ajouter un numéro de composition abrégée, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à AJOUT PERSONNE.
Pour supprimer le numéro de composition abrégée, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher SUPPR. PERSONNE, puis appuyez
sur OK ( ).
8. Saisissez le numéro abrégé à ajouter ou à supprimer.
9. Appuyez sur OK ( ).
10. Pour modifier un autre groupe de diffusion, recommencez la procédure à partir de l'étape 4.
OU
Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Utilisation de la numérotation de groupe pour l'envoi d'une télécopie (transmission multiple)
Vous pouvez utiliser la numérotation de groupe pour la multidiffusion ou la transmission en différé.
Suivez la procédure propre à chacune de ces fonctions (multidiffusion - "Multidiffusion", transmission différée - "Envoi d'une télécopie en différé"). Lorsqu'un
message vous demande de saisir le numéro du télécopieur distant, procédez comme suit :
l Dans le cas d'un raccourci à un chiffre, appuyez sur la touche appropriée et maintenez-la enfoncée.
l Pour un numéro à deux chiffres, appuyez une fois sur la première touche et de façon prolongée sur la seconde.
l Pour un numéro de composition abrégé à trois chiffres, appuyez une fois sur la première et la deuxième touche et de façon prolongée sur la troisième.
Vous ne pouvez utiliser qu'un seul numéro de groupe par opération. Suivez la procédure nécessaire pour effectuer l'opération souhaitée.
Votre imprimante numérise et stocke automatiquement en mémoire le document chargé dans le chargeur automatique ou posé sur la vitre d'exposition.
L'imprimante compose chaque numéro du groupe.
Recherche d'un numéro dans la mémoire
Il existe deux manières de retrouver un numéro en mémoire. Vous pouvez soit le rechercher de façon séquentielle, de A à Z, soit à l'aide de la première lettre
du nom associé au numéro considéré.
Recherche séquentielle dans la mémoire
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
REMARQUE : Lorsque vous supprimez le dernier numéro abrégé d'un groupe, vous supprimez le groupe en entier.Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à RECHERCHER.
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour faire défiler le contenu en mémoire jusqu'à l'affichage du nom et du numéro que vous souhaitez
composer. Vous pouvez chercher vers le haut ou vers le bas dans l'ensemble de la mémoire et par ordre alphabétique, de A à Z.
Lors d'une recherche dans la mémoire du télécopieur, vous verrez que chaque entrée est précédée de l'une des deux lettres suivantes : "S" pour la
numérotation abrégée ou "G" pour la numérotation de groupe. Ces lettres indiquent le mode de mémorisation du numéro.
6. Lorsque le nom et/ou le numéro voulu s'affiche, appuyez sur Départ ( ) or OK ( ) pour composer l'appel.
Recherche par la première lettre
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à RECHERCHER.
5. Appuyez sur la touche sur laquelle figure la lettre à rechercher. Un nom commençant par la lettre en question s'affiche.
Par exemple, pour retrouver le nom "MOBILE", appuyez sur le bouton 6, sur lequel figure les lettres "MNO".
6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le nom suivant.
7. Lorsque le nom et/ou le numéro voulu s'affiche, appuyez sur Départ ( ) or OK ( ) pour composer l'appel.
Impression d'un répertoire
Vous pouvez vérifier les numéros à composition automatique en imprimant un relevé du répertoire.
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IMPRIMER, puis appuyez sur Départ ( ) ou OK ( ).
Un relevé comportant les numéros abrégés et les numéros de groupes est imprimé.
Fonctions avancéesRecomposition
Pour recomposer le dernier numéro appelé :
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RECOMPOSER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Si un document est chargé dans le chargeur automatique, l'imprimante débute immédiatement l'envoi.
Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI pour
ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON.
Multidiffusion
La fonctionnalité de multidiffusion permet d'envoyer un document vers différents emplacements. Les documents sont automatiquement mémorisés puis
envoyés à un télécopieur distant. Après l'envoi, les documents sont automatiquement supprimés de la mémoire.
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies.
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document".
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance DIFFUSER FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Entrez le numéro de l'imprimante distante à l'aide du clavier numérique.
Vous pouvez également utiliser les numéros de composition abrégés à un, deux ou trois chiffres ou les numéros de composition de groupes.
6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour confirmer le numéro. Un message vous demande d'entrer un autre numéro de télécopie.
7. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour entrer un autre numéro.
Ou, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
8. Pour entrer davantage de numéros de télécopie, répétez les étapes 5 et 6. Vous pouvez ajouter jusqu'à 10 numéros de télécopie.
9. Après avoir terminé d'entrer des numéros de télécopie, appuyez sur Départ ( ).
Le document est mémorisé avant d'être transmis. L'écran indique la capacité mémoire restante, ainsi que le nombre de pages mémorisées.
Dans le cas d'une transmission de documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre
page. Sélectionnez OUI pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON.
10. L'imprimante débute l'envoi du document dans l'ordre des numéros que vous avez entrés.
Envoi d'une télécopie en différé
Vous pouvez demander à ce que votre imprimante mémorise une télécopie pour l'envoyer ultérieurement.
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser plus d'un numéro de groupe par opération de diffusion.OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies.
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document".
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCTIONS FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance DIFFERER FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Entrez le numéro du télécopieur distant à l'aide du clavier numérique.
Vous pouvez utiliser un numéro abrégé à un, deux ou trois chiffres ou un numéro de groupe.
7. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour confirmer le numéro affiché sur l'écran. Un message vous demande d'entrer un autre numéro de télécopie.
8. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour entrer le numéro.
Ou, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
9. Si vous souhaitez donner un nom à la transmission, entrez ce nom. Sinon, passez cette étape.
Pour plus d'informations l'entrée du nom à l'aide du clavier numérique, reportez-vous à "Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la saisie de caractères".
10. Appuyez sur OK ( ). L'écran affiche l'heure de saisie et vous demande d'indiquer celle à laquelle vous voulez envoyer la télécopie.
11. Saisissez l'heure en question à l'aide du pavé numérique.
Pour sélectionner AM ou PM pour un format 12 heures, appuyez sur le bouton ou .
Si le curseur n'est pas placé sous l'indicateur AM ou PM, appuyez sur le bouton ou pour déplacer immédiatement le curseur vers l'indicateur.
Si l'heure que vous définissez précède l'heure actuelle, le document peut alors être envoyé à cette heure précise le jour suivant.
12. Appuyez sur OK ( ) si l'heure de début affichée est correcte.
13. Le document est mémorisé avant d'être transmis. L'écran indique la capacité mémoire restante, ainsi que le nombre de pages mémorisées.
Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI
pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON.
14. L'imprimante retourne au mode veille. L'écran affiche un message vous indiquant que le mode veille est activé et qu'un envoi en différé est programmé.
Envoi d'une télécopie prioritaire
La fonction de Fax prioritaire permet d'envoyer un document hautement prioritaire avant le reste des opérations prévues. Le document est mémorisé puis
envoyé dès la fin de l'opération en cours. En outre, un envoi prioritaire interrompt toute opération de multidiffusion entre deux envois (c'est-à-dire à la fin de
l'envoi au numéro A et avant le début de l'envoi au numéro B) ou entre deux tentatives de rappel.
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies.
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document".
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCTIONS FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX PRIORIT., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Entrez le numéro du télécopieur distant à l'aide du clavier numérique.
Vous pouvez utiliser un numéro abrégé à un, deux ou trois chiffres ou un numéro de groupe.
7. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour confirmer le numéro affiché sur l'écran. Un message vous demande d'entrer un autre numéro.
8. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour entrer le numéro.
REMARQUE : Pour annuler la transmission différée, reportez-vous à la section "Annulation d'une télécopie programmée".Ou, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
9. Si vous souhaitez donner un nom à la transmission, entrez ce nom. Sinon, passez cette étape.
Pour plus d'informations l'entrée du nom à l'aide du clavier numérique, reportez-vous à "Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la saisie de caractères".
10. Appuyez sur OK ( ).
Le document est mémorisé avant d'être transmis. L'écran indique la capacité mémoire restante, ainsi que le nombre de pages mémorisées.
Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI
pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON.
11. L'imprimante affiche le numéro composé et commence à envoyer le document.
Ajout de documents à une télécopie programmée
Vous pouvez ajouter des documents à une opération d'envoi en différé précédemment enregistrée dans la mémoire de votre télécopieur.
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies.
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document".
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCTIONS FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à AJOUTER PAGE.
L'écran affiche les tâches réservées en mémoire.
6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que la tâche de télécopie à laquelle vous voulez ajouter des documents apparaisse, puis
appuyez sur OK ( ).
L'imprimante enregistre automatiquement les documents en mémoire tandis que l'écran affiche la capacité de la mémoire et le nombre de pages.
Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI
pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON.
7. Une fois le document mémorisé, l'imprimante affiche le nombre total de pages et le nombre de pages ajoutées, puis retourne au mode veille.
Annulation d'une télécopie programmée
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCTIONS FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNULER TACHE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
L'écran affiche les tâches réservées en mémoire.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que la tâche de télécopie que vous souhaitez annuler apparaisse, puis appuyez sur OK (
).
5. À l'affichage du message de confirmation, appuyez sur OK ( ).
La tâche sélectionnée est annulée.
Fonctions supplémentaires
Utilisation du mode de réception sécurisée
Vous pouvez empêcher les personnes non autorisées d'accéder à vos télécopies. Vous pouvez activer le mode de télécopie sécurisée à l'aide de l'option Réception sécurisée pour interdire l'impression des télécopies reçues lorsque l'imprimante est sans surveillance. Lorsque le mode de télécopie sécurisé est
activé, toutes les télécopies entrantes sont mémorisées. Lorsque vous le désactivez, vous pouvez alors imprimer toutes les télécopies mémorisées.
Pour activer le mode de réception sécurisée :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCT AV. FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( )
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RECEP PROTEGEE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) à l'affichage de ACTIVE.
5. À l'aide du clavier numérique, entrez un code de quatre chiffres que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Entrez à nouveau le code, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Lorsque vous recevez une télécopie en mode de réception sécurisée, votre imprimante la stocke en mémoire et affiche RECEP PROTEGEE pour vous
avertir qu'une télécopie est mémorisée.
Pour imprimer les documents reçus :
1. Accédez au menu Réception sécurisée en suivant les étapes 1 à 3 de "Pour activer le mode de réception sécurisée :".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher IMPRIMER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Entrez le code de quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Les télécopies mémorisées sont imprimées.
Pour désactiver le mode de réception sécurisée :
1. Accédez au menu RECEP PROTEGEE en suivant les étapes 1 à 3 de "Pour activer le mode de réception sécurisée :".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher DESACTIVE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Entrez le code de quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Le mode est désactivé et l'imprimante imprime les télécopies stockées en mémoire.
4. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Rapports d'impression
Les rapports disponibles sont les suivants :
Liste des numéros du répertoire
Cette liste répertorie tous les numéros actuellement enregistrés dans la mémoire du télécopieur comme numéros abrégés et numéros de groupes.
Vous pouvez imprimer cette liste des entrées du répertoire à l'aide de Répertoire ( ) sur le panneau de commande, voir "Impression d'un répertoire".
Journal des envois
Ce journal contient des informations sur les télécopies récemment envoyées.
Journal des réceptions
Ce journal contient des informations sur les télécopies récemment reçues.
Données système
REMARQUE : vous pouvez activer le mode de réception sécurisée sans définir de code, mais vos télécopies ne seront pas protégées.Cette liste indique le statut des options configurables. Vous pouvez imprimer cette liste pour confirmer vos changements apportés à l'un des paramètres.
Journal des programmations en cours
Cette liste indique tout document actuellement enregistré pour un envoi en différé ou un envoi économique. Elle précise également l'heure de début, le type
d'opération, etc.
Confirmation de message
Ce rapport présente le numéro de télécopie, le nombre de pages, la durée de la tâche, le mode de communication et les résultats de la communication.
Liste de réception sélective
La liste répertorie jusqu'à 10 numéros de télécopie spécifiés comme des numéros de télécopie indésirables à l'aide du menu CFG FAX INDES. ; reportez-vous à
"Options de configuration de télécopie avancées". Lorsque vous activez la réception sélective, les télécopies entrantes provenant de ces numéros peuvent
être bloquées.
Cette fonctionnalité reconnaît les six derniers chiffres du numéro de télécopie défini comme l'identifiant d'un appareil distant.
Liste du journal de numérisation
Ce rapport affiche des informations pour les enregistrements de numérisation réseau, notamment l'adresse IP, la date et l'heure, le nombre de pages
numérisées et le résultat. Il est automatiquement imprimé tous les 50 tâches Netscan.
Rapport e-mail
Ce journal contient des informations sur les e-mails récemment envoyés.
Journal multicommunication
Ce journal est imprimé automatiquement après l'envoi d'un document à plusieurs destinataires.
Avis de panne secteur
Ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé une fois le courant rétabli après une panne d'alimentation si des données ont été perdues à cause de cette panne.
Impression d'un rapport
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance JOURNAUX, puis appuyez sur OK ( )
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le rapport ou la liste que vous souhaitez imprimer sur la ligne du bas.
l ANNUAIRE : Liste des numéros du répertoire
l JOURN ENVOIS : journal des envois
l JOURN RECEPT. : journal des réceptions
l DONNEES SYST : données système
l TRAV. PROGRAM. : Journal des programmations en cours
l CONF. EMISSION : Confirmation de message
l LISTE REC SEL. : liste de réception sélective
l JOURNAL NUMER. : liste des sessions de numérisation en réseau
l RAPPORT E-MAIL : A envoyé rapport d'e-mail
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ).
Les informations sélectionnées sont imprimées.Utilisation des paramètres avancés
Votre imprimante contient divers options configurables pour l'envoi et la réception des télécopies. Ces options sont préréglées en usine, mais vous pouvez les
modifier. Pour déterminer la configuration actuelle des options, imprimez la liste des données du système. Pour plus d'informations sur l'impression de la liste,
reportez-vous à "Impression d'un rapport".
Changement des options de configuration
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCT AV. FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que l'option de menu désirée apparaisse, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Une fois l'option voulue affichée, sélectionnez l'état désiré en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ) ou entrez la valeur désirée à l'aide du
clavier numérique.
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie.
6. Vous pouvez à tout moment quitter le mode de configuration en appuyant sur Annuler ( ).
Options de configuration de télécopie avancées
option Description
RENVOI EMISS.
a Vous pouvez définir l'imprimante pour qu'elle transfère systématiquement toutes les télécopies sortantes vers une
destination spécifique, en plus des numéros de télécopie que vous avez entrés.
Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction.
Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction. Vous pouvez spécifier le numéro du télécopieur distant vers lequel
les fax seront renvoyés.
RECEPT ENVOIS
a Vous pouvez définir votre imprimante pour transférer des télécopies entrantes vers un autre numéro de télécopie
durant une période spécifique. Une télécopie qui arrive sur votre imprimante est stocké dans la mémoire.
L'imprimante compose ensuite le numéro de télécopie que vous avez spécifié, puis envoie la télécopie.
Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction.
Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction. Vous pouvez définir le numéro de télécopie associé au transfert des
télécopies ainsi que l'heure de début et l'heure de fin de cette opération. En outre, vous pouvez transférer des
télécopies entrantes vers jusqu'à 25 numéros de télécopie.
APPEL ECO Vous pouvez configurer votre imprimante pour qu'elle mémorise vos télécopies et les envoie à une heure plus
économique. Pour plus d'informations sur l'envoi économique de télécopies, reportez-vous à la "Mode d'envoi
économique".
Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction.
Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction. Vous pouvez définir l'heure et la date de début et de fin en mode
d'envoi économique.
CFG FAX INDES. La réception sélective permet au système de refuser des télécopies provenant de stations distantes. Leurs numéros
sont mémorisés comme des numéros indésirables. Cette fonction est utile pour bloquer toute télécopie indésirable.
Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction. N'importe quelle télécopie entrante est acceptée.
Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction. Vous pouvez définir jusqu'à 10 numéros indésirables. Une fois ces
numéros enregistrés, toutes les télécopies qui en sont originaires seront bloquées.
RECEP PROTEGEE Vous pouvez empêcher les personnes non autorisées d'accéder à vos télécopies.
Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de ce mode, voir "Utilisation du mode de réception sécurisée".
PREFIXE RECOMP Vous pouvez définir un préfixe d'appel comportant jusqu'à cinq chiffres. Cette option permet notamment d'accéder
aux autocommutateurs privés. Cette option s'avère pratique pour accéder aux autocommutateurs privés.
DONNEES RECEPT Cette option permet à l'imprimante d'imprimer automatiquement le numéro de page ainsi que la date et l'heure de
réception au bas de chaque page du document reçu.
Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction.
Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction.
MODE ECM
Le mode de correction des erreurs apporte une aide en cas de ligne de mauvaise qualité et s'assure que l'envoi des
télécopies vers tout autre télécopieur équipé du même système de correction des erreurs (ECM, Error Correction
Mode) s'effectue sans problème. Si la qualité de la ligne est mauvaise, il faudra plus de temps pour envoyer une
télécopie avec le mode ECM activé.
Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction.
Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction.
VITESSE MODEM Sélectionnez la vitesse maximale pour le modem à appliquer, si la ligne téléphonique n'arrive pas à supporter une
vitesse de modem supérieure. Vous pouvez sélectionner 33,6, 28,8, 14,4, 12,0, 9,6 ou 4,8 kbps.
DESACT. RECEP. Vous pouvez configurer votre imprimante pour qu'elle ne reçoive aucune télécopie entrante.
Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction.
Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction.a. Vous pouvez configurer l'imprimante pour qu'elle transfère toutes les télécopies entrantes et sortantes vers des adresses e-mails spécifiques.
Consultez "Renvoi de fax vers des adresses e-mail" .
Utilisation du répondeur téléphonique
Vous pouvez connecter un répondeur téléphonique directement à l'arrière de votre imprimante, comme illustré sur la Figure 1.
Activez votre imprimante en mode REP/FAX , puis définissez le paramètre NB. SONNERIES à une valeur supérieure à celle du paramètre NB. SONNERIES du
répondeur téléphonique.
l Lorsque le répondeur téléphonique prend l'appel, l'imprimante surveille et prend la ligne s'il s'agit d'une tonalité de télécopie et lance ensuite la
réception de la télécopie.
l Si le répondeur téléphonique est arrêté, l'imprimante passe directement en mode télécopie (FAX) après un nombre prédéfini de sonneries.
l Si vous répondez à l'appel et entendez une tonalité de télécopie, l'imprimante peut répondre à l'appel fax si vous
accédez à FAX COMP. EN LIGNE OUI et appuyez sur Départ ( ), puis raccrochez le récepteur, ou
entrez le code de réception à distance *9*, puis raccrochez le récepteur.
Utilisation d'un modem d'ordinateur
Si vous souhaitez utiliser le modem de votre ordinateur pour envoyer une télécopie ou établir une connexion à Internet en mode commuté, raccordez
directement le modem de l'ordinateur à l'arrière de votre imprimante avec le répondeur téléphonique comme illustré à la Figure 2.
l Activez votre imprimante en mode REP/FAX , puis définissez le paramètre NB. SONNERIES à une valeur supérieure à celle du paramètre NB. SONNERIES
du répondeur téléphonique.
l Désactivez la fonction réception de télécopies du modem d'ordinateur.
l N'utilisez pas le modem de l'ordinateur si votre imprimante envoie ou reçoit une télécopie.
l Pour envoyer une télécopie via le modem de l'ordinateur, suivez les indications fournies avec le modem de votre ordinateur et concernant l'application
de télécopie.
l Vous pouvez capturer des images à l'aide de votre imprimante et de la fonction Dell ScanDirect, et les envoyer ensuite en utilisant l'application de
télécopie qui est associée au modem de votre ordinateur.Envoi d'une télécopie depuis un PC
Vous pouvez envoyer une télécopie depuis votre PC sans utiliser l'imprimante. Pour envoyer une télécopie à partir de votre PC, installez le logiciel PC-Fax, puis
personnalisez les paramètres du logiciel.
Installation du logiciel Fax-PC
Si vous installez des logiciels Dell, sélectionnez Installation personnalisée, puis cliquez sur la case PC-Fax. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la
"Installation du logiciel sous Windows".
Personnalisation des paramètres de télécopie
1. Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes Dell Imprimantes Dell DELL Laser MFP 1815 Configurer PC Fax.
2. Entrez votre nom et numéro de télécopie.
3. Sélectionnez le carnet d'adresses que vous allez utiliser.
4. Sélectionnez l'imprimante multifonction que vous allez utiliser en choisissant Locale ou Réseau.
Si vous sélectionnez Réseau, cliquez sur Parcourir recherchez l'imprimante que vous allez utiliser.
5. Cliquer sur OK.
Envoi d'une télécopie depuis votre PC
1. Ouvrez le document à envoyer.
2. Dans le menu Fichier, sélectionnez Imprimer.
La boîte de dialogue Imprimer (ou Impression) s'affiche. Son apparence peut légèrement varier selon les applications.
3. Dans la fenêtre Impression, sélectionnez Dell PC Fax.
4. Cliquer sur OK.
5. Composez la page de couverture, puis cliquez sur Continuer.6. Entrez les numéros des destinataires, puis cliquez sur Continuer.
7. Sélectionnez la résolution, puis cliquez sur Envoyer fax.
Votre PC commence à envoyer les données de télécopie et l'imprimante envoie la télécopie.Recherche d'informations
Que cherchez-vous ? Consultez :
• Mes pilotes d'imprimante
• Mode d'emploi
CD Pilotes et Utilitaires
Vous pouvez utiliser le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires pour installer/désinstaller/réinstaller des pilotes et des
utilitaires ou accéder à votre guide d'utilisation/mode d'emploi. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la
"Généralités concernant le logiciel".
Votre CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires peut contenir des fichiers Lisezmoi (Readme) présentant des mises à jour
de dernière minute à propos de modifications techniques pour votre imprimante ou des références
techniques avancées pour des utilisateurs expérimentés ou des techniciens.
• Informations en matière de sécurité
• Comment utiliser mon imprimante
• Informations en matière de garantie
manuel du propriétaire
ATTENTION : Lisez et suivez toutes les instructions de sécurité de votre manuel du propriétaire
avant de configurer et d'utiliser votre imprimante.
Comment configurer mon imprimante schéma de montage
Code de service express Code de service express
Identifier votre imprimante lorsque vous avez recours à support.dell.com ou que vous contactez l'assistance
technique.
Saisissez le code de service express pour orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez l'assistance technique.
Le code de service express n'est pas disponible dans tous les pays.
• Derniers pilotes pour mon imprimante
• Réponses aux questions en matière
d'assistance technique
• Documentation pour mon imprimante
Site Web de Dell Support
Le site Web de Dell Support fournit en ligne plusieurs outils, notamment :
Vous pouvez accéder à Dell Support à l'adresse suivante support.dell.com. Sélectionnez votre région sur la
page d'accueil DELL SUPPORT, et remplissez les détails demandés pour accéder aux outils et informations
d'aide.
• Solutions - fournit des conseils en matière de dépannage, des articles de techniciens et
des cours en ligne
• Mises à jour - comporte des informations pour la mise à jour des composants comme la mémoire par
exemple
• Assistance client - comporte des informations en matière de contact, d'état des commandes, de garantie
et de réparation
• Téléchargements - pour télécharger les différents pilotes
• Référence - comporte des documents concernant l'imprimante et des spécifications produit Linux
Prise en main
Le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires fourni vous propose un package de pilotes MFP Dell permettant d'utiliser votre imprimante avec un ordinateur Linux.
Le package de pilotes MFP Dell contient des pilotes d'imprimante et de scanner permettant d'imprimer des documents et de numériser des images. Le package
fournit également des applications puissantes de configuration pour votre imprimante et pour d'autres traitements de documents numérisés.
Après avoir installé le pilote sur votre système Linux, le package de pilotes permet de surveiller plusieurs périphériques MFP via un port USB. Les documents
ainsi acquis peuvent être modifiés, imprimés sur les mêmes imprimantes locales MFP ou réseau, envoyés par messagerie électronique, téléchargés sur un
site FTP ou transférés vers un système de reconnaissance optique de caractères (OCR) externe.
Avec le package d'installation des pilotes MFP, vous bénéficiez d'un programme d'installation souple et intelligent. Vous n'avez pas besoin de rechercher des
composants supplémentaires qui pourraient être nécessaires pour le logiciel MFP : tous les packages d'installation nécessaires seront transférés et installés
automatiquement sur votre système. Cette fonction est disponible sur un grand nombre des clones Linux les plus connus.
Installation du pilote MFP
configuration système
Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles
l Redhat 8, 9
l Mandrake 9, 10
l SuSE 8.2, 9.1
l Fedora Core 1, 2, 3
Configuration matérielle recommandée
l Pentium IV 1 GHz ou supérieur
l Au moins 256 Mo de RAM
l Disque dur d'une capacité d'1 Go ou plus
logiciel
Prise en main
Installation du pilote MFP
Utilisation du configurateur MFP
Configuration des propriétés de l'imprimante
Impression d'un document
Numérisation d'un document
REMARQUE : Il est également nécessaire de prévoir une partition swap de 300 Mo ou supérieure pour utiliser de grandes images.
REMARQUE : Le pilote de numérisation Linux prend en charge la résolution optique maximale.l Linux Kernel 2.4 ou supérieur
l Glibc 2.2 ou supérieur
l CUPS
l SANE
Installation du pilote MFP
1. Vérifiez que votre imprimante est bien connectée à votre ordinateur. Mettez l'imprimante et l'ordinateur sous tension.
2. Lorsque la fenêtre d'ouverture de session Administrateur apparaît, entrez root dans le champ Ouverture de session (Login), entrez le mot de passe du
système.
1. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires. Le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires s'exécute automatiquement.
Si CD-ROM du pilote d'impression ne s'exécute pas automatiquement, cliquez sur l'icône située au bas du bureau. Lorsque l'écran Terminal apparaît,
tapez :
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost root]#./install.sh
2. Cliquer sur Install.
3. À l'apparition de l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Next.
4. L'installation est lancée. Lorsque l'installation est sur le point de se terminer, l'Assistant d'imprimante Ajouter (Add) apparaît automatiquement. Cliquer
sur Next.
5. Si vous connectez votre imprimante à l'aide d'un câble USB, la fenêtre suivante apparaît. Sélectionnez votre imprimante dans le menu déroulant, puis
cliquez sur Next.
REMARQUE : Vous devez vous connecter en tant que super-utilisateur (root) pour installer le pilote d'impression. Si vous n'êtes pas un super utilisateur,
demandez à votre administrateur système.
REMARQUE : Le programme d'installation s'exécute automatiquement si un logiciel d'exécution automatique est installé et configuré sur votre appareil.OU
Si vous connectez votre imprimante à l'aide d'un câble réseau, la fenêtre suivante apparaît.
Vérifiez l'Network printer, puis sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste déroulante. Cliquer sur Next.
6. Si vous connectez votre imprimante via le câble USB, choisissez un port que allez utiliser avec votre imprimante. Une fois le port choisi, cliquez sur Next.
OU
Si vous connectez votre imprimante à l'aide d'un câble réseau, passez à l'étape suivante.
7. Sélectionnez le pilote, puis cliquez sur Next.8. Entrez le nom, l'emplacement et la description de votre imprimante, puis cliquez sur Next.
9. Cliquez sur Finish pour terminer l'installation.
10. Lorsque la fenêtre suivante apparaît, cliquez sur Finish.
Le programme d'installation a ajouté une icône du configurateur MFP sur le bureau et un groupe Dell MFP au menu système pour des besoins pratiques.
Si vous rencontrez la moindre difficulté, reportez-vous à l'aide à l'écran qui est accessible via votre menu système ou à partir des applications Windows du
package d'intallation des pilotes, comme le configurateur MFP ou l'outil de retouche des Images.
Désinstallation du pilote MFP
1. Lorsque la fenêtre d'ouverture de session Administrateur apparaît, entrez root dans le champ Ouverture de session (Login), entrez le mot de passe du
système.
REMARQUE : Vous devez vous connecter en tant que super-utilisateur (root) pour installer le pilote d'impression. Si vous n'êtes pas un super utilisateur,
demandez à votre administrateur système.2. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et utilitaires. Le CD-ROM Pilotes et utilitaires s'exécute automatiquement.
Si CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires ne s'exécute pas automatiquement, cliquez sur l'icône située au bas du bureau. Lorsque l'écran Terminal apparaît,
tapez :
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost root]#./install.sh
3. Cliquer sur Uninstall.
4. Cliquer sur Next.
5. Cliquer sur Finish.
Utilisation du configurateur MFP
Le configurateur MFP est un outil destiné principalement à la configuration des périphériques MFP. Comme un périphérique MFP intègre à la fois l'imprimante et
le scanner, le configurateur MFP fournit des options regroupées de manière logique pour les fonctions d'impression et de numérisation. Il intègre également
une option de port MFP spéciale qui permet de réguler l'accès à un combiné imprimante/scanner MFP via un canal d'E/S unique.
Après avoir installé le pilote MFP, le programme d'installation crée automatiquement une icône du configurateur MFP sur votre bureau.
Ouverture du configurateur MFP
1. Double-cliquez sur MFP Configurator sur le bureau.
Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône du menu de démarrage, et sélectionner ensuite Dell MFP, puis MFP Configurator.
2. Cliquez sur les différents boutons du volet Modules pour ouvrir la fenêtre de configuration correspondante.
Cliquez sur Help pour utiliser l'aide à l'écran.
3. Après avoir modifié la configuration, cliquez sur Exit pour fermer le configurateur MFP.
Volet Printers Configuration
REMARQUE : Le programme d'installation s'exécute automatiquement si un logiciel d'exécution automatique est installé et configuré sur votre appareil.La configuration des imprimantes comporte deux onglets : Printers et Classes.
Onglet Printers
Pour visualiser la configuration actuelle de l'imprimante système, cliquez sur bouton icône de l'imprimante situé sur le côté gauche de la fenêtre du
configurateur MFP.
Vous pouvez utiliser les boutons de commande d'imprimante suivants :
l Refresh : Actualise la liste des imprimantes disponibles.
l Add Printer : Permet d'ajouter une nouvelle imprimante.
l Remove Printer : Supprime l'imprimante sélectionnée.
l Set as Default : Définit l'imprimante actuelle comme imprimante par défaut.
l Stop/Start : Arrête/démarre l'imprimante.
l Test : Permet d'imprimer une page de test pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l'appareil.
l Properties : Permet de visualiser et de modifier les propriétés de l'imprimante. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Configuration des
propriétés de l'imprimante".
Onglet Classes
L'onglet Classes affiche la liste des catégories d'imprimantes disponibles.
l Refresh : Actualise la liste des catégories.
l Add Class... : permet d'ajouter une nouvelle classe d'imprimantes.
l Remove Class : Supprime l'imprimante sélectionnée.Configuration du scanner
Cette fenêtre vous permet de surveiller l'activité des scanners, d'afficher la liste des périphériques MFP Dell installés, de modifier des propriétés de
périphériques et de numériser des images.
l Properties... : permet de modifier les propriétés de numérisation et de numériser un document. Reportez-vous à la "Numérisation d'un document".
l Drivers... : permet de surveiller l'activité des pilotes de numérisation.
Configuration des ports de l'imprimante multifonction
Cette fenêtre permet d'afficher la liste des ports MFP disponibles, de vérifier l'état de chaque port et de libérer un port qui reste occupé lorsque le processus
propriétaire a été interrompu pour une quelconque raison.
l Refresh : Actualise la liste des ports disponibles.
l Release port : Libère le port sélectionné.
Partage de ports entre imprimantes et scanners
Votre imprimante peut être connectée à un ordinateur hôte via le port d'interface parallèle ou le port USB. Puisque le périphérique MFP regroupe plusieurs
périphériques (imprimante et scanner), il est nécessaire d'organiser un accès approprié aux applications "demandeuses" pour ces périphériques via le même
port d'entrée/sortie.
Le package de pilotes MFP Dell fourni un mécanisme de partage de port approprié utilisable par des pilotes d'impression et de numérisation Dell. Les pilotes
s'adressent à leurs dispositifs via les ports MFP. Vous pouvez afficher l'état actuel d'un port MFP dans la fenêtre MFP Ports Configuration. Le partage de ports
permet d'éviter l'accès à un bloc fonctionnel du dispositif MFP alors qu'un autre bloc est en cours d'utilisation.
Il est vivement recommandé d'utiliser le configurateur MFP lors de l'installation d'une nouvelle imprimante MFP sur votre système. Si vous le faites, vous serez
invité à choisir un port d'E/S pour le nouveau dispositif. Ce choix doit offrir la configuration la plus appropriée pour les fonctionnalités du périphérique MFP.
Pour des scanners MFP, ce sont les pilotes des scanners qui choisissent automatiquement les ports d'E/S afin que le paramétrage approprié soit appliqué par
défaut.Configuration des propriétés de l'imprimante
La fenêtre de propriétés associée à l'option de configuration des imprimantes permet de modifier les propriétés de votre appareil dans son rôle d'imprimante.
1. Ouvrez le configurateur MFP.
Si nécessaire, passez à la configuration des imprimantes.
2. Sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste des imprimantes disponibles, puis cliquez sur Properties.
3. La fenêtre Printer Properties s'ouvre.
Les cinq onglets suivants apparaissent en haut de la fenêtre :
l General : permet de modifier l'emplacement et le nom de l'imprimante. Le nom entré dans cet onglet s'affiche dans la liste des imprimantes de la
fenêtre Printers configuration.
l Connection : permet de visualiser ou de sélectionner un autre port. Si vous permutez le port de l'imprimante entre un port USB et un port parallèle
(et réciproquement) alors qu'il est en cours d'utilisation, vous devez reconfigurer l'imprimante sous cet onglet.
l Driver : permet de visualiser ou de sélectionner un autre pilote d'imprimante. Cliquez sur Options pour définir les options de périphérique par
défaut.
l Jobs : Affiche la liste des tâches d'impression. Cliquez sur Cancel Job pour annuler la tâche sélectionnée, puis activez la case à cocher Show
completed jobs pour visualiser les tâches précédentes sur la liste des tâches.
l Classes : indique la classe à laquelle votre imprimante appartient. Cliquez sur Add to Class pour ajouter votre imprimante à une classe spécifique
ou cliquez sur Remove from Class pour supprimer l'imprimante de la classe sélectionnée.
4. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les modifications et fermer la fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante.
Impression d'un document
Impression à partir d'applications
Vous pouvez réaliser des impressions à partir de nombreuses applications Linux, à l'aide du système CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System). Vous pouvez ainsi
procéder à des impressions sur votre appareil à partir de n'importe quelle application de ce type.
1. Dans l'application que vous utilisez, sélectionnez Print dans le menu File.
2. Sélectionnez Print directement en utilisant lpr.
3. Dans la fenêtre Dell LPR, sélectionnez le nom de modèle de votre appareil dans la liste des imprimantes, puis cliquez sur Properties.4. Modifiez les propriétés de l'imprimante et des tâches d'impression.
Les quatre onglets suivants apparaissent en haut de la fenêtre.
l General : permet de changer de format de papier, de type de papier et d'orientation des documents, active la fonctionnalité duplex, ajoute des
bannières de début et de fin et modifie le nombre de page par feuille.
l Text : permet de spécifier les marges de la page et de définir des options de texte, comme l'espacement ou des colonnes.
l Graphics : permet de définir des options d'image utilisables lors de l'impression d'images/fichiers, comme des options de couleur, la taille de
l'image ou la position de l'image.
l Device : permet de définir la résolution d'impression, la source de papier et la destination.
5. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les modifications et fermer la fenêtre des propriétés.
6. Cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Dell LPR pour démarrer l'impression.
7. La fenêtre d'impression s'ouvre : elle vous permet de surveiller l'état de la tâche d'impression.
Pour abandonner l'impression, cliquez sur Cancel.
Impression de fichiers
Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs types de fichiers sur un périphérique MFP Dell à l'aide de l'utilitaire CUPS standard, directement à partir de l'interface de ligne
de commande. L'utilitaire CUPS lpr permet de le faire. Toutefois, le package de pilotes remplace l'outil lpr standard par un programme LPR Dell bien plus
convivial.
Pour imprimer un fichier :
1. Entrez lpr sur la ligne de commande du shell Linux, puis appuyez sur Enter. La fenêtre LPR Dell apparaît.
Lorsque vous tapez seulement lpr, puis appuyez sur Enter, la fenêtre des fichiers sélectionnés à l'impression apparaît en premier. Il vous suffit de
sélectionner les fichiers que vous voulez imprimer, puis de cliquer sur Open.
2. Dans la fenêtre LPR Dell, sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste, puis modifiez les propriétés de l'imprimante et de la tâche d'impression.
Pour plus d'informations sur la fenêtre de propriétés, reportez-vous à la "Impression d'un document".
3. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document. Numérisation d'un document
Vous pouvez numériser un document à l'aide de la fenêtre MFP Configurator.
1. Sur le bureau, double-cliquez sur MFP Configurator.
2. Cliquez sur le bouton pour passer en mode Scanners Configuration.
3. Sélectionnez le scanner dans la liste.
Lorsque vous ne disposez que d'un seul périphérique MFP, et que celui-ci est connecté à l'ordinateur et sous tension, le scanner apparaît dans la liste et
est sélectionné automatiquement.
Si vous avez deux ou plusieurs scanners attachés à votre imprimante, vous pouvez sélectionner à tout moment le scanner de votre choix. Par exemple,
pendant que l'opération d'acquisition est en cours sur le premier scanner, vous pouvez sélectionner un deuxième scanner, définir les options du
périphérique et lancer l'acquisition d'image.
4. Cliquer sur Properties.
5. Chargez le document à numériser face vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique ou face vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
6. Dans la fenêtre des propriétés du scanner, cliquez sur Preview.
Le document est numérisé et l'aperçu de l'image apparaît dans le volet d'aperçu.
7. Modifiez les options de numérisation dans les zones Image Quality et Scan Area.
l Image Quality : permet de sélectionner la composition de couleurs et la résolution de numérisation pour l'image.
l Scan Area : permet de sélectionner la taille de la page la taille de la page. Vous pouvez définir manuellement la taille de la page à l'aide du
bouton Advanced.
Pour utiliser l'un des paramètres prédéfinis des options de numérisation, sélectionnez-le dans la liste déroulante Type de tâche. Pour plus
d'informations sur les paramètres Job Type prédéfinis, voir "Ajout de paramètres Job Type".
Pour restaurer le paramétrage par défaut des options de numérisation, cliquez sur Default .
8. Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Scan pour lancer la numérisation.
La barre d'état apparaît dans l'angle inférieur gauche de la fenêtre ; elle affiche l'état d'avancement de la numérisation. Pour annuler la numérisation,
REMARQUE : Le nom du scanner qui apparaît dans Scanners Configuration peut être différent du nom du périphérique.cliquez sur Cancel.
9. L'image numérisée apparaît dans la nouvelle fenêtre de l'outil de retouche d'images.
Pour modifier l'image numérisée, utilisez la barre d'outils. Pour plus d'informations sur la modification d'images, voir "Utilisation de l'outil de retouche
d'images".
10. Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Save sur la barre d'outils.
11. Sélectionnez le répertoire de fichiers dans lequel enregistrer l'image et entrez le nom du fichier.
12. Cliquer sur Save.
Ajout de paramètres Job Type
Vous pouvez enregistrer les paramètres des options de numérisation afin de les réutiliser lors d'une prochaine tâche de numérisation.
Pour enregistrer un nouveau paramètre Job Type :
1. Modifiez les options dans la fenêtre Scanner Properties.
2. Cliquer sur Save as.
3. Entrez le nom du paramètre.
4. Cliquer sur OK.
Le paramètre est ajouté à la liste déroulante des paramètres enregistrés (Saved Settings).
Pour enregistrer un paramètre Job Type pour une prochaine tâche de numérisation :
1. Dans la liste déroulante Job Type, sélectionnez le paramètre à utiliser.
2. Cliquer sur Save.
Lorsque vous ouvrez à nouveau la fenêtre Scanner Properties, le paramètre enregistré est sélectionné automatiquement pour la tâche de numérisation.
Pour supprimer un paramètre Job Type :
1. Dans la liste déroulante Job Type, sélectionnez le paramètre à supprimer.
2. Cliquer sur Delete.
Le paramètre est supprimé de la liste.
Utilisation de l'outil de retouche d'images
La fenêtre Image Editor permet de modifier les images numérisées, à l'aide de commandes de menu et d'outils.Pour modifier une image, vous pouvez utiliser les outils suivants :
Pour plus d'informations sur le programme de retouche d'images, reportez-vous à l'aide à l'écran.
Outils Fonction
Enregistre l'image.
Annule la dernière action.
Restaure l'action annulée.
Applique un zoom arrière à l'image.
Applique un zoom avant à l'image.
Permet de faire défiler l'image.
Rogne la zone d'image sélectionnée.
Permet de mettre la taille de l'image à l'échelle ; vous pouvez entrer la taille manuellement ou définir le rapport pour
une mise à l'échelle proportionnelle, verticalement ou horizontalement.
Permet de faire tourner l'image ; vous pouvez sélectionner le nombre de degrés dans le menu déroulant.
Permet de basculer l'image de position verticale en position horizontale.
Permet de régler la luminosité et le contraste de l'image ou d'inverser l'image.
Affiche les propriétés de l'image.Macintosh
Vous pouvez utiliser cette imprimante sur les systèmes Macintosh dotés d'une interface USB ou d'une carte d'interface réseau 10/100 Base-TX. Lorsque vous
imprimez un fichier sous Macintosh, vous pouvez utiliser le pilote PostScript en installant le fichier PPD.
Installation du logiciel sur Macintosh
Le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires fourni avec votre imprimante contient un fichier PPD qui vous permet d'utiliser le pilote PostScript pour des impressions sur un
ordinateur Macintosh.
Vérifiez la configuration de votre système avant d'installer le logiciel d'impression :
Installation du pilote de l'imprimante
1. Vérifiez que votre imprimante est connectée à l'ordinateur. Mettez l'ordinateur et l'imprimante sous tension.
2. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires fourni avec votre imprimante dans le lecteur de CD-ROM.
3. Double-cliquez sur l'icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du Macintosh.
4. Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer.
5. Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Printer.
6. Double-cliquez sur l'icône Dell Laser MFP Installer.
7. Une fois l'installation terminée, cliquez sur Quit.
Configuration de l'imprimante
La configuration de votre imprimante dépend du câble que vous utilisez pour connecter l'imprimante à votre ordinateur : le câble réseau ou le câble USB.
Avec une connexion réseau
1. Suivez les instructions de la section "Installation du logiciel sur Macintosh" pour installer le fichier PPD et le fichier de filtre sur votre ordinateur.
2. Ouvrez Print Setup Utility dans le dossier Utilities.
3. Cliquez sur Add dans la liste des imprimantes.
4. Sélectionnez l'onglet IP Printing.
5. Entrez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante dans le champ Printer Address.
6. Entrez le nom de la file d'attente dans le champ Queue Name. Si vous n'arrivez pas à déterminer le nom de la file d'attente pour votre serveur d'impression,
essayez d'utiliser la file d'attente par défaut en premier.
7. Sélectionnez Dell dans Printer Model et votre imprimante dans Model Name.
8. Cliquer sur Add.
9. L'adresse IP de votre imprimante apparaît sur la liste des imprimantes ; elle est définie comme étant l'imprimante par défaut.
Installation du logiciel sur Macintosh
configuration de l'imprimante
Impression
Numérisation
Caractéristique Configuration
Système d'exploitation Mac OS 10.3.x ou supérieur
Mémoire vive (RAM) 128 Mo
Espace disque disponible 200 MoAvec une connexion USB
1. Suivez les instructions de la section "Installation du logiciel sur Macintosh" pour installer le fichier PPD et le fichier de filtre sur votre ordinateur.
2. Ouvrez Print Setup Utility dans le dossier Utilities.
3. Cliquez sur Add dans la liste des imprimantes.
4. Sélectionnez l'onglet USB.
5. Sélectionnez Dell dans Printer Model et votre imprimante dans Model Name.
6. Cliquer sur Add.
Votre imprimante apparaît sur la liste des imprimantes ; elle est définie comme étant l'imprimante par défaut.
Impression
Impression d'un document
Lorsque vous imprimez à partir d'un ordinateur Macintosh, vous devez vérifier le paramétrage du logiciel d'impression dans chacune des applications que vous
utilisez. Pour imprimer à partir d'un Macintosh, procédez comme suit :
1. Ouvrez une application Macintosh, puis sélectionnez le fichier à imprimer.
2. Ouvrez le menu File, puis cliquez sur Page Setup (Document Setup dans certaines applications).
3. Choisissez le format de papier, l'orientation, l'impression à l'échelle ainsi que d'autres options, puis cliquez sur OK.
4. Ouvrez le menu File, puis cliquez sur Print.
5. Sélectionnez le nombre de copies et indiquez les numéros des pages à imprimer.
6. Cliquez sur Print, une fois le paramétrage des options terminé.
Modification des paramètres d'impression
Lorsque vous imprimez, vous pouvez utiliser des options d'impression avancées.
Dans votre application Macintosh, sélectionnez l'option Print du menu File.
Paramètres de mise en page
L'onglet Mise en page permet de présenter le document tel qu'il sera sur la page imprimée. Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages par feuille.
Dans la liste déroulante Presets, sélectionnez Layout pour accéder aux fonctionnalités suivantes. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Impression de
plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille"et à la "Impression recto verso".Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille
Vous pouvez imprimer plus d'une page sur une seule feuille de papier. Cette option vous permet d'imprimer les brouillons en mode économique.
1. Dans votre application Macintosh, sélectionnez l'option Print du menu File.
2. Sélectionnez Layout.
3. Dans la liste déroulante Pages per Sheet, sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une feuille de papier.
4. Sélectionnez l'ordre des pages à l'aide de l'option Layout Direction.
Pour imprimer une bordure autour de chaque page, sélectionnez l'option de votre choix dans la liste déroulante Border.
5. Cliquez sur Print, et l'imprimante imprime le nombre de pages sélectionnées sur une face de chaque feuille de papier.
Impression recto verso
Vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux faces de chaque feuille. Avant d'imprimer en mode recto verso, vous devez sélectionner le bord de reliure de votre
document final. Les options de reliure disponibles sont les suivantes :
Long-Edge Binding : Mise en page conventionnelle dans le style d'un livre.
Short-Edge Binding : Type souvent utilisé avec des calendrier.
1. Dans votre application Macintosh, sélectionnez l'option Print du menu File.
2. Sélectionnez la Layout.
ATTENTION : Si vous avez sélectionné l'impression recto verso, puis tentez d'imprimer plusieurs exemplaires d'un documents, l'imprimante
peut ne pas imprimer le document de la façon que vous voulez Avec le mode de copie "assemblé", si votre document comporte des pages
impaires, la dernière page de la première copie et la première page de la copie suivante seront imprimées de part et d'autre d'une même feuille.
Avec le mode de copie "désassemblé", la même page sera imprimée de part et d'autre de la feuille. Par conséquent, si vous souhaitez effectuer
plusieurs copies recto verso d'un document, vous devez les effectuer une par une, comme des tâches séparées. 3. A l'aide de l'option Two Sided Printing, sélectionnez une orientation pour la reliure.
4. Cliquez sur Print et l'imprimante imprime sur les deux faces du papier.
Paramétrage des options d'impression
L'onglet Printer Features fournit des options permettant de sélectionner le type de papier et de régler la qualité d'impression.
Dans la liste déroulante Presets, sélectionnez Printer Features pour accéder aux fonctionnalités suivantes.
Image Mode
Le mode image permet à l'utilisateur d'améliorer les sorties d'impression. Les options disponibles sont Normal et Rendu texte.
Fit to page
Cette fonctionnalité de l'imprimante vous permet de mettre à l'échelle votre tâche d'impression sur tout format de papier, quelle que soit la taille du document
numérisé. Elle peut s'avérer utile pour vérifier les détails d'un petit document.
Paper Type
Vérifiez que Paper Type est bien défini à Printer Default. Si vous utilisez un support différent, sélectionnez le type correspondant.
Resolution
Vous pouvez sélectionner la résolution d'impression. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus les caractères et les graphiques imprimés sont nets. Toutefois, une
résolution élevée peut augmenter le temps d'impression d'un document.Numérisation
Pour numériser des documents à l'aide d'autre logiciels, vous devrez alors utiliser des logiciels compatibles TWAIN, comme Adobe PhotoDeluxe ou Adobe
Photoshop. La première fois que vous numérisé un document avec votre imprimante, sélectionnez votre source TWAIN dans votre application.
Le processus de numérisation de base comprend plusieurs étapes :
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Ouvrez une application, telle que PhotoDeluxe ou Photoshop.
3. Ouvrez la fenêtre TWAIN et définissez les options de numérisation.
4. Numérisez le document et enregistrez l'image numérisée.
REMARQUE : Vous devez suivre les instructions du programme pour l'acquisition d'une image. Reportez-vous au mode d'emploi de l'application.Maintenance
Effacement de la mémoire
Vous pouvez effacer de façon sélective des informations stockées dans la mémoire de votre imprimante.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MAINTENANCE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance EFFACER REGL., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que l'élément à effacer apparaisse.
l TOUS REGLAGES : efface toutes les données stockées dans la mémoire et rétablit tous les paramètres par défaut.
l CONFIG PAPIER : Rétablit toutes les options de configuration papier par défaut.
l CONFIG. COPIE : Rétablit toutes les options de configuration de copie par défaut.
l CONFIG. FAX : Restaure les valeurs par défaut de toutes les options de configuration de télécopie.
l FONCTIONS FAX : annule toutes les programmations de télécopie enregistrées dans la mémoire de l'imprimante multifonction.
l FONCT AV. FAX : Restaure les valeurs par défaut de toutes les options de télécopie avancée.
l JOURN ENVOIS : efface toutes les données concernant vos envois de télécopies.
l JOURN RECEPT. : efface toutes les données concernant vos réceptions de télécopies.
l CARNET ADRES. : Efface les entrées d'e-mail stockées en mémoire.
l ANNUAIRE : efface les numéros abrégés ou les numéros de groupes enregistrés dans la mémoire.
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ). La mémoire sélectionnée est effacée et une invite vous demande si vous souhaitez supprimer l'élément suivant.
6. Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 pour effacer un autre élément.
OU
Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Sauvegarde des données
La date qui figure dans la mémoire de l'imprimante peut être effacée accidentellement par une panne de courant ou une défaillance du stockage. La
sauvegarde vous permet de protéger vos entrées du carnet d'adresse/répertoire et les paramètres du système en stockant ces informations sur une clé de
mémoire USB.
Sauvegarde des données
1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG EXPORT., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Les données sont sauvegardées sur la clé de mémoire USB.
Effacement de la mémoire
Sauvegarde des données
Nettoyage de votre imprimante multifonction
Entretien de la cartouche d'encre
Remplacement des pièces
Commande de consommables5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Restauration des données
1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG IMPORT., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Le fichier de sauvegarde est stocké sur la clé de mémoire USB.
5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Nettoyage de votre imprimante multifonction
Pour maintenir une bonne qualité d'impression, suivez les procédures de nettoyage décrites ci-après chaque fois que vous remplacez la cartouche d'encre ou
qu'un problème lié à la qualité d'impression se produit.
Nettoyage de la partie externe
Nettoyez le boîtier de l'imprimante avec un chiffon doux, humide et non pelucheux. Évitez de laisser goutter de l'eau sur l'imprimante ou à l'intérieur de
l'imprimante.
Nettoyage de la partie interne
Du papier, du toner et des particules de poussières risquent de s'accumuler à l'intérieur de l'imprimante et d'affecter la qualité d'impression en créant des
problèmes comme des bavures ou des taches d'encre. Nettoyez la partie interne de l'imprimante pour éviter ce genre de problèmes.
1. Coupez l'imprimante et débranchez le câble d'alimentation électrique. Laissez suffisamment de temps à l'imprimante pour qu'elle refroidisse.
2. Ouvrez le capot avant et retirez la cartouche de toner. Posez-la sur une surface plane et propre.
3. Avec un chiffon sec et non pelucheux, essuyez la poussière et les particules d'encre du logement de la cartouche et tout autour.
REMARQUE : Ne touchez pas le rouleau de transfert situé sous la cartouche de toner lors du nettoyage de l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Vous risqueriez
de laisser des empreintes qui peuvent entraîner des problèmes de qualité d'impression.
ATTENTION : Les solvants de nettoyage contenant de l'alcool ou d'autres substances fortes risquent de décolorer ou de lézarder le boîtier de
l'imprimante
ATTENTION : Évitez d'exposer la cartouche d'encre à la lumière plus de 2 ou 3 minutes.
ATTENTION : Evitez de toucher la partie inférieure verte de la cartouche d'encre. Utilisez la poignée de la cartouche pour éviter de toucher
la zone en question. 4. Repérez la vitre (unité de numérisation laser) dans la partie supérieure du compartiment de la cartouche, puis essuyez-la délicatement avec un morceau
de coton.
5. Remettez la cartouche d'encre en place et fermez le capot de l'imprimante.
6. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation et mettez l'imprimante sous tension.
Nettoyage du scanner
Le maintien de la vitre du scanner et du chargeur automatique propre est la garantie de copies, numérisations et d'envoi de télécopies de la plus haute
qualité. Dell recommande de nettoyer le scanner chaque matin et durant la journée, si nécessaire.
1. Humidifiez légèrement un chiffon doux non pelucheux ou une serviette en papier avec de l'eau.
2. Ouvrez le capot.
3. Essuyez la vitre d'exposition et la vitre de numérisation jusqu'à ce qu'elles soient propres et sèches.
4. Essuyez la face inférieure du couvercle de document blanc et le fond blanc jusqu'à ce qu'ils soient propres et secs.
ATTENTION : Évitez de toucher le rouleau de transfert à l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Vous risqueriez de laisser des empreintes qui peuvent
entraîner des problèmes de qualité d'impression.
REMARQUE : Si des lignes sont tracées sur des documents copiés ou télécopiés, recherchez sur la vitre du scanner et du chargeur automatique la
présence de particules.
1 Fond blanc
2 Couvercle du chargeur de
document
3 Vitre du chargeur
4 Vitre d'exposition5. Fermez le couvercle.
Entretien de la cartouche d'encre
Stockage de la cartouche d'encre
Conservez la cartouche d'encre dans l'emballage d'origine jusqu'à l'installation.
Evitez de stocker la cartouche d'encre :
l Températures supérieures à 40 °C
l Dans un environnement soumis à des variations importantes en termes d'humidité ou de température
l Directement à la lumière du soleil
l Dans des endroits poussiéreux
l Dans une voiture sur une trop longue période
l Dans un environnement comportant des gaz corrosifs
l Dans un environnement iodé
Redistribution de l'encre
Lorsque la cartouche d'encre est presque épuisée, des stries blanches ou des zones d'impression plus claires font leur apparition. L'écran LCD affiche le
message d'avertissement, TONER FAIBLE. Secouez la cartouche de toner 5 à 6 fois latéralement pour répartir l'encre uniformément à l'intérieur de celle-ci et
améliorer temporairement la qualité d'impression.
1. Ouvrez le capot avant.
2. Retirez la cartouche usagée.
3. Secouez la cartouche de toner 5 à 6 fois latéralement pour répartir l'encre uniformément à l'intérieur de celle-ci.
REMARQUE : Si vous tachez vos vêtements avec de l'encre, éliminez-la avec un chiffon sec et lavez vos vêtements à l'eau froide. L'eau chaude fixe
l'encre sur le tissu.4. En maintenant la cartouche de toner par la poignée, insérez lentement la cartouche dans l'ouverture de l'imprimante.
5. Les onglets placés sur les côtés de la cartouche et les rainures correspondantes de l'imprimante vont permettre de guider la cartouche dans sa position
correcte jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille complètement à son emplacement.
6. Fermez le capot avant. Assurez-vous qu'il est bien fermé.
Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre
En cas d'épuisement définitif du toner, les travaux d'impression ou de copie ne produiront que des pages blanches. Dans ce cas, les télécopies entrantes ne
sont que conservées en mémoire et non imprimées. Vous devez alors remplacer la cartouche de toner.
Commandez une cartouche d'encre supplémentaire afin de pouvoir en disposer une fois la cartouche actuelle épuisée. Pour commander des cartouches de
toner, reportez-vous à la section "Commande de consommables".
Pour remplacer la cartouche de toner :
1. Ouvrez le capot avant.
2. Retirez la cartouche usagée.
3. Retirez la nouvelle cartouche de toner de son emballage.
4. Retirez les bandes adhésives et secouez fermement la cartouche de chaque côté afin de répartir uniformément le toner.
Conservez la boîte et l'emballage.
ATTENTION : Evitez de toucher la partie inférieure verte de la cartouche d'encre. Utilisez la poignée de la cartouche pour éviter de toucher
la zone en question.
REMARQUE : L'imprimante laser Dell 1815 peut imprimer des télécopies quand la cartouche de toner est vide. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à
la section "Non-prise en compte du message Cartouche vide".
ATTENTION : Pour de meilleurs résultats, utilisez des cartouches de toner Dell. Nous ne garantissons pas la qualité d'impression ni la fiabilité des
imprimantes si vous n'utilisez pas des consommables Dell. 5. En maintenant la cartouche de toner par la poignée, insérez lentement la cartouche dans l'ouverture de l'imprimante.
6. Les onglets placés sur les côtés de la cartouche et les rainures correspondantes de l'imprimante vont permettre de guider la cartouche dans sa position
correcte jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille complètement à son emplacement.
7. Fermez le capot avant. Assurez-vous qu'il est bien fermé.
Nettoyage du tambour
Si vous constatez la présence de stries ou de petites taches sur vos impressions, le tambour OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) de la cartouche de toner a peut-être
besoin d'être nettoyé.
1. Avant de lancer la procédure de nettoyage, vérifiez que l'imprimante multifonction contient bien du papier.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MAINTENANCE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
La première option de menu disponible NETT. TAMBOUR apparaît.
4. Appuyez deux fois sur OK ( ).
Votre choix est confirmé à l'écran.
L'imprimante imprime une page de nettoyage. Les particules d'encre situées à la surface du tambour sont déposées sur le papier.
5. Si le problème persiste, répétez les étapes 3 à 4 jusqu'à ce que le papier cesse de récupérer des particules d'encre.
Non-prise en compte du message Cartouche vide
REMARQUE : Si vous tachez vos vêtements avec de l'encre, éliminez-la avec un chiffon sec et lavez vos vêtements à l'eau froide. L'eau chaude fixe
l'encre sur le tissu.
ATTENTION : Evitez de toucher la partie inférieure verte de la cartouche d'encre. Utilisez la poignée de la cartouche pour éviter de toucher
la zone en question.
Lorsque la cartouche de toner est presque vide, l'imprimante enregistre les télécopies entrantes en mémoire sans les imprimer. Pour imprimer la télécopier alors
que le niveau de toner est faible, vous pouvez configurer l'imprimante pour qu'elle continue à imprimer des télécopies entrantes même si la qualité de
l'impression n'est pas aussi satisfaisante.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCTIONS FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IGNORER TONER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'état désiré, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Remplacement des pièces
De temps en temps, vous devez remplacer les rouleaux et l'unité de chauffe pour maintenir les performances de votre imprimante à leur maximum et éviter
des problèmes de qualité d'impression et d'alimentation en papier résultant de l'usure de pièces.
Les éléments suivants doivent être remplacés après l'impression du nombre de pages indiqué.
Pour vous procurer des pièces de rechange, contactez votre revendeur Dell ou le point de vente où vous avez fait l'acquisition de votre imprimante. Nous
Caractéristique Feuilles imprimées (en moyenne)
patin du CAD Environ 20 000 pages
Rouleau de transfert Environ 70 000 pages
Unité de chauffe Environ 80 000 pages
Patin du bac Environ 250 000 pages
Rouleau d'entraînement Environ 150 000 pagesrecommandons vivement de confier l'installation de ces éléments à un professionnel de service formé.
Remplacement du patin de chargeur automatique
Vous pouvez vous procurer un patin de chargeur automatique auprès de votre revendeur Dell ou au point de vente où vous avez fait l'acquisition de votre
imprimante.
1. Ouvrez le couvercle du CAD.
2. Faites pivoter le manchon situé à l'extrémité droite du rouleau du CAD en direction du CAD et retirez le rouleau de la fente.
3. Retirez le patin du chargeur automatique comme le montre l'illustration.
4. Installez un nouveau patin de chargeur automatique.
5. Alignez l'extrémité gauche du rouleau du chargeur automatique avec l'emplacement, puis poussez l'extrémité droite du rouleau du chargeur
automatique dans l'emplacement de droite. Faites pivoter le manchon situé à l'extrémité droite du rouleau en direction du chargeur automatique.
6. Fermez le chargeur.
Commande de consommables
Vous pouvez commander des consommables via Dell™ Toner Management System ou l'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell.Si votre imprimante est connectée à un réseau, entrez l'adresse IP de votre imprimante dans votre navigateur Web ou ouvrez le Centre de surveillance d'état
du réseau (voir "Centre de surveillance d'état du réseau") pour lancer l'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell, puis cliquez sur le lien de commande
d'encre .
1. Double-cliquez sur l'cône Renouvellement de commande de cartouche d'encre Dell 1815dn sur le bureau.
OU
2. A partir du menu Démarrer, cliquez sur Programmes ou Tous les programmes DELL Imprimantes Dell DELL Laser MFP 1815
Renouvellement de commande de cartouche d'encre Dell 1815dn.
Allez à premier.dell.com ou www.premier.dell.com pour commander des consommables en ligne.
Si vous commandez par téléphone, appelez le numéro apparaît sous l'en-tête Par téléphone.
OU
3. Si votre imprimante est connectée à un réseau, entrez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante dans votre navigateur Web pour lancer l'outil Web de configuration
d'imprimante Dell, puis cliquez sur le lien de commande d'encre .
a. La durée de vie d'une cartouche de toner Dell de capacité standard est de 3 000 pages et celle d'une cartouche de toner Dell de haute capacité est de
5 000 pages.
La fenêtre Commander des cartouches d'encre
s'affiche.
REMARQUE : premier.dell.com est le site sécurisé, personnalisable, d'approvisionnement et de support de Dell pour ses clients bénéficiant d'un
service étendu.
REMARQUE : Reportez-vous au tableau suivant pour commandes de cartouches
de toner.
Cartouche de toner Numéro de pièce
Cartouche de toner Dell de capacité standard
a NF485
Cartouche de toner Dell de haute capacité RF223Mise en réseau
Partage de l'imprimante sur un réseau
Imprimante partagée en mode local
Vous pouvez relier l'imprimante directement à un ordinateur désigné, appelé "ordinateur hôte" sur le réseau. Les autres utilisateurs du réseau peuvent dès
lors partager l'imprimante via une connexion réseau Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista ou NT 4.0.
Imprimante connectée à un réseau câblé
Votre imprimante dispose d'une interface réseau intégrée. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Connexion de l'imprimante au réseau".
Impression en réseau
Quelle que soit la connexion de l'imprimante (locale ou en réseau), vous devez installer le logiciel Dell Laser MFP 1815dn sur chaque ordinateur qui imprime
des documents avec cette imprimante.
Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local
Vous pouvez relier l'imprimante directement à un ordinateur désigné, appelé "ordinateur hôte" sur le réseau. Les autres utilisateurs du réseau peuvent dès
lors partager votre imprimante via une connexion réseau Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista ou NT 4.0.
Sous Windows 98/Me
Configuration de l'ordinateur hôte
1. Démarrez Windows.
2. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Panneau de configuration, puis double-cliquez sur l'icône Réseau.
3. Cliquez sur la boîte Partage de fichiers et d'imprimantes, activez la case à cocher située en regard de Je veux pouvoir permettre à d'autres
utilisateurs d'imprimer sur mon imprimante, puis cliquez sur OK.
4. Cliquez sur Démarrer et pointez sur Imprimantes dans Paramètres. Cliquez deux fois sur le nom de votre imprimante.
5. Cliquez sur Propriétés dans le menu Imprimante.
6. Cliquez sur l'onglet Partage et activez la case à cocher Partager en tant que. Renseignez le champ Nom du partage, puis cliquez sur OK.
Configuration de l'ordinateur client
1. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sélectionnez Explorer.
2. Ouvrez votre dossier réseau dans la colonne de gauche.
3. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur nom partagé, puis cliquez sur Capturer le port imprimante.
4. Sélectionnez le port de votre choix, activez la case à cocher Se reconnecter à l'ouverture de session, puis cliquez sur OK.
Partage de l'imprimante sur un réseau
Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local
Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local5. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Paramètres, puis sur Imprimantes.
6. Double-cliquez sur l'icône de votre imprimante.
7. Cliquez sur le menu Imprimante et pointez sur Propriétés.
8. Cliquez sur l'onglet Détails, pointez sur le port de l'imprimante, puis cliquez sur OK.
Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
Configuration de l'ordinateur hôte
1. Démarrez Windows.
2. Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer Paramètres Imprimantes.
Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur et cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes.
3. Double-cliquez sur l'icône de votre imprimante.
4. Cliquez sur le menu Imprimante et pointez sur Partage.
5. Sous Windows NT 4.0, activez la case à cocher Partagé.
Sous Windows 2000, activez la case à cocher Partager en tant que.
Sous Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista, activez la case à cocher Partager cette imprimante.
6. Renseignez le champ Nom du partage, puis cliquez sur OK.
Configuration de l'ordinateur client
1. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le bouton Démarrer, puis pointez sur Explorer.
2. Ouvrez votre dossier réseau dans la colonne de gauche.
3. Cliquez sur le nom de partage.
4. Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000, à partir du bouton Démarrer, cliquez sur Paramètres et pointez sur Imprimantes.
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003, à partir du bouton Démarrer, cliquez et pointez vers Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur et cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes.
5. Double-cliquez sur l'icône de votre imprimante.
6. Cliquez sur le menu Imprimante et pointez sur Propriétés.
7. Cliquez sur l'onglet Ports et pointez sur Ajouter un port.
8. Cliquez sur Port local et pointez sur Ajouter un port.
9. Renseignez le champ Entrez un nom de port et entrez le nom partagé.
10. Cliquez sur OK et pointez sur Fermer.
11. Sous Windows NT 4.0, cliquez sur OK.
Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, cliquez sur Appliquer et pointez sur OK.
Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local
Vous devez configurer les protocoles réseau sur l'imprimante que vous souhaitez utiliser comme imprimante réseau. Les protocoles peuvent être configurés à
l'aide de deux méthodes différentes :
1 Via des programmes d'administration réseau
Vous pouvez configurer les paramètres du serveur d'impression de votre imprimante et le gérer à l'aide des programmes suivants :l Embedded Web Service (Service Web intégré) : Serveur Web intégré au serveur d'impression réseau, qui vous permet de :
Configurer les paramètres réseaux nécessaires à l'imprimante pour se connecter à différents environnements de réseau.
l SetIP : Programme utilitaire permettant de sélectionner une carte d'interface réseau et de configurer manuellement des adresses utilisables avec le
protocole TCP/IP.
2 Via le panneau de commande
Vous pouvez configurer les paramètres réseau de base par le biais du panneau de commande de l'imprimante. Utilisez le panneau en question pour :
l Impression d'une page de configuration réseau
l Configuration du protocole TCP/IP
l Configurer EtherTalk
Configuration des paramètres réseau à partir du panneau de commande
Impression d'une page de configuration réseau
La page de configuration du réseau affiche le mode de configuration de la carte d'interface réseau pour votre imprimante. Les paramètres par défaut
conviennent à la plupart des applications.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IMPR DONN. SYS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
La première option de menu disponible, OUI apparaît sur la ligne du bas d'écran.
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour imprimer une page de configuration réseau.
Une page de configuration réseau est imprimée.
Configuration des protocoles réseau
Caractéristique Configuration
Interface réseau 10/100 Base-TX
Système d'exploitation réseau Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
Protocole réseau • TCP/IP sous Windows
• Port9100 sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
Serveur d'adressage dynamique • DHCP, BOOTP
Lorsque vous installez l'imprimante et la mettez sous tension la première fois, tous les protocoles réseau compatibles sont activés. Si un protocole réseau est
activé, l'imprimante peut activement effectuer des transmissions sur le réseau même lorsque le protocole n'est pas utilisé. Le trafic réseau peut s'en trouver
légèrement accru. Pour éliminer un trafic inutile, vous devez désactiver les protocoles inutilisés.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIGURATION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que le protocole désiré apparaisse, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Si vous avez sélectionné ETHERNET, sélectionnez une vitesse de réseau.
Si vous avez sélectionné TCP/IP, attribuez un adresse TCP/IP. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Configuration du protocole TCP/IP".
Si vous avez sélectionné ETHERTALK, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour modifier le paramétrage pour ACTIVE (activé) ou
DESACTIVE (désactivé).
6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. Configuration du protocole TCP/IP
l Adressage statique : L'adresse TCP/IP est assignée manuellement par l'administrateur système.
l Adressage dynamique BOOTP/DHCP (par défaut) : L'adresse TCP/IP est assignée automatiquement par le serveur DHCP ou BOOTP de votre réseau.
Adressage statique
Pour entrer l'adresse TCP/IP à partir du panneau de commande de votre imprimante, procédez comme suit :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIGURATION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TCP/IP, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
La première option de menu disponible, MANUEL, apparaît et appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. La première option de menu disponible, ADRESSE IP apparaît.
6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder au menu ADRESSE IP.
7. Entrez les chiffres à l'aide du clavier numérique et utilisez le bouton de défilement ( ou ) pour vous déplacer entre les chiffres, puis appuyez sur
OK ( ).
8. Entrez d'autres paramètres, comme le MASQUE SS RES., PASSERELLE ou DNS PRINCIPAL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
9. Après avoir entré tous les paramètres, appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille.
Une adresse IP se compose de 4
octets.
Adressage dynamique (BOOTP/DHCP)
Pour attribuer l'adresse TCP/IP automatiquement à l'aide du serveur DHCP ou BOOTP de votre réseau.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIGURATION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TCP/IP, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance DHCP, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Pour attribuer l'adresse à partir du serveur BOOTP, appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque BOOTP s'affiche.
Restauration de la configuration réseau
Vous pouvez rétablir la configuration réseau par défaut.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance EFFACER REGL., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
La première option de menu disponible, OUI apparaît sur la ligne du bas d'écran.
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour restaurer la configuration réseau.
5. Eteignez l'imprimante, puis rallumez-la ou réinitialisez la carte d'interface réseau.Installation des Accessoires
Précautions à prendre lors de l'installation des accessoires de l'imprimante
Débranchement du cordon d'alimentation :
Ne retirez jamais le panneau de commande de l'imprimante lorsque celle-ci est branchée.
Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours le câble d'alimentation électrique avant d'installer ou de retirer TOUT matériel en option à
l'intérieur ou à l'extérieur de l'imprimante.
Décharge d'électricité statique :
Le panneau de commande et la mémoire interne de l'imprimante sont sensibles à l'électricité statique. Avant d'installer ou de supprimer une mémoire interne
d'imprimante, déchargez l'électricité statique de votre corps en touchant la partie métallique d'un appareil branché dans une prise mise à la terre quelconque.
Répétez l'opération si vous vous déplacez avant de terminer l'installation.
Installation de la mémoire
Vous pouvez augmenter la mémoire de l'imprimante grâce à une barrette DIMM (Dual In-line Memory Module).
Votre imprimante a 92 MB de mémoire. Elle peut être étendue à 192 Mo. Retirez la mémoire DIMM préinstallée avant de mettre à jour la mémoire.
1. Mettez l'imprimante hors tension et débranchez tous les câbles de l'imprimante.
2. Saisissez le capot du panneau de commande et ouvrez-le.
3. Ouvrez complètement les verrous de chaque côté du slot DIMM et retirez la mémoire DIMM préinstallée.
Précautions à prendre lors de l'installation des accessoires de l'imprimante
Installation de la mémoire
Installation d'un bac 2 optionnel
REMARQUE : Votre imprimante n'accepte que des barrettes DIMM Dell. Commandez vos barrettes DIMM en ligne à www.dell.com.4. Retirez la barrette mémoire neuve de son emballage antistatique.
5. Tenez la barrette par les bords, alignez les encoches de la barrette sur les rainures situées en haut de l'emplacement DIMM.
6. Poussez la barrette dans l'emplacement DIMM, jusqu'à ce qu'un déclic indique qu'elle est bien en place. Vérifiez que les verrous s'insèrent bien dans les
encoches situées de chaque côté de la barrette.
7. Remettez la trappe d'accès à la carte électronique en place.
8. Rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation et le câble de l'imprimante, puis mettez celle-ci sous tension.
Activation de la mémoire additionnelle dans les propriétés de l'imprimante PS
Après avoir installé le barrette mémoire, vous devez la sélectionner dans les propriétés du pilote d'impression PostScript de l'imprimante pour pouvoir
l'utiliser :
1. Assurez-vous que le pilote d'impression PostScript est installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du pilote d'impression PS,
reportez-vous à la "Installation du logiciel sous Windows".
2. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows.
3. Sous Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis Imprimantes.
Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes.
4. Sélectionnez l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815 PS.
5. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône d'imprimante et,
Sous Windows 98/Me, cliquez sur Propriétés.
Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, cliquez sur Configuration de l'impression ou cliquez sur Propriétés, puis pointez sur Options d'impression.
Sous Windows NT 4.0, cliquez sur Donnees du doc. par defaut.
6. Sous Windows 98/Me, sélectionnez Options du périphérique.
Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, sélectionnez Paramètres du périphérique.
7. Sélectionnez la barrette mémoire que vous avez installée dans Mémoire de l'imprimante de la section Options d'installation.
Sous Windows 98, sélectionnez Options d'installation OptionVM changer le paramètre pour :OptionVM changer la mémoire.
8. Cliquer sur OK. Installation d'un bac 2 optionnel
Vous pouvez accroître la capacité d'alimentation papier de votre imprimante en y installant un bac optionnel 2. Ce bac accepte 250 feuilles de papier.
1. Mettez l'imprimante hors tension et débranchez tous les câbles de l'imprimante.
2. Retirez la bande adhésive et la bande de fixation du câble du bac optionnel 2 situé au fond du bac optionnel 2.
3. Repérez le connecteur et les repères de positionnement du bac optionnel.
4. Placez l'imprimante sur le bac, en alignant le pied de l'imprimante avec les repères de positionnement du bac optionnel 2.
5. Branchez le câble dans le connecteur situé à l'arrière de l'imprimante.
6. Chargez du papier dans le bac optionnel 2. Pour plus d'informations sur le chargement du papier dans le bac, reportez-vous à la "Chargement du
papier".
7. Rebranchez le câble d'alimentation électrique et les câbles, puis mettez l'imprimante sous tension Lorsque vous imprimez un document sur du papier chargé dans le bac optionnel 2, vous devez configurer les propriétés du pilote d'impression.
Pour accéder aux propriétés du pilote :
1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows.
2. Sous Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur Paramètres et pointez sur Imprimantes.
Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes.
3. Cliquez sur l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815.
4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône d'imprimante et,
Sous Windows 98/Me, cliquez sur Propriétés.
Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, cliquez sur Configuration de l'impression ou cliquez sur Propriétés, puis pointez sur Options d'impression.
Sous Windows NT 4.0, cliquez sur Donnees du doc. par defaut.
5. Cliquez sur l'onglet Imprimante, puis sélectionnez Bac 2 dans la liste déroulante Bac optionnel.
6. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document.
Pour définir le bac dans les propriétés du pilote d'impression PostScript de l'imprimante.
1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows.
2. Sous Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis Imprimantes.
Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes.
3. Sélectionnez l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815 PS.
4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône d'imprimante et,
Sous Windows 98/Me, cliquez sur Propriétés.
Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, cliquez sur Configuration de l'impression ou cliquez sur Propriétés, puis pointez sur Options d'impression.
Sous Windows NT 4.0, cliquez sur Donnees du doc. par defaut.
5. Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres du périphérique, puis sélectionnez Installé dans la liste déroulante Bac 2.6. Cliquer sur OK.Manipulation du papier
Consignes relatives aux supports d'impression
Par supports d'impression, on entend le papier, le papier cartonné, les transparents, les étiquettes et les enveloppes. Votre imprimante permet d'obtenir une
impression de grande qualité sur différents supports d'impression. La sélection d'un support d'impression adapté à votre imprimante vous permettra d'éviter
les problèmes d'impression. Ce chapitre fournit des informations sur le mode de sélection du support d'impression, sur la façon d'entretenir le support
d'impression et sur le mode de chargement du support d'impression dans le bac 1, le bac optionnel 2 ou le passe-copie.
Papier
Pour une qualité d'impression optimale, utilisez le papier xérographique à grain sens machine 75 g/m2
. Faites un essai avec un échantillon du papier que vous
prévoyez d'utiliser avec l'imprimante, avant d'en acheter de grandes quantités.
Avant de charger votre papier, vérifiez quelle est la face imprimable sur l'emballage du papier et effectuez le chargement en conséquence. Pour plus
d'informations sur le chargement, reportez-vous aux sections "Chargement des supports d'impression dans le bac" et "Utilisation du passe copie".
Caractéristiques papier
Les caractéristiques suivantes ont un effet sur la qualité et la fiabilité de l'impression. Nous vous recommandons de suivre ces consignes avant d'acheter du
papier.
Poids
L'imprimante peut détecter automatiquement le grammage papier de 60 à 105 g/m2
à grain long dans le chargeur automatique et de 60 à 90 g/m2
à grain
long dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Le papier de moins de 60 g/m2
risque de ne pas être suffisamment rigide et de causer des bourrages. Pour des
performances optimales, utilisez le papier à grain sens machine 75 g/m2
.
Pour une impression recto verso, utilisez un papier de 75 à 90 g/m2
.
Ondulations
Le plissement fait référence à la tendance qu'a un support d'impression à se courber sur les bords. Un plissement excessif risque de créer des problèmes
d'alimentation papier. Le papier prend normalement un aspect ondulé après son passage par l'imprimante car il est exposé à des températures élevées. Ne
stockez pas le papier, pas même dans le bac d'alimentation, sans le couvrir car cela risquerait d'entraîner des problèmes de plissement et d'alimentation
papier.
Satinage
Le degré de satinage du papier a un effet direct sur la qualité de l'impression. Si le papier est trop rugueux, la fusion du toner n'effectue pas correctement, ce
qui se traduit par une qualité d'impression médiocre. Si le papier est trop lisse, il peut provoquer des problèmes au moment de l'alimentation. En ce qui
concerne le satinage, le papier doit avoir un indice Sheffield compris entre 100 et 300 ; toutefois, la meilleure qualité d'impression s'obtient avec un indice
Sheffield compris entre 150 et 250.
Teneur en humidité
Le niveau d'humidité du papier affecte la qualité d'impression et la capacité de l'imprimante à alimenter le papier correctement. Conservez le papier dans son
emballage jusqu'au moment de son utilisation. Il est ainsi protégé de l'humidité, celle-ci pouvant avoir des effets négatifs sur ses performances.
Consignes relatives aux supports d'impression Chargement des supports d'impression dans le bac
Stockage des supports d'impression Utilisation du passe copie
Identification des sources et spécifications des supports d'impression Configuration du format de papier
Choix du type de sortie Configuration du type de papierDirection du grain
Le grain fait référence à l'alignement des fibres dans une feuille de papier. Le grain est soit long (dans le sens de la longueur), soit court (dans le sens de la
largeur).
Pour les papiers de grammage compris entre 60 et 90 g/m2
, les fibres à grain long sont recommandées. Pour le papier de grammage supérieur à 90 g/m2
,
préférez le grain court. Pour le passe copie, un papier de grammage compris entre 60 et 90 g/m2
et des fibres à grain long sont recommandées.
Teneur en fibres
Le papier xérographique de bonne qualité est généralement constitué entièrement de bois transformé en pâte par un procédé chimique. Cette méthode
produit un papier très stable qui cause moins de problèmes d'alimentation et garantit une meilleure qualité d'impression. Le papier contenant d'autres types
de fibres (coton, par exemple) possède des caractéristiques pouvant entraîner des problèmes de manipulation.
Papier recommandé
Pour une qualité d'impression optimum et une alimentation fiable, utilisez du papier xérographique 75 g/m2
. Les papiers de type commercial destinés aux
usages courants peuvent également fournir une qualité d'impression acceptable.
N'oubliez pas d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un support d'impression avant d'en acheter de grandes quantités. Lorsque vous choisissez un support
d'impression, n'oubliez pas de tenir compte de son poids, de sa teneur en fibres et de sa couleur.
N'utilisez que du papier capable de résister aux températures existant dans l'imprimante sans décoloration, transferts ni émissions de substances toxiques.
Consultez le fabricant ou le vendeur du papier pour déterminer si le papier que vous avez choisi convient aux imprimantes laser.
Papiers inacceptables
L'utilisation des papier suivants n'est pas recommandée pour l'imprimante :
l Papiers traités par procédé chimique et utilisés pour faire des copies sans papier carbone, également appelés papiers autocopiants (CCP) ou papiers ne
nécessitant pas de carbone (NCR)
l Des papiers préimprimés avec des produits chimiques peuvent contaminer l'imprimante
l Papiers préimprimés pouvant être affectés par la température du four de l'imprimante
l Les papiers préimprimés nécessitant un repérage (il s'agit d'un emplacement précis d'impression sur la page) plus grand que 2 mm, comme des
formulaires avec reconnaissance optique des caractères (OCR)
l Papiers couchés (effaçables), papiers synthétiques, papiers thermosensibles
l Papiers à bords rugueux, à surface rugueuse ou fortement texturée ou papiers ondulés
l Papiers recyclés contenant plus de 25 % de fibres de recyclage non conformes à la norme DIN 19 309
l Papiers recyclés de poids inférieur à 60 g/m2
l Documents ou formulaires à plusieurs parties
Choix du papier
Un chargement correct du papier évite les bourrages et autres problèmes d'impression.
Pour éviter le bourrage ou une mauvaise qualité d'impression :l N'utilisez que du papier neuf et non endommagé.
l Avant de charger le papier, assurez-vous que vous savez quelle face imprimer. La face à imprimer est généralement indiquée sur l'emballage du papier.
l N'utilisez pas du papier que vous avez découpé vous-même.
l Evitez de mélanger des supports d'impression de tailles, poids ou types différents car cela risquerait d'entraîner des bourrages.
l N'utilisez pas de papiers couchés.
l Pensez à changer le format du papier lorsque vous utilisez une alimentation qui ne détecte pas la taille de façon automatique.
l Ne retirez pas les bacs durant l'impression ou lorsque le panneau indique que l'imprimante est occupée.
l Vérifiez que le papier est bien chargé dans l'alimentation.
l Déramez les feuilles de papier. Evitez de plier ou de froisser le papier. Alignez les feuilles en les posant sur une surface plane.
Sélection de formulaires préimprimés et papier à en-tête
Appliquez les consignes suivante lorsque vous sélectionnez des formulaires préimprimés et du papier à en-tête pour l'imprimante :
l Utilisez du papier à grain sens machine pour de meilleurs résultats.
l N'utiliser que les formulaires et le papier à en-tête imprimés par lithographie offset ou gravure au burin.
l Choisissez du papier capable d'absorber l'encre mais sans transfert.
l Évitez le papier à surface rugueuse ou trop texturée.
Utiliser du papier imprimé avec des encres capables de résister à la chaleur pour photocopieurs xérographiques. L'encre doit résister à des températures de
180 °C sans fusion ni émission de substances toxiques. Utiliser des encres non affectées par la résine du toner ou la silicone du four. Les encres à base
d'oxydants ou d'huile végétale devraient convenir, mais pas les encres latex. En cas de doute, contactez votre fournisseur de papier.
Des papiers préimprimés comme du papier à en-tête doit être capable de résister à des températures pouvant atteindre 180 °C sans fusion ni émission de
substances toxiques.
Impression sur papier à en-tête
Consultez le fabricant ou le vendeur pour déterminer si le papier à en-tête que vous avez choisi convient aux imprimantes laser.
L'orientation de la page est importante lorsque vous imprimez sur du papier à en-tête. Le tableau suivant vous aidera à charger votre papier à en-tête dans
les alimentations de supports d'impression.
Alimentation des supports
d'impression
Haut de la page
Face à imprimer Portrait Paysage
bac 1 (bac standard)
bac 2 optionnel
Face imprimée vers le bas Façade du bac Côté gauche du bac
passe copie Face imprimée vers le haut Le logo entre dans l'imprimante en
premier
Côté gauche du bac Sélection de papier perforé
Les différents types de papier perforé varient en termes de nombre de trous et de leur emplacement ainsi que des techniques de fabrication employées.
Suivez les instructions ci-après pour choisir et utiliser le papier perforé :
l Essayer le papier perforé de plusieurs fabricants avant d'en commander de grandes quantités.
l Le papier devrait être perforé au moment de la fabrication et non pas perforé dans sa rame une fois emballé. Le papier perforé pour provoquer des
bourrages lorsque plusieurs feuilles passent dans l'imprimante.
l Le papier perforé peut contenir plus de poussière que le papier normal. Votre imprimante peut nécessiter davantage de nettoyages fréquents et la
fiabilité de l'alimentation risque de ne pas être aussi bonne que dans le cas du papier standard.
Transparents
Faites un essai avec des transparents que vous prévoyez d'utiliser avec l'imprimante, avant d'en acheter de grandes quantités.
l Utilisez des transparents fabriqués spécialement pour les imprimantes laser. Les transparents doivent doit être capables de résister à des
températures de 180 °C sans fusion, décoloration, transfert ni émission de substances toxiques.
l Évitez de toucher les transparents avec les doigts afin de ne pas compromettre la qualité de l'impression.
l Avant de charger une pile de transparents, ventilez-la afin de séparer les feuilles.
l Chargez un transparent dans le passe copie.
Choix des transparents
L'imprimante peut imprimer directement sur des transparents conçus pour un usage avec des imprimantes laser. La qualité et la durabilité de l'impression
dépendent des transparents utilisés. Avant d'acheter des transparents en grandes quantités, essayez d'en imprimer quelques-uns.
Vérifiez auprès du fabricant ou du fournisseur la compatibilité des transparents avec des imprimantes laser chauffant les transparents à 180 °C. N'utilisez que
les transparents capables de résister à ces températures sans fusion, décoloration, transfert ni émission de substances toxiques.
Enveloppes
Vous pouvez charger une enveloppe à la fois dans le passe copie. Faites un essai avec des enveloppes que vous prévoyez d'utiliser avec l'imprimante, avant
d'en acheter de grandes quantités. Pour plus d'informations sur le chargement d'une enveloppe, reportez-vous à la section "Utilisation du passe copie".
Impression sur enveloppe :
l Pour obtenir la meilleure qualité d'impression possible, utilisez uniquement des enveloppes de grande qualité, conçues pour les imprimantes laser.
l Pour de meilleurs résultats, utilisez des enveloppes fabriquées à base de papier 75 g/m2
. Vous pouvez utiliser un grammage allant jusqu'à 90 g/m2
avec le passe copie tant que le coton grammage ne dépasse pas 25 %.
l N'utilisez que des enveloppes neuves et non endommagées.l Pour de meilleurs résultats, et afin de minimiser les bourrages, évitez les enveloppes :
- Excessivement pliées ou déformées
- Collées entre elles ou endommagées
- Qui présentent des fenêtres, des trous, des perforations, des découpes ou des reliefs
- Qui comportent des agrafes, des ficelles ou des barres métalliques
- Qui s'emboîtent
- Qui comportent des timbres
- Qui présentent une substance adhésive lorsque le rabat de l'enveloppe est scellé
- Dont les bords sont froissés ou les coins recourbés
- Dont la finition est rugueuse ou imparfaite
l Utilisez des enveloppes capables de résister à des températures de 180 °C sans collage, ondulation excessive, froissement ni émission de substances
toxiques. Si vous avez un doute quelconque sur les enveloppes que vous avez l'intention d'utiliser, consultez votre fournisseur.
l Ajustez le guide-papier à la largeur des enveloppes.
l Insérez les enveloppes côté adresse vers le bas et zone réservée au timbre en haut à gauche. Le bord de l'enveloppe avec la zone réservée pour le
timbre passe en premier dans le passe copie.
Pour plus d'informations sur le chargement d'une enveloppe, reportez-vous à la section "Utilisation du passe copie".
l Les enveloppes peuvent se sceller d'elles-mêmes en cas d'humidité élevée (plus de 60 %) et de haute température d'impression.
Étiquettes
Votre imprimante peut imprimer sur de nombreuses étiquettes utilisables avec des imprimantes laser. Ces étiquettes sont fournies aux formats Letter, A4 et
Legal. Les adhésifs des étiquettes, la feuille protectrice (partie imprimable) et les couches de finition doivent être capable de résister à des températures de
180 °C et à une pression de 25 livres par pouce carré (psi). Vous pouvez charger une feuille d'étiquette à la fois dans le passe copie.
Faites un essai avec les étiquettes que vous prévoyez d'utiliser avec l'imprimante, avant d'en acheter une grande quantité :
l Utilisez des planches d'étiquettes entières. L'utilisation de planches où manquent certaines étiquettes risque d'entraîner le décollage des étiquettes
restantes et de causer un bourrage. Ces planches contaminent également votre imprimante et votre cartouche avec de l'adhésif et pourraient
provoquer l'annulation des garanties qui s'appliquent à votre imprimante et à la cartouche.
l Utilisez des étiquettes capables de résister à des températures de 180 °C sans collage, ondulation excessive, froissement ni émission de substances
toxiques.
l N'imprimez pas à moins de 1 mm du bord de l'étiquette ou des perforations, ou entre les découpes de l'étiquette.
l N'utilisez pas les planches d'étiquettes dont le bord contient une substance adhésive. Nous recommandons des planches dont les zones adhésives sont
situées à au moins 1 mm des bords. Des produits adhésifs contaminent votre imprimante et peuvent provoquer l'annulation de la garantie.
l S'il n'est pas possible d'avoir un écart de zone adhésive, une bande de 3 mm doit être retirée du bord avant et pilote, et un adhésif sans suintement doit
être utilisé.
l Retirez une bande de 3 mm du bord avant pour empêcher le pelurage des étiquettes à l'intérieur de l'imprimante.l Préférez l'orientation Portrait, surtout lorsque vous imprimez des codes à barres.
l N'utilisez pas les étiquettes dont la substance adhésive est apparente.
Papier cartonné
Le papier cartonné est composé d'une seule couche, et comporte toute une gamme de propriétés telles que la teneur en humidité, l'épaisseur et la texture,
qui peuvent avoir un effet important sur la qualité de l'impression. Reportez-vous à la section "Identification des sources et spécifications des supports
d'impression" pour plus d'informations sur le grammage préféré associé au sens du grain du support d'impression.
Faites un essai avec un papier cartonné que vous prévoyez d'utiliser avec l'imprimante, avant d'en acheter une grande quantité :
l N'oubliez pas que la préimpression, la perforation et le froissement peuvent avoir un effet important sur la qualité d'impression et causer des problèmes
de manipulation des supports d'impression ou des bourrages.
l Évitez les papiers cartonnés qui risquent d'émettre des substances toxiques à la chaleur.
l N'utilisez pas de papier cartonné préimprimé et fabriqué avec des produits chimiques pouvant contaminer l'imprimante. La préimpression introduit des
composants semi-liquides et volatils dans l'imprimante.
l Nous recommandons l'utilisation de papier cartonné à grain sens machine.
Stockage des supports d'impression
Suivez les instructions ci-après pour le stockage des supports d'impression. Vous pourrez ainsi éviter les problèmes d'alimentation de supports d'impression et
d'irrégularité d'impression :
l Pour obtenir de meilleurs résultats, stockez les supports d'impression à une température d'environ 21° C et une humidité relative de 40 %.
l Stockez les cartons de supports d'impression sur une palette ou une étagère et évitez de les placer à même le sol.
l Si vous stockez des rames de supports d'impression individuelles provenant du carton d'origine, veillez à les placer sur une surface plate afin d'éviter le
plissement ou la déformation des bords des feuilles.
l Ne mettez rien sur les piles de supports d'impression.
Identification des sources et spécifications des supports d'impression
Les tableaux suivants fournissent des informations concernant les sources d'alimentation standard et en option, notamment les formats de support
d'impression que vous pouvez sélectionner à partir du menu format de papier, ainsi que les grammages pris en charge.
Formats de supports d'impression et supports d'impression
REMARQUE : Si le format de support d'impression que vous utilisez n'est pas dans la liste, sélectionnez le format immédiatement supérieur.
Légende
Oui- correspond à support
d'impression
Format du support
d'impression
Formats Bac d'alimentation
(bac 1 et bac optionnel 2)
Passe copie Impression recto verso
A4 210 x 297 mm Oui Oui Oui
A5 148 x 210 mm Oui Oui -Supports d'impressions pris en charge
Types et grammages de supports d'impression
a. Il est préférable d'utiliser un grain court pour les papiers dont le grammage est supérieur à 163 g/m2
.
Choix du type de sortie
A6 105 x 148,5 mm Oui Oui -
B5 (JIS) 182 x 257 mm Oui Oui -
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Oui Oui -
Letter 215,9 x 279,4 mm Oui Oui Oui
Legal 215,9 x 355,6 mm Oui Oui Oui
EXECUTIVE 184,2 x 266,7 mm Oui Oui -
OFICIO 216 x 343 mm Oui Oui Oui
FOLIO 216 x 330 mm Oui Oui Oui
Enveloppe 7-3/4 (Monarch) 98,4 x 190,5 mm - Oui -
Enveloppe COM-10 105 x 241 mm - Oui -
Enveloppes DL 110 x 220 mm - Oui -
Enveloppe C5 162 x 229 mm - Oui -
Enveloppe C6 114 x 162 mm - Oui -
Personnalisée de 76 x 127 mm à 216 x 356
mm
- Oui -
Support d'impression Bac d'alimentation Passe copie Réceptacle de sortie standard
Papier Oui Oui Oui
Papier cartonné - Oui Oui
Transparents - Oui -
Étiquettes - Oui Oui
Etiquettes dual-web et intégrées - Oui Oui
Enveloppes - Oui Oui
Support d'impression Type Grammage du support d'impression
Bac 1
et Bac optionnel 2
Passe copie
Papier Papier xérographique ou entreprise 60 à 90 g/m2
grain long 60 à 135 g/m2
grain long
Papier cartonné - maximum (grain
long)
a
Bristol - 120 g/m2
Etiquette - 120 g/m2
Couverture - 135 g/m2
Papier cartonné - maximum (grain
court)
a
Bristol - 163 g/m2
Etiquette - 163 g/m2
Couverture - 163 g/m2
Transparents Imprimante laser - 138 à 146 g/m2
Etiquettes - maximum Papier - 163 g/m2
Papier dual-web - 163 g/m2
Polyester - 163 g/m2
Vinyle - 163 g/m2
Formulaires intégrés Zone sensible à la pression (à
charger dans l'imprimante en premier)
- 135 à 140 g/m2
Base papier (grain long) - 75 à 135 g/m2
Enveloppes 100 % coton grammage
maximum - 90 g/m²
Sulfate, sans bois ou papier à lettre
jusqu'à 100 % coton
- 75 à 90 g/m2L'imprimante dispose de deux emplacement de la sortie papier ; le réceptacle de sortie (face vers le bas) et le capot arrière (face vers le haut).
Assurez-vous que le capot arrière est bien fermé pour utiliser le réceptacle de sortie. Pour utiliser le capot arrière, ouvrez-le.
REMARQUE : Si le papier ne sort pas correctement du réceptacle de sortie, par exemple s'il est anormalement ondulé, essayez d'utiliser le capot arrière.
REMARQUE : Pour éviter les bourrages papier, évitez d'ouvrir ou de refermez le capot arrière alors que l'imprimante est en cours d'impression.
Impression vers le réceptacle de sortie (face vers le bas)
Le réceptacle de sortie récupère le papier imprimé face vers le bas, dans l'ordre correct. L'utilisation de ce plateau convient à la plupart des travaux.
Si nécessaire, ouvrez l'extension de sortie du papier afin d'éviter que le support d'impression ne fasse tomber le réceptacle de sortie.
Impression vers le capot arrière (face vers le haut)
En utilisant le capot arrière, le papier sort de l'imprimante face vers le haut.
Lors d'une impression du passe copie vers le capot arrière, le papier emprunte un chemin en ligne droite. L'utilisation du capot arrière améliore la qualité de
la sortie avec des supports spéciaux.
Pour utiliser le capot arrière, procédez comme suit :
Ouvrez le capot arrière en le tirant.Chargement des supports d'impression dans le bac
Vous pouvez charger environ 250 feuille de papier ordinaire dans le bac 1 ou le bac optionnel 2. Si vous avez acheté le bac optionnel 2, reportez-vous à la
section "Installation d'un bac 2 optionnel" pour plus d'informations sur l'installation. Pour la télécopie, vous ne pouvez utiliser que les formats A4, Letter ou
Legal. Pour la copie ou l'impression PC, vous pouvez utiliser différents types et formats de papier ; voir "Identification des sources et spécifications des
supports d'impression".
Suivez les instructions de chargement du support d'impression dans le bac 1 ou le bac optionnel 2. Le chargement de ces bacs s'effectue de la même façon.
1. Ouvrez le bac en le tirant vers vous et insérez le papier face à imprimer orientée vers le bas.
Le papier à en-tête peut être chargé face préimprimée vers le bas. Placez le bord supérieur de la feuille, avec le logo, à l'avant du plateau.
Pour plus d'informations sur le chargement du papier dans le bac, reportez-vous à "Chargement du papier".
Utilisation du passe copie
Outre des opérations rapides avec des types et des formats de papier qui ne sont pas actuellement chargés dans le bac d'alimentation papier, utilisez le
passe copie pour imprimer des transparents, des étiquettes, des enveloppes et des cartes postales.
Cette imprimante permet d'imprimer des cartes (fiches) de 88 x 148 mm et des supports aux formats personnalisés. Le format minimal accepté est de 76 x 127
mm et le format maximal de 216 x 356 mm.
Les supports d'impression acceptables sont le papier ordinaire avec des tailles allant de 76 x 127 mm au Legal US, 216 x 356 mm, la plus grande taille
acceptable, avec un grammage compris entre 60 et 163 g/m2
.
ATTENTION : La zone de l'unité de chauffe située à l'intérieur du capot arrière de votre imprimante devient très chaude lorsqu'elle est utilisée.
Faites attention lorsque vous accédez à cette zone.
REMARQUE : En cas de problèmes avec l'alimentation en papier, placez le papier dans le passe copie.
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez utiliser du papier préimprimé. La face imprimée doit être orientée vers le haut et le côté introduit en premier reposer bien à
plat. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes d'alimentation papier, retournez la pile. Nous ne garantissons pas la qualité d'impression.Pour utiliser le passe copie, procédez comme suit :
1. Ouvrez le passe copie et dépliez l'extension du support papier, comme illustré.
2. Si vous utilisez du papier, déramez ou ventilez le bord de la pile de papier afin de séparer les pages avant de la charger.
Pour les transparents, tenez-les par les bords et évitez de toucher le côté à imprimer. Vous pourriez laisser des empreintes qui risqueraient d'entraîner
des problèmes de qualité d'impression.
3. Chargez le support d'impression avec le côté à imprimer face vers le haut.
Selon le type de papier employé, maintenez la méthode de chargement suivantes :
l Enveloppes : Insérez-les côté adresse vers le bas et zone réservée au timbre en haut à gauche.
l Transparents : chargez-les face à imprimer vers le haut, le bord muni d'une bande adhésive passant en premier dans le chargeur.
l Étiquettes : chargez-les côté à imprimer vers le haut et le bord court entrant en premier dans le chargeur.
l Papier préimprimé : chargez les feuilles face préimprimée vers le haut, le bord supérieur orienté vers l'imprimante.
l Papier cartonné : chargez-les côté à imprimer vers le haut et le bord court entrant en premier dans le chargeur.
l Papier préimprimé : la face imprimée doit être orientée vers le bas et le côté introduit en premier reposer bien à plat.
4. Appuyez sur le guide de largeur et réglez-le à la largeur du support d'impression. Ne forcez pas trop fort sous peine de plier le papier et de provoquer
un bourrage papier ou une mise de travers du papier.
5. Définissez le type et le format de papier une fois celui-ci chargé dans le passe copie. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du type de papier"pour plus
d'informations sur la copie et la télécopie, ou à la "Onglet Papier"pour en savoir plus sur l'impression avec le PC.
REMARQUE : Chargez uniquement les supports d'impression indiqués dans "Spécifications" à la "Spécifications du papier" afin d'éviter les bourrages
papier et les problèmes liés à la qualité d'impression.
REMARQUE : Aplatissez toute ondulation sur des cartes postales, des enveloppes et des étiquettes avant de les charger dans le passe copie.6. Une fois l'impression terminée, repliez l'extension du support d'impression et fermez le passe copie.
Conseils sur l'utilisation du passe copie
l Ne chargez qu'un seul format d'un support d'impression à la fois dans le passe copie.
l Pour éviter les bourrages papier, n'ajoutez pas de papier tant qu'il reste du papier dans le passe copie. Cela s'applique également aux autres types de
support.
l Les supports d'impression doivent être chargés face vers le haut, le bord supérieur inséré en premier dans le passe copie, et être placés au centre du
bac.
l Chargez uniquement les supports d'impression spécifiés dans "Consignes relatives aux supports d'impression" afin d'éviter les bourrages papier et des
problèmes de qualité d'impression.
l Aplatissez toute ondulation sur des cartes postales, des enveloppes et des étiquettes avant de les charger dans le passe copie.
l Lorsque vous imprimez sur un support formaté 76 x 127 mm placé sur le passe copie, ouvrez le capot arrière afin que le chemin du papier soit en ligne
droite, et éviter ainsi des bourrages papier.
l Vérifiez que le capot arrière est ouvert lorsque vous imprimez sur des transparents. S'il n'est pas ouvert, les transparents risquent de se déchirer
lorsqu'ils sortent de l'appareil.
Configuration du format de papier
Une fois le papier chargé dans le bac d'alimentation, vous devez définir le format du papier à l'aide des touches du panneau de commande. Cette configuration
s'applique aux modes Télécopie et Copie. En mode d'impression PC, vous devez sélectionner le type de papier dans l'application utilisée.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CONFIG PAPIER.
3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à FORMAT PAPIER.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le bac d'alimentation papier que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis appuyez sur OK (
).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour trouver le format de papier que vous utiliser, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Configuration du type de papier
Une fois le papier chargé dans le bac d'alimentation papier ou le passe copie, vous devez définir le type de papier à l'aide des touches du panneau de
commande. Cette configuration s'applique aux modes Télécopie et Copie. En mode Fax, vous ne pouvez choisir que Papier ordinaire. En mode d'impression PC,
vous devez sélectionner le type de papier dans l'application utilisée.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CONFIG PAPIER.
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TYPE PAPIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour trouver le type de papier que vous utilisez, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
REMARQUE : Le paramétrage établi à partir du pilote d'impression remplace le paramétrage du panneau de commande.
ATTENTION : Vérifiez que le capot arrière est ouvert lorsque vous imprimez sur des transparents. S'il n'est pas ouvert, les transparents
risquent de se déchirer lorsqu'ils sortent de l'appareil. Impression
Impression d'un document
Votre imprimante imprime des documents à l'aide d'un pilote d'impression GDI (interface de dispositif graphique), PCL (langage de commande d'imprimante) ou
Postscript (PS). Lorsque vous installez le logiciel Dell, votre imprimante installe automatiquement les pilotes d'impression GDI et PCL. L'installation du pilote
d'impression PS est en option. Reportez-vous à la "Installation du logiciel Dell pour impression en mode local".
Les pilotes fournis avec votre imprimante offre un choix étendu d'options. A l'aide du tableau ci-dessous, vous pourrez déterminer quel pilote d'impression est
le plus approprié selon les tâches effectuées.
Les fonctions fournies par chaque pilote d'impression sont les suivantes :
La procédure ci-dessous décrit les étapes à suivre pour effectuer des impressions à partir de diverses applications Windows. Les étapes peuvent légèrement
varier d'une application à l'autre. Pour plus d'informations sur la procédure exacte d'impression, reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation du logiciel.
1. Ouvrez le document à imprimer.
2. Dans le menu Fichier, sélectionnez Imprimer.
La boîte de dialogue Imprimer (ou Impression) s'affiche. Son apparence peut légèrement varier selon les applications.
Cette fenêtre permet de sélectionner les options d'impression de base, parmi lesquelles le nombre de copies et les pages à imprimer.
3. Sélectionnez le pilote d'impression que vous souhaitez utiliser dans la fenêtre Impression.
4. Afin de profiter des fonctionnalités d'impression offertes par votre imprimante, cliquez sur Préférences ou Propriétés, selon le programme ou le
système d'exploitation dans la fenêtre ci-dessus, puis passez à l'étape 5.
Si vous voyez Configuration, Imprimante ou Options, cliquez alors sur ce bouton. Sur l'écran suivant, cliquez sur Propriétés.
Impression d'un document Impression d'affiches
Paramètres de l'imprimante Impression recto-verso
Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille Impression de filigranes
Modification de l'échelle d'un document Utilisation de surimpressions
Impression d'un document sur un format de papier donné
Fonction Pilote d'imprimante
GDI PS PCL
Économie d'encre Oui Oui Oui
Option de qualité d'impression Oui Oui Oui
Poster Oui N Oui
Réduire/Agrandir Oui Oui Oui
Plusieurs pages par côté Oui Oui Oui
Ajuster à la page Oui Oui Oui
Filigrane Oui N Oui
Surimpression Oui N Oui5. Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante.
6. Pour démarrer la tâche d'impression, dans la fenêtre Imprimer, cliquez sur Imprimer ou OK selon le programme ou le système d'exploitation.
Annulation d'une impression
Il existe deux méthodes pour annuler une impression.
Pour arrêter une impression à partir du panneau de commande :
Appuyez sur Annuler ( ).
Votre imprimante termine l'impression de la page en cours et supprime le reste de la tâche d'impression. Le fait d'appuyer sur cette touche annule uniquement
l'impression en cours. Si plusieurs travaux ont été mémorisés, vous devez appuyer sur la touche pour annuler chacun d'entre eux.
Pour arrêter une impression à partir du dossier Imprimantes :
1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows, puis pointez sur Paramètres.
2. Sous Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur Paramètres et pointez sur Imprimantes.
Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes.
3. Pointez sur l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815.
4. Dans le menu Document, cliquez sur Annuler (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista) ou Annuler l'impression (Windows 98/Me).
Paramètres de l'imprimante
Vous pouvez utiliser la fenêtre des propriétés d'imprimante, qui vous permet d'accéder à toutes les options d'imprimante utiles lorsque vous utilisez votre
imprimante. Une fois les propriétés de l'imprimante affichées, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres requis pour l'impression.
La fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante peut varier en fonction du pilote d'impression que vous avez sélectionné et de votre système d'exploitation. Pour
plus d'informations sur la sélection d'un pilote d'impression, reportez-vous à la section "Impression d'un document". Le Guide d'utilisation présente la fenêtre
des préférences d'impression du pilote d'impression GDI sous Windows XP.
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez accéder à cette fenêtre de façon simple en double-cliquant sur l'icône d'imprimante située dans la partie inférieure droite du
bureau Windows.a. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows.
b. Sous Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur Paramètres et pointez sur Imprimantes.
Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes.
c. Pointez sur l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815.
d. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône d'imprimante et :
l Sous Windows 98/Me, cliquez sur Propriétés.
l Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, cliquez sur Configuration de l'impression ou Propriétés, puis pointez sur Options
d'impression.
l Sous Windows NT 4.0, cliquez sur Donnees du doc. par defaut.
e. Modifiez les paramètres nécessaires sous chaque onglet, puis cliquez sur OK.
Onglet Mise en page
L'onglet Mise en page permet de présenter le document tel qu'il sera sur la page imprimée. La section Options de mise en page propose des options
d'impression avancées, comme Plusieurs pages par face et Impression d'affiche.
Onglet Papier
Les options suivantes de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés permettent de définir les paramètres relatifs à la gestion du papier. Cliquez sur l'onglet Papier
pour accéder aux propriétés du papier.
REMARQUE : La plupart des applications Windows l'emportent sur les paramètres spécifiés au niveau du pilote d'impression. Commencez donc par
modifier tous les paramètres d'impression dans l'application, puis les paramètres restants dans le pilote d'impression.
REMARQUE : Les paramètres modifiés ne restent en vigueur que le temps d'utilisation du programme en cours. Pour que vos modifications deviennent
permanentes, entrez-les dans le dossier Imprimantes. Suivez les étapes ci-après :
Propriété Description
Orientation du
papier
Orientation du papier permet de choisir le sens de l'impression.
Pour faire tourner la page sur 180 degrés, sélectionnez 180 dans la liste déroulante Rotation.
• L'option Portrait imprime les données sur la largeur de la page, dans le style d'une lettre.
• L'option Paysage imprime les données sur la longueur de la page, dans le style d'une feuille de calcul.
Options de mise
en page
Options de mise en page permet de sélectionner des options d'impression avancées. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la
"Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille"et à la "Impression d'affiches".
Impression
recto-verso
Impression recto-verso permet d'imprimer en mode recto-verso. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Impression rectoverso".Onglet Graphiques
Les options de l'onglet Graphiques permettent de régler la qualité d'impression en fonction de vos besoins. Cliquez sur l'onglet Graphiques pour afficher les
paramètres présentés ci-dessous.
Propriété Description
Copies (1-999) Copies (1-999) permet de choisir le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. La limite est fixée à 999.
Format
L'option Format permet de choisir le format du papier inséré dans le bac d'alimentation papier.
Si le format requis n'apparaît pas dans la zone Format, cliquez sur Personnalisé. Dans la fenêtre du Réglage papier personnalisé
qui s'affiche, définissez le format de papier, puis cliquez sur OK. Le paramètre apparaît alors dans la liste afin que vous puissiez le
sélectionner.
Alimentation Vérifiez que Alimentation s'applique bien au bac d'alimentation papier correspondant.
Si la source d'alimentation papier est définie à Sélection automatique, l'imprimante commence par prélever automatiquement les
supports d'impression dans le passe copie, puis dans le bac d'alimentation papier.
Type Vérifiez que Type est bien défini à Options par défaut. Si vous utilisez un support différent, sélectionnez le type correspondant. Pour
plus d'informations sur les supports d'impression, reportez-vous à la section "Consignes relatives aux supports d'impression".
Première page Cette option permet d'utiliser un type de papier différent pour la première page d'un document. Vous pouvez sélectionner
l'alimentation papier pour la première page.
Type impr. Type impr. permet de sélectionner des options d'impression avancées.
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Modification de l'échelle d'un document"et à la "Impression d'un document sur un
format de papier donné".
Propriété DescriptionOnglet Autres options
Cliquez sur l'onglet Autres options pour accéder aux fonctions suivantes :
Résolution Vous pouvez sélectionner la résolution d'impression en choisissant 1200 ppp (optimale) ou 600 ppp (normale). Plus la valeur
est élevée, plus les caractères et les graphiques imprimés sont nets. En revanche, une résolution élevée peut augmenter le
temps d'impression d'un document.
Mode image Une fois imprimés, certains caractères présentent des bords irréguliers. Activez cette option Mode image pour améliorer la
qualité d'impression de vos textes et donner un aspect plus lissé aux caractères.
• Normal : ce réglage permet d'imprimer un texte en mode normal.
• Amélioration du texte : ce réglage permet d'améliorer la qualité d'impression des caractères par un lissage des bords
irréguliers apparaissant au niveau des angles et des courbes de chaque caractère.
Mode économie
d'encre
En sélectionnant cette option, vous augmentez la durée d'utilisation de la cartouche d'encre, tout en réduisant le coût par page,
au prix d'une faible réduction de la qualité d'impression.
• Configuration de l'imprimante : Si vous sélectionnez cette option, c'est le réglage que vous avez effectué sur le
panneau de commande qui détermine la fonctionnalité ECO TONER.
• Activé : sélectionnez cette option pour permettre à l'imprimante d'utiliser moins de toner sur chaque page.
• Désactivé : sélectionnez cette option si vous n'avez pas besoin d'économiser l'encre lors de l'impression.
Options avancées Vous pouvez effectuer des réglages avancés en cliquant sur le bouton Options avancées.
Obscurité
Cette option permet d'augmenter ou de diminuer le contraste du document imprimé.
Options TrueType
cette option détermine la façon dont l'imprimante traite graphiquement le texte d'un document. Sélectionnez le paramètre
adéquat en fonction de votre document.
Imprimer tout le texte en noir
Si vous cochez la case Imprimer tout le texte en noir, tout le texte du document est imprimé en noir plein, quelle que soit la
couleur dans laquelle il apparaît à l'écran. Décochez cette case pour que le texte en couleur soit imprimé en niveaux de gris.
Imprimer tout le texte en foncéa
Lorsque la case à cocher de l'option Imprimer tout le texte en foncéa est activée, tout le texte de votre document est alors
imprimé de façon plus foncée que pour un document normal.
• Normal : Sélectionnez cette option pour imprimer les images en mode normal.
• Clair : sélectionnez cette option pour diminuer le contraste de l'image.
• Foncé : sélectionnez cette option pour augmenter le contraste de l'image.
• Télécharger en tant que bitmap : Si vous sélectionnez cette option, le pilote télécharge les polices utilisées sous
forme d'images binaires. Cette option permet d'imprimer plus rapidement des documents comportant des polices
complexes de langues telles que le coréen ou le chinois.
• Imprimer en tant que graphique : si vous sélectionnez cette option, le pilote télécharge les polices utilisées sous forme de
graphiques. Cette option permet d'améliorer la vitesse d'impression de documents comportant de nombreux graphiques et
relativement peu de polices TrueType.Onglet À propos
Utilisez l'onglet À propos pour afficher les informations de copyright et le numéro de version du pilote. Si vous possédez un navigateur Internet, vous pouvez
vous connecter à Internet en cliquant sur l'icône du site Web.
Utilisation d'un réglage favori
L'option Favoris, qui est visible sous chaque onglet des propriétés, vous permet d'enregistrer les paramètres de propriétés actuels pour un usage ultérieur.
Pour enregistrer vos paramètres favoris :
1. Modifiez les réglages dans chaque onglet selon vos préférences.
2. Donnez un nom à l'élément dans la zone de saisie Favoris.
3. Cliquer sur Enreg.
Pour utiliser un paramétrage enregistré, sélectionnez le nom correspondant dans la liste déroulante Favoris.
Pour supprimer un paramétrage enregistré, sélectionnez le nom correspondant dans la liste, puis cliquez sur Supprimer.
Propriété Description
Filigrane Vous pouvez créer une image en arrière-plan du texte à imprimer sur chaque page de votre document. Reportez-vous à la
"Impression de filigranes". Cette fonctionnalité n'est pas disponible si vous utilisez le pilote Postscript (PS).
Surimpression Les surimpressions remplacent souvent les formulaires préimprimés et les papiers à en-tête. Reportez-vous à la "Utilisation de
surimpressions".
Options de sortie
vous pouvez définir l'ordre d'impression des pages. Sélectionnez l'ordre d'impression désiré dans la liste déroulante.
• Normal (1, 2, 3) : permet d'imprimer les pages de la première à la dernière.
• Ordre inversé (3, 2, 1) : permet d'imprimer toutes les pages dans l'ordre inverse.
• Pages impaires : permet d'imprimer uniquement les pages impaires de votre document.
• Pages paires : permet d'imprimer uniquement les pages paires de votre document.Vous pouvez également restaurer les réglages par défaut du pilote d'impression en sélectionnant Options par défaut dans la liste.
Utilisation de l'aide
Votre imprimante propose un écran d'aide que vous pouvez activer à l'aide du bouton Aide de la fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante. Ces écrans d'aide
donnent des indications détaillées sur les fonctions du pilote d'impression.
Vous pouvez également cliquer sur dans l'angle supérieur droit de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés, puis sur le paramètre à propos duquel vous
souhaitez obtenir des explications.
Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille
Modification de l'échelle d'un document
Vous pouvez sélectionner le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une même feuille. Si vous choisissez d'imprimer plusieurs pages par feuille,
celles-ci apparaissent dans un format réduit. Vous pouvez imprimer jusqu'à 16 pages par feuille.
1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante.
2. Sous l'onglet Mise en page, choisissez Plusieurs pages par face dans la liste déroulante Mise en p.
3. Dans la liste déroulante Pages par face, sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer par feuille (1, 2, 4, 6, 9 ou 16).
4. Si nécessaire, Sélectionnez l'ordre des pages dans la liste déroulante Ordre des pages.
Cochez la case Bordures pour imprimer une bordure autour de chaque page sur la feuille. Bordures n'est activé que si le paramètre
Pages par face est défini à un nombre supérieur à un.
5. Sous l'onglet Papier, sélectionnez la source d'alimentation, le format et le type de papier.
6. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document.Impression d'un document sur un format de papier donné
Impression d'affiches
Vous pouvez mettre à l'échelle le document que vous souhaitez imprimer.
1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante.
2. Sous l'onglet Papier, sélectionnez Réduire/Agrandir dans la liste déroulante Type impr.
3. Entrez le taux d'échelle dans la zone de saisie Facteur.
Vous pouvez également cliquez sur les touches ou .
4. Sélectionnez la source d'alimentation, le format et le type de papier.
5. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document.
Cette fonction vous permet d'adapter une tâche d'impression à tout format de papier, quelle que soit la taille du document numérisé. Elle
peut s'avérer utile pour vérifier les détails d'un petit document.
1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante.
2. Sous l'onglet Papier, sélectionnez Ajuster à la page dans la liste déroulante Type impr.
3. Sélectionnez le format approprié dans la liste déroulante Taille de sortie.
4. Sélectionnez la source d'alimentation, le format et le type de papier.
5. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document.Impression recto-verso
Cette fonction vous permet d'imprimer un document d'une seule page sur 4, 9 ou 16 pages que vous pouvez coller ensemble pour former
un poster.
1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante.
2. Sous l'onglet Mise en page, sélectionnez Impression d'affiche dans la liste déroulante Mise en p.
3. Configurer l'option Affiche :
Vous pouvez sélectionner la mise en page dans Affiche<2x2>, Affiche<3x3> ou Affiche<4x4>. Si vous sélectionnez
Affiche<2x2>, la sortie sera automatiquement agrandie pour occuper 4 feuilles.
Définissez un chevauchement en millimètres ou en pouces pour reconstituer plus aisément l'affiche.
4. Sous l'onglet Papier, sélectionnez la source d'alimentation, le format et le type de papier.
5. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document. Vous pouvez reconstituer le poster en collant les feuilles imprimées.
Votre imprimante imprime des deux côtés du papier automatiquement.
Avant d'imprimer, vous devez sélectionner le bord auquel s'appliquera la reliure sur votre document fini. Les options de reliure disponibles
sont les suivantes :
l Bord long, qui permet de relier un document dans le style d'un livre.
l Bord court, qui permet de relier un document dans le style d'un calendrier.1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante.
2. Sous l'onglet Mise en page, sélectionnez l'orientation du papier.
3. Dans la section Impression recto-verso, sélectionnez l'option de reliure de votre choix.
4. Sous l'onglet Papier, sélectionnez la source d'alimentation, le format et le type de papier.
5. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document.
Votre imprimante imprime des deux côtés du papier automatiquement.
Impression de filigranes
Utilisation d'un filigrane existant
1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante.
2. Sous l'onglet Autres options, sélectionnez un filigrane dans la liste déroulante Filigrane. Il apparaît dans la fenêtre d'aperçu.
3. Cliquez sur OK pour lancer l'impression.
Création d'un filigrane
1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante.
REMARQUE : N'effectuez pas d'impression recto/verso sur des étiquettes, des transparents, des enveloppes ou du papier épais, Vous risqueriez de
provoquer des bourrages ou d'endommager l'imprimante.
REMARQUE : Pour utiliser le mode recto-verso, vous ne pouvez utiliser que les formats de papier suivants : A4, Letter, Legal et Folio.
L'option Filigrane vous permet d'imprimer du texte sur un document existant. Par exemple, vous pouvez imprimer le texte "BROUILLON" ou
"CONFIDENTIEL" en diagonale sur la première page ou sur toutes les pages d'un document.
Plusieurs filigranes prédéfinis sont fournis avec votre imprimante. Vous pouvez les modifier ou en ajouter des nouveaux à la liste. 2. Sous l'onglet Autres options, cliquez sur Modifier dans la section Filigrane. La fenêtre Modifier filigranes s'affiche.
3. Entrez le texte à imprimer dans la zone Texte du filigrane.
Le texte s'affiche dans la fenêtre d'aperçu d'image. Cette fenêtre vous permet de voir l'apparence du filigrane avant l'impression.
Si la case Première page seulement est cochée, le filigrane s'imprime sur la première page uniquement.
4. Sélectionnez les options de filigrane souhaitées.
Vous pouvez choisir la police, le style et la taille et l'échelle de gris dans la zone Attributs de police, et définir l'inclinaison du filigrane dans la zone Angle
du texte.
5. Pour ajouter un nouveau filigrane à la liste, cliquez sur Ajouter.
6. Lorsque le filigrane est créé, cliquez sur OK pour lancer l'impression.
Pour arrêter l'impression du filigrane, sélectionnez Sans filigrane dans la liste déroulante Filigrane.
Modification d'un filigrane
1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante.
2. Sous l'onglet Autres options, cliquez sur Modifier dans la section Filigrane. La fenêtre Modifier filigranes s'affiche.
3. Dans la liste Filigranes actuels, sélectionnez le filigrane à modifier, puis modifiez le message du filigrane ainsi que les options.
4. Cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour enregistrer les modifications.
5. Cliquer sur OK.
Suppression d'un filigrane
1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante.
2. Sous l'onglet Autres options, cliquez sur Modifier dans la section Filigrane. La fenêtre Modifier filigranes s'affiche.
3. Dans la liste Filigranes actuels, sélectionnez le filigrane à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Supprimer.
4. Cliquer sur OK.
Utilisation de surimpressions
Qu'est-ce qu'une surimpression ?
Création d'une nouvelle surimpression de page
Les surimpressions consistent en du texte et/ou en des images enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur sous un format spécial et qui
peuvent être imprimés sur n'importe quel document. Les surimpressions remplacent souvent les formulaires préimprimés et les papiers à
en-tête. Plutôt que d'avoir recours à un en-tête préimprimé, vous pouvez créer une surimpression comportant les mêmes informations que
cet en-tête. Pour imprimer une lettre avec l'en-tête de votre compagnie, il n'est pas nécessaire que vous chargiez un papier à en-tête
préimprimé dans l'imprimante. Vous devez simplement dire à l'imprimante d'appliquer la surimpression d'en-tête sur votre document.Utilisation d'une surimpression de page
Une fois la surimpression créée, vous pouvez l'imprimer en l'appliquant à votre document. Pour imprimer une surimpression avec un document :
1. Créez ou ouvrez le document à imprimer.
2. Pour changer les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, accédez à la fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante.
3. Cliquez sur l'onglet Autres options.
4. Sélectionnez la surimpression à imprimer dans la zone de liste déroulante Surimpression.
5. Si le fichier de surimpression n'apparaît pas sur la liste Liste des surimpressions, cliquez sur Modifier, puis sur Charger surimpression, et sélectionnez
ensuite le fichier de surimpression.
Pour utiliser une surimpression de page, vous devez préalablement la créer, et y insérer un logo ou une image.
1. Créez ou ouvrez un document contenant le texte ou l'image que vous souhaitez utiliser comme nouvelle surimpression de page.
Placez les éléments exactement comme vous souhaitez qu'ils apparaissent à l'impression sous forme de surimpression. Le cas
échéant, sauvegardez le fichier pour un usage ultérieur.
2. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante.
3. Sous l'onglet Autres options, cliquez sur Modifier dans la section Surimpression.
4. Dans la fenêtre Modifier surimpressions, cliquez sur Créer surimpression.
5. Dans la zone Nom du fichier de la fenêtre Créer surimpression, entrez un nom de huit caractères maximum. Sélectionnez le chemin
de destination, si nécessaire. (Le chemin par défaut est C:\FormOver).
6. Cliquer sur Enregistrer. Vous pouvez voir le nom sur la Liste des surimpressions.
7. Cliquez sur OK ou Oui jusqu'à ce que la création soit terminée.
Le fichier n'est pas imprimé ; il est enregistré dans votre ordinateur.
REMARQUE : la taille du document de surimpression doit être identique à celle des documents imprimés avec la surimpression. Vous
ne pouvez pas créer de surimpression comportant un filigrane.
REMARQUE : Le fichier de surimpression et le document doivent avoir la même résolution. La fenêtre Charger surimpression permet également de charger les fichiers de surimpression enregistrés sur une source externe, telle qu'un CD ou une
disquette.
Après avoir sélectionné le fichier, cliquez sur Ouvrir. Le fichier apparaît maintenant dans la zone Liste des surimpressions et est disponible pour
l'impression. Sélectionnez la surimpression dans la zone Liste des surimpressions.
6. Si nécessaire, cliquez sur Confirmer surimpression. Lorsque cette case est cochée, à chaque fois que vous lancez une impression, un message vous
invite à confirmer que vous souhaitez imprimer une surimpression sur votre document.
Si vous répondez Oui dans la fenêtre, la surimpression sélectionnée sera imprimée avec votre document. Si vous répondez No l'utilisation de la page de
surimpression est annulée.
Si cette case n'est pas cochée et qu'une surimpression est sélectionnée, celle-ci sera automatiquement imprimée avec votre document.
7. Cliquez sur OK ou Oui jusqu'au lancement de l'impression.
La surimpression sélectionnée est téléchargée avec le document et imprimée sur la feuille.
Suppression d'une surimpression
Vous pouvez supprimer les surimpressions dont vous ne vous servez plus.
1. Dans la fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante, cliquez sur l'onglet Autres options.
2. Cliquez sur Modifier dans la section Surimpression.
3. Sélectionnez la surimpression à supprimer dans la zone Liste des surimpressions.
4. Cliquer sur Supprimer surimpression.
5. Lorsque le message de confirmation apparaît, cliquez sur Oui.
6. Cliquez sur OK jusqu'à ce vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer.Numérisation
Généralités concernant la numérisation
Utilisez votre Dell Laser MFP 1815dn pour convertir les illustrations et les textes en images éditables sur votre ordinateur. Après avoir installé le logiciel à
partir du CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires, vous pouvez commencer à numéroser des images soit à l'aide du panneau de commande soit en utilisant des
applications comme Dell ScanCenter™, PaperPort et Adobe PhotoShop installées sur votre ordinateur. Via le réseau, vous pouvez également utiliser la
numérisation en réseau, pour numériser un document sur votre imprimante (sous la forme d'un fichier JPEG, TIFF ou PDF) et l'enregistrer ensuite sur un
ordinateur connecté au réseau. Vous pouvez aussi envoyer l'image numérisée sous la forme d'une pièce jointe directement à partir de votre imprimante.
Le type de résolution à utiliser pour la numérisation d'un élément à l'aide de PaperPort dépend du type d'élément considéré et de la façon dont vous
envisagez d'utiliser l'image ou le document une fois l'élément numérisé sur votre ordinateur. Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats possibles, utilisez les
paramètres recommandés suivants.
Généralités concernant la numérisation Configuration des e-mails
Numérisation vers une application Numérisation et envoi d'un e-mail
Utilisation de la numérisation en réseau Configuration du Carnet d'adresses
Numérisation à l'aide du pilote WIA (Windows Image Acquisition) Numéros de groupe
Numérisation vers une clé de mémoire USB Modification des paramètres par défaut
Gestion d'une clé de mémoire USB Renvoi de fax vers des adresses e-mail
REMARQUE : PaperPort est le programme de numérisation fourni avec votre imprimante.
REMARQUE : Les applications Dell ScanCenter et PaperPort ne sont pas prises en charge dans le système d'exploitation Windows Server 2003, XP
(édition x64), et Vista.
Type d'objet Résolution
Documents 300 ppp, noir et blanc – ou – 200 ppp, nuances de gris ou couleur
Documents de qualité médiocre ou imprimés en petits caractères 400 ppp, noir et blanc – ou – 300 ppp, nuances de gris
Photos et éléments graphiques 100 à 200 ppp, couleur – ou – 200 ppp, nuances de gris
Images sur imprimante jet d'encre de 150 ppp à 300 ppp
Images sur imprimante haute résolution de 300 ppp à 600 ppp
Toute numérisation réalisée à une résolution supérieure à celles présentées ci-dessus excédera les capacités de l'application. Si vous devez réaliser des
numérisations à des résolutions supérieures à celles recommandées dans le tableau précédent, nous vous conseillons de réduire la taille de votre image en la
prévisualisant (ou en la pré-numérisant), puis en la recadrant avant de la numériser.
Si vous préférez utiliser une autre application, comme Adobe PhotoShop, vous devez attribuer l'application à l'imprimante en la sélectionnant dans la liste des
applications disponibles. Consultez "Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante" .
Dell ScanCenter est une application PaperPort qui permet de numériser des éléments et de les envoyer directement à PaperPort ou à d'autres programmes de
votre ordinateur sans nécessité d'exécuter en premier lieu PaperPort. Dell ScanCenter fonctionne en tant qu'application séparée du menu Démarrer de
Windows et affiche la barre Dell ScanCenter. Pour de plus amples informations concernant l'utilisation de Dell ScanCenter, reportez-vous au menu d'aide de
PaperPort.
Les icônes situées sur la barre Dell ScanCenter correspondent à des programmes exécutés uniquement dans PaperPort et Dell ScanCenter. Pour numériser et
envoyer un élément vers un programme, cliquez sur l'icône du programme, puis numérisez l'élément en question. Dell ScanCenter lance automatiquement le
programme sélectionné, une fois la numérisation effectuée.
REMARQUE : Le logiciel d'OCR intégré à PaperPort permet d'extraire le texte d'un document numérisé et de l'utiliser dans un éditeur de texte, une
application de traitement de texte ou un tableur. Le processus d'OCR exige une résolution comprise entre 150 et 600 ppp pour les images de texte et
de 300 ou 600 ppp pour les graphiques.
REMARQUE : La première fois que vous utilisez PaperPort, ouvrez l'application sur votre ordinateur avant de lancer la numérisation, pour que le
document numérisé soit enregistré sur votre ordinateur.Numérisation vers une application
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance PC, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'application vers laquelle vous voulez envoyer l'image numérisée. Les applications
par défaut sont MS Paint, Email, Mes documents, PaperPort et OCR.
l MS Paint : Envoie l'image numérisée à Microsoft Paint.
l E-MAIL : Envoie l'image numérisée au programme e-mail par défaut sur l'ordinateur. Une fenêtre de nouveau message s'ouvre, avec l'image en
pièce jointe.
l MES DOCUMENTS : Sauvegarde l'image numérisée dans le dossier Mes documents de votre ordinateur.
l PaperPort : Envoie l'image numérisée à PaperPort.
l OCR : Envoie l'image numérisée vers l'OCR.
5. Appuyez sur Départ ( ). La fenêtre de l'application sélectionnée s'ouvre. Réglez les paramètres de numérisation et lancez la numérisation. Pour plus
d'informations, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi de l'application.
Utilisation de la numérisation en réseau
À propos de la numérisation en réseau
La numérisation en réseau vous permet de numériser avec votre imprimante votre document en tant que fichier JPEG, TIFF ou PDF et de l'enregistrer sur un
ordinateur connecté au réseau. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez installer la numérisation en réseau sur votre ordinateur.
Ajout d'un utilisateur
Pour vous enregistrer en tant qu'utilisateur autorisé de la numérisation en réseau, suivez les instructions à l'écran du Gestionnaire de numérisation en réseau
Dell.
1. Cliquez sur le bouton Ajout de périphérique.
2. Cliquer sur Suivant.
3. Indiquez le scanner dans le réseau que vous souhaitez utiliser en le sélectionnant à l'emplacement correspondant ou en indiquant son adresse IP pour
vous connecter directement au scanner. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation d'une adresse IP, reportez-vous à la section "Ajout d'un scanner".
Cliquer sur Suivant.
4. Entrez votre identifiant et votre numéro d'identification personnelle (PIN), puis cliquez sur Suivant.
Suppression d'un utilisateur
Pour supprimer un utilisateur autorisé, cliquez sur le bouton Suppression de périphérique et suivez les instructions à l'écran.
Utilisation de la numérisation en réseau
REMARQUE : La liste des applications du panneau de commande accepte jusqu'à 30 applications ; son affichage est uniquement en anglais.
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez ajouter d'autres logiciels compatibles TWAIN pour la numérisation, comme Adobe Photoshop Deluxe, ou Adobe Photoshop, à
l'aide de l'Utilitaire de paramétrage de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "La section Destination".
REMARQUE : Cliquez sur le bouton Aide pour consulter l'aide en ligne sur la numérisation en réseau.Grâce à la numérisation en réseau, vous pouvez numériser un document depuis votre imprimante et l'enregistrer sur votre ordinateur via le réseau.
1. Placez le document que vous souhaitez numériser soit dans le CAD, soit sur la vitre d'exposition.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance PC, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le nom enregistré de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Entrez le PIN que vous avez enregistré, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le programme que vous utiliserez, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
8. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance Config. num., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
9. Choisissez le type de fichier et la résolution, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
l NOIR & BLANC : Si vous avez sélectionné cette option, sélectionnez un type de fichier PDF ou TIFF.
l COUL.-JPEG200 : Si vous avez sélectionné cette option, la résolution de 200 ppp et le type de fichier JPEG peuvent être automatiquement
sélectionnés.
l RESOLUTION : Choisissez une résolution de 100 ppp, 200 ppp ou 300 ppp.
10. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher DEMAR. NUMER., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Si vous appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque DECONNEXION s'affiche, votre imprimante sera hors session.
11. Le document peut être numérisé et enregistré sur l'ordinateur si la numérisation en réseau est activée. Si votre type de fichier est TIFF ou PDF, le
message qui s'affiche à l'écran vous demande si vous souhaitez numériser une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI à l'aide des boutons de défilement ( ou
), puis appuyez sur OK ( ). La page suivante est numérisée et constitue la deuxième page du document. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à ce que la
totalité des pages soit numérisée, puis sélectionnez NON.
Ajout d'un scanner
Pour enregistrer votre scanner en tant que scanner de réseau autorisé, utilisez la fenêtre du Gestionnaire de numérisation en réseau Dell.
1. Dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de numérisation en réseau Dell, cliquez sur la touche Ajout de périphérique ou double-cliquez sur l'icône Ajout de
périphérique.
2. Cliquer sur Suivant.
3. Sélectionnez Rechercher un scanner. (recommandé) ou Se connecter au scanner considéré. Si vous sélectionnez Se connecter au scanner considéré,
entrez une adresse IP, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
4. Une liste de scanners connectés à votre réseau apparaît. Sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste et saisissez son nom, l'identifiant ainsi que le
numéro d'identification personnelle (PIN). Cliquer sur Suivant.
l Vous pouvez saisir un identifiant d'une longueur maximale de 8 caractères. Le premier caractère doit être une lettre.
l Le code PIN doit comporter quatre chiffres. Cette option est facultative. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option de mot de passe par défaut.5. Si vous avez ajouté votre imprimante au réseau, cliquez sur Terminer. Votre imprimante apparaît dans la fenêtre du Gestionnaire de numérisation en
réseau Dell. Vous pouvez à présent numériser des documents sur l'ensemble du réseau.
Configuration des propriétés
1. Dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de numérisation en réseau Dell, double-cliquez sur l'icône du scanner ou cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés.
2. Après avoir paramétré les propriétés, cliquez sur OK.
Page Général
Page ServeurPage Avancé
Page Préférences
Utilisation de la numérisation en réseau
1. Vérifiez si votre scanner est disponible grâce à l'icône d'état de votre scanner.
2. Configurez les paramètres de votre scanner dans le réseau. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration des propriétés".
3. Placez le document à numériser.
4. Lancez la numérisation conformément aux instructions de "Utilisation de la numérisation en réseau"
5. Une fois la numérisation lancée, le document numérisé est envoyé à l'emplacement que vous avez choisi. L'emplacement peut être modifié dans la page
Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés de la numérisation en réseau. Reportez-vous à la "Page Avancé".
Icônes du scannerNumérisation à l'aide du pilote WIA (Windows Image Acquisition)
Votre imprimante reconnaît également le pilote WIA de numérisation d'images. WIA est l'un des composants standard fournis par Microsoft Windows XP/Server
2003/Vista ; il fonctionne avec les appareils photo numériques et les scanners. Contrairement au pilote TWAIN, le pilote WIA permet de numériser des images
et de les manipuler facilement sans avoir recours à d'autres logiciels.
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Cliquer sur Démarrer Panneau de configuration Imprimantes et autres périphériques Scanneurs et appareils photo
Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur et cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Scanneurs et Appareils photo.
3. Double-cliquez sur l'icône de votre scanner. L'assistant Scanners et Appareils photo démarre.
4. Choisissez des options de numérisation et cliquez sur Aperçu pour obtenir un aperçu de votre image en fonction des options choisies.
5. Entrez un nom d'image, puis sélectionnez un format et une destination de fichier pour enregistrer l'image.
6. Suivez les instructions décrites à l'écran pour modifier l'image copiée sur votre ordinateur.
Numérisation vers une clé de mémoire USB
Vous pouvez numériser un document et enregistrer l'image numérisée dans une clé de mémoire USB. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez effectuer une numérisation
vers la clé de mémoire USB en utilisant les paramètres par défaut ou en sélectionnant manuellement vos propres paramètres.
À propos de la clé de mémoire USB
Il existe des clés de mémoire USB de différentes capacités de mémoire qui vous permettent de stocker des documents, présentations, téléchargements
(musique et vidéos), photographies en haute définition ou fichiers de votre choix.
Une clé de mémoire USB en option vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes :
l Numériser des documents et les enregistrer sur la clé de mémoire USB.
l Formater une clé de mémoire USB.
l Vérifier l'espace mémoire disponible.
REMARQUE : Le pilote WIA fonctionne uniquement sous Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista.
REMARQUE : Un logiciel OCR intégré à PaperPort peut copier un texte à partir de documents numérisés vers n'importe quel programme de type éditeur
de texte, traitement de texte ou feuille de calcul. Le processus OCR nécessite des images numérisées avec une résolution de 150 à 600 ppp. Une
résolution de 300 ppp ou de 600 ppp est recommandée pour des graphiques. Branchement d'une clé de mémoire USB
Le port de mémoire USB situé à l'avant de votre imprimante est prévu pour des mémoires USB V1.1.et USB V2.0. Vous devez utiliser uniquement une clé de
mémoire USB autorisée et équipée d'un connecteur de style A.
Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port USB situé à l'avant de votre imprimante.
Numérisation en utilisant les réglages par défaut
Le tableau suivant présente les réglages par défaut.
1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante.
2. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB.
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à NUMER. RAPIDE.
Votre imprimante commence par numériser le document, et l'enregistre ensuite dans votre clé de mémoire USB.
Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI
pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON.
Les documents numérisés sont sauvegardés sur la clé de mémoire USB.
Numérisation en utilisant mes réglages
Le tableau suivant présente les options que vous pouvez sélectionner.
ATTENTION : Ne retirez pas la clé de mémoire USB si l'imprimante est en cours de fonctionnement. Vous risqueriez d'endommager votre
imprimante.
ATTENTION : Si votre clé de mémoire USB possède des caractéristiques particulières, comme des paramètres de sécurité et des mots de passe,
il se peut que votre imprimante ne les détecte pas automatiquement. Pour plus d'informations sur ces caractéristiques, reportez-vous au mode
d'emploi fourni avec votre clé de mémoire USB.
Taille de l'image Format du fichier Résolution
Letter (Etats-Unis), A4 (Grande Bretagne) JPEG 200 ppp
Taille de l'image Format du fichier Couleur Résolution
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,
Executive, A5, B5, A6
JPEG, BMP, TIFF, PDF Couleur, Gris, Mono 100, 200, 300 ppp1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante.
2. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB.
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUMER. PERSO, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner la taille de l'image de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le type de fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Si vous sélectionnez BMP sélectionnez la couleur et la résolution de numérisation.
Si vous sélectionnez TIFF, sélectionnez la résolution et l'option page multiple.
8. La numérisation est lancée.
Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI
pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON.
Les documents numérisés sont sauvegardés sur la clé de mémoire USB.
Modification des réglages par défaut
Pour modifier les valeurs par défaut de numérisation rapide, procédez comme suit.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB.
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MOD. REGL. DEF, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à TAILLE IMAGE.
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance la taille de l'image, Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Executive, A5, B5 ou A6, puis
appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance VERSION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance le format du fichier, BMP, TIFF, PDF ou JPEG, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
8. Si vous sélectionnez JPEG, passez à l'étape 11.
Si vous sélectionnez TIFF ou PDF, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'option multi-pages et ensuite sur OK ( ).
Si vous sélectionnez BMP, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le mode couleur, COULEUR, GRIS, ou MONOCHROME, et
ensuite sur OK ( ).
9. Si vous sélectionnez TIFF, PDF, ou le mode couleur MONOCHROME pour BMP, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en
évidence RESOLUTION et ensuite sur OK ( ).
10. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance la résolution, 100 ppp, 200 ppp, ou 300 ppp, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
11. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Gestion d'une clé de mémoire USB
Vous pouvez supprimer des fichiers images stockés sur une clé de mémoire USB un par un, ou les supprimer tous à la fois en reformatant la clé.
Suppression d'un fichier image
Pour supprimer un fichier image numérisé et enregistré sur votre clé de mémoire USB, procédez comme suit.
1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance GEST. FICHIERS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) à l'affichage de SUPPRIMER.
6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le dossier ou le fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Si le caractère "\" est placé devant un nom de dossier, celui-ci contient un ou plusieurs dossiers.
7. Si vous avez sélectionné un fichier à l'étape 6, l'écran affiche sa taille pendant 2 secondes environ. Passez à l'étape suivante.
Si vous avez sélectionné un dossier, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK (
).
8. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque OUI apparaît pour confirmer votre choix.
9. Un message vous demande si vous souhaitez supprimer un autre fichier.
Sélectionnez OUI ou NON.
10. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Formatage d'une clé de mémoire USB
1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance GEST. FICHIERS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FORMAT, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque OUI apparaît pour confirmer votre choix.
7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Impression à partir de la clé de mémoire USB
Vous pouvez imprimer des fichiers stockés dans la clé de mémoire USB. Les formats de fichier TIFF, BMP, TXT, PDF et PRN sont pris en charges.
1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IMPR. DEPUIS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le dossier ou le fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Si vous avez sélectionné un fichier à l'étape 5, passez à l'étape suivante.
Si vous avez sélectionné un dossier, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK
( ).
7. Entrez le nom du groupe, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
L'impression est lancée.
Si le format de fichier sélectionné n'est pas pris en charge, VERSION NON COMPATIBLE apparaît.
8. Un message vous demande si vous souhaitez imprimer un autre fichier.
Sélectionnez OUI ou NON.
9. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Affichage de l'état de la clé de mémoire USB
Vous pouvez vérifier la quantité de mémoire disponible pour la numérisation et l'enregistrement de documents.
1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante.
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
REMARQUE : Seuls les fichiers TXT en anglais, les fichiers PDF produits par cette imprimante et les fichiers TIFF 6.0 sont disponibles.3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance AFFICH. ESPACE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
L'espace mémoire disponible est affiché.
5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille.
Configuration des e-mails
Pour utiliser des fonctionnalités d'e-mail comme la numérisation vers un e-mail et la transmission d'une télécopie vers des adresses e-mail, vous devez tout
d'abord configurer les paramètres du réseau et définir votre compte e-mail. Pour plus d'informations sur les paramètres du réseau, reportez-vous à la section
"Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local".
Configuration d'un compte e-mail
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance l'élément de menu de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Si nécessaire, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que l'élément de sous-menu de votre choix apparaisse, puis appuyez sur
OK ( ).
5. Entrez les informations requises ou sélectionnez l'état désiré, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Répétez les étapes 3 à 5 pour modifier d'autres options.
7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Options disponibles pour la configuration d'un compte e-mail
Numérisation et envoi d'un e-mail
1. Vérifiez que votre imprimante est bien connectée à un réseau.
2. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
option Description
SERVEUR SMTP Vous pouvez définir l'imprimante pour qu'elle accède à un serveur SMTP pour un message mail sortant.
• IP SERV. SMTP : permet d'entrer l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du serveur SMTP. Celle-ci
peut être fournie en notation décimale ou sous forme d'un nom de domaine. (par exemple
111. 222. 333. 444 ou smtp.xyz.com)
• TAILLE MAX MSG : permet de spécifier la taille maximale du mail pouvant être envoyé.
CONFIG. UTIL. Vous pouvez configurer des utilisateurs autorisés à envoyer des e-mails via votre imprimante.
• MODE SECURISE : permet d'activer ou de désactiver une authentification utilisateur. Si
vous activez une authentification, vous pouvez définir si l'imprimante doit se souvenir d'un
utilisateur autorisé après sa fin de session pour chaque transmission d'e-mail effectuée.
• AJOUT. UTILIS. : permet d'ajouter un nom de connexion et un mot de passe d'un utilisateur.
• SUPPR. UTILIS. : permet de supprimer un utilisateur autorisé.
AUTO-ENVOI Vous pouvez définir si des messages sortants doivent ou non être envoyés vers un compte e-mail.
DESTIN. DEFAUT Vous pouvez définir l'adresse e-mail par défaut pour l'adresse "De" si vous définissez le MODE SECURISE à
DESACTIVER.
OBJET DEFAUT Vous pouvez définir le sujet par défaut de vos e-mails.
TRANSF. E-MAIL Vous pouvez configurer l'imprimante pour qu'elle transfère toutes les télécopies entrantes et sortantes vers des
adresses e-mails spécifiques. Consultez "Renvoi de fax vers des adresses e-mail" .
CONTROLE ACCES Vous pouvez protéger la fonction de configuration des e-mails par un mot de passe.
DEFINIR LE CODE Vous pouvez modifier le mot de passe permettant d'accéder à la fonction de configuration des e-mails.3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à E-MAIL.
6. Entrez votre identifiant de connexion, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Entrez votre mot de passe de connexion, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
8. Entrez l'adresse e-mail du destinataire et appuyez sur OK ( ).
Un message vous demande si vous souhaitez entrer une autre adresse.
9. Pour entrer des adresses supplémentaires, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner AJOUTER, puis répétez l'étape 8.
Pour poursuivre avec l'étape suivante, appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque TERMINE apparaît.
10. Un message affiché vous demande si vous souhaitez revoir des adresses.
Pour revoir des adresses, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner OUI.
Pour continuer avec l'étape suivante, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
11. Un message affiché vous demande si vous voulez vous adresser l'e-mail à vous-même.
Pour faire un envoi à votre adresse e-mail, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner OUI.
Ou, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
12. Entrez le sujet de l'e-mail, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
13. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le type de fichier dans lequel l'image numérisée peut être convertie, puis appuyez
sur OK ( ).
14. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner la résolution de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
15. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) ou OK ( ). L'imprimante commence la numérisation et envoie ensuite l'e-mail.
16. Si le message affiché vous demande si vous souhaitez fermer la session de votre compte, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( or ) pour
sélectionner OUI ou NON, puis appuyer sur OK ( ).
17. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Configuration du Carnet d'adresses
Vous pouvez configurer le carnet d'adresses avec les adresses email que vous utilisez fréquemment. Vous pouvez alors entrer facilement et rapidement des
adresses e-mail en entrant le nom que vous avez attribué dans le carnet d'adresses.
Ajouter une adresse e-mail au carnet d'adresses
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ADRESSE E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner NOUVEAU.
5. Entrez le nom que vous voulez ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Entrez l'adresse e-mail pour le nom et appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Envoi d'un e-mail à l'aide d'une adresse e-mail
1. Chargez un document dans le chargeur automatique ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition.
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez entrer un nom que vous avez enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du Carnet
d'adresses".2. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ADRESSE E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ENVOYER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Entrez le nom de l'expéditeur, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. L'adresse e-mail que vous avez associée au nom apparaît. Appuyez sur OK ( ).
8. Entrez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Pour plus d'informations sur le mode de saisie des caractères, voir "Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la saisie de caractères".
9. L'adresse e-mail que vous avez associée au nom apparaît. Appuyez sur OK ( ).
10. Un message vous demande si vous souhaitez entrer une autre adresse.
Pour entrer des adresses supplémentaires, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner AJOUTER, puis répétez les étapes 8
et 9.
Pour poursuivre avec l'étape suivante, appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque TERMINE apparaît.
11. Un message affiché vous demande si vous souhaitez revoir des adresses.
Pour revoir les adresses, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner OUI, puis vérifiez les adresses que vous avez entrées.
Pour continuer avec l'étape suivante, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
12. Un message affiché vous demande si vous voulez vous adresser un e-mail à vous-même.
Sélectionnez OUI ou NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
13. Entrez le sujet de l'e-mail, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
14. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le type de fichier dans lequel l'image numérisée peut être convertie, puis appuyez
sur OK ( ).
15. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner la résolution de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
16. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) ou OK ( ).
L'imprimante commence la numérisation et envoie ensuite l'e-mail.
17. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque l'écran affiche DECONN. MAINT ?
Votre imprimante retourne au mode veille.
Modification ou suppression d'une adresse e-mail
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ADRESSE E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODIFIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'adresse e-mail à modifier ou à supprimer, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Pour supprimer l'adresse sélectionnée, appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Pour modifier l'adresse sélectionnée, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner MODIFIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Si vous sélectionnez MODIFIER, éditez le nom et appuyez sur OK ( ). Editez l'adresse e-mail et appuyez sur OK ( ).
8. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.Numéros de groupe
Si vous envoyez fréquemment un même document à plusieurs destinataires, vous pouvez grouper ces destinataires et les affecter à un registre de composition
de groupe. Vous pouvez dès lors envoyer un document à l'ensemble des destinations du groupe à l'aide du numéro de groupe. Vous pouvez configurer
jusqu'à 50 (de 1 à 50) numéros de groupe.
Attribution des adresses e-mail à un numéro de groupe
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner MAIL GROUPE.
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner NOUVEAU.
5. Entrez un numéro d'emplacement de groupe compris entre 1 et 50, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Entrez le nom du groupe, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Entrez le nom du destinataire que vous avez enregistré, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
8. A l'invite de AUTRE ADRESSE, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher AJOUTER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Répétez l'étape 7.
OU
Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner TERMINE.
9. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Suppression d'un numéro de groupe
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner MAIL GROUPE.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner SUPPRIMER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Entrez un numéro d'emplacement de groupe à supprimer, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) à l'affichage de OUI.
7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Modification des numéros de groupe
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner MAIL GROUPE.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODIFIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Entrez un numéro d'emplacement de groupe à modifier, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Modifiez le nom du groupe, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque AFFICHAGE apparaît pour vérifier la liste des adresses du groupe.OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher AJOUTER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ) pour ajouter d'autres adresses e-mail. Entrez le
nom du destinataire que vous avez enregistré, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher SUPPRIMER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ) pour supprimer des adresses e-mail du groupe.
Envoi d'un e-mail à l'aide d'un numéro de groupe
1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.
OU
Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.
Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original".
2. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MAIL GROUPE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ENVOYER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Si le mode sécurisé est désactivé, entrez le nom de l'expéditeur et appuyez sur OK ( ).
7. L'adresse e-mail que vous avez associée au nom apparaît. Appuyez sur OK ( ).
8. Un message affiché vous demande si vous voulez vous adresser un e-mail à vous-même.
Sélectionnez OUI ou NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
9. Entrez le numéro d'emplacement du groupe, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
10. Un message affiché vous demande si vous souhaitez revoir des adresses.
Pour revoir les adresses, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner OUI, puis vérifiez les adresses que vous avez entrées.
Pour continuer avec l'étape suivante, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
11. Entrez le sujet de l'e-mail, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
12. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le type de fichier dans lequel l'image numérisée peut être convertie, puis appuyez
sur OK ( ).
13. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner la résolution de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
14. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) ou OK ( ).
L'imprimante commence la numérisation et envoie ensuite l'e-mail.
15. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque l'écran affiche DECONN. MAINT ?
Votre imprimante retourne au mode veille.
Impression du Carnet d'adresses
Vous pouvez vérifier le paramétrage de votre carnet d'adresses et la liste du carnet d'adresses.
1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).
OU
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IMPRIMER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner INDIVIDUEL, ADRESSE GROUPE ou TOUS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).La liste sélectionnée est imprimée.
Modification des paramètres par défaut
Vous pouvez configurer des paramètres de numérisation par défaut.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGL. DEF NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à TAILLE IMAGE.
4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance la taille de l'image de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance VERSION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance le format de fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
Si vous sélectionnez TIFF ou PDF, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'option multi-pages et ensuite sur OK ( ).
Si vous sélectionnez BMP, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le mode couleur, COULEUR, GRIS, ou MONOCHROME, et
ensuite sur OK ( ).
7. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RESOLUTION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
8. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance la résolution de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
9. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TEMP. NUM RES, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
10. Entrez la valeur de temps de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
11. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.
Renvoi de fax vers des adresses e-mail
Vous pouvez configurer l'imprimante pour qu'elle transfère toutes les télécopies entrantes et sortantes vers les adresses e-mails.
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TRANSF. E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
4. Sélectionnez l'état désiré en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( or ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ).
l DESACTIVE : permet de désactiver cette fonction.
l ENVOI UNIQ. : permet de transférer seulement les télécopies sortantes vers une adresse e-mail spécifique.
l RECEPT. UNIQ. : permet de transférer seulement les télécopies entrantes vers une adresse e-mail spécifique. Lorsque vous sélectionnez cette
option, vous choisir si l'imprimante doit ou non imprimer les télécopies entrantes.
l TOUS LES FAX : permet de transférer à la fois les télécopies entrantes et sortantes vers une adresse e-mail spécifique.
5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.Généralités concernant le logiciel
Après avoir configuré votre imprimante et l'avoir connectée à votre ordinateur, installez les pilotes et les utilitaires du CD Pilotes et Utilitaires fourni avec votre
imprimante. Si vous avez acheté en même temps un ordinateur et une imprimante Dell™, les pilotes et utilitaires sont automatiquement installés. Vous n'avez
pas besoin de les installer. Le CD Pilotes et Utilitaires contient les éléments suivants :
l Pilote d'impression Dell - permet à votre ordinateur de communiquer avec votre imprimante. Pour utiliser votre imprimante en tant qu'imprimante sous
Windows, vous devez installer le ou les pilotes d'impression. Pour plus d'informations concernant l'installation des pilotes d'impression sous Windows,
reportez-vous à "Installation du logiciel sous Windows".
l Outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell - permet de surveiller l'état de votre imprimante réseau sans quitter votre bureau.
l Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante - permet de configurer le répertoire de télécopieur et d'autres options de l'imprimante depuis le bureau de votre
ordinateur. Vous pouvez également configurer l'application de destination des numérisations qui est lancée lorsque vous accédez à NUM., puis au menu
PC.
l Dell Toner Management System™- indique l'état de l'imprimante et le nom de la tâche lorsque vous envoyez une tâche en impression. La fenêtre Dell
Toner Management System indique également le niveau d'encre restant et vous permet de commander de nouvelles cartouches de toner.
l PaperPort - permet de numériser des documents, de créer des fichiers PDF et de convertir les images numérisées en fichiers Microsoft Word, Excel ou
texte. PaperPort fournit des options de numérisation avancées et permet de créer des annotations sur tous les types d'images. La fonction de
recherche avancée de PaperPort permet de rechercher des éléments selon des propriétés spécifiques.
l Dell ScanCenter™- Ce terminal vous permet de numériser rapidement des documents dans de nombreuses applications, telles que les applications de
messagerie et d'édition de photos et de texte.
l Pilote de numérisation - pour numériser des documents, les pilotes TWAIN ou WIA (Windows Image Acquisition) sont disponibles sur votre imprimante.
l Guide d'utilisation– la documentation HTML fournit des informations détaillées concernant l'utilisation de votre imprimante.
l Set IP - Utilisez ce programme pour paramétrer les adresses TCP/IP de votre imprimante. Pour plus d'informations sur ce programme, reportez-vous au
mode d'emploi de l'imprimante réseau qui figure sur le CD-ROM des utilitaires réseau.
l Pilote PS - Fichier PPD (Postscript Printer Description). Vous pouvez utiliser le pilote PostScript pour imprimer des documents.
l Numérisation en réseau - permet de numériser un document sur votre imprimante et de l'enregistrer sur un ordinateur connecté au réseau.
l PC-Fax/Réseau-Fax - permet d'envoyer une télécopie depuis votre ordinateur.
l Pilote Linux - permet d'imprimer et de numériser dans un environnement Linux.
l Pilote d'impression Macintosh - permet d'utiliser votre imprimante avec un ordinateur Macintosh.
Outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell
L'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell, également appelé serveur Web intégré à l'imprimante, vous permet de surveiller l'état de votre imprimante
réseau sans quitter votre bureau. Vous pouvez visualiser et/ou modifier les paramètres de configuration de l'imprimante et contrôler le niveau d'encre. Et
lorsque vous souhaitez commander des cartouches de remplacement, cliquez tout simplement sur le lien Fournitures Dell, directement à partir de votre
navigateur Web.
Pour lancer l'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante, contentez-vous de taper l'adresse IP de votre imprimante réseau dans votre navigateur. Vous pouvez
aussi lancer l'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante à partir du Centre de contrôle de l'état du réseau. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Centre
de surveillance d'état du réseau".
Pour connaître l'adresse IP de votre imprimante, imprimez une page de configuration qui répertorie les adresses IP :
1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
REMARQUE : Les applications Dell ScanCenter et PaperPort ne sont pas prises en charge dans le système d'exploitation Windows Server 2003, XP
(édition x64), et Vista.
REMARQUE : L'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell n'est accessible que si l'imprimante est connectée à un (au) réseau. Reportez-vous à la
page "Utilisation de Dell Toner Management System".2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IMPR DONN. SYS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).
La première option de menu, OUI apparaît.
4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour imprimer une page de configuration réseau.
Si aucune adresse IP n'a été attribuée, attribuez-en une à votre imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du protocole TCP/IP".
Sélectionnez un lien approprié comme "Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local" pour afficher l'état de votre imprimante réseau et/ou modifier
les paramètres de Configuration de l'imprimante.
Etat de l'imprimante
Soyez en permanence informé du niveau des consommables de l'imprimante. Lorsque l'encre commence à manquer, cliquez sur le lien de commande d'encre
situé sur le premier écran afin de commander des cartouches d'encre supplémentaires.
Paramètres de l'imprimante
Modifiez les paramètres de l'imprimante, consultez le panneau de commande à distance et mettez à jour le micrologiciel du serveur d'impression.
Paramètres de fax
Configurer les paramètres de fax, tels que le bordereau de fax, le protocole, l'annuaire téléphonique et le mode de réception.
Paramètres d'e-mail
Configurez les paramètres d'e-mail, tels que le serveur SMTP, l'alerte d'e-mail et l'adresse.
Copie des paramètres d'imprimante
Transférez rapidement les paramètres de l'imprimante vers une ou plusieurs autres imprimantes du réseau en entrant chacune des adresses IP
correspondantes.
Statistiques d'impression
Suivez l'évolution de vos besoins d'impression, comme votre consommation de papier et les types de tâches d'impression.
Informations concernant l'imprimante
Obtenez les informations dont vous avez besoin pour vos consultations en cas de problème technique, vos rapports d'inventaire ou pour connaître l'état
actuel de la mémoire et les niveaux de code machine.
Définition du mot de passe
Verrouillez le panneau de commande avec un mot de passe afin d'empêcher les autres utilisateurs de modifier par inadvertance les paramètres d'imprimante
que vous avez choisis.
REMARQUE : Vous devez bénéficier du statut d'administrateur réseau pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction.Aide en ligne
Cliquez sur Aide pour visiter le site Web de Dell et bénéficier du dépannage d'imprimante en ligne.
Installation du logiciel sous Windows
Avant de commencer, assurez-vous que votre système satisfait les "Configuration minimum"
Systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge
l Windows 98/98 SE/Me/NT 4 Station de travail ou Serveur avec Service Pack 3
l Windows 2000 Professionnel ou Advanced Server
l Windows XP Édition familiale ou professionnelle
l Windows 2003 Server
l Windows Vista
Configuration minimum
l Espace disque : Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000 : 300 Mo
Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista : 1 Go
l Mémoire : Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000 : 64 Mo
Windows XP/Server 2003 : 128 Mo
Windows Vista: 512 Mo
l Processeur : Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000 : Pentium II 400 MHz ou supérieur
Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista : Pentium III 933 MHz ou supérieur
l Logiciel requis : Internet Explorer 5.0
Installation du logiciel Dell pour impression en mode local
Une imprimante locale est une imprimante branchée à votre ordinateur à l'aide d'un câble USB. Si votre imprimante est reliée à un réseau et non à votre
ordinateur, ignorez cette étape et passez à la section "Installation du logiciel Dell pour impression en réseau".
Un pilote d'imprimante est un logiciel permettant à votre ordinateur de communiquer avec votre imprimante. La procédure d'installation des pilotes dépend du
système d'exploitation que vous utilisez.
REMARQUE : Vous devez bénéficier du statut d'administrateur réseau pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction.
REMARQUE : Le nom d'utilisateur par défaut est admin et le mot de passe par défaut est laissé à blanc (vide).
REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur la page principale Tout-en-Un, la page Affichage des images enregistrées ou la page Entretien/Dépannage,
cliquez sur le lien Aide situé dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran.
REMARQUE : Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, l'administrateur système doit installer le logiciel Dell. 1. Assurez-vous que l'imprimante est connectée à votre réseau et qu'elle est sous tension. Fermez tous les programmes inutiles.
2. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires.
3. Si nécessaire, appuyez sur le bouton Langue pour sélectionner une langue.
4. Sélectionnez Installation personnelle, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
5. Sélectionner Installation standard, puis cliquez sur Suivant pour installer le mode d'emploi, les pilotes d'impression, le pilote du scanner et PaperPort
comme paramètres par défaut.
Pour installer le logiciel sélectionné, notamment le pilote d'impression Postscript, sélectionnez Installation personnalisée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Vous
pouvez modifier le dossier de destination.
6. Lorsque l'installation est terminée, imprimez une page de test. Cliquez sur Terminer et fermez l'Assistant. L'impression est prête à être lancée.
Attribution d'une adresse IP
Avant d'utiliser l'imprimante en réseau, vous devez créer une adresse IP, un masque de sous-réseau et une passerelle pour l'imprimante. Pour définir
automatiquement l'adresse IP, un serveur DHCP ou BOOTP doit exister sur le réseau.
Pour configurer l'adresse IP manuellement, vous pouvez utiliser le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires fourni. Imprimez la page de configuration de l'imprimante pour
connaître la configuration réseau actuelle et l'adresse MAC. Vous aurez besoin de ces informations pour configurer l'imprimante sur le réseau.
1. Assurez-vous que l'imprimante est branchée à votre réseau et qu'elle est sous tension. Fermez tous les programmes inutiles.
2. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires.
REMARQUE : Si vous branchez un câble d'imprimante USB alors que votre imprimante multifonction et votre ordinateur sont sous tension, l'assistant
matériel de Windows démarre automatiquement. Fermez l'écran et installez le logiciel Dell à l'aide du CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires.
REMARQUE : Si l'imprimante n'est pas connectée à votre ordinateur lorsque vous installez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires, l'écran Aucune
imprimante trouvée apparaît alors. Suivez les instructions pour installer le logiciel.
REMARQUE : Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Continuer lorsque l'écran Contrôle de compte utilisateur apparaît.
REMARQUE : Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Continuer lorsque l'écran Contrôle de compte utilisateur apparaît.3. Si nécessaire, appuyez sur le bouton Langue pour sélectionner une langue.
4. Sélectionnez Définir l'utilitaire d'adresse IP. La liste des imprimantes disponibles sur le réseau apparaît.
5. Sélectionnez l'imprimante à laquelle vous souhaitez attribuer une adresse IP. L'adresse IP par défaut de l'imprimante figure sur la page Configuration.
6. Après avoir attribué l'adresse IP pour l'imprimante, quittez le programme.
Installation du logiciel Dell pour impression en réseau
Lorsque vous connectez votre imprimante au réseau, configurez les paramètres TCP/IP pour l'imprimante avec d'installer le logiciel Dell sur chacune des
imprimantes du réseau.
Vous pouvez installer le logiciel Dell sur les ordinateurs du réseau, en local ou à distance.
1. Assurez-vous que l'imprimante est branchée à votre réseau et qu'elle est sous tension. Fermez tous les programmes inutiles. Pour plus d'informations
sur la connexion au réseau, reportez-vous à la "Connexion de l'imprimante au réseau".
2. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires.
3. Si nécessaire, appuyez sur le bouton Langue pour sélectionner une langue.
4. Sélectionnez Installation réseau, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
5. Pour installer les pilotes sur cet ordinateur pour un fonctionnement en réseau, sélectionnez Installation locale, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
REMARQUE : L'administrateur système doit installer les pilotes d'impression sur les ordinateurs du réseau.
REMARQUE : Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Continuer lorsque l'écran Contrôle de compte utilisateur apparaît.Pour installer le logiciel Dell sur des ordinateurs distants ou des serveurs réseau du même réseau, sélectionnez Installation à distance. Vous devrez saisir
l'ID et le mot de passe de l'administrateur de domaine. Sélectionnez le ou les ordinateurs clients du même domaine sur un réseau, puis cliquez sur
Suivant.
6. La liste des imprimantes disponibles sur le réseau apparaît. Sélectionnez l'imprimante à installer, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
Si votre imprimante n'apparaît pas sur la liste, cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour actualiser la liste ou sélectionnez Ajouter imprimante pour ajouter
l'imprimante au réseau. Pour ajouter l'imprimante au réseau, entrez le nom de port et l'adresse IP actuelle de l'imprimante.
Pour installer l'imprimante sur un serveur, activez la case à cocher J'installe cette imprimante sur un serveur.
7. La liste des pilotes et utilitaires d'impression apparaît. Cliquez sur et sélectionnez les pilotes et utilitaires requis que allez utiliser, puis cliquez sur
Suivant.
8. La liste des imprimantes disponibles sur le réseau apparaît. Sélectionnez l'imprimante à installer, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
Si votre imprimante n'apparaît pas sur la liste, cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour actualiser la liste ou sélectionnez Ajouter imprimante pour ajouter
l'imprimante au réseau. Pour ajouter l'imprimante au réseau, entrez le nom de port et l'adresse IP actuelle de l'imprimante.
9. L'écran affiche les pilotes d'impression installés sur votre ordinateur.
Vous pouvez modifier le nom de l'imprimante et définir l'imprimante comme imprimante par défaut à partager sur le réseau. Cliquer sur Suivant.
REMARQUE : Le serveur et l'ordinateur client doivent être tous deux avoir l'un des systèmes d'exploitation suivants : Windows XP, Windows
2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista ou Windows NT 4.0
REMARQUE : Le serveur doit pouvoir convertir le nom de l'ordinateur client en adresse IP.10. Une fois l'installation de l'imprimante terminée, vous pouvez imprimer une page de test. Cliquer sur Terminer.
Si vous installez l'utilitaire de numérisation en réseau après avoir installé votre imprimante, le Gestionnaire de numérisation en réseau apparaît à l'écran.
Vous devez configurer les paramètres de la numérisation en réseau. Reportez-vous aux étapes de "Ajout d'un scanner".
Désinstallation du logiciel
Si vous mettez le logiciel à niveau ou si l'installation échoue, vous devez désinstaller les pilotes d'impression. Vous pouvez supprimer le logiciel à l'aide du CDROM Pilotes et Utilitaires ou bien à l'aide de la désinstallation Windows.
1. A partir du menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes ou Tous les programmes DELL Imprimantes Dell DELL Laser MFP 1815
Désinstallation du logiciel Dell MFP.
2. Sélectionnez le logiciel que vous souhaitez supprimer.
3. Cliquer sur OK.
4. Redémarrez votre ordinateur.
Utilisation de Dell Toner Management System
Le Moniteur d'état local affiche l'état de l'imprimante (Imprimante prête, Imprimante hors ligne et Erreur-Vérifier l'imprimante), le nom de la tâche en cours
d'impression et le niveau d'encre (100 %, 50 %, Niveau de toner bas) de votre imprimante.
Si vous utilisez un réseau, vous pouvez accéder au Centre Moniteur d'état du réseau qui indique l'état de toutes les imprimantes disponibles dans le réseau.
Moniteur d'état des imprimantes locales
L'écran Moniteur d'état local démarre lorsque vous envoyez une tâche d'impression à l'imprimante. Il n'apparaît que sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Selon le niveau
de toner restant, l'écran Moniteur d'état local est différent.
REMARQUE : Fermez tous les programmes avant de lancer la désinstallation du logiciel, puis redémarrez votre ordinateur une fois le processus de
désinstallation terminé.
REMARQUE : Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Continuer lorsque l'écran Contrôle de compte utilisateur apparaît.Centre de surveillance d'état du réseau
Si votre imprimante est connectée à un réseau, vous pouvez utiliser le Centre Moniteur d'état du réseau. Ce faisant, vous pouvez lancer l'utilitaire Web de
configuration des imprimantes Dell et gérer l'état de plusieurs imprimantes sur le réseau.
1. Cliquez sur Démarrer Programmes DELL Imprimantes Dell DELL Laser MFP 1815 Centre de contrôle d'état du réseau.
2. Double-cliquez sur un nom d'imprimante pour ouvrir son Moniteur d'état ou sélectionner Exécuter... pour ouvrir le Moniteur d'état d'une imprimante
donnée.
3. Sélectionnez Actualiser pour modifier l'apparence de la liste d'imprimantes.
Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante
A l'aide de la fenêtre Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante, vous pouvez configurer les options de données du télécopieur et créer et modifier les entrées du
répertoire à partir de votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez également configurer les lancements de destination lorsque vous accédez à Numérisation, puis à PC.
Lorsque vous installez le logiciel Dell, l'utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante est installé de façon automatique.
Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du logiciel, reportez-vous à la "Installation du logiciel sous Windows".
Pour ouvrir l'utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante :
1. Cliquez sur Démarrer Programmes DELL Imprimantes Dell DELL Laser MFP 1815 Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante.
La fenêtre Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante s'ouvre.
2. La fenêtre Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante offre plusieurs fonctions : Répertoire (Repertoire, Carnet adres.), Paramètres de télécopie (Page de
couverture de télécopie) et Numérisation (Emplacement, Résolution, Couleur de numérisation, Afficher la prévisualisation).
Pour plus d'informations, cliquez sur bouton .
Pour utiliser les paramètres par défaut, cliquez sur le bouton Param. par défaut.
Pour quitter, cliquez sur le bouton Quitter situé en bas de la fenêtre.
REMARQUE : Cette application n'est disponible que si l'imprimante est connectée à un réseau.Section Répertoire
Cliquez sur la section Repertoire ou Carnet adres., puis sur le bouton Paramètres pour créer et modifier des entrées de répertoire ou de répertoire d'e-mails.
Section Paramètres de télécopie
Cliquez sur la section Paramètres de télécopie pour créer une page de couverture de télécopie. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Options de
configuration de télécopie avancées". La page de garde de télécopie contient la date, le numéro du télécopieur et l'ID de l'imprimante de l'expéditeur, le
numéro du télécopieur et l'ID de l'imprimante du destinataire enregistrés dans le répertoire de l'expéditeur ainsi que le nombre total de pages que vous avez
envoyées.
Section Numérisation
La section Emplacement
Pour configurer la liste de destination de numérisation qui apparaît sur le panneau de commande lorsque vous accédez à Scan (Numériser), puis à PC, cliquez
sur Emplacement, puis sur le bouton Paramètres. La liste de destinations permet de sélectionner les programmes logiciels susceptibles de traiter les images
numérisées.La section Résolution
Cliquez sur la section Résolution, puis sélectionnez la résolution de numérisation par défaut dans la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez sélectionner 75 ppp
(brouillon), 150 ppp, 200 ppp, 300 ppp (normal) ou 600 ppp.
La section Couleur de numérisation
Cliquez sur la section Couleur de numérisation, puis sélectionnez la couleur de numérisation par défaut dans la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez sélectionner
Couleur de numérisation, Noir et blanc, Gris, 256 couleurs ou Couleurs naturelles.
La section Prévisualisation
Cliquez sur la section Afficher la prévisualisation, puis cochez la case pour afficher l'écran de prévisualisation.Spécifications
Spécifications générales
a. Moyenne de toner basée sur une page imprimée avec 5 % d'aplat, conformément aux méthodes de test ISO/IEC 19752. Les moyennes varient en
fonction de l'usage et des conditions ambiantes.
Spécifications du scanner et du copieur
Spécifications générales
Spécifications du scanner et du copieur
Spécifications de l'imprimante multifonction
Spécifications du télécopieur
Spécifications du papier
Caractéristique Description
Chargeur automatique de documents
Jusqu'à 50 pages (75 g/m2
)
Format de document pour le chargeur
automatique
Largeur : 142 à 216 mm
Longueur : 148 à 356 mm
Capacité d'alimentation papier Bac d'alimentation : 250 feuilles (grammage : 75 g/m2
)
Passe copie : papier ordinaire 50 feuilles (grammage : 75 g/m2
), support spécial : 5 feuilles
Capacité de sortie papier Réceptacle de sortie : 150 feuilles (face imprimée vers le bas)
Capot arrière : 1 feuille (face imprimée vers le haut)
"TYPE PAPIER" Bac d'alimentation : Papier ordinaire (60 à 90 g/m2
)
Passe copie : Papier ordinaire, transparents, étiquettes, cartes, cartes postales (60 à 163 g/m2
), enveloppes (75 à
90 g/m2
)
Impression recto verso : Papier ordinaire (75 à 90 g/m2
)
Consommables Système à une cartouche d'encre
Configuration électrique 110-127 VCA, 50/60 Hz, 5,4 A
220-240 VCA, 50/60 Hz, 3,0 A
Consommation électrique Moyenne : inférieure à 450 W
Mode veille : inférieure à 30 W
Niveau sonore Copie : 55 dBA
Mode veille : 33 dBA
Impression : 54 dBA
Temps de préchauffage Moins de 42 secondes
Conditions de fonctionnement Température : 10 °C à 32 °C
Humidité : 20 % - 80 % RH
Écran LCD 16 caractères x 2 lignes
Durée de vie de la cartouche d'encre Durée de vide de la cartouche de toner Dell de capacité standard : 3 000 pages
a
Durée de vide de la cartouche de toner Dell de haute capacité 5 000 pages
a
Spécifications de l'imprimante
multifonction
(L x P x H)
450 x 438 x 457,2 mm
Mémoire vive (RAM) 96 Mo (Max. 192 Mo)
Poids Net : 16 kg (y compris cartouche d'encre), 14,5 kg (hors cartouche d'encre)
Brut : 22,3 kg (y compris consommables, accessoires et emballage)
Poids de l'emballage Papier : 2.7 Kg
Plastique : 0,7 kg
Caractéristique Description
Compatibilité Norme TWAIN/Norme WIA
Méthode de numérisation Chargeur automatique et à plat
Module avec capteur à transfert de charge (CCD) couleur
Résolution Optique : 600 x 1 200 ppp (monochrome et couleur)
Améliorée : 4 800 x 4 800 ppp
Longueur de numérisation effective Vitre d'exposition : 293 mm
CAD : 352 mmSpécifications de l'imprimante multifonction
Spécifications du télécopieur
Largeur de numérisation effective 208 mm
Profondeur de bit couleur 24 bits
Profondeur de bit mono 1 bit avec Lineart
8 bits en Echelle de gris
Vitesse de numérisation (en mode
texte)
Vitre d'exposition : 15 (Lineart), 20 (Gris), 30 secondes (Couleur)
CAD : 26 (Lineart), 26 (Gris), 64 secondes (Couleur)
Vitesse de copie SDMC (Single Document Multiple Copy) : 27 cpm (copies par minute pour Letter), 25 cpm pour A4
MDMC (Multi-document Multiple Copy) en mode Texte et Mixte : 7 cpm
MDSC (Multi-document Single Copy) : 7 cpm
MDMC en mode Photo : 4 cpm
Format de papier Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Executive, A5, B5, A6
Zoom
CAD :
Vitre d'exposition : 25 %
25 % - 100 %
- 400 %
Copies multiples 1 à 199 pages
Mode Copie (=Type d'origine) Texte, Texte&Photo, Photo
Caractéristique Description
Méthode d'impression Impression par faisceau laser
Vitesse d'impression (recto) Letter : 27 ppm (pages par minute)
A4 : 25 ppm
Vitesse d'impression (recto-verso) Letter : 18 images par minute
A4 : 17 images par minute
Format de papier Bac d'alimentation : Letter, A4, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A5, A6
Passe copie : Letter, Legal, A4, Oficio, Folio, Executive, A5, A6, A6 carton, Carte postale 4x6, HagaKi, Enveloppe 7-
3/4, Enveloppe 9, Enveloppe 10, Enveloppe COM-10, Enveloppe DL, Enveloppe C5, Enveloppe C6, Enveloppe B5, JIS
B5, ISO B5
* Min. : 76 x 127 mm
Max. : 216 x 356 mm
Impression recto verso : Letter, A4, Legal, Oficio, Folio
Résolution d'impression Jusqu'à 1 200 ppp en sortie effective
Émulation GDI, PCL6, PCL5e, PostScript Level3
Interface PC USB 2.0
Interface réseau 10/100 Base-TX
Compatibilité Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
Divers systèmes d'exploitation y compris Red Hat 8.0 ~ 9.0
Fedora Core 1 ~ 3, Mandrake 9 ~ 10, and SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.1
Mac. 10.3 et supérieur
Durée de la première impression Mode veille : Moins de 10 secondes
Caractéristique Description
Compatibilité ITU-T Groupe 3
Ligne applicable Réseau téléphonique public commuté (RTPC) et auto-commutateur privé (PABX)
Codage des données MH/MR/MMR (mode ECM) et JPEG/JBIG pour l'envoi de télécopies couleur
Vitesse du modem 33,6 Kbits/s
Vitesse de transmission Environ 3 secondes/page
* La vitesse de transmission correspond à la transmission de données textuelles à partir de la mémoire, avec
compression ECM et uniquement à l'aide du tableau ITU-T n 1.
Vitesse de numérisation Vitre d'exposition : environ 3 secondes/A4 (en mode télécopie avec résolution standard)
CAD : environ 5 secondes/Letter (en mode télécopie avec résolution standard), 7,5 secondes/Letter (en mode
télécopie avec résolution élevée)
Longueur de document maximale Vitre d'exposition : 297 mm
CAD : 356 mm
Format de papier A4, Letter, Legal
Résolution Standard : 203 x 98 ppp
Fine : 203 x 196 ppp
Super fine : 300 x 300 ppp Spécifications du papier
Généralités
Votre imprimante accepte différents supports, comme le papier recyclé (y compris le papier 100 % fibre), les enveloppes, les étiquettes, les transparents et du
papier au format spécial. Les caractéristiques comme le poids, la composition, le grain et la teneur en humidité sont des facteurs importants qui ont une
incidence sur les performances de l'imprimante et sur la qualité d'impression en général. L'utilisation de papier non conforme aux spécifications décrites dans
ce mode d'emploi peut provoquer des problèmes, par exemple :
l Une qualité d'impression médiocre
l Des bourrages fréquents
l Usure prématurée de l'imprimante
Formats de papier acceptés
a. L'imprimante accepte une grande variété de formats.
b. La contenance des bacs peut varier en fonction du poids et de l'épaisseur des supports et des conditions ambiantes.
Consignes d'utilisation du papier
Pour obtenir un résultat optimal, utilisez un papier standard de 75 g/m2
. Assurez-vous qu'il est de bonne qualité et qu'il ne présente pas de défauts (entailles,
déchirures, taches, particules, plis, bords ondulés ou recourbés).
Si vous avez un doute sur le type de papier que vous vous apprêtez à utiliser (papier à fort grammage ou recyclé par exemple), vérifiez l'étiquette sur l'emballage.
Mémoire utilisateur 4 Mo (320 pages)
Demi-teinte 256 niveaux
REMARQUE : Il arrive que certains papiers répondant aux conditions décrites dans ce manuel ne fournissent cependant pas des résultats satisfaisants.
Cela peut provenir d'une manipulation incorrecte du papier, de niveaux d'humidité et de températures excessifs ou d'autres facteurs indépendants de
Dell.
REMARQUE : Avant d'acheter une quantité importante de papier, assurez-vous qu'il répond aux exigences mentionnées dans ce mode d'emploi
ATTENTION : L'utilisation d'un papier non conforme aux spécifications peut provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement de l'appareil, allant
jusqu'à nécessiter l'intervention d'un réparateur. Ce type d'intervention n'est pas couvert par la garantie Dell ni par les contrats de maintenance.
Papier Formats
a Poids Capacité
b
Letter 216 x 279 mm • 60-90 g/m2
pour le bac d'alimentation
papier
• 60-163 g/m2
pour le bac d'alimentation
papier
• 75-90 g/m2
pour l'impression rectoverso
• 250 feuilles de papier 75 g/m2
dans le
bac d'alimentation papier
• 50 feuilles de papier 75 g/m2
dans le
passe copie
A4 210 x 297 mm
EXECUTIVE 184 x 267 mm
Légal 216 x 356 mm
OFICIO 216 x 343 mm
FOLIO 216 x 330 mm
Format minimal (personnalisé) 76 x 127 mm 60 à 163 g/m2 5 feuilles de papier pour le passe copie
Format maximum (Legal US) 216 x 356 mm
Transparents Mêmes dimensions minimales et
maximales que ci-dessus.
138 à 146 g/m2
Étiquettes 120 à 150 g/m2
Papier cartonné 105 à 163 g/m2
Enveloppes 75 à 90 g/m2
REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un support inférieur à 127 mm de long, des bourrages risquent de se produire. Pour des performances optimales, stockez
et manipulez correctement le papier. Consultez "Environnement d'impression et stockage du papier" .
REMARQUE : En mode recto-verso, vous pouvez utiliser du papier au format A4, Letter, Folio, Oficio, Legal.Le tableau ci-dessous présente des problèmes liés au papier pouvant entraîner une mauvaise qualité d'impression ou des bourrages et risquant
d'endommager l'imprimante.
Spécifications du papier
Capacité de sortie papier
Environnement d'impression et stockage du papier
Les conditions de stockage ont une incidence directe sur l'alimentation dans l'appareil.
Dans l'idéal, l'imprimante et le papier doivent se trouver dans un environnement à température ambiante, ni trop sec ni trop humide. N'oubliez pas que le
papier absorbe et perd rapidement l'humidité.
La chaleur et l'humidité contribuent à altérer le papier. La chaleur provoque l'évaporation de l'humidité contenue dans le papier, alors que le froid la condense
sur les feuilles. Les systèmes de chauffage et de climatisation assèchent l'air. À mesure que le papier est sorti de son emballage et utilisé, il perd son humidité,
d'où un risque de rayure et de souillure. À l'inverse, un temps humide ou la présence d'un système réfrigérant peut augmenter l'humidité d'un local. Dans ce
cas, lorsque le papier est sorti de son emballage, il absorbe l'humidité, ce qui provoque à l'impression un éclaircissement du texte et des zones vides. En
outre, lorsque le papier perd et absorbe l'humidité, il peut se déformer et risque de provoquer des bourrages.
Symptôme Problème lié au papier Solution
Mauvaise qualité d'impression ou dépôt d'encre,
problèmes d'alimentation
Papier trop humide, rugueux, lisse ou gaufré ; rame
de papier défectueuse
Essayez un autre type de papier avec une
perméabilité de 100 à 400 (méthode Sheffield) et
une teneur en humidité de 4 à 5 %.
Zones vides, bourrage, ondulation Stockage inadéquat Stockez le papier à plat dans un emballage
étanche.
Fond excessivement grisé / usure de
l'imprimante
Papier trop épais Utilisez du papier plus fin ou utilisez le capot arrière.
Ondulation excessive au moment de
l'alimentation
Papier trop humide, mauvais sens du grain ou grain
trop court
• Utilisez le capot arrière.
• Utilisez du papier à grain long.
Bourrage, endommagement de l'imprimante Découpes ou perforations N'utilisez pas de papier présentant des découpes
ou des perforations.
Problèmes d'alimentation Bords irréguliers Utilisez du papier de bonne qualité.
REMARQUE : Évitez d'utiliser du papier à en-tête sur lequel un texte a été préimprimé avec des encres à basse température comme celles utilisées
dans certains procédés de thermographie.
REMARQUE : N'utilisez pas du papier gaufré ou à reliefs.
REMARQUE : La fixation de l'encre sur le papier se fait par pression et par fusion. Par conséquent, le papier de couleur ou les formulaires préimprimés
doivent utiliser une encre résistant à une température de fusion de (180 °C pendant un dixième de seconde).
Catégorie Spécifications
Teneur en acide pH de 5,5 ou inférieur
Épaisseur 0,094 à 0,18 mm
Plissement Plat sur 5 mm
Bords Coupés avec une lame tranchante, sans effilochure.
Résistance à la fusion Ne doit pas roussir, fondre ou émettre des substances toxiques lors du chauffage à 180 °C pendant un dixième de
seconde.
Grain Grain sens machine
Teneur en humidité Entre 4 % et 6 % selon le poids
Satinage 100 à 400 (méthode Sheffield)
Sortie Capacité
réceptacle de sortie (face à imprimer
vers le bas)
150 feuilles de papier à lettre 75 g/m2
capot arrière (face imprimée vers le
haut)
1 feuilles de papier à lettre 75 g/m2Évitez d'acheter des réserves de papier supérieures à trois mois d'utilisation. Le papier stocké pendant de longues périodes souffre de la chaleur et de
l'humidité, provoquant des problèmes à l'utilisation. Planifiez vos achats pour éviter tout endommagement du papier.
Les rames de papier maintenues dans leur emballage étanche se conservent sans problème pendant plusieurs mois. En revanche, dès que l'emballage est
ouvert, le papier est soumis aux conditions ambiantes, et plus particulièrement s'il n'est pas protégé par un emballage étanche.
Il convient d'assurer de bonnes conditions de stockage du papier afin de garantir des performances optimales. Les conditions idéales correspondent à une
température de 20 °C à 24 °C, avec un taux d'humidité de 4 à 55 %. Les consignes suivantes vous aideront à déterminer l'environnement de stockage
approprié.
l Stockez le papier à température ambiante.
l L'air ne doit être ni trop sec ni trop humide.
l Lorsqu'une rame de papier est ouverte, le mieux, après avoir prélevé la quantité de feuilles nécessaire, est de replier avec soin l'emballage étanche. Si
l'environnement d'impression est soumis à des conditions extrêmes, ne sortez de l'emballage que la quantité de papier à utiliser pour la journée, afin
d'éviter toute variation d'humidité.Guide de l'utilisateur de l'Imprimante Laser Multi-Functions Dell™ 1815dn
Cliquez sur les liens à gauche, pour obtenir des renseignements sur les fonctionnalités, les options, et le fonctionnement de votre imprimante. Pour obtenir
des informations sur d'autres documentations fournis avec votre imprimante, reportez-vous à "Recherche d'informations".
Pour commander de cartouches de toner de remplacement ou des consommables Dell :
1. Double-cliquez sur l'cône Renouvellement de commande de cartouche d'encre Dell 1815dn sur le bureau.
OU
2. Visitez le site Web de Dell , ou commandez des consommables d'imprimante Dell par téléphone.
www.dell.com/supplies
OU
premier.dell.com est le site sécurisé, personnalisable, d'approvisionnement et de support de Dell pour ses clients bénéficiant d'un service étendu.
Remarques, Observations et Mises en garde
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à des modifications sans préavis.
© 2006 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite.
Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées et Windows Vista est une marque de Microsoft Corporation; VESA est une marque déposée de Video Electronics Standards
Association.;EMC est une marque déposée de EMC Corporation; ENERGY STAR et le logo ENERGY STAR sont des marques déposées de la U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. En
tant que partenaire Energy Star, Dell Computer Corporation a décidé de rendre ses produits conformes aux normes Energy Star en matière d’économies d’énergie.
Marques utilisées dans ce texte : Dell, le logo DELL, Dell Precision, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, XPS, Dimension, Optiplex, Latitude, et Dell Toner Management System sont des
marques de Dell Inc.; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation.
PaperPort
® est une marque déposée de ScanSoft, Inc.
Adobe®
et PhotoShop®
sont des marques déposées de Adobe Systems Incorporated.
D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document en référence aussi bien aux entités revendiquant les marques et les noms en questions qu'aux
produits eux-mêmes. Dell Inc. dénie tout intérêt propriétaire aux marques et noms commerciaux autres que les siens.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Modèle 1815
Juin 2006 SRV Rév. A03
REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE signale des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre imprimante.
OBSERVATION : Une OBSERVATION sert à avertir de dommages matériels ou d'une perte de données potentiels et de la façon dont le problème peut
être éviter.
ATTENTION : Une MISE EN GARDE signale la possibilité de dommages vis-à-vis des biens et de blessures, voire de décès, vis-à-vis des
personnes. Dépannage
Suppression de bourrages papier au niveau du chargeur automatique de documents
Quand un document se bloque alors qu'il passe par le chargeur automatique, le message BOURRAGE DOC. apparaît sur l'écran.
1. Retirez les feuilles restantes du chargeur.
Si le document est coincé au niveau des bacs d'alimentation :
a. Ouvrez le couvercle du CAD.
b. Retirez le document en le tirant délicatement.
c. Fermez le chargeur. Puis réintroduisez le document.
Si le document est coincé au niveau de la sortie papier :
a. Ouvrez le couvercle de document, puis faites tourner la molette de dégagement pour sortir les feuilles coincées au niveau du plateau de
réception des documents.
Suppression de bourrages papier au niveau du chargeur automatique de documents
Suppression du bourrage dans les circuits d'entraînement du papier
Messages d'erreur et dépannage
Dépannage
REMARQUE : Afin d'éviter les bourrages papier, utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour les documents épais, fins ou mixtes.b. Fermez le couvercle. puis remettez les documents en place.
2. Si vous ne voyez pas le papier ou si le papier ne bouge pas lorsque vous tirez dessus, ouvrez le couvercle du chargeur de document.
3. Faites tourner la molette de dégagement pour retirer la feuille coincée au niveau du rouleau ou de la fente d'insertion en la tirant avec précaution.
4. Fermez le couvercle. puis remettez les documents en place.
Suppression du bourrage dans les circuits d'entraînement du papier
Lorsqu'un bourrage papier survient, le message BOURR PAPIER s'affiche à l'écran. Reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous pour localiser et supprimer le
bourrage.
Pour éviter que le papier ne se déchire, tirez dessus avec précaution et lentement. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour supprimer le bourrage.
Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac 1)
1. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant. Le papier bloqué sort automatiquement de l'imprimante.
Si le papier ne sort pas, passez à l'étape suivante.
2. Ouvrez le bac d'alimentation papier.
3. Retirez le papier coincé en tirant dessus avec précaution.
Message du panneau de commande Localisation du bourrage Voir
BOURR PAPIER 0
OUV./FERM. CAPOT
Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac 1)
Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac
optionnel 2)
"Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac 1)"
ou "Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac
optionnel 2)".
BOURR PAPIER 1
ZONE CARTOUCHE
Bourrage au niveau du four "Bourrage au niveau du four".
BOUR. 2 OUVRIR
ARR. ET AVANT
Bourrage au niveau de la sortie papier "Bourrage au niveau de la sortie papier".
BOURR REC-VER 0
VERIF. INTERIEUR
Au niveau du module recto-verso "Bourrage en impression recto-verso 1".
BOURR REC-VER 1
VERIF. INTERIEUR
Entre le module recto-verso et l'unité de chauffe "Bourrage en impression recto-verso 0".Si vous ne voyez pas le papier ou si le papier ne bouge pas lorsque vous tirez dessus, vérifiez la zone de four. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la
section "Bourrage au niveau du four".
4. Insérez le bac d'alimentation papier dans l'imprimante jusqu'à ce qu'un déclic indique qu'il est bien en place.
L'impression reprend automatiquement.
Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac optionnel 2)
1. Ouvrez le bac 2 optionnel.
2. Retirez la feuille coincée de l'imprimante.
Si vous ne voyez pas le papier dans cette zone ou si le papier ne bouge pas lorsque vous tirez dessus, passez à l'étape suivante.
3. Ouvrez le bac 1 à moitié.
4. Retirez la feuille en tirant dessus.
5. Insérez les bacs en place dans l'imprimante.
L'impression reprend automatiquement.
Bourrage au niveau du passe copie
1. Si le papier n'est pas correctement entraîné, enlevez-le de l'imprimante.2. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant pour reprendre l'impression.
Bourrage au niveau du four
1. Ouvrez le capot avant et retirez la cartouche d'encre.
2. Retirez le papier coincé en tirant dessus avec précaution.
3. Remettez la cartouche d'encre en place et fermez le capot avant.
L'impression reprend automatiquement.
Bourrage au niveau de la sortie papier
1. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant. Le papier bloqué sort automatiquement de l'imprimante.
Si le papier ne sort pas, passez à l'étape suivante.
2. Sortez le papier du plateau de sortie en tirant dessus avec précaution.
OBSERVATION : La zone du four est extrêmement chaude. Procédez avec prudence lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé de l'imprimante.3. Si vous ne voyez pas le papier dans le réceptacle de sortie ou si le papier ne bouge pas lorsque vous tirez dessus, ouvrez le capot arrière.
4. Si vous voyez le papier bloqué, soulevez les deux manettes bleues et retirez le papier. Passez ensuite à l'étape 9
Si vous ne voyez pas le papier, passez à l'étape suivante.
5. Soulevez la languette bleue, la butée du capot arrière et ouvrez-le complètement comme illustré.
6. Dépliez entièrement le guide recto-verso.
7. Tout en poussant la manette de l'unité de chauffe vers la droite, ouvrez la porte de l'unité de chauffe.
8. Tirez sur le papier bloqué pour le sortir.
Si le papier bloqué ne bouge pas lorsque vous tirez, soulevez les deux manettes bleues pour libérer le papier et retirez-le.
OBSERVATION : Assurez-vous que le guide du duplex est bien déployé avant d'ouvrir la porte de l'unité de chauffe sinon vous risquez
d'endommager cette porte. 9. Replacez les leviers, la porte de l'unité de chauffe, le butée du capot arrière et guide recto-verso dans leur position d'origine.
10. Fermez le capot arrière.
11. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant.
L'impression reprend automatiquement.
Bourrage en impression recto-verso
Bourrage en impression recto-verso 0
1. Retirez le module recto-verso de l'imprimante.
2. Retirez le papier bloqué du module recto-verso.
Si le papier ne sort pas avec le module recto-verso, retirez-le depuis le fond de l'imprimante.
3. Poussez l'unité recto-verso vers l'imprimante.
4. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant.
L'impression reprend automatiquement.
Bourrage en impression recto-verso 1
ATTENTION : Si vous entrez l'unité recto-verso de façon incorrecte en la poussant, vous risquez de provoquer un bourrage papier. 1. Ouvrez le capot arrière.
2. Dépliez entièrement le guide recto-verso.
3. Tirez sur le papier bloqué pour le sortir.
4. Remettez le guide recto-verso en place et fermez le capot arrière.
5. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant.
L'impression reprend automatiquement.
Conseils pour éviter les bourrages papier
Si vous choisissez soigneusement le type de papier, vous éviterez la plupart des problèmes causés par les bourrages papier. Toutefois, en cas de bourrage,
suivez les instructions de la section "Suppression du bourrage dans les circuits d'entraînement du papier".
l Suivez les instructions de la section "Chargement des supports d'impression dans le bac". Assurez-vous que les guides-papier ajustables sont
correctement positionnés.
l Ne remplissez pas trop le bac d'alimentation papier. Vérifiez que la pile de papier ne dépasse pas la limite de capacité du bac d'alimentation papier.
l N'enlevez pas le papier du bac d'alimentation lorsqu'une impression est en cours.
l Déramez, ventilez et alignez le papier avant de l'insérer dans le bac d'alimentation.
l N'utilisez pas de papier froissé, humide ou recourbé.
l Évitez de mélanger les types de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier.
l Utilisez uniquement les supports d'impression recommandés. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
l Assurez-vous que la face à imprimer est orientée vers le dessous dans le bac et vers le dessus dans le passe copie.
l Assurez-vous que l'unité duplex est installée correctement.
Messages d'erreur et dépannage
Écran Signification Solutions éventuelles
AJOUTER PAPIER & APP SUR START Le passe copie est vide en mode alimentation manuelle. Chargez une feuille à imprimer et appuyez sur la touche Départ ( ). Vous devez appuyer sur cette touche pour
chaque page à imprimer.
Att. recomp. L'appareil attend que l'intervalle programmé soit écoulé
pour recomposer le numéro automatiquement.
Veuillez patienter quelques minutes.
AUTO-DIAGNOST... Le moteur de votre imprimante contrôle certains
problèmes détectés.
Veuillez patienter quelques minutes.
BOUR. 2 OUVRIR
ARR. ET AVANT
Un bourrage papier est survenu au niveau du plateau de
sortie.
Supprimez le bourrage. Reportez-vous à la "Bourrage au
niveau de la sortie papier".
BOURR PAPIER 0
OUV./FERM. CAPOT
Un bourrage papier est survenu au niveau de la zone
d'alimentation du bac.
Supprimez le bourrage. Reportez-vous à la "Bourrage au
niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac 1)"ou à la "Bourrage au
niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac optionnel 2)".
BOURR PAPIER 1
ZONE CARTOUCHE
Un bourrage papier est survenu au niveau du four. Supprimez le bourrage. Reportez-vous à la "Bourrage au
niveau du four".
BOURR REC-VER 0
VERIF. INTERIEUR
Le papier s'est bloqué pendant l'impression recto-verso. Supprimez le bourrage. Reportez-vous à la "Bourrage en
impression recto-verso 0".
BOURR REC-VER 1
VERIF. INTERIEUR
Le papier s'est bloqué pendant l'impression recto-verso. Supprimez le bourrage. Reportez-vous à la "Bourrage en
impression recto-verso 1".
BOURRAGE DOC.
VERIF. CHARGEUR
Le document chargé est coincé dans le chargeur
automatique.
Supprimez le bourrage causé par le document. Reportezvous à la "Suppression de bourrages papier au niveau du
chargeur automatique de documents".
CAPOT OUVERT
CAPOT AVANT
Le capot avant n'est pas correctement verrouillé. Refermez le capot jusqu'à ce qu'un déclic indique qu'il est
bien en place.
CARTOUCHE INCORRECTE La cartouche d'encre que vous avez installée n'est pas
adaptée à votre imprimante.
Installez une cartouche d'encre authentique Dell et
conçue pour votre imprimante.
COURRIER EXCEDE
CAPACITE SERVEUR
La taille du courrier est plus grande que la taille prise en
charge par le serveur SMTP.
Divisez votre courrier ou réduisez la résolution.
ECH LECT DONNEES
VERIF. MEM. USB
Le stockage sur la clé de mémoire USB a échoué. Vérifier l'espace mémoire USB disponible.
ECH LECT DONNEES
VERIF. MEM. USB
Le temps a expiré pendant la lecture des données. Essayez de nouveau.
ERR TEMP INSUF. REINIT.
COURANT
Un problème est survenu au niveau du four. Débranchez, puis rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Si
le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance.
ERREUR COM. ESSAYER A NOUV. L'imprimante rencontre un problème de communication. Demandez à l'expéditeur d'essayer de nouveau.
ERREUR CONNEXION La connexion avec le serveur SMTP a échoué. Vérifiez les paramètres de serveur et le câble réseau.
ERREUR D'ENVOI
(AUTH)
Il y a un problème dans l'authentification SMTP. Configurez le paramètre d'authentification.
ERREUR D'ENVOI
(CONFIG. INCOR.)
Il y a un problème sur la carte d'interface réseau. Configurez votre carte d'interface réseau correctement.
ERREUR D'ENVOI
(DNS)
Il y a un problème dans le DNS. Configurez le paramètre DNS.
ERREUR D'ENVOI
(POP3)
Il y a un problème dans POP3. Configurez le paramètre POP3.
ERREUR D'ENVOI
(SMTP)
Il y a un problème dans le SMTP. Changez de serveur et choisissez-en un disponible.
ERREUR HSYNC Un problème est survenu au niveau de l'unité de
numérisation laser (LSU).
Débranchez, puis rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Si
le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance.
ERREUR IMPR. REINIT. COURANT Un problème est survenu au niveau de l'unité de
numérisation laser (LSU).
Débranchez, puis rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Si
le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance.
ERREUR LIGNE ESSAYER A NOUV. Votre imprimante ne parvient pas à se connecter à une
imprimante distante ou a perdu le contact en raison d'un
problème avec la ligne téléphonique.
Essayez de nouveau. Si le problème persiste, patientez
environ une heure ou, dans la mesure du possible,
essayez de vous connecter à l'aide d'une autre ligne
téléphonique.
Vous pouvez également activer le mode ECM. Reportezvous à la "MODE ECM".
ERREUR RESEAU Il y a un problème avec le réseau. Contactez votre administrateur réseau.
FAX INDESIRABLE TACHE ANNULEE Le numéro de télécopie reçu correspond à un numéro
mémorisé comme numéro de télécopie indésirable.
Modifiez l'option de configuration des télécopies
indésirables.
FORMAT FICHIER
INCOMPATIBLE
Le format de fichier sélectionné n'est pas pris en charge. Utilisez le format de fichier correct.
FOUR CAPOT OUVERT La porte de l'unité de chauffe n'est pas bien fermée. Ouvrez le capot arrière et refermez la porte de l'unité de
chauffe jusqu'à ce qu'un déclic indique qu'elle est bien en
place. Pour l'emplacement de la porte de l'unité de Dépannage
Le tableau suivant dresse la liste des problèmes que vous pouvez rencontrer et des solutions recommandées correspondantes. Appliquez les solutions
proposées jusqu'à ce que le problème soit résolu. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell.
Problèmes d'alimentation papier
chauffe, reportez-vous à "Bourrage au niveau de la sortie
papier".
GROUPE NON DISPONIBLE Vous avez utilisé un numéro de groupe au lieu d'un
numéro simple, en essayant d'ajouter, par exemple, un
numéro de groupe à une liste de multidiffusion.
Utilisez un numéro de composition abrégée ou composez
manuellement le numéro à l'aide du clavier numérique.
LIGNE OCCUPEE
ESSAYER + TARD
Le télécopieur destinataire ne répond pas ou la ligne est
occupée.
Essayez de nouveau après quelques minutes.
LIM. TACHES (15) ATTEINTE Le nombre de tâches mémorisées dans l'imprimante est
15 et vous tentez d'en ajouter une 16ème.
Supprimez des tâches dans l'imprimante ou essayez
ultérieurement, une fois certaines tâches terminées.
MEMOIRE PLEINE
ANNUL. OU DEMAR.
La mémoire est pleine. Supprimez les documents inutiles, puis renvoyez-les après
avoir libéré de la mémoire.
MEMOIRE PLEINE
DIVISER TACHE
La mémoire est pleine. Vous pouvez effectuer la transmission en plusieurs fois.
NO. NON ATTRIBUE CHOISIR
AUTRE
Vous avez essayé de supprimer le numéro de la
télécopie retardée.
Vérifiez le numéro à supprimer et essayez à nouveau.
OU
Supprimez le numéro une fois la télécopie retardée
envoyée.
PANNE SECTEUR
DONNEES PERDUES
On a éteint puis rallumé l'appareil et la mémoire de
l'imprimante n'a pas été sauvegardée.
La mémoire de l'imprimante n'a pas été enregistrée à
cause d'une coupure d'alimentation. Veuillez recommencer
la tâche.
PAS DE CARTOUCHE
CHARGER CART.
La cartouche de toner n'est pas installée. Installez la cartouche d'encre. Reportez-vous à la
"Installation de la cartouche d'encre".
PAS DE PAPIER
AJOUTER PAPIER
Le bac d'alimentation papier est vide. Chargez du papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier.
Reportez-vous à la "Chargement du papier".
PAS DE REPONSE ESSAYER + TARD Le télécopieur distant ne répond pas malgré toutes les
tentatives d'appel.
Essayez de nouveau. Vérifiez le numéro et assurez-vous
qu'il s'agit bien d'un numéro de fax.
PAS DE TACHE Vous souhaitez effectuer une opération
d'ajout/annulation, mais aucune tâche n'est en attente.
Vérifiez sur l'écran si des tâches programmées sont en
attente. L'écran doit indiquer si des tâches en attente
sont en mode Veille, du type FAX DIFF par exemple.
PRET-TONER 0%
TONER VIDE
La cartouche d'encre est vide. Remplacez la cartouche. Reportez-vous à la
"Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre".
PRET-TONER 7%
TONER FAIBLE
la cartouche d'encre est presque vide. Retirez la cartouche d'encre et secouez-la à plusieurs
reprises. Vous pourrez ainsi reprendre temporairement les
impressions.
OU
Remplacez la cartouche d'encre afin d'améliorer la qualité
d'impression. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la
cartouche d'encre".
SAISIR A NOUV. Vous avez saisi un élément non disponible. Saisissez l'élément correct.
SCANNER VERR.
DEVERR. SCANNER
Le module de numérisation est verrouillé. Déverrouillez le module de numérisation, puis appuyez sur
Départ ( ).
SURCHAUFFE
APPELER SERVICE
Un problème est survenu au niveau du four. Débranchez, puis rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Si
le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance.
TACHE ANNULEE PAR UTILISATEUR Annuler ( ) est enfoncé durant une transmission. Essayez de nouveau après quelques minutes.
UNE PAGE EST
TROP GRANDE
Les données de page simple excèdent la taille de
courrier configurée.
Réduisez la résolution et réessayez.
UNITÉ NON CHAUF. APPELER
SERVICE
Un problème est survenu au niveau du four. Débranchez, puis rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Si
le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance.Problèmes d'impression
Situation Solutions éventuelles
Un bourrage papier survient lors de
l'impression.
Eliminer le bourrage papier. Reportez-vous à la "Suppression du bourrage dans les circuits d'entraînement du
papier".
Plusieurs feuilles sont collées les
unes aux autres.
• Assurez-vous qu'il n'y a pas trop de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Le bac d'alimentation papier peut
contenir 250 feuilles de papier au maximum, en fonction de l'épaisseur de votre papier.
• Vérifiez que vous utilisez un type de papier adéquat. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
• Retirez le papier du bac d'alimentation papier, et déramez-le ou ventilez-le.
• Dans un environnement humide, les feuilles risquent de se coller les unes aux autres.
Impossible d'insérer plusieurs feuilles
de papier.
• Il se peut que différents types de papier soient empilés dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Chargez des feuilles
d'un type, d'un format et d'un grammage identiques.
• En cas de bourrage dû à la présence de différents types de feuilles, retirez les feuilles coincées. Reportez-vous à la
"Suppression du bourrage dans les circuits d'entraînement du papier".
Le papier n'est pas entraîné dans
l'imprimante.
• Eliminez tous les blocages à l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne".
• Le papier n'a pas été chargé correctement. Retirer le papier du bac d'alimentation et le recharger correctement.
• Il y a trop de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Enlever le surplus de papier.
• Le papier est trop épais. N'utiliser que du papier conforme aux spécifications de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la
"Spécifications du papier".
Le papier ne cesse de se coincer. • Vérifiez que vous avez bien sélectionné le bon format de papier. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du format de
papier".
• Le type de papier utilisé n'est pas correct. N'utiliser que du papier conforme aux spécifications de l'imprimante.
Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
• Des particules (poussière, toner ou papier) se sont accumulées dans l'imprimante. Ouvrir le capot avant de
l'imprimante et retirer les particules en question.
Les transparents se collent les uns
aux autres au niveau du plateau de
sortie.
Utilisez uniquement des transparents conçus spécifiquement pour une imprimante laser. Retirez chaque transparent
au fur et à mesure qu'il sort de l'imprimante.
Les enveloppes s'impriment de
travers ou ne sont pas entraînées
correctement.
Assurez-vous que les guide-papier appuient bien sur les deux côtés des enveloppes.
Situation Cause possible Solutions éventuelles
L'imprimante n'imprime pas. L'imprimante n'est pas sous tension. Vérifier que le cordon d'alimentation est correctement
branché. Vérifier le bouton Marche/Arrêt et l'alimentation
électrique.
Vous n'avez pas défini votre imprimante comme
imprimante par défaut.
Sélectionnez Dell Laser MFP 1815 en tant qu'imprimante
par défaut sous Windows.
Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Démarrer Paramètres
Imprimantes. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône
de l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815, puis sélectionnez
Définir comme imprimante par défaut.
Vérifiez les éléments ci-contre sur l'imprimante :
En cas d'erreur système de l'imprimante, contactez votre
technicien de maintenance.
• Les capots avant et arrière ne sont pas fermés.
• Du papier est coincé.
• Il n'y a pas de papier dans le bac.
• La cartouche de toner n'est pas installée.
Le câble de connexion qui relie l'ordinateur à
l'imprimante n'est pas correctement raccordé.
Déconnecter le câble d'imprimante, puis le reconnecter.
Le câble de connexion qui relie l'ordinateur à
l'imprimante est défectueux.
Si possible, raccordez le câble à un autre ordinateur en
bon état de marche et imprimez un document. Vous
pouvez également utiliser un autre câble d'imprimante.
L'imprimante est mal configurée. Vérifiez dans les propriétés de l'imprimante que tous les
paramètres d'impression sont corrects.
Le pilote d'impression est peut-être mal installé. Supprimez le pilote d'impression, puis réinstallez-le ;
reportez-vous respectivement à la "Désinstallation du
logiciel"et à la "Installation du logiciel sous Windows".
L'imprimante présente un dysfonctionnement. Vérifiez le message affiché à l'écran pour déterminer si
l'imprimante signale une erreur système.
L'imprimante n'utilise pas le bon bac
d'alimentation.
La source d'alimentation papier sélectionnée dans les
propriétés de l'imprimante est incorrecte.
Pour la plupart des logiciels d'application, pour
sélectionner la source d'alimentation du papier il faut aller
sous l'onglet Papier du menu Propriétés de l'imprimante.
Sélectionnez la source d'alimentation papier adéquate.
Reportez-vous à la "Onglet Papier".
Une tâche d'impression est très lente. L'impression est peut-être très complexe. Simplifier la page ou modifier les paramètres de qualité
d'impression.
La vitesse d'impression maximale de votre imprimante est
27 pages/minute au format Letter.
Si vous utilisez Windows 98/Me, il se peut que les
paramètres du spouleur soient mal définis.
Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Démarrer Paramètres
Imprimantes. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône
de l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815, puis cliquez sur
Propriétés Détails Paramètres du spouleur.
Sélectionnez le paramètre désiré.Problèmes de qualité d'impression
L'intérieur de l'imprimante est peut-être sale ou le chargement d'un papier inadéquat peut réduire la qualité d'impression. Reportez-vous au tableau cidessous pour résoudre le problème.
La moitié de la page est blanche. L'orientation de la page n'est peut-être pas correcte. Changez l'orientation de la page dans votre application.
Reportez-vous à la "Onglet Mise en page".
Le format du papier et les paramètres de format ne
correspondent pas.
Assurez-vous que le format de papier défini dans les
paramètres du pilote d'impression correspond au format
du papier se trouvant dans le bac d'alimentation.
L'imprimante imprime mais le texte
est faux, tronqué ou incomplet.
Le câble d'imprimante est mal raccordé ou défectueux. Débrancher le câble de l'imprimante, puis le rebrancher.
Essayez d'imprimer un document ayant déjà été
correctement imprimé. Si possible, reliez le câble et
l'appareil à un autre ordinateur et lancez l'impression d'un
document ayant déjà été correctement imprimé. Si ces
solutions n'aboutissent pas, remplacez le câble de
l'imprimante.
Vous avez sélectionné le mauvais pilote d'impression. Vérifiez que votre imprimante est sélectionnée dans le
menu de sélection de l'imprimante de l'application.
L'application ne fonctionne pas correctement. Essayer d'imprimer un document à partir d'une autre
application.
Le système d'exploitation ne fonctionne pas
correctement.
Quittez Windows, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Éteignez
l'imprimante, puis rallumez-la.
Les pages s'impriment mais elles sont
blanches.
La cartouche d'encre est défectueuse ou vide. Secouez la cartouche de toner à plusieurs reprises.
Reportez-vous à la "Redistribution de l'encre".
Le cas échéant, remplacez la cartouche.
Le fichier contient peut-être des pages blanches. Vérifiez que le fichier ne contient pas de pages blanches.
Certains éléments, comme le contrôleur ou la carte, sont
peut-être défectueux.
Contactez un technicien de maintenance.
Les illustrations ne s'impriment pas
correctement dans Adobe Illustrator.
L'application est mal configurée. Imprimez le document en sélectionnant Télécharger en
tant qu'image bit dans la fenêtre Options avancées des
propriétés graphiques.
Situation Solutions éventuelles
Impression claire ou floue Si une strie blanche verticale ou une zone floue apparaît sur la page :
• Le niveau d'encre de la cartouche est insuffisant. Essayez de secouer la cartouche pour
redistribuer le reste d'encre et prolonger son utilisation. Reportez-vous à la "Redistribution
de l'encre". Si la qualité ne s'améliore pas, installez une cartouche de toner neuve.
• Le papier n'est pas conforme aux spécifications (papier humide ou rugueux, par exemple). Reportez-vous à la
"Spécifications du papier".
• Si toute la page est claire, la résolution d'impression choisie est trop basse ou le mode Économie d'encre est activé.
Réglez la résolution et désactivez le mode Économie d'encre. Reportez-vous à la "Onglet Graphiques".
• La présence à la fois de zones floues et de traînées d'encre peut indiquer la nécessité de nettoyer la cartouche.
Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne".
• La surface de la vitre LSU à l'intérieur de l'imprimante peut être sale. Nettoyez la LSU (reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage
de la partie interne").
Taches d'encre • Le papier n'est pas conforme aux spécifications (papier humide ou rugueux, par exemple). Reportez-vous à la
"Spécifications du papier".
• Le rouleau de l'imprimante est peut-être sale. Nettoyez l'intérieur de votre imprimante. Reportez-vous à la
"Nettoyage de la partie interne".
• Le circuit d'entraînement du papier a besoin d'être nettoyé. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage du tambour".
Zones vides Si des zones floues ou vides, généralement au niveau des arrondis des caractères, apparaissent sur la page :
• Il se peut qu'une feuille de papier soit de mauvaise qualité. Essayez de réimprimer la
page.
• Le taux d'humidité du papier n'est pas homogène ou certaines zones du papier sont humides. Changez de type de
papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
• La rame de papier est peut-être de mauvaise qualité. Le processus de fabrication du papier est à l'origine du
problème et empêche l'encre de se fixer sur certaines zones. Changez de marque ou de type de papier.
• La cartouche d'encre est peut-être défectueuse. Reportez-vous à la section "Défauts verticaux répétitifs", page
suivante.
• Si le problème persiste, contactez un technicien de maintenance.
Lignes verticales • Si des lignes noires verticales font leur apparition sur la page, c'est que le tambour situé à l'intérieur de la cartouche de
toner a probablement été rayé. Installez une nouvelle cartouche. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la
cartouche d'encre".
• Si des bandes blanches verticales apparaissent sur la page, vérifiez l'état de propreté de la surface de la vitre LSU à
l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Nettoyez la LSU (reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne").Fond grisé Si la quantité d'encre déposée sur la page crée un fond grisé inacceptable :
• Choisissez un papier d'un grammage inférieur. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
• Vérifiez l'environnement de l'imprimante ; un air trop sec (peu d'humidité) ou trop humide (plus de 80 % d'humidité
relative) peut avoir une incidence sur l'ombrage du fond.
• Retirez l'ancienne cartouche et installez-en une nouvelle. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la cartouche
d'encre".
Traînées d'encre • Nettoyez l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne".
• Vérifiez le format et la qualité du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
• Retirez la cartouche et installez-en une nouvelle. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre".
Défauts verticaux répétitifs
Si des marques apparaissent plusieurs fois sur une page, à intervalles réguliers :
• La cartouche d'encre est peut-être endommagée. Si une marque se répète sur la page, imprimez plusieurs pages de
nettoyage afin de nettoyer la cartouche (voir "Nettoyage du tambour"). Si le problème persiste, remplacez la
cartouche. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre".
• Il se peut que de l'encre se soit déposée sur certains éléments de l'imprimante. Si le défaut apparaît au dos de la page,
le problème se résoudra sans doute de lui-même après l'impression de quelques pages.
• Le module du four est peut-être endommagé. Contactez un technicien de maintenance.
Fond moucheté Les fonds mouchetés apparaissent lorsque des particules de toner se déposent sur la page.
• Le papier peut être trop humide. Essayez une autre rame de papier. N'ouvrez les rames qu'au dernier moment afin
d'éviter que le papier n'absorbe l'humidité de l'air.
• Si le fond moucheté apparaît sur une enveloppe, changez la mise en page pour éviter l'impression sur des zones de
pliure. L'impression sur une zone de pliure peut causer des problèmes.
• Si le fond moucheté recouvre la totalité de la page, réglez la résolution à partir de l'application ou des propriétés de
l'imprimante.
Caractères mal formés • Si des caractères sont mal formés, donnant l'impression d'images creuses, le papier est peut-être trop lisse. Changez
de type de papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
• Si les caractères sont mal formés, créant un effet d'ondulation, le scanner a peut-être besoin d'une révision. Dans ce
cas, contactez un technicien de maintenance.
Impression oblique • Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé.
• Vérifiez le format et la qualité du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
• Assurez-vous que le papier ou tout autre support est correctement chargé, et que les guides ne sont ni trop proches
ni trop éloignés des bords du papier.
Pages gondolées • Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé.
• Vérifiez le format et la qualité du papier. Une température et une humidité élevées peuvent provoquer une
ondulation du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
• Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Essayez également de changer le sens du papier
(rotation à 180 degrés) dans le bac d'alimentation papier.
• Essayez d'imprimer vers le capot arrière.
Pages pliées ou froissées • Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé.
• Vérifiez le format et la qualité du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
• Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Essayez également de changer le sens du papier
(rotation à 180 degrés) dans le bac d'alimentation papier.
• Essayez d'imprimer vers le capot arrière.
Dos de la page taché Localisez d'éventuelles fuites d'encre. Nettoyez l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie Problèmes de télécopie
interne".
Pages noires • La cartouche d'encre n'est sans doute pas installée correctement. Enlevez-la, puis réinstallez-la.
• La cartouche d'encre est peut-être défectueuse. Installez une nouvelle cartouche. Reportez-vous à la
"Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre".
• Il se peut que l'imprimante ait besoin d'une révision. Contactez un technicien de maintenance.
Encre non fixée • Nettoyez l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne".
• Vérifiez le format et la qualité du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
• Installez une nouvelle cartouche. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre".
• Si le problème persiste, l'imprimante a peut-être besoin d'une révision. Contactez un technicien de maintenance.
Caractères tachés de blanc Certains caractères présentent des zones blanches alors qu'ils devraient être uniformément noirs.
• Si vous utilisez des transparents, choisissez-en un autre type. Etant donné la composition du transparent, il est
normal de constater certains espacements entre les caractères.
• Il se peut que vous imprimiez du mauvais côté du papier. Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d'alimentation
papier.
• Le papier n'est peut-être pas conforme aux spécifications. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier".
Stries horizontales Des stries noires horizontales ou des traînées d'encre apparaissent :
• La cartouche d'encre est peut-être mal installée. Enlevez-la, puis réinstallez-la.
• La cartouche d'encre est peut-être défectueuse. Installez une nouvelle cartouche. Reportez-vous à la
"Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre".
• Si le problème persiste, l'imprimante a peut-être besoin d'une révision. Contactez un technicien de maintenance.
Ondulations Les feuilles imprimées présentent des plissements ou le papier n'est pas entraîné dans l'imprimante.
• Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Essayez également de changer le sens du papier
(rotation à 180 degrés) dans le bac d'alimentation papier.
• Essayez d'imprimer vers l'autre capot arrière.
Situation Solutions éventuelles
L'imprimante ne fonctionne pas, rien ne
s'affiche à l'écran et les touches ne répondent
pas.
• Débranchez et rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation.
• Vérifiez que la prise secteur est alimentée.
Aucune tonalité d'appel émise. • Vérifiez que le cordon de la ligne téléphonique est correctement branché. Reportez-vous à la "Accès à la
ligne téléphonique".
• Pour vérifier que la prise téléphonique murale fonctionne correctement, branchez-y un autre téléphone.
Les numéros mémorisés ne sont pas
composés correctement.
Vérifiez que les numéros sont correctement mémorisés. Imprimez la liste des entrées du répertoire en vous
reportant à la section "Impression d'un répertoire".
Le document n'est pas entraîné dans
l'imprimante.
• Assurez-vous que le document n'est pas froissé et que vous l'insérez correctement. Vérifiez que tous les
documents sont du bon format et qu'ils ne sont ni trop épais ni trop fins.
• Assurez vous que le capot du chargeur automatique est correctement fermé.
Impossible de recevoir automatiquement les
télécopies.
• Vous devez sélectionner le mode fax.
• Vérifiez que le chargeur automatique est plein.
• Regardez si l'écran affiche le message "MEMOIRE PLEINE".
L'imprimante n'effectue pas d'envoi. • Vérifiez que le document est placé dans le chargeur ou sur la vitre d'exposition.
• ENVOI Le message doit s'afficher sur l'écran.
• Assurez-vous que le télécopieur distant est en mesure de recevoir votre fax.Problèmes de copie
Problèmes de numérisation
Les fax reçus comportent des espaces blancs
ou les copies sont de mauvaise qualité.
• Il se peut que le télécopieur source soit défectueux.
• Une ligne téléphonique bruyante peut provoquer des erreurs de ligne.
• Vérifiez le fonctionnement de votre imprimante en imprimant une copie.
• Il se peut que la cartouche d'encre soit vide. Remplacez la cartouche d'encre, en vous reportant à la
"Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre".
Certains mots de la télécopie reçue sont
étirés.
Le télécopieur source a rencontré un problème de bourrage temporaire causé par le document.
Des lignes apparaissent sur le document que
vous envoyez.
La vitre de numérisation est peut-être sale. Nettoyez-la. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage du scanner".
L'imprimante compose un numéro, mais ne
parvient pas à se connecter à l'appareil
distant.
Il se peut que l'autre télécopieur soit éteint, qu'il manque de papier ou qu'il ne puisse pas recevoir d'appels
entrants. Demandez à l'opérateur de ce télécopieur de résoudre le problème.
Les documents ne sont pas stockés dans la
mémoire.
La mémoire est peut-être insuffisante pour enregistrer le document. Si le message MEMOIRE PLEINE
apparaît, effacez les documents inutiles de la mémoire, puis réenregistrez votre document.
Des zones blanches apparaissent en bas de
chaque page, ainsi qu'une petite bande de
texte dans la partie supérieure.
Il se peut que vous ayez choisi une configuration de papier incorrecte dans le paramètre d'option
d'utilisateur. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du type de papier"et à la "Configuration du format de
papier".
Situation Solutions éventuelles
Les copies sont trop claires ou trop sombres. Utilisez le menu CONTRASTE pour augmenter ou diminuer le contraste du fond des copies.
Les copies contiennent des traînées, des
lignes, des traces ou des taches.
• Si les défauts sont sur l'original, sélectionnez COP. CONTRASTE pour éclairer l'arrière-plan de vos
copies.
• Si l'original est de bonne qualité, nettoyez la vitre d'exposition et la surface intérieure du chargeur.
Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage du scanner".
L'image copiée est de travers. • Vérifiez que l'original est correctement positionné sur la vitre d'exposition.
• Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé.
Des copies blanches sont imprimées. Assurez-vous que l'original est face vers le bas sur le verre inactinique ou face vers le haut dans le chargeur
automatique.
L'image s'efface facilement de la copie. • Remplacez le papier du bac d'alimentation papier par du papier provenant d'un nouveau paquet.
• Dans les environnements très humides, ne laissez pas le papier dans l'imprimante pendant une durée
prolongée.
Des bourrages papier surviennent
régulièrement.
• Ventilez la pile de papier, puis retournez-la dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Changez la pile de papier
du bac d'alimentation. Le cas échéant, vérifiez/ajustez les guides papier.
• Assurez-vous que le grammage du papier est correct. L'utilisation d'un papier à lettre de 75 g/m2
est
recommandée.
• Vérifiez qu'aucune feuille ni aucun morceau de papier ne reste coincé dans l'imprimante après un
bourrage papier.
La cartouche d'encre ne permet pas
d'imprimer autant de copies que prévu.
• Les originaux contiennent peut-être des images, des zones sombres ou des lignes épaisses. Les
documents de type formulaire, lettres d'information ou livres consomment plus d'encre.
• L'imprimante est peut-être mise sous et hors tension très fréquemment.
• Le chargeur de documents reste peut-être ouvert lorsque vous effectuez des copies.
Situation Solutions éventuelles
Le scanner ne fonctionne pas. • Assurez-vous que le document à numériser est placé face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre
de d'exposition ou vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique.
• Il se peut qu'il n'y ait pas assez de mémoire disponible pour vous permettre de stocker le document que
vous souhaitez numériser. Essayez la fonction de pré-numérisation pour voir si elle fonctionne. Essayez
de diminuer la résolution de numérisation.
• Vérifiez que le câble USB ou parallèle est correctement branché.
• Assurez-vous que le câble USB ou parallèle n'est pas défectueux Le cas échéant, remplacez le câble.
• Vérifiez que le scanner est correctement configuré. Examinez l'application que vous souhaitez utiliser et
vérifiez que la tâche de numérisation est bien envoyée au port adéquat.
La numérisation est très lente. • Vérifiez si l'imprimante est en train d'imprimer des données reçues. Numérisez le document une fois la
tâche en cours terminée.
• La numérisation des graphiques est plus lente que celle des textes.
• La vitesse de communication diminue en mode numérisation, car une grande quantité de mémoire est
requise pour analyser et reproduire l'image numérisée.
Un message s'affiche sur l'écran de votre
ordinateur :
• "Le périphérique ne peut être réglé
sur le mode matériel souhaité."
• "Le port est actuellement utilisé par
autre programme."
• "Le port est désactivé."
• "Réception ou impression de données en
• L'imprimante est peut-être en cours de copie ou d'impression. Une fois la tâche terminée,
essayez de nouveau.
• Le port sélectionné est en cours d'utilisation. Redémarrez votre ordinateur et réessayez.
• Il se peut que le câble d'imprimante soit mal branché ou que l'imprimante ne soit pas sous tension.
• Le pilote du scanner n'est pas installé ou bien l'environnement d'exploitation n'est pas correctement
configuré.
• Vérifiez que le port est branché correctement et que le système est sous tension. Puis redémarrer
l'ordinateur.
• Vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement branché.Problèmes de numérisation en réseau
Problèmes liés à Windows
Problèmes liés au système Linux
cours. Réessayez une fois la tâche
terminée."
• "Traitement non valide"
• "La numérisation a échoué"
Situation Solutions éventuelles
Je ne trouve pas un fichier image numérisé. Vous pouvez vérifier la destination d'un fichier numérisé dans la page Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés de la
numérisation en réseau.
Je ne trouve pas un fichier image juste après
sa numérisation.
Assurez-vous que l'application correspondant au fichier numérisé est présente sur votre ordinateur.
Assurez-vous que l'option "Afficher l'image dès sa numérisation" est sélectionnée dans la page Avancé de la
fenêtre Propriétés de la numérisation en réseau, afin que l'image numérisée s'ouvre immédiatement après la
numérisation.
J'ai oublié mon identifiant et mon code PIN. Consultez votre identifiant et votre code PIN sur la page du serveur dans la fenêtre Propriétés de la
numérisation en réseau.
Je n'arrive pas à consulter le fichier d'aide. Pour consulter le fichier d'aide, vous avez besoin de Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 service pack 2 ou
supérieur.
Je n'arrive pas à utiliser le Gestionnaire de
numérisation en réseau.
Vérifiez votre système d'exploitation.
Les systèmes d'exploitation compatibles sont : Microsoft Windows 98/ME/NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
Situation Solutions éventuelles
Le message "Fichier utilisé" s'affiche durant
l'installation.
Fermez tous les programmes ouverts. Supprimez tous les logiciels du groupe de démarrage, puis redémarrez
Windows. Réinstallez le pilote d'impression.
Le message "Erreur d'écriture sur LPTx"
apparaît.
• Vérifiez si les câbles sont correctement branchés et que l'appareil est en marche.
• Ce message peut également apparaître si l'option de transmission bidirectionnelle n'est pas activée dans
le pilote.
Le message "Erreur de protection générale",
"Exception OE", "Spool32" ou "Opération non
conforme" apparaît.
Fermez toutes les applications, redémarrez Windows et recommencez l'impression.
Les messages "Échec d'impression" et "Erreur
de temporisation de l'imprimante" s'affichent.
Ces messages sont susceptibles d'apparaître en cours d'impression. Attendez simplement jusqu'à ce que
l'appareil ait terminé l'impression. Si le message apparaît en mode veille ou une fois l'impression achevée,
vérifiez le branchement et/ou l'existence d'une erreur éventuelle.
REMARQUE : Référez-vous au Guide d'utilisation de Microsoft Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista fourni avec votre PC pour plus
d'informations sur les messages d'erreur Windows.
Situation Solutions éventuelles
L'imprimante n'imprime pas. • Vérifiez si le pilote d'impression est installé. Ouvrez le configurateur MFP et sélectionnez l'onglet Printers
dans la fenêtre Printers configuration pour afficher la liste des imprimantes disponibles. Vérifiez que votre
imprimante figure bien sur la liste. Si ce n'est pas le cas, ouvrez l'assistant Add new printer (Ajout d'une
nouvelle imprimante) pour paramétrer l'imprimante.
• Vérifiez que l'imprimante est sous tension. Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Printers configuration
(Configuration des imprimantes) et sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste des imprimantes. Vérifiez la
description indiquée dans la zone Selected printer. Si son état contient la chaîne "(stopped)", appuyez sur
le bouton Démarrer. Une fois que vous avez effectué ces étapes, l'imprimante devrait reprendre son
fonctionnement normal. L'état "stopped" peut être activé lorsque certains problèmes d'impression
apparaissent. Il peut être généré, par exemple, si vous tentez d'imprimer un document alors que le port
MFP est utilisé par une application de numérisation.
• Vérifiez que le port MFP est disponible. Étant donné que les composants MFP (imprimante et scanner)
partagent la même interface d'E/S (port MFP), plusieurs applications clientes risquent d'accéder au port
MFP au même moment. Pour éviter tout conflit, une seule application est autorisée à accéder au
périphérique. Un message signalant que le périphérique est occupé est envoyé à l'autre application
demandeuse. Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue MFP ports configuration et sélectionnez le port affecté à
l'imprimante. Vérifiez dans la zone Selected port si le port est occupé par une autre application. Si tel est
le cas, attendez la fin de la tâche ou cliquez sur Release port si l'application utilisant le port ne fonctionne
pas correctement.
• Vérifiez si votre application comporte une option d'impression spéciale du type "-oraw". Si "-oraw" figure
dans le paramètre de ligne de commande, supprimez-le pour obtenir une impression correcte. Dans le cas
du terminal Gimp, sélectionnez "print" "Setup printer" et modifiez le paramètre de ligne de commande
dans l'élément de commande.
L'imprimante n'apparaît pas dans la liste des
scanners.
• Vérifiez si l'imprimante est bien connectée à l'ordinateur. Vérifiez qu'il est correctement connecté via le
port USB et qu'il est sous tension.
• Vérifiez si le pilote de numérisation correspondant à votre imprimante est installé sur votre système.
Ouvrez le configurateur MFP, allez à Configuration des scanners, puis appuyez sur Drivers. Vérifiez que le
pilote portant le même nom que votre imprimante est répertorié dans la fenêtre.
• Vérifiez que le port MFP est disponible. Étant donné que les composants MFP (imprimante et scanner) Problèmes liés au système Macintosh
Problèmes au niveau du Sélecteur
Résolution des problèmes Postscript (PS)
Les problèmes présentés ci-dessous sont propres au langage PostScript et peuvent survenir lorsque différents langages d'impression sont utilisés en même
temps.
partagent la même interface d'E/S (port MFP), plusieurs applications clientes risquent d'accéder au port
MFP au même moment. Pour éviter tout conflit, une seule application est autorisée à accéder au
périphérique. Un message signalant que le périphérique est occupé est envoyé à l'autre application
demandeuse. Ceci se produit généralement au début de la procédure de numérisation, et une boîte de
message appropriée s'affiche.
• Pour identifier la source du problème, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue MFP ports configuration et sélectionnez
le port affecté à l'imprimante. Le symbole du port MFP /dev/mfp0 correspond à l'indication LP:0 affichée
dans les options du scanner, /dev/mfp1 correspond à LP:1, etc. Les ports USB démarrant à
l'indication /dev/mfp4, le scanner sur USB:0 correspond à /dev/mfp4, et ainsi de suite. Vérifiez dans la
zone Selected port si le port est occupé par une autre application. Si tel est le cas, attendez la fin de la
tâche ou cliquez sur Release port si l'application utilisant le port ne fonctionne pas correctement.
L'imprimante ne numérise pas. • Vérifiez qu'un document est chargé dans l'imprimante.
• Vérifiez que l'appareil est connecté à l'ordinateur. En cas d'erreur d'E/S pendant la numérisation, vérifiez
si la connexion est correcte.
• Vérifiez que le port MFP est disponible. Étant donné que les composants MFP (imprimante et scanner)
partagent la même interface d'E/S (port MFP), plusieurs applications clientes risquent d'accéder au port
MFP au même moment. Pour éviter tout conflit, une seule application est autorisée à accéder au
périphérique. Un message signalant que le périphérique est occupé est envoyé à l'autre application
demandeuse. Ce problème se produit généralement pendant le démarrage de la procédure de
numérisation ; un message approprié s'affiche.
Pour identifier la source du problème, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue MFP ports configuration et sélectionnez
le port affecté à l'imprimante. Le symbole du port MFP /dev/mfp0 correspond à l'indication LP:0 affichée
dans les options du scanner, /dev/mfp1 correspond à LP:1, etc. Les ports USB démarrant à
l'indication /dev/mfp4, le scanner sur USB:0 correspond à /dev/mfp4, et ainsi de suite. Vérifiez dans la
zone Selected port si le port est occupé par une autre application. Si tel est le cas, attendez la fin de la
tâche ou cliquez sur Release port si l'application utilisant le port ne fonctionne pas correctement.
Impossible d'imprimer après avoir installé
simultanément le logiciel d'imprimante Linux
et le pilote MFP sur le même ordinateur.
• Étant donné que le logiciel d'imprimante Linux et le pilote MFP créent un lien symbolique
vers la commande d'impression "lpr", fréquemment utilisée sur les clones Unix, il n'est pas
recommandé d'installer ces deux composants sur le même ordinateur.
Impossible de numériser au moyen du
terminal Gimp.
• Vérifiez que le menu Acquire du terminal Gimp comporte bien l'option "Xsane:Device dialog". Sinon,
installez le compagnon Xsane pour Gimp sur votre ordinateur. Vous trouverez l'ensemble compagnon
Xsane pour Gimp sur le CD Linux ou sur la page d'accueil Gimp. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au
CD-ROM d'aide de Linux ou à l'application de terminal Gimp.
Si vous souhaitez utiliser un autre programme de numérisation, reportez-vous à l'Aide de l'application.
Le message d'erreur "Unable to open MFP
port device file" s'affiche lors de l'impression
d'un document.
Il n'est pas conseillé de modifier les paramètres de la tâche d'impression (via l'utilitaire SLPR, par exemple)
pendant l'impression d'une tâche. Les versions connues du serveur CUPS interrompent la tâche d'impression
si les options d'impression sont modifiées, puis tentent de relancer la tâche depuis le début. Étant donné
que le pilote MFP pour Linux verrouille le port MFP pendant l'impression, ce port reste verrouillé en cas
d'interruption soudaine du pilote et, par conséquent, n'est pas disponible pour les tâches d'impression
suivantes. Si cette situation se produit, essayez de déverrouiller le port MFP.
Situation Solutions éventuelles
L'imprimante n'imprime pas à partir d'Acrobat Reader. Changez l'option Méthode d'impression pour Print as Image lorsque vous imprimez à partir
d'Acrobat Reader.
Le document a été imprimé, mais le travail d'impression
n'a pas disparu de la file d'attente sous Mac OS 10.3.2.
Mettez à jour votre système d'exploitation Mac et passez au système 10.3.3. ou plus.
REMARQUE : Pour que les messages d'erreurs PS s'impriment ou s'affichent en cas de problème, ouvrez la fenêtre des options d'impression et cliquez
sur l'option désirée située en regard de la section des erreurs PostScript.
Problème Cause possible Solution
Vous ne pouvez pas imprimer de
fichier PostScript.
Le module PostScript n'est peut-être pas installé. Imprimez une page de configuration et vérifiez que la
version PostScript est disponible pour impression.
Erreur de contrôle de limite (Limit
Check Error)
La tâche d'impression peut être trop complexe. Simplifier la page ou modifier les paramètres de qualité
d'impression.
Ou, augmentez la capacité de la mémoire.
Une page d'erreurs PostScript
s'imprime.
La tâche d'impression ne contient peut-être pas de
données PostScript.
Assurez-vous que le document est de type PostScript.
Vérifiez si le pilote attend l'envoi d'un fichier de
configuration ou d'en-tête PostScript à l'imprimante.
Le bac optionnel 2 n'est pas
sélectionné dans le pilote.
Le pilote d'impression n'a pas été configuré pour
reconnaître le bac optionnel 2.
Ouvrez les propriétés du pilote PostScript et définissez
l'élément Bac optionnel de l'option Périphérique à
Installé.
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1815dn_User's%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf
Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire
Présentation du système
Utilisation du programme de configuration du système
Installation des composants du système
Dépannage du système
Exécution des diagnostics du système
Cavaliers et connecteurs
Obtention d'aide
Glossaire
Remarques, avis et précautions
Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
© 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, PowerConnect, XPS et Dell OpenManage sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel est une
marque déposée de Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft, MS-DOS et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis
et/ou dans d'autres pays.
D'autres marques et noms de marques peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits.
Dell Inc. dénie tout intérêt propriétaire vis-à-vis des marques et des noms de marque autres que les siens.
REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.
AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème.
PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Retour au sommaire
Présentation du système
Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire
Autres informations utiles
Fonctions du système accessibles au démarrage
Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau avant
Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière
Codes du voyant d'alimentation
Codes des voyants de NIC
Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD
Messages système
Messages d'avertissement
Messages de diagnostic
Messages d'alerte
Cette section décrit les caractéristiques essentielles au fonctionnement du système (matériel, micrologiciel et interface logicielle). Les connecteurs situés sur
les panneaux avant et arrière permettent au système de bénéficier d'une connectivité optimale et de nombreuses possibilités d'extension. Le micrologiciel, le
système d'exploitation et les applications gèrent le système ainsi que l'état des composants. Ils vous alertent lorsqu'un incident survient. Les informations
concernant l'état du système peuvent être transmises par les éléments suivants :
l Voyants des panneaux avant et arrière
l Messages du système
l Messages d'avertissement
l Messages de diagnostic
l Messages d'alerte
Cette section décrit chaque type de message et répertorie les causes possibles, ainsi que les mesures à prendre pour résoudre les incidents indiqués. Elle
contient également une description des voyants et des caractéristiques du système.
Autres informations utiles
l Les documents Rack Installation Guide (Guide d'installation du rack) et Rack Installation Instructions (Instructions d'installation du rack) fournis avec la
solution rack décrivent l'installation du système.
l Le document Getting Started Guide (Guide de mise en route) décrit les caractéristiques du système, les procédures de configuration et les spécifications
techniques.
l Les CD fournis avec le système contiennent des documents et des outils relatifs à la configuration et à la gestion du système.
l La documentation des logiciels de gestion de systèmes contient des informations sur les fonctionnalités, l'installation et l'utilisation de base de ces
logiciels, ainsi que sur la configuration requise.
l La documentation du système d'exploitation indique comment installer (au besoin), configurer et utiliser le système d'exploitation.
l La documentation fournie avec les composants achetés séparément contient des informations permettant de configurer et d'installer ces options.
l Des mises à jour sont parfois fournies avec le système. Elles décrivent les modifications apportées au système, aux logiciels ou à la documentation.
l Si des notes d'édition ou des fichiers lisez-moi (readme) sont fournis, ils contiennent des mises à jour de dernière minute apportées au système ou à la
documentation, ou bien des informations techniques avancées destinées aux utilisateurs expérimentés ou aux techniciens.
Fonctions du système accessibles au démarrage
Le tableau 1-1 décrit certaines touches pouvant être utilisées lors du démarrage pour accéder aux fonctions du système. Si le système d'exploitation
commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur la touche voulue, laissez-le finir de démarrer, puis arrêtez-le et réessayez.
Tableau 1-1. Touches d'accès aux fonctions du système
PRÉCAUTION : Le document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) contient d'importantes informations se rapportant à
la sécurité et aux réglementations. Les informations sur la garantie se trouvent soit dans ce document, soit à part.
REMARQUE : Vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent
souvent les informations contenues dans les autres documents.
Touche(s) Description
Permet d'accéder au programme de configuration du système. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système.
Ouvre la partition d'utilitaires, qui permet d'exécuter les diagnostics. Voir Exécution des diagnostics du système.Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau avant
La figure 1-1 présente les boutons, les voyants et les connecteurs situés derrière le cadre de rack (en option), sur le panneau avant.
Figure 1-1. Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau avant
Tableau 1-2. Voyants, boutons et connecteurs du panneau avant
Ouvre l'utilitaire de gestion du contrôleur BMC (BaseBoard Management Controller), qui permet d'accéder au journal d'événements du
système (SEL). Voir le document BMC User's Guide (Contrôleur BMC - Guide d'utilisation) pour plus d'informations sur la configuration et
l'utilisation de ce contrôleur.
Ouvre l'utilitaire de configuration SAS. Consultez le guide d'utilisation de la carte SAS pour plus d'informations.
Ouvre l'utilitaire de configuration RAID, qui permet de configurer une carte contrôleur RAID (en option). Pour plus d'informations, consultez la
documentation de la carte RAID.
Cette option s'affiche uniquement si le support PXE est activé dans le programme de configuration du système. (Voir Écran Integrated
Devices (Périphériques intégrés)). Cette combinaison de touches permet de configurer les paramètres du NIC pour l'amorçage PXE. Pour plus
d'informations, consultez la documentation du NIC intégré.
Si vous utilisez le contrôleur DRAC (Dell Remote Access Controller) en option, cette combinaison de touches permet d'accéder aux paramètres
de configuration correspondants. Consultez le guide d'utilisation du contrôleur DRAC pour plus d'informations sur la configuration et
l'utilisation de ce contrôleur.
Numéro Voyant, bouton ou
connecteur
Icône Description
1 Voyant et bouton
d'alimentation
Le voyant d'alimentation est fixe quand le système est allumé.
Le bouton d'alimentation contrôle la sortie du bloc d'alimentation en CC qui alimente le système.
REMARQUE : Si vous éteignez un ordinateur utilisant un système d'exploitation conforme ACPI en appuyant sur le
bouton d'alimentation, le système peut effectuer un arrêt normal avant que l'alimentation ne soit coupée. Si le
système d'exploitation n'est pas conforme ACPI, une pression sur le bouton d'alimentation l'éteint immédiatement.
2 Bouton NMI Ce bouton est utilisé pour la résolution de certains incidents liés aux logiciels et aux pilotes de périphériques avec
certains systèmes d'exploitation. Pour l'activer, utilisez la pointe d'un trombone.
Appuyez sur ce bouton uniquement si un technicien de support qualifié vous demande de le faire, ou si cela est
préconisé dans la documentation du système d'exploitation.
3 Bouton
d'identification du
système
Les boutons d'identification des panneaux avant et arrière peuvent servir à identifier un système spécifique au
sein d'un rack. Si l'un de ces boutons est activé, l'écran LCD du panneau avant et le voyant d'état du système
(bleu) situé sur le panneau arrière clignotent jusqu'à ce que l'utilisateur appuie de nouveau sur l'un des boutons.
4 Écran LCD Affiche l'ID du système, des informations d'état et des messages d'erreur.
L'écran LCD s'allume lorsque le système fonctionne normalement. Les logiciels de gestion de systèmes, tout
comme les boutons d'identification situés à l'avant et à l'arrière du système, peuvent faire clignoter l'écran LCD en
bleu pour identifier un système spécifique.
L'écran LCD s'allume en orange lorsque le système nécessite une intervention. Il affiche alors un code d'erreur
suivi d'un texte descriptif.
REMARQUE : Si le système est connecté à l'alimentation en CA et si une erreur a été détectée, l'écran LCD
s'allume en orange, que le système soit allumé ou non.
5 Connecteurs
USB (2)
Permettent de connecter des périphériques compatibles USB 2.0 au système.
6 Connecteur vidéo Permet de connecter un moniteur au système.
7 Disques durs (6) Six disques de 3,5 pouces enfichables à chaud
OU
Quatre disques de 3,5 pouces enfichables à chaud
8 Lecteur optique (en
option)
Un lecteur slim (IDE ou DVD, en option)Codes des voyants de disques durs
Les supports de disque dur comprennent un voyant d'activité et un voyant d'état. Voir figure 1-2. Dans les configurations RAID, le voyant d'état s'allume pour
indiquer l'état de l'unité. Dans les autres configurations, seul le voyant d'activité s'allume.
Figure 1-2. Voyants des disques durs
Le tableau 1-3 répertorie les codes de voyants des disques durs RAID. Ce comportement varie en fonction des événements affectant les lecteurs du système.
Par exemple, si un disque dur tombe en panne, la séquence "Panne du lecteur" apparaît. Lorsque vous avez sélectionné le lecteur à retirer, la séquence
"Préparation au retrait" apparaît, suivie de la séquence "Lecteur prêt à être inséré ou retiré". Une fois le lecteur de rechange installé, la séquence indiquant
que le lecteur est en cours de préparation apparaît, suivie de la séquence "Lecteur en ligne".
Tableau 1-3. Codes des voyants de disques durs RAID
Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière
La figure 1-3 présente les boutons, les voyants et les connecteurs situés sur le panneau arrière du système.
Figure 1-3. Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière
1 Voyant d'état du lecteur (vert et orange) 2 Voyant d'activité du lecteur (vert)
REMARQUE : Dans les configurations non RAID, seul le voyant d'activité est opérationnel. Le voyant d'état reste éteint.
Condition Comportement du voyant d'état
Identification de l'unité/Préparation
au retrait
Clignotement vert deux fois par seconde
Lecteur prêt à être inséré ou retiré Éteint
Panne anticipée du lecteur Clignotement vert, orange, puis extinction
Panne du lecteur Clignotement orange quatre fois par seconde
Disque en cours de reconstruction Vert, clignotement lent
Lecteur en ligne Vert fixe
Reconstruction annulée Clignotement vert pendant trois secondes, puis orange pendant trois secondes, puis extinction pendant six
secondes
1 Carte de montage PCI centrale
(logement 1)
2 Carte de montage PCI de gauche
(logement 2)Connexion de périphériques externes
Appliquez les consignes suivantes lorsque vous connectez des périphériques externes au système :
l La plupart des périphériques doivent être reliés à un connecteur spécifique et requièrent l'installation de pilotes pour pouvoir fonctionner correctement.
Les pilotes sont généralement fournis avec le système d'exploitation ou avec le périphérique lui-même. Consultez la documentation du périphérique
pour obtenir des instructions spécifiques sur l'installation et la configuration.
l Avant de connecter un périphérique externe, mettez toujours le système hors tension. Le périphérique doit également être éteint. Ensuite, allumez les
périphériques externes avant le système, à moins que la documentation du périphérique ne stipule le contraire.
Pour plus d'informations sur chaque connecteur, voir Cavaliers et connecteurs. Pour plus d'informations sur l'activation, la désactivation et la configuration des
ports d'E/S et des connecteurs, voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système.
Codes du voyant d'alimentation
Le bouton d'alimentation du panneau avant contrôle la mise sous tension des blocs d'alimentation du système. Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume en vert
lorsque le système est sous tension.
Les voyants des blocs d'alimentation redondants indiquent si le système est alimenté et permettent de détecter une éventuelle panne d'alimentation
(voir figure 1-4). Le tableau 1-4 répertorie les codes des voyants des blocs d'alimentation.
Tableau 1-4. Voyants des blocs d'alimentation redondants
Figure 1-4. Voyants des blocs d'alimentation redondants
Codes des voyants de NIC
Chaque NIC du panneau arrière est associé à un voyant qui fournit des informations sur l'activité du réseau et l'état du lien. Voir figure 1-5. Le tableau 1-5
répertorie les codes des voyants de NIC.
Figure 1-5. Voyants de NIC
3 Carte de montage PCI de gauche
(logement 3)
4 Blocs d'alimentation (2)
5 Bouton d'identification du système 6 Voyant d'état du système
7 Connecteur du voyant d'état du système 8 Connecteur NIC2
9 Connecteur NIC1 10 Connecteurs USB (2)
11 Connecteur vidéo 12 Connecteur série
13 Contrôleur d'accès à distance (en option)
Voyant Fonction
État du bloc d'alimentation Un voyant vert indique que le bloc d'alimentation fonctionne normalement.
Panne du bloc d'alimentation Un voyant orange indique qu'un incident lié au bloc d'alimentation s'est produit.
État de l'alimentation en CA Un voyant vert indique qu'une source de courant alternatif valide est reliée au bloc d'alimentation.
1 État du bloc d'alimentation 2 Panne du bloc d'alimentation
3 État de l'alimentation en CATableau 1-5. Codes des voyants de NIC
Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD
L'écran LCD du panneau de commande affiche des messages d'état indiquant si le système fonctionne correctement ou s'il requiert une intervention.
Il s'allume en bleu en cas de fonctionnement normal et en orange si une erreur est détectée. Dans ce dernier cas, il affiche un message comprenant un code
d'état suivi d'un texte descriptif. Le tableau 1-6 répertorie les messages d'état qui peuvent s'afficher sur l'écran LCD et indique leur cause probable. Les
messages de l'écran LCD se rapportent aux événements enregistrés dans le journal d'événements du système (SEL). Pour plus d'informations sur ce journal
et sur la configuration des paramètres de gestion du système, consultez la documentation du logiciel de gestion de systèmes.
Tableau 1-6. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD
1 Voyant de lien 2 Voyant d'activité
Voyant Code du voyant
Les voyants de lien et d'activité sont éteints. Le NIC n'est pas connecté au réseau.
Le voyant de lien est vert. Le NIC est connecté à un périphérique valide sur le réseau.
Le voyant d'activité clignote en orange. Des données sont en cours d'envoi ou de réception sur le réseau.
PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.
Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les
consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.
REMARQUE : Si le démarrage du système échoue, appuyez sur le bouton d'ID du système pendant au moins cinq secondes, jusqu'à ce qu'un code
d'erreur s'affiche sur l'écran LCD. Notez ce code, puis reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide.
Code Texte Causes Mesures correctives
N/A NOM DU
SYSTÈME
Chaîne de 62 caractères pouvant être définie par
l'utilisateur dans le programme de configuration du
système.
Ce nom s'affiche dans les cas suivants :
l Le système est sous tension.
l Le système est hors tension et des erreurs
POST sont affichées.
Ce message est affiché uniquement pour information.
Vous pouvez modifier l'identificateur et le nom du système dans le
programme de configuration du système. Voir Utilisation du programme
de configuration du système.
E1000 FAILSAFE,
Call Support
Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1114 Temp Ambient La température ambiante du système est en dehors
des limites autorisées.
Voir Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système.
E1116 Temp Memory La température de la mémoire est en dehors des
limites autorisées. La mémoire a été désactivée pour
éviter que les composants ne soient endommagés.
Voir Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système.
E12nn xx PwrGd Panne du régulateur de tension indiqué. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1210 CMOS Batt La pile CMOS est manquante ou la tension est en
dehors des limites autorisées.
Voir Dépannage de la pile du système.
E1211 ROMB Batt La batterie RAID est manquante ou endommagée, ou
bien elle ne peut pas se recharger suite à un incident
lié aux conditions thermiques.
Remboîtez le connecteur de la batterie RAID. Voir Batterie RAID et
Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système.
E1229 CPU n VCORE Panne du régulateur de tension VCORE du
processeur n.
Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1310 RPM Fan nn Le nombre de tours par minute du ventilateur indiqué
est en dehors des limites autorisées.
Voir Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système.
E1313 Fan
Redundancy
Les ventilateurs du système ne sont plus redondants.
Une autre panne de ventilateur pourrait provoquer une
surchauffe du système.
Vérifiez l'écran LCD du panneau de commande pour voir si des messages
supplémentaires défilent. Voir Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement
du système.
E1410 CPU n IERR Le microprocesseur indiqué renvoie une erreur interne. Pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes sur le système, voir le
document Information Update Tech Sheet (Fiche technique de mise à jour des
informations), qui est accessible à partir du site support.dell.com. Si
l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide.
E1414 CPU n La température du microprocesseur spécifié est en Voir Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système. Si l'incident Thermtrip dehors des limites autorisées et celui-ci s'est arrêté. persiste, assurez-vous que les dissipateurs de chaleur du microprocesseur
sont correctement installés. Voir Dépannage des microprocesseurs.
REMARQUE : L'écran LCD continue à afficher ce message jusqu'à ce que le
câble d'alimentation du système soit débranché puis rebranché à la source
d'alimentation en CA, ou jusqu'à ce que le journal d'événements soit effacé
à l'aide de Server Assistant ou de BMC Management Utility. Consultez le
document Dell OpenManage Baseboard Management Controller User's Guide
(Guide d'utilisation du contrôleur BMC Dell OpenManage) pour plus
d'informations concernant ces utilitaires.
E1418 CPU n
Presence
Le processeur indiqué est manquant ou endommagé et
la configuration du système n'est pas prise en charge.
Voir Dépannage des microprocesseurs.
E141C CPU Mismatch La configuration des processeurs n'est pas prise en
charge par Dell.
Vérifiez que les processeurs sont de même type et conformes aux
spécifications techniques du microprocesseur (voir le document Getting
Started Guide [Guide de mise en route] du système).
E141F CPU Protocol Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de protocole
liée au processeur.
Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1420 CPU Bus PERR Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de parité liée
au bus du processeur.
Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1421 CPU Init Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur
d'initialisation du processeur.
Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1422 CPU Machine
Chk
Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur liée à la
vérification du système.
Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1610 PS n Missing La source d'alimentation indiquée n'est pas disponible,
ou bien le bloc d'alimentation est défectueux ou mal
installé.
Voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation.
E1614 PS n Status La source d'alimentation indiquée n'est pas disponible,
ou bien le bloc d'alimentation est défectueux ou mal
installé.
Voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation.
E1618 PS n
Predictive
La tension du bloc d'alimentation est en dehors des
limites autorisées. Le bloc d'alimentation indiqué est
défectueux ou mal installé.
Voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation.
E161C PS n Input
Lost
La source d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation indiqué
est indisponible ou en dehors des limites autorisées.
Vérifiez la source d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation indiqué. Si l'incident
persiste, voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation.
E1620 PS n Input
Range
La source d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation indiqué
est indisponible ou en dehors des limites autorisées.
Vérifiez la source d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation indiqué. Si l'incident
persiste, voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation.
E1624 PS
Redundancy
Le sous-système d'alimentation n'est plus redondant.
Si le dernier bloc d'alimentation tombe en panne, le
système s'arrêtera.
Voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation.
E1710 I/O Channel
Chk
Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur liée à
la vérification des canaux d'E/S.
Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1711 PCI PERR Bnn
Dnn Fnn
PCI PERR
Slot n
Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de parité PCI
liée à un composant résidant dans l'espace de
configuration PCI du bus nn, périphérique nn, fonction
nn.
Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de parité PCI
liée à un composant installé dans le logement PCI
indiqué.
Retirez et réinstallez les cartes d'extension PCI. Si l'incident persiste, voir
Dépannage des cartes d'extension.
Réinstallez le bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir Bâti des cartes d'extension.
Si l'incident persiste, la carte de montage ou la carte système est
défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1712 PCI SERR Bnn
Dnn Fnn
PCI SERR
Slot n
Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur système PCI
liée à un composant résidant dans l'espace de
configuration PCI du bus nn, périphérique nn, fonction
nn.
Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur système PCI
liée à un composant installé dans le logement indiqué.
Retirez et réinstallez les cartes d'extension PCI. Si l'incident persiste, voir
Dépannage des cartes d'extension.
Réinstallez le bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir Bâti des cartes d'extension.
Si l'incident persiste, la carte de montage ou la carte système est
défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1714 Unknown Err Le BIOS du système a détecté une erreur système non
identifiée.
Voir Obtention d'aide.
E171F PCIE Fatal
Err Bnn Dnn
Fnn
PCIE Fatal
Err Slot n
Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur fatale PCIe
liée à un composant résidant dans l'espace de
configuration PCI du bus nn, périphérique nn, fonction
nn.
Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur fatale PCIe
liée à un composant installé dans le logement indiqué.
Retirez et réinstallez les cartes d'extension PCI. Si l'incident persiste, voir
Dépannage des cartes d'extension.
Réinstallez le bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir Bâti des cartes d'extension.
Si l'incident persiste, la carte de montage ou la carte système est
défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E1810 HDD nn Fault Le sous-système SAS a détecté une panne du disque
dur nn.
Voir Dépannage d'un disque dur.
E1811 HDD nn Rbld
Abrt
La reconstruction du disque dur indiqué a été annulée. Voir Dépannage d'un disque dur. Si l'incident persiste, consultez la
documentation RAID.
E1812 HDD nn
Removed
Le disque dur indiqué a été retiré du système. Ce message s'affiche uniquement à titre d'information.
E1913 CPU &
Firmware
Mismatch
Le micrologiciel du contrôleur BMC ne prend pas en
charge le processeur.
Mettez à jour le micrologiciel du contrôleur BMC. Voir le document BMC User's
Guide (Contrôleur BMC - Guide d'utilisation) pour plus d'informations sur la
configuration et l'utilisation de ce contrôleur.
E1A11 PCI Rsr
Config
Les cartes de montage PCI ne sont pas configurées
correctement. Une ou plusieurs configurations
incorrectes peuvent empêcher la mise sous tension du
Voir Cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension. système.
E1A12 PCI Rsr
Missing
Le système ne peut pas être mis sous tension car une
ou plusieurs cartes de montage PCI sont manquantes.
Ce message s'affiche uniquement à titre d'information.
E1A14 SAS Cable A Le câble SAS A est manquant ou endommagé. Remboîtez le câble dans son connecteur. Si l'incident persiste, remplacez le
câble. Voir Carte contrôleur fille SAS.
E1A15 SAS Cable B Le câble SAS B est manquant ou endommagé. Remboîtez le câble dans son connecteur. Si l'incident persiste, remplacez le
câble. Voir Carte contrôleur fille SAS.
E2010 No Memory Aucune mémoire n'est installée dans le système. Installez de la mémoire. Voir Installation de barrettes de mémoire.
E2011 Mem Config
Err
Mémoire détectée mais non configurable. Erreur
détectée lors de la configuration de la mémoire.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
E2012 Unusable
Memory
Mémoire configurée mais inutilisable. Échec du soussystème de mémoire.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
E2013 Shadow BIOS
Fail
Le BIOS du système n'est pas parvenu à copier son
image flash dans la mémoire.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
E2014 CMOS Fail Échec du CMOS. La RAM CMOS ne fonctionne pas
correctement.
Voir Obtention d'aide.
E2015 DMA
Controller
Échec du contrôleur DMA. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E2016 Int
Controller
Échec du contrôleur d'interruptions. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E2017 Timer Fail Échec de rafraîchissement du temporisateur. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E2018 Prog Timer Échec du temporisateur d'intervalle programmable. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E2019 Parity Error Erreur de parité. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E201A SIO Err Échec de la puce super E/S. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E201B Kybd
Controller
Échec du contrôleur du clavier. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E201C SMI Init Échec d'initialisation SMI (System Management
Interrupt).
Voir Obtention d'aide.
E201D Shutdown
Test
Échec du test d'arrêt du BIOS. Voir Obtention d'aide.
E201E POST Mem
Test
Échec du test mémoire pendant l'auto-test de
démarrage du BIOS.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention
d'aide.
E201F DRAC Config Échec de la configuration du contrôleur DRAC
(Dell Remote Access Controller).
Vérifiez si l'écran affiche des messages d'erreur spécifiques.
Assurez-vous que les câbles et les connecteurs de la carte DRAC sont
correctement emboîtés. Si l'incident persiste, consultez la documentation du
contrôleur DRAC.
E2020 CPU Config Échec de configuration du processeur. Vérifiez si l'écran affiche des messages d'erreur spécifiques.
E2021 Memory
Population
Configuration de la mémoire incorrecte. L'ordre
d'insertion des barrettes de mémoire est incorrect.
Vérifiez si l'écran affiche des messages d'erreur spécifiques. Voir Dépannage
de la mémoire système.
E2022 POST Fail Échec général après le test vidéo. Vérifiez si l'écran affiche des messages d'erreur spécifiques.
E2110 MBE Crd n
DIMM nn & nn
L'une des barrettes DIMM du groupe "nn & nn"
présente une erreur de mémoire multibits (MBE). Si le
système n'est pas équipé d'une carte de mémoire, la
chaîne "Crd n" n'apparaît pas dans le message.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
E2111 SBE Log
Disable Crd
n DIMM nn
Le BIOS du système a désactivé la consignation des
erreurs de mémoire portant sur un seul bit (SBE)
jusqu'au prochain redémarrage du système. "nn"
représente la barrette DIMM indiquée par le BIOS. Si le
système n'est pas équipé d'une carte de montage de
mémoire, la chaîne "Crd n" n'apparaît pas dans le
message.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
E2112 Mem Spare
Crd n DIMM
nn
Le BIOS du système a activé la mémoire de réserve car
il a détecté un nombre d'erreurs trop important. "nn &
nn" représente la paire de barrettes DIMM indiquée par
le BIOS. Si le système n'est pas équipé d'une carte de
mémoire, la chaîne "Crd n" n'apparaît pas dans le
message.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
E2113 Mem Mirror
Crd n DIMM
nn & nn
Le BIOS du système a désactivé la mise en miroir de la
mémoire car il a détecté qu'une moitié du miroir
contenait un nombre d'erreurs trop important. "nn &
nn" représente la paire de barrettes DIMM indiquée par
le BIOS. Si le système n'est pas équipé d'une carte de
mémoire, la chaîne "Crd n" n'apparaît pas dans le
message.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
E2118 Fatal NB Mem
CRC
L'une des connexions du sous-système de mémoire FBDIMM a échoué en amont.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
E2119 Fatal SB Mem
CRC
L'une des connexions du sous-système de mémoire FBDIMM a échoué en aval.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
I1910 Intrusion Le capot du système a été retiré. Ce message s'affiche uniquement à titre d'information.
I1911 >3 ERRs Chk
Log
Les messages à afficher dépassent la capacité de
l'écran LCD.
L'écran LCD ne peut afficher que trois messages
d'erreur à la suite. Le quatrième message indique que
la capacité de l'écran est à son maximum.
Vérifiez le journal d'événements du système pour plus de détails.Résolution des incidents décrits par les messages d'état de l'écran LCD
Le code et le texte affichés sur l'écran LCD permettent souvent d'identifier une panne précise pouvant facilement être corrigée. Par exemple, si le code
E1418 CPU_1_Presence s'affiche, cela signifie qu'aucun microprocesseur n'est installé dans le support 1.
En outre, il est possible de déterminer la cause de l'incident si plusieurs erreurs de même type surviennent. Par exemple, si vous recevez une série de
messages indiquant plusieurs incidents liés à la tension, le problème peut être lié à une défaillance d'un bloc d'alimentation.
Suppression des messages d'état de l'écran LCD
Pour les pannes liées aux capteurs (de température, de tension, des ventilateurs, etc.), le message de l'écran LCD est supprimé automatiquement lorsque le
capteur revient à la normale. Par exemple, l'écran LCD affiche un message indiquant que la température d'un composant n'est pas conforme aux limites
acceptables, puis supprime ce message lorsque la température redevient normale. Pour les messages suivants, une intervention de l'utilisateur est requise :
l Clear the SEL (Vider le journal d'événements du système) : cette tâche doit être effectuée à partir du logiciel de gestion du système. L'historique des
événements du système sera perdu.
l Power cycle (Mettre le système hors tension) : mettez le système hors tension et débranchez-le de la prise secteur. Attendez environ 10 secondes,
puis rebranchez le câble d'alimentation et redémarrez le système.
Ces interventions permettent d'effacer les messages d'erreur. Les voyants d'état et l'écran LCD reviennent à l'état normal. Les messages réapparaîtront dans
les conditions suivantes :
l Le capteur est revenu à l'état normal mais a de nouveau subi une panne et une nouvelle entrée a été créée dans le journal d'événements.
l Le système a été réinitialisé et de nouvelles erreurs ont été détectées.
l Une panne a été détectée sur une autre source correspondant au même message.
Messages système
Les messages système sont affichés à l'écran pour informer l'utilisateur qu'un incident peut s'être produit. Le tableau 1-3 répertorie les messages système qui
peuvent s'afficher. Il indique leur cause probable et les mesures correctives appropriées.
Tableau 1-7. Messages système
I1912 SEL Full Le journal d'événements du système est saturé et ne
peut plus contenir d'événements.
Supprimez des événements du journal.
W1228 ROMB Batt <
24hr
Ce message avertit qu'il reste moins de 24 heures de
charge à la batterie RAID.
Remplacez la batterie RAID. Voir Batterie RAID.
REMARQUE : Pour obtenir le nom complet d'une abréviation ou d'un sigle utilisé dans ce tableau, voir le Glossaire.
REMARQUE : Si vous recevez un message du système qui n'est pas répertorié dans le tableau 1-3, consultez la documentation de l'application que vous
utilisiez au moment où le message est apparu. Vous pouvez aussi vous reporter à la documentation du système d'exploitation pour obtenir une
explication du message et l'action conseillée.
PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.
Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les
consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.
Message Causes Mesures correctives
Alert! Redundant memory disabled!
Memory configuration does not support
redundant memory.
Les barrettes de mémoire installées ne sont pas du
même type ni de la même taille ; une ou plusieurs
barrettes de mémoire sont défectueuses.
Vérifiez que toutes les barrettes de mémoire sont du
même type et de la même taille et qu'elles sont
correctement installées. Si l'incident persiste, voir
Dépannage de la mémoire système.
Attempting to update Remote
Configuration. Please wait...
Une requête de configuration à distance a été
détectée et est en cours de traitement.
Attendez que le processus se termine.
BIOS Update Attempt Failed! La tentative de mise à jour à distance du BIOS a
échoué.
Réessayez de mettre le BIOS à jour. Si l'incident persiste,
voir Obtention d'aide.
Caution! NVRAM_CLR jumper is installed
on system board.
Le cavalier NVRAM_CLR est installé. Le CMOS a été
initialisé.
Retirez le cavalier NVRAM_CLR. Voir figure 6-1 pour
identifier son emplacement.
CPUs with different cache sizes
detected!
Des microprocesseurs possédant des tailles de
mémoire cache différentes sont installés.
Vérifiez que tous les microprocesseurs ont une taille de
mémoire cache identique et qu'ils sont correctement
installés. Voir Processeurs.
Decreasing available memory Barrette(s) de mémoire défectueuse(s) ou mal
installée(s).
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
DIMM pairs must be matched in size,
speed, and technology. The following
DIMM pair is mismatched: DIMM x and
DIMM y.
Barrettes DIMM incompatibles ; barrette(s) de
mémoire défectueuse(s) ou mal installée(s).
Vérifiez que toutes les paires de barrettes de mémoire
sont du même type et de la même taille et qu'elles sont
correctement installées. Voir Mémoire système. Si
l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage de la mémoire
système.DIMMs must be populated in sequential
order beginning with slot 1. The
following DIMM is electrically
isolated: DIMM x.
L'emplacement de la barrette DIMM indiquée n'est
pas accessible. Les barrettes DIMM doivent être
installées en respectant l'ordre des numéros
d'emplacement.
Installez 2, 4, ou 8 barrettes l'une après l'autre, en
commençant par le logement 1. Voir Mémoire système.
DIMMs should be installed in pairs.
Pairs must be matched in size, speed,
and technology.
Barrettes DIMM incompatibles ; barrette(s) de
mémoire défectueuse(s) ou mal installée(s). Le
fonctionnement du système risque d'être altéré et
de présenter une protection ECC réduite. Seule la
mémoire installée dans le canal 0 sera accessible.
Vérifiez que toutes les paires de barrettes de mémoire
sont du même type et de la même taille et qu'elles sont
correctement installées. Voir Mémoire système. Si
l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage de la mémoire
système.
Dual-rank DIMM paired with Single-rank
DIMM - The following DIMM/rank has been
disabled by BIOS: DIMM x Rank y
Barrettes DIMM incompatibles ; barrette(s) de
mémoire défectueuse(s). Le système a détecté
qu'une barrette DIMM à double rangée de
connexions a été installée avec une barrette à une
seule rangée de connexions. La seconde rangée de
la première barrette sera désactivée.
Vérifiez que toutes les paires de barrettes de mémoire
sont du même type et de la même taille et qu'elles sont
correctement installées. Voir Mémoire système. Si
l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage de la mémoire
système.
Diskette drive n seek failure Paramètres incorrects dans le programme de
configuration du système.
Lancez le programme de configuration du système pour
corriger les paramètres. Voir Utilisation du programme
de configuration du système.
Lecteur de disquette défectueux ou mal installé. Remplacez la disquette. Si l'incident persiste, voir
Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette.
Câble d'interface du lecteur de bande ou câble
d'alimentation débranché.
Réinsérez le câble d'interface du lecteur de bande ou le
câble d'alimentation. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage
d'un lecteur de disquette.
Diskette read failure Lecteur de disquette ou de bande défectueux ou
mal installé.
Remplacez la disquette. Voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de
disquette.
Diskette subsystem reset failed Lecteur de disquette ou de bande défectueux ou
mal installé.
Remplacez la disquette ou la bande. Si l'incident persiste,
voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette.
Drive not ready Disquette manquante ou mal insérée dans le
lecteur.
Remplacez la disquette. Si l'incident persiste, voir
Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette.
Error: Incorrect memory configuration.
DIMMs must be installed in pairs of
matched memory size, speed, and
technology.
Barrettes DIMM incompatibles ; barrette(s) de
mémoire défectueuse(s) ou mal installée(s).
Vérifiez que toutes les paires de barrettes de mémoire
sont du même type et de la même taille et qu'elles sont
correctement installées. Voir Mémoire système. Si
l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage de la mémoire
système.
Error: Memory failure detected. Memory
size reduced. Replace the faulty DIMM
as soon as possible.
Barrettes de mémoire défectueuses ou mal
installées.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
!!*** Error: Remote Access Controller
initialization failure*** RAC virtual
USB devices may not be available...
Échec de l'initialisation du contrôleur d'accès
distant.
Assurez-vous que le contrôleur DRAC est correctement
installé. Voir Installation d'une carte RAC.
FBD training error: The following
branch has been disabled: Branch x
Le groupe indiqué (paire de canaux) contient des
barrettes DIMM qui ne sont pas compatibles entre
elles.
Vérifiez que vous utilisez uniquement des barrettes de
mémoire certifiées par Dell. Nous vous recommandons
d'acheter les kits d'extension de mémoire directement sur
le site www.dell.com ou de contacter votre représentant
commercial Dell à cet effet.
Gate A20 failure Contrôleur du clavier défectueux ; carte système
défectueuse.
Voir Obtention d'aide.
General failure Le système d'exploitation ne peut pas exécuter la
commande.
Ce message est habituellement suivi d'informations
spécifiques. Notez ces informations et prenez les mesures
adéquates pour résoudre l'incident.
Invalid NVRAM configuration, resource
re-allocated
Le système a détecté et corrigé un conflit de
ressources.
Aucune action n'est requise.
Keyboard Controller failure Contrôleur du clavier défectueux ; carte système
défectueuse.
Voir Obtention d'aide.
Manufacturing mode detected Le système est en mode assemblage. Redémarrez le système pour lui faire quitter le mode
assemblage.
MEMBIST failure - The following
DIMM/rank has been disabled by BIOS:
DIMM x Rank y
Barrette(s) de mémoire défectueuse(s). Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
Memory address line failure at adresse,
read valeur expecting valeur
Barrette(s) de mémoire défectueuse(s) ou mal
installée(s).
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
Memory double word logic failure at
adresse, read valeur expecting valeur
Memory odd/even logic failure at
adresse, read valeur expecting valeur
Memory write/read failure at adresse,
read valeur expecting valeur
Memory tests terminated by keystroke. Test de la mémoire interrompu à l'aide de la barre
d'espacement lors de l'auto-test de démarrage.
Ce message s'affiche uniquement à titre d'information.
No boot device available Sous-système du lecteur optique, du lecteur de
disquette ou du disque dur défectueux ou
manquant ; disque dur défectueux ou manquant ;
aucune disquette de démarrage dans l'unité A.
Utilisez une disquette, un CD ou un disque dur amorçable.
Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de
disquette, Dépannage d'un lecteur optique et Dépannage
d'un disque dur. Voir Utilisation du programme
de configuration du système pour plus d'informations sur
la définition de la séquence d'amorçage.
No boot sector on hard drive Paramètres incorrects dans le programme de
configuration du système ; système d'exploitation
introuvable sur le disque dur.
Vérifiez les paramètres de configuration du disque dur
dans le programme de configuration du système. Voir
Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. Si
nécessaire, installez le système d'exploitation sur le
disque dur. Consultez la documentation du système
d'exploitation.No timer tick interrupt Carte système défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide.
Northbound merge error - The following
DIMM has been disabled by BIOS: DIMM x
La barrette DIMM indiquée n'a pas pu établir de
liaison de données avec le contrôleur de mémoire.
Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
Not a boot diskette La disquette ne contient pas de système
d'exploitation.
Utilisez une disquette amorçable.
PCIe Degraded Link Width Error:
Embedded Busnnn/Devnnn/Funcn
Expected Link Width is n
Actual Link Width is n
Carte PCIe défectueuse ou mal installée dans le
support spécifié.
Réinstallez la carte PCIe dans le support dont le numéro
est spécifié. Voir Cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste,
voir Obtention d'aide.
PCIe Degraded Link Width Error: Slot n
Expected Link Width is n
Actual Link Width is n
Carte PCIe défectueuse ou mal installée dans le
support spécifié.
Réinstallez la carte PCIe dans le support dont le numéro
est spécifié. Voir Cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste,
voir Obtention d'aide.
PCIe Training Error: Embedded
Busnnn/Devnnn/Funcn
PCIe Training Error: Slot n
Carte PCIe défectueuse ou mal installée dans le
support spécifié.
Réinstallez la carte PCIe dans le support dont le numéro
est spécifié. Voir Cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste,
voir Obtention d'aide.
PCI BIOS failed to install Un échec de la somme de contrôle du BIOS du
périphérique (ROM d'option) est détecté lors de la
duplication miroir.
Câbles de carte(s) d'extension mal branchés ; carte
(s) d'extension défectueuse(s) ou mal installée(s).
Réinstallez la ou les cartes PCIe dans leur logement.
Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont fermement raccordés
aux cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste, voir
Dépannage des cartes d'extension.
Plug & Play Configuration Error Une erreur s'est produite lors de l'initialisation d'un
périphérique PCI ; la carte système est
défectueuse.
Installez la fiche du cavalier NVRAM_CLR et redémarrez le
système. Voir figure 6-1 pour identifier son emplacement.
Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage des cartes
d'extension.
Read fault
Requested sector not found
Le système d'exploitation ne peut pas lire la
disquette ou le disque dur ; l'ordinateur n'a pas
trouvé un secteur particulier sur le disque, ou bien
le secteur demandé est défectueux.
Remplacez la disquette. Assurez-vous que les câbles du
lecteur de disquette et du disque dur sont correctement
connectés. Voir Dépannage d'un périphérique USB ou
Dépannage d'un disque dur.
Remote configuration update attempt
failed
Le système n'est pas parvenu à traiter la requête
de configuration à distance.
Faites une nouvelle tentative.
ROM bad checksum = address Carte d'extension défectueuse ou mal installée. Réinstallez la ou les cartes PCIe dans leur logement.
Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont fermement raccordés
aux cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste, voir
Dépannage des cartes d'extension.
Sector not found
Seek error
Seek operation failed
Le lecteur de disquette ou de disque dur est
défectueux.
Voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette, Dépannage
d'un périphérique USB ou Dépannage d'un disque dur.
Shutdown failure Le test d'arrêt a échoué. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
The amount of system memory has changed Ajout ou suppression de mémoire, ou barrette de
mémoire défectueuse.
Si vous venez d'ajouter ou de supprimer de la mémoire,
ce message s'affiche uniquement pour information et peut
être ignoré. Dans le cas contraire, vérifiez le journal
d'événements du système pour identifier les erreurs
détectées et remplacez la barrette de mémoire
défectueuse. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système.
Time-of-day clock stopped Pile ou puce défectueuse. Voir Dépannage de la pile du système.
The following DIMM pair is not
compatible with the memory controller:
DIMM x et DIMM y.
Les barrettes DIMM indiquées sont incompatibles
avec le système.
Vérifiez que vous utilisez uniquement des barrettes de
mémoire certifiées par Dell. Nous vous recommandons
d'acheter les kits d'extension de mémoire directement sur
le site www.dell.com ou de contacter votre représentant
commercial Dell à cet effet.
The following DIMMs are not compatible:
DIMM x et DIMM y.
Les barrettes DIMM indiquées sont incompatibles
avec le système.
Utilisez exclusivement des barrettes FB-DIMM1 avec ECC.
Nous vous recommandons d'acheter les kits d'extension
de mémoire directement sur le site www.dell.com ou de
contacter votre représentant commercial Dell à cet effet.
Time-of-day not set - please run SETUP
program.
Paramètres d'heure ou de date incorrects ; pile du
système défectueuse.
Vérifiez les paramètres de l'heure et de la date. Voir
Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. Si
l'incident persiste, remplacez la pile du système. Voir Pile
du système.
Timer chip counter 2 failed Carte système défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide.
Unsupported CPU combination Le ou les microprocesseurs ne sont pas pris en
charge par le système.
Installez un microprocesseur ou une combinaison de
microprocesseurs pris en charge. Voir Processeurs.
Unsupported CPU stepping detected
Utility partition not available Vous avez appuyé sur la touche pendant
l'auto-test de démarrage, mais le disque dur
d'amorçage ne contient aucune partition
d'utilitaires.
Créez une partition d'utilitaires sur le disque dur
d'amorçage. Reportez-vous aux CD fournis avec le
système.
Warning! No micro code update loaded
for processor 0
La mise à jour du micrologiciel a échoué. Mettez le BIOS à jour. Voir Obtention d'aide.
Warning: Embedded RAID firmware is not
present.
Le micrologiciel RAID intégré ne répond pas. Lisez la documentation du contrôleur RAID pour obtenir
des informations sur l'installation et la mise à jour du
micrologiciel RAID.Messages d'avertissement
Un message d'avertissement signale un incident possible et vous demande une réponse avant de laisser le système poursuivre son exécution. Par exemple,
lorsque vous lancez le formatage d'une disquette, un message vous avertit que vous allez perdre toutes les données qu'elles contient. Les messages
d'avertissement interrompent la tâche en cours et vous demandent de répondre en tapant y (pour oui) ou n (pour non).
Messages de diagnostic
Les diagnostics du système peuvent afficher un ou plusieurs messages d'erreur. Ceux-ci ne sont pas traités dans la présente section. Prenez note
du message sur une copie de la liste de vérification des diagnostics (voir Obtention d'aide), puis suivez les instructions de cette section pour obtenir une
assistance technique.
Messages d'alerte
Le logiciel de gestion de systèmes génère des messages d'alerte système. Ils comprennent des messages d'informations, d'état, d'avertissement et de panne
concernant les conditions des lecteurs, de la température, des ventilateurs et de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir des informations supplémentaires, consultez la
documentation du logiciel de gestion de systèmes.
Retour au sommaire
Warning: Embedded RAID error. Le micrologiciel RAID intégré renvoie une erreur. Voir Dépannage d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS ou RAID
SAS. Lisez la documentation du contrôleur RAID pour
obtenir des informations sur l'installation et la mise à jour
du micrologiciel RAID.
Warning: The current memory
configuration is not optimal. Dell
recommends a population of 2, 4, or 8
DIMMs. DIMMs should be populated
sequentially starting in slot 1.
Le système a détecté une configuration autorisée
mais non optimale des barrettes DIMM (par
exemple : 1 DIMM, 6 DIMM, 4 DIMM dans les
logements 1, 2, 5 et 6, etc.). Le système pourra
accéder à l'intégralité de la mémoire, mais ses
performances ne seront pas optimales.
Installez 2, 4, ou 8 barrettes l'une après l'autre, en
commençant par le logement 1. Voir Mémoire système.
Write fault Disquette ou disque dur défectueux ; défaillance du
sous-système du lecteur optique, du lecteur de
disquette ou du disque dur.
Voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette, Dépannage
d'un lecteur optique et Dépannage d'un disque dur.
Write fault on selected drive
REMARQUE : Pour obtenir le nom complet d'une abréviation ou d'un sigle utilisé dans ce tableau, voir le Glossaire.
REMARQUE : Ces messages sont générés par l'application ou par le système d'exploitation. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation
fournie avec le système d'exploitation ou l'application.Retour au sommaire
Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire
Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
© 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, PowerConnect, XPS et Dell OpenManage sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel est une
marque déposée de Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft, MS-DOS et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis
et/ou dans d'autres pays.
D'autres marques et noms de marques peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits.
Dell Inc. dénie tout intérêt propriétaire vis-à-vis des marques et des noms de marque autres que les siens.
Retour au sommaire
REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.
AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème.
PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Retour au sommaire
Exécution des diagnostics du système
Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire
Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator
Fonctionnalités des diagnostics du système
Quand utiliser les diagnostics du système
Exécution des diagnostics du système
Options de test des diagnostics du système
Utilisation des options de test personnalisées
Si vous rencontrez des difficultés lors de l'utilisation du système, lancez les diagnostics avant de demander une assistance technique. Le but des diagnostics
est de tester le matériel du système sans nécessiter d'équipement supplémentaire et sans risque de perte de données. Si vous ne réussissez pas à corriger
l'incident, le personnel de service et de support peut s'aider des résultats de ces tests.
Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator
Pour évaluer un incident du système, commencez par utiliser les diagnostics en ligne de Server Administrator. Si vous n'arrivez pas à identifier l'incident,
utilisez les diagnostics du système.
Pour accéder aux diagnostics en ligne, ouvrez une session sur la page d'accueil de Server Administrator, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Diagnostics. Pour plus
d'informations sur l'utilisation des diagnostics, consultez l'aide en ligne. Vous trouverez également des informations supplémentaires dans le document Server
Administrator User's Guide (Server Administrator - Guide d'utilisation).
Fonctionnalités des diagnostics du système
Les diagnostics du système contiennent des menus et des options permettant de tester des groupes de périphériques ou des périphériques particuliers. Ces
options permettent :
l de lancer un ou plusieurs tests ;
l de définir l'ordre des tests ;
l de répéter des tests ;
l d'afficher, d'imprimer et d'enregistrer les résultats des tests ;
l d'interrompre temporairement un test quand une erreur est détectée ou de l'arrêter lorsqu'une limite d'erreur définie par l'utilisateur est atteinte ;
l d'afficher des messages d'aide qui décrivent brièvement chaque test et ses paramètres ;
l d'afficher des messages d'état qui vous indiquent si les tests ont abouti ;
l d'afficher des messages d'erreur qui vous indiquent si des incidents sont survenus pendant les tests.
Quand utiliser les diagnostics du système
Le fait qu'un composant ou un périphérique important du système ne fonctionne pas normalement peut être le symptôme d'une panne. Tant que le processeur
et les périphériques d'entrée/sortie du système (le moniteur, le clavier et le lecteur de disquette) fonctionnent, vous pouvez utiliser les diagnostics pour
faciliter l'identification de l'incident.
Exécution des diagnostics du système
Les diagnostics du système s'exécutent à partir de la partition d'utilitaires du disque dur.
1. Au démarrage du système, appuyez sur pendant l'auto-test de démarrage.
2. Dans le menu principal de la partition d'utilitaires, sélectionnez Run System Diagnostics (Exécuter les diagnostics du système), ou sélectionnez Run
Memory Diagnostics (Exécuter les diagnostics de la mémoire) si vous cherchez à identifier un incident lié à la mémoire.
Quand vous lancez les diagnostics du système, un message s'affiche, indiquant qu'ils sont en cours d'initialisation. Ensuite, le menu Diagnostics s'affiche. Ce
menu vous permet de lancer tous ou certains tests, ou encore de quitter les diagnostics du système.
AVIS : N'utilisez les diagnostics que sur ce système. Leur utilisation sur d'autres systèmes peut entraîner des résultats non valides ou générer des
messages d'erreur. De plus, n'utilisez que le programme fourni avec le système (ou une mise à jour).
REMARQUE : Avant de lire le reste de cette section, lancez les diagnostics du système pour afficher l'utilitaire à l'écran.Options de test des diagnostics du système
Cliquez sur l'option de test voulue dans la fenêtre Main Menu (Menu principal). Le tableau 5-1 contient une brève explication sur les options de test
disponibles.
Tableau 5-1. Options de test des diagnostics du système
Utilisation des options de test personnalisées
Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Custom Test (Test personnalisé) dans l'écran Main Menu (Menu principal), la fenêtre Customize (Personnaliser) s'affiche.
Elle permet de sélectionner les périphériques à tester, de choisir des options de test spécifiques et de visualiser les résultats obtenus.
Sélection de périphériques à tester
La partie gauche de la fenêtre Customize (Personnaliser) répertorie les périphériques qui peuvent être testés. Ceux-ci sont regroupés par type ou par
module, selon l'option sélectionnée. Cliquez sur le signe (+) en regard d'un périphérique ou d'un module pour visualiser ses composants. Cliquez sur (+) en
regard d'un composant pour visualiser les tests disponibles. Si vous cliquez sur un périphérique et non sur ses composants, tous les composants de ce
périphérique sont sélectionnés pour le test.
Sélection d'options de diagnostic
Le champ Diagnostics Options (Options de diagnostic) permet de sélectionner la façon dont le périphérique sera testé. Vous pouvez définir les options
suivantes :
l Non-Interactive Tests Only (Tests non-interactifs uniquement) : permet d'exécuter uniquement les tests ne nécessitant aucune intervention de
l'utilisateur.
l Quick Tests Only (Tests rapides uniquement) : permet d'exécuter uniquement les tests rapides sur le périphérique sélectionné. Les tests étendus ne
seront pas lancés si vous sélectionnez cette option.
l Show Ending Timestamp (Afficher l'horodatage de fin) : permet d'ajouter un horodatage au journal de test.
l Test Iterations (Nombre d'itérations) : permet de sélectionner le nombre d'exécutions du test.
l Log output file pathname (Emplacement du fichier de sortie) : permet d'indiquer l'emplacement où le journal de test doit être sauvegardé.
Visualisation des informations et des résultats
Les onglets de la fenêtre Customize (Personnaliser) contiennent des informations sur les tests et les résultats. Les onglets suivants sont disponibles :
l Results (Résultats) : indique le test exécuté et son résultat.
l Errors (Erreurs) : affiche les erreurs qui se sont produites pendant le test.
l Help (Aide) : affiche des informations sur le périphérique, le composant ou le test sélectionné.
l Configuration : affiche des informations de base concernant la configuration du périphérique sélectionné.
l Parameters (Paramètres) : le cas échéant, cet onglet affiche les paramètres que vous pouvez définir pour le test à exécuter.
Retour au sommaire
Option de
test
Fonction
Express Test Effectue une vérification rapide du système. Cette option exécute les tests de périphériques qui ne requièrent pas d'action de l'utilisateur.
Elle permet d'identifier rapidement la source de l'incident.
Extended
Test
Effectue une vérification plus complète du système. Ce test peut prendre plus d'une heure.
Custom Test Teste un périphérique particulier.
Information Affiche les résultats des tests.Retour au sommaire
Obtention d'aide
Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire
Contacter Dell
Contacter Dell
Aux États-Unis, appelez le 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355).
Dell fournit plusieurs options de service et de support en ligne et par téléphone. Leur disponibilité variant d'un pays à l'autre, il est possible que certains
services ne soient pas proposés dans votre région. Pour contacter Dell pour des questions ayant trait aux ventes, au support technique ou au service
clientèle :
1. Rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com.
2. Sélectionnez l'option appropriée dans le menu déroulant Choose A Country/Region (Choisissez un pays ou une région) situé au bas de la page.
3. Cliquez sur Contact Us (Nous contacter) sur la gauche de la page.
4. Sélectionnez le lien correspondant au service ou au support requis.
5. Choisissez la méthode de contact qui vous convient.
Retour au sommaire
REMARQUE : Si vous ne disposez pas d'une connexion Internet active, vous pouvez utiliser les coordonnées figurant sur votre preuve d'achat, votre
bordereau de livraison, votre facture ou encore sur le catalogue des produits Dell. Retour au sommaire
Glossaire
Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire
Cette section définit ou identifie les termes techniques, abréviations et sigles utilisés dans la documentation fournie avec le système.
A : Ampère(s).
ACPI : Acronyme de "Advanced Configuration and Power Interface". Interface standard qui permet au système d'exploitation de contrôler les paramètres
relatifs à la configuration et à la gestion de l'alimentation.
adaptateur hôte : Carte assurant la communication entre le bus du système et le contrôleur d'un périphérique. Les sous-systèmes de contrôleurs de disque
dur comprennent des circuits d'adaptateur hôte intégrés. Pour ajouter un bus d'extension SCSI au système, vous devez installer ou raccorder l'adaptateur
hôte adéquat.
adresse MAC : Adresse de contrôle d'accès aux supports. L'adresse MAC identifie le matériel du système de manière unique sur un réseau.
adresse mémoire : Emplacement spécifique dans la RAM du système, généralement exprimé sous forme de nombre hexadécimal.
ANSI : Acronyme de "American National Standards Institute", institut des normes nationales américaines. Principal organisme dédié au développement des
normes technologiques spécifiques des États-Unis.
application : Logiciel conçu pour effectuer une tâche spécifique ou une série de tâches. Les applications s'exécutent à partir du système d'exploitation.
ASCII : Acronyme de "American Standard Code for Information Interchange", code des normes américaines pour l'échange d'informations.
barrette de mémoire : Petite carte de circuits, contenant des puces de mémoire, qui se connecte à la carte système.
BIOS : Acronyme de "Basic Input/Output System", système d'entrées/sorties de base. Le BIOS du système contient des programmes stockés sur une puce de
mémoire flash. Le BIOS contrôle :
l les communications entre le processeur et les périphériques,
l diverses fonctions, comme les messages du système.
bit : Plus petite unité d'information interprétée par le système.
BMC : Acronyme de "Baseboard Management Controller", contrôleur de gestion de la carte de base.
BTU : Acronyme de "British Thermal Unit", unité thermique britannique.
bus : Chemin d'informations entre les différents composants du système. Le système contient un bus d'extension qui permet au processeur de communiquer
avec les contrôleurs des différents périphériques connectés au système. Il contient également un bus d'adresse et un bus de données pour les
communications entre le processeur et la RAM.
bus d'extension : Votre système contient un bus d'extension qui permet au processeur de communiquer avec les contrôleurs des périphériques (NIC, etc.).
bus frontal : Chemin des données et interface physique entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire principale (RAM).
bus local : Sur les systèmes à bus local, certains matériels (comme l'adaptateur vidéo) peuvent être conçus pour fonctionner beaucoup plus vite que sur un
bus d'extension traditionnel. Voir aussi bus.
C : Celsius.
CA : Courant alternatif.
carte d'extension : Carte supplémentaire (par exemple un adaptateur SCSI ou un NIC) qui se branche dans un connecteur d'extension sur la carte système
de l'ordinateur. Une carte d'extension ajoute des fonctions spéciales au système en fournissant une interface entre le bus d'extension et un périphérique.
carte système : La carte système contient en général la plupart des composants intégrés à votre système, comme le processeur, la RAM, des contrôleurs et
divers circuits de ROM.
carte vidéo : Circuits qui assurent les fonctions vidéo de l'ordinateur (en association avec le moniteur). Il peut s'agir d'une carte d'extension installée dans un
connecteur, ou de circuits intégrés à la carte système.
cavalier : Petit composant pour carte à circuits imprimés, disposant de deux ou plusieurs broches. Des fiches de plastique contenant un fil s'emboîtent sur les
broches. Ce fil relie les broches et ferme un circuit, offrant un moyen simple et réversible de changer le câblage de la carte.
CC : Courant continu.
CD : Disque compact. Les lecteurs de CD utilisent une technologie optique pour lire les données sur les CD.
cm : Centimètres.
CMOS : Acronyme de "Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor", semi-conducteur d'oxyde métallique supplémentaire.
code sonore : Message de diagnostic généré par le système, sous la forme d'une série de signaux sonores émis par le haut-parleur. Par exemple, un bip suivi
d'un second puis d'une rafale de trois bips, correspond au code 1-1-3.
COMn : Nom de périphérique associé aux ports série du système.
combinaison de touches : Commande exécutée lorsque l'utilisateur appuie sur plusieurs touches en même temps (par exemple ).
composant : Dans le contexte de l'interface DMI, un composant est un élément compatible DMI, comme un système d'exploitation, un ordinateur, une carte
d'extension ou un périphérique. Chaque composant est constitué de groupes et d'attributs, définis comme caractéristiques de ce composant.connecteur d'extension : Connecteur situé sur la carte système ou la carte de montage, auquel se branche une carte d'extension.
contrôleur : Circuit qui contrôle le transfert des données entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire ou entre le microprocesseur et les périphériques.
coprocesseur : Circuit qui libère le processeur principal de certaines tâches de traitement. Par exemple, un coprocesseur mathématique se charge des
opérations de calcul.
CPU : Acronyme de "Central Processing Unit", unité centrale de traitement. Voir processeur.
DDR : Acronyme de "Double Data Rate", double débit de données. Technologie des barrettes de mémoire permettant de doubler le débit.
DEL : Diode luminescente. Composant électronique qui s'allume lorsqu'il est traversé par un courant.
DHCP : Acronyme de "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol". Méthode permettant d'affecter automatiquement une adresse IP à un système client.
diagnostics : Série de nombreux tests pour le système.
DIMM : Acronyme de "Dual In-Line Memory Module", barrette de mémoire à double rangée de connexions. Voir aussi barrette de mémoire.
DIN : Acronyme de "Deutsche Industrie-Norm", norme de l'industrie allemande.
disquette d'amorçage : Disquette utilisée pour démarrer le système si celui-ci ne peut pas être initialisé à partir du disque dur.
disquette système : Voir disquette d'amorçage.
DMA : Acronyme de "Direct Memory Access", accès direct à la mémoire. Un canal DMA permet le transfert direct de certains types de données entre la RAM et
un périphérique, sans passer par le processeur.
DMI : Acronyme de "Desktop Management Interface", interface de gestion de bureau. L'interface DMI permet de gérer les logiciels et matériels du système en
recueillant des informations sur ses composants, comme le système d'exploitation, la mémoire, les périphériques, les cartes d'extension et le numéro
d'inventaire.
DNS : Acronyme de "Domain Name System", système de noms de domaines. Méthode de conversion des noms de domaines Internet (par exemple
www.dell.com) en adresses IP (comme 143.166.83.200).
DRAM : Acronyme de "Dynamic Random-Access Memory", mémoire vive dynamique. Normalement, la mémoire vive d'un système est composée entièrement de
puces DRAM.
DVD : Acronyme de "Digital Versatile Disc", disque numérique polyvalent.
E/S : Entrée/sortie. Un clavier est un périphérique d'entrée et une imprimante est un périphérique de sortie. En général, l'activité d'E/S peut être différenciée
de l'activité de calcul.
ECC : Acronyme de "Error Checking and Correction", vérification et correction d'erreur.
EEPROM : Acronyme de "Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory", mémoire morte reprogrammable électroniquement.
EMC : Acronyme de "Electromagnetic Compatibility", compatibilité électromagnétique.
EMI : Acronyme de "ElectroMagnetic Interference", interférence électromagnétique.
ERA : Acronyme de "Embedded Remote Access", accès distant intégré. L'ERA permet de gérer à distance ("hors-bande") le serveur de votre réseau à l'aide
d'une carte contrôleur d'accès à distance.
ESD : Acronyme de "Electrostratic Discharge", décharge électrostatique.
ESM : Acronyme de "Embedded Server Management", gestion de serveur intégrée.
étiquette de service : Code à barres qui se trouve sur le système et permet de l'identifier lorsque vous appelez le support technique de Dell.
F : Fahrenheit.
FAT : Acronyme de "File allocation table", table d'allocation des fichiers. Structure du système de fichiers utilisée par MS-DOS pour organiser et suivre le
stockage des fichiers. Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® permet d'utiliser une structure de système de fichiers FAT.
fichier read-only : Fichier en lecture seule, qui ne peut être ni modifié, ni effacé.
formater : Préparer un lecteur de disque dur ou une disquette à stocker des fichiers. Un formatage inconditionnel efface toutes les données stockées sur le
disque.
ft : Foot (pied).
FTP : Acronyme de "File Transfert Protocol", protocole de transfert de fichiers.
g : Gramme(s).
G : Gravité.
Gb : Gigabit, 1024 mégabits ou 1 073 741 824 bits.
Go : Giga-octet, 1024 Mo ou 1 073 741 824 octets. La mesure est souvent arrondie à 1 000 000 000 octets lorsqu'elle fait référence à la capacité d'un disque
dur.
groupe : Dans le contexte de l'interface DMI, un groupe est une structure de données qui définit les informations courantes, ou attributs, d'un composant
gérable.
guarding : Type de mise en redondance des données qui utilise un groupe de disques physiques pour stocker les données, et un disque supplémentaire pour stocker les informations de parité. Voir aussi mise en miroir, striping et RAID.
h : Hexadécimal. Système de numération en base 16, souvent utilisé en programmation pour identifier les adresses mémoire de RAM et d'E/S du système pour
les périphériques. Dans le texte, les chiffres hexadécimaux sont souvent suivis d'un h.
Hz : Hertz.
ID : Identification.
IDE : Acronyme de "Integrated Drive Electronics". Interface standard entre la carte système et les périphériques de stockage.
informations de configuration du système : Données stockées en mémoire, qui informent un système sur la manière dont le matériel est installé et dont le
système doit être configuré pour fonctionner.
IP : Acronyme de "Internet Protocol", protocole Internet.
IPX : Acronyme de "Internet package exchange".
IRQ : Interrupt ReQuest (demande d'interruption). Signal indiquant que des données vont être envoyées ou reçues par un périphérique, et envoyé au
processeur par une ligne d'IRQ. Chaque liaison avec un périphérique doit avoir un numéro d'IRQ. Deux périphériques peuvent avoir la même IRQ, mais vous ne
pouvez pas les utiliser simultanément.
K : Kilo, 1000.
Kb : Kilobit, 1024 bits.
Kbps : Kilobits par seconde.
kg : Kilogramme, 1000 grammes.
kHz : Kilohertz.
KMM : Acronyme de "Keyboard/Monitor/Mouse", ensemble clavier/moniteur/souris.
Ko : Kilo-octet, 1024 octets.
Ko/s : Kilo-octets par seconde.
KVM : Acronyme de "Keyboard/Video/Mouse", ensemble clavier/vidéo/souris. Le terme KVM désigne un commutateur qui permet de sélectionner le système
correspondant à la sortie vidéo affichée et auquel s'applique l'utilisation du clavier et de la souris.
lame : Module équipé d'un processeur, de mémoire et d'un disque dur. Ces modules sont montés dans un châssis équipé de blocs d'alimentation et de
ventilateurs.
LAN : Réseau local. Un LAN se limite normalement à un bâtiment ou à un groupe de bâtiments proches, où tout l'équipement est relié par des fils réservés au
réseau LAN.
lb : Livres (poids).
LCD : Écran à cristaux liquides.
Linux : Système d'exploitation similaire à UNIX®
et pouvant être utilisé sur une grande diversité de plates-formes matérielles. Linux est un logiciel libre et
gratuit. Certaines distributions payantes plus complètes, fournies avec un support technique et des formations, sont proposées par des distributeurs tels que
Red Hat
® Software.
LVD : Acronyme de "Low Voltage Differential", différentiel à basse tension.
m : Mètre(s).
mA : Milliampère(s).
mAh : Milliampère à l'heure.
Mb : Mégabit, soit 1 048 576 bits.
Mbps : Mégabits par seconde.
MBR : Acronyme de "Master Boot Record", enregistrement d'amorçage principal.
mémoire : Zone de stockage des données de base du système. Un ordinateur peut disposer de différentes sortes de mémoire, intégrée (RAM et ROM) ou
ajoutée sous forme de barrettes DIMM.
mémoire cache : Zone de mémoire rapide contenant une copie des données ou des instructions pour les récupérer plus vite. Quand un programme demande
des données qui se trouvent dans la mémoire cache, l'utilitaire de mise en mémoire cache du disque peut extraire les données plus vite de la RAM que du
disque même.
mémoire cache interne du processeur : Mémoire cache d'instructions et de données intégrée au processeur.
mémoire conventionnelle : Les premiers 640 Ko de la RAM. La mémoire conventionnelle est présente dans tous les systèmes. Sauf s'ils ont été conçus de
façon particulière, les programmes MS-DOS® sont limités à cette mémoire de base.
mémoire flash : Type d'EEPROM pouvant être reprogrammée en place dans le système, à partir d'un utilitaire sur disquette. La plupart des EEPROM ne
peuvent être reprogrammées qu'avec un équipement spécial.
mémoire système : Voir RAM.
mémoire vidéo : La plupart des cartes vidéo VGA et SVGA contiennent de la mémoire, différente de la RAM du système. La mémoire vidéo installée affecte
surtout le nombre de couleurs affichables (ce qui dépend aussi du pilote vidéo et du moniteur).MHz : Mégahertz.
mise en miroir : Type de mise en redondance de données qui utilise un ensemble de disques physiques pour stocker les données et un ou plusieurs
ensembles de disques supplémentaires pour stocker des copies de ces données. La mise en miroir est généralement implémentée au moyen d'un logiciel. Voir
aussi guarding, mise en miroir intégrée, striping et RAID.
mise en miroir intégrée : Mise en miroir physique de deux disques. Cette fonction intégrée est assurée par le matériel du système. Voir aussi mise en
miroir.
mm : Millimètre.
Mo : Méga-octet, soit 1 048 576 octets. La mesure est souvent arrondie à 1 000 000 octets lorsqu'elle fait référence à la capacité d'un disque dur.
Mo/s : Méga-octets par seconde.
mode graphique : Mode vidéo qui peut être défini par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z.
mode protégé : Mode d'exploitation qui permet aux systèmes d'exploitation de mettre en uvre les éléments et fonctions suivants :
l Espace d'adresse mémoire de 16 Mo à 4 Go
l Traitement multitâche
l De la mémoire virtuelle, une méthode pour augmenter la mémoire adressable en utilisant le lecteur de disque dur
Les systèmes d'exploitation Windows 2000 et UNIX 32 bits s'exécutent en mode protégé. En revanche, cela n'est pas possible pour MS-DOS.
ms : Milliseconde.
MS-DOS® : Microsoft Disk Operating System.
NAS : Acronyme de "Network Attached Storage", stockage réseau. Le NAS est l'un des concepts utilisés pour l'implémentation du stockage partagé sur un
réseau. Les systèmes NAS ont leurs propres systèmes d'exploitation, matériel intégré, et leurs propres logiciels optimisés pour répondre à des besoins
spécifiques en termes de stockage.
NIC : Acronyme de "Network Interface Controller". Carte réseau intégrée ou installée sous forme de carte d'extension, pour relier le système à un réseau.
NMI : Acronyme de "NonMaskable Interrupt", interruption non masquable. Un matériel envoie une NMI pour signaler au processeur des erreurs matérielles.
ns : Nanoseconde.
NTFS : Option du système de fichiers NT dans le système d'exploitation Windows 2000.
numéro d'inventaire : Code individuel attribué à un système, normalement par un administrateur, à des fins de sécurité ou de suivi.
NVRAM : Mémoire vive rémanente. Mémoire qui ne perd pas son contenu lorsque le système est mis hors tension. La NVRAM est utilisée pour conserver la
date, l'heure et la configuration du système.
panneau de commande : Pièce du système sur laquelle se trouvent les voyants et les contrôles (bouton d'alimentation, voyant d'alimentation, etc.).
parité : Informations redondantes associées à un bloc de données.
partition : Vous pouvez partager un disque dur en plusieurs sections physiques appelées partitions, avec la commande fdisk. Chaque partition peut contenir
plusieurs disques logiques. Après un partitionnement, vous devez formater chaque disque logique avec la commande format.
PCI : Acronyme de "Peripheral Component Interconnect", interconnexion de composants périphériques. Norme pour l'implémentation des bus locaux.
PDU : Acronyme de "Power Distribution Unit", unité de distribution électrique. Source d'alimentation dotée de plusieurs prises de courant qui fournit
l'alimentation électrique aux serveurs et aux systèmes de stockage d'un rack.
périphérique : Matériel interne ou externe, connecté à un système, comme une imprimante, un lecteur de disquette ou un clavier.
PGA : Acronyme de "Pin Grid Array", matrice de broches. Type de support permettant le retrait de la puce du processeur.
pile de sauvegarde : Pile qui conserve dans une région spécifique de la mémoire les informations sur la configuration du système, la date et l'heure, lorsque
vous éteignez le système.
pilote de périphérique : Programme qui permet au système d'exploitation ou à un autre programme de communiquer correctement avec un périphérique ou
un matériel donné. Certains pilotes de périphériques, comme les pilotes réseau, doivent être chargés par le fichier config.sys ou comme programmes résidant
en mémoire (en général par le fichier autoexec.bat). D'autres, comme le pilote vidéo, se chargent lorsque vous démarrez le programme pour lequel ils sont
conçus.
pilote vidéo : Programme qui permet aux applications exécutées en mode graphique et aux systèmes d'exploitation d'afficher les données avec la résolution
et le nombre de couleurs voulus. Le pilote vidéo doit correspondre à la carte vidéo installée.
pixel : Point sur un écran vidéo. Les pixels sont disposés en lignes et en colonnes afin de créer une image. Une résolution vidéo, par exemple 640 x 480,
indique le nombre de pixels en largeur et en hauteur.
port en amont : Port sur un commutateur ou un concentrateur réseau, qui sert à le relier à un autre commutateur ou concentrateur, sans utiliser de câble
croisé.
port série : Port d'E/S, utilisé le plus souvent pour connecter un modem au système. Normalement, vous pouvez identifier un port série sur le système grâce à
son connecteur à 9 broches.
POST : Acronyme de "Power-On Self-Test", auto-test de démarrage. Au démarrage du système, ce programme teste différents composants (RAM, disques
durs, etc.) avant le chargement du système d'exploitation.
processeur : Circuit de calcul principal du système, qui contrôle l'interprétation et l'exécution des fonctions mathématiques et logiques. Un logiciel écrit pour un
processeur doit souvent être révisé pour fonctionner sur un autre processeur. CPU est un synonyme de processeur.programme de configuration du système : Programme basé sur le BIOS et permettant de configurer le matériel du système et de personnaliser son
fonctionnement, en paramétrant des fonctions telles que la protection par mot de passe et la gestion d'énergie. Le programme de configuration du système
étant stocké dans la mémoire vive rémanente, tous les paramètres définis demeurent inchangés tant qu'ils ne sont pas modifiés manuellement.
PS/2 : Personal System/2.
PXE : Acronyme de "Preboot eXecution Environment", environnement d'exécution avant démarrage. La fonction PXE permet de démarrer un système (sans
disque dur ni disquette amorçable) à partir d'une unité réseau.
RAC : Acronyme de "Remote Access Controller", contrôleur d'accès à distance.
RAID : Acronyme de "Redundant Array of Independent Disks", matrice redondante de disques indépendants. Technologie permettant la mise en redondance
des données. Les types RAID les plus fréquents sont les RAID 0, 1, 5, 10 et 50. Voir aussi guarding, mise en miroir et striping.
RAM : Acronyme de "Random-Access Memory", mémoire vive. Zone principale de stockage temporaire du système pour les instructions d'un programme et les
données. Toutes les informations stockées dans la RAM sont perdues lorsque vous éteignez le système.
RAS : Acronyme de "Remote Access Service", service d'accès à distance. Sous Microsoft Windows, ce service permet d'accéder à un réseau distant à l'aide d'un
modem.
readme : Fichier texte fourni avec un logiciel ou un matériel, et qui contient des informations complétant ou mettant à jour la documentation.
répertoire : Les répertoires permettent de conserver des fichiers apparentés sur un disque en les organisant hiérarchiquement dans une structure en
"arborescence inversée". Chaque disque possède un répertoire "racine". Les répertoires supplémentaires qui partent du répertoire racine sont appelés sousrépertoires. Ces derniers peuvent contenir d'autres répertoires, formant une sous-arborescence.
résolution : Indique le nombre de pixels en largeur et en hauteur, par exemple 640 x 480. Pour afficher une application dans une résolution vidéo donnée,
vous devez installer les pilotes vidéo appropriés. En outre, la résolution voulue doit être prise en charge par le moniteur.
ROM : Acronyme de "Read-Only Memory", mémoire morte. La ROM contient les programmes essentiels au fonctionnement du système. Ces informations sont
conservées lorsque le système est mis hors tension. Le programme qui lance la procédure d'amorçage et l'auto-test de démarrage de l'ordinateur sont des
exemples de code résidant dans la ROM.
ROMB : Acronyme de "RAID on Motherboard", fonction RAID incluse sur la carte mère.
routine d'amorçage : Programme qui initialise la mémoire et les périphériques matériels, puis charge le système d'exploitation. À moins que le système
d'exploitation ne réponde pas, vous pouvez redémarrer le système (faire un démarrage à chaud) en appuyant sur